cy ae aah tae a : _ ata it a ot | BRA ies ee is } Re TN) : ‘5 aes Thee bys 4 tk ne : ; - o Au Ae oe ey ip A ate i a is ae AG ses Han Ba i Weis ih sires ysthek atta te i te ey iM Ee ae a . ae on ah ) aie ern Benes oF . oo a. S a TAN RN Gi : ir 1 lal i 9, Resolved by the Senate (the House of Representatives concurring), That there be printed of the report of the Smithsonian Institution and the National Museum for the year ending June 30, 1893, in two octavo volumes, 10,000 copies, of which 1,600 copies shall be for the use of the Senate, 2,000 copies for the use of the House of Representatives, 5,000 copies for the use of the Smithsonian Institution, and 2,000 copies for the use of the National Museum. II Se Jet cal me el 8 ite NATIONAL MUSE THE SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION, pea A ed IN) IN Gd CU INeaw sO] £8032 REPORT OF THE U. S. NATIONAL MUSEUM FOR THE YEAR ENDING JUNE 30, 1893. SUB PE CLS. I. Report of the Assistant Secretary of the Smithsonian Institution, in charge of the National Museum, with Appendices. Il. Papers describing and illustrating collections in the U.S. National Museum. Wa pi vi stare a. _yeiglaalea _—,. VT daar oot ein Teled ieee he 8 Niet! |e < \ pil . a rahe Coe cnet jen, _ oy w ‘et v i = UNITED STATES NATIONAL MUSEUM, UNDER DIRECTION OF THE SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION, Washington, December 1, 1893. Str: | have the honor to submit herewith a report upon the present condition of the U.S. National Museum, and upon the work accom- plished in its various departments during the fiscal year ending June 30, 1893. Very respectfully, G. BROWN GOODE, Assistant Secretary, in charge of U.S. National Museum. Mr. S. P. LANGLEY, Secretary, Smithsonian Institution. Page. SOS S eS closes See BB BSS SoS OES UdS 5 COGG BCE ASac SEEA RETO cn DichrOSeeee rc V ETE SpEE: PO Hoe See AUNTS VT ICD IVA Tee pyre eyo an ei te Sraceie eto esac VII (COIN AISINGIS es ee ee ee Soctod asee re Semen iecds deeaaeeoe 1X MISteON sLuLUS TRATIONS sec occ By Eto ee eA ere coe rey a mam ains we Ser aee XI RAR ol REPORT OF THE ASSISTANT SECRETARY IN CHARGE OF THE NATIONAL MUSEUM. I.—GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS. AV— The development. of the Museum..--..-------. -- --22-2-- 2 ----- -------=-- 3 mhemMevelopmentiof the Museum idea. 22. s-ser see eee eee ae 6 TING FOOSEMIOMITMES ROE HENS, HMNUOK <= 6 Reese soe Sa50 Se sac cos cess cseesecs a 1B ORGAO BING! COW )se shes Joo ees see ceo see eSa econ esas co2e pocSsoSsnscse 11 The relation of the Museum to the Smithsonian Institution...--....- 3 Cher worlsomune Museum inepublicrediweationy sees seesereae ese ee 18 II._RECENT ADVANCES IN MUSEUM METHOD. WHOSE, CAKOS- coves cscs 5506 Secodess on Hane Hose esoacesoonaTce sauese cseneesaas 23 OSM Onno PINES. 255 Sossee cos ocas cesses oe Sces Sass 0Sas 5500655400 SHaSa5E5e oe TING JORADARMOM, Ot UN ENS soo5 onb6 o656 caeeoe Saco sacs AoSesssho0 dasegscansecs6q 35 Advances in general installation.........-.-..---.----- Bieie teieinelereyo aero ciiaisers 40 WTasiGlemany? tim HoG) MGR OUI <6 coq csSequc5n6o0 ce6ense doco ccoessooodas sauocsagase 41 TRG MESS OUE NMOS) Ore WING) INuhaneha isi e a Seas Seo Seeo cea on oo0oG> Foe See aSeseo 5 52 IS aaiRoMNENEMN TAM MAOWH NS) Sooke Sa5aoo seo 4 uccs coco seboEs coaas6 oSdogs Seaq onaces a= 56 Concernimoyeolectionspandsspecimens seme eee=eloec eles ar eee eae aa 56 III. SPECIAL TOPICS OF THE YEAR. MreunusialicharacteL ot tneryear’sswiOl Ke. e926 == 12-14 oe eine einineieie re sii 59 Changes in the form of the Annual Report. ..-. -- CO eee Cera es 59 AMA INES stating, SUENIDb ton oe ceed BOM eS Capes Ota SEE ESE Pe eae a ames me aeom sche 60 AERO P EU ALONS HORE SOO Ose amie) iae aiclaic ol e\atm os cio o)a1a 21m smta laste isles icbe tae te == 61 Imecreasemneunercollecniouseeees-aecma eerie ae Seni oe eke sei 61 CutiglOGMe CWiitees- 6 ssh4scsnce ganese papsee dane ce Seo eooune eaesod Cana oncgese 68 Cooperation of the Executive Departments of the Government.-...---.------- 68 Sinecinll GMlOnnnONI seco caudad ssonds dasusuueueEs eseeeeeace bead souE daparo ooce 72 Development and arrangement of the exhibition series .....-..---.---------- 73 LAOS eeS BARS BeBe eae eae DEO ESS Uber no 5 SiS ts Se: ere rey eee eee ee Aer 75 ILM DHA don onees chad BOOB SG CUObISESe SSE6 Ba0 585 GOSS ea Ee Eon epeeOC ce pr ESO Ooo ES 75 Contmibubions of the year to scientific literature... --------.. <=. ------------ 75 RiuMircanionsohetnemMiNsemmsse ease see cee ser acs sit = Sao = Seals asl= ei mini 76 IDO RWSCHMGNG S558 555554 scone con qoaea a4 BoeE bose se Ue SCeS Agee eybocoeesac 78 INGie mie! lets Kore TYRONE oo coscosane caceos Couey HoouoU Cbboee Soscoe aSsur 80 The use of the Government scientific collections by students..-...----.------ 81 WOISTROIS p Sac50 ooacds samece Maro ds enon COO Sets EU Soe ae Se OSE sao E a ose 82 x CONTENTS. Page. Questions of correspondents and requests for identification. .----..-........-. &3 Meetings of associations in Washington during the year --....---..-....-- ape 84. INGeCrOlO tym ase ee cen ca ae cei ao Sm aie cle ele ee ele ml 85 Columbian Historical Exposition in Madrid ~~ <2. 2222 92 eee 86 The Worlds"Columbian Hx position -—-..< 2. 2s sac == oie 108 IV.—REVIEW OF THE WORK OF THE SCIENTIFIC DEPARTMENTS, INCLUDING THEIR PARTICIPATION IN THE WORLD'S COLUMBIAN EXPOSITION. Department of artsyamd) w1Gustries ——< ~~ ee ata ee 115 “Dre historical collections) ---...-.--=- -----2-- --.seee == ee 120 Mhejeraphieiarts collechione == - a2 =e wie oat tell 122 The materia medica collection... ---- 2222 saan e< sea a a el ete 125 Mepartmentof ethnology .-- -— .= = <2. ~ ee las e 125 Wepartment of prehistoric anthropology .-.--.- --.--->- ---)-=s=e eee eee at 132 ‘he collection of oriental antiquities: 22255252. 225s) == eee eee 135 The collection of relicious ceremonial objectss..-=> s244 2-4-5 ee eee 136 The collection of American aboriginal pottery ..-...2: 2--- --cssee=-eee eee ee 138 Department of— Mammals: ..22.< cesses cee st osc ee see ee ee cece sc eee eee 139 Binds << <-.~. 220. emecsies ccige ciseioe s ems Ce chcieiets ahs Ss a nO ee ee 144 Birds’ ei 0S: 2226 .s222e55 cccnasscee tee eb ee ao 40 ee eee 148 Keptiles and batrachians..222) 2--sseeosee-l ee =n eee ee A ee 149 'USHOS aii ca a seiciesare < ero ok eiee Sree wie ein SES ESE eee een = eee eae 153 Vertebrate. fossils .:is..\.s2 esl b es. SSask: See Ne 6 ee ee eee 155 MOolluskS: .20. 1.2 esis ose eeidc nude ons Otek Dace beh Jee ee eee eee eee 156 InseGts! 22552 2ccjc065,2 5 2\o tse eee ease soe me eee See eee ee 159 Marine invertebrates. < <<... 2.22. tas. cose eee ceeds Se cee oe Dee eee OL Comparative anatOMy: — ee ose le ol eee eee ee eee 169 Invertebrate fossils— Paleozoic... 2... <2 $232 assem ecsine eG ceibe esse oe Sele eee ee eee 173 MeSOZOIG =... 2. 2.224 Daetioeee eee S265 calcio So ons see oss See 174 Recent:planits -... ..... 25 csnasc sess ect o2 =n eee see ee eee ee MOSSIL PL AMOS = 2.2) =o ey Sars eee eee lara eS ase =e en 176 MInGRal ssa. wc cc c:o 5: occ ee OP Se areca ee epee ore re sae one 178 (CGH byiN Pe coting sao CobU dS ora pSHHiocscaEade sSec sabes osee Sasa soa casos: = 180 V.—ADMINISTRATION. Review of the work of the administrative bureaus.................----.----- 187 Office of therchief (clerk 2222 352 cosa see oe nee = a oe eae ee ee eee 187 GOTLES PON CEN COAT TEP OL ES erase eee eee ete eae ae ae a 187 Jaca pe okey ME HAAhClIS HONKING — oe poooe cook Oacons soe oe soseoco de ssoersec nsec. 189 Buildings and labors police and public comtovte=s--2--- 222 --- => - = eee 191 Work of phe Musemmi prep arsine seer eerie eee a eee alata APPENDICES. I.—The scientific and administrative staff.............-......------------ 193 II.—Finance, property, supplies, and accounts. :.-.-.-.-.....----..----.---- 194 I1I.—Statement of the distribution of specimens during the year ending June 1 0 koe ere PE RS ry roe eo Ooe Band dos Oe Ssog Sse Se 197 IV.—Buildings and labor—police and public comfort .-...----.------------ 204 V.—Specimens sent to the Museum for examination and report....---.---- 205 VI.—List of accessions to the U. S. National Museum during the year end- ine June 30; 1S9R Is. Se Se Oe ae ee a oe ete eee 219 VII.—Bibliography of the U. S. National Museum for the year ending June 30, 1893 o.oo. 2ad ce tele lee ee 285 CONTENTS. XI Page. Walle ——Wechurestand meetings lof SOCICtICS=)..\..5 -2--++ 22206 cesses coses aces 314 IX.—Documents relating to the World’s Columbian Beep esthien SOA Bone 316 X.—Documents in relation to the Columbian Historical Exposition in NV OL SOD Bers eotelesie lial s 2 clove) tapainievae is iciss) \seie. cis ei ci Sic eis mele eleicie ects eioe 324 ACR LIE PAPERS DESCRIBING AND ILLUSTRATING COLLECTIONS IN THE U. S. NATIONAL MUSEUM. 1. The poisonous snakes of North America. By Leonhard Stejneger....--.. 337 2. Chinese games with dice and dominoes. By Stewart Culin...........__. 489 3. The onyx marbles: Their origin, composition, and uses, both ancient and TAOCERMD, — lek; CCoweer le; WigmAe 6-5 sas5 ceca ceus Gootoa beau Gods odes Sece 539 4. The cowbirds. By Charles Bendire, Major, U. S. Army (Retired)....-.... 587 5. Primitive American armor. By Walter Tench: Bee Slencia arses cies sisters) Sas 625 6. The weapons and wings of birds. By Frederic A. Lucas-.......-...--..-- 653 7. Notes on the ethnology of Tibet, based on the collections in the United States National Museum. By William Woodville Rockhill.......-.---- 665 8. ‘Two Persepolitan casts in the U. 8S. National Museum. By Cyrus Adler -. 749 9. Museum collections to illustrate religious history and ceremonials. By WymusPNGN Gree Sesaeas ar = Haets avec se ss StS aces Soe ne cee eee awa eee 755 10. If public libraries, why not public museums? By Edward S. Morse.. --.- 769 ai 7 ; AY a : : =—28 ? ; : 7 a lg ee igh tt a ars : ay ee aa Ct a ep. . Gita as v1 S Lites wo aiiene os) o= ; > wee 4 Speen a Oe nn i) ng SS i a i be ware ef — 1 -_ Herp, - Pa) ; at ae, Ab ail a —-, , . e 7 i ae og ; ey . foe Pir a alr _ , ’ ‘ 7 _ > Ole @e . Peoria = 5 ; ' ' , 7 = * : ; : 2 i ee hip ieee Geeee” a> an yA a 4 : 7 og . _ ae = » re i : an a ’ } 7 ss o& i 2 oe 7 : , 1 ‘tse i Tm, o al oe ae + ‘a ger Rie ” ae por LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS, PLATES. REPORT OF ASSISTANT SECRETARY. Facing page BLM OTN G CLP ay Wy OTS ye Stet ravaie le encvanc rae Sv OARS SETS RE Sie SE RCTS SC eS SEE Been oe eee ee ne 23 Fig. 1. Storage drawer. 2. Exhibition drawer with glass front. 2°and 3. Standard forms of cases used in the National Museum ..................-----.--------- 24 a1 oP * Fig. 1. Pier case. 2. Alcove case. 3. Table case (upright). 3a. Table case (upright), half size. 4. Table case (sloping). 4a. Table case (sloping), half size. 5. Table case (flat). 6. Table case (Gray pattern), storage base. 7. Table case (Gray pattern), glazed base. 8. Kensington case (Gray pattern). 9. Unit table. 9a. Unit table (half size). 9b. Unit table (quarter size). 10. Base tables. 10a. Base tables (dwarf size). 11. Floor screen. lla. Arch sereen. 12. Table screen. 3. Slide-screen case. 13a. Slide-screen case (half size). 14. Door-screen case. 15. Case-top screen. 16. Half column (for wing frames). 17. Glass screen (sloping). 18. Glass screen (upright). 19. Standard bookcase. Standard shelf stack. Standard pigeonhole stack. Standard card-catalogue drawer. Unit drawers. . Unit boxes (glazed), standard. 25. Wing frames (standard). t=) toOnm w bw w bo rs . Case for paleontological specimens, with suspended door.................--.0.---:0e-+0----- 24 . Case of plate glass, with moldings reduced to minimum of possibility............-....-..--- 24 PPDLACE GUS UD POLES, ms nise, iron cele s alee ial ee ee eee ee eee aAoRioure of Masaiiwarrior, Upper Ome Ors qa acetone fs ee et Sree ene 42; sapanese man.and woman of the laboringiclass--2-- --~--------.s ==) - eels oe See ee 43. Figure of Japanese man of the laboring class, undraped....-.-.-....-------.--------=-------- 44. Kan-ku-wash-te-win (The Good Road Woman), Yankton Sioux .......--.-...-----.---.------ 45. Che-ta-wau-kou-va-ma-ni (The Hawk That Hunts Walking), Medawakanton Sioux ..-.-..--. AG Choctaw squaw: (Rosa White Chun den) <1 sccer =~ = nis amiscie alone aie le ae ee ATA USAMOANNY OWOD yo 5 as oeme ee eens ya eel See ee eee eee AB DV eke WArOLesecceasssacccis sicseee a eaenans eneaiios somnieee= + oases AQUA O MEN TAT TI LOA LECT OSL ULI Cee eee ate ee la mt lll ea Bis dskaninl wields) JM N ses pass po ooemem ae ONE Sone CORUC EC US OdU UEC arR oOo MSODO ba rSso Se spscssoeseecossas : bile SZUDL PLEA MAK ONS aerate acrtaere = ais Sate alae cen te Si oe Sle tere er 52-sIndian'woment dressings bid 69). ars = 55 es sere = ret epee eee ee ai ee a 53. A bushman i> the act of engraving figures with a stone hammer on a diorite rock....-....-- 54, Matabele warriorsan thei eneamp mien tessa. er atte =iele eter ete estte ae alae lea ela 55. Zulvs of New Shesheke, on the Central Zambesi, at supper..----.---------.----------------- 56. Ground plan of the United States Government Building at the World’s Columbian Exposi- USM 0}! 5 ee ee Hones Semin Anetra ame ah 6 ER CoCo TO aU bO sma 5a AAR Soe 57. Relief map, showing the restoration of the ice sheet of the glacial epoch ...-...-.------.---- Dey Wetalls of fixtures) Of StOLAre CASES ees cletete cieinie ne tole = elalete sete atelele nieetelelel ia feet Fig. 1. Combined bolt and lock. 2. Corner section of storage case, showing method of dust-proofting, ete. 3. Stub and plate. 4. Wedge bolt for binding doors. 59. Details of installation methods in the U. S. National Museum......--.---------------------- Fig. 5, Showi.g arrangement of specimens on sloping shelves. 6. Device for storing microscopical slides. 7. Rectangular jar. 8. Mounting fish in rectangular jar. 9. Reference table in exhibition hall. THE POISONOUS SNAKES OF NORTH AMERICA. By LEONHARD STEJNEGER. 1, Harlequin snake, laps: fulvtis: ac. 2ocic. onset Cosme ele mic ace = ea aan eee rete ee ee on 2: Sonoran coral snake, Hlaps ewrywanthuss os sa. as teak oe oe ol ee See eae eee eee 3: ‘Copperhead, -Agkistrodon, contortrig:s } 2-222 sa oon aa een eee Eee eee 636 SB evonoiieiatand wodarmor (back View) .2cn<<-c--6=-eo- ees > see ee 636 Oellingithelmets'‘and slatiarmor: - =<... =: -s2-sc= ae eesee set ee (ee ee eee nee ee 636 TOMEDin pit SIA OTOAVC sc: --0 s «co 655-222 san umes one See eee as Sea 638 ieeerenistoric Aleutian Tod. ArMOPrs<:- = - == 2d. sso aee ee seen oe ia ee ee ee 638 Lo werehistoric-Aveubian Tod; aLMOr:~.< == <5... an eee nese nee ee aan ce a tae eee ee 22 6388 ASMA TPO APM OF -- sre See ee nee ese HO hieceiotsurtace ot epidermis tinmng: the pit’ 2- <2. - 2222 cscs sc cc caeenscereceeec eee ne esses Pimskullotenattlesnake trom: aDOve = <-/-/<\-iso ss cenee seen sone bocce a woneecaececcecehieces oe foams ct tome Gules alceMirO MES! Oe 21-1 seit teers eae atse ee ese ee ee rece eae eI oe eieoers Poms ol Ofehathlesnalkextho DP OlOW= ==. . css. -cssaeewaee=-eeae an. g= cece enacts eases 5 . Poison apparatus of Rattlesnake; venom gland and muscles (lateral view)..........-..----- Pelvonentadinalksectonlof Poison tan oe Ole BOLRT ONS ~ c= snc ac Seon see Seles as Sees ecieen ee eae Me lrone VeLSe SOCLIONVO Nam ropa c etal ciate oes ee (a ei Se Sachem wis orsiotsleiatcte oie oe aS etovansiel cine Mle te eeaone ooo 3 = Jad eee eee 428 66, Head-of Orotatus cerastes irom AbOV6 .<. .-22.0.22-soseee ee Sane e eee ae een ee eee 451 Si dead. of OCrotalus.cerastes from:side == <2; 542-524 ase 2 oe eee ee ee eee 451 - 68. Headiot. Crotalus lemadtus from side: >. .52-52-5------2- 25-564 sen aoe ee oe eee eee 453 SOx hend:of Crotalus Mitchelit from above <==) 22>. S63 ~ 2 oe eae oe ole ee ee eee 455 AOS seed OL. Orv otalue: Miuchelly from BidG. =< =. £25.56 cee beech one a ete eae eee ee 455 CHINESE GAMES WITH DICE AND DOMINOES. By STEWART CULIN. PAS INORG \OICG. - Sia '2 cine ot a= Dama tees eo Tee OS UN te Ace cae 8 Mee aa ee ee 492 2. ae Clit DOATUMEC RIND TE . habe ORT CONDITION AND PROGRESS OF THE U. S. NATIONAL MUSEUM DURING THE YEAR ENDING JUNE 30, 1893. G. BROWN GOODE, ASSISTANT SECRETARY OF TILE SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION, IN CHARGE OF U. S. NATIONAL MUSEUM. H. Mis. 184, pt. 2——1 1 REPORT UPON THE CONDITION AND PROGRESS OF THE U. 8S. NATIONAL MUSEUM DURING THE YEAR ENDING JUNE 80, 1893, BY G. BROWN GOODE, Assistant Secretary, Smithsonian Institution, in charge of U. S. National Museum. I.— GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS. The work of the past year in the Museum, though in many respects unlike that of previous years, has nevertheless been the direct out- growth of the activities of more than half a century, and it seems but proper, before describing current operations, to speak briefly of the origin and history of the Museum, of its aims and methods, and of its relations to other national institutions, especially the Smithsonian Tustitution, under whose control it was placed at the time of its formal organization. A.--THE DEVELOPMENT OF THE MUSEUM. The history of origin and development has been discussed in previous reports, and in a paper entitled “The Genesis of the National Museum.” * It will therefore be sufficient for our present purpose to repeat a few of the most essential facts. The idea of a national museum in the city of Washington was first suggested by the Hon. Joel R. Poinsett, of South Carolina, Secretary of War under President Van Buren, who in 1840 organized, for the purpose of establishing such a museum, a society called ** The National Institution,” afterwards “The National Institute,” which was for four years exceedingly prosperous and active. By this society the nucleus for a national museum was gathered in the Patent Office building in Washington, and public opinion was educated to consider the estab- lishment of such an institution worthy of the attention of the Govern- ment of the United States. In 1846, having failed in securing the public recognition at which it is aimed, the society became torpid, and eventually, in 1861, passed out of existence. ~The Genesis of the U. S. National Museum. Report of Smithsonian Institution, Part 11, National. Museum, 1891, pp. 273-330. 4 REPORT OF NATIONAL MUSEUM, 1893. In January, 1847, the first Board of Regents, after many weeks of consultation and deliberation over the plans for the organization of the ’ Smithsonian Institution, unanimously voted the following resolution : Resolved, That it is the ictention of the act of Congress, and in accordance with the design of Mr. Smithson, as expressed in his will, that one of the principal modes of executing the act and the trust is the accumniation of collections of specimens and objects of natural history and of elegant art, and the gradual formation of a library of valuable works pertaining to all departments of human knowledge, to the end that a copious storehouse of materials of science, literature, and art may be provided, which shall excite and diffuse the love of learning among men, and shall assist the original investigations and efforts of those who may devote themselves to the pursuit of any branch of knowledge.” From 1844 until 1858, when the so-called ‘‘ National Cabinet of Curi- osities” passed into the charge of the Smithsonian Institution, the term “ National Museum” was notin use. From that time onward, however, it was used, unofficially, to designate the collections in the Smithsonian building. After the “National Cabinet” was delivered to the Regents, appropriations were made by Congress for its maintenance. During the twenty-three years which followed, the collections were greatly increased and were made the subjects of numerous important memoirs upon the natural history and ethnology of America, The pub- lic halls, with their arrangements for the exhibition of a portion of the collection, also received a due share of attention, and a certain amount of instruction and pleasure was afforded to visitors. The appropria- tions, however, were meagre, the space limited, and the staff was so inadequate that little could be done except to keep the collections in good preservation. The broad plan upon which the operations of the National Museum are now conducted was, however, anticipated as far back as 1853, when Prof. Henry wrote: There can be little doubt that in due time ample provision will be made for a library and museum at the capital of this Union worthy of a Government whose perpetuity depends upon the virtue and intelligence of the people.t The difficulties attending the formation of such a museum were appreciated by Prof. Henry, who already in his report for 1849, had spoken with much emphasis of the caution required in assuming under the direction of the Institution the care of the national collections. Prof. Henry, in the report of the Institution for 1870,f again care- fully expressed his opinion as to the character which should be given to the National Museum. There is [he wrote] scarcely any subject connected with science and education to which more attention is given at the present day than that of collections of objects of nature and art, known under the general denomination of museums. This arises from their growing importance as aids to scientific investigation and instruction. * Report of Committee on Organization, p. 20. + Report, Smithsonian Institution, 1852, p. 245. + Report, Smithsonian Institution, 1870, p. 31. REPORT OF ASSISTANT SECRETARY. 5 In the report for 1875 allusion is made to the enormous inerease in the national collections, “requiring the utmost exertions of the limited force connected with the National Museum for its proper treat- ment.” * Although the appropriations for the Museum have of late years been more liberal, it is certain that, on account of the immense annual increase in the quantity of material received, quite as much care and caution is still needed. The Smithsonian Institution from its foundation fostered explora- tions, and its Museum was enriched by the numerous ethnological and natural history objects brought home by the explorers. Many gifts were received from private sources, and valuable objects were depos- ited in its Museum for sate-keeping. The nucleus of its collections was a small but valuable cabinet of minerals formed by the Founder, James Smithson, who was himself a chemist and mineralogist of good repute, and a Feijlow of the Royal Society of London. At the time of the establishment of the Institution several naval expeditions and surveys of the public domain were being organized by the Government, and during their progress large collections of ethnological and natural history objects were made. Important for- eign material was obtained by the Pacific Exploring Expedition, Perry’s Expedition to Japan, and the other naval expeditions, while the naturalists attached to the Pacific Railroad Survey, the Mexican Boundary Survey, and the surveys under the Army Engineer Corps, brought together great collections illustrating the natural resources and ethnology of North America. A new source of growth, subsequent to 1871, was the exploration of the waters of North America, by the U.S. Fish Commission, whose connection with the Institution has always been intimate. At the close of the Centennial Exhibition of 1876 the exhibits of the United States Government, and those of numerous foreign govern- ments and of private exhibitors, came to the National Museum. A new period now began. The storage rooms and exhibition halls of the Smithsonian building were already overflowing with the acecu- mulations of thirty years, and the small number of persons employed in caring for them were overburdened and unable to do the necessary work. The scope of the collections had become wider and a new and broader classification was found to be necessary. The growth of the country in wealth and culture was leading to the establishment of many local museums, and the educational influences flowing from these and from the Centennial Exhibition caused a demand for more efficient methods of musuem administration. The exhibition of 1876 had been indeed an event of great educational importance to the people ef the United States; and not the least of its ~ Report, Smithsonian Institution, 1873, p. 48. 6 REPORT OF NATIONAL MUSEUM, 1893. good works was the lesson it taught as to the possibilities for good in public museums. The objects which at the close of the Centennial were given to the United States for its National Museum were of large intrinsic value, and were also very important from the fact that the necessity of caring for them led to the erection of a large building for the expansion of the Museum itself. In 1881, after the new building had been completed, the Museum was entirely reorganized. In the early years Prof. S. F. Baird, then Assistant Secretary, with two or three assistants, was able to give all necessary attention to the care of the collections, and the Museum was not formally divided into departments. When the reorganization was made in 1881, under the immediate care of the present Assistant Secretary, the diversity of the collections made it necessary to establish a number of departments, each of which was placed in charge of a curator, and the staff has since been con- stantly increasing. Thisis at present composed of the officer in charge and thirty-two curators and acting curators, twenty-two of whom receive no salary from the Museum. There are also eleven administra- tive offices, each under its own chief, while in connection with the gen- eral work of administration there is in the Museum a library, a chemi- cal laboratory, a photographic laboratory, and various workshops for taxidermy, modeling, and for the preparation of skeletons tor exhibi- tion. THE DEVELOPMENT OF THE MUSEUM IDEA. The history of the National Museum may, then, be divided into three periods :— First, that from the foundation of the Smithsonian Institution to 1857, during which time specimens were collected purely and solely to serve as materials for research, no special efforts being made to exhibit them to the publie or to utilize them except as a foundation for scien- tific description and theory. Second, the period from 1857, when the institution assumed the cus- tody of the ‘‘ National Cabinet of Curiosities,” to 1876. During this period the Museum became a place of deposit tor scientific material which had already been studied, this material, so far as convenient, being exhibited to the public and, so far as practicable, made to serve an educational purpose. Third, the present period, beginning in the year 1876, within which the Museum has entered more fully into the work of gathering collections and exhibiting them on account of their value from an educational standpoint. In the first period the main object of the Museum was scientific research; in the second, the establishment became a museum of record REPORT OF ASSISTANT SECRETARY. T as well as of research, while in the third period is growing up the idea of public education. In closing this general statement it may be well to mention what seem to be the things definitely accomplished since the time of reor- ganization in 1881. The definite steps of progress may be summarized as follows: (1) An organization of the Museum staff has been effected, efficient for present purposes and capable of expansion and extension as occa- sion may require, and many capable museum-experts have been trained for work in other institutions. (2) Through the agency of this staff the materials in the Museum, the accumulations of nearly half acentury, have been examined, classi- fied, and brought under control and arranged in such manner as to insure their safely and make them available for study. (3) The collections have been increased to more than fifteen-fold their former extent. (4) A considerable beginning has been made toward the development of a well labeled and effectively installed exhibition series, available for the instruction of the public. (5) A thorough study of the organization and systems of classifica- tion in other museums throughout the world has been made, the results of which are beginning to appear in the work of the Museum staff and which will be made available for other institutions through a report upon the principles and methods of museum administration, now in prep- aration. (6) Many new methods of installation have been developed by experi- ment in the Museum, and the best and most available employed else- where have been adopted. Our new methods are being adopted in many similar establishments at home and abroad. (7) The art of taxidermy and the making of museum models have been advanced and dignified by the policy adopted in the treatment of the experts in the empley of the Museum. (8) Science has been forwarded by the publication of some thousands of papers describing the materials in the Museum, while the work of specialists in the production of these papers has greatly enhanced the value of the national collections. (9) Popular educational work of unquestionable value has been accom- plished by participation in great expositions in Philadelphia, Berlin, London, New Orleans, Cincinnati, Louisville, Madrid, and Chicago. (10) Hundreds of thousands of named specimens have been distrib- uted to other museums and to colleges and schools. THE POSSIBILITIES FOR THE FUTURE. It is evident that a National Museum worthy of the dignity of the nation must always be maintained in the city of Washington. Every country has a museum or group of museums in its capital 8 REPORT OF NATIONAL MUSEUM, 1893. city—centers of scientific and educational activity—the treasure-house of the people, filled with memorials of national triumphs in the fields of science, art, and industrial progress. * These are legitimate objects of national pride, for upon the character of its museum and libraries intelligent persons visiting any country very properly base their judgment as to the nature and degree of the civilization of the people. Washington may without question be made the seat of one of the greatest museums in the world. It may perhaps be neither practicable nor desirable to gather together in this city extensive collections of early works of art, but a representative series of such objects. will undoubtedly grow up which will tend to educate the publie taste, and promote the study of the elements of art and the history of civiliza- tion, and forward the arts of design. Attention must, however, be directed mainly toward the exposition of the geology and natural history of America and its natural resources, to the preservation of memorials of its aboriginal inhabitants, and the encouragement of the arts and industries of our own people. It is evident that the National Museum of the United States will ot necessity have features peculiar to itself developed in response to the peculiar needs of the people of this continent. It should be remem- bered that the national collections of every principal European nation are divided into several groups, each under separate administration, though often within the general control of some central authority. In France, for instance, most of the museums are under the ministry of pub- lic instruction, and in England, to a less extent, under the department of science and art. In the great capitals of Europe the public collections are scattered through various parts of the same city, in museums with distinctive names and independent in their organizations. Much of the work which should properly be done by such museums is omitted, because no one of them has seen fit to undertake it; while, on the other hand, much labor is duplicated, which is perhaps equally unfortunate, col- lections of similar scope and purpose being maintained in different parts of the same city. One of the chief objections to such division of effort is that much of the value of large collections in any department is lost by failure to concentrate them where they may be studied and com- pared side by side. In Washington the national collections are all. without exception, concentrated in one group of buildings. The Army Medical Museum now occupies a building side by side with those under the control of the Smithsonian Institution, and this proximity, in con- nection with the long-established policy of cooperation between the two organizations, renders them, for all practical purposes, united in jnterest. *Most of the older nations have museums devoted to their military achievements and triumphs, but our country has no need or desire to enter into this field of work. REPORT OF ASSISTANT SECRETARY. 7 Although the appropriations from the public treasury for the main- tenance of the National Museum are small, compared with those in several European countries, the value of objects given by private indi- viduals is proportionately larger. The actual value of such contribu- tions for ten years past, has not, it is estimated, fallen short of $20,000 a year, and in some years has been greater. Among important gifts may be mentioned such as the George Catlin Indian gallery, of inestimable value to the American historian and ethnologist; the Baird collection of North American vertebrates; the collection bequeathed in 1887 by the late Isaac Lea, of Philadelphia, con- taining, besides minerals and other objects, about 20,000 conchological specimens, and appraised by the State at $10,000; the Bendire and talph collections of American birds’ eggs given to the Smithsonian institution; the Lacoe collection of fossil plants, and the collection of the American Institute of Mining Engineers, for the transfer of which from Philadelphia to Washington a special appropriation was made by Congress. Some exceedingly valuable collections in this country and in Europe have been bequeathed to the Smithsonian Institution which have not yet come into its possession. It is estimated that within the past fifteen years individuals to the number of at least 2,000 have made gifts to the Museum to the value of $100 or more, Almost every day strangers, pleased with the work of the Museum, voluntarily send in contributions more or less important. The National Museum now contains over three millions of objects. The late Prof. Baird was once asked whether the value of the collee- tious in the National Museum was equal to the amount which had been expended inits maintenance. He replied unhesitatingly that, although it would be by no means a fair criterion of their value, he did not doubt that by a judicious and careful system of sale the entire sum could be recovered. What was said ten years ago by Prof. Baird is more than true to-day. One of the most striking features in the affairs of the Museum is the manner in which its collections are increasing. In 1893 the number of Specimens is more than fifteen times as great as ten years before. In the last fiscal year 1,200 new lots or groups of specimens were entered upon the Museum catalogues. This increase, as has been shown, is, in large degree, spontaneous, only a small amount of money having ever been available for the pur- chase of new material. As might be supposed, a considerable proportion of the objeets given are duplicates of material already on hand, and although these contri- butions can, with the utmost advantage, be used for distribution to museums and schools, they do not materially increase the value of the collections for study by specialists and for general educational purposes. The need of a larger fund for the purchase of specimens is yearly more 10 REPORT OF NATIONAL MUSEUM, 1893. manifest. Exceedingly important material is constantly offered at prices very much below what it would cost to obtain it by collecting, and in many instances, when refused, it is eagerly taken by the museums and institutions of Murope. The Museum in its present condition may be compared to a book from which pages here and there have been omitted, so that the narrative is disjointed and incomplete. In certain museums of Europe more money is expended annually in purchases then is represented by the entire appropriations for the National Museum. There are instances even in this country in which more money is expended for the improvement of private museums. The officers of the Museum have repeatedly suffered the chagrin of being compelled to refuse the offer of specimens necessary to complete the collections, and to see them pass into the hands of private insti- tutions in this country or the government museums in Europe. For the purchase of specimens for the South Kensington Museum, from 1853 to 1887, $1,586,634 was expended, or a yearly average of nearly $47,000. England is equally liberal toward her other museums. Exact statistics are not at hand, but it is quite within bounds to assert that her average expenditures for the purchase of new objects for museums in London is not less than $500,000 a year. The museums of Europe are rich with the accumulations of cen- turies. The National Museum of the United States is young, and has enormous deficiencies in every department. It needs, more than any museum in Europe, the opportunity to increase its resources through purchase. The total amount expended for the purchase of specimens for the National Museum since its foundation has not exceeded $20,000, and never in one year more than $8,500. Our treasures are the result of the activities of an enlightened Govern- ment. Through a thousand channels materials for the formation of a museum come into the possession of the Government, and out of such materials our Museum has been built. A museum formed in this man- ner, however, suffers sooner or later from immense accumulations of objects of certain kinds and from the absence of others. This is true of the National Museum. At the outset no additions were unwelcome, and the expectation that all important deficiencies would be supplied might properly be indulged in. As the years have passed, however, it has become more and more apparent that many of these deficiences can only be supplied by purchase. More striking present results might certainly have been attained by limiting the development of the Museum to special fields. We have, however, had in view the future as well as the present, and no object has been refused a place in the Museum which is likely to be needed even in the remote future, in the development of whatever grand museum plans the nation may ultimately be willing to promote. REPORT OF ASSISTANT SECRETARY. 11 }—_ORGANIZATION AND SCOPE. The National Museum is under the charge of the Smithsonian Insti- tution, and its operations are supervised by the Board of Regents of the Institution. The Secretary of the Smithsonian Institution is by law the *“ keeper of the Smithsonian Museum,” and the Assistant Secretary, by the usage of nearly fifty years, its executive head. In the act of Congress passed in 1846 to establish the Smithsonian Institution are contained the following provisions concerning the scope of oe museum to be placed under its charge: . The act above referred to provides that ‘ail objects of art and of iis eign and curious research, and all objects of natural history, _ plants, ‘and geological and mineralogical specimens belonging, or hereafter to belong, to the United States, which may be in the city of Washington,” shall be delivered to the Reg ents of the Smithson- ian Institution, and together with new specimens obtained by exchange, donation, or otherwise, Shall be so arranged and classified as best to facilitate ‘examination and study. It provides that, in proportion as suitable arrangements can be made for their reception, these objects shall be delivered to such persons aS may be authorized by the Board of Regents to receive them. >. It provides that they shall be arranged in such order and so classified as best to facilitate their examination and study. 4, It provides that they shall thus be arranged in the building to be inclosed for the Institution. 5, It authorizesthe Regents to obtain new specimens, by exchange of duplicate specimens, and by gift, and directs also that they shall be appropriately classed and arranged. The National Museum thus became the authorized place of deposit for all objects of art, archeology, ethnology, natural history, miner- alogy, geology, etc., belonging to the United States or collected by any agency whatsoever for the Government of the United States, when no longer needed for investigations in progress. The collections in the Museum are intended to exhibit the natural and industrial resources, primarily of the United States and second- arily of other parts of the world, for purposes of comparison. The activities of the Museum are exerted especially in three directions : 1. The permanent preservation of the collections already in its possession, which depends chiefly upon the vigilance of the curators and the skill of the preparators. 2. The increase of the collections which are acquired— (1) From the various Government surveys and expeditions, in accordance with law; (2) By gift from individuals, from other institutions, and from foreign governments; (3) By exchange for its duplicate specimens or publications: (4) By the efforts of officers of the Museum, who make collections 12 REPORT OF NATIONAL MUSEUM, 1893. in connection with their regular duties, or are detailed for special service of this nature; (5) By purchase when appropriations are made by Congress for that purpose. 3. The utilization of the collections, which is effected by exhibiting Fon to the public, and by encouraging investigations on the part of the officers of the Museum and other suitable persons, and facilitating the publication of the results; also by the distribution to other museums and educational institutions of duplicate specimens, which have formed the basis of scientific investigation, these being identified and labeled by the best authorities. The Museum by these means fulfills a threefold function : 1. It becomes a museum of record, in which are preserved the mate- rial foundations ef a very great number of memoirs—tihe types of numerous past investigations. This is especially the case with those materials which have served as a foundation for the numerous Govern- mental reports upon the resources of the United States. Types of investigations made outside of the Museum are also incorporated. 2, It becomes a museum of research, by reason of the policy which aims to make its contents serve as fully as possible as a stimulus to and a foundation for the studies of scientific investigators. Research is a necessary part of the work,in order that the collections may be properly identified and arranged. Its officers are selected for their ‘apacity as investigators as well as for their ability as custodians, and its treasuries are open to the use of any trustworthy student. 3. It becomes an educational museum, by reason of its policy of illus- trating specimens of every group of natural objects and, so far as it may prove practicable, such other collections as may be found useful for the instruction of the public, which are explained by displaying descriptive labels adapted to the popular mind, and by its policy of distributing its publications and its series of duplicates named, classified, and labeled. The collections of the National Museum are made up to a very large extent of the following materials: 1. The natural history and anthropological collections accumu- lated since 1850 by the efforts of the officers and correspondents of aie Smithsonian Institution. . Collections which have resulted from explorations carried on more or less directly under the auspices of the Smithsonian Insti- tution or resulting from explorations carried on by the Smithsonian Institution in connection with educational institutions or com- mercial establishments. 3. Collections which have been obtained through the courtesy of the Department of State and the cooperation of United States ministers and consuls. 4. The collection of the Wilkes exploring expedition, the Perry mien to Japan, and other naval expeditions. . Collections made by the scientific officers of Government sur- veys, such as the Pacific Railroad survey, the Mexican boundary survey, and the surveys carried on by the Engineer Corps of the REPORT OF ASSISTANT SECRETARY. 13 Wes: Army, and by officers of the Signal Corps of the U.S. Army stationed in remote regions. 6, Collections obtained by the U.S. eotorical Survey, the U.S. Fish Commission, and those resulting from the activities of the U.S. Department of Agriculture and other Departments of the U.S. Gov- ernment. 7. The remnant of the collections of the old ‘* National Institute.” 8. The collections made by the United States to illustrate the animal and mineral resources, the fisheries, and the enthnology of the native races of the country on the occasion of the Inter national Exhibition at Philadelphia in 1876; the fishery collections dis- played by the United States at the International Fisheries Exhi- bition at Berlin in 1880 and at London in 1883, and the collections obtained from various local expositions, as, for instance, the New Orleans Cotton Centennial Exposition in 1854 and in 1885, and the Cincinnati Exposition in 1887. 9. The collections given by the governments of the several foreign nations, thirty in number, which participated in the exhibition at Pliladelphia in 1876, 10, The industrial collections given by numerous manufacturing and commercial houses of Europe and America at the time of the Philadelphia exhibition and subsequently. 11. Lhe materials received, in exchange for duplicate specimens, from museums in Europe and Americé 12. Collections received as gifts, deposits, or in exchange, from individuals, numbering usually from 1,000 to 1,500 each year. In connection with the general work of administration there is in the Museum a library, a chemical laboratory, a photographic establishment, and various workshops for taxidermy, modeling, and for the prepara- tion of skeletons for exhibition. In connection with the department of art aud industry two preparators are constantly employed. The Lae itions of the Museum consist of— . The Annual Report; 2 The Proceedings of the U. S. National Museum; 3. The Bulletin of the U.S. National Museum; 4, The series of Circulars. The Proceedings and Bulletins, have in part, been reprinted in the volumes of the Smithsonian Miscellaneous Collections. Papers prepared by the Museum staff, or based upon the collections, have been printed in every scientific periodical in the United States and in many of those of Europe. THE RELATIONS OF THE MUSEUM TO THE SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION. The Smithsonian Institution, though it bears the name of a private citizen and a foreigner, has been for nearly half a century one of the principal rallying points of the scientific workers of America. It has also been intimately connected with very many of the most important scientific undertakings of the Government. Many wise and enlightened scholars have given to its service the best years of their lives, and some of the most eminent scientific nen 14 REPORT OF NATIONAL MUSEUM, 1893. our country has given birth to have passed their entire lifetime in work for its suecess. Its publications, 970 in number, which when combined make up over 200 dignified volumes, are to be found in every important library in the world, and some of them, it is safe to say, on the working table of every scientific investigator in the world. f Through these books, through the reputation of the men who have worked for it and through it, and through the good accomplished by its system of international exchange, by means of which within the past forty-two years 1,580,075 packages of books and other scientific and literary materials have been distributed to every region of the earth, it has acquired a reputation at least as far reaching as that of any other institution of learning in the world. It is therefore representative of what is deemed in other lands the chief glory of this nation, for whatever may be thought in other coun- tries of American art, of American literature, or American institutions generally, the science of America is accepted without question as equal to the best. In the scientific journals of Great Britain and other European coun- tries the reader finds most appreciative reviews of the scientific publi- cations of the Smithsonian, the Museum, the Bureau of Ethnology, the Geological Survey, the Department of Agriculture, and the Fish Com mission, and they are constantly holding up the Government of the United States as an example of what governments should do for the support of their scientific institutions. It is surely a legitimate source of pride to Americans that their work in science should be so thoroughly appreciated by other nations, and it is important that the reputation should be maintained. Nothing can be more in consonance with the spirit of our Government, nor more in accord with the injunction of Washington in his Farewell Address, admiringly quoted by Sir Lyon Playfair in his address as president of the British Association for the Advancement of Science: Promote, then, as an object of primary importance, institutions for the general diffusion of knowledge. In proportion as the structure of a government gives force to public opinion it should be enlightened. No one has been able to show why Smithson selected the United States as the seat of his foundation. He had no acquaintances in Amer- ica, nor does he appear to have had any books relating to America except two. Rhees quotes from one of these (Travels through North America, by Isaae Weld, secretary of the Royal Society), a paragraph concerning Washington, then a small town of 5,000 inhabitants, in which it is pre- dicted that “the Federal city, as soon as navigation is perfected, will increase most rapidly, and that at a future day, if the affairs of the United States go on as rapidly as they have done, it will become the grand emporium of the West and rival in magnitude and splendor the cities of the whole world.” REPORT OF ASSISTANT SECRETARY. 15 Inspired by a belief in the future greatness of the new nation, realiz- ing that while the needs of England were well met by existing organi- zations such as would not be likely to spring up for many years in a new, poor, and growing country, he founded in the new England an institution of learning, the civilizing power of which has been of ineal- culable value. Who can attempt to say what the condition of the United States would have been to-day without this bequest ? In the words of John Quincy Adams: Of all the foundations of establishments for pious or charitable uses which ever signal- ized the spirit of the age or the comprehensive beneficence of the founder, none can be named more deserving the approbation of mankind. The most important service, by far, which the Smithsonian Institu- tion has rendered to the nation has been from year to year since 1846— intangible but none the less appreciable—by its constant cooperation with the Government, public institutions, and individuals in every enterprise, scientific or educational, which needed its advice, support, or aid from its resources. There have been, however, material results of its activities, the extent of which can not fail to impress anyone who will look at them. The most important of these are the library and the Museum, which have grown up under its fostering care. The liprary has been accumulated without aid from the Treasury of the United States, It has, in fact, been the result of an extensive sys- tem of exchanges, the publications of the Institution having been used to obtain similar publications from institutions of learning in all parts of the world. In return for its own publications the Institution has received the books which form its library. This library, consisting of more than a quarter of a million volumes and parts of volumes, has for over twenty years been deposited at the Capitol as a portion of the Congressional Library and is constantly being increased. In the last fiscal year 57,982 titles were thus added to the national collection of books. Chiefly through its exchange system the Smithsonian had in 1865 accumulated about 40,000 volumes, largely publications of learned societies, containing the record of the actual progress of the world in all that pertains to the mental and physical development of the human family, and affording the means of tracing the history of at least every branch of positive science since the days of revival of letters until the present time. These books, in many instances gifts from old European libraries, and not to be obtained by purchase, formed even then one of the best collections of the kind in the world. The warning given by the fire of that year,and the fact that the greater portion of these volumes, being unbound and crowded into sufficient space, could not be readily consulted, while the expense to 16 REPORT OF NATIONAL MUSEUM, 1893. be incurred for their binding, enlarged room, and other purposes con- nected with their use, threatened to grow beyond the means of the Institution, appear to have been the moving causes which determined the Regents to accept an arrangement by which Congress was to place the Smithsonian Library with its own in the Capitol, subject to the right of the Regents to withdraw the books on paying the charges of binding, ete. Owing to the same causes (which have affected the library of Congress itself) these principal conditions, except as regards their custody in a fire-proof building, have never been fulfilled. The books are still deposited chiefly in the Capitol, but though they have now increased from 40,000 to fully'250,000 volumes and parts of volumes, and form one of the most valuable collections of the kind in existence, they not only remain unbound, but in a far more crowded and inaccessible condition than they were betore the transfer. This condition of affairs will happily soon be remedied. The purchasing power of the publications of the Institution, when offered in exchange, is far greater than that of money, and its benefit is exerted chiefly in behalf of the National Library, and also to a con- siderable extent in behalf of the National Museum. The amount expended during the past forty years from the private fund of the Institution in the publication of books for gratuitous dis- tribution has been fully half as much as the original Smithson bequest. These publications have had their influence for good in many ways, but, in addition to this, a library much more than equal in value to the outlay has, through their buying power, come into the possession of the nation. In addition to all this, a large amount of material has been acquired for the Museum by direct expenditure from the private fund of the Smithsonian Institution. The value of the collections thus acquired is estimated to be more than equal to the whole amount of the Smithson bequest. The early history of the Museum was much like that of the library. It was not until 1858 that it became the authorized depository of the scientific collections of the Government, and it was not until after 1576 that it was officially recognized as the National Museum of the United States. But for the provident forethought of the Smithsonian Institution, the United States would probably still be without a reputable nucleus for a national museum. The relations of the Museum to the system of popular lectures, for many years established in Washington, which replaces the old Smith- sonian courses, once so influential, and the assistance which it affords each year to students of science, is referred to elsewhere in this report. The Institution publishes many circulars giving information on scien- tific subjects, which are distributed gratuitously to those who write to make inquiries, and this system is being continually extended. In addi- REPORT OF ASSISTANT SECRETARY. Li tion to this, alarge correspondence is carried on with people in search of information on scientific topics. Probably 6,000 letters a year go out to people who write seeking to know the name of some object or other scientific fact. Inquiries of this kind are always answered promptly and fully; and frequently, to intelligent inquirers, books are sent which will enable them to find out such names for themselves in future. This work has not only an educational value, but often a great economic importance as well; as, for instance, when some common mineral has been mistaken for one of value, some useless plant has been wrongly identified and supposed to be of service in medicine, or some harmless animal feared as noxious. The publications of the Institution and its dependencies reach every State and almost every county in the United States. A careful study of the subject, recently made by the president of one of the scientific societies in Washington, seems to indicate that there are several States which are reached by no scientific publications, whatever, except those distributed gratuitously by the Government. Speaking of the Smithsonian Institution proper, and not of the Museum or any other trust which it administers, it may be stated that nothing could be so desirable for the Institution as that Congress should examine for itself whether, on the whole, in the execution of the trust of Smithson, more has been given to the Government than has been received; for if, in attempting to increase and diffuse knowl- edge among mankind, the machinery of the Institution’s action has been such that it has incidentally paid over to the Government the equivalent of much more than the whole original fund, these facts should surely be known to those who have to ask themselves in what spirit as well as for what purpose the Institution expends money placed in its charge. Mr. Langley has pointed out that ‘although by the judicious administration of the Smithson fund nearly $1,500,000—the fruits of its investment—have been applied during the past forty years to the advancement of science and education in America (in addition to the principal, $911,000, larger now than ever before), it should be remem- bered that the unrestricted income of the Institution is less than $50,000 a year, a Sum much smaller in its power to effect results than ever in previous years.” Can the United States fail to recognize its obligation to supplement liberally this private contribution for public good, especially if it be borne in mind that, as Mr. Langley has recently shown, the Institu- tion has left in perpetual charge of the nation, in the Museum alone, property acquired out of its private fund (and to which it has appar- ently the same title) which is probably now more than equal in value to the whole amount of the Smithsonian bequest. Every museum has its special characteristics growing out of its form of organization, its location, scope, and financial and other resources. H. Mis. 184, pt. 2 2 i 18 REPORT OF NATIONAL MUSEUM, 1893. The character of the National Museum is fundamentally affected by its connection with the Smithsonian Institution, its dependence upon Con- gress for appropriations annually, and the necessity, under existing laws, of its caring for all collections belonging to the Government. Of the connection of the Museum with the Smithsonian Institution, it should be said that it is in the highest degree advantageous. It should be borne in mind that it is essentially a Smithsonian museum, since, especially in its earlier history, the Institution expended large sums of money in aiding explorations, with the distinct purpose of increasing the collections in certain directions, while of late years it has deposited all the valnable gifts and bequests of specimens it has received. It has had in addition, for nearly half a century, the use of the larger portion of the Smithsonian building, and what is of para- mount importance, the guidance and influence of the officers of the Institution, and the very valuable assistance of its numerous corre- spondents. C.—THE WORK OF THE MUSEUM IN PUBLIC EDUCATION. The work of the Museum, if it only performed the functions of an institution for scientific investigation, would be of sufficient value to justify its maintenance and extension. The Museum, however, not only performs these functions, but also does a very great deal to ren- der the resources of science available to the public at large. Prof. Huxley’s definition of a museum is that it is “a consultative library of objects.” The National Museum is a ccnsultative library for the scientific man, and it is something more. It aims to be an agency for the instruction of the people of the whole country, and to keep especially in mind the needs of those whose lives are not occupied in the study of science. In a recent address before the American Historical Association, I attempted to explain the idea of our work as follows: (1) That publie institutions of learning are not intended for the few, but for the enlightenment and education of the masses. (2) That the public has a right to full participation in the results of the work of the scientific establishments whick they are helping to maintain. (3) That one of the chief duties of the officers of these institutions is to provide means by which such results may be presented in an attractive as well as an intelligible form. No scientific institution is more thoroughly committed to the work of the diffusion of knowledge than is the Smithsonian Institution, and no department of its activity has greater possibilities in this respect than is the National Museum. The benefits of the Museum are extended not only to the specialists in its laboratories and to the hundreds of thousands of visitors from ail parts of the United States who pass its doors each year, but to local REPORT OF ASSISTANT SECRETARY. 19 stitutions and their visitors throughout the country, through the dis- tribution of the duplicate specimens in the Museum, which are made up into sets, accurately named, and distributed to schools and museums. In the next annual report it will be shown how many hundred thou- sands of objects have been thus distributed during the past twenty years. Every museum in the United States has profited in this way, and by its system of exchange the Museum has, while enriching itself, contributed largely to the stores of every important scientific museum in the world. Not only are specimens thus sent out, but aid is rendered in other ways. Within the last year not less than forty local museums in the United States were supplied with working plaus of cases in use in the Museum, and similar sets of plans have been supplied within the past few years to national museums in other countries. Not only do the people of the country at large profit by the work of the Smithsonian, as made available to local institutions, but also to a very considerable extent directly and personally. The curator of each department in the Museum is expected to be an authority in his own line of work, and the knowledge of the whole staff of experts is thus placed without cost at the service of every citizen. It is much to be regretted that many specialists, intent chiefly upon the study of certain scientific problems in which they individually are absorbed, are disposed to neglect the claims of the educated public to the enjoyment and instruction which museums afford. They do not hesitate to say that scientific museums should be administered for the benefit solely of persons engaged in research. Such men would find no welcome among us. . At arecent meeting of professional naturalists an eminent investi- gator in natural science publicly expressed his opposition to exhibiting certain scientific collections to “the gaping clowns who form the majority of the visitors to our museums.” Such a spirit defeats its own purposes and such a remark deserves rebuke. The experience of Europe with its magnificent educational museums and the history of the several expositions in the United States should be quite sufficient to satisfy any one who has studied the matter, that the museum is an educational power of no slight potency. The venerable director of the South Kensington Museum, the late Sir Philip Cunliffe Owen, speaking from an experience of thirty-five years, not only in his own establishment, but in the work of building up the score of sister museums now under its wing, located in the various provincial towns of Great Britain, remarked to the writer: _ We educate our working people in the publie schools, and give them a love for refined and beautiful objects, and a desire for information. They leave school, enter town life, see only dirty streets and monotonous rows of buildings, and have no way to gratify the tastes which they have been forced to acquire. It is as much the duty of the Government to provide them with museums and libraries for their higher education as it is to establish schools for their primary instruction. 20 REPORT OF NATIONAL MUSEUM, 1893. In the same conversation, Sir Philip insisted very strongly that a museum not actually engaged in educational work of some kind could not long survive, and as an example of one such field of activity pointed to the great system of lectures and examinations connected with the Science and Art Department of the Council of Education, of which the South Kensington Museum is one of the chief agencies. IIL. RECENT ADVANCES IN MUSEUM METHOD. The importance of the Museum as an agency for the education of the young and for the culture and enlightenment of the public in general is each year becoming better understood. The control of all museums is passing out of the hands of mere care- takers, or showmen, and is being assumed by men of intelligence and enterprise, whose purpose it is to elevate this agency of public culture to a plane of higher usefulness. Museum-practice has become to such an extent an art that some years of training and experience in a well-organized general museum are almost essential. Intelligence, a liberal education, administrative ability, enthusiasm, and that special endowment which may be called “the museum sense” are simply prerequisite qualifications. Any museum which employs an untrained curator must expect to pay the cost of his education in delays, experimental failures, and waste of material. A museum without intelligent, progressive, and well-trained cura- tors is as ineffective as a school without teachers, a library without a librarian, or a learned society without a working membership of learned men. Such facts as these are gradually becoming impressed upon the pub- lie mind, and although the community within which a given museum is located may not for a time concern itself actively about its shortcom- ings, all the good work which it does is at once appreciated, and if advances are in progress, their results are eagerly awaited. The “Museums Association,” recently organized in England, is doing excellent work in that country. Such an organization is perhaps not yet necessary in the United States, where local museums are so few, but in time one will doubtless be organized. In the meantime the American Society of Naturalists is so situated that it can perform a part of the work proper to such an organization. Sir W. H. Flower, the superintendent of the British Museum of Nat- ural History, in his address at the last meeting of the “ Museums Asso- ciation” remarked: Of the museums of the United States of America much may beexpected. They are starting up in all directions, untramelled by the restrictions and traditions which envelope so many of our old institutions at home, and many admirable essays on museum work have reached us from the other side of the Atlantic, from which it appears that the new idea has taken firm root there. * *Report of the Museums Association, fourth general meeting, 1893, p. 42. 2] 22 REPORT OF NATIONAL MUSEUM, 1893. Itis gratifying to know that even in the smaller towns of Europe the ideals which we hold before us in our work are appreciated and quoted. The “ Brighton Herald” of August 18, 1894, contained the following editorial comment: "All those remarkably constituted persons who maintain that we do not wanta — museum in Brighton would do well to read a well-written little brochure by Dr. Charles A. White, of the U. 8. National Museum, entitled ‘‘The relations of biology to geological investigations.” It is a philosophical subject, philosophically treated, demonstrating the important relation that museums hold to science and to civiliza- tion as centers of learning and conservatories of the evidence concerning acquired knowledge. Museums [he concludes] should not only be made safe treasure-houses of science, but they should be what their name implies, temples of study perpetually open to all investigators. In our own country the spirit of museum extension is spreading, as is shown by such articles as that by Prof. Morse in the “ Atlantic Monthly,” entitled “If Public Libraries why not Public Museums,” which is reprinted in a subsequent part of thisreport. It is the highest ambition of the National Museum to be associated actively in the work of museum reform, and to feel that we are standing shoulder to shoulder in this respect with the older institutions of Europe, and that this fact is recognized by them. As we have werked along from year to year, always striving to do the best thing possible under the circumstances, we have always taken first into consideration the plans in use in other museums, and have either cast them aside as unavailable, modified them for our own needs, or frankly adopted them. So it has come to pass that we have a large number of forms of cases and devices for installation, fitted to meet almost every need of museum or exposition administrators. These are always placed freely at the disposal of those who need them. Working drawings and photo- graphs of cases, and samples of fixtures of every kind are freely lent. When the museum has had made, for its own use, expensive tools, such as molds for specimen jars or pedestal tiles, or dies for corrugating metal for the sliding-racks of storage cases, these are placed without charge at the service of public institutions, and the use of blocks for illustrating reports is always accorded, In this way the entire resources and experience of the National Museum are placed at the disposal of even the smallest country muse- ums, and this policy has, we hope, been very beneficial. In pursuance of this policy some of the most instructive of our recent experiments are described in this report, in advance of a fuller discus- sion in a comprehensive work on the principles and methods of museum administration, which has been in preparation for some years. This is done with less hesitation because of the example set by Dr. A. B. Meyer, whose papers on the methods of the Royal Zoological and Anthropo- logical- Ethnographic Museum in Dresden have proved so interesting to all museum workers, and who, rightly thinking that. museums are doing too much in the way of experiment and too little in utilizing the (i PLATE 1. Report of National Museum, 1893. Unit DRAWERS. 24 by 30 inches. h glass front ; Exhibition drawer wit Storage drawer. » we Fig. * Lip Fas ale REPORT OF ASSISTANT SECRETARY. 23 experienee of others, publishes his own experiences for the good of other workers in the same field.* MUSEUM CASES. Of all the practical questions which contront the museum adminis- trator those relating to the form and construction of cases and the methods of interior fitting are among the most perplexing and, so far as the relationships of the museum to the public are concerned, the most important. Each well-arranged case with its display of specimens and labels is a perpetual lecturer, and the thousands of such constantly on duty in every large museum have their effect upon a much larger num- ber of minds than the individual efforts of the scientific staff, no matter how industrious with their pens or in the lecture room. Ever since the occupation of our new building very special attention has been given to improving the cases, and a system, peculiar in the beginning to the National Museum, though since adopted by others, has grown up—a system based upon a fixed and interchangeable unit of construction; so that, to a very large degree, it is possible to transfer cases from one department to another. This fixed unit is the storage drawer or “unit drawer,” 24 by 30 inches in dimensions (PI. 1, fig. 1). Modifications and extensions of this unit are very generally in use in many forms of cases, both for exhibition and storage. (PI. 1, fig. 2.) Exhibition cases.—The various kinds of cases now in use are indi- cated in a general way in the two accompanying plates. (Pls. 2 and 3.) Fuller descriptions of the cases and their manner of construction will be reserved for a future report. It may be said, however, that the tendency has been toward the use of the very best of glass in the largest possible sizes, the woodwork being, as a rule, restricted to bases, corner pieces, and cornices. The top of the case—no matter what its size—is of glass. When possible, where two panes of glass are used in a single case front, a narrow metal connecting strip is used instead of a wooden bar. . The theory which has led to the development of this form of case is that collections should be so arranged that each surface of glass, or each panel of a long case, stands by itself, its contents being grouped with reference to a general descriptive label, either placed in their midst or in the middle of the case-frame above. It is not considered legitimate to arrange series of specimens on long shelves extending from one end to the other in cases whose fronts are broken by panels or doors; but, as has been said before, each panel or door stands for itself, like the page of a book, the arrangement being without excep- tion from left to right, as in a book. “MEYER, A. B. Zweiter Bericht iiber einige neue Einrichtigungen des kéniglichen zoologischen und anthropologisch-ethnographischen Museums in Dresden. Department in which used. Size. Estimated cost. Inches. Cents. GT TO Ee wo Sere ae SERRE arts ee OR SACS j-— On SEMIS eee era ae 24 by 30 25 DY eter eens Po ee again tio kp Sim rei eet on ein ee Fede ce sik ees toes oad lesa 24 by 36 30 NINE URLOLD 5 er ects aetac eee els win ci teinnnte aan ee aaeeimacion ce a noee we ceed ae cksatiesante 22 by 28 25 HU) eee eet ole rae wats Sate owls sie cisin mab Seta ele win b Searsicie as oe,Se alae cpcelosie sue 28 by 444 30 Sizes of stretchers for making trays with paper bottoms: 27 by 33 inches, 29 by 40 inches, 27 by 33 inches, and 31 by 464 inches. * 30 REPORT OF NATIONAL MUSEUM, 1893. extreme care being taken to avoid wrinkling, and is then set aside to dry for a half hour or more. It is then taken up again, and another sheet is pasted to it, after which it is again set aside to dry. This is repeated until four or five thicknesses of paper have been joined together, five thicknesses being necessary for the heaviest drawers. Each sheet, before being pasted on, is thoroughly soaked in water. The combined sheets thus forming the bottom of the drawer are then allowed to dry for twelve to twenty-four hours, according to the moisture of the atmosphere. The inside of the bottom of the drawer is then thoroughly coated with shellac. Then, without removing the sheets of paper from the stretcher, they are tacked to the bottom of the frame of the drawer with 6-ounce Swedish tacks, placed about a quarter of an inch apart (Pl. 9, fig. 2). Then another sheet of paper is pasted over, thus cov- ering the heads of the tacks. This not only improves the appearance of the bottom, but prevents the tacks from drawing out. Then the bottom is also thoroughly shellacked, and the edges of the paper trimmed close to the edge of the drawer, which is then complete. The weight of the lightest 24 by 30-inch drawers for small bird skins, 2 inches in depth, is about 314 ounces, and the cost is about 25 cents. The ordinary pine storage drawer, 3 inches in depth, costs on the average about 50 cents; a 4-inch drawer, 55 cents; a 5-inch drawer, 60 cents, and so on in preportion. This, of course, refers to prices where a large number of them are made by machinery at the same time. Another feature in our cases, peculiar to this Museum, it is believed, is that every case, no matter how large, is placed upon rollers, or can be lifted from the floor on adjustable rollers of various forms. Even the long wall cases, 9 feet in height, which have been recently con- structed, are made in sections, so that they can be moved without the assistance of carpenters. -The largest case in the Museum—that containing the group of bufta- loes—is undoubtedly the largest movable show case in the world. Itis 16 feet 6 inches by 12 feet 53 inches by 11 feet 17 inches in dimensions, and the weight of the case, with its contents, is about 9,300 pounds. This is supported on 10 rollers, which are of the kind used on the heaviest rolling platforms in warehouses, and are made of iron, the wheels being 4} inches in diameter, with rims about 2 inches wide. They are of a pattern called the “ anti-friction ” castors, the bearing of the axle being upon an arrangement of several wheels. This case can be readily moved from one end of the Museum to the other by eight men. There are other cases almost as large, and still others—in the mineral hall—much heavier in proportion to their size. The mineral storage case, 8 feet 6 inches long, 4 feet 4 inches wide, and 3 feet 3 inches high, filled with unit drawers, loaded with minerals, has an estimated weight of 2,000 pounds. Such cases as these are supported on 4 or 6 anti-fric- tion castors of the pattern and size just described, one at each corner, and can be moved by four men. Report of National Museum, 1893, Plate 9. in ° ~ DETAILS OF CONSTRUCTION OF UNIT DRAWER WITH PAPER BOTTOM. Fig. 1 Pine stretcher and drawer (front view). Fig. 2. Pine stretcher, showing paper tacked to drawer (back view). = 7 Aart, - ba, ve *; ars Sve we REPORT OF ASSISTANT SECRETARY. 31 The ordinary lighter type of exhibition case is not provided with independent rollers, but can be raised by wooden trucks with rubber tires about 44 inches in diameter, and movable in every direction, like furniture castors. There is an attachment of levers so accurately adjusted that a case full of bottles can be moved from one end of the building to the other without disturbing labels or specimens. This system of trucks has been found of the greatest service in the exposition work, in which the Museum is often called upon to take part, since the cases can be arranged in cold or bad weather in sheltered, warm rooms, and carried to their places on the floor. Another form of case especially advantageous for exhibition work is what is called the “knockdown” case, in which the parts are fast- ened together by pins and escutcheons. These cases have all the per- manence and strength of fixed cases, and can be put together and taken apart with great celerity. MOUNTINGS FOR INDIVIDUAL SPECIMENS. One of the most convenient and ingenious devices is that invented by Prof. Merrill for placing geological specimens, jars, and other similar objects upon sloping shelves, in such a manner that both specimen and label shall be easily seen, while at the saine time resting on a level surface; the objects are not in danger of sliding forward. This system is shown in the accompanying illustration. (Fig. 5.) In the plate referred to (PI. 10) the appearance of a number of speci- mens thus arranged upon the shelves is shown, though not well. The arrangement of this case is in many respects one of the most satisfac- tory pieces of installation which has ever been effected in the National Museum. Each block or tablet has tacked to its front a small strip of tin, so bent as to receive and hold the label and to allow its ready removal when desired. This is painted the same color as the block, and is thereby rendered quite inconspicuous. To prevent the sliding of the specimens of the front row, which, in order to bring them below the level of those in the back row, are without blocks, a continuous strip of tin is tacked along the front edge of the shelf, bent as shown in the cut. The full width of the strip is the average width of the labels. In this series it is about one inch. The elevation of the back edge, which is to check the sliding of the specimens, is from one-eighth to one-fourth inch, while the front edge is folded over just sufficient to hold the label in place, as before. Among the other devices which have recently been adopted in the department of geology two may be mentioned: The first is the curator’s plan for showing the appearance of a cave by setting up in its natural position a miniature grotto, with diminutive stalactites and stalagmites, which he was so tortunate as to secure from the Marengo Cave, in Indiana (PI. 11), placing at the sides of the 3 REPORT OF NATIONAL MUSEUM, 1893. case mirrors by whose reflections the general effect of an extended miniature. cave is produced. This is a very effective way of mount- ing exhibits, and the use of the mirrors seems to be an aid to the imagi- nation of visitors, especially to young people who have never seen a cavern. Another is for storing the great series of microscope slides of thin sections of rocks which belongs to this department. It is thus deseribed by Prof. Merrill: As it happened, we had in stock a number of pasteboard boxes, some 93 mm. wide, 143 mm. long, and 48 mm. deep, all inside measurements. The dimensions of our standard slide are 48 by 28 mm. By means of two wooden partitions some 3 mm. thick, running lengthwise, each box was divided into three equal compartments, the partitions being held in place by glue reinforced by two small tacks at each end. Heavy manila wrapping paper, such as we also had in stock, was then cut into strips 25 mm. wide and as long as the sheet of paper would allow, in this case about 7 feet. These strips were then bent into a series of folds, as shown in the accom- panying illustration, the apices being rounded, not pinched flat. If carefully done, the folds when crowded gently together act as a spring. Twoof these folded strips were then placed lengthwise in each compartment, and the slides introduced, stand- ing en end, between the folds at the top. A box as thus prepared readily holds 3 rows of 50 slides in a row, or 150 altogether. Each slide is separated from its neighbor in the same row by a double thickness of manila paper, which, owing to its manner of folding, acts as a spring, and avoids all possible danger of breakage. When all the compartments are filled, the space between the tops of the slides in any row is but about 2 mm., but there is, neverthe- | less, no difficulty in removing a slide or in getting at it to read the label without removal, since, owing to the yielding nature of the paper, the top may be readily drawn apart. In this respect the box offers a great advantage over those with rigid compartments, such as are commonly in use. The first box was made merely as an experiment. It proved so satisfactory that, for the time being at least, it is the form adopted for storing the several thousand slides forming the museum collections. Ihave attempted to show the arrangement as above described in the accompany- ing drawing (Fig. 6). In reality the slides are held much more firmly than indi- cated, since the paper bulges and comes against both the front and back of the slides the full length of the fold, instead of merely at the bottom. It will very likely strike the reader that a better material than paper might be found. I can only state that after considerable experimenting the paper was, all things consid- ered, found most satisfactory. * The adoption of unglazed tiles, instead of wooden or paper blocks, to support minerals, shells, and other small objects, is being considered, and experiments, the result of which will be announced later, are being made by Mr. Charles Schuchert, of the Paleontological Department. These tiles are rectangular, and of a soft buff color, corresponding closely to one of the standard shades used in the interior of our cases. A form of exhibition tray which has been in use for a number of years is provided with a bevel front of peculiar construction, as shown in the accompanying plate (Pl. 12). These trays are covered with black binder’s-board, and a piece of colored paper or fabric is placed on the bottom. This form of tray may replace the very objectionable * This notice was printed in ‘‘ Science,” November 25, 1892. Report of National Museum, 1893. PLATE 10. ARRANGEMENT OF GEOLOGICAL SPECIMENS ON SLOPING SHELVES. ae : Bi : ry Report of National Museum, 1893 PLATE 11. CASE OF STALACTITES, INSTALLED WITH MIRROR AT BACK. Report of National Museum, 1893 PLATE 12. BLACK PASTEBOARD TRAYS WITH LABEL-BEVELS. REPORT OF ASSISTANT SECRETARY. 25% and unsightly pasteboard tray, usually white, which is so often seen in collections of shells, minerals, and fossils. It is particularly well suited for coins and other single objects which it is desired to dig- nify by placing on a special mount with a pleasing back-ground. The tray of sheet iron used in the Dresden Museum is much stronger than the pasteboard tray customarily used in other museums, and for large study collections is undoubtedly preferable, although less desir- able for exhibition purposes. For very precious objects, such as small bronzes, ivory carvings, and small examples of metal-work, which lie flat upon the shelves, or at the bottom of table case, our curators occasionally use cushions of maroon or dark blue plush, bound with silk cord; this, however, is a refine- ment in installation which is not recommended for use except in very special cases, as when it is desired to install a loan or gift collection very elaborately, or when the objects exhibited are of the greatest intrinsic worth. Such cushions may be used to excellent advantage on glass shelves. EXHIBITION JARS. The necessity for rectangular jars for the exhibition of alcoholic preparations has long been felt, and for many years our people have been in conference with the glass-blowers concerning them; but the difficulties in the way of securing satisfactory results seem almost insuperable, The most desirable form of rectangular jar—one with a wide aperture of the “salt mouth” pattern—seems to be unobtainable. This is to be regretted, since a jar which can be closed with a circular ground-glass stopper is the most convenient for museum purposes. The plan of a round opening closed by a stopper was proposed, and experiments were made for improving the ordinary type of anatomical receptacle, long in use in this country as well as in Europe, in which the large opening at the top is closed by a flat plate. Such receptacles as this have been used for a number of years in the Museum of Comparative Zoology and in the Army Medical Museum, and they have also long been in use in Europe, both for round and rectangular vessels. A modification of this device, by Mr. James E. Benedict, is deseribed as follows: . The lip is ground to a perfect plane, and the opening, closed by a sheet of glass annointed with vaseline, is held in place by a cover which just completes the rectangular shape of the jar, its edges filing the shoulder, which is blown on the outer margin of the top of the jar, as Shown in the accompanying diagram (Fig. 7). This eap is sufficiently heavy to hold the cover plate in place, and it takes the place of the unsightly mechanical clamps of the jar customarily used in museums for anatomical preparations. The arrangement is thor- oughly satisfactory for exhibition purposes, and the cover being made H. Mis. 184, pt. 2——3 34 REPORT OF NATIONAL MUSEUM, 1893. of common window glass, which is somewhat irregular in its surfaces, enough small openings occur around the edges for the escape of gases, so that the somewhat unsightly vent-hole, usually made in hermetically sealed jars to allow the escape of gas and the introduc- tion of alcohol without removing the luting, is dispensed with. The most serious difficulty, however, has not been in regard to the cover, but rather in securing at the front of the jar a face sufficiently smooth and well polished to display the specimens clearly and without distortion. Some of the samples made for us by the glass manufac- turers had this surface polished on the buffing wheel; but the grinding was not sufficient to remove the inequalities in the glass, and the cor- ners, furthermore, are not rectangular, but rounded to such a degree as to cause some distortion of the specimens. Besides this, these are irregular and unsightly, and even to secure this imperfect result the glass is so thick that its transparency is somewhat impaired. This method of polishing the front surface of the receptacle has been used also in Europe. It is an alleviation but not a remedy for the evil, and, furthermore, is exceedingly expensive and beyond the reach of amuseum which has to provide for a large number of wet prepara- tions. Jars of this type, made in Edinburgh, are used in the Army Medical Museum in Washington. The cost of these jars, 9 by 12 inches, at the factory was about $105 a dozen. A firm in this country tried to produce jars somewhat similar, but was unable to make them at this price. Every important factory in the United States which would under- take work of this class has been consulted, and Mr. Benedict was sent on a special mission to visit them and study in person the possi- bilities. He soon became satisfied that in the present state of the glass-blowing industry nothing more can be done with blown jars, and began investigations in another direction. Experiments have been made by Mr. Benedict with a view to the possibility of building receptacles out of plate glass. Something of this kind had already been tried in Germany, with receptacles in metal frames, and constructed on the principle of an aquarium tank. The plan adopted here has been to dispense with entirely metal, and to use silicate cements which are insoluble in preservative fluids, and which unite so closely with the glass as to become, practically, a part of it. The recipes for these cements used are, unfortunately, the property of private individuals. In the process of manufacture the recepta- cles are exposed toa heat of 350° F. for several hours. It is impossible at the time of writing to say with certainty that these experiments have been successful, although one large jar has been filled with alcohol and specimens for eleven months and twelve others for six months. In jars of this particular form the top is made of two pieces of plate glass, the lower one being smaller, and so attached to the other as to form a shoulder all around; and the cover thus formed is luted to the opening Report of National Museum, 1893 LINDRICAL JAR FOR PREPARATIONS IN SPIRITS, SHOWING DISTORTION DUE TO FORM OF JAR. Report of National Museum, 1893 PLATE 14. me ckt apo cas ice sae tg 5 PMTs ie oe eevee Sao ek rem rete ON, Rewe ve wee en SQUARE JAR FOR WET PREPARATIONS, SHOWING ABSENCE OF DISTORTION. REPORT OF ASSISTANT SECRETARY. oo with vaseline. The junction thus formed is so perfect that it is neces- sary to have a vent-hole in the top, though much smaller than is custom- ary, it being only one-sixteenth of an inch in diameter, Jars made in this way, of the size already alluded to as costing more than $100 a dozen, can certainly be had for a little more than half the price and, if they prove permanent, will be in every respect better. Photographs have been made from jars filled with alcohol and speci- mens, and the peculiarities of the two systems are shown without dis- tortion or exaggeration in the accompanying plates (Pls. 15 and 14). A small built-up jar, madein Germany, has been in use in the Army Medical Museum and elsewhere as an accessory to the microscope. These jars will hold all liquids and acids used in microscopic work, and careful examination shows that the cement used is subjected to a vitrifying heat. The use of hot water in the jars breaks them in the corners, which make natural lines of cleavage. Just how large a jar can be made in this way we have no information, but some of the experiments tried by us demonstrate that they are not as reliable as those made with cemented corners. A convenient way of mounting specimens for the rectangular jars is shown in fig. 8. The fish or other object to be mounted is fastened to a pane of common window glass by meaus of threads passed through the object, ordinarily by the use of a surgeon’s needle. These are drawn through holes bored in the glass at the proper places, and fastened by breaking off a soft wooden peg in the hole, biting and fas- tening the thread in place. The holes are readily bored by aid of a solution of turpentine and camphor used as a lubricant, and asmall file as a drill, held in a small drilling machine. Any jeweler’s supply store can furnish the requisite material. THE PREPARATION OF LABELS. The preparation of labels is one of the most difficult tasks of the museum man. The selection of the descriptive matter to be printed requires the best of judgment and the widest and most accurate information; while to determine the form and size of the different labels in a series, and to secure the best typographic effect, is equally difficult, and requires abilities of quite a different order. A label may contain a vast amount of exact and valuable informa- tion, and yet, by reason of faulty literary and typographic arrange- ment, have as little significance and value as a piece of blank paper. Before a specialist is prepared to label a collection he must be a complete master of the subject which the collection is intended to illus- trate. After he has written the series of labels, if the collection is complete, he will have the material under control which would enabie him to write a very complete book of reference upon the subject. No task is more exacting than label writing. Not only is it impossi- ble to conceal any lack of precise knowledge, but the information must 36 REPORT OF NATIONAL MUSEUM, 1893. be conveyed in a terse, concise, and definite phraseology, such as is not demanded in any other class of writing, unless it may be the prepa- ration of definitions for a dictionary. He who writes definitions for a dictionary, however, has usually the advantage of having before him numerous other definitions of the same term, which he needs only to collateand rearrange. A good descriptive label, furthermore, should do something more than impart information. It should be so phrased as to excite the interest of the person who is examining the specimen to which it is attached; to call his attention to the points which it is most important that he should observe; to give him the information which he most needs while looking at, the specimen, and to refer him to the books by means of which he can, if so disposed, Jearn all that is known upon the subject illustrated. The labels describing the specimens in a collection are intended to take the place of the curator of the collection when it is impossible for him to personally exhibit the objects and explain their meaning. When collections were small and visitors were tew, the curator or owner of a cabinet was accustomed, in person, to conduct visitors among the cases, to take the specimens in his hand, to tell their names and where they came from, to indicate features of special interest, and to answer questions. This was in some respects an ideal way, when the curator was a man of wide knowledge and so much of an enthusiast that he took pleasure in talking without limit. The method was not without defects, how- ever, since the lecturer (for such he was, in fact) selected for exhibi- tion a limited number of objects which interested him, or which he supposed might interest the visitors, and gave the latter no chance for selection. Furthermore, the arrangement could not be such as to con- vey a sequence of ideas, such as a selected and well-labeled series of specimens can do, and the spoken descriptions, being as a rule full of unfamiliar words, were not remembered. The printed label of to-day may be read over again and again, and is often copied into the visitor’s notebook. Again, under the old system, examining a collection was looked upon rather in the light of amusement than of study, and what might have been possible in the way of instruction was rarely attempted. In these days, when the curator attempts verbal instruction, itis by means of a lecture delivered in the Museum lecture hall, or, if a floor- lecture, among the cases, surrounded by scores or hundreds of audi- tors, who may either take notes or find the substance of the lecture in some syllabus or printed text-book. While one visitor might listen to the Museum lectures, tens of thousands pass through the halls without a guide. They must depend entirely upon the labels for information; for guidebooks, if such have been printed, are rarely bought, still more rarely used in the presence of the specimens, and, though often taken home with the intention of REPORT OF ASSISTANT SECRETARY. ol studying them, are only in the rarest instances ever opened after their purchaser has left the Museum. The function of the label, then, is a most important one, since it is practically only through the aid of the labels that visitors derive any benefit whatever from a visit to a museum. What has already been said indicates in a general way the office of the descriptive label, and may be expressed more concisely as follows : ~ The label must— (1) Tell the name of the object; its exact and technical name always, and if there be one, its common name. (2) It must cal! attention to the features which it is important for the visitor to notice. (3) It must explain its meaning and its relations to the other objects in the series. If it accompanies a natural history specimen, it should explain its geographical distribution, which, if possible, should be plotted on a small map, forming part of the label, and mentioning peculiarities of structure or habit.* If an ethnological object, then its uses and construction should be explained, its materials named if they are not obvious, and supple- mentary information given by means of pictures ; and, where pictures are better than words, these may be substituted. (4) The exact locality, date of collection, and source of the specimen exibited should be mentioned. (5) For the convenience of visitors it is well, in many cases, to give the dimensions or weight of the specimen. The art of label writing is in its infancy, and there are doubtless pos- sibilities of educational results through the agency of labels and speci- meus which are not as yet at all understood. It is clear, however, that the advice of the negro cook in regard to making soup applies equally well toa good label; to wit, that much more depends on what you leave out than on what you put in. The value of this method of instruction is perhaps better understood by the most advanced writers of school text-books and dictionaries than even by the average museum worker, In Dr. Edward Eggleston’s new “School History of the United States,” engravings are plentifully interspersed through the text, as well as in the margins,—portraits, pictures of historical localities, buildings, cos- tumes, and archeological objects:—and each of these has a label of the museum type, surrounded by rules, and separated from the text with which it has usually only incidental relationship. The originals which are thus illustrated, if brought together would make an admirable ~ We have used in the National Museum, in years gone by, labels of diftierent colors to indicate geographical sources, and have also used for the saine purpose labels with printed borders of different colors. This, however, has long since been ~ abandoned as cumbersome and impracticable. In most cases a word upon the label is sufficient to convey this idea. . But when it is desired to convey fuller information, a map has great possibilities, foreven the exact range of each species may be shown in this way without materially increasing the size of the labels. 38 REPORT OF NATIONAL MUSEUM, 1893. museum of American history, and the book itself could hardly be improved upon as a handbook to such a collection. The modern illustrated dietionary owes much of its success to the adoption of museum methods, due, perhaps, to the fact that so many men, trained in museum work, have been engaged upon the preparation of the latest American publications of this kind, the Century Dietion- ary and the more recently published Standard Dictionary. These works impart instruction by methods very similar to those in use in museums, except that they are placed much at a disadvantage by reason of their alphabetical arrangement. There is, of course, one respect in which the museum exhibition- case has the advantage over the lecturer, who can only present one subject at a time, or over the writer of books, who is prevented by the size of his pages from bringing a large number of ideas into view at once. This difficulty has been in part overcome by the editor of the Standard Dictionary, in the large plates, where are shown, in one case all the principal varieties of precious stones; in another plate, all the races of the domesticated dog, and in another, the badges of orders of chivalry. Even this, however, is far from reaching the possibility possessed by the Museum (with its broad expanses of exhibition cases) of showing a large number of objects so arranged as to exhibit their mutual relation- ship, and so labeled as to explain the method of their arrangement. As has already been said, the size and typography of the label are of the greatest importance. The best written label may be ruined by the printer. Not only must the letters be large enough to be legible from the customary point of view, but the type must be pleasing in form, and so arranged as to lead fhe eye of the reader with pleasure from one line to another, and so broken into paragraphs as to separate from ach other the topies discussed. Furthermore, a system of subordinate sizes of type is essential, so that the most important facts will first meet the eye. In many of the labels shown in the accompanying illustrations type of four or five dif- ferent sizes is used, the largest giving the name of the object, the next size the name of locality and donor, the next its distribution, and so on, much in the order of importance of the topics already proposed, while the least essential illustrative matter at the bottom of the label is placed in the smallest type. The theory is that the largest type should give the information desired by the greatest number of visitors—by every one; the next size, that needed by those who are studying the collection in a more leisurely way, and so on. Too much can not be said of the necessity of breaking the descrip- tive matter into short paragraphs, which should never be more than half a square in length. Where a label of great width is printed, it is our experience that it is better to arrange the matter in two columns, as is shown in one of the accompanying plates, rather than to weary the eye by requiring it to follow back and fro across the eard. Report of National Museum, 1893. PLATE 15. Family CHINCHILLIDA The Chinchillas ARGE or moderate-sized rodents, with elongated hind legs, bushy tails, and long and extremely fine fur. The family includes three genera, each with a single species—the chinchilla, prized for its fur, the viscacha, one of the most characteristic animals of the South Amcrican pampas, and a third species, Cuvier's chinchilla. The common chinchilla and Cuvier’s chinchilla inhabit the Andes of Peru and Chili. The viscacha digs extensive burrows on the pampas. « THE GREAT AUK Plautus impennis (LiNNE) FUNK ISLAND, OFF THE COAST OF NEWFOUNDLAND. 18,117 Collected by F. A. Lucas. The Great Auk was formerly common on the coast of Iceland, and found in vast numbers off the coast of Newfoundland, especially at Funk Island. It formed an important article ot food for the early navigators and fishermen. Being incapable of flight it was easily captured on land and was taken in great numbers at its breeding places. Systematic slaugh- ter of the bird for its Aesh and feathers caused the extermination of the Great Auk about 1840. (This skeleton is composed of bones from various individuals) OVER FOR COFFIN OR ALTAR: Made in the 18th century; used in the Russian Church. Province of ExaTerINeENBouRG, Urat Mountains, Asiatic Russia, 154,784. Collected by Mr. Geo. F. Kunz. SPECIMEN FORMS OF LABELS. * y ; re ‘oe 4 ; 7 ; ala .- , 1 | —— 7 \ 7 | ne Be a a ; oD ae ; s 7 S = 7 , * : “0 ; u = 7 = - aa : ees we ee : pen . " a. . Ad; 7 a / ie as ee Ni wy i : 7 : a i BY oe - _ uae a 1 = at 7 ia a The Koran, the sacred book of Islam, istreated by the Mohammedans with great external veneration and reverence. They generally take care never to hold it, and they deposit 1t upon a high and clean place, and never put another book, or any- thing else on top of it. When read it is placed on a-stand. The reading of the Koran should com- mence with legal ablution and prayer. The usual prayer is = seek protection with God against Satan the accursed,” followed by the invocation : “In the name of God the Merciful, thé Compas. sionate.’ In the services of the mosque it is chanted by the iam, or the leader in prayer. VOTIVE RELIEF DEDICATED TO CYBELE (Cast) FOUND IN ATTICA, GREECE. Representing the goddess seated on a throne holding in one hand a bowl, in the other the flattened drum or cymbal, with a lion at her feet. Before her stands a woman holding a bundle of twigs, and part of another figure holding an amphora. OricinaL or Marsie 1x THE Roya Museum or Bertin. 154,656. Cybele or Rhea was called the “Great Mother of the Gods.” The original home of her worship was in Phrygia, (Asia Minor), in the district afterwards known as Galatia. Her priests were called Corybantes, and her festivals were celebrated with wild dances, and orgiastic excesses amid the resounding music of drums and cymbals. From Asia her worship came to Greece, and at Athens she had a temple called the Metroun, the temple of the great mother. In Rome her worship was introduced during the second Punic war in 204 B. C. A yearly festival was instituted in her honor (April 2-4) called the Mega/esza, and under the empire another in March, which was celebrated with the observance of mourning followed by the most extravagant joy. In the second century A. D. the festivals 7au- robola and Criobolia were added Among the ceremonies observed in these festivals was a kind of baptism with the blood of bulls and rams killed in sacrifice, with the object of cleansing and bringing about a new birth The oak and the pine, as also the lion were sacred to her. She was supposed to traverse the mountains riding on a lion, or in a chariot drawn by lions. She is usually represented enthroned between lions, witha diadem on her head, and a small drum or cymbal, the instrument used 1n her rites, in her hand. SPECIMEN FORMS OF LABELS. Report of National Museum, 1893. PLATE 20. FIRE-DRILL.—Used to make sacred fire. Lower piece of agave stalk, a soft, pithy wood, with harder longitudinal fibers, rendering ita good me- dium for the purpose of making fire. Spindle, a smaller piece of the same material. Length of lower piece, 19% inches; length of spindle, 18 inches, ZUNI INDIANS (Zunian Stock), New Mexico. _ 127,708. Collected by JAMES SreveNson. With this set sand was used by the Zuni in the fire- cavity to increase the friction. ‘he fire is preserved in a piece of decayed wood. It is the custom of the priests to moisten the sticks befure beginning to drill out fire. This renders the success much more ditficult, and there- fore more meritorious in the sight of their gods. RINTING BLOCK (Ban-jul-pan).— Wooden block; ends wedge-shaped for fitting into a holder. Engraved. Length, 1734 inches; width, 8 inches. SEOUL, KOREA, 1885. 77,018. Collected by Ensign J. B Bernapou, U.S Navy. Blocks and movable type are both used in Korea. This is a common block for printing the alphabet sheet from which children learn the Gn-moun, or native Korean character. The characters are arranged in vertical columns, and above each is a rough pictorial representation of something containing the initial consonant sound of the characters inthe column, The writing on the left is astrological. Satow says, ‘‘There are some Korean books dating back to 1317 and 1324, printed with movable type.” HOATZIN. OPISTHOCOMUS CRIS TA TUS GnMeEuin. BERBICE, DEMERARA. Gift of DEmMeRARA Museum. The most striking feature of the skeleton, and one peculiar to the Hoatzin, is the shape of the breast-bone. the keel being cut away in front where it is usually deepest. The food of the Hoatzin consists mainly of leaves of the arum, and as large quantities of leaves are eaten, a large Crop is required for their reception, and this crop completely fills the space below the sternum where the keel is lacking. The lower end of the furcula (wish-bone) is united with the sternum, and its upper ends with the coracoids—the bones to which the wings are articulated. 5 The Hoatzin is the sole member of the order Optsthocomt, and is probably the representative of a once more numerous group of birds of generalized structure. SPECIMEN FORMS OF LABELS. Report of National Museum, 1893. PLATE 21. SELENITE CRYSTALS.— From cave in what is locally known as the South Wash, in Wayne County, Utah. 60,881. Received from J. E. TALMaGE, 1893. The crystals occur in a cave which is inclosed by a thick shell forming a mound which stands in relief ona hillside as shown in the photograph. The crystals vary greatly in size and weight, some being over four feet long. Owing to the vandalism of visitors, it has been found necessary to remove the finest specimens to the Deseret, Museum, at Salt Lake City, to prevent their com- plete destruction (See Science, Feb. 17, 1893.) CORRODED STALACTITE.—The specimen is partially dissolved by the corroding action of water from the roof. It illustrates one of the latest stages in the life history of a cave. The lime in the over- lying roof has been so far removed that the water percolating though it is still acid and attacks the material of the stalactites as it drips over them. Rosertson’s Cave, Springfield, Missouri. 68,186. Collected by Georce P. Merriit, 1892. VOLCANIC DUST. VOLCANO OF KRAKATOA, Straits of Sunda. 36,974. Gift of F. W. HoucuTon, 1889. This ash was showered for three days in September, and at the rate of one inch per hour, on board ship Beacons- field while in latitude 0° 14’ S., longitude 92° E., and at a distance of 855 miles from the source of eruption. ORTHORHOMBIC SYSTEM. DISTINCTIVE CRYSTALS ON MATRIX. A combination of the Basal Plane (001, O) anda Brachyprism (120, 7-2) with a Brachydome (041, 4-4) and two Pyramids (223, 24,and 111, {), slightly modified by the Unit Prism (110, /) TOPAZ with Albite, Muscovite and Smoky Quartz. ALABASCHKA, Ural Mountains, Siberia LEIpy COLLECTION. SPECIMEN FORMS OF LABELS. a cel “pill ~ : cl ate ett BD | i : 7 i, 7 - te , | ‘ee hay 2 gti Report of National Museum, 1893. PLATE 22. COLLECTIONS OF THE BUREAU OF ETHNOLOGY. TORAGE BASKET (pjgLo).—Warp of osiers; weft of the sides of split pine root, weft of the bottom of osiers, both in twined weaving. The weft strands are overlaid with bright straws to form the pattern. Margin strengthened on the inside by a hoop of hard wood. Height, 3 feet; diameter, 28 inches. HUPA INDIANS, CALIFORNIA, 1889. 111,433. Collected by Jeremtan Curtin: After these baskets are made they. are filled with hot wet sand to give them a good form. They are set around the wall of the semi-subterranean houses of the Hupas upon a.banquette of earth and filled with acorns for winter food. As many as twelve may be seen in one house. ISHING CANOE: (Mopet).—Wood, dug out; sloping sides, slightly flared at top, flat bottom; sharp ends; long overhanging bow. terminating in a point; straight stern. Length, 22% inches. Beam, 5% inches. Height, including figures, 6 inches. NEAH BAY, Wasuixctan Territory, 1883. 72,907. Collected by Jaurs G. Swan, Port Townsend, W. T. Made by Makau Inptans, of Cape Flattery. Perfect in all its appoint: ments, with figures of two Indians seated face to face, the position always taken. Contains fwo paddles; two fishing-lines complete; two baskets for spare. hooks and lines; two clubs for killing .fish; five halibut hooks; one bailer, two halibut. None of the objects are made to a scale to compare with the canoe or with cach other, the purpose of the Indians being simply to show the various articles without regard to relative size, SPECIMEN FORMS OF LABELS. Report of National Museum, 1893 HOMOLOGIES OF THE PRINCIPAL BONES. The series of which this specimen forms a part is intended to show the corresponding bones in the different classes of vertebrates. The spaced skeleton should be compared with the mounted skeleton. CIKULL OF SHARK, Carcharias sp, an example of the simplest type of cranium. It consists entirely of calcified cartilage, is immovably connected with the backbone, and does not completely inclose the brain. Neither cartilage bones nar membrane bones are de- veleped. 26,164 THE DOMESTIC FOWL. "THE ANATOMY OF THE DOMESTIC FOWL as shown on a large scale by the Turkey, A/eleagris gallopavo, one of the largest of the Gallinaceous Birds. Model, natural size, by AUZOUX, Paris. MODEL Showing structure of PRECIOUS CORAL, Coralliium rubrum. GREATLY ENLARGED. 1. Axial skeleton. 2. Friable crust or Canosarc, in which lie the tubes connecting the body cavities of the individual polyps. 3. Individual polyps. SPECIMEN FORMS OF LABELS. PLATE 23. ee Report of National Museum 1893. PLaTE 24. ECCLESIASTICAL HISTORY AND ART CosTUME OF THE MISERICORDIA OF TUSCANY THIs CosTUME consists of a simple hooded cassock of black, worn over ordinary citizen’s dress, and a broad brimmed felt hat, used in outdoor service. Zan SIENA, 1892. 153,893. Collected by G. Brown GOODE. The FRATERNITY OF THE MISERICORDIA (fia Arcicon- SJraternita de Santa Maria della Misericordia) 1s a great society, with branches in Siena, Florence, Pisa, and the other cities and towns of Tuscany, which has for its sole object the alleviation of suffering and the furtherance of all works of benevolence. Its most striking characteristic 1s that its active work is carried on by its members in person, and not by paid deputies. On its rolls are found the names of a large proportion of the adult males of the community, without regard to rank or wealth. A certain number of these are assigned to duty for each day in the year, and are expected to respond at once to any call from the officer of the day, and while on duty are under strict discipline. The personal relationship of the wealthy and the powerful to the charitable work of the community is productive of much good. All dis- tinctions of rank are ignored in the organization, and to this end a costume of the cheapest material is used, to disguise figure and face, and members while on’ duty neither speak nor are spoken to, except as a matter of necessity. The money needed for the work is obtained by the mute appeals of the members in public places and at the doors of churches, and from the fees of membership. Each local society has its chapel for funeral services, and all funerals with but few exceptions, are conducted by this organization, the coffin being borne by its members in their peculiar dress. LBs Le" oe Fone tt 7 i 5G 3 One of the oldest of these societies, that to which the costume exhibited belongs, is that of Siena. This was founded at the end of the fourteenth century by Bernardino Albizzeschi (San Bernardino) as a society to perform works of mercy and to aid prisoners. In 1564 a statute prescribed the manner in which their charitable offices might be exercised. It was suppressed in the time of Leopold I, and resuscitated by royal permission in 1794. In 1829 it was reorganized upon the model of those in Pisa and Florence, and in 1862 by popular subscription an endowment of 155,000 lira ($31,000) was secured, which has since been increased by other donations. Its membership is very large, including in a city of fifty thousand inhabitants, about three thousand active members. Its scope includes everything which comes within the term charity—the relief of those stricken by misfortune of any kind at any time or place. Owing to the precipitous character of many of the streets, horses are comparatively few in Siena, and sick people, as well as coffins, must be carried upon men's shoulders. Invalids are taken by them to the Royal Hospital, three miles from the city, and they~have contro! of an extensive cemetery, in which nearly all interments are made. A group of members is organ- ized under the name of visitors to the sick (Conzsttaturt Infermici1). “Vhey render aid to the ill at home, supplying them with beds, underclothing, bandages, broths, easy chairs, trusses, and watchers or nurses at night. In summer the Society dispenses mineral water for use in baths, and when necessary, keeps open a room fur vaccination and dispenses the vaccine matter throughout the city and the surrounding country. In the case of an accident of any kind, a squad of members is upon the spot to render service, in other Communities expected trom the police and board of health. ‘Vhe administration is in the hands uf a brother called the Provveddttore, who presides at the neet- ings of the board of management, the A/agistratv, composed of twelve brothers called Cunservatort, and also those of the council, composed of eighty councillors (Comsiyliers). A full financial report is printed each year. ‘Ihe Society has its house. in which is not only a chapel, but a vast warehouse for the accessories of their work—litters and surgical appliances,—and a great room, surrounded by cupboards, in which the cassocks of the members are kept ready to be put on when they are hastily summoned to duty from their places of business. ‘The officers of the Society are an inspector (/sfeffore), who controls the public and private services; a brother deputy (Depusato), in charge of the Convalescent’s Home , a secretary ( Cuncellicre-Sexretaiiv), Who supervises the business, archives and correspondence ; a treasurer (Camariingy), and a steward (Massitro), who has charge of all linen, furniture, and other property in the warehouse, ‘here are fifty-two officers of the guard, who in turn, day by day throughout the year, supervise the public services, and sometimes as many as three hundred of the members are in active duty in a single day, under the charge of one of these officers. All officers serve gratuitously except the secretary, a physician, two priests, two servants and a letter-carrier. 3 Sree ; Gaye ies aes SPECIMEN FORM OF LABEL. PLATE 25. Report of National Museum, 1893 © “139V71 SO WHOS N3WI03dS “ALM 2YI PIA TIM ‘uolssaz0id epiuq v yons SuYrowW USYM “[RIOYJO Jsoysiy ay yp ‘sapue JOYIO pu dINPUIN, ‘Suippoq YW sao.sieq -pury surdaies s.tojiod Aq pue syuvAdos ae} omy Aq PeMOT[O} puv ‘s1OSo9IUv JOY Jo Aur 0} pesuojaq savy yoryM doyjo Jo viusisur oyy SuLveaq USUI pure ‘SUPIOISNU Aq JI paoye uvo Aytuiey oy} uaya ‘paposoid ‘sdoavoq moy yA ‘aeyd uvpas snoanlos v ul purqsny soy yo MSNOY ay} 0} paLUvs stapuq ey yp, ‘uostap jeLoduiy ay} YM posoplorquuo oqor pos v ASLLULUW YI Je AoA GJ Wot) Surzuoyne . The Zuni belt-maker. 6. Navajo women, Spinning and weaving. 7. Indian women of the plains dressing hides. (PI. 52.) The first group of the new style made was the group of Kiowa chil- dren at play, equally good in its way, designed some years ago by Mr. James Mooney, of the Bureau of Ethnology, who also planned the group of Navajo silversmiths. Dr. W. J. Hoffman’s “The Primitive Scribe,” a Chippewa shaman in his lodge writing an incantation on prepared birchbark, and another of a Crow Indian painting a blanket, are worthy of notice. Report of National Museum, 1893 , ‘¢C ie L — cay 1D BASS. sy sniseines —— SAMOAN YOUTH. Modeled for the U. S. National Museum by Theodore Mills. PLATE 47. Report of National Museum, 1893. PLaTe 48. Dyak WARRIOR. Modeled for the U. S. National Museum by Theodore Mills. Report of National Museum, 1893. PLATE 49. XIVARO INDIAN IN FEATHER COSTUME. Modeled for the U. S. National Museum by Theodore Mills. Report of National Museum, 1893. PLATE 50. BANTU NEGRO Boy. Modeled for the U. S. National Museum by Theodore Mills. a tae, a) a; ~ . i it et i i" i a bm ¥ ¢- ’ Lu rl¢S wa 2 ; et a ae oe Wee 1 CA el E51. PLAT 1893 Report of National Museum “SUIysSND “H yUBAY AL JO UOMOeap oyy tepun peredeig ‘SHSNVW-Gvaug INNZ = 559% £5 FH, A He 9 Bi a HM 0 a8 i a i he To a pee erecv he Ginrigng © Rig an the eh Pm ep gn Saree ow PLATE 52. 1893, Report of National Museum, ‘SOMO “H WIeT[IAA “A JO WOTOa.ATp oy) Aapan peaedoarg “SSQIH ONISSAYO NSWOM NVIOGN| REPORT OF ASSISTANT SECRETARY. 55 The groups of Loucheux and Hupa Indians, arranged by Prof. Holmes, were also effective artistically, though lacking the advantages which a personal acquaintance with the tribe would have -given the designs. The relative values of costumes and implements displayed upon manikins, and those shelved in cases with tickets explaining their uses, need no discussion. A caution should be written to museum men, how- ever, which is that itis very dangerous to try to make such groups except under the eye of an ethnologist who has been among the people to be represented. The object of a reference to these groups is simply to call attention to the fact that something has been done which was never before attempted for the American Indian, and that the result seems to more than justify the eftort. Experiments are still in progress, and it is believed that figures still more truthful and life-like than any that have yet been produced will be the result. The most serious difficulty to be overcome is in the treatment of the surface of the figures and their coloring. We use only plaster of Paris. Wax, which has beenso often employed for faces and hands, has been discarded as being too delicate, and not so well suited for life-like effects as plaster. Papier-maché, as has been stated, our workmen can not manipulate so as to produce sufficient hardness of surface and delicacy of line. The gelatine which has been used for natural history preparations offers no absolute permanence. Plaster of Paris has only one objection, which is the roughness of its surface. It is now believed that the smoothness and texture of the flesh can be produced by the use of some of the mineral waxes. The question of coloring is a more difficultone. Our Japanese figures, on close examination, do not present a uniform hue, but have a solid body color, enlivened by innumerable dots of a much darker tone. These are produced by some spatter-work process, either by spraying from a stiff brush, or by blowing the pigment in a fine spray from the mouth. When viewed at a short distance, the effect is precisely that of living flesh. Experiments are now being made with the air brush, which will doubtless produce the same effect. The representation of human hair, especially of the beard, also pre- sents great difficulties; but it is believed that in time tbe use of plas- ter and paint will supplant the products of the wig factory. It will be observed that the steps of progress in modeling man have been very similar to those in the mounting of the lower animals, and the influence of the skilful American taxidermist has been felt every- where in this work also. Allusion has already been made to the taxidermy at the Holub exhi- bition in Prague. The mounting of anthropological groups was even more ambitious and successful, and is illustrated here by three plates, showing a group in action, a group in repose, and a single figure to show details of modeling. [{ Plates, 53, 54, 55.| | In the anthropological as well as the zoological groups, the generous space of the exposition 56 REPORT OF NATIONAL MUSEUM, 1893. afforded opportunities which are not often available in museums. Indeed the permanence of museum work seems to demand not only greater compactness, but more reserve, repose, and dignity than is necessary in installation for a temporary exhibition. ENVIRONMENTAL GROUPS. It is not expected that in the ethnographical museum of the future the lay figure will supplant the show case as a means for displaying ethnographic collections; but just as naturalists may feel it legitimate to use a considerable number of cases of animals mounted in the midst of natural surroundings to illustrate their habits or to make impressive memorials of species which are rarely seen or likely to become extinct, so will the anthropologist employ figures, not only for the education of the public, but as a more sure means of preserving certain of the most precious memorials of the primitive races of mankind. It will soon be time to consider the question to what extent museums arejustified in the use of environmental groups. It is evident that this may be carried too far and be made tiresome instead of agreeable to visitors, while at the same time producing an effect quite opposite to that of dignified and systematic order, which should be characteristice of every museum. Furthermore, specimens thus mounted, unless the workmanship is of the very best: and the cases practically perfect and impervious to air, are certain to deteriorate, since it is very difficult to get at them in order to cleanse them and protect them from vermin. The writer has seen neglected cases of this kind in some of the largest government museums of. the Old World, which were serious warnings against departure from the practice of individual mounts in cases free from the incumbrance of accessories. In the National Museum a definite limit has been fixed. Environ- mental groups will only be made in the case of the larger mammals and birds which are rarely seen and are on the verge of extinction, or for the purpose of illustrating some very remarkable habit. It has been found in the installation of our department of birds that the series of Audubon’s plates, showing the habits of birds, framed and hung near the exhibition cases, are almost as effective as the groups mounted to illustrate the same phases in their habits. CONCERNING COLLECTIONS AND SPECIMENS. The following principles in regard to collections and specimens rep- resent in a general way the ideas which underlie all our recent work: Collections in general.—Any object which has a name may be used in museum work. It does not follow, however, that any one museum should attempt to include all such objects, nor that there are not many which, in the present stage of museum practice, might not be entirely neglected. Report of National Museum, 1893 PLATE 53. A BUSHMAN IN THE ACT OF ENGRAVING FIGURES WITH A STONE HAMMER ON A DIORITE ROCK. Mounted under the direction of Dr. Emil Holub for the South African Exhibition, Prague, 1892. PLATE 54. 1893. Report of National Museum HQT ‘onsSvad ‘MONIQIyXY urd JV WaInog vy aoy qnyoH pig aq Jo ToNSeap ey) .apun pequnoyy “"NOILVN N1INZ :3dlkyt ISASWVYZ HLNOS "NMOL OMOL-O|| ¥ SO SLNH 3O SSOOY¥ SHL WOYS dN LIING YSLLV1 SHL ! LNSWdWVONS YHISHL NI SHOIMYVM 3T39VLVIA) PLATE 55. 1893, Report of National Museum, pay 1 poqnnoly 1d ot{} JO 1a}U9d OT} UL Paywas SI OTM SST 199}8 94} Aq poysey St poos op] "YaddNS LV ‘IZAGWVZ IWHLN3O SHL NO ‘SMSHSSHS MAN SO SN1NZ REPORT OF ASSISTANT SECRETARY. 5T Specimens in a museum are like the types in a printing office. They may be sorted in the cases in conventional order so as to be accessible when needed, or they may be used to make intelligible almost any train of thought or series of ideas, each being available in hundreds of dif- ferent relationships. Single or unrelated specimens, though valuable or interesting, are in themselves of little moment in comparison with series of much less precious objects which unite to teach some lesson to student or visitor. Cumbersome and superfluous materials in collections.—One of the great- est perils to a museum is the possession of vast collections. Coilections which are encumbered with conditions as to manner of disposition and installation are usually causes of serious embarrass- ment. Not the least important duty of the curator is to prevent the acces- sion of undesirable material. Material not germane to the plan of a museum should be exchanged or given to other museums which have use for it. What is expensive and unprofitable to one may be of the greatest use to another. Advances in any museum are effected not only by accession and enlargement, but by the constant substitution of better specimens, by advance in methods of display, labeling, and handbooks. The principal uses of specimens.—A museum is rarely justified in exhibiting all its materials. An exhibition series, when properly installed, is more effective when limited than when extensive. Specimens not needed in the exhibition series are much more useful when placed in a reserve or study series, either to be used by students; to be exchanged or given to other museums, or to be employed when occasion may offer in forming new exhibition series. The exhibition series.—The effectiveness of amuseum for popular cul ture depends chietly upon: (1) A careful selection and effective arrangement of the specimens exhibited (which implies the exclusion of many objects in themselves attractive and interesting). (2) A thorough system of labels in simple language, supplemented by pictures, diagrams, maps, and books of reference. (3) Specimens for exhibition should be selected solely with reference to the lesson they can teach, singly or in combination. (4) To complete a series, any specimen is better than none. (5) A copy, model, or picture of a good thing is often more useful than an actual specimen of a poor one. (6) A picture or model may often be shown to advantage in place of a minute or unintelligible object. (7) Books, manuscripts, pictures, maps, ete., become specimens when treated in the museum method. The study series: (1) Specimens in the study series should be acquired in series sufti- 58 REPORT OF NATIONAL MUSEUM, 1893. ciently large to meet the needs of students who are known to exist. While nothing of value should be lost, it is questionable whether mate- rial should be sought in large quantity, when there is no indication that it will soon be needed. (2) Study specimens should be stored as compactly and economically as is consistent with their safety and convenient use, and should be accessible to every student. (3) The study series is the storehouse from which the exhibition series may be replaced or extended and from which the needs of other museums may be supplied. Records.—The most important fact concerning any object is the local- ity where it was found; next most important, the person from whom it was received. Every specimen should have its catalogue number indelibly engraved or marked upon it, and, when possible, the locality and source. Specimens can be named at any time, but the locality once lost, the object becomes comparatively valueless. The record of donors should be accurate and complete, so that the specimens from any given source can be traced at once to their location. Ill.—-SPECIAL TOPICS OF THE YEAR. THE UNUSUAL CHARACTER OF THE YEAR’S WORK. The activities of the entire staff have been in a large degree diverted to exposition work, as they were last year and are likely to be for a year to come. Many of the Museum halls have been closed, being needed for the work of mounting and packing the collections. Many of our employees have been transferred to the exhibition staff, and at the time of this report are absent in Chicago, while a considerable number of others have been detailed for special service at the fair, or have been given special leaves of absence to attend the congresses or to act as judges of awards. A large number of specimens and cases have been withdrawn from the exhibition halls and sent to the expositions in Madrid and Chicago, and it has required the utmost ingenuity to fill the gaps thus caused, so that the collections may be presentable in the eyes of the visitors, who are quite as numerous this year, and among whom are many from foreign lands. Indeed, the occasion is really a revolution in museum affairs, and it will require fully a year after the return of the collections next winter to readjust the collections and to reestablish customary routine. All of this is accepted without complaint, because, though the Museum undoubtedly loses much more than it gains on such occasions, the opportunity for popular education is too important to be neglected, and the anniversary is one for which no outlay of labor and expense can be too great. The effect of this upheaval, extending as it has and will over a period of nearly four years, must, however, of necessity be manifest in this report, and it should be read with the facts just mentioned in mind. The responsibility of the Assistant Secretary in preparing for the two expositions, and the completion of the report on the deep-sea fishesof the Albatross and Blake expeditions, and his long absence from the city on official duty, have rendered it impossible for him to attend, as usual, to the details of museum administration, except in connection with the present report. Mr. Frederick W. True, as curator in charge, has very faithfully and successfully directed the work of this unusually trying year. CHANGES IN THE FORM OF THE ANNUAL REPORTS. Each report upon the Museum is intended to convey to every one inter- ested in its work, and especially to Congress, an exact idea of what has been done during the year, the relation of the work done to that of 59 60 REPORT OF NATIONAL MUSEUM, 1893. previous years, and to the plans for the future. So far as it is deemed likely to be of public interest, reasons are always given for the course pursued, especially when there are changes in method and policy. It is also intended to show fully what new museum materials have come into the possession of the Government during the year and how it has been assigned, what is being done to preserve and utilize the old collections, and when, in accordance with law, material has been distributed to other institutions, to show what has been done with it. The report then must of necessity discuss hundreds of thousands of small details, and it is exceedingly difficult to handle them so system- atically that the reference to anyone of these details can be at once found. . With the growth of the Museum the system has been becoming yearly more complicated, and the body of the report constantly more and more filled up with tables and statistical summaries. In the attempt to avoid what 1s becoming a burden, many of the state- ments heretofore included in the main report have this year been placed in appendixes. The discussions of the gifts and other accessions have, so far as possible, been assembled in a special appendix under the con- trol of indexes, which show not only the source but the disposition of each object by museum departments, and also group the objects by geographical origin. Still further concentration has been made by doing away with the special reports of the curators upon their respective departments and incorporating their substance in the general report upon the progress of the Museum. ‘This is an experiment, and it 1s not impossible that hereafter the old system may, at least in part, be resumed. THE MUSEUM STAFF. There are at the present time thirty-two organized departments and sections in the Museum under the care of curators and assistant cura- tors, aud eight administrative divisions.* The following changes in the personnel of the scientific departments have occurred during the year: _ Dr. William 8. Dixon, honorary curator of the section of materia medica, was detached by the Secretary of the Navy on January 5, 1893, for duty in the office of the Surgeon-General, and was succeeded by Dr. C. H. White, U.S. Navy. Mr. W. S. Yeates, who has for many years filled the position of assist- aut curator of the Department of Minerals in the National Museum, resigned on June 14, 1893, to accept the post of State Geologist of Georgia. Dr. George Vasey, honorary curator of the Department of Botany in the National Museum, died March 4, 1893, and Mr. Frederick V. Coville, *A list of the scientific and administrative officers is printed in Appendix I. REPORT: OF ASSISTANT SECRETARY. 61 who succeeded him as botanist in the Department of Agriculture, has been placed in charge of the Department of Botany in the Museum. A fuller reference to Dr. Vasey will be found in a subsequent page. Mr. J. EK. Watkins, curator of the section of transportation and engi- neering in the National Museum, was granted leave of absence October 1, 1892, to take charge of the exhibit of the Pennsylvania Railroad Company at the World’s Fair, and the work of collecting and organiz- ing the historical collections shown by that railroad in Chicago has since occupied his time. APPROPRIATIONS FOR 1895-94, The sum total of the appropriations is $166,000, which is $5,000 less than for the previous fiscal year, and $47,500 less than for 1891-92, The items are as follows: MUSEUM APPROPRIATIONS FOR 1893-94. BreNelorcul OlmOts COMeCi ONS sane. semis ec aceee le amie: a) eta Sepa) eee ee $132, 500 RECTUM eA Cat ixbUReSe eet ers ae os) Snes) palates eee cis cee sun CEI Dies 10, 000 | PS WN SSS Sse SARS ARS ORE Soe ae Asc e aEer ee eeae e 12, 000 PLC AHN AIAe ONG gern ae arses ea nae Pcie ysielnioee ic else ieee Seatac oe 11, 000 PO SUAS Ota eee agate aia etna ieee eas cn es Stora rotele isle eine faleeve Seiae ok Be teites liao 2 500 166, 000 It is a source of serious embarrassment that the appropriations have been reduced, and but for the fact that this reduction is part of a gen- eral system of economy growing out of the necessities of the Govern- ment, and affects all branches of the Government alike, it would be very discouraging. As it is, the situation has been accepted loyally and cheerfully; and though the growth of the Museum and its efficiency are of necessity greatly interfered with, the effort has been made to accomplish the best results with the means available, while waiting for a time of greater prosperity. One of the most serious inconveniences has been the necessity of discharging a number of men, who have been trained for the special work of the Museum, whose services are essential to its efficiency, and whom it will be difficult to replace in the future. INCREASE IN THE COLLECTIONS. At the close of 18331 a census of the collections was taken, resulting jn the preparation of a table, published in subsequent reports, which gave 193,362 as the approximate total number of specimens of all kinds at that time entered in the catalogue books of the several departments of the Museum. The census for the year ending June 30, 1893, places the total number of specimens of all kinds at 3,306,020, ° It must, how- ever, be stated that a large proportion of the material catalogued in 1884 and in later years had been in the custody of the Smithsonian Institution for several years, but had remained in storage on account of there being no opportunity to have it classified and entered in the cat- alogue books. 62 REPORT OF NATIONAL MUSEUM, 1893. There still remains in the basement of the Smithsonian building and in the old Armory building much material, consisting largely of gifts from foreign governments and contributions from expositions, which has not yet been brought under control, owing to lack of space and other necessary facilities. The number of accessions received in 1892-93 was 1,266 (Acc. Nos. 25885 to 27150, inclusive), embracing, in all, 82,148 specimens, distrib- uted among the several departments as follows: Departments. aoe K. ene Arts and industries: Materia medica)..2: 2.2 sos. see ace te sts oes Panes Se oe ones So secieeereee roe n tees 27 Domestic'animals (for mounmtn) one cnc eee = eae ee ee eee 31 Historical collections, coins, medals, paper money, etc...---..--.--------------- 1, 000 Musical. instruments =~ 292.22 225-125 - soe soe oe ee eee eta eee eee eee ence 263 Transportation and: engineerin oes wee clement 37 Modern pottery, porcelain, bronzesiete-—- see ss see =a ee eee eee eee 312 Physical:apparatuss.: = 5s ee ees somo ence soe ne aoe ee oe sceiemineeeee 18 (nm OEMS ores oocgocas Seon sosescodcoS 3 soe Seok aon anos S6 DoSSoSSeccose sdercsss 260 TG 17 Secor Sascoo spor Sec naa soon Sto noe Snes ebaarodoos coonboSasteA scone ssee 725 TOO YEN is oe Soe oh Bo ans spb epe coo su0o se ocaecuo sess tot coobasneaceboncceesegcacesouse 5, 094 American aboriginal Pouteny,s-. 22 see sae ssa eee eee eee eer e ee aaa eee eee 889 Oriental antiquities and religious ceremonial .-.--..-.....------------------------ 458 Iprelistoricrantnropolo tyke: ese casera see ene eee nee eee see oes 3, 095 Mammals: (skins and aleoholies) 2 sce. soso 00s sein oe- see eelsheee peer oases oe ee | 728 sk Re ae SN ene a ee Ror AO Cote SD ee hee NE Se ee ee 8 2, 255 Birds ergs and Mests .s6..csse~ Sete see eee ae eee ses ae eee eee 2, 869 Reptiles and:batrachians)< (0222 2.2-cee ses aa eee eee nee =e eee eae Ree eee 2, 301 Bishes 22332 ceseines jaca cese eas hanes = Sepa wae ae geese eee = eee seen 1, 010 Viertebrate fossils <. 2. - 22s cscsmsscch ces soto pemo ne occ ease nea naeaees eeeosere aes 13 Mollusksi(Gneludine Cenozoic tossils)| eee -- eae ee a eee eae enna 5, 600 IM SCCUS Fae k Coie eis aes coin eas alee ree So ots Pee ee eievista Pane ere eles 7, v00 Marine invertebrates .....-...- a2 oye acesee oeedess babi eins seo see se ceee acce oneness 2, 690 Comparative anatomy : Mammals = .s..2)6252 20 oo 5et Sek oes cee eA RIS eas ata eee ene et ae 163119) (FARES OMe e ee ee Pee hs aU SASH ER Hee Oo ee mee Seer mec acre Reptilestand) |b atria chiens hess ae oe ee cee toes ete mie aie cetera coe oes esa ternal 630 Dy 1) 17) WR Se Se eRe ROG SEA Ren ETA P= eC SSS Seer Ob STUD DEICIIS ono Ic 7 AAS eIS Invertebrate fossils: TRICO ZOIC: = aioe Shs nhSre ke Se Ca ae ee a eea rae sa aioli lee oe eee 1, 200 IM'CSOZ0ICS co oo cc = ys aa meee eee ee ee ee ene sees Snaie eee = eee 6, 440 Fossil plants. ..-.....--.- Son edns ene cds = shelss6 Soc sanse Sogn secdesserec sues Shssoc 2, 000 MSCENT PANS: se KSopouyygy ee Sans STPULLUR OLsoMo(”y so erereees-sqonpoad PROLMey suns pur sO. Sisteieicinin'= ------snqeazdde prosdyg Aroy[eY UV OLD», sodp pur syuteg zuoag ‘Urepaorod ‘{raqyj0d ULopoyy --> SPUOMIMAQSUL ]BOISNY oy0 ‘Louom aaded ‘spepour ‘surog al sfearic als ieiazeioie) otic leat nie ole Solod [ROOST] OINYJOAPLPOAV TBAB NT SulLoouisue puv worpeysodsueasg, AIYSOIO ST sq orqdeayy sponpoad jeuoy SOMOS So[XOI, "=" "Spoowy > ROLPOU VILOPVY :SOLMSnpur puv sry jHoujredap Jo oure Ny SECRETARY. 67 REPORT OF ASSISTANT ARVOIOUL Ot} HULMOGS JInSyY Of] DimIgo 07 aqqrssod a9eq Jou SLY 4T MOSRad [BIVeds QULOS AOF QEYY IN ‘MOT}OAT[O9 aq UL OSvad0Ul OU UV9q Sv oteT3 yeyG ATU ATLessoded JOU Soop pasuvqoun ov WOLpo[[O9 PULLS OT} OF DUYV[Od SIVOL BALSBIDINS OM} LOF SOLLDY OY YVY) JORJ Ol LT —'Z ALON P OTB) SQA UL payutad speyoy ol} (ILM seseo []B UL veIde Jou soop syzoded ]RUUOY ILOYd UL S1OpBANO Oty Aq warts sv susatiads jo Lequind [vI0} oy) Fey SueadeY suyy gy “[RLIe}VUL SssoTyIAO M JO MOLyeULUT[S Jo soywoydnp Jo woENNqLystp Aq posneo ‘sUOLpoo[[09 OG] JO OUIOS UL BseaLOGP OY} LOJ OPRUL MEdq YOU SBI{ BOTBMOT[L ‘BSvoLOUL JO JUOMAYwYS [ENUAY of} Suu up-—"] ALON "Yaevq_ [BOIs0[007 [RUONRN OY} OF porloysuery, o; ‘popaRwostp Wooq SULAvy suemmoods pursnoyy [eidaos ‘Apnjs puL MOIGIYXo OJ o[Qe[IVave smouttdods Fo AoquIMNUM [eNgoR Ol[} JO SSoOXO UE AVF “APPVOL UL “SC .LOQUIN SLY, popnpour st saties oyvorfdup pur oarosad oy Ut smomtoods otfy Jo ayVMUTYSO OU QUI JOR, OY Aq (Z) PUB ‘TONoa][O9 oq} Woy SHoUtOods Jo Spuusnoly [VAArO8 JO MOToalad oy AQ (T) 1Of Pa}UNODO® ST GST LOJ [2IOJ poPVUIpASo oy} JO yo od O¢ UY oLOUL Jo oSvodoOp JuOIRddE oT, “ADOOoD Jo yuomyavdop ay LopuN ‘GRRL ‘LOGO IO UL poULG od SMOTI2T[OD gy ‘savod Satpoooid Sutinp Uvyy Ssop YON Sl UOTPVOT[[O9 OT} UL OsBorOUT aq) wy} Jovy oy} JOY SyuNosR sip, “yao Satssoad s9qyo so uosvor Aq Satjoo[joo Auv op oF o[qvuuan oeeq oAvY AOZVAND QUvASISSE PUL JOJWAND OY ABO OY. SLING zy UNLIRG.O FT [RUOWBN 941 LOF OANQ NOUS y Jo yuew41edoq oy} 9B pue urnosnqyY [BUOY 049 9B [IO poatoooar sudMOads Jo JOqUINU OY} ‘OUP ISITE OF JOF ‘OpNPOUT T6,-OG68T 10} WOAID sounSy oT “olng~nosy jo yuouNsEdag ayy YAOI} WHURGIE [BUONURN oy} OJ portoood suoutoods opnpout jou op paw ‘aMoesnzY oq} [Suo0IT] portooat suawroeds 04 ATWO doUdJOJod OARY Sdoquinu 94) OBST OF dQ 4 *S[ISSO} A}VAQOJOA JO JUGWZABdOp OY} OF SMOYOTOXS JO Loquimu oDiR[ v JO TassuVs) OY} Aq PaMO(svd00 SAL ZH,-T6RT IVOA OY} IOJ JuOMMJALdap Sty} UE OSBALAP ALT, 91 06, -688T 1veX 04} SAlLunp portoood sua coquinu sty} Aq pojyuesaidod UoLjoo[[oo 94g Jo Wotaod ]pRus vw ATUO ¢ 109 ‘29 JO PBoYSUL 9O8"ZY SYA 16,-O6ST UL Sparq Jo yuoMgaVdap oY} UL SMoUttoads JO LOQUINM 72409 OIL], g ‘Z68L ‘Og PUNL pury Uo stoUttoods Jo Loquinu [RNjOR ay JO SSooxe Ut ATPYDLS SC SILT, » “MOLIAT[ON [BOTAOISTY Of} UL papuyouy 9 GRRL GOUIS VPRUL Tod SRY OSBAIOUT JO OPBUITGSA ON g £6,-Z6RT IwOA O44 SuLMp poatooas ora stoutoeds asoyy JO UOtod [yeuIs & ATUQO » ‘TRL1OZVUL SsoTqIIOM JO WOLjdefor Al} OF SULMO ‘Gggl IO} PoyBUULZSE FLY URI] SSO[ MOU ST HOLdaT[OD OY} UL SUUIOEdS JO TOquIN [e101 OT ‘Avo OF SULINpP portoood Moog OARY SNauttoods YNZ I NOGE YSnoyILyV ¢ *[RLIOITUL ssopq tom Jo Worjoofor oy) OF FUrMo ‘suompoeds FL EOF Jo oSve1o9p & SULAOYS pauiqmoo sjuomjavdop osoyy yO TYIOG UC NST LOF TRIO} ay ‘ADan{[eJout paw ADoTpoyyT, JO syuouavdep of} UL osvodouL AUB Jo goTeSqE yOerRddY ety Xq poure[dxe st sty, “O68 PUL GSI LoF spejo} oy} Jo uOSTavdmoo vB MHOAy SIvedde ULI} 10}vOID TONUL SBA 06, -G88T 1VOA Ol) SULNP SUOTI0[[00 OG) UL OSvOIOUL [ENZOR OT, z GRRl ‘OF OUNL SULpUS BYJUOUL XIs OY} OF UWOYB) UOLDaT[OO By JO SNsMad ON 7 020 ‘908 “€ | IF6‘EZZ'E | FIL‘8z0'E | FOT ‘C68 °% | FFz‘F98"s | BSP 'G08's | Gee'990'% | FRG ‘ORES | O09'LF'T | EFT ‘e9z | 296 €6T | -°>- SEEPS BOC O09 Se ot [e101 ee eee od ee | Co | 16F ogee Joe eneeeneees | Basa dadodau||aqdsroubec| sour sauce Peete sce Peau eaene ejemmtay Saray 180 ‘LE 1g) ‘oe Lcor‘poe: | ZOL ‘Zeer ‘| 9L0 ‘2S ZIF ‘TS 000 '6F | 000 '8F 000 ‘OF COOROGINN iow cues eee ine Soigee SCAG STDIN ASAE Sy ae es 2 : | : 5 000 Lz 006 °s | 00% 1G LF9 06 000 8T | 00 CA CL10°6 Cer hae ASofoas [vorsAqd pur ASopoqqry] OST 6F zt LEE ‘SF | 980 FF TOT ‘LE 069 °L3 968 ‘IZ | 109 ‘81 | TOF 81 , O19 91 ECS A al ae acs a eae deh wes ce ets ees) CCID 1 TIL “LOT TOO ‘FET =|: LI9 ‘08 tr $99 ‘68 6GF ‘8 000 ‘8 000 BE | OOO 'UE | PSS eege eee ss lah es Pleo aiaels Sah Gene a ag jugar apr ne Gan syunid yuedey 89 ‘Gil cs9‘OIL | ¢89 ‘OT Log ‘OL | 8L1 ‘OL 000 ‘OL oor 8 | 62P'L | 163 ‘2 PCORFe stews Seaside aes a aie eee pee a syuryd [isso | | | CSysn [foul (LM popupouy) ae S[[SSO] D1OZOUAL) £63 ‘68 £68 ‘G8 | FSL ‘6L coe ‘TL | ge ‘TL 166 ‘OL | SLL ‘OL GPL 69 IROOOO0 TR el emirecanee meee ee SPARS eee aca aoe S[ISSO] OTOZOS0TY 680 “6 | 668 '€6 | 0L6 ‘36 SCE G6 | 96116 6F9 'F8 16P #8 | GBF 08 000 ‘82 | 000102 | aay Re erate or ak Torr esss* S[IS8OF OfOZ0O[B 4 | ; | | Tet | we ' eos : | wt § 000 ‘¢ £0T (WW, 9 [pegeisoac eee eww eeeee aieie ieee eee wojny GT ‘EL | SS¢"ZTor | 186 GI | 938 ZL | 692 ‘TL 8o¢ ‘TT B20 TI. | CT ‘OT. 4} eas aig ggg'g | ectsreeeeees ie. Cre Share | | :LuLoyvaL oATyBaRduULo0/) 096 ‘986 | OL8 ‘EES OGL ‘92S 000 ‘02S =|: 008 ‘ETS 000 ‘ST¢ 000 ‘OeF | 000 ‘0S 000 ‘00% G28 ‘FT. Luigi. 1, eigen haa bane oo ta 8a}VAGOWOAUT OULTE AL 00g ‘eeo 00S ‘9FO 000 089 000 ‘819 000 ‘£09 000 ‘6S 000'98¢ =| 000008 =| 000 TST =| ST OOD aii sali aa snegaite ainees Eee hea 77" sqoosuy Gce'ssF =! Sab ‘78 00¢ '9LF 00¢ ‘TLF =|: 000 ‘89F 000‘sch =|: 000 “CaF 000'09F = 00 00F It CSI GLOU CBee lena ae Stags Pre 23 "hatte = 25s SASNTION,. 68 REPORT OF NATIONAL MUSEUM, 1893. CATALOGUE ENTRIES. The entries mace in the catalogue of the departments during the year have numbered 19,768. This is less than one-half of the number for 1892, but the decrease in this direction is readily accounted for by the fact that most of the curators were busily occupied during the entire year with the preparation of exhibits for the World’s Columbian Exposition, and that all collections received have not yet been cata- logued. The following table shows the number of entries made in each depart- ment of the Museum: Departments. Number of entries. Arts and industries: Materia medica 225.52 S32 3. sss te ee ee ee ae See ere mere 26 Domes fhicianintals (for MMvOuUn bin eyes ee ere eee eee eee aie eres 31 Musicaliinstruments = 262 oo8eh- ce shapes ate ae eee oe rere eae ia ie et ern aces eee 251 Transportation and ien PIN eeTIN © -aa~ sao = ne oe Oe een eee eee 31 Modern pottery, porcelain, bronzes; ett .--...-....-.+.--------- aia oe caesar 304 Graplie arts). 22 = saeco ere aro ee en ee er eee an te 254 WORGSUES, « eho seis = l= ae aeons Ae eta Sa aie aera ele a aa eee ieee i een ce ree 33 Jo) Mey bys ate Shas eh eR Amt Arak errr ke amet onR Eade mide CSS So ou ge Sao L one etsOes Sate 3, 161 SAMMELICATY ADODI LITA MO LLOI ys see ec e ae ee ree eer a ee 249 Brehistorie anthropology sess sae sae oe 2 =e ee geitishe late O ase ae sec eae eee 46) Mammals (skins and aleoholies).-...-.-..-.-.-- Bd ER ENS eS be EE 3 eo Be EO ee eee 1, 344 163 5 0 eee ee Res a= Bn tr iy SO Sen oe Eis A atc t re tee PaaS aoe SE a ee ca aect 491 ByRdS7 SCS ANG NESts) eames ater tele tae eee ee oleae ee ae eel 765 Reptiles and batrachians......-.-.-- mais Aico Sega ois SRE OSE Se Ee ORs See ee ee ee eo 2, 301 aS) Yc ge Pe ae eee ie Ee tate es Sa ME Scary sain oa ROS ae : 418 Moertebrate: fossils S.~2.2snccsac nae > Pasties ames = sme oe en eek SA eee ee eer 13 Mollusks (including Cenozoic! fossilS)- vas Sal REPORT OF ASSISTANT SECRETARY. Sl seals in the Museum collection were studied by Dr. C. Hart Merriam, U.S. Fur-seal Commissioner, in connection with the Bering Sea contro- versy. The Museum collection of plants in alcohol was temporarily trans- ferred to the Department of Agriculture for the use of Mr. Theodor Holm in connection with his studies on the life histories and growth of North American plants. The sponges belonging to the Museum collection of the family Hexactinellidie, collected in the Pacific Ocean by the steamer Albatross, have been sent to Prof. F. E. Schulz, of Berlin, who is preparing a revision of the group. He will submit a paper, based on an examination of these specimens, for publication in the Proceedings of the Museum. Arrangements have also been made with Dr. Axel Goées, of Sweden, to study the Foraminifera collected in the Gulf of Mexico, the Caribbean Sea, and the Pacific Ocean, and with Mr. John Murray, of Edinburgh, to study certain deep-sea deposits obtained by the Fish Commission steamers. THE USE OF THE GOVERNMENT SCIENTIFIC COLLECTIONS BY STUDENTS. Congress, by a joint resolution approved April 12, 1892, has formally thrown open all the literary and scientific collections in Washington for the use of students, with the definitely avowed purpose of encouraging the establishment and endowment of institutions of learning at the National Capital. This most important and liberal action is in accord with the tendency toward the establishment in Washington of a great national university, or of a group of institutions practically national in their scope, for the advancement of higher learning. The new law does not in any respect modify the attitude of the Smith- sonian Institution and National Museum, for from the very beginning students and investigators have been welcomed and given every facility for their work, and within the past fifty years thousands have availed themselves of these privileges. The action is significant, however, and especially welcome, because it shows that the legislative branch of the Government is disposed to encourage in every way the use of the collections in Washington, already vast in extent, for the one purpose tor which, above all others, they are adapted. The resolution is printed below in full: Whereas large collections illustrative of the various arts and sciences and facili- tating literary and scientific research have been accumulated by the action of Con- gress through a series of years at the National Capital; and Whereas it was the original purpose of the Government thereby to promote research and the diffusion of knowledge, and is now the settled policy and present practice of those charged with the care of these collections specially to encourage students who devote their time to the investigation and study of any branch of knowledge by allowing to them all proper use thereof; and H. Mis. 184, pt. 2 6 82 REPORT OF NATIONAL MUSEUM, 1893. Whereas it is represented that the enumeration of these facilities and the formal statement of this policy will encourage the establishment and endowment of institu- tions of learning at the seat of Government, and promote the work of education by attracting students to avail themselves of the advantages aforesaid under the direc- tion of competent instructors: Therefore, Resolved by the Senate and House of Representatives of the United States of America in Congress assembled, That the facilities for research and illustration in the following and any other Governmental collections now existing or hereafter to be established in the city of Washington for the promotion of knowledge shall be accessible, under such rules and restrictions as the officers in charge of each collection may prescribe, subject to such authority as is now or may hereafter be permitted by law, to the sci- entific investigators and to students of any institution of higher education now incor- porated or hereafter to be incorporated under the laws of Congress or of the District of Columbia, to wit: One. Of the Library of Congress. Two. Of the National Museum. Three. Of the Patent Office. Four. Of the Bureau of Education. Five. Of the Bureau of Ethnology. Six. Of the Army Medical Museum. Seven. Of the Department of Agriculture. Eight. Of the Fish Commission. Nine. Of the Botanic Gardens. Ten. Of the Coast and Geodetic Survey. Eleven. Of the Geological Survey. Twelve. Of the Naval Observatory. Approved, April 12, 1892. VISITORS. The number of visitors to the Museum building during the year ending June 30, 1893, was 319,930, an increase of 50,105 over the preceding year; and to the Smithsonian building, 174,188, an increase of 59,371 over the preceding year. The monthly register of visitors during the fiscal year ending June 30, 1893, is as follows: National Nee Z | Smithsonian Year and month. eee’ building. 1892. Sth See ee ecb es dein cboses esses ass oocuacssbeand oa adonnddeero sac ds orate 21, 846 10, 132 PARTIR issece seaee an 26 Or Garr BOOSEE RSC Sa ance GsancOcue ssogass eae ocseesccsas 18, 776 8, 704 Sep sG)al) so) eee eeeier oo Ub oes scésonasnne su: Eeneresscotesecaosncaasedeacc 122, 484 75, 392 (0) | te te SSE CRE Rn eeeaen in ce ecner mac comsca saccaascUene ean: Sect 28, 434 9, 194 INOVEMDCL! = 2.2 so5. aes se Joc See ee ence ie ie lee clarinets eee | 12, 139 5, 229 IDSs WER Seco esabageasanes Qoob fos ccoch ont sanboncabanees seadsorcasosese: | 14, 992 | 7, 284 1893 ! UI RIAY 55-6 sp ce doce ne sos go see seed Sane os oe SHA SeneecnnoseS= se 558ere o- 10, 819 5, 291 LYS EE Aina 55 S5 abn ob. a8 she secon enopeconpagcas (doce sone ssonssstisseesonoast 12, 656 5, 869 BED) ee Se ne ee ey eee SEI CaS HRS tot in enema Sue Hanae 36, 760 | 25, 544 TNS etl enon Socooc bac cas seme cseS Jn oats Dcidtetceed We See cee eee eee 12, 778 7, 415 yen ne Bee Sere tS OS Gp one AAPOR RSE SOD ASE GE ee oe Ss Seib ne atceSe 16, 662 7,970 TNO. 3 Sos ho rea eo ee ik wk eae a oe oer en ee ee 11, 584 6, 094 Total*sc cock SR sestscte as on Sob cadens eee ee eee eee ite Serna eter 319, 930 174, 188 Approximate daily average on a basis of 313 days in the year...-..--.---. 1, 022 556 REPORT OF ASSISTANT SECRETARY. 83 Number of visitors to the Museum and Smithsonian buildings since the opening of the for- mer in ISS1. Year. Minar | Spitheonien | CP vieliors to = = both buildings. SS ee eee ee, 5, vs eae etc eweise Weasae cures TO OOO eee. Sone ecaee 150, 000 1ECCR se GS 302s Se et VASE SSS ke eee eee 167, 455 152, 744 320, 199 AGED PER ee ty A Ske Se antes ER een ee 202, 188 104, 823 | 307, 011 iGy| job ree eee eee? Jeph hee ee ee eo See re 195, 322 91, 130 | 286, 452 LGGES (CA ey SU) Roden 66 ape eB AGUS GBee Ren asoce 107, 365 60, 428 167, 793 TEE TR seat Se Se oe ae 5 Sh ee ae a co AROS Oe Fg 174, 225 88, 960 | 263, 185 TATRA = Be ee ee et er ey cig ee oe ee oR a 216, 562 98, 552 315, 114 TASTER eee Fay ee ees sae Net soe os! 249, 665 102, 863 | 352, 528 TAIRA OSS Balas Seep ee 374, 843 149, 618 | 524, 461 HSSOSIO0 ae pee oR OSE San ate ete 9 Oe REP eee | 274, 324 120, 894 395, 218 UES} Si) eee eee CO Se SEGRE Sachose Heche a5anne 286, 426 111, 669 398, 095 TERA GP Ae ie Soe Sees ae Re ane ee eee 969, 825 114, 817 384. 642 CUPS OR) GAM. Ga te Spe ete Ne See olay ae ne 319, 930 174, 188 494, 118 ental Oe geet eke ON Jee eee | 2,908,130 | ‘1,370, 686 | 4, 358, 816 QUESTIONS OF CORRESPONDENTS AND REQUESTS FOR IDENTIFICATION. In an editorial in the London “ Atheneum” not long ago, it was said that there is not a department of the British Government to which a citizen has a right to apply for information upon a scientific question. This seems hard to believe, for I can not think of any scientific subject regarding which a letter, if addressed to the scientific bureaus in Wash- ington, would not receive a full and practical reply. It is estimated that not less than 20,000 such letters are received each year. The Smithsonian Institution and National Museum alone receive about 6,000, and the proportion of these from the new States and Territories, which have not yet developed institutions of learning of their own, is the largest. An intelligent question from a farmer on the frontier receives as much attention as a communication from a royal academy of sciences, and often takes more time for the preparation of the reply. A large number of specimens are sent to the Museum each year by correspondents in different parts of the country for examination and report. Although very little benefit to the Museum is derived from the labor thus performed, it has always been the policy of the Museum to assist its correspondents in this direction as far as practicable. By far the larger portion of the material received is geological. Quantita- tive analyses, however, can not be undertaken, owing to lack of facilities for such work. The Cathedral of Astorga sends a very beautiful globular vessel of rock crystal, engraved in the East with elegant scrolls in relief. This is attributed, and probably with justice, to the eleventh century; its beauty 1s, however, much lessened by a seventeenth century gilt mount, which has transformed it into a tall 2-handled * This would serve equally well for Alfonzo IV, whose Queen also bore the naime of Ximena. This King abdicated in 927, and his Queen died in the previous year. 102 REPORT OF NATIONAL MUSEUM, 1893. vase. An equally beautiful object, but by far different character, is the crystal Navecilla, a erystal ship on wheels, with elaborate Gothie meunts of silver gilt from the Cathedral of Toledo. It is about 15 inches in length, the body of the vessel made of rock erystal, above which is a considerable superstructure of silver gilt in which the ribs of the ship are indicated. At the prow and stern the bulwarks are formed of a band of elegant tracery surmounted by a cresting of leaves. The figure- head is a wyvern in full relief, and the keel is formed of a band of boldly modeled leaf-work. All the lines of the construction are very graceful, and the composition is pleasing as well as unusual. It is said to have been the property of Dona Juana la Loca, and probably became the property of the Cathedral as a votive offering. Another ship, of which the body is formed of a large turbo shell, is shown from Saragossa, but this, though very quaint, and of perhaps a somewhat earlier date, can not be compared for beauty with the crystal ship of Toledo.” The painted enamels can not be better described than by the pen of Mr. Read: “It is somewhat surprising to find among the ecclesiastical objects from the various cathedrals so few painted enamels that are worthy of note. A good trip- tych belonging to the Cathedral of Saragossa would seem to be from the hand of Nardon Penicaud or of his school. The central subject is of the Adoration of the Magi, painted in the usual mdiner, the faces somewhat round, and here and there the small raised jewels or rosettes backed with foil. The Conde de Valencia has also a triptych by the same artist, whoseems to have been popular in Spain, to judge by the comparative frequency of his works. Three other enamels in the collection shown by the Conde de Valencia de Don Juan are, however, of far greater interest and beauty. The first of these is of North Italian work of the fifteenth century, a circular pectorial medallion, with a hinged front displaying both inside and out scenes from the Passion painted in the exquisite style characteristic of this period and country, and of which we have a few good examples in the British Museum. The back of this charming pendant is formed of a plate of pearl shell engraved with the Crucifixion, and every part seems in perfect preservation. The two other enamels are of Limoges, the more important being a brilliant triptych, unsigned, but doubtless by Leonard Limousin, the second ar equally brilliant but small plaque painted by Pierre Reymond in 1537, with the Good Shepherd giving crooks to the shepherds, and the exhortation to the shepherds is inscribed in two panels at the top. The triptych represents the Last Supper, and has the arms of Lorraine beneath quarterly and an inescutcheon of pretence of Lorraine, while on the wings are the arms of Lorraine (ona bend three alerions) and those of France, as well as a motto, which would point to the piece having been made for a personage of distinction. The Conde de Valencia also exhibits a large and interesting series of the small champleve enamel plaques from horse trappings, most of which have devices of an armorial character, both Moorish a.d Christian. These little ornaments were used in all European countries in medieval times, and a large number, such as are to be found here, could scarcely fail to produce some interesting results, if time were given to their study “The absence of any large number of Limoges or Italian enamels is not so surpris- ing as the entire want of Flemish plate of the period of Charles V orearlier. There are no doubt some pieces which, on examination, would prove to be of Flemish manufacture, but there is certainly nothing like a display of such objects, and it seems scarcely credible that great quantities of church plate and objects of domestic use were not brought from Flanders, a country where art of this kind had attained to such perfection.” Mr. Read also describes two famous historical Arab standards, which I will give in his words: “The Monastery of Las Huelgas at Burgos has sent one of its greatest treasures in the standard of the Almohade Sultan, captured by Alfonso VIII at the famous battle of Las Navas in 1212, a wonderful specimen of Arab silk weaving, still pre- REPORT OF ASSISTANT SECRETARY. 103 serving in many parts the original colors. Though much restored it still possesses the most important of its original features. It is covered with verses of the Koran, the Mohammedan formula and other Arabic inscriptions. This precious relie is tra- ditionally stated to have been given by the victorious King to the monastery which still possesses it, and it is only used in the procession of Corpus Christi. Senor Riano thinks it probable that ‘Alfonso VIII’ should be ‘Alfonso XI’ (1812-1350), as he con- siders the banner to be of the fourteenth century work. An appropriate pendant to this comes from the Cathedral of Burgos, the standard of Alfonso VIII carried at the same battle, or, to speak more accurately, all that now remains of it, representing the Crucifixion, the Virgin, and St. John. “An Arab standard of similar work to the first belongs the Cathedral of Toledo. This is the Bandera del Salado, made in Fez in the year 1312 A. D. The central design is very original, and the combinations of colors singularly beautiful. It is formed of sixteen crescents of gold, arranged in four lines, each having within it, in white on a green ground, the Mohammedan formula repeated eight times, each cres- cent containing one-half of the fomula; and around is a broad border formed by chapters of the Koran, written in intertwined Cufie letters. The effect of the alter- nating tints of gold, green, red, and white, which appear to be little affected by time, is very rieh and harmonious.” The rich armor was very striking. Among the collection was noted a complete Gothic armor of the fifteenth century. Another suit of the same century had a helmet with a human mask. The jousting harnesses of Charles V and Philip II, elaborately chiseled and plated with gold, were displayed on manikins of horse and rider. There were also a number of figures showing the equipment of the foot sol- diers of the fourteenth to the sixteenth centuries. On the walls were helmets, tro- phies of swords, daggers, arbalests, coats of mail, helmets, ete., displaying a remark- able richness in form and ornamentations. Senor Don José Estrech, of Barcelona, sent a fine series intended to show the his- tory of arms and armor from the eighth century down to the present time. Among other pistols, muskets, and firearms, chiseled, incrusted,and damaskeened, was the pistol of Charles V, made by the famous Peter Pech. The sword of Pizarro and of Cortes, with weapons and armor stated to be those of the conquerors of Peru, formed an interesting group. Several swords of Boabdil, the last Moorish King of Granada, shown are of remark- able artistic value as well as of romantic interest. They are thus described by Mr. Cee head: “One of them has been already mentioned as coming from the Royal Armoury but it is plain in make, and its principal interest is its history. It is far otherwise with the beautiful swords belonging to the Marques de Viane and the Marques Cam- potejar, and another sword belonging to the Archeological Museum of Madrid, though somewhat older, belongs to the same class. This last is made entirely of metal, the hilt and guard being of bronze with gilt details, the blade of steel, the total length 40 inches. The pommel is globular, flattened on the two faces, on each of which isa circular medallion engraved with ornamental Cufie characters; the grip is fusiform, engraved with circles joined together by a single twist, and con- taining also Cufic letters. The guard is of the peculiar form characteristic of the Moorish swords of the late fifteenth century, viz, rounded shoulders ending on either side of the blade in a narrow limb running parallel with it, the outer edge of the limb curving inward to the end, where it suddenly turns outward in a hook, the hollow formed by this curving of the limb being filled up in this case with a plate of metal pierced with circular holes. The faces of the guard are quite flat, and engraved with conjoined circles, like those on the grip, the spaces between them being filled with engraved floral designs. The bands forming the circles are in all cases gilt. The blade is straight and two-edged and has upon one face the stamp of the armorer, a circle containing badly written characters which have 104 REPORT OF NATIONAL MUSEUM, 1893. not yet been read, but they are conjectured to be Hebrew, from the fact of the Jews in Spain devoting themselves to the manufacture of arms. This sword came from the Church of San Marcelo, the warrior saint, at Leon, and was there long con- nected with him. It is believed that it may have been a gift by the King Ferdi- nand the Catholic on the translation of the body of the martyr from Africa, The Boabdil sword of the Marques Campotejar is of the same general type, but is infi- nitely more sumptuous in execution, and, in addition, it retains its scabbard com- plete. The mounts, both of the sword and scabbard, are of silver gilt, embossed and richly chased with formal floral designs of the same style as those of the ivory casket of the Cathedral of Palencia (supra, p.24), though, of course, the sword is of amuch later date. The mounts are further enriched with bands and medallions of translucent cloisonné enamel, a feature which this sword has in common with that of the Marques de Viane. An interesting, and to some extent peculiar, circum- stance connected with this sword is that, notwithstanding the pure Moorish char- acter of its ornament, yet it would seem to have been the work of a Christian artif- icer, working for the Moors at Granada. The bonds of amity which existed between Boabdil and Ferdinand, for some years before the final stand made by the Moors for the possession of Granada, would account for the presence in the Court of Boabdil of Christian workmen, who doubtless succeeded in serving two masters in different capacities. Upon the plain backs of one of the two tabs to which the sword belt was attached is stamped, in characters of the period, the name Jran Abad, with the pomegranate of Granada, as well as another stamp not easy to inter- pret. This Christian stamp illustrates a remark of Sefor Riano (in his introduction to the Catalogue of Spanish Works of Art inthe South Kensington Museum): ‘The continued contact of the Christian and Mohammedanraces, notwithstanding the bar barism of the time and the difference of creed, did not oblige them to live perpetu- ally as enemies. This contact could not fail to influence works of art and industry, and for this reason many archeological objects of the Spanish Middle Ages possess a peculiar character.’ “The third sword of this type and, like the last, once the property of Boabdil, is that belonging to the Marques de Viane, who exhibits also the velvet jacket, another sword, and a dagger, stated to have been taken from the Moorish King at his defeat (in 1492) and given by Ferdinand the Catholic to one of the ancestors of the present owner. One of these is the most perfect example in the exhibition of the refine- ment and richness of effect of which Arab artis capable. It combines the highest efforts of the enameler, the carver, and the goldsmith, and doubtless the blade is of ‘corresponding quality, and in every part it is well preserved. The actual grip is of ivory, the rest of the hilt is of gold, entirely covered with granular work and tiligree, in which are set at intervals eight pointed and cruciform panels of translu- cent cloisonné enamel, The ivory grip is deeply carved with geometrical designs forming panels of various shapes, filled with Arabie inscriptions alluding to the weapon, and ornamental leaves and other devices, and where the ivory joins the metal are two broad bands of cloisonné enamel ‘the cloisons being here, as upon other parts of the mounting, of gold) composed of screll work of the greatest beauty, interrupted by shaped panels containing Arabic inscriptions, among which might be expected the name of the artist, but this nowhere appears. The pommel is spherical, but at the upper end is prolonged as a straight point, and is entirely covered with the granular work and enameled panels mentioned above. This granular goldsmith’s work is of the same style as that of the bands of the Persian casket from the Cathedral of Saragossa and might in fact be the work of the same artist. The ground is filled with minute pellets of gold, through which run lines of Arabic inscriptions, outlined in flat gold wire, thus leaving the interior of each letter empty. The enameled crosses upon the pommel are changed into a different form by the exigencies of the shape of the pommel, the artist finding it necessary to reduce the four limbs of the cross to three, and the corresponding outlines of the REPORT OF ASSISTANT’ SECRETARY. 105 eight pointed panels are ingeniously altered and adapted to the same end. The sur- face of the guard is ornamented with similar work, and it is only necessary to men- tion that the two ends running parallel with the blade terminate in the heads of monsters, from each of which springs an elegant openwork border of spiral scrolls, enameled in white and other colors. The blade is straight, and has the stamp of the armorer upon one side. The sheath is of red leather, though very little of this foundation is visible, as one-half of its length is hidden by mounts matching those of the sword itself, and these fit into each other so closely that when the sword is in the scabbard it is impossible to distinguish where the guard ends and the scab- bard mounts begin. This sword is described, and the inscriptions are given, by Senor Riano, p. 84. “The enameled details upon this sword are of peculiar interest, not only for their intrinsic merits, which are very great, but also as serving to decide the origin of the beautiful stirrups in the Forman collection. These stirrups were exhibited before the Society of Antiquities of London, and are described in their proceedings (Vol. x1v, 169). It is sufficient here to say that they are of Moorish form, of iron, plated with silver, which is engraved with Oriental designs, while upon the sides are semicircular plates of silver with nielloed designs somewhat in the style of the arabesques of Aldegrever. Around these are borders of cloisonné enamel on gold, in style and execution se like the sword just described that there can be little ques- tion as to their common origin, though it is probable that the sword is earlier in date by perhaps a quarter of a century. The niello plates of the stirrups also could very well be of a Spanish make, as the use of the niello is not uncommon, both in Moorish and Christian work of medieval and later times. An example of this is near at hand, in the second sword shown by the Marques de Viane. This is more a weapon for use than for parade, and is asimple form, by no means beautiful, though the details are planned and carried out with the greatest skill. Like the other, it has a straight blade, apparently also of Christian make, or at least not Moorish; the handle 1s entirely of ivory, the grip cylindrical, with a thicker cylinder above and below, and forming the pommel, being slightly curved inward at the sides. The whole handle is engraved with beautiful scroll work, brought into relief by an inlay of black substance, probably akin to niello, and upon the sides of the pommel is the shield of arms of the kings of Granada, as seen upon the azulejos of the Alhambra. The scabbard is in keeping with the modesty of the sword, being a plain leather sheath, tooled like a bookbinding with a scale pattern, and having a silver mount and chape, the former engraved and nielloed with Arabic inscriptions and the shield of Granada, and the chape engraved in a similar manner. The con- trast between this simple and useful weapon and the gorgeous blade shown beside it is most remarkable and instructive, and the fortunate owners of them both may be congratulated on the possession of hereditary treasures of a kind and quality but seldom seen. “There now remains to notice the collections of pottery, which are confined almost entirely to the lustered wares so well known and so highly appreciated all over the world for their decorative qualities. Before describing these, however, it is desirable to allude to an altogether unexpected, though by no means unimportant, exhibit of mosque lamps of pottery and glass sent by the Imperial Ottoman Museum at Con- stantinople. Otthe pottery lamps the most curious, though the least ornamental, is one with two rows of handles, covered with oil gilding, and decorated only with two narrow bands of inscription in blue, the rest of the surface being plain white; prob- ably a product of the potteries either at Cairo or Damascus. Far more beautiful, and of unusually large size, are two richly-colored lamps of Rhodian ware, with bosses round the lower part filled with elegant arabesque designs, the rest of the surface covered with inscriptions and ornament. The red and turquoise colors are of unusual brilliancy, and the execution of the ornament, as well as the outlines of the lamps themselves, leave nothing to be desired. Four small lamps, painted entirely 106 REPORT OF NATIONAL MUSEUM, 1893. in pale blue, though neither so unusual nor so immediately attractive, are fine speci- mens of their kind. Their principal decoration consists of bands of ornamental Cufic, the spaces between being filled with delicately penciled devices that recall the illuminated Persian manuscripts of the fifteenth century. The glass lamps seem to be of Venetian manufacture, and probably of the fifteenth or early sixteenth cen- tury. They are all of lace glass of various patterns, somewhat coarse in make, and they preserve the usual form of the mosque lamp. In addition to these there are two trumpet-shaped lamps of the same kind of glass, which have been used either as the oil receptacle of a pottery lamp or perhaps independently, as they would be too large for any but the largest size of lamp. Some of these Venetian lamps have been thought by their Mussulman owners to be too simple in style, and accordingly they have been painted with flowing scrolls in gold, which gives them rather a tawdry appearance. ‘‘Of Spanish wares the only collections of any note are those of the Conde de Valencia de Don Juan, Senor Don Guillermo de Osma, and of the Archeological Museum of Madrid. Unfortunately the latter collection must be dismissed with but little notice, for the objects were arranged in panels upon the walls of the room, reaching to the ceiling, and it was therefore barely possible to see them, and quite out of the question to examine any of them closely. One of the plates is said to have an Arabic word upon it, a most unusual thing, but as it was at least 12 feet from the floor it was not possible to verify this statement, which has already been doubted. Among the objects nearer at hand was, however, one of the famous Alhambra vases, a fine specimen standing more than 4 feet high, but unfortunately wanting one of its handles. It is decorated in yellow or pale blne, with a profusion of arabesque designs and inscriptions, one of the latter referring to its use as a water jar. This vase came from the parish church of Hernos (Jaen), where it was used as a holy-water vessel. A similar story is told of an equally fine vase, now in the museum at Palermo. Another jar of Toledan make is interesting as bearing the name of the maker. It is an oviform vessel of common clay, nearly 3 feet in height, unglazed, and with two projecting ears or handles on the shoulders. The ornament consists of impressions from oblong stamps, with animals, monsters, ete. Near the neck are impressed three stamps inscribed in black letter en toled me feci dj perez. This dates probably from the sixteenth century. “The collections of the Conde de Valencia and Senor de Osma areshown together, and comprise a superb series of the lustered wares of the various Spanish factories, a number of tiles, interesting for their devices as well as for the technical processes of their manufacture, and a large and unique series of a curious ware believed to have been made in Andalusia in the fifteenth and sixteenth centuries, but of which the history is at present somewhat uncertain. Among the lustered wares the most remarkable pieces are two dishes painted in blue and luster, with figures in fantastic costumes of the fifteenth century, one of the dishes representing a fishing scene, car- ried around the dish in a quaint fashion. Two covered bowls are also worthy of remark, both from their rarity and the originality of their design, the covers being of the same shape as the bowls, but somewhat larger in the mouth, and when placed together the form is that of a barrel with narrow ends. Many other pieces of this beautiful series deserve mention, if space permitted. The Andalusian ware, how- ever, is less known, and therefore deserves more particular notice. Though it can scarcely be said to possess so great a charm as the lustered wares, yet it has an origi- nality and vigor which is rarely found in any but the earliest productions of Valen- cia and Malaga. It recalls in appearance the Italian sgraffiato wares, though the process of manufacture is of quite a different character. The method employed is, however, not quite clear, but seems to have been to draw the outlines of the design in some substance which was thrown off in the furnace, leaving little or no trace of its presence, but which, before the firing, possessed an antipathy to the colored glaze used to fill up the design, so that these glazes could be applied close up to the REPORT OF ASSISTANT SECRETARY. 107 edge of the outlines without in any instance impinging upon them. In no ease is the clearness of the outline interfered with, though it is rare to find an instance of the glaze being otherwise than close to its edge. The glazes are thick and heavy, probably with a base of tin, and the colors used are rich and full—amber, green, slaty blue, yellow, and manganese. The collection comprises five large dishes, twenty-four small, an oviform vase, two large panels with the arms of Castile-Leon and Aragon-Sicily, as well as tiles. The designs of the dishes are vigorously, if somewhat coarsely drawn, and include a head of a young man in the costume of the late fifteenth century, a deer and other animals, heraldic lions, and motives derived from plants and trees. Some of the tiles have inscriptions in black letter, and the oviform vase bears the legend, Mjel rosado coad (Honey of roses). It may be of inter- est to mention that this ware is being imitated in Spain at the present time, and a good many examples of these imitations are to be found in the shops in Madrid; and though the character of the work lends itselfeasily to imitation, there are essen- tial differences between the old and the new.” There were few musical instruments. Two organs of Charles V, shown for their artistic cases; a Moorish rebeek of four strings, and a clavichord may be mentioned. The latter is one of the most curious musical instruments belonging to the history of music in the seventeenth century. The instrument exhibited is said to have been made in 1625 by Fraz Raymundo Truchado. I heard several performances upon this instrument and found the music not unpleasing. Of music books there was a great number, the ponderous illuminated missals of the Escorial and other cathedrals forming an attractive exhibit.. A MSS. of the thirteenth century, entitled ‘‘Himnos Religiosos,” is interesting as showing early partmusic. The MSS. is preserved in the National Library. Another folio in vellum from the Cathedral of Tuy contains the psalms of St. Augustine, with the first page of ancient music without the pentagram (Sin pentagrama). There were in the exposition numerous documents relating to the history of the discovery of America, consisting of letters, charts, books, etc. The Papal exhibit contained two famous charts on vellum of the Old and New Worlds, made in the third decade of the sixteenth century. The better preserved map measures 85 centi- meters in height and 2.09 meters in width. It bears the inscription: ‘ Carta Vniver- sal en que se contiene todo lo que del mundo se ha descubierto fasta agova, hizola Diego Ribera, cosmographo de Su Majestad, ano de 1529, en Sevilla. La qual se devide en dos partes conforme la capitulacion que hicieron los Catholicos Reyes de Espana e el Rey Juan de Portogual en Tordesillas, ano de 1494.” On either side of the line showing the division of the New World between Spain and Portugal are the banners of these countries. In Peru the conquest had extended to Sierra Morena, on whose southern border is written in red ink the name of the last people then known, Chincax Cibad— that is, the city of Chincha, founded by Almagro. The other chart is perhaps older. It bears the famous line ef Alexander VI. It shows the plan of the City of Mexico and the illuminated portraits of Montezuma, Atahualpa, and Prester John, of the Indias. The National Library exhibited 150 manuscripts comprising Greek, Persian, Hebrew, and Arab codices, bibles, liturgical, and devotional works; works on science, art, history, geography, literature, and the theater, autographs and codices notable for the importance of the text, binding, ornamentation, ete. Among the Hebrew manuscripts is an interesting Book of Esther, which the Jews read on feast days. It is a roll of parchment 3.50 meters long and 29 centimeters wide, dating from the beginning of the fourteenth century, written in 24 columns of 22 lines each. Among the numerous Arabic manuscripts was the book of Alfarabi, entitled “Music,” which explains the beginning of music, voices, tones, and instruments. It contains drawings of instruments and figures of music. This remarkable codex of the fourteenth century is the best of the three existing in Europe, one being in the Ambrosiana at Milan and the other in Leiden. 108 REPORT OF NATIONAL MUSEUM, 1893. The first edition of the polyglot bible of Cardinal Cisneros dated 1514-1517 and the only copy of the first edition of Don Quijote were shown. A few Jewish relies of interest were displayed. One of these was a precious frag- ment of a roll of the Thorah or Hebrew Pentateuch of the fourteenth century, which no doubt belonged to an ancient Spanish synagogue. The fragment contains the last chapters of the Book of Leviticus and the first chapters of Numbers. Another book from the Cathedral of Toledo, written in rabbinical characters, had ‘¢73 hojas de arbol llamado Parra van ensartadas en una cuerda.” There was an astrolabe of burnished bronze made by Philip Il in the sixteenth century, as the inscription shows. There was a beautiful) mosque lamp from the Alhambra, composed of four parts, the upper formed by four apples in delicate openwork combining the motto of the Al-Ahmares; the second below a kind of pyramidal chimney, each face of tine, engraved fretwork; the third section is a large screen composed of four wings fretted and engraved with the Al-Ahmares motto in African characters; the fourth section is funnel-shaped, having attached eight fretwork arms. This lamp was ordered by the Sultan Mohammed III of Granada in the year 705 of the Hegira, 1305 A. D. From the same city is an oil holder covered with very delicate work with enamel inscriptions in gold of the purest Grenadine handicraft. Itdates from the fourteenth century. The pieces just described belong to the National Archeological Museum of Spain. From Leon were shown two torch holders of four lights. They are formed of a disk of plate iron with fretted ogival ornamentation. In the center of the disk the sockets to remove the links are grouped. These date from the fifteenth to the six- teenth centuries. The Escorial sent a very beautiful lamp of bronze and coral of the seventeenth century. Mention may be made of the unique series of royal, ecclesiastical, and municipal seals of wax and lead, the jewelry and miniatures and the large collection of artistic ironwork for which Spain is so famous. The naval and military museums made an important chronological exhibit of their respective subjects. THE WORLD'S COLUMBIAN EXPOSITION. At the beginning of the fiscal year, preparations for the World’s Fair had been in active progress for fifteen months, and many of the exhibits had been completed, mounted, provided with labels, and were being packed. Much progress had also been made in the construction of cases, and the taxidermists had finished a number of the most ‘important groups of animals. Uncertainty as to the amount of money which would ultimately be appropriated by Congress for our exhibit, and similar uncertainty as to the amount of space which would finally be available in the Govern- ment building, the dimensions of which had already been much con- tracted from those proposed in the original plan, owing to the costli- ness of building in Chicago, made it impossible as yet to decide exactly what would be sent. Indeed, the indefinite manner in which the appropriations were made was a cause of great embarrassment, since no positive plans could be made, and work, which otherwise could have been done deliberately and at moderate expense, was delayed until the last moment, to be finished in haste and at greater cost. REPORT OF ASSISTANT SECRETARY. 109 After the adjournment of Congress in August, the character of the exhibit was finally decided upon, and as soon as the Government build- ing had been completed and the space allotted, the plans for installa- tion were made. It was not until December, however, that the build- ing was so far completed that the space could be studied with reference to the final arrangement of the collections. The work of shipping began in February, and continued until late in April, when the last cars were loaded. Twenty-five carloads in all were sent, among the last being the collections returned from the exhibi- tion at Madrid. The total number of boxes was 1,305, aggregating 145 tons, or more than a quarter of a million pounds. The amount of space finally occupied by the Institution was 21,250 square feet, of which 5,875 feet were set apart for main isles or thor- oughfares. This was much less than had originally been planned for, and necessitated the omission of many objects and the too great erowd- ing of others. The work of installation was begun in March, at which time Mr. Earll, the special agent in charge of the exhibit, went to Chicago to remain through the Exposition. Sixteen expert mechanics and preparators went from the Museum in March, and about twenty additional mechanics and laborers were constantly employed in Chicago from that time until the installation was completed. Early in April a number of the curators went on to superintend the arrangement of their respective exhibits. Notwithstanding the delays of the railroads, many of our ears having been three weeks on the way, the exceedingly inclement weather, which ‘aused much sickness in the force, and the unfinished state of the building, and the showers of rain and snow which found their way through the roof upon the specimens as they were being unpacked and npon the polished wood and glass of the cases, the installation was practically ended before the opening of the Exposition, and at the time when the doors were thrown open there was every appearance of completion, although, owing to the causes already mentioned, a con- siderable amount of work had to be done in May. At the end of the fiscal year the Exposition had run only one-third of its course, but the throngs of visitors* and the appreciative com- ments of those qualified to judge of the merits of the exhibition indi- cate that notwithstanding the many difficulties which it has been nec- essary to face the participation of the Institution in the Exposition is a successful one. The character of the collections sent is discussed very fully in the review of the work of the scientific departments of the Museum. The description of the exhibit as a whole will be deferred until after the close of the Exposition. ue popularity of the Smithsonian exhibit may be gauged by the difficulty that a visitor experiences in forcing his way through the almost immovable crowd.” F. A. SATHER, in Natural Science, London, 1893. 110 REPORT OF NATIONAL MUSEUM, 1893. The exhibits of the Smithsonian Institution were designedly selected so as to supplement and be supplemented by those displayed elsewhere in Jackson Park. It was our purpose to avoid all rivalry, and, so far as could be done without disobeying the implied requirement of the law, that the exhibits should illustrate all the functions of Government institutions, to show nothing which would be shown well by others. In consequence, our exhibits can not well be considered except in connection with the others of a similar character. This has been well done by Mr. William H. Dall, in a series of three letters on “Science at the Fair,” published by the New York Nation, as being the result of a careful review by an unbiased observer and the only really careful report of the kind which has been made.* The accompanying diagram of the floor space of the Government building shows in a general way the assignment of our space and its relation to that occupied by the other Departments of the Government. (Pl. 56). The exhibit of the Government was made under the direction of a board of control and management, appointed by the President in accordance with an ** Act providing for the celebration of the four hundredth anniversary of the discovery of America by Christopher Columbus,” ete., approved April 25, 1890.¢ This board was composed of one member representing each Department. At the beginning of the Exposition the board was composed of the original appointees, as follows: Sevellon A. Brown, chief clerk, Department of State; A. B. Nettleton, Assistant Secretary, Treasury Department; Maj. Clifton Comly, U. S. A., War Department; Commodore k. W. Meade, U. S. N., Navy Department; A. D. Hazen, Third Assistant Postmaster- General, Post-Office Department; H. A. Taylor, Commissioner of Rail- roads, Department of the Interior; E. C. Foster, General Agent, Department of Justice; Edwin Willits, Assistant Secretary, Depart- ment o fAgriculture; J. W. Collins, Assistant, U.S. Fish Commission, and G. Brown Goode, Assistant Secretary, Smithsonian Institution; but shortly after the opening of the Exposition Mr. W. E. Curtis became the representative of the Department of State, Mr. F. A. Stocks of the Treasury, Prof. F. W. Clarke of the Interior, and Dr. Tarleton H. Bean of the Fish Commission. The funetions and responsibilities of this board were very different from those of the boards previously charged by Congress with the preparation of Government exhibits, and it remains to be seen whether the change is altogether advantageous, either in the matter of efficiency or economy. In previous exhibitions the representative of each Department has been looked upon as the representative of its official head, and the Government exhibit has been an assemblage of indi- *DaLit, W. H. The Columbus Exposition.—Science. The Nation, Sept. 14, 21, 28, 1893.—(Nos. vul-1x of The Nation series of letters.) t See Appendix Ix. Report of National Museum, 1893. PLATE 56 ' | NORTH | | | | | es 5 \ eel | Fs = Slits PATENT OFFICE | 3 352 P | os z |! FISHING 2) ae & pw.0 a} = J l aie [tes eee a eS CLUE In sureau oF INF I = = ee | | Ww IBOTANY x | APPLIANCES | FORESTRY = ae ui ¢ Pent eye | ovision = « Wo) OFFICE 7 =a ot Si , Q | Orwes'on 5 FE | [VESSELS AND APPLIANCES | ef c o z S_|FOR INVESTIGATION. OBJECTS: DIV. OF! | lo = | — SS ILLUSTRATING RESUTLS OF 'ENTO'GY < = w 2 ] | 3 TINVESTIGATIUN u = O ee <= = 1s 3 rs S a|census) oO |B], ves. | cotron 3 | zs I r lO, ° = | bs} Blorrice| 7IBRES. & LAND o uw ooo ba 3 SiGe | x Fe =] { corron | ro) by a OFICE g weil \ if Teas! | w \ . Su eee | es \ | 35> 6° zx TOBACCO woot Ez | | } | GS=z! | i] BUREAU OF aa ——t = S | || EDUCATION » FOREIGN EXHIBIT | Pe ! | ——| ROTUNDA ] | J DEPARTMENT - ~~ ae 3S Zug DEPARTMENT OF STATE Yor ag aS SS SSE 2 S~x $ >= = =o efa | sot ZEsi| O 3 = Su S3< = S B@F) |2¢3)-w—-! - o aw ges) a yA Se 50 te —_ +} 9 —___— s aN = f i z we z,¢s|i 9 = ~bzs CON ON Sz 2285|0 Fa) 2 2ziéca PAIN = >) z2 Reade z o Sizzs \| \ fqn z ieee = 3 < ass | Ne) e a 2 or -v <= | S222 @ | & giz & | || signau SJ oj a— S25 < S Fria © | i [225) S 2 PB || BUREAU Sx —— lui oc } ——} | oor \———————)_ | ORONANCE SECTION) > =x Sz 2<5 =| ra eae || CARTRIDGE & STOCK Eaose ui a || | MaKING macuines | [S33 ° * 3 2 | | rg | | eee w i w oi = | fF Fa a 3 z | 8 eens : 5 El [L =I SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NH] w 5 2) - —- i ke) as v4 fe 9°) wu wi « aS) Z = N= ee a < |} | o 3 = = 3 | NATIONAL MUSEUM = 1 | aod, WeNally & Co., Eugr's, Chicago. GROUND PLAN OF THE UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT BUILDINGS AT THE WorRLD’S COLUMBIAN EXPOSITION, 1893. REPORT OF ASSISTANT SECRETARY. Sit vidual exhibits, each illustrating, under the control of the Department itself, its functions and administrative methods. The Chicago board, apparently rather through the decisions of the Treasury Department than by reason of the intent of the law, has been forced into quite another position. Under the provision of section 18, which subjects the “itemized accounts and vouchers” to the approval of the Secretary of the Treasury, jurisdiction in detail over the affairs of the board was assumed by officials of that Department, and their rulings have formed, of necessity, the dominant standard of judgment. dy virtue of an early ruling based upon the provision of section 16, which empowers the heads of the Uxecutive Departments and the directors of the Smithsonian Institution and National Museum, and of the U.S. Fish Commission, to designate the articles which should com- pose the contributions of their respective branches, the initiative in respect to each article exhibited was vested in the heads of the branches. The power of final approval was retained in the Treasury, the board of managemert serving as an intermediary between the two authorities. It is held by the Treasury that the board as a whole is responsible for the exhibit as a whole, and that the relation of the heads of the Executive Departments to the board and to their own individual repre- sentatives is advisory rather than supervisory. The tendency of this is to place the members of the board at times in embarrassing positions, and in at least one instance has resulted ina complete alienation of the Exposition work of a department from the Department itself, and an open hostility between the head of the Department and his representa- tive. Nothing could be more unfortunate, and nothing could more thoroughly prevent the preparation of an exhibit which would be thoroughly representative. In connection with this policy has grown up also a disposition on the part of certain elements of the board organization to criticise the con- duct of the representatives of the Departments, and to attempt to control their action under the plea of ** securing harmony and prevent- ing duplication.” The outcome has been far from satisfactory, when contrasted with the direct, business-like, and less complicated methods followed by previous boards of management. The appropriation of an aggregate sum by Congress, instead of a special appropriation to each Department, has also been a cause of embarrassment. It is quite impossible for ten men, representing ten distinct interests, to divide such a sum among themselves equitably and to the satisfaction of all. Still more perplexing, especially in the early days of the preparation for the Exposition, were the joint claims upon the same appropriation of the Government board of management and of the National Commission. This was fortunately settled by Congress in 1891, but the uncertainty as to the amount of money avail- able during the first year of preparation was not the least serions of 112 REPORT OF NATIONAL MUSEUM, 1893. the many obstacles to effective work at the mest important period of exhibition work—the beginning It should also be said that the establishment of a board with inde- pendent functions and a separate legal status seems likely to prove a source of expense for general purposes, far greater in proportion than has been found necessary in other exhibitions. In addition to the $400,000 appropriated for the building, the aggre- gate of the allotments for the use of the Government board was $949,000, of which amount 5 per cent, or $47,450, were set apart for the general expenses of the board of management, the remainder being allotted among the several Departments. The amount available for the use of the Smithsonian exhibit, after deducting the 5 per cent con- tributed toward the expenses of the board, was $153,807.50. By the provisions of a joint resolution approved March 3, 1893,* the secretary of the Smithsonian Institution was authorized to prepare and send for exhibition in the Woman’s building any articles from the Museum illustrative of the life and development of the industries of women. In accordance with this authorization, a special exhibit was prepared and installed in the Woman’s building under the direction of Prof. Mason. The character of this exhibit is described in the discus- sion of his department. The original model of the colossal statue of Leif Erikson (the prop- erty of the city of Boston), which had been presented to the National Museum by the sculptor, Miss Anne Whitney, was also installed in the Woman’s building at the request of the Board of Lady Managers, as well as a collection illustrating the history of lacemaking, prepared by Dr. Thomas Wilson. Very many requests were made by the authorities of the Exposition and by exhibitors for the loan of objects from the Museum, to be exhib- ited elsewhere than in the Government building, but these were with- out exception refused, on the ground that the Government had already provided for the exhibition of such objects as could be sent from Wash- ington in a special building which was more nearly fireproof than any other on the grounds, and that there was no legal authority for allow- ing the Museum material belonging to the Government to pass out of the custody of its officials. This limitation did not, of course, apply to the Government building. Specimens were lent to almost every department of the Government, especially to the Fish Commission, the Patent Office, the Geological Survey, the War Department, the Depart: ment of Agriculture, and the Treasury Department. Certain historical objects were also placed in the Convent of La Rabida, which was ree- ognized as a Government building, forming part of the exhibit of the Department of State. It was perhaps regarded as a hardship by the officials in charge of the Anthropological building that material should not have been sent from the Government collections to swell the very interesting miscella- “See Appendix Ix. REPORT OF ASSISTANT SECRETARY. 113 neous display of ethnological objects which were gathered there, but setting aside the question of lack of legal authority, this building was especially open to the objection of not being fireproof. Everything possible was done, however, to avoid interference with this department, by refraining from exhibiting in the Government building objects of a kind similar to those which we were informed would be shown by the Exposition authorities. The ethnological and archeological collections in the Smithsonian space were the joint exhibit of the Museum and the Bureau of Ethnol- ogy, and too much can not be said of the enthusiastic work of Maj. Powell and the officers of the bureau in the development of this por- tion of the display, and especially in the preparation of the group of costumed figures of the aborigines of North America. In addition to the exhibits sent from the Museum and the Bureau of Ethnology, a special alcove was devoted to the exhibit of the Smith- sonian Institution and its methods of work. Here were shown photo- graphs of the Smithsonian and Museum buildings; portraits of the three secretaries—Joseph Henry (1846-1878), Spencer Fullerton Baird (1878-1887), and Samuel Pierpont Langley; the publications of the Smithsonian Institution, including the Annual Reports, the Smithsonian Contributions to Knowledge, the Miscellaneous Collections, the Reports of the National Museum, together with the Proceedings and Bulletins; publications of the Bureau cf Ethnology; the publications of the National Academy of Sciences; the Reports of the American Historical Association (affiliated with the Institution), and the reports of the various scientific expeditions which have been conducted under the direction of the Institution. There was also a screen of photographs illustrating the discoveries of Prof. Henry, including those which led to the invention of the electric telegraph. It had been intended to publish a series of popular handbooks explaining the various collections exhibited, and also illustrated paim- phlets in regard to the Smithsonian Institution and the Museum, but the regulations issued by the local directory governing the distribution of books and catalogues were found to be so oppressive that this was abandoned, although much work had been done in the preparation of this feature of the exhibition. By the action of the Local Directory of the Exposition the whole matter of catalogues and illustrative literature was placed in the hands of a single firm of printers, who were unwilling to print anything with- out a guaranty that their sales should considerably exceed the cost of printing, and who refused to allow other publishers to enter the field. This illiberal policy undoubtedly reduced very largely the extent of the literature which usually grows out of such expositions, and is not only its chief educational ageney, but one of its most important per- manent results, and it is to be hoped that no future exhibition will be led into a similar error. H. Mis. 184, pt. 2 5 114 REPORT OF NATIONAL MUSEUM, 1893. Acknowledgment should be made for assistance rendered by a num- ber of friends of the Institution, who by their advice and cooperation, or by the loan of objects for exhibition, contributed materially to the success of the oceasion. Mr. George F. Kunz assisted by his advice in the forming of the collection of gems and animal products, and lent from his private col- lection a number of Russian eikons. shown in the collection of reli- gious ceremonial objects. Tiffany & Co., of New York, lent an extensive collection of leathers, prepared from the skins of animals not ordinarily used in the arts, which was displayed among the animal products, and,as has always been our experience on occasions of exhibits, exhibited a spirit of gen- uine interest in the work Dr. Marcus Benjamin, of New York, lent his collection of portraits and autographs of the members of the National Academy of Sciences, and Mr. Albert Rosenthal assisted in the formation of the collection of American historical portraits. Walter H. Harris, esq., ex-sheriff of London, and one of the Royal Commissioners from Great Britain, lent his unique collection of British war models. Mr. Hieromich Shugio lent a number of Japanese porcelains and arranged the synoptical collection showing the history of the ceramic art in Japan. Mr. Fritz Kaldenberg, of New York, lent his collection of carved and tinted ivories, and in other ways helped to build up the collection of animal products. Mr. Sulzberger, of Philadelphia, and Mr. Hadji Ephraim Benguiat, of Boston, aided materially by loans from his private collection to the collection of religious ceremonials. Acknowledgment is also due to the officials of the exposition in general, and especially to Mr. George R. Davis, Director General; to Mr. Lyman J. Gage and Mr. William T. Baker, during their terms of presidency of the Board of Directors; to Mr. J. W. Ellsworth, a mem- ber of the board; Mr. Benjamin Butterworth, the first secretary of the board, and to his successor, Mr. H. O. Edmunds; to Mr. Frank D. Mil- let, director of decorations, and to Mr. W. H. Holeombe, general man- ager of transportation, for numerous courtesies. To the members of the Government board the staff of the Institution were indebted for many acts of courtesies. Mr. William E. Curtis, as chief of the Bureau of American Republics, and subsequently as a member of the board, was especially helpful. IV.— REVIEW OF THE WORK OF THE SCIENTIFIC DEPARTMENTS, INCLUDING THEIR PARTICIPATION IN THE WORLD’S COLUMBIAN EXHIBITION. DEPARTMENT OF ARTS AND INDUSTRIES. The Department of Arts and Industries was the immediate and necessary outgrowth of the erection in 1881 of the new building intended to receive the collections presented by foreign governments to the United States at the Centennial Exposition. Most of these collections could not with propriety be merged with any already in the custody of the Institution, since they were neither geological, biological, nor in a Strict sense anthropological. This new department was therefore formed, which was intended to include all the collections illustrating the utilization of the earth and its products by man, and the history and method of arts and industries within historic times. At first all the anthropological collections except those classed as prehistoric were administered by this depart- ment, but experience taught that there are large classes of objects which can be best exhibited and studied when arranged ethnically, and so in 1884 the Department of Ethnology was established. The distinction between these two departments is not easy to define, and is really not very strictly observed, and will perhaps in time disap- pear. There are, however, certain classes of objects which either for effective installation or for convenience it has been found better to arrange with reference to form rather than race. These are as a rule those in which the arts of civilized man are predominant, and which possess some special interest when arranged in progressive, or, as they are sometimes in questionable propriety called, ‘‘evolutionary” series. Among these are such collections as those of musical instruments, land transportation, the models of boats and vessels, and the fishery appli- ances. Closely allied to some of these is another group of collections, pro- perly technological, in which the idea of materials, and tools and proe- esses of manufacture, together with the products of the processes, ure the most prominent. It was at one time intended to develop this part of the Museum to such an extent that every product of the earth useful to man—mineral, vegetal, and animal—should be shown, in its natural condition and in the various stages through which it may pass, in preparation by man for his own use, together with the tools employed and illustrations of processes. This project has not yet been fully realized, chietly through 115 116 REPORT OF NATIONAL MUSEUM, 1893. lack of room, though also because of practical difficulties of arrange- ment and installation. It has not been abandoned, however, and the Museum possesses the materials for an extensive technological display. In the meantime the specimens of this class derived from the min- eral kingdom are incorporated with the geological collections, those from the vegetable kingdom with the textile, materia medica, and food and forestry collections, besides a great mass now in storage, while those from the animal kingdom, with the exception of what are arranged with the textiles, medicines, foods, and fishery collections, are brought together in the animal products collection. It is still an open question whether technological material is not more useful and instructive, distributed among the scientific depart- ments, than set aside in a special series. At the present time, this is the only practicable plan. If it were possible to employ a special staff of technological curators, trained to appreciate and to keep abreast of the mechanical and chemical processes of modern industrial aris and manufactures, and the arts of design connected with their develop- ment, the case would be different. When the need shall be felt for a technological museum in Washing- ton, one of the best in the world can be erected upon existing founda- tions, with comparatively slight expense and in a very short time. In addition to those mentioned, there are certain other collections which are still assigned to the Department of Arts and Industries, which it would be difficult to place elsewhere—those composed of objects made by civilized man, in which the idea of beauty predominates over that of utility. Here belong porcelains, pottery, bronzes, enamels, lacquer, laces and tapestries, musical instruments; in part, costumes and their accessories, and the collections illustrating the graphic arts. Such objects are often arranged in art museums, but may with equal propriety remain in contiguity with ethnological collections, with which they have innumerable points of contact. Indeed the separation of the wsthetic from the industrial and ethnical series is, in the case of wsthetic races like those of eastern Asia, merely arbitrary and a mat- ter of convenience. We value the specimens in an ethnological museum (writes Mr.C.F.Binns) because they reveal to us the manners and customs of a bygone age. Weregard them as steps in education, asstages in the evolution of a people, but the moment that a work can be judged as artistic we remove it from the Department of Ethnography and place it upon a platform with the art work of all ages and all nations, to stand or fall by another criterion. * This is a fair statement of the practice of most museum workers. Whether itis entirely justifiable, either on scientific or «esthetic grounds, or is absolutely fair and advantageous, is a difficult question, which deserves full consideration. *BINNS, CHARLES F.: The Elements of Beautyin Ceramics. Journal of the Society of Arts, XLII, 409, April 6, 1894. REPORT OF ASSISTANT SECRETARY. Lag In addition to all these, there are the collections whose interest is chiefly historical—personal relics, national relics, portraits, autographs, coins, medals, memorials of past periods in the history of our own and allied races. These stand in a group by themselves, and are in popu- lar estimation more interesting than anything else that can be shown, and their influence upon the people who see them is not to be under- valued. They are surely not without instruction, and beyond this, tend to the development of lofty and ennobling sentiments. In the report for this year, the various collections assigned to the Department of Arts and Industries, except those which are under the control of a special curator, will be referred to only in rapid review. Fisheries collection.—The fishery hall has been almost dismantled by the withdrawal of material to form part of the exhibition of the Fish Commission in Chicago. The attention of Capt. Collins, the curator, has been for two or three years devoted to other things, and few addi- tions have been made to the collection. The collection of naval models.—This, too, has been drawn upon largely for the exhibit of the Fish Commission at the World’s Fair, many of the models of American fishing vessels having been withdrawn to be combined with a large number of additional models which have been constructed by the Commission. The entire series will be returned at the close of the Exposition. The general collection of models is one of the most extensive in the world, embracing, as it does, a very large number of boats of savage and semicivilized races, and material for a very full exposition of the vessels of America. The models of modern steamships and vessels of war are very few, and no attempt will be made to extend the collection in this direction until there is more space. Three times the amount of exhibition room now available is desirable for the proper display of this collection. Among the interesting additions have been models of the historic ships Sally Constant and the Mayflower, prepared by the National Museum for Chicago, and exhibited in connection with the historical relics. The animal products collection.—This_ collection, already referred to as forming an important part of the technological material belonging to the Museum, was transported to Chicago in its entirety and was greatly enlarged. Much attention has been given to developing a collee- tion illustrating the races of domesticated animals, and a specially good series of the breeds of domestic birds has been gathered. ‘To secure the domesticated mammals is a more difficult matter, attended with great expense and delay. Even this would have been carried much further in Chicago but for obstacles interposed by the accounting officers of the Treasury, who objected to the payment of vouchers for the pur- chase of foreign material. Anextensive exhibit selected from this collection was sent to Chicago. This exhibit is intended to illustrate the utilization of the various parts 118 REPORT OF NATIONAL MUSEUM, 1893. of the different animals and the uses of substances derived from the animal kingdom in the arts and industries. It includes the following: Collections showing the utilization of hair, wool, bristles, ete. Feathers, quills, and their uses. Fish seales and articles made from them. Tortoise shell and its manufacture. Furs of various kinds. Collection of leathers (including a loan collection of rare leathers belonging to Tiffany & Co., New York). Horns and antlers and articles made from them. Hoofs and claws. Teeth of various kinds and collections illustrating the uses of different kinds of ivory. Whalebone and its utilization. Sone and objects made from same. Shell, coral, and objects made from same. Intestines and their utilization. The collection of animal products is now fully equal to that in any other museum, not excepting the Bethnal Green Museum in London, which grew out of the London exhibitions of 1851 and 1862, and was classified and labeled under the direction of Dr. Edward Lankester. With proper space for exhibition, extensive enough to allow the addi- tion of a series of the modern manufactured products, this collection would have great interest and educational value. The collection of fibers and textiles.—This collection, which is tolera. bly complete, is being temporarily withdrawn from exhibition, in order to relieve the crowded condition of the building. The specimens are all admirably mounted and well labeled, and can, if necessary, within a week’s time, be again displayed. Like the collection of animal prod- ucts, it possesses much educational interest and is very attractive to visitors. The collection of foods.—This collection, for which there is a great amount of material on hand, has never been developed for lack of room. It is especially rich in the food substances of the North American abo- rigines and of the Orient. A single group of objects from this collee- tion was sent to the World’s Fair. This included the cases representing the composition of the human body, the elements and chemical com- pounds which make up the composition of the man of average size, accompanied by supplementary exhibits showing a number of typical rations and the daily income and outgo. The collection of musical instruments. —This collection has been nearly doubled within the past two years through the efforts of several of the U.S. consuls abroad and the collections made by the Assistant Secre- tary in southern Europe in the spring of 1892. A selected exhibit was sent to the World’s Fair, which occupied a wall case 65 feet in length, and which was intended to show the method of installation adopted in the Museum and to illustrate the evolution of the various types of REPORT OF ASSISTANT SECRETARY. 119 musical instruments. This was arranged in accordance with the foliow- ing plan: Self-vibrating instruments: Drums and tambourines, cymbal, gongs, castanets, ‘‘ bones,” and rattles. Xylophones. Stringed instruments played with the fingers or plectrum : Guitars, banjos, and mandolins. Harps and lyres. Zithers and dulcimers. Stringed instruments played with a how: The violin. The viola. Mechanical instruments—hurdy-gurdy. Stringed instruments, with keyboard. The predecessors of the piano, clavichord, virginal, and harpsichord. Wind instruments, with simp:e aperture or plug mouthpiece: The trumpet and bugle. The trombone. The serpent and bagpipe. Wind instruments, with bell mouthpiece, with keys—cornets, French horus. ophi- cleides. Wind instruments with complicated systems: Accordions. Harmonicas and jewsharps Hand organs. As soon as this material shall have been returned from Chicago, a com. plete rearrangement of the collection will be made in the two great wall cases in the main entrance hall, whose combined length 1s 150 feet. This collection is one of the most extensive in the world, being espe- cially rich in the instruments of savage and semicivilized races, and the primitive forms, which are especially interesting when arranged by the progressive method as showing the types from which, in all probability, all of our modern instruments are derived. Costumes.—Especial attention was devoted in the early days of the Museum to the collection of costumes, especially those of historical interest. Such of these as have been placed on exhibition are at pres- ent arranged with the ethnological collection, but there are many others. It is probable that at the next exposition in which the Government participates, a special display from this department will be arranged. The collection of ceramics.—This collection, though it contains many valuable and important specimens, is exceedingly incomplete and unsatistactory. The Hippisley collection of Chinese porcelains still remains on deposit, and it is hoped that through some good fortune this may in time become the property of the Government. It is recognized as one of the best for its size in existence, and is constantly examined by connoisseurs, who find in it material for study. There is also a small collection of Japanese porcelains, a selection from which was arranged and labeled by Mr. H. Shugio and exhibited by the Museum at the World’s Fair. In this collection were shown typical products of each 120 REPORT OF NATIONAL MUSEUM, 1893. of the principal pottery centers of Japan, arranged by provinces in accordance with the following plan: Ancient pottery. Province. Ware. | Province. Ware. = = 2» —— - —_ A ZON eee osc ese cise Karatsu. WdSumiis *-- cecees esd eee Idsumi. Arita. | Mamato) «2.2225 -sjoes seater Akahada. Hirada. | Survotastaseeese eee Survo. Nangawara. INFN Scaeacos ce cocstcocees Hagi. Nabeshima. @hilkeazene <= tesa ase | Takatovi. Kakiyemon. 18 bY) ee be pee een casas sope-o Yatsushiro. TaryiGokushin 9||/Satswmajecs-eeserees <= | Satsuma. Kameyama. SCL Geet ae AS SH aanaDaceSOre se Sanda. | Bogasaki. Kikko. Shiraishi. | Kosube. Taishiu (Island of Tsushima). Tsushima. | Dwakis2 30 -- 2 eee Soma. Owarils...+-c-setesessce cence Seto. DKA 98) ie ote eee reer | Kutani. Horaku. Wges 2 ee cee Sees ee eee Banko. 1S (23 Naka esnrSaoeonenonosot Bizen. I SadO.ccisecndoavscek chu oneeses | Sado. Oi see Speneo edaeoosesasesoces Shigaraki. || Sanuki..-..--..--.. .--.----- | Shido. Koto. Wamashiro:------ Se tee Rakn. KG ess se aoe soeeeee easienie Sete Zuishi. Kioto. YSG iS rine onecneeeceesmuecesse Iga. || BATES cease oc eeccaceomesss Tokio. Lin lease Sees saenccaesedcass Tamba. Ota. MZ Ober eee ela cee ees Idzumo. | I| In addition to the oriental porcelain and pottery, there are several smaller groups ot objects, the most noteworthy of which is that illus- trating the products of the imperial manufactory at Sévres, presented by the French Government. This collection is of the greatest value to students of the decorative arts and to a large number of other visitors to the Museum, and it is hoped that it may receive extensive additions hereafter and be arranged in a hall by itself. In this same connection, as occupying adjacent cases, may be men- tioned the very instructive special cases of Japanese lacquer, showing the process of manufacture; of Japanese bronzes; of Russian and American casting in iron, and the cases of enamel and metal work presented by the Siamese Government. All these together form a nucleus which it is hoped in time will develop into a collection similar to that which is the chief glory of the South Kensington Museum in London, and which there has as yet scarcely been any effort made to reproduce in this country, save in the art museums of Boston, New York, and Cincinnati, whose plans, however, are somewhat different. THE HISTORICAL COLLECTIONS. A great portion of the time of Mr, A. Howard Clark, the curator, was necessarily devoted to his other duties as editor of the Proceedings and the Bulletins of the Museum, and in charge of printing descriptive labels, the year being the busiest in the history of the Museum in these — REPORT OF ASSISTANT SECRETARY. ‘ 121 branches of work, so that it is impossible to report much special work accomplished in advancing the historical collections, exéept in connec- tion with the preparation of the exhibits for the World’s Fair. The crowded condition of the exhibition halls has necessitated the withdrawal and temporary storage of the entire collections of medals and money, and the general series of autograph papers of eminent Americans. The collections of historical objects remaining on exhibition include memorials and personal relics cof Washington, Jefferson, Adams, Van Buren, Jackson, Lincoln,Grant, and other Presidents of the United States, and of soldiers, statesmen, and other eminent Americans, as well as memorials of important events in American history. There have been 70 accessions to the collection during the year, aggregating nearly 1,000 specimens. The principal objects were a folio Bible belonging to Gen. Washington, with his autograph on the title page; a large number of memorials and personal relics of President Andrew Jackson; autograph letters of Gen. J. E. B. Stuart, of the Confederate Army, and of Hon. G. W. Randolph, Secretary of War of the Confederate States; specimens of the earliest copper money coined in America, dating about 1525; medals presented by the corpo- ration of the city of London, commemorative of events in the history of that city; commissions bearing the signatures of Presidents John Quincy Adams and James Madison; a large collection of engraved and photographic portraits of eminent Americans, and a collection of the decorations of the military and civic orders of Europe and America. It was hoped that a large historical collection might be arranged for the World’s Fair, but it was impossible to accomplish all that was planned, owing to lack of exhibition space. The exhibits sent to Chi- eago included— (1) About 1,500 engraved and photographie portraits of members of the Continental Congress, the Federal Convention of 1787, the first Congress of the United States, members of the National Academy of Science, and of other eminent Americans—statesmen, jurists, philoso- phers, Army and Navy officers, physicians, clergymen, educators, artists, authors, merchants, and philanthropists ; (2) Medals, nearly 600 in number, illustrative of American history from the earliest Colonial period through the Revolutionary war to events of recent years, collegiate and ecclesiastical inedals, and medals in memory of eminent Americans ; (3) A monographic collection of the metallic money of the colonies prior to the establishment of the United States Mint ; (4) A monographic collection of the American colonial and Conti- nental paper money, and paper money issued by State and private banks and by merchants ; (5) A series of early maps illustrating the development of geograph- ical knowledge of America, and of the territorial growth of the United States ; 122 REPORT OF NATIONAL MUSEUM, 1893. (6) A series of water-color drawings, about 200 in number, of deco- rated powder horns carried by soldiers of the American Revolution ; (7) Models of the Sally Constant and Mayfloicer, the first passenger ships of the Virginia and Plymouth colonies ; (8) Engravings illustrating the settlement of Jamestown, Va., the landing of the Pilgrims at Plymouth, and other colenial and later events in American history. THE GRAPHIC ARTS COLLECTION. The collections illustrating the graphic arts have continued, as hitherto, under the care of Mr. 8S. R. Koehler, who divides his time between the National Museum and the Boston Museum of Fine Arts, where he has similar responsibilities. Nearly all the time available during the year has been devoted by him to supplying the specimens placed on exhibition with written labels, and this important task is so nearly finished that but for the Columbian Exposition it would probably have been completed by this time. That part of the collections which is not on exhibition is still awaiting its definite arrangement and classification. The material so far gathered is not especially available for use in special researches. A useful series of notes on Japanese wood-cutting and woodeut printing was received from Mr. Tokuno, the chief of the Japanese Government printing office, which has been edited by Mr. Koehler and printed in the Museum report for 1892. This publication, which is fully illustrated, is the first treatise on this most interesting subject, based on authentic information received from a competent native Japanese source; it has all the value of a treatise based on original research. Some additional specimens have been placed on exhibition, which serve to complete or better the series previously arranged, but no new series have been begun, nor, indeed, will this be possible, so long as the meansand the space atcommand are as limited as they are at present. Although the accessions by gift include a number of interesting and instructive specimens, it is difficult to point out any of them as of special importance, with the exception, perhaps, of an impression of Adolf Menzel’s celebrated original lithograph, Christ among the Doctors, presented to the Museum by Mr. J. W. Osborne, and a tine large photo- gravure reproduction of Stuart’s portrait of Washington, known as the Atheneum head, by Messrs. A. W. Elson & Co., of Boston. The thirty-three prints by Schongauer, Diirer, Goltzius, Rembrandt, Nan- teuil, Wille, Bartolzzi, Walker, Mereuri, Gaillard, ete., which, together with a number of technical specimens, were bought for exhibition at the World’s Columbian Exposition, at a cost of about $1,100, will of course add valuable material to the collections. The exhibit prepared by Mr. Koehler for Chicago, though of necessity small, was exceedingly choice and instructive. REPORT OF ASSISTANT SECRETARY. 123 An adequate presentation of the subject being out of the question, the attempt was made to show the beginnings of the more important processes used in the production of printable pictures, and to contrast these with the latest achievements of the same processes, in the hope that, by thus placing into juxtaposition the two ends of the line of development, the advances made would become apparent at a glance, The whole collection was therefore to be looked upon as a tableau illustrating the condition of the multiplying arts at or about the time of the discovery of America, and the condition of the same arts in the nineteenth century, with added specimens of the principal processes introduced in the four hundred years intervening between these periods. With this end in view, sixteen large frames were filled with prints, cach frame containing on an average about six prints, and arranged as follows: Frame 1 contained woodcuts of the fifteenth and sixteenth centuries, while in frame 2, alongside of it, were Shown wood-engravings by American wood-engravers, produced within the ten or twelve years last past. A similar arrangement was carried out for line-engraving and etching, which filled, respectively, frames 3 and 4, and frames 5 and 6. The later processes, the origin or at least the general acceptance and development of which dates from the seventeenth and succeeding centuries, had to be treated even more summarily. Thus, frame 7 was devoted to mezzotinting; frame 8 to dry-pointing and aquatinting; frame 9 to the crayon manner and stippling; frame 10 to lithography, and frames 11 and 12 to the various photo-mechanical processes. Frames 13 to 16 constituted a special division, in which the attempt was made to give some idea of the history of color-printing. The curator was far from satisfied with this display, as will be shown by the following extract from his annual report, and it is not at all to ‘be wondered at, since the possibilities were so great and the resources were so small, compared with those of any similiar collection in a Euro- pean capital. I can say from personal observation, however, that the collection was greatly appreciated, and not only deserved but received much attention, as indeed a series of specimens so well selected and admirably arranged and labeled could not fail to do in any exhibition at home or abroad. I can not well omit the curator’s own somewhat low-spirited estimate of the value of his work for the Exposition, since his statement of the great needs and great opportunities in this connection may very possi- bly attract the attention of persons who may be interested in improv- ing the present condition of aftairs. I must reiterate [writes Mr. Koehler] my remarks upon the necessity of more lib- eral appropriations for the section of graphie arts. The unfortunate consequences growing out of the present condition of things made themselves very seriously felt in connection with the World’s Columbian Exposition, and I shall theretore beg leave to offer a few remarks on this subject. Among the great achievements which make the fifteenth century one of the most important epochs in the history of the human race, the development of the repro- 124 REPORT OF NATIONAL MUSEUM, 1893. ductive or multiplying arts is by no means the smallest. Like the art of printing books from movable type, these arts were the outcome of the individualistic and humanistic movement of the time, and like it they have been instrumental in dis- seminating knowledge and training the human mind in the modern way of looking at things—the modern ‘‘ world conception’”’—not only by accompanying the printed word by printed pictures in books of instruction, but still more by scattering broad- cast among the people in vast numbers veritable works of art, which ministered to the reawakened feeling for the beauty of nature, while they quickened at the same time the powersof observation. It is worth noting, moreover, how closely the dates of importance in the first period of the history of the arts in question cluster around the date of the discovery of America. The first book illustrated with copper- plate engravings, the Monte Sancto di Dio, appeared at Florence in the year 1477; Martin Schongauer, the first truly great artist north of the Alps who was active as an engraver, died in the year 1491, or thereabouts; the Nuremberg Chronicle, cele- brated for its many illustrations by Wolgemuth, Diirer’s teacher, is dated 1493; Diirer’s Apocalypse, the ,first great woodcut publication ever produced, appeared in the year 1498, and Andrea Mantegna, the first truly great engraver south of the Alps, died in the year 1506. It would have seemed fitting, therefore, that in the picture of the world’s progress since the discovery of America, which the Columbian Exposition was to present to its visitors, the history of the multiplying arts should have been illustrated quite fully. The limitations of means and space, however, made such an illustration impossible, and the result was an exhibition which com- manded no attention, and, indeed, hardly deserved any. Small and inadequate as this exhibition was,* its usefulness was still further crip- pled by the impossibility of having the descriptive pamphlet printed which had been prepared, and without which the fragmentary character of the collection must neces- sarily have proved puzzling, even to well-informed visitors. As to the specimens shown, while they were all good, and some of them, indeed, very fine, there were nevertheless wanting quite a number of things which ought to have been included, but instead of which, from dire necessity, inferior examples were exhibited. When an institution like the U.S. National Museum, the only institution of its kind under the care of the Government of the United States, attempts to illustrate the beginnings of line-engraying, of mezzotinting, of color-printing from metal plates, ete., it ought to be able to show the rarest and best things,—for instance, a specimen of the best of Schongauer’s, instead of only a late impression from a Schon- gauer plate; amezzotint by Von Siegen, instead of merely a Wallerant Vaillant; color- prints by Le Blon and Debucourt, instead of things of little importance by D’Agoty and Jaminet, and so on to the end of the list. It is aggravating to be compelled to appear before the assembled delegates of the civilized nations of the world with such a confession of poverty, more especially when it is universally known that the insufficiency of the efforts put forth is due, not to the poverty of the nation, but to the neglect of the representatives of the people, into whose hands has been given the welfare as well as the upholding of the reputation of the United States. What the curator has said merits serious thought, for the collections are undoubtedly pitifully poor in comparison with those of other nations, and a national print collection ought to be maintained in Washington worthy of the nation. It has, however, never been pro- vided for, and what there is of that kind has grown up in connection with quite another plan, which was to illustrate fully the technology “This was due to the unfortunate system of printing concessions made by the Exposition authorities, placing all printing privileges in the hands of a single establishment. = = REPORT OF ASSISTANT SECRETARY. 15 of the graphic arts. That the effort in this direction has been very successful is certain. In confirmation of this statement I quote a few sentences from the official report of Prof. William Roose, chief of the chaleographical division in the German Government printing office, who visited Washington and the Museum in the course of his mission to the World’s Fair: This wonderful collection in the National Museum [writes Prof. Roose] illustrates the graphic arts from their beginnings to the developments of the present day. It forms the most remarkable and unique collection of its kind, and probably stands alone in the world. It is not a so-called collection of engravings or of the produc- tions of the graphic artsin the generally accepted sense, for the emphasis is not placed here upon the artistic value of the specimens shown. The aim is rather to illustrate how the graphic arts developed in the course of time, and how they are practiced at present. All kinds of intaglio engravings, etchings, mezzotints, aquatint, wood- engraving from its earliest products to the latest newspaper cut, lithography in all its varieties, the latest photo-mechanical reproductions in copper, gelatine, zine, brass, etc., are shown in many hundred specimens, ‘in all stages of development, and arranged in chronological series, accompanied by detailed descriptions — partly on the walls, partly in table cases—together with the plates, stones, electrotypes, etc., needed for their elucidation. The purpose here is to exhibit the technical, and to show how man managed to make pictures multipliable, what means he has thought out and used with this aim in view, from the beginning down to our own day. An original, one-sided, genuinely American, but certainly also a practical and sensible idea. THE MATERIA MEDICA COLLECTION. The work of this section, which is now under the care of Medical Inspector C, H. White, U.S. Navy, has been confined to the preserva- tion of the collection in its present form and in the preparation of such new specimens as were found desirable for exhibition. The collection is in excellent condition for study, and the exhibition series is admira- bly installed, the greater part of it being a most admirable display in the field of economic botany. The collection is so complete that novel additions are few. DEPARTMENT OF ETHNOLOGY. The ethnological collections are at present understood to include all objects illustrating the history and activities of mankind, save those classed as prehistoric and those which are assigned to the Department of Arts and Industries. The division is somewhat arbitrary, and there are of necessity constant changes of material, as the needs of the exhi- bition series show them to be necessary. The ethnological collections are particularly complete for North America, but as years go by, through exchange and gift, they are becoming fairly representative of the whole world. The North Amer- ican collections are especially rich in respect to the Eskimo stock. the stocks of the Northwest coast, the Shoshonean tribes of the Great Inte- rior Basin, the buffalo-hunting tribes of the stocks along the Plains 126 REPORT OF NATIONAL MUSEUM, 1893. of the West, and those of the Pueblo region of the southwest, which have been so thoroughly explored by the Bureau of Ethnology under the direction of Maj. J. W. Powell. Perhaps no portion of the Museum is so cramped by lack of space as this. The material already mounted and labeled for exhibition would fill five times the space which can now be assigned to it, and if installed in rooms of sufficient capacity, would form one of the most instructive and impressive ethnological collections in the world. At present, how- ever, only a small portion of this treasure can be shown, and the result is far from satisfactory, since the effective display of such objects depends largely upon the manner in which they are arranged with reference to one another and to some great ruling concept, a result which can only be accomplished in halls of ample dimensions. The curator of the ethnological collection, Prof. O. T. Mason, has for a number of years been bringing these vast materials under control, so that any object with its full history can be consulted without delay, a most ingenious system of storage, indexed by a card catalogue ren- dering the material available for the use of investigators. At the same time the material is at once ready for any new steps in the develop- ment of the exhibition series, and were space available, in a few weeks the entire collection could be placed before the public. If this could be once accomplished, the result, I am satisfied, would astonish those who are most familiar with the resources of the Museum in this field. During the past year the entire time of the curator has been devoted to the World’s Fair to the exclusion of any new Museum enterprises. The usual routine of receiving new material and caring for the gen- eral collection has gone on, but no new specimens have been put on exhibition in the Museum. The number of specimens received during the year was 5,094, and 3,161 entries were made in the departmental catalogue. As has already been said, the participation of the Museum in expo- sitions is a detriment to its scientific work. A certain compensation , is found, however, in the opportunity to instruct the public by an exhibit systematically arranged and labeled, and in the increase to the collections. In arranging for the ethnological and archeological portion of the exhibit at the World’s Columbian Exposition it was decided that the | efforts of this Department should be combined with those of the Bureau of Ethnology, which is another branch of the Smithsonian Institution, and which has already been so closely connected with the Museum in its activities that it is impossible to separate the interests of the two. In developing the plans for the Exposition, many projects were discussed, and, but for the fact that a general ethnological display had been arranged for under the direet control of the World’s Colum- bian Exposition, a more comprehensive anthropological collection would have been prepared. It being the first object, however, to avoid REPORT OF ASSISTANT SECRETARY. aa rivalry and duplication, and to contribute so far as possible to the gen- eral success of the fair, the scope of the National Museum exhibit was limited to North America. In order to bring into sharp comparison the concepts of race, speech, and activities among the American aborigines, it was proposed by Prof. Mason that a special exhibit of arts and industries by linguistic stocks should be the main feature, and that this should be founded on the great linguistic map of North America, just then published by the Director of the Bureau of Ethnology, as the crowning result of ethno- logical labors on our continent during fifty years. The details of this plan are quoted in the words of Prof. Mason, in the discussion of the labors of the Department of Ethnology. In this connection the staff of the Museum and Bureau of Ethnology cooper- ated—Prof. Mason representing the Museum and Mr. H. W. Henshaw the Bureau of Ethnology. This cooperation was interrupted for sev- eral months by Mr. Henshaw’s absence from the city, but a month before the opening of the exhibit Prof. W. H. Holmes was assigned by Maj. Powell to represent the interest of the Bureau of Ethnology, and by him most efficient services were rendered, not only in preparing illustrations of his own remarkable investigations, but in advising and directing the preparators in arranging groups of costumed figures, ete. In this work Mr. Frank H. Cushing, through his familiarity with the eustoms and arts of the Pueblo people, rendered also most valuable services. Mr. James Mooney also participated, and the group of Kiowa children, prepared under his direction, was among the most attractive of them all. But for his absence in the field, collecting material, he would have been able to devise others of similar excellence. Dr. W. J; Hoffman superintended the preparation of groups of Northern Indians. As has been stated, the plan upon which the combined exhibitions of the Bureau of Ethnology and of the National Museum were arranged, was developed by Prof. Mason, who describes in the following words its principal characteristics : The plan of setting up the products of aboriginal art in accordance with the lin- guistic chart just published by the Bureau of Ethnology was carried out so far as the material would admit. Some of the stocks have disappeared altogether, and it would be impossible to give a picture of their arts. Others are reduced to such small numbers, and they are living now under such enforeed circumstances, that it would be of little use to attempt to reproduce their primitive mode of life. There are certain great stocks and groups of stocks, however, that are yet to be found in respectable numbers, and they were formerly spread out over vast areas, which in themselves constitute culture-regions. The stocks selected for represen- tation at the Exposition were those which had developed unique types of culture; for example, the Eskimo for the Arctic area; the Koloschan, Wakashan, Haeltzukan, and Salishan stocks dwelling in the archipelagos and on the mainland of the north- west coast of America; the Athapascan stock, dwelling in three extremely different culture areas, to wit: in northwest Canada and Alaska; in northern California, and in New Mexico and Arizona; the Algonkian stock, whose tribes once covered the entire region of northern and eastern North America, bounded on the south by southern Tennessee and on the west by the 117th meridian; the Iroquoian stock, sur- 128 REPORT OF NATIONAL MUSEUM, 1893. rounding the Great Lakes; the Siouan stock, on the Missouri drainage; the Kiowan stock, forming an intrusion from unknown source into the buffalo region of the plains; the Shoshonean stock, covering the great interior basin and related to the Aztecs of Mexico; the tribes of California occupying the acorn and pifon and bas- ket-making area; the Piman and Yuman stocks about the Colorado mouth; the Pueblo peoples in Arizona and New Mexico. These stocks enable the student to examine the relations that may exist between geography, ethnology, giossography, and technography. All technical and biological regions are covered by this arrange- ment, and all of the leading nationalities and tongues, and all of the characteristic Indian arts are also represented. The result of this study is most interesting. In the supply of natural wants, the various tribes have yielded to regional or geographic forces. This is well shown, both in the plains of the great West and in the southern desert, and, indeed, throughout the continent, as appears in comparing Powell's map with Dr. Mer- riam’s bio-geographic map, published by the Department of Agriculture. Along the eastern slopes of the Rocky Mountains were formerly to be found Algonkian, Sionan, Kiowan, and Shoshonean tribes. Their languages were radically different. Their tribal organizations, similar in plan, were still entirely unlike in their totemic sys- tems. But the all absorbing occupation of buttalo hunting, combined with the limitations of vegetal and mineral material, determined the diet, the dress, the house, the tools, and the products of industry. That is, the materialistic activities were controlled by the environment. Superadded to this series of effects, as anyone could see at the Exposition, were others of a more refined nature. The spiritualistic, metaphysical expressions in these same specimens were overwhelmingly ethnical and linguistic. The arrow for killing a buffalo must be of a certain material and form; nature determined that. But the feathering, the streaking, the symbolism on the‘arrow, were distinct for each tribe and tongue. The buffalo or bearskin robe was nature’s gift to all, and it was cured after the same general fashion. But the paintings were national, totemie, special, almost independent of the environment. The Pueblo region teaches some interesting lessons in these same particulars. Here are gathered also four stocks, the Shoshonean, the Tanoan, the Tewan, and the Zunian, differing essentially in language and totemic system and mythology. But there are only certain articles of food to be had here naturally; the country lends itself kindly to the cultivation of corn, beans, and pumpkins. The peculiar geolog- ical formation, furnishing stone and adobe mud in abundance, almost forbade the erection of other than one style of house, the pueblo. Clay of the finest quality everywhere invited to the creation of pottery. As for textiles, the curious phenom- enon is presented of tribes preserving their old arts in new areas. This remark may be supplemented by the observation that the bringing of sheep to this region by Spanish missionaries stimulated the trade of frame and loom weaving in all the linguistic stocks alike. By the method of study pursued in this exhibit in Chicago, the lessons inculcated by other stocks are emphasized. For instance, while the Moki or Hopi Pueblos of northeastern Arizona are tenanted by Shoshonean tribes, the Utes, the Shoshones, the Bannacks, and even the Comanches, are of the same linguistic family. Now, in one of these is presented a buffalo-hunting people, in another an Indian of the woods, in a third the man of the desert, with corresponding occupations. The coun- try has endowed and suggested the trades ineach case. In one of the Hopi pueblos, furthermore, two styles of basketry are to be seen that are unknown among the other Shoshonean tribes. One of them, the coiled ware, resembled in technique, but not in material, that of the wild Apaches or the southern Californians. The other is a wicker type, really unknown among other tribes hereabout but common everywhere in North America east of the Mississippi. It is impossible to bring out all the minor lessons taught in this first attempt ever made to bring the concepts of REPORT OF ASSISTANT SECRETARY. 20 tribe, language, and industry into the same line of comparative study through series of objects. The following is a concise description of the exhibits. The plan was to set apart a definite space or alcove for each linguistic family or stock, to place in the center of each a group of lay figures of men and women or children, dressed in proper cos- tume and engaged in typical occupations. About this group, in wall cases and screens, would be assembled as many examples of the handiwork of that people as possible. Especial attention was given to selecting such arts us were quite charac- teristic and distinctive in each case. It is much to be regretted that the contracted space allowed in the Government building at Chicago prevented the curator from giving to the idea its fullest expan- sion. Enough was displayed. however, to bring into prominence the statement that the earth, with its climate and natural resources, has much to say about the material and the form of human industries. Blood and language and social life and religion have their say also in the arts of life, but their influence is superadded, and not fun- damental. In the development of this collection, in accordance with these plans, Prof. Mason was engaged for nearly three years, and a large amount of efiort, which under other circumstances would have appeared in the form of contributions to the literature of ethnology, was devoted to the preparation of the descriptive labels and the educational material to be exhibited. In this work most effective assistance was rendered by various members of the Bureau of Ethnology and the Museum staff. Mr. James Mooney spent several months among the Moqui Indians of Arizona, and Kiowas of Indian Territory, and while in the field was also instrumental in obtaining the Voth collection from the Cheyenne and Arapahoes. The collections sent in embraced over one thousand objects. Dr. W.J. Henshaw also collected among the Crow Indians, and obtained among other things some very beautiful costumes, especially the dress and outfit of a Crow warrior. Mr. Henshaw while in Cali- fornia obtained an important collection of basketry and other objects of the Californian tribes. Another interesting and important outgrowth of the work of this department was the result of the curator’s especial interest in the work of woman in savagery, or woman’s share in primitive industry. This subject was discussed by him in the lecture entitled ‘* Woman’s Share in Primitive Culture,” delivered by him in the National Museum Satur- day lecture course in 1888. The attention of many intelligent women was thus attracted to the subject, and at the special invitation of the Board of Lady Managers, and in accordance with the special resolu- tion of Congress, an exhibit of woman’s industries was prepared and installed in theWomaw’s building. The idea which this colleetion was intended to illustrate is described as follows: The motive of this exhibit was to show woman’s work in savagery, or woman’s share in primitive industries. Reviewing Mr. Spencer’s division of the course of history into an age of militancy and an age of industrialism, it occurred to the curator that this should rather be a sexual classification. This would give a sex of militancy, which is masculine, and a sex of industrialism, which is feminine. This is very clearly proved by this exhibit. The highest eclassific concept would be be Mis. 1S4. pt: 2-9 130 REPORT OF NATIONAL MUSEUM, 1893. craft or trade—for example, the harvester, the miller, the cook, the tanner, the potter, the weaver, and so on. Under each of these heads, by a collection of speci- mens, it was shown what women from every savage area are capable of doing. The division was first technic and then ethnic. The whole title of the exhibit would read, ‘‘What women of savagery in each trade could do, and how these works appeared when compared ethnically. ”’ Reference has already been made to the participation of the Smith- sonian Institution in the Columbian Historical Exposition at Madrid, and to the fact that the larger portion of the material was lent from the National Museum. As a matter of fact, most of the matter sent from the Museum was selected from the exhibits already prepared, mounted, and labeled for the World’s Fair in Chicago, and but for the elaborate preparations which had already been made, it would have been impossible for the United States upon so short a notice to have made so creditable a showing upon this most important anniversary. It was a matter of much regret that the pressure of the preparation of the exhibit for Chicago was so great that Prof. Mason could not accompany the col- lection to Madrid, as it represented so much of his individual activity, especially since he had been identified from the beginning with the committee of organization, which was appointed by the Spanish min- ister in Washington, and which had already done much to excite pub- lic interest in this occasion. His assistant, Dr. Walter Hough, was attached to the American commission, and was charged with the instal- lation of the material from this department, as well as with the prepa- ration of the Spanish catalogue, an English translation of which will appear in the forthcoming report of the Madrid Exposition. This cata- logue embodies the descriptive labels of a large portion of the collee- tion which was sent to Chicago, and which will in time be utilized in the preparation of various memoirs illustrative of the Exposition mate- rial in the Museum. Although allusion has been made to the Museum staff of preparators in connection with the Chicago exhibit, it seems only proper to refer here to the admirable work of those especially attached to the ethno- logical collections, notably Mr. Carl Bergman, in the mounting and costuming of groups of figures, and Mr. Thomas W. Sweeny in arranging and labeling the cases containing the comparative collections. Mr. Theodore A. Mills and Mr. Dunbar rendered excellent services in the modeling and casting of the bodies, heads, and limbs of the tigures in groups. All the activities of the department were so absorbed by the work which has just been described, that this and the preceding year’s work upon papers and monographs upon the collection was to a large degree interrupted. A paper upon “The Ulu, or Woman’s Knife of the Eskimo,” by the curator, in the Report of the Smithsonian Institution, appeared during the year.* This paper was prepared especially for * Report of the U. 8S. National Museum, 1890-91, pp. 411-416, Pls. LUI-LXxx. REPORT OF ASSISTANT SECRETARY. 131 archeologists, to enable them to understand the functions of many stone implements in their cabinets. An address was also delivered by him on “The Land Problem” before the Brooklyn Ethnolugical Society. During the year also appeared Mr. Hough’s “Catalogue of the Bernadou, Allen, and Jouy Korean Collections in the National Museum,”* and also by the same student a paper on time-keeping by lighting and fire, and another upon the method of fire-making. Mr. J. D. MeGuire’s paper on the Stone Hammer” was also written in connection with the Department of Eth- nology and was prepared in the Museum. In this same connection should be mentioned the essay by Surg. Washington Matthews, U.S. Army, on the Catlin collection of Indian paintings in the National Museum.t Mr. MeGuire also prepared a series of objects for the _ World’s Fair to illustrate the processes employed by the North Amer- ican Indian in working stone, by battering, boring, sawing, chip- ping, grinding, and polishing. A series of these objects, together with the apparatus used, was displayed at the Exposition, and an exact account given of the time and method used in the preparation of each one on an accompanying label. The case containing this collection occupied a prominent aisle in the Smithsonian space, and attracted much attention, not only from Ameri- cans, but also from Europeans. The most important accessions of American material have been, as usual, through the Bureau of Ethnology, including especially the val- uable collection made in connection with the Exposition by Messrs. Henshaw, Mooney, and Dr. Hoffman. Mrs. M. M. Hazen deposited an exceedingly important collection of objects from the Sioux and Eskimo tribes, collected by her late husband, and from Lieut. W. E. Safford was obtained a most important collection of paintings of Peru by a native artist, as well as a large collection of dress and native material, including the very handsome feather costume, which is mounted upon the single figure of a Xivaro Indian. This wasone of the most beau- tiful of the costumed figures shown in Chicago. The Museum obtained by purchase the ethnological collection procured by Lieut. Cook during his military services in the West; from Mr. Edward Palmer, a small collection from the Tarahumara Indians of Mexico, and from the heirs of Mr. J. Henry Turner, some interesting objects collected on the Upper Yukon, Alaska. Of special interest in this connection, was a wampum belt obtained from Mr. William Thompson, and said to belong to the great Shawnee chief, Tecumseh. A small African collection was received from Mr. William Astor Chan- ler, the result of his explorations in the eastern part of the continent, and others were obtained for the National Museum at Loanda by Mr. Heli Chatelain, and by Mr. Carl Steckelman, from Mayumba. * Report of the U.S. National Museum, 1891, pp. 429-488, Pls. 11-X XXII. t Report of the U.S. National Museuin, 1890, pp. 593-610, Pls. CXXX-CL. 132 REPORT OF NATIONAL MUSEUM, 1893. Dr. W. L. Abbott, whose magnificent contributions to the Museum are referred to elsewhere, sent an important collection of objects from Bombay. Erhard Bissinger, esq., U. S. consul at Beirut, Syria, sent a collection of Syrian games of chance. Hon. W. W. Rockhill, Third Assistant Secretary of State, has placed at the disposition of the Museum a large and exceedingly importantcol- lection i!lustrative of the arts and customs of Tibet, which was obtained by hin in his two journeys in the interior, and which is to be the sub- ject of an illustrated catalogue to be published in the present report of the Museum. At Hoihow, China, Dr. Julius Neumann continued his friendly cooperation by sending additional illustrations of the native arts of northern China. Polynesian collections were sent by Rounsevelle Wildman, esq., U.S. consul at Singapore, who made special collections under the direction ofthe Museum. Alexander Kk. Webb, esq., U.S. consul at Manila, sent by request a collection from the Philippines, including @ very excellent series of games. Victor A. Jenny, esq., U.S. consular agent at Macassar, secured specimens illustrating the arts of New Guinea, while our old and valued correspondent, Prof. H. H. Giglioli, sent in exchange an important collection from the Andaman Islands, including over 100 objects. PREHISTORIC ANTHROPOLOGY. The hall containing this collection is the largest and most impress- ive inthe Museum, and, owing to the extent and value of the material, chiefly in American archeology, it is one of the most noteworthy features of the establishment. Since the death of Dr. Charles Rau in 1887, by whom the collection was organized and first arranged, it has been under the charge of Dr. Thomas Wilson, who has increased it by the deposit of his own cabinet of European material. The number of specimens at the end of the year is reported by the curator at 140,182, 1,164 having been added during the month of June. Under the administration of the present curator many changes have been made, especially in the fundamental plan of classification. The collection is at present arranged in two series. The general principles adopted apply more to prehistoric objects from the Old World and are those of foreign archeologists. It has been deemed unwise by the curator to attempt any definite classification of the culture of antiquity in the United States more than to put it generally into the neolithic period. 1. A synoptical series, with reference to prehistoric man, assembling objects believed to have been employed during each given epoch of early civilization. These epochs are then arranged in series, begin- ning with the earliest forms and continuing down to historic times. 2. Geographical series, in which the greater portion of the collection is arranged with reference to political subdivisions. The objects from REPORT OF ASSISTANT SECRETARY. Iie) the provinces of Canada, the various States of the United States, and the Latin Republies are brought together. In this department, also, much of the energy of the year has been devoted to preparing collections for expositions. The curator was attached to the staff of the United States Commission at the Historical American Exposition at Madrid from August, 1892, until December, when he was unexpectedly called upon to return. The exhibit prepared under his supervision for the World’s Fair was shown also at Madrid, and is explained at length in the special paper to be included in the report of the American Commission. It is described in brief in the following statement from the pen of the author: The exhibit of this department at Madrid comprised 2,500 prehistoric objects, which were displayed in 19 double slope-top cases in the main hall assigned to the United States. The exhibit at Chicago comprised 1,250 specimens, arranged in 7 flat-top cases in an alcove belonging to the space assigned to the U. 8. National Museum. The general arrangement of objects in these two expositions was much the same; that is, it was both chronological and according to function. The implements and objects belonging to the earliest period showing human occupation were arranged in the first cases, and consisted principally of those belonging to that which is in England called the Alluvial or Drift Period; in France, the Chelléan Epoch of the Paleolithic Period. The various epochs of the Paleolithie Age were represented by implements from northern and southern England; from all parts of France; from Italy, Spain. and Portugal; from Egypt, by a loan display from Prof. H. W. Haynes, of Boston; and from Hindostan, Asia. There were casts of several prehistoric skulls from Europe—the Neanderthal, Olmo, Laugerie Basse and Engis. Implements similar in form, style, and manufacture to those of the Paleolithic Age of European countries were shown as coming from the United States, which objects, if found in Europe, would be undoubtedly accepted as paieolithic. The investigations 1n this respect in the United States of America have not been so pro- found as in Europe, and anthropologists are not unanimous concerning the conelu- sions to be drawn therefrom. There were shown a fossil human thorax and a fossil human skull and thigh-bone, the two latter changed to limonite, all from Florida, found by Judge John G. Webb; a fossil pyrula shell, bearing the prehistoric engrav- ing of a mammoth; implements from the auriferous gravels under Table Mountain, California; others from the Walker River Canyon, in the extinet Quarternary Lake Lahontan, Utah; still others from Fossil Lake, Oregon. These were followed by prehistoric objects of the Neolithic or Polished Stone Age, those from Europe having precedence. England, France, Spain, Italy, Switzerland, Germany, Denmark, Swe- den, Norway, Russia, the Island of Crete, Japan, and Cambodia were all represented. The implements from these countries were much the same as those from the United ° States. In the display made from the United States every State and Territory was repre- sented by objects belonging to prehistoric man—polished stone hatchets, grooved axes and drilled axes, arranged in series according to form, style, and size; stone mauls, adzes, gouges, some from the West Indies of shell; extensive series of caches of leaf-shaped and other stone implements, principally from Pennsylvania and Ohio, though some were from Tennessee and Arkansas; a full series of implements from the quarries and workshops of Flint Ridge, Licking County, Ohio; scrapers. of all kinds; arrow- and spear-heads arranged in the iatest classification, leaf-shaped, triangular, and stemmed, and those of peculiar form; large flint disks; ceremonial 134 REPORT OF NATIONAL MUSEUM, 1893. objects, ornaments and weapons, cup and pitted stones, drilled tablets, discoidal stones (‘‘chungkee”), sinkers, pendants or charms; perforators; tubes, beads and pipes, shown as specimens of aboriginal drilling; club heads, digging sticks, riatas, inortars, and grinding stones; pestles; steatite vessels and the implements with which they were made; hematite objects; agricultural or digging implements, arranged in series; aboriginal sculptures; objects in shell, horn, and bone; stone daggers and swords; slate knives; copper implements from the United States; stone collars and zémés from Porto Rico; stone masks, elubs, and hatchets from the West Indies; jade, turqnoise, rock crystal from Alaska, Mexico, Central and South America; obsidian from California and Mexico; gold objects and ornaments from Chiriqui and Antioquia, Central and South America; plaster models of aborig- inal towns and monuments belonging to Indian tribes; and, for purposes of com- parison, numerous objects from the modern North American Indians were shown in the glass case, duly labeled with the tribe, locality, and special point of com- parison indicated. : The collection was arranged in groups, so that a single label would comprise as many objects as possible. The labels were prepared with care, printed on herbarium board, and displayed with the objects so as to be easily read by the public. The collection was described in the official catalogue as follows: The exhibit under this head deals with man before the dawn of history, and com- prises implements, utensils, and other objects found in different parts of the world, and recognized as his handiwork. OBJECTS OF THE PALEOLITHIC OR CHIPPED-STONE AGE. A series of about sixty chipped stone objects from Europe, Asia, and Africa, belong- ing to the first, the alluvial or Chelleen Period of the Age, and representing the earliest accepted implements made by man. Objects of the second, the Reindeer or Cavern Period. Casts of four prehistoric hnman skulls, Neanderthal, Olmo, Engis, and Laugerie Basse. Implements of stone and bone from France and England (Cresswell and Kent's cav- erns, England; Moustier, Solutre, and La Madelaine, France). Objects from the United States, of the same form as the preceding found in Post- pliocene formations and on the surface, and believed by some students to be implements of the same character as those of Europe. (Exhibited for compari- son. ) OBJECTS OF THE NEOLITHIC OR POLISHED-STONE AGE. A series from the Old and New worlds, comprising hammers, cores, flakes, hatchets, scrapers, disks, chisels, poignards, arrow- and spear-heads—polished and unpol- ished. A collection to illustrate a classification of arrow- and spear-heads. A series of objects of stone, including ‘‘banner stones,” drilled tablets, and boat and bird shaped stones, ete., the uses of which are unknown, but which are supposed to have been connected with ceremonies, or used as ornaments or in games. Objects of shell, bone, and horn. Copper implements and ornaments of America. Gold ornaments from Central and South America. Bronze implements and ornaments from Europe. A collection of ornaments, knives, hatchets, and other objects, of jade, turquoise, rock erystal and obsidian, from Alaska, Central and South America, Australia, and New Zealand. A series of prehistoric Carib implements, including stone collars, zémés, stone masks, clubs, hatchets, ete., from Porto Rico, West Indies. REPORT OF ASSISTANT SECRETARY. 135 In connection with the Exposition work, Mrs. Wilson’s private col- lection of laces, mounted, and with an elaborate series of descriptive labels, was placed in the Woman’s building, An interesting and valuable collection of prehistoric antiquities com- prising 178 objects was given by Mrs. Schliemann on behalf of her husband, lately deceased. They were gathered by the celebrated explorer during his excavations on the hill of Hissarlik and came from the buried cities on the site of Ancient Troy. The curator continued his duties as editor of the department of anthropology in the ‘American Naturalist” and also published a paper upon “Anthropology at the Paris Exposition in 1889.” In addition to the routine work already described, the preparation of a series of casts of typical prehistoric stone implements for distribution to colleges and museums has been continued. THE COLLECTION OF ORIENTAL ANTIQUITIES. This collection is an outgrowth of the Department of Ethnology and was established in 1888 under the honorary curatorship of Dr. Paul Haupt, professor of Semitie studies in Johns Hopkins University, chietly for the purpose of calling attention to the fact that the National Museum was ready to receive and care for objects obtained by archie- ological exploring expeditions in the East, and also to meet the con- stant demand from visitors for collections corresponding to those known in London as of Biblical archeology. Owing in part to lack of space, the specimens have not been a very serviceable study collection. Special attention was given to the making up of a study series of casts of Assyrian and Babylonian seals, of which a large number were found to be in private possession of this country. It is hoped that in time this series will include a com- plete representation of every seal in America, and that this material of such importance for purposes of research will be elaborate enough to render it available for comparative study. Owing in part to lack of space and still more to the fact that it is so difficult to obtain genuine material, the growth of this collection has been very slow, but it still occupies a prominent place in the Museum, and every effort will be made for its improvement. A number of objects have recently been withdrawn from this series to form a portion of the collection of religious ceremonials which was prepared as a special feature for the World’s Fair under the charge of Dr. Cyrus Adler, assistant curator of this department. Among the most important recent accessions are two squeezes of ancient tablets at Persepolis, brought home by the Hon. Truxton Beale, from which have been made the beautiful plaster casts figured and described by Dr. Adler in another part of this report. Another collection received during the year, which seems to deserve special remark in this place, is referred to in a statement prepared by the custodian of the collection: 136 REPORT OF NATIONAL MUSEUM, 1893. The most notable and welcome collection was obtained through the kindness of Miss Olive Risley Seward, of Washington, who placed on deposit in the Museum an interesting collection of Cypriote and Phenician objects. Aside from their intrinsic value these objects have a historical value, in that they were acquired at the actual scene of the excavation. THE COLLECTION OF RELIGIOUS CEREMONIAL OBJECTS. Since 1889, objects of religious ceremonial have been exhibited in connection with the collection of Oriental antiquities. A beginning was made by the formation of an exhibit to illustrate the Jewish religion, but the scope has since been widened and may in the future- include the lower types of religion, with the exception perhaps of those which it would be difficult to illustrate by the separation of material from the general ethnological series. The idea of a collection of this kind was first taken up in this coun- try by the National Museum, and a proposal is made in regard to it in the Museum reports for 1881 and 1889, In 1892 a similar project was taken up by the University of Penn- Sylvania, and an admirable loan exhibition was prepared under the direction of Mr. Stewart Culin. In the “ Biblical World” for January, 1893, the following allusion is made to the subject: An important and indeed indispensable adjunct to the study of religions is the Museum, which in its ideal form should represent a tableau of the course taken by religious rites in their development. Credit is due to the U.S. National Museum for having taken the initiatory steps in this direction. In his report for 1889,* the Sec- retary of the Smithsonian Institution called attention to the importance of collec- tions of articles of worship, and since that time an excellent beginning has been made in the departments of American and Oriental antiquities. Messrs. Fewkes, Adler, and Rockhill have been instrumental in advancing the section of comparative religions in the National Museum and with the admirable facilities possessed by a Government institution for obtaining objects from all parts of the world, the scope of this section ought at an early day to be made coequal with the universe. At the University of Pennsylvania, also, the place of the Museum as the laboratory for study of religions was emphasized by a special loan exhibition of objects used in religious worship, which was opened last spring. The catalogue, which is of the entire exhibition, is due to the energetic and well-directed efforts of Mr. Stewart Culin, the director of the University museums, and is an admirable piece of work, distinguished for its method, clearness, and accuracy. The exhibition, embracing Jgypt, India, China, Japan, America, and Mohammedanism, is noteworthy as the first of the kind in the country. The history of the collection has been epitomized in a paper prepared by Dr. Adler for the Anthropological Congress in Chicago, a revision of which is printed in Part 1 of this Report. The special exhibit shown in Chicago is limited to a selection from the religions of the nations inhabiting the Mediterranean basin, with special regard to the ceremonies, as formmg the starting point for a comparative study of religions. *The plan was first announced in the Report of the Assistant Secretary for 1881. = eo v7 REPORT OF ASSISTANT SECRETARY. re i The exhibit comprises the following religions: Assyro-Babylonian, Jewish, Mohammedan, Greek, Roman, and Oriental Christian. Assyro-Babylonian religion : Bas-reliefs (casts) representing divinities and worshippers. Seals (casts) engraved with representations of mythological and religious scenes. Photographs of divinities and scenes of worship. Jewish religion: Objects used in the service of the Synagogue. Sacred books: Manuscripts of the Law (Pentateuch), of the book of Esther. Ornaments, veils and curtains of the Holy Ark, mantles and covers tor the law; breastplates, bells, and pointers. Outfit of the worshipper: Prayer-mantle, phylacteries, and prayer books. Objects used on sacred occasions. Sabbath: Kiddush cloth, habdalah set, lamps. Passover: Complete set of the utensils of the passover meal, comprising glasses, dishes, cups, saucers, serviettes, and covers. The liturgy of passover evening. New Year’s day and day of atonement: Cornets (shofars). Liturgies of the Beni-Israel (Jews of Bombay in the Marathi language). Feasts of tabernacles: Curtain of booth, palm branch (lulab), and citron (ethrog). Objects used on special occasions: Circumcision, knife and cup. Consecration of child. Siyum. Marriage: Wedding rings, marriage contracts. Omer tablet. Other religious observances. Knife used for slaughtering animals. Hanukah (feast of dedication)—lamps. Mezuzah—tablet on the door post. Amulets. Mizrach. Graphic illustrations: Ceremonies and implements of the synagogue. Cere- monies of festal days. Domestic ceremonies. Photographs of synagogues. Photographs of Jewish rabbis. Photographs of Samaritan pentateuchs and other MSS. Mohammedan religion: Objects used in the mosque: Koran, reading stand, crescent, lamps, ewer and basin for ablutions. Dress and paraphernalia of religious persons. Cos- tume of Imamand Dervish. Dervish staff and drum. Vessel,amulets. Set of photographs of Mecca and the pilgrims. Photographs of mosques, foun- tains, religious persons and feasts, and burial places. Greek religion: Objects of worship. Principal divinities. Minor or secondary deities. Mytho- logical scenes. Religious practice. Festal scenes and processions. Altar and sacrifices. Votive tablets. Sepulchral reliefs. Graphic illustration: Picart plates representing divinities, priests, altars, and other utensils of worship and various religious scenes. Roman religion : Objects of worship. Principal divinities. Minor or secondary deities. Tombstone. Oriental Christian religion: Armenian, Coptic, Ethiopian, and Greek ceremonial vessels, votives, ikons, manuscripts, ete. The idea of a collection of religious ceremonial objects has excited much interest, and cooperation most valuable and enthusiastic has been given by a number of the friends of the Museum. 138 REPORT OF NATIONAL MUSEUM, 1893. THE COLLECTION OF AMERICAN ABORIGINAL POTTERY. This collection, a portion of which would seem to belong to that of prehistoric anthropology, has grown up under the direction of Prof. W. H. Holmes, of the Bureau of Ethnology, and in connection with his studies of American art in clay. Itis arranged in one of the central courts of the Museum building by tribes and regions, including not only the magnificent series of Pueblo objects obtained by the Bureau of Ethnology, but also the general collection from the mounds of the Mississippi Valley and from the burial cemeteries of Central and South America, and forming one of the most impressive exhibitions of the kind ever brought together. The series of vessels to represent the art of the Pueblo tribes was sent to the World’s Fair They were grouped and arranged with life- size figures representing Zuni women making and decorating pottery, executed by Mr. F. H. Cushing. Mr. Holmes also prepared for the World’s Fair illustrations of his other investigations upon the quarry- ing and stone industries of the Indians. The collections shown in Chicago illustrate the quarrying of stone by the aborigines of the United States, for utensils, pipes, ornaments, etc.; the manufacture of stone implements from flint, chert, novaculite, quartzite, and rhyolite; and the mining of copper and mica. Exhibit illustrating the ancient quarrying of quartzite bowlders (and the manu- facture of implements from them) on Piney Branch, District of Columbia; including aseries of specimens, showing processes and progressive steps of manu- facture; and photographs, drawings, and maps representing the site and nature of the aboriginal operations and the method of exploration. A group of exhibits illustrating by means of specimens, maps, photographs, ete., the quarrying and manufacture of chert in Indian Territory, together with a mass of quarry refuse. Exhibits representing the novaculite quarries of Garland County, Ark., including a series of hammer-stones. Exhibits representing the flint quarries of Flint Ridge, Licking County, Ohio, and the manufacture of knives, spears, and arrow-heads. An exhibit representing the quarrying and shaping of rhyolite by the ancient inhabitants of Pennsylvania. Specimens illustrating the use of flint nodules in implement-making by tribes of Texas. Specimens, photographs, and maps showing the aboriginal manufacture of soapstone utensils in the District of Columbia. Collections from the ancient copper mines of Isle Royale, Lake Superior, supple- mented by photographs, maps, and drawings. An exhibit representing the sacred pipestone quarries of Southwestern Minnesota. A collection representing ancient mica mining in North Carolina. Costumed figures—two negro workmen engaged in breaking up and flaking flint. The accessions of the year inelude a large number of entries, the most important being that of a series of ancient pueblo vases purchased from Mr. H. Hales, of New Jersey, to form a part of the department exhibit of aboriginal ceramics at the Columbian Exposition. Small collections, mostly shreds only, have been made by Mr. Gerard Fowke and Mr. REPORT OF ASSISTANT SECRETARY. 139 William Dinwiddie, of the Bureau of Ethnology in Virginia and Mary- land, and Mr. C. Mindeleff and Mr. James Mooney, of the sane Bureau have added to the collections of ancient and modern pueblo ware from Arizona. Donations have been received from Messrs. Thomas Dow- ling, W. H. Phillips, W. L. Abbott, C. Steckelman, E. A. Mearns, Thomas Lee, S. L. Frey, J. A. Maxwell, P. L. Jouy, and Miss E. Mayer. The important collection of ancient pueblo pottery made by Mr. Thomas Keam, of Arizona, which has for a number of years been exhibited as a loan, was purchased by Mrs. Mary Hemenway, of Boston. DEPARTMENT OF MAMMALS. Very little regular work was done in the department during the year, owing to the work for the Columbian Exposition, and the detail of Mr. True, the curator, for general executive work of the Museum. In preparing plans of this exhibit two considerations were kept in mind: First, that the Exposition commemorated the discovery of America, and hence that the exhibit ought, as far as possible, to be American in character; and, secondly, that as the general display of the Museum was intended to furnish an indication of the different branches of its exhibition-work, it was desirable to show, as far as pos- sible, the several classes of such workin which the department was regularly engaged. It was first proposed that a prominent feature of the exhibit should be a complete series of mounted skins of North American mammals, including every species, and also every variety that had received a distinctive name. It was intended that this exhibit should be a com- plete representation of the mammal fauna of the country, and at the same time should show the character and quality of the taxidermic work done by the department. To bring into stronger relief certain of the characteristiG mammals of America, it was proposed, in addition, to exhibit groups of specimens, with accessories indicating natural sur- roundings. It was thought that these groups would also add to the attractiveness of the exhibit, and bring into view another branch of the taxidermic work of the Museum. At alater date, in order to enhance the interest of the exhibit, it was proposed to include a representation of some of the characteristic mam- mals of Central and South America, or possibly the genera complete. Finally, however, when the details of the allotment of space in the Government building became known, the plan underwent considerable modification. The complete representation of species of North American mammals was then abandoned in favor of a display of all the American families, by genera, as a part of a general series of American animals, arranged on the same plan. Thus the exhibit, as finally installed, consisted of— 1. A series of single mounted skins, representing the families of American mammals, by genera. 140 REPORT OF NATIONAL MUSEUM, 1893. 2, A series of groups of characteristic North American mammals, each confined to a Single species, and consisting of several specimens (adult males and females, and young of both sexes, in most instances), accompanied by accessories, indicating the surroundings and habits ot the species in a state of nature. It is unnecessary in this connection to give a detailed list of the genera included in the family series, as, with no great number of exceptions, the entire mammalian fauna of America was represented in this way. Only the North American genera of bats were included, as these mam- mals are, for the most part, small, and do not present salient external characters. They would hardly repay, in connection with an expost- tion, the time and labor which it would be necessary to bestow upon them. The Cetaceans were omitted, as not belonging strictly to the American fauna. Among the rarer genera exhibited were Chironectes, Chlamydophorus, Xenurus, Elasmognathus, Lagidium, Microdipodops, Solenodon, and Brachyurus (or Ouakaria), Of some of the rarest families, such as Dinomyide, no representa- tives could be obtained. Pictures of some of these were introduced. A large proportion of the specimens included in this systematic family series were taken out of the Museum cases, but it was necessary to purchase a considerable number to fill gaps. The families shown are as follows: Cebida, the American Monkeys. Hapalida, the Marmosets. Felida, the Cats. Canidae, the Dogs. Mustelidw, the Weasels. Ursida, the Bears. Procyonida, the Raccoons. Cercoleptide, the Kinkajous. Otariide, the Sea-Lions. Phocida, the Seals. Odobenidaw, the Walruses. Camelide, the Camels and Llamas. Bovida, the Cattle. Antilocaprida, the Prong-horn Antelopes. Cervida, the Deer. Dicotylidw, the Peccaries. Tapirida, the Tapirs. Trichechide, the Manatees. Phyllostomida, the Leaf-nosed Bats. ‘Emballonurida, the Free-tailed Bats. Vespertilionida, the Typical Bats. Talpida, the Moles. Soricida, the Shrews. Centetide, the Tenrees and Almiquis. Sciurida, the Squirrels. Haplodontida, the Sewellels. Castorida, the Beavers. Muride, the Rats and Mice. Geomyida, the Pouched Gophers. Saccomyide, the Pouched Rats. Dipodida, the Jumping Mice and Jerboas. Octodontida, the Spiny Rats. Hysiricide, the Porcupines. Chinchillida, the Chinchillas. Dasyproctida, the Agoutis. Dinomyidew (no English name; only one specimen known). Caviide, the Cavies. Lagomyida, the Pikas. Leporida, the Hares. Myrmecophagida, the Ant-eaters. Bradypodide, the Sloths. Dasypodida, the Armadillos. Didelphyida, the Opossums. The groups shown were as follows: A male Pacific Walrus, from Walrus Island, Bering Sea. A group of California Sea-lions from the coast of California. Steller’s Sea-lions, male and female, from the Pribilof Islands, Alaska. REPORT OF ASSISTANT SECRETARY. 141 A Sea-otter from Sannak Island, Alaska. A family of Badgers from Kansas, with plants and ground-work, representing the natural surroundings of these animals on the plains. A group of three Woodland Caribou, from Newfoundland, with accessories repre senting the more open portions of that island. A group of Barren-ground Caribou from Alaska, on the ‘‘tundras,” or treeless plains. A group of four Rocky Mountain Goats, from Montana and British Columbia, rep- resented as standing on a ledge of a rocky mountain side. A group of six Rocky Mountain Sheep, from Wyoming and Montana, represented as clinbing about a mountain peak, near the snow-line. A group of nine-banded Armadillos, from Texas, with accessories showing the prickly vegetation of the arid regions. A family of Virginia Opossums, showing nest and young. Virginia Deer. A scene at the margin of a water-course in Virginia. A group, comprising two bucks, a doe, and a fawn, with accessories, consisting of trees and plants characteristic of Virginia, intended to convey an idea of the surround- ings in which the Virginia deer was first seen by the European colonists, Active work in installation was begun in May, 1891, when the curator visited the establishments of the larger dealers in natural history sup- plies, and obtained such materials and specimens as were needed to begin the work. The force of taxidermists was increased from three to nine, and divided into two parties, one of which worked on the groups and the other on the single specimens intended for the systematic series. Mr. William Palmer was appointed chief taxidermist, and had immediate charge of the work under the general supervision of the curator; by whose judgment and artistic taste the effectiveness of the groups was greatly enhanced. in preparing the groups every effort was made to prcduce an artis- tic effect, not less than to secure complete fidelity to nature, and sound and finished workmanship. Every one employed contributed his share of special skill and knowledge, and advantage was taken, as far as possible. of advice given by competent field naturalists. Photographs of living animals and of characteristic scenery were utilized when available. Special acknowledgment should be made to Mr. George Bird Grinnell, of New York, for advice and assistance in connection with the group of Mountain Goats; to Col. Cecil Clay, of Washington, and to Rev. M. Harvey, of Halifax, in connection with that of the Woodland Caribou. Mr. J. Stanley Brown obtained large quantities of lichens and mosses in Alaska for the group of Barren- ground Caribou. A new feature in these groups was the introduction of natural leaves, grasses, plants, and sea weeds, prepared by a process invented and satisfactorily carried out by Mr. William Palmer. Vines with leaves and tendrils which had never been detached from the natural stalk, and other similar accessories, were used, producing effects which could not be obtained by artificial leaves fastened on artificial stems. The production of these groups is attended with many difticulties, and the number which can be constructed in a given time would be 142 REPORT OF NATIONAL MUSEUM, 1893. disappointing to one unfamiliar with the conditions. It is often very difficult to obtain the skins of animals of the proper ages, or of both sexes. On account of the great geographical variation of American mammals, the specimens for any one group must be from a single local- ity. The obtaining of aecessories—plants, characteristic rocks, soil, turf, ete.—is often difficult. Photographs of living specimens for the guidance of the taxidermists are not always accessible, and, further- more, in many cases there is much diversity of opinion regarding habits. All these circumstances, together with the mechanical difficul- ties involved, cause the groups to be expensive both of time and labor. While the taxidermic work was progressing, attention was given to the preparation of labels. Those for the groups were descriptive, and were in several instances accompanied by small maps on which the geographical distribution of the species was indicated. The single specimens in the systematic series were provided with labels through- out, giving names, localities, ete., and, in addition, a larger label was made for each family, in which a brief summary of the characters, dis- tribution, and habits of the group was presented. AJ] these labels were uniform with those regularly used in the Museum, and were printed at the Government Printing Office. Mention has been made of the series of domesticated animals, in the preparation of which this department gave some assistance. The series, so far as mammals were concerned, was not so successful as was desired, but some forms little known in the United States were, nevertheless, exhibited. As examples, may be mentioned the yak, obtained in India for the Museum by the late Dr. J. Wood-Mason; the zebu of India, the domestic buffalo of Africa, and the paca of South America. As ornaments to the general zoological exhibit a number of mounted heads of the large game of the world were displayed. The following species are represented : Eland, African. Clark’s Gazelle, African. Greater Koodoo, African. Waller’s Gazelle, African. Lesser Koodoo, African. Doreas Gazelle, African. Argali, or wild sheep of Thibet, Asiatic. | S6mmering’s Gazelle, African. Burhel, or blue wild sheep, Asiatic. Speke’s Gazelle, African. Thar, or Himalayan wild goat, Asiatic. Salt’s Gazelle, African. Asiatic Ibex, Asiatic. Sassaby, or Hartbeest, Africa. Beisa Antelope, African. Jackson’s Hartbeest, African. Nylghau, Asiatic. Siberian Boar, Asiatic. While the arrangement of the exhibit was, on the whole, effective, the necessity of crowding the cases together detracted considerably from its appearance. The curator has prepared the following statement of the events of the year: The accessions are, many of them, of a very interesting character. The Museum is especially indebted to Dr. W. L. Abbott, for a collection from Aldabra, the Seychelles, and other islands of the Indian Ocean, in which are included three REPORT OF ASSISTANT SECRETARY. 143 skeletons and two skulls of the genus Prodelphinus, accompanied by notes on the external coloration, which will doubtless throw light on the identity of the species of this genus of dolphins. The collection also includes several specimens of Fruit- bats, Pteropus, including some which appear to represent an undescribed species. Mr. William Astor Chanler deposited a collection of about 35 mounted heads of African antelopes. An excellent series of 31 skins of the large game of South Africa, inelud- ing the true zebra, hartebeestes, gnus, and other antelopes, lions, hyenas, wart-hogs, etc., were presented by Mr. H.C. Moore. Dr. P. L. Sclater, secretary of the Zoolog- ical Society of London, presented a number of pelts of antelopes, and other East African mammals, collected in Berbera, Somali, by Capt. Swayne. Mounted speci- mens of dnomalurus, Smutsia, Galeopithecus, and Bathyurgus were purchased to fill gaps in the exhibition series. A number of small mammals of Burmah, from the collection of L. Fea, were also purchased. Skins of Brown’s Kangaroo, the Spotted Cuscus, and the Papuan wild hog, characteristic mammals of New Guinea, were obtained from Bruno Geisler. Dr. E. A. Mearns, U. S. Army, continued his extensive collection of mammals from the Mexican boundary. Mr. P. L. Jouy made a collection in Mexico, and Prof. B. W. Evermann in South Dakota. Mr. C. H. Townsend, of the U.S. Fish Commis- sion, obtained a Californian Sea lion (in San Luis Bay, Lower California), three Sea elephants, and a Steller’s Sea lion. Prof. C. H. Gilbert obtained for the Museum, near Monterey, Cal., a foetal specimen of the rare Stearn’s grampus, Grampus stearnsti. Forty-four mammals were received from the Zoological Park, including 4 bears, 2 Venezuelan deer, 3 llamas, a beaver, and several monkeys. A fine skeleton and a skull of the extinct Artic Sea cow, Rhytina, were purchased through the U.S. Fish Commission. The commission also obtained a skull of a Walrus. A skele- ton of the Rocky Mountain Goat was purchased. As already stated, few changes were made in the exhibition hall during the year. The collections presented a more or less chaotic appearance, owing to the necessity of withdrawing specimens for the Columbian Exposition. The regular routine work of the department was carried on as usual. The skulis and skins deposited by the Department of Agriculture were entered; the work of cleaning skulls belonging to these collections progressed continuously, and 122 skins were made up, including 15 deer, 27 fur-seals, and other larger forms. The system of cataloguing the skin and skull of the same individual under different numbers, which had been in operation since 1852, has been abandoned so far as the collections deposited by the Department of Agriculture were concerned, and all specimens derived from a single individual, whatever their character, now receive the same number. The same system will be applied to the regular series as soon as the present volume of the catalogue is closed. The first number of the new series is 50,001. The old plan, which was satisfactory while the collection was small, had become very burdensome, and was furthermore constantly producing confusion in numbers. A space in the upper part of the south-entrance laboratory was made available for storage purposes by the construction of a gallery, or second floor, at the south end of the room. As soon as they were relieved of work for the World’s Fair, the taxidermists proceeded to overhaul the skins which had accumulated in the vats for the previous two years, and also early accessions. It was found that many had deteriorated more or less for lack of attention, and a few were entirely ruined As many as pos- sible were dried for the study series and others were laid aside to be mounted at the earliest opportunity. This work was still in progress at the close of the year. The mounting of two antelopes, a gnu, and a hartbeest was begun. During the year 82 dry skins were made up for the study series of the Museum, and, as already stated, 122 skins belonging to the Department of Agriculture deposit. Dr. E. A. Mearns, U. S. Army, with the aid of an assistant, continued for some 144 REPORT OF NATIONAL MUSEUM, 1893. months to make collections for the Museum on the Mexican boundary. Mr. P. L. Jouy was also engaged in field work in Mexico for a part of the year. The specimens lent for study, dissection, or other purposes during the year were as follows: To Dr. J. A. Allen, American Museum of Natural History, New York, 9 skins and 10 skulls of Field mice (Sitomys); 24 skins and 15 skulls of Pouehed Gophers (Thomomys); 1 skin and 1 skull of Meadow mouse (Arvicola); 1 skin and 1 skull of Field mouse (Sitomys); 1 skin and 3 skulls of Harvest mice (Ochetodon). For study. To Dr. Harrison Allen, Philadelphia, Pa., 3 skulls of bats (Dasypterus). For study. To Prof. Dr. Wilh. Leche, Stockholm, Sweden, 2 young Star-nosed moles in alcohol; 2 young moles in alcohol. For dissection. ‘To the Madrid Historical Exhibition, Madrid, Spain, 10 mounted mammals charac- teristic of the North American fauna; 7 pairs of antlers. For exhibition. To S. N. Rhoads, Philadelphia, Pa., 2 skins and 1 skull of Cooper’s mouse (Synap- tomys). For study. The number of specimens in the several series, June 30, 1893, was as follows: Mounted skinsan therexhibilonwserlestees esse eee ee 842 Skins and alcoholic specimens in the study and reserve series.-.-..---..---- 10, 204 Skins and alcoholic specimens received during the year*......_.....-.----- 728 The last entries in the several catalogues, June 30, 1893, were as follows: Regular series— Catalosueiof skins andvallcoholicssss= see eeeee eee ee eee eee eee 20, 994 Cataloaue ofeskullstand skeleton ses = seeee pees eae eee eee 36, 052 Department of Agriculture deposit : Old series Catalocuelofskinsyand sal coholicss=s= sseeee «ee eee eee. a eee 36, 939 Catalopue of skulls/and skeletons: 52:4. --- 2h ee ee 49, 328 New series— General’ catalooue (beginning with s000)))- =.=) 222 =) sess sess ee 54, 102 DEPARTMENT OF BIRDS. The year’s work consisted chiefly in preparing the exhibit of birds for the Columbian Exposition. This work, owing to the impossibility of securing an adequate number of skilled taxidermists, and extreme difficulty of obtaining necessary materials and specimens, and the elaborate character of the labels prepared, absorbed all the time of the curator and his assistants and stopped the regular operations of the department. . More than 1,300 birds mounted on pedestals, representing nearly 900 species, were sent to Chicago; but owing to a reduction of exhibition space many of these had to be repacked and stored. This collection of mounted birds contained representatives of every one of the families of birds found in the Western Hemisphere (104 in number), except the American ostrich family, which was represented by water-color pictures. Among the smaller birds, each family was represented by sufficient number of species (mostly of different genera) to show the extreme Variations of size, form, and coloration. * These statistics do not include the collections deposited by the Department of Agriculture, which are not directly in the custody of the curator. Forty-six speci- mens were received on deposit from other sources. REPORT OF ASSISTANT SECRETARY. The systematic series, showing representatives of all the families of BIRDS. birds occurring in America, was arranged as follows : Fringillida, the Finches. Icteridv, the Hangnests. Sturnide, the Starlings. Corvide, the Crows and Jays. Mniotiltide, Wood Warblers. Carebide, Honey Creepers. Tanagridw, Tanagers. Hirundinide, Swallows. Vireonida, Vireos. Laniide, Shrikes. Dulide, Palm Chats. Ptiliogonatide, Siiky Flycatchers. Ampelidw, Wax-wings. Cinclide, Dippers. Troglodytidw, Wrens. Certhiidaw, Creepers. Sittide, Nuthatches. Parida, Titmice. Chameide, Wren-Tits. Sylviide, Warblers. Mimide, Mocking Thrushes. Turdide, Vhrushes. Motacillide, Wagtails and Pipits Alaudida, Larks. Oxyrhamphide, Sharp-bills. Furnariide, Oven Birds. Dendrocolaptida, Wood-hewers. Formicariide, Ant Birds. Pteroptochida, Tapacolas. Conopophagide, Ant-Pipits. Phytotomide, Planteutters. Cotingide, Cotingas. Pipridw, Manakins. Tyrannide, Tyrant Flycatchers. Trochilide, Humming Birds. Micropodide, Switts. Trogonide, Trogons. Picide, Woodpeckers. Capitonide, Barbets. Rhamphastide, Toucans. Galbulide, Jacamars. Bucconida, Puff Birds. Alcedinida, Kingfishers. Momotide, Motmots. Todide, Vodies. Caprimulgide, Goatsuckers. Steatornithida, Oil Birds. Cucilide, Cuckoos. Psittacide, Parrots. Bubondie, Owls. Strigide, Barn Owls. Pandionida, Ospreys. Buteonide, Hawks, Vultures. H. Mis. 184, pt. 210 Kites, Eagles, and TFalconida, Falcons. Columbida, Pigeons or Doves. Cracide, Curassows. Perdicide, Partridges and Quails. Tetraonida, Grouse. Meleagride, Turkeys. Opisthocomida, Hoatzins. Cathartide, American Vultures. Phatthontide, Tropie Birds. Fregatida, Man-o’-War Birds. Anhingzde, Anhingas. Phalacrocoracide, Cormorants. Sulide, Gannets. Pelecanida, Pelicans. Ardeide, Herons. Cochleariide, Boatbills. Ciconiide, Storks. Plataleide, Spoonbills. Thidide, Ibises. Phenicopteride, Flamingoes. Anatidw, Ducks, Geese, and Swans. Anhimide, Screamers. Rallidda, Rails. Aramide, Courlans. Gruide, Cranes. Psophiida, Trumpeters. Cariamide, Cariamas. Eurypygide, Sun Bitterns. (Edicnemida, Thick-knees. Recurvirostride, Avocets and Stilts. Phalaropodide, Phalaropes. Scolopacide, Snipes. Jacganide, Jaganas. Hematopodida, Oyster-catchers. Aphrizide, Turnstones. Charadriida, Plovers. Thinocoriide, Partridge-plovers. Chionide, Sheath-bills. Pelecanoidida, Diving Petrels. Procellariide, Petrels. Diomedeide, Albatrosses. Laride, Gulls and Terns. Rynchopide, Skimmers Stercorariida, Skuas. Alcide, Auks. Urinatorida, Loons. Heliornithide, Sun Grebes. Colymbida, Grebes. Spheniscida, Penguins. Tinamide, Tinamous. Rheidw, Rheas. 145 ) 146 REPORT OF NATIONAL MUSEUM, 1893. Besides the synoptical collection there were shown the following special collections: A Collection of Humming Birds comprising species of sixty-four genera. A Collection of Birds of Paradise, embracing the following species: Astrapia nigra, 3ird of Paradise. Chlamydera maculata,Spotted Bower Bird. Chlamydera nuchalis, Greater Bower Bird. Cicinnurus regius, King Bird of Paradise. Diphyllodes magnifica, Magnificent Bird of Paradise. Drepanornis Albertisi, D’Albertis’s Bird of Paradise. Epimachus speciosus, Grand Promerops. Lophorina superba, Superb Bird of Para- Incomparable dise. Manucodia atra, Black Bird of Paradise. Paradigalla carunculata, Wattled Bird of Paradise. Paradiswa apoda,Greater Bird of Paradise. Paradisea Augusta-Victoriw, Empress Au- gusta Victoria’s Bird of Paradise. Paradisea minor, Lesser Bird of Paradise. Paradisea Raggiana, Raggi’s Bird of Par- adise. Paradisea sanguinea, Red Bird of Para- dise,. Parotia sefilata, Six-wired Bird of Para- dise. Phonygama Gouldi, Gould’s Bird of Para- dise. Ptilonorhynchus violaceus, Satin Bower Bird. Ptilorhis Alberti, Prince Albert’s Rifle Bird. Plilorhis magnifica, Magnificent Rifle Bird. Ptilorhis paradisea, Ritle Bird. Schlegelia Wilsoni, Wilson’s Bird of Para- dise. Seleucides nigra, Twelve-wired Bird of Paradise. Semioptera Wallacei, Wallace’s S andard Wing. Sericulus melinus, Regent Bird. Xanthomelus ardens, Fiery Bird of Para- dise. A collection of Game Birds, including representatives of the following families: Anatide, Ducks, Geese, and Swans. Charadriide, Plovers. Columbide, Pigeons or Doves. Cracidw, Curassows. Gouride, Crowned Pigeons. Megapodide, Mound Fowls. Meleagride, Turkeys. Numididw, Guinea Fow!ls. Otididw, Bustards. Perdicide, Partridges and Quails. Phasianide, Pheasants. Rallide, Rails. Scolopacidw, Snipe. Tetraonidew, Grouse. Tinamide, Tinamous. A collection illustrating the confusion caused by the application of the same pop- ular name to different species of birds. The following birds are represented: Bee Bird, Buzzard, Chimney Swallow, Goldfinch, Jacksnipe, Martin, Ortolan, Pheasant, Redstart, Robin, Screech Owl, Tree Sparrow, Woodcock, Blackbird, Carrion Crow, Coot, Jackdaw, Kingfisher, Oriole, Partridge, Quail, Redwing, Rook, Sparrow Hawk, Turtle Dove, Yellow-hammer. Special groups, with natural accessories, as follows: North American species approaching extinction: Carolina Paroquet, Ivory-billed Woodpecker, Passenger Pigeon. To illustrate protective coloration: Ptarmigans in summer, Ptarmigans in winter. To illustrate remarkable habits: Swallow-tailed Kite feeding, Carolina Paroquets roosting, California Woodpeckers and their storehouse, Jaganas walking on lily-pads, Prairie Chickens courting, Flamingoes and their nests, Bower Birds and their play- house, Crocodile Birds and crocodile, Lyre Birds and dancing mound of the male, Butcher Birds and their larder. English Song Thrushes and their nest: An artistic group, presented by the artists, Mr. H. Minturn and Mrs. Mogridge, though the birds were mounted by the Museum taxidermist, Mr. H. C. Denslow. The value of the entire exhibit, as an educational feature, is greatly REPORT OF ASSISTANT SECRETARY. 147 enhanced by the careful and explicit labeling, in popular language. of every object contained in it. The gifts of material in this department have been so numerous and valuable that it is not practicable to mention in this place even by name all the contributors. They are enumerated in the list of acces- sions in Appendix V1. } Among the collections containing more than fifty specimens may be mentioned those of Dr. W. L. Abbott, from Kashmir and Baltistan; of Dr. W. L. Abbott, from the mountains and vale of Kashmir; of P. L, Jouy, from Jalisco, Mexico; of Dr. E. A. Mearns, U. S. Army, froin northern Mexico, and the adjacent parts of New Mexico, Texas, and Arizona, including 823 skins; of Lieut. Wirt Robinson, U.S. Army, from Colombia and Curacao. Mr. Ridgway reports as follows upon the state of the collection: The present state of the collection is very satisfactory as regards preservation, but quite otherwise so faras the arrangement of the skin collection of the larger birds,stored chiefly in the west basement, is concerned. This is due to causes almost beyond con- trol, the chief of which is the congested state of the collection, which has far outgrown the space available for storage. The difficulty is, moreover, constantly increasing. To remedy the trouble considerable progress has, however, been made in rearrange- ment; but the space is so much overcrowded with cases that work can only be done slowly and at great disadvantage, At least five times the space now oceupied by the collection would be necessary for its proper zrrangement, without consideration of future accessions. It has long been intended to make an extensive distribution of duplicate specimens, both to relieve the congestion of our storage facilities and to advance the study of ornithology in the various institutions of learning throughout the country; but this has been delayed until the entire collection can be rearranged, since the two being simply different parts of the same undertaking, are necessarily carried on together. The total number of specimens was, atthe end of June, 1893, substantially asfollows: Motalss kingsenies\agrendsotesume. VS92 460 oe ee Ua Pe ee eee 60, 532 SEC LOL OMS OTL NOW ESO Joes ict lee enc ta ine Sots Uy hte: Shes ee amine os 1, 985 Motaliskinsyatrend:ots pune, 1893) .8 5. oss ee eee eee 62, 517 Bsmbii1on collection at end of- june. 1893 5-2-2...) eke ee ee 8, 154 otal specimens ab.endcoft June, 1895... -. =. .s.000252.. Joe sce Se teen ste 70, 671 Housmepecmens atend of June; 1899 ).6 02.252 5.7 26 eee 68, 416 MER Sane MUTI Soe Ose ao oe Me ao) ee ee oo Pa ee 2, 255 The last entry at end of June, 1892, is 126,361. The last entry at end of June, 1893, is 128,852. Specimens were sent for study to the American Museum of Natural History, to Osbert Salvin, esq., and Count Salvadori, London; to Gur-- don Trumbull, of Hartford; Witmer Stone, of Philadelphia, and other specialists. DEPARTMEN!t OF BIRDS’ EGGS. Lhe collection of birds’ eggs still remains in the charge of Maj. ©. E. Bendire, U. S. Army, retired, who, since the gift of his own unsur- * Less additions to mounted collection (370 in number) and specimens distributed (136). 148 REPORT OF NATIONAL MUSEUM, 1893. passed private collection to the Smithsonian Institution in 1884, has devoted his entire time to the development of the national collection and the preparation of the treatise upon the eggs and nesting habits of North American birds, for which the Institution has been collecting material for nearly fifty years. Ma). Bendire has continued the preparation of his work on the Life Histories of North American Birds, and the text for another volume, which will include the Cuckoos, the Woodpeckers, the Goat-suckers and Swifts, the Humming Birds, the Flyeatchers, the Horned Larks, the Crows, Jays, Magpies, Blackbirds, and Orioles, is well in progress, and the illustrations are being prepared under his direction by Mr. John L. Ridgway. The first volume of this work has been received with much favor, and it is gratifying that American work in illustration should receive such hearty commendation from European authorities as have the colored plates accompanying this Bulletin. Dr. Blasius, in the ““Rundschau,” February 4, 1893, says: The chromolithographs are perfect. The shading is so perfect, especially near the outlines of the eggs, which appear to be resting upon a light-gray surface, that one imagines himself to be looking at the original eggs. Iam not acquainted with any work in English, German, or any other language, that has presented pictures of eggs approaching these in execution. One can not but express the highest regard for a scientific establishment like the Smithsonian Institution which produces so excellently executed a book, and we can but wish and hope that the entire work may be completed, so that we may have as comprehensive a treatise on North Amer- ican oology as we have of its ornithology in Baird, Ridgway, and Brewer's History of North American Birds, published 1n 1874. Dr. Hermann Schalow, of Berlin, in the ‘‘Ornithologische Monats- berichte,” January, 1893, wrote: The original water-color drawings were made from nature by John L. Ridgway, and are reproduced in lithography in a most admirable fashion. The plates far sur- pass the best with which we are familiar. Dr. R. Bowdler Sharpe, of the British Museum, in *‘ Nature,” Novem- ber 2, 1893, wrote: The figures are beautifully rendered by chromolithography, and the publication is altogether a notable one. The letterpress is the work of Capt. Charles Bendre, who is known to be one of the most practiced oologists of the present day. He has described and figured in the present volume the eggs of all the North American game- birds, pigeons, and birds of prey, and he has used his opportunity to the greatest advantage by giving anexcellent account of the life-histories of the species, together with the latest information respecting their geographical distribution. Capt. Ben- dire’s work forms one of the most important of the recent contributions to ornitho- logical knowledge, and the succeeding volumes will be awaited with interest by ornithologists. Special allusion should be made to the very important cooperation of Dr. William L. Ralph, of Utica, N. Y. Dr. Ralph has for twenty years been forming a collection of the eggs and nests of North American birds, very complete for the entire continent, though especially rich in southern and extremely northern forms. This collection, which is one REPORT OF ASSISTANT SECRETARY. 149 of the most important and most beautifully prepared in existence, is especially valuable to the student on account of the thorough and scholarly manner in which it is catalogued and labeled, has been given by him to the Smithsonian Institution, and nearly half of it, numbering about 3,250 eggs, has already been transferred to the custody of the curator. The collection is being constantly increased, and Dr. Ralph spares no expense in obtaining representatives of rare species. By this agency alone at least sixty species, either not at all represented or represented by worthless specimens, have up to the present time been added. A large number of other gifts have been received, of which those of Dr. A. K. Fisher, Dr. E. A. Mearns, U. S. Army, Lieut. H. C. Benson, U.S. Army, and Walter F. Webb are the most extensive, including each over fifty specimens. The curator prints the following statistical memorandum: Present state of the collection. S DEGINeETISaI Ne NOLUNEADICL CAMySe rl GS ae seis eee ae ee ee oeereraea 37, 338 PpPecumeEens ine NOLoneAmMerican, duplicates sassmeneee eee oo eee ee see 11, 759 Specimensionvexhijbiblonyse.s2 cs eteee ae ae es oes aee ane cee ome hee eee 1,491 Ota 35 coe ete Ses sae ats ae ses Nene Sete aia ose ose See eatin ne =< 50, 588 Species and subspecies in the North American series ..:...........---.----- 781 SPECIMENS IN TOTEIONUSCLIES cease = ee oa oe ee a eee Ree vee ee Se 4, 419 SPECIMENS LOLeSl TT CUPL CA LES sa ae epee aa ee ee oe ree 231 TO eae en Sesh oe Doe asta anes Sone Sees ear A anne ae eeeas meyer eye 4, 650 SPECIES iN) TOTELOMISCTICS yy) oer oe Pte ee ee ee eo ee ey eee 2 Sen 624 NesisuneNoroheAmerican reserve series —< 3a: 2 a2 Sos esha ee cok eee ee 2, 656 INGSUSTONRORTTD IO OMnee ao secior es ses inisne aciataia se eer ee eee teen 235 NO Gallet ae Meee awe a ers Sere So nye See ee eae oe ce 2,891 Last catalogue entry in June, 1892, 25,170. Last catalogue entry in June, 1893, 25,935. DEPARTMENT OF REPTILES AND BATRACHIANS. Dr. Leonhard Stejneger, the curator of these collections, reports that if the progress of the department be measured by the number of speci- mens received and entered upon the books, the activity of the past year has been unprecedented, no less than 2,302 specimens having been catalogued.* Some of these have furnished types for quite a num- ber of recently described species, both from this country and abroad. As a consequence of the greatly increased number of specimens received during the present year, the routine work of installing, identi- fying, caring for, labeling, and reporting upon them has been more than twice as great as during any previous year. The department has ~ For comparison it may be mentioned that the number of entries in 1891-92 was 1,055; in 1890-791, 908; in 1889-’90, 705; in 1888-'89, 784; in 1887~’88, 19; in 1886-’87, 138, 50 REPORT OF NATIONAL MUSEUM, 1893. also had on hand the preparation of its part of the exhibit for the World’s Columbian Exposition in Chieago, so that the curator and his assistant have had their time fully occupied without much chance of effecting a better arrangement of the old collections. The curator has been specially engaged in the care of the collection of reptiles obtained in Death Valley by the expedition sent out from the U.S. Department of Agriculture, in charge of Dr. C. Hart Mer- riam, and has furnished a special report which, accompanied by four plates, was published in North American Fauna, No. 7, May, 1893. In this are described 11 new species and subspecies, while a number of forms described by previous authors are more fully reported upon. Among the most interesting additions to the collection is a new species of Yantusia, described by Dr. Stejneger as XY. Henshawi.* This lizard belongs to a genus peculiar to California, two species only being previously known. The new species is remarkably distinct and forms altogether one of the most interesting herpetological novelties obtained in this country during recent years. I may add that the present species is only part of a very valuable collection sent home by Mr. Henshaw from southern California. There has also been received another collection which throws con- siderable light on the geographical distribution of species in the south- western portion of the United States and contains many rare species. This was presented by Dr. Timothy E. Wilcox, U.S. Army, who col- lected at Fort Huachuea, Ariz. Of extralimital collections obtained during the present year may be mentioned those made by Mr. P. L. Jouy in various parts of Mexico; by Mr. Charles W. Richmond in Nicaragua, and by Mr. Harry W. Perry in Honduras. Especially important have been the collections received from Africa. The Museum has been particularly deficient in material from that part of the world, but thanks to the zeal and generosity of two American gentlemen, this deficiency is now gradually being remedied. Mr. William Astor Chanier has sent collections from the east coast of the mainland between the mouth of the Tana River and Hameye, about 300 miles inland, and Dr. W. L. Abbott, others from the Seychelles and various other groups of islands off the east coast of Africa. The study of the former collection by Dr. Stejneger reveals many rare and undescribed species, while the latter furnishes the material for a full list of the herpetological fauna of the islands in question, which also shows a number of new species. Among other prominent contributors are Profs. J.T. Seovell and A. J. Woolman; Julius Hurter, St. Louis, Mo.; F. Stephens, Santa Ysabel, Cal.; Herbert Brown, Tucson, Ariz.; Dr. E. A. Mearns, of the United States and Mexican Boundary Commission; George E. Harris, ~ Discovered in southern California by Mr. H. W. Henshaw. REPORT OF ASSISTANT SECRETARY. 151 Cassville, Mo.; Prof. B. W. Evermann, of the U.S. Fish Commission ; L. Belding, Stockton, Cal. The work of Dr. Stejneger on the proposed supplementary volume of the Nomenclator Zoologicus has progressed as fast as could be expected, and by the end of the year more than 17,000 generic terms had been card-catalogued and arranged alphabetically by classes. It is evident that the original maximum estimate of 20,000 genera will be reached or even exceeded. Excellent facilities for studying the collections have been extended to Prof. E. D. Cope, who, among other subjects studied, made extended anatomical researches for his new ophiological system, and to Dr. O. P. Hay, for finishing his work on the Indiana reptiles. The estimate of the curator shows the status of the collection on June 30, 1893, to be as follows: Specimens. FRERELWOUREIICS ct cele meee ae hee a ns tere ae ete tees as te tie be oe Le ode 18, 222 Duplieaterserless-s2- 422% orn saa ae ee eae ek ae see See a: Meee cee se 8, 705 Wrassonteds sndBeRoules ae eee ee i eae eee See ee este ee 6, 313 Gran totals Saree Sees hice ore alone a Se ined 2aerme 33, 240 Last catalogue entry in June, 1892, 18,191. Last catalogue entry in June, 1893, 20,495. The exhibit of the reptiles and batrachians at the World’s Colum- bian Exposition comprised two classes of objects, viz: (1) Groups of casts and mounted specimens, and (2) a series of specimens illustrating representative American families. Owing to lack of space and time three groups only were exhibited, though work on several more had been planned and partly begun. The first group consisted of 14 casts of some of the more typical poisonous snakes occurring within the United States, as for instance, farious species of rattlesnakes, the water moccasin, the copperhead, and the harlequin snake. The snakes were shown coiled or crawling among rocks, roots of trees, dead leaves, moss, ete. The accessories were not intended in every case to represent the actual surroundings of the species, as the specimens belonged to species inhabiting widely sepa- rated localities, and were exhibited together for the purpose of contrast- ing the various types. The casts composing the group were mostly of plaster, while two were made of a glue composition. They have in every instance been made from specimens sent alive to the Museum, several of them expressly for the Chicago exhibit. Among these I would eall special attention to the magnificent Texas rattlesnake (Crotalus atro.) and the red California rattler (C. rubidus) from southern California. The second group comprised 53 casts and mounted specimens of different types of land and fresh-water turtles inhabiting the United States, including gophers, box tortoises, terrapins, mud turtles, soft- shelled turtles, etc., the accessories, as in the snake group, illustrating in a general way only their natural surroundings, water and sandy beaches consequently predominating. 152 REPORT OF NATIONAL MUSEUM, 1893. The third group showed a fine yellow boa, from Jamaica, in the act of climbing the branches of a tree, typifying the non-venomous snakes in contrast to the group of poisonous ones. The second class of objects Consisted of 683 species in alcohol, this series being destined to illustrate by typical specimens the families of reptiles and batrachians occurring in the Western Hemisphere. Alto- gether 48 families were shown, several of the larger ones being repre- sented by aseries of species to illustrate the extremes of forms included in them. All the specimens were carefully mounted upon glass plates, in imitation of the natural positions of the animals, and displayed in square glass jars, the larger ones in Dorflinger jars, the smaller, in Benedict plate-glass jars. The great advancement of this mode of exhibiting alcoholics over the old one of simply suspending the animal in a round jar, was very striking. The plate-glass jars especially are ‘so beautifuland the animals show to such an advantage that itis hoped that the experiments which are now being made for improvements in their manufacture nay meet with success. Each jar was provided with two printed labels, one family label giving in a few terms the scientific characteristics of the family, in addition to a brief popular account of its other peculiarities, as well as the geographical distribution, the other label being the specimen label containing the popular and scien- tific names, locality, Museum number, and donor’s or collector’s name. A systematic series of aleoholice specimens, representing the following families of American reptiles and batrachians: REPTILES. Crocodiles, Crocodilida. Tortoises, families Chelydride, Kinosternida, Testudinida, Emydide, Cheloniide, Dermochelydida, and Trionychida. Lizards, families Lublepharide, Gekkonide, Anolida, Iquanidw, Helodermatide, Angu- idw, Anniellidw, Xantusiide, Teiide, Scincide, Bipedida, Amphisbanide. Snakes, families Typhlopid@, Leptotyphlopide, Ilysiide, Boidw,Charinide, Natricide, Nothopsida, Amblycephalide, Boigide, Elapidew, Hydrophide, Crotalide. BATRACHIANS. Salamanders, families Proteide, Cryptobranchide, Amblystomatida, Plethodontida, Desmognathida, Salamandride, Amphiumide. Crecilians, family Ceciliide. Sirens, family Sirenide. Toads and frogs, families Bufonide, Pelobatide, Hylidae, Cystignathida, Engystomat- idw, Dendrobatide, Ranide. Although not very extensive, the herpetological exhibit attracted much attention, particularly the two large groups, which were con- stantly surrounded by a crowd of interested and appreciative visitors to the Fair. DEPARTMENT OF FISHES. The honorary curator, Dr. Tarleton H. Bean, was placed in charge of the exhibit of the U. S. Fish Commission at the World’s Columbian REPORT OF ASSISTANT SECRETARY. 153 Exposition, and this, together with his other duties in connection with the Commission, has enabled him to devote but little time to the work of the Museum. He has cooperated with the Assistant Secretary in the preparation of a Museum publication, “Oceanic Ichthyology,” which is now in press. Mr. Barton A. Bean, assistant curator, has been engaged in the routine work of the department in the preparation of the exhibit for the Exposition at Chicago, and in the arranging of drawings-of deep-sea fishes for publication. A general rearrangement of the collection of the department is needed, and will be undertaken this fall. There have been 418 catalogue entries; the number of speci- mens received is about 1,000, The most important collections contributed have been received from the U.S. Fish Commission, especially the additional deep-sea and oceanic forms collected by the steamer Albatross. This exhibit at the World’s Fair consisted of 154 families and sub- families, represented by 197 species of the fishes of North and South America. The specimens were displayed in rectangular glass jars, to which were attached labels giving a diagnosis setting forth the family characters, followed by a statement of the number of the genera and species in the family, their geographical range, and an account of their habits, food, and uses. Small species labels were also attached to desig- - nate individuals or groups of individuals. The object was to make a popular and instructive exhibit of the fishes of the Western Hemi- sphere, which aim was satisfactorily carried out by the means employed for the display. ‘The following is a list of the families and subfamilies represented: FISHES. Orthagoriscide, the Ocean Sun-fishes. NXiphidiontide, the Butter Eels. Tetrodontide, the Swelltishes. Diodontidw, the Poreupine-fishes. Ostracionidw, the Trunk-tishes. Balistide, the Trigger-fishes. Hippocampida, the Sea-horses. Syngnathide, the Pipe fishes. Malthida, the Bat-fishes. Lophiide, the Anglers. Ceratiidaw, the Small Anglers. Antennariide, the Frog-tishes. Soleda, the Soles. Pleuronectide, the Flounders. Macruride, the Grenadiers. Fierasferidw, the Fierasters. Ophidiida, the Donzellas. Brotulide, the Brotulids. Gadida, the Cod-fishes. Merlucide, the Whitings. Lycodidw, the Eel Ponts. Ammodytide, the Sand Lances. Cryptacanthide, the Wry-mouths. Stichiide, the Eel Biennies. Anarrhichadida, the Wolf Fishes. Cebedichthyidaw, the Monkey Blennies. Blenniidea, the Blennies. Opisthognathida, the Big-eyed Blennies. Batrachide, the Toad-fishes. Leptoscopide, the Small Star-gazers. Uranoscopida, the Star-gazers. Lathymasterida, the Ronquils. Chiasmodontida, the Great Swallowers. Thichodontida, the Sand-fishes. Goliesocide, the Clinging Gobies. Liparidida, the Sea Snails. Cyclopteride, the Lump-tfishes. Callionymida, the Dragonets. Gobiide, the Gobies. Triglidw, the Gurnards. Agonida, the Alligator-fishes. Cottidw, the Seulpins. Hemitripterida, the Sea Ravens. Scorpaenidae, the Rock-fishes. Chirida, the Chiroids. Scaride, the Parrot-fishes. 154 REPORT OF NATIONAL MUSEUM, 1893. Labride, the Wrasses. Pomacentrida, the Demoiselles. Cichlid, the Cichlids. Embiotocide, the Viviparous Perches. Gerride, the Moharras. Polynemide, the Thread-fins. Acanthuride, the Surgeons. Chetodontida, the Chetodens. Ephippide, the Angel-fishes. Xiphiide, the Sword-fishes. Trichiuride, the Cutlass-tishes. Scombrida, the Mackerels. Carangide, the Pompanoes. Coryphaenida, the Dolphins. Stromateide, the Butter-fishes. Pempheridw, the Pempherids, Zenida, the Dories. Bramide, the Pomfrets. Nomeida, the Nomeids. Latilida, the Tile-fishes. Mullida, the Red Mullets. Holocentridw, the Squirrel-fishes. Berycide, the Beryxes. Scienide, the Drum-fishes. Sparide, the Sea Breams. Pimelepteride, the Rudder-fishes. Pristipomatide, the Grunts. Centrarchide, the Sun-tishes. Elassomatida, the Elassomes. Serranide, the Sea Basses. Percide, the Perches. Apogonide, the Coral Fishes. Centropomide, the Snooks. Pomatomide, the Blue-tishes. Elacatide, the Cobias. Priacanthida, the Big-eyes. Aphredoderidw, the Pirate Perches. Sphyrenide, the Barracudas, Echeneidida, the Remoras. Trachypteride, King-of-the-Herrings. Atherinide, the Silversides. Mugillide, the Mullets. Gasterosteide, the Stickle-backs. Aulorhynchide, the Flute-mouths. Fistulariida, the Trumpet-fishes,. Centriscida, the Snipe-fishes. Belonida, the Silver Gars. Exocetidw, the Flying Fishes. Amblyopside, the Cave Fishes. Luciide (Esocidx), the Pikes. Umbrida, the Mud-minnows. Dallide, The Dallias. Cyprinodontida, the Mummichogs. Characinida, the Characines. Percopsida, the Trout Perches. Halosauride, the Halosaurids. Chauliodontide, the Tiger Fishes. Sternoptychida, the Hatchet-fishes. Stomiatida, the Stomiatoids. Scopelida, the Pearl Fishes. Synodontida, the Snake-fishes. Argentinida, the Smelts. Salmonide, the Salmons and Trouts. Alepidosauride, the Handsaw Fishes. Alepocephalida, the Alepocephalids. Hiodontidaw, the Moon-eyes. Albulida, the Lady-fishes. Elopide, the Big-eyed Herrings. Chanida, the Milk-fishes. Clupeide, the Herrings. Doreosomide, the Gizzard Shads. Engraulide, the Anchovies. Catostomide, the Suckers. Cyprinidae, the Minnows. Sternopygida, the Electric Cat-fishes. Gymnotide, the Electric Eels. Silurida, the Cat-fishes. Loricariide, the Lonearions. Symbranchida, the Symbranchids. Congrida, the Conger Eels. Anguillide, the Eels. Muraenida, the Morays. Nemichthyida, the Snipe Eels. Synaphobranchide, the Synaphobranch Eels. Simenchelyidw, the Pug-nosed Eels. Saccopharyngide, the Gulpers. Eurypharyngide, the Pelican Fiskes. Notacanthide, the Spiny Eels. Amiide, the Bow Fins. Lepidosteid, the Gar Pikes. Polyodontida, the Paddle-tishes. Acipenseride, the Sturgeons. Chimerida, the Chimeras. Myliobatide, the Eagle Rays. Trygonida, the Sting Rays. Torpedinide, the Torpedoes. Raiide, the Skates. Pristide, the Saw-fishes. Squatinide, the Angel Sharks. Heterodontidw, the Port Jackson Sharks. Alopeciide, the Thresher Sharks. Sphyrnida, the Hammer-headed Sharks. Galeorhinide, the True Sharks. Spinacida, the Dog Sharks. Secymnide, the Sleeper Sharks. Petromyzontida, the Lampreys. Myaxinide, the Hag-fishes. Branchiostomatide, the Lancelets. en On REPORT OF ASSISTANT SECRETARY. 1 DEPARTMENT OF VERTEBRATE FOSSILS. The work in this department of the Museum during the past year has been partly devoted to mounting and labeling the specimens already placed in cases in the exhibition room, and this work has been under the special charge of Mr. F. A. Lueas. The preparation of specimens secured by the honorary curator, Prof. O. C. Marsh, during his explorations in the West for the U.S. Geologi- ral Survey, has been continued at New Haven, and good progress has been made, but the want of proper space to exhibit such specimens has prevented any of these being placed on exhibition in the National Museum during the past year. The curator proposes to use the wall space above the cases for a series of life-size restorations of the large extinct animals especially characteristic of North America, and an important beginning has been made by the production of a series of six restorations under the imme- diate direction of Prof. Marsh. These restorations represent on canvas the skeletons, natural size, of 2 gigantic Dinosaurian reptiles from the Jurassic formation, Ceratosaurus and Stegosaurus; 2 others from the Cretaceous, Claosaurus and Triceratops; and 2 huge mammals from the Tertiary, Tinoceras and Brontotherium. These restorations have been made with great care, from type specimens, and this exhibition will be of much interest to the general public. Similar restorations of other extinct animals are in preparation. The curator has published, during the past year, several papers relating indirectly to the collections of vertebrate fossils mentioned above, though more intimately in connection with the U. S. Geological Survey. In memoirs now in preparation, however, he will describe fully the more important specimens he has already deposited in the National Museum. There have been 13 specimens received during the year, involving the same number of catalogue entries. DEPARTMENT OF MOLLUSKS. The curator, Mr. W. H. Dall, reports that satisfactory progress has been made in routine work during the year. The arrangement of specimens in the exhibition cases in the lower hall has been completed. The general collection has been revised, the species conveniently arranged for reference, and index sheets for each drawer. containing a list of the genera and species in each tray, have been prepared. At the same time the names of the species have been checked oft on an interleaved copy of Paetel’s Catalogue of Mollusks, thus facilitating reference to the collection and indicating deficiencies more clearly. Duplicates have been eliminated and packed away in their proper boxes, as described in my last annual report. New material has been examined, labeled, and distributed to its proper place in the collection 156 REPORT OF NATIONAL MUSEUM, 1893. after registration. Much attention has been paid to the Tertiary fos- sils, in which the collection is very rich, and which were urgently needed for comparison w:th the material brought in by the U.S. Geo- logical Survey. The entire collection of Tertiary fossils has been arranged for easy reference, and a provisional card catalogue of locali- ties and horizons has been prepared. Much of the material from the Miocene has been cleaned, separated, arranged, and registered, and provided with labels showing locality, collector, etc., though in many cases the names had to be omitted until the specimens shall have been more thoroughly studied. A large part of the registration for the year has related to this class of specimens. The amount of registration is shown in the following table: Species of duplicates catalogued 2222-3 ssa ase ee oa eee eee eee ae eee 281 @ardicatalomue tof thes G eres eae ayaa ee ae eae 281 Drawings registered 35 <5 5532522 sac eee ees es eee eee eee eee 29 Envelopes filled out for drawings!) -25 == =ssseess see] eee eee eee 29 Potall x! sso a5 Sak re a a SS a he To ere 620 Adding to these the number of actual registrations for the year we have a grand total of about 5,738 entries, as against a similar total of 7,700 for 1891-92. The number of accessions during 1892-83 was 72, against 85 in 1891-92. Severalof them were of importance and many of great inter- est, but, as a whole, the accessions during the past year do not comprise any very large single masses of material compared with those of some previous years. The most important contribution to the collection has been the result of a decision by the Rev. L. T. Chamberlain and Mrs. Frances Lea Chamberlain to contribute the means necessary to bring up to date and keep as complete as practicable the Lea collection of fresh-water mollusks, especially the Unionidae. In pursuance of this very desira- ble object, they have generously furnished the means for the purchase of several unique series of Asiatic and African unios, and have author- ized the ordering of others, when necessary, for the object in view. Nearly all the material thus acquired is rare and new to the collection, and of the utmost value for the study of the group to which it belongs. Looking forward to the publication of a catalogue of the Lea Collection as one of the special bulletins of the Museum, Mr. and Mrs. Chamber- lain have also generously added to the sectional library by authorizing the purchase of such works of recent date on the Unionide as are necessary to the studies involved and not yet contained inthe Museum library. Several costly and important works have already been ordered or received under this arrangement, and more will follow. Our sincere thanks are due to Mr. and Mrs. Chamberlain. for their wise and considerate generosity, which not only benefits science and the Museum, but continues the association of the name of Lea with prog- REPORT OF ASSISTANT SECRETARY. 157 ress in the study of these groups of animals in a graceful and most gratifying way. In completion of an exchange sometime since entered into between Mr. Dall and Mr. Maurice Cossmann, of Paris, the successor of Deshayes in the minute study of the successive eocene faunas of the Parisian basin, the latter has sent to the Museum about 700 named species of mollusks from that formation, which, coming from him, have the authen- ticity of types. Several desiderata of the Museum have been supplied by Mr. Hugh Fulton, of London, through an exchange arranged with him. all of which were new to the collection, and several of extreme rarity and value. From Dr. W. L. Abbott has been received an interesting and very attractive lot of shells from the Seychelles and adjacent islands. The California Academy of Sciences, through Dr. J. G. Cooper, has donated about 75 specimens of land shells from the peninsula of Lower California, most of which were very acceptable additions to the col- lection. Our faithful correspondent, Mr. [. Greegor, has continued his contributions to the Museum by donating specimens in alcohol of the rare Murex fulvescens Sby., from Fernandina, Fla., and a number of inter- esting pathological specimens showing how mollusks repair the injuries they occasionally receive. Dr. H. von Ihering has contributed some interesting land and fresh-water shells from Brazil, and Rey. H. Loomis others from Japan. Dr. Edgar A. Mearns, of the International Bound- ary Survey between the United States and Mexico, has forwarded the mollusks collected by the party, including a new species of Anodonta, with a view to the preparation of a report on the expedition and its collections. From Mr. J. D. Mitchell and Mr. J. A. Singley, and also the State geological survey of Texas, have been received interesting miscellaneous collections, including several species not before reported from the Texas coast, and a few which appear to be undescribed. Mr. Charles W. Richmond has furnished a few interesting species from the Nicaraguan region. Mrs. Ada M. Walton sent to the Museum a col- lection of specimens from the coast of California, which, from certain circumstances connected with the donation, deserves special mention, though the collection added little to the Museum series which was not already represented there. Mr. Ed. Saxon Wyard presented a few large ornamental shells, which, from their unusual size and beauty, were very desirable for exhibition purposes. Mr. William Moss, of Ashton- under-Lyne, England, contributed some microphotographs of the rad- ula, ete., of various British mollusks, which were exceptionally sueccess- fulin showing difficult anatomical details. An exchange with Mr. B. H. Wright added a few desirable Unionide to the collection. The Department of Agriculture and the U.S. Fish Commision have con- tributed several lots of mollusks collected by members of their staffs. Besides the work above referred to, the general operations of the department include the preparation of special reports on collections 158 REPORT OF NATIONAL MUSEUM, 1893. made under governmental auspices by various organizations, such as the U.S. Fish Commission, the U.S. Navy, the Revenue Marine, the Department of Agriculture, and special expeditions. Among them are two which bear particwlarly on the Tertiary geology and paleontolog of the southeastern border of the United States. One of these (Bulle- tin 84 of the U. S. Geological Survey, by William H. Dall and Gilbert D. Harris) summarizes our knowledge of the post-eocene Tertiary geology of the United States, including Alaska, up to about 1890, the manuscript having been delayed in printing nearly two years. The other is the second part of a report by the writer on the Tertiary fauna of Florida, including the gastropods and containing much new mate- rial. A third part, to comprise the Pelecypods and a geological sum- mary, will conclude the work. In addition may be mentioned certain reports on faunal collections of the Southern States and a small collee- tion from eastern Siberia, and further researches by Mr. Simpson on the Unionide. Mr. Dall speaks as follows of the state of the collection: In preious reports I have explained why it is not possible to give the exact num- ber of species, specimens, duplicates, etc., contained in the collection. In my last report it was estimated that the collection contained about 482,725 specimens, of which about 100,000 are preserved in alcohol. During the year about 5,600 speci- mens were received, which would make a present total of 488,325 specimens now contained in the collection. The number of entries in the register for 1892-93 is 4,578, as shown in the appended table, representing some 13,734 specimens, Volume. | From— To— | Total. Remarks. ERONGITID: cette b | 5 ia F 20 a8 Silo rian PEs. 106,904 | 106,981 | 77 Volume in use. >: 9) ee een eer ee ee Cee SE 112, 401 115, 307 2, 906 Reserved for fossils DIOL Reh Soe sie S dec. Oe COE QOS OS DC AOSUSEEae 124,663 | 125, 425 762 Volume filled. D: ©0110 epee eae see ene eS an Seana a 125,426 | 126,259 | 833 | Volumein use. Total A.cocend ceab cece se ease eeincnss aerate ot lace Rea eee eee tee 4,578 The total number of registrations to date, deducting all duplications and omis- sions in the register, is 107,591, representing about 322,800 specimens catalogued to date. The number of workers and their distribution in the building render it nec- essary to use simultaneously several volumes of the register, which explains why the foregoing table is necessary to show the total registrations for the year. The formal registration, with the gaps alluded to, terminates June 30, 1893, with the number 126,259. The work of assisting students in various parts of the country to identify their local fauna, to intelligently direct their studies, and to answer their numerous queries on different branches of the subject has always been regarded as an important function of this department, and has been made a special care by Mr. Dall, who states that correspond- ence of this kind was conducted in 189192 with 166 different persons, involving over 300 letters and 600 to 700 pages of writing, besides the identification of many hundred specimens, while in 1892-93, 96 different 99 persons received 330 communications, involving some 800 pages of writ- REPORT OF ASSISTANT SECRETARY. 15g ing, nearly allof which was the work of the curator. For want of time, owing to the press of work and absence of sufficient clerical assistance, the number of species identified for students has not been recorded. In 1891-92 the number amounted to over 3,000 species, for each of which a label had to be written. During the past year the number sent for identification was considerably less. DEPARTMENT OF INSECTS. In this department, under Prof. ©. V. Riley, honorary curator, consid- erable time has been devoted to the preparation of exhibits for the World’s Columbian Exposition. In this work the Museum has cooper- ated with the Division of Entomology in the U. S. Department of Agri- culture. The exhibit, while devoted largely to the science of entomology economically considered, also contained much material of purely eduea- tional or scientific value. The systematic collection of North American families and the collection of insects injurious to forestry were rear- ranged. ce Pied iat: or LCi Pat ia i By fa a i". J a ‘ho SF ; : 5 A tetas ee —_ nia : a ey a ee piven’ : ah a 5 a : a es B ie: a ua resn we ; bet - ; ok il iv ; 1H es <>; = ee ue oil oe ee | > Li a 03. Oi See creme eee Fale ! 3 x — a ey y teotaie 3 fits 7 Sa i‘ Ai iets i af Oe ipust : mire aad ats : edie eos ad 7 J emer hn ky |e ar int, aah j ream me arte léi ioe is aie 6 pits oe Report of National Museum, 1893 PLATE 58. 9 4 DETAILS OF FIXTURES FOR STORAGE CASES. Fig. 1. Combined bolt and lock (p. 27). ig. 2. Corner section of storage case, showing method of dust proofing, ete (p. 28). Fig. 3. Stub and plate (p. 2k). 4. Wedge bolt for binding doors (p. 28). Report of National Museum, 1893. PLATE 59. | Wii i 1 fil mM NEO I PT A : jeensil HHH] DETAILS OF INSTALLATION METHODS IN THE U. S. NATIONAL MUSEUM. Fig. 5. Showing arrangement of specimens on sloping shelves (p. 31) Fig. 6. Device for storing microscopical slides (p. 32) Fig. 7. Rectangular jar (p. 33). Fig. 8. Mounting fish in rectangular jar (p. 35). Fig. 9. Reference table in exhibition hall (p. 41) i) iY) [és j »- ay Hh =o vere, i: ag ape tf & dA’) Giveag Seis ora ear! a : — Vee , en : _ ; ae a! it ee ie fe er 4 * te ay . oa —. V.—ADMINISTRATION. REVIEW OF THE WORK OF THE ADMINISTRATIVE BUREAUS. OFFICE OF THE CHIEF CLERK. The chief clerk’s office remains under the supervision of Mr. W. V. Cox. The duties belonging to this office are mainly of an executive or administrative character. Among these duties are the general super- vision of the expenditure of the appropriations; the preparation of proposals for supplies or labor; the opening of bids; awards of con- tracts; issuing orders for the purchase of supplies and employment of labor; the settling of accounts; the supervision of correspondence other than that of a scientific nature, or of that relating to specimens; the general supervision over employés and their assignment to duty; the granting of leaves of absence and other matters affecting the per- sonnel of the Museum; the issuing of passes to the buildings; the conducting of boards of inquiry, inspection, and survey; the investiga- tion of complaints, ete. In Appendix 11 to this report a statement is presented showing the disposition of the unexpended balance on hand at the close of the year ending June 30, 1892. This is followed by a statement indicating the disbursements on account of the appropriation for the year ending June 30, 1893. Since his last annual report, the chief clerk, the superintendent ot buildings and labor, and the property clerk have had much of their time and that of their force occupied in the preparation of exhibits for the Columbian Historical Exposition in Madrid, and the World’s Colum- bian Exposition at Chicago. Yet the extra work incident to the many additional requisitions made, and orders issued for supplies required to be purchased, together with the work to be donein the shops of the Museum by reason of these preparations, were all attended to by the regular employés, without additional cost to the Exposition, notwith- standing the fact that every purchase of supplies thus made and every order for work required the stating of a bill, and also involved a large amount of other incidental work. In the office of the chief clerk 666 vouchers, aggregating more than $78,000, were stated and otherwise com- pleted for settlement, and transmitted to the Board of Managers for payment. To perform this amount of extra labor the clerks were com- pelled to devote longer hours to their duties. CORRESPONDENCE AND REPORTS. This division of the administrative work remains under the charge of Mr. R. I. Geare. At the beginning of the year the force consisted of 2 stenographers, 1 accession clerk, 1 record clerk, 1 index clerk, 3 typewriters and a messenger. 187 188 REPORT OF NATIONAL MUSEUM, 1893. The amount of correspondence has largely increased each year since the establishment of this division. In 1886, the total number of official papers prepared for signature was a little over 2,000. In the year covered by this report the total was 10,040. The reason for this growth is readily explained. Every letter asking for information is answered as promptly as possible, and the information, if obtainable, is always supplied. The fact that requests of all kinds are thus noticed, soon spreads among the acquaintances of the writers, and before long they also are led to correspond with the Museum on some subject in regard to which they may desire information. Another reason for the large increase this year is that since May, 1892, the distribution of Museum publications has been added to the work of this office, necessitating a large number of letters on matters relating to the subject of Museum publications. The correspondence of the Museum also includes letters pertaining to the acquisition of specimens, and to their acknowledgment when received; also letters reporting the results of examination of material submitted for qualitative analyses. The preparation and general supervision of the proof of the Annual Report of the Museum is also a part of the work which has been assigned to this division. Distribution of Museum publications.—The edition of the Proceedings and Bulletin is entirely inadequate to supply the numerous demands made upon it, and in order that the edition might be increased, an estimate of $18,000 for printing was made for the year ending June 30, 1892, an increase of $8,000 over the appropriation for the preceding fiscal year. The amount granted by Congress, however, was only $15,000. For the present fiscal year the sum of $18,000 was again asked for. The following extract from a letter accompanying the estimate will show how urgently this appropriation is needed: The sum of $18,000 was asked for last year, for the purpose of enlarging the mailing list so as to include in it the more important public libraries and educa- tional institutions, and to render it possible, in response to urgent requests, to send the publications of the Museum to individuals who need them for use in connection with scieatific investigations. The sum appropriated ($15,000) enabled the Museum to enlarge considerably its mailing list, but the full amount estimated for will be necessary to insure a satisfactory distribution. The amount carried by the appropriation bill, as passed by Congress, however, was $12,000, and as a necessary consequence, this branch of the Museum work has been much crippled. The report for 1890 was distributed during the year. Copies have been forwarded to all individuals and institutions upon the mailing lists for Museum reports, to the consular and other officers of the Gov- ernment who have codperated with the Museum, and to persons who contributed to the collections during the fiscal year covered by that report. Editions of 500 copies each of several ethnological papers included in thereports for 1890 and 1891 have been sent out. The four- REPORT OF ASSISTANT SECRETARY. 189 teenth volume of the Proceedings of the National Museuin has been mailed to all addresses upon the regular list for Proceedings volumes, and to more than 2,000 domestic and foreign libraries. Five hundred copies each of Proceedings Separates, Nos. 887 to 915, 919, 920, 922 to 926, 928, 929, 931, and advance copies of No. 944 have been sent to recipients upon the regular mailing lists and to persons making special application. Parts F and G of Bulletin 39, and Bulletin 40, have been distributed, and parts A to G, inclusive, of the former have been sent to all institutions upon the foreign and domestic library lists. Special Bulletin No. 1, entitled ‘‘ Life Histories of North American Birds,” by Major Charles Bendire, has been distributed. In. addition to the regu- lar distribution of Museum publications, more than 1,500 special send- ings have been made during the year. REGISTRATION AND DISTRIBUTION. Mr. 8. C. Brown, registrar, states that the total number of packages of all kinds received during the year was 29,409. The entries covering these receipts number 2,830, 863 of these packages containing speci- mens for the Museum, the others consisting of exchanges, supplies, etc. The record of outgoing packages for the year embraced 1,515 entries, covering 3,309 boxes and 902 packages, of which 853 contained specimens from the Museum, sent out as exchanges, gifts, and loans; 347 packages of specimens returned to owners, and 396 boxes con- tained material, exhibits, and cases sent to the Madrid Exposition. During the months of Mareh, April, and May the exhibits prepared for the World’s Columbian Exposition were shipped to Chicago. There were 1,540 packages of exhibits and cases transmitted by freight (twenty- six carloads), while packages containing the most valuable portions of the exhibits were forwarded by express. The storage record shows that 174 packages were stored and 51 were turned over to the curators. The total number of accessions, 7. e., lots of specimens received for the Museum during the year, was 1.226. In addition, 516 packages of specimens were received for examination and report. The records show that 13,581 specimens were sent out, including exchanges and specimens distributed to universities and colleges. COLLECTIONS TRANSMITTED TO EDUCATIONAL ESTABLISHMENTS. It has for many years been customary to distribute to educational establishments, as far as practicable, the duplicate material contained in the collections of the National Museum. Owing to the fact that there had accumulated a large number of applications for specimens from colleges and universities throughout the country, the curators of several of the departments were requested to separate into sets, for distribu- tion, such of the duplicates in their charge as might be available for this purpose. The time necessary for work of this character could, 190 REPORT OF NATIONAL MUSEUM, 1893. however, be spared only with great inconvenience, on account of the fact that the preparation of exhibits for the World’s Columbian Exposi- tion demanded the greater partof the attention of the curators. It is expected that within the course of a few months collections of fishes, marine invertebrates, and birds’ skins will be ready for distribution. A nunber of sets of minerals, rocks, and ores, and casts of prehistoric stone implements have been already prepared. During the months of March and April, 1893, the work of distribu ting the collections of rocks and ores recently prepared by the curator of geology was undertaken, there being among the pending applica- tions many requests for geological material. In a number of instances in which it was not apparent that the institution which had made the application was still in need of specimens, a letter requesting informa- tion on this point was addressed to the Senator or Representative who had indorsed the application. The reply in nearly every instance was to the effect that a collection would be acceptable. There have been distributed during the year 150 collections of all kinds, including a large number of sets of minerals and rocks. GEOGRAPHICAL STATEMENT OF THE DISTRIBUTION OF SPECIMENS DURING THE YEAR ENDING JUNE 30, 1893. In Appendix 111 a geographical statement is given showing in detail the distribution of specimens of all kinds during the year. cease oe repeal = oa aencla eee tere eee | 94 Geology? -..2 s0.5. sen bdatcS Seen sac aseee cee Seca ase eres Rie en Sees ere 130 DO tls. o csjeviccc tc Mees 5e eS cere repe ce See a ae en re re cee ae ie 518 ] . | a Saapereee -, i REPORT OF ASSISTANT SECRETARY. 219 APPENDIX VI. LIST OF ACCESSIONS TO THE U.S. NATIONAL MUSEUM DURING THE YEAR ENDING JUNE 30, 1893. The accessions during the year embrace Nos. 25,885 to 27,150 inelu- sive. All material especially acquired for incorporation with the exhibit of the National Museum at the World’s Columbian Exposition, and received during the fiscal year ending June 30, 1893, is included in this list. The objects acquired for this purpose previous to July 1, 1892, are grouped separately and follow the list. Abport, Miss GERTRUDE (Philadelphia, Pa.). Collection of ethnological objects, consisting of a buffalo head, antelope heads, ostrich feathers, a cloak made of the skins of the tree-coney, skins of black and white monkey from Mount Kilima- Njaro, and lion skins. Deposit. 25936. Abrpotr, W. L. (Bombay, India). Collection of ethnological objects, bones of Lammergeyer and crow, 2 specimens of Limax, alcoholic reptiles, 183 birds’ skins from Kashmir and Baltistan, and a large and valuable collection of mammal skins, skulls, and alcoholic mammals from Kashmir, including specimens of Vigne’s wild sheep, Himalaya ibex, Himalaya bear, and new species of Voles and others (25997) ; dried skin of Cyprinoid, 28 inches long; mammal skins, skulls and bones; pottery ; 52 birds’ skins, representing 34 species from the Vale of Kashmir and adjacent parts of northern India, and a collection of insects from Kashmir, consisting of lepidoptera, neuroptera, hymenoptera, homoptera,*diptera, and col- eoptera; model of boat (26251); ethnological objects from Comoro, Seychelles Islands, 206 birds’ skins, representing 69 species, from Aden, Seychelles, Alda- bra, Glorioso, and adjacent islands; a fine collection of rare birds’ eggs, consist- ing of 107 specimens, representing 19 species, several of which are new to science; also 25 birds’ nests, 74 fishes, reptiles, and batrachians *, coral limestone, crus- taceans. radiates and sponges, skeletons of Testudo, Chelonia, Eretmochelys, and Emys, and 2 skulls of sharks, collections of dry and alcoholic insects, mammals and shells, from the localities above named (27085). ABEL, JOHN C. (Lancaster, Pa.). Collection of archeological objects, consisting of 2 hammer-stones of quartzite, 2 grinding-stones of the same mineral, 2 rude implements of white quartz, 5 worked flakes of jasper, 10 arrow or spear-heads, of porphyritic felsite, and a sample of calcareous sandstone (natural formation) from near Lancaster (26183); 51 hamier-stones, rude chipped implements, arrow-heads, perforators, worked flakes and fragments of pottery from the same locality (26259); 73 rude implements, spear-leads, worked flakes of quartz, quartzite, and jasper, drilled tablet, an unfinished ceremonial object, and water- worn pebbles from the Conestoga Hills (26463.) ACADEMY OF SCIENCES (San Francisco, Cal.), through Dr. J. G. Cooper. Land- shells, representing 5 species from Lower California (gift) (26485); land- shells from Lower California (exchange) (26688). Apams, C. F. (Champaign, Ill.). Specimen of Sphenodon punctatum from New Zealand. Purchase. 26212. Apams, W. H. (Chase, Ill.). Cocoon of Cecropia silk-moth. 26912. ADLER, Dr. Cyrus (Smithsonian Institution). Six musical instruments, comprising a zurna from Constantinople; dymbelek from Cairo, raha’b el Mooghun’nee, with bow; rebab with bow, biz man from Cairo, gaida from Tunis (gift) (25935) 5 *Special reports published in Vol. xv, and Vol. xvi, of Proceedings U.S. National Museum. 220 REPORT OF NATIONAL MUSEUM, 1893. shofar or Jewish horn (gift) (25947) ; 52 photographs representing religious scenes in Turkey, Syria, Egypt, Tunis, and Algiers (deposit) (25950) ; facsimile of a docu- ment belonging to the Jews of Ccchin India, written in the Tamil language (deposit) (25962); drum and staff used by the dervishes in Egypt (deposit) (26106); 3 Mohammedan talismans from Damascus (deposit) (26171). AGRICULTURE, DEPARTMENT OF. Crayfishes from North Carolina, Mississippi, and Texas; Isopod parasitic on a shark, from San Diego, Cal. (26355); fresh-water and Jand-shells from California and Mexico, collected by Edward Palmer (26386); guinea pig in the flesh, obtained by Dr. F. L. Kilborne, director of Government Experiment Station, Bureau of Animal Industry, and transmitted to the Museum, through Mr. Albert Hassall, of the Department; living guinea pig (26910) ; crustaceans and starfishes obtained principally from Texas (27002). Through Dr. A. K. Fisher: Land-shells, representing 5 species, from Minnesota and Mexico (27113) Division of Ornithology and Mammalogy (through Dr.C. Hart Merriam), Seven hundred and seventy-four specimens, representing 46 species of reptiles and batrachians, collected by the Death Valley Expedition in California, Nevada, and Utah (deposit) (26017); land and fresh-water shells from the southwestern border of the United States (gift) (26339); specimen of Microdipodops meqgacepha- lus, and a specimen of ; mounted skeleton of man (26812)*; geological material from various localities (exchange) (26855); spiny-tailed squirrel, Anomalurus pelii; pangolin, Smutsia temminckii; mole-rat, Bathyurgus maritinus; wild ass, Asinus onager (purchase) (26864); 8 mounted mammals, viz, African mungoose, Herpestes ichneumon, Indian mungoose, HTerpestes griseus, genet, Genetta vulgaris, fat-tailed sheep, Ovis aries, steatopy ga, domestic goat, lop-eared rabbit, Lepus cuniculus var., guinea-pig, Cavia aperea, zebu, bibos indicus (26867) * ; geological material (26885)*; slab of serpentine and one of luxullianite from England, and slab of rapckivi granite from Finland (26895)* ; mounted specimen of colugo, Galeopithecus volans (purchase) (27130), WARNEKE, C. W. (Washington, D. C.). Specimen of Putorius erminia, in the flesh. 25931. WARREN, S. (White Springs, Fla.). Larva of bombycid-moth, Lagoa crispata. 26365. WASHINGTON, LAWRENCE (Marshall, Va.).. Washington’s Bible (folio volume with autograph of George Washington on title-page, and his name printed in the list of subscribers at the end of the book; 011 portrait of Maj. Lawrence Washing- ton (half-brother of George Washington, who built the mansion and named the estate Mount Vernon, and who bequeathed the property to George Washington ; commission of Lawrence Washington as major inthe King’s army on the expedi- tion under Admiral Vernon. Deposit. 25899, WASHINGTON ONYX MINING AND MILLING COMPANY (Pomeroy, Wash.), Three specimens of opal from the ‘‘Onyx” mines in Garfield County, Wash. 26681. WATKINS, J. E. (See under M. W. Beecher and T. 8. Bishop.) Weaver, O. R. (Indianapolis, Ind.) Badge of the G. A. R., Department of Indi- ana. 26247. Wess, ALEXANDER R. (U.S. consul, Manila, Philippine Islands). Thirty-six pho- tographs representing natives and houses, streets, and other scenes at vhe Philippine Islands (26220); 4 native games, Manila milkman’s outfit consisting of 6 pieces, native costume, hat, shirt and breeches, pair of shoes for wet weather, and a collection of clay kitchen vessels. 26320. + *Purchased for World’s Columbian Exposition. t These objects were purchased by Mr. Webb for the National Museum at the request of the Secretary of the Smithsonian Institution. = REPORT OF ASSISTANT SECRETARY. 261 WEBB, WALTER F. (Geneva, N. Y.). Six eggs of Audubon’s shearwater, 10 eggs of man-o’-war bird, 20 eggs of sooty tern, 15 eggs of noddy tern, 12 eggs of booby from Bahama Islands, 3 eggs of cinnamon teal from California. 26278. Weper, I°. C. (Chicago, Ill.). Spider (Argiope transversa Hentz). 26180. Wesser, H. J. (Eustis, Fla.). Turtle, in the flesh, obtained by Messrs. Webber and Swingle. 26906. WEBSTER, GEORGE C. (See under Carl Steckleman. ) WEED, CLARENCE M. (Hanover, N.C.). Type specimens of North American harvest- spider, Phalangiide. 26978. : WEED, WALTER L. (Washineton, D. C.). Kaolin from near Bethesda Park, Mont- gomery County, Md. 26826. Weems, Davip G. (Baltimore, Md.). Photographof Mr. Weems, inventor. 26406. WESLEY, WILLIAM & Son (London, England). Illustrated catalogue of the Anglo- Jewish Historical Exhibition (purchase) (26059); book entitled “ Etching and Mezzotint Engraving,” by H. Herkomer, London, 1892, illustrated (purchase) (26084); 6 photographs of Jewish antiquities (purchased for World’s Columbian Exposition) (26241). Wuirs, Dr. C. H., U.S. Navy. Butterfly (Zimetas chiron), obtained 200 miles off the northwestern coast of Mexico, 2 sphingid-moths, dragon-fly, and a specimen of Hydrophilus from Peru. 26964. Wuirr, E. H. (Astoria, Oreg.). Jaand and fresh-water shells. 26340. WHITEAVES, J. F. (Geological Survey of Canada, Ottawa, Canada). Specimen of Thetis afinis Whiteaves, from Skidgate Inlet, British Columbia. 26623. WHITELAW, W. H. (Hartford, Conn.). Nutmeg, made from the original Charter Oak tree. 26480. WHITNEY, Miss ANNE (Boston, Mass.). Original plaster model of statue ‘“ Leif Erikson.” WuitTney, C. A. (Piedmont, S. Dak.), through L. M. MeCormick. Dry skin of bat (Corynorhinus Townsendii). 26652. Wuirtier, Joseru H. (Manchester, N. H.), through 8.8. Yoder. Badge of the Union Veterans Union, Department of New Hampshire. 26451. WHYTE, JAMES. (See under Dr. Elliott Coues, U.S. Army). Wicks, M. L., Jr. (Los Angeles, Cal.). Skin of short-tailed albatross, Diomedea albatrus. Exchange. 26550. WIDMANN, OTTo (Old Orchard, Mo.). Nest of Baltimore oriole,3 nests of Traill’s fly-catcher, and 3 nests of Acadian fly-catcher from the vicinity of St. Louis. 26839. Witcox, Mrs. Mary E. D. (Washington, D.C.). Coliection of Jackson relics, con- sisting of a walking-stick presented to Gen. Andrew Jackson by a friend; Turk- ish scimetar presented by the Sultan of Turkey to Gen. Jackson; watch worn by Gen. Jackson at the battle of New Orleans; bead watch-guard presented to him by his wife; comb presented by the ladies of New Orleans to Mrs. Jackson; eard-case used by Mrs. Jackson; racing-purse used by the general; veil pre- sented by the ladies of Cincinnati to Mrs. Jackson; sleeve of a dress worn by Mrs. Jackson at the grand ball in New Orleans in 1816; nullification proclama- tion, printed on satin; copy of appendix to Blackstone used by Gen. Jackson when studying law in Salisbury, N. C.; copy of Koran; card of trinkets belong- ing to Mrs. Jackson; miniatures on ivory of President and Mrs. Jackson. Deposit. 26196. Witcox, A.C. (Washington, D.C,). Two arrow-heads found near Upper Marlboro, Md. 27097. WILcox, GLOVER P. (Fort Huachuca, Ariz.). Eggs of Icteria virens longicauda and. Icterus parisorum. 26168. WILCOX, JONES (East Chatham, N. Y.). Two silver Wyandotte fowls in the flesh (26628, 26670) ; silver-spangled Hamburg fowl. 262 REPORT OF NATIONAL MUSEUM, 1893. Wicox, Dr. Trvotrny E., U.S. A.(Fort Huachuca, Ariz.). Arachnida and myriop- oda, aleoholic specimens of mammals, leeches, birds, and reptiles, collected by Dr. Wilcox, Master Harry Lawrence, Master Fred Ebert, Master Fred Fowler, Miss Bertha Rawolle, Miss Florence Scott, Messrs. Leahy and Walerius, hospital stewards, and E. Jenks, hospital corps (26403); insects from the vicinity of Fort Huachuca (26579). (See under C. H. Bales). WILKINSON, E. (Mansfield, Ohio). Fossil tooth of mammal. 26044. WILLCOox, JOSEPH (Philadelphia, Pa.). Minerals from various localities. Purchased for World’s Columbian Exposition. 26829. WILLIAMS, F. H. (Greene, N. Y.). Two hammer-stones, 2 rude chipped implements, 3 notched sinkers, 20 knives, scrapers, and other objects (27082); 60 stone imple- ments, fragments of pottery, and three vessels of steatite (27115). WiuuiaMs, J. A. (Cloud Chief, Okla.). Fifth neck vertebra of an elk (Cervus cana- densis). 26722. Witirams, J. W. (Springfield, Mo.). Specimens of stalactites and stalagmites for the World’s Columbian Exposition. 26307. ’ WitttaMs, Mrs. TaLcottT (Philadelphia, Pa.). Costume of man, costume of woman, a boy’s costume, and man’s cloak from Morocco. Purchased for World’s Colum- bian Exposition. 26053. Wiuiams, T. (Honolulu, Hawaiian Islands). Eighty-five photographs representing views of Hawaiian voleanoes. Purchased for World’s Columbian Exposition. 261381. Wituis, MERRITT (Bronx Mills, West Farms, N. Y.). Chipped flint dagger or spear- head from Jllinois, 12 arrow-heads from West Chester, N. Y., 1 from Indiana, and 1 from California. 26008. WILLSON, GEORGE A. (Ashton, Md.). American barn-owl, Strix pratincola. 26050. WILSON, F. E. (Greenville, Ohio). Musket flintand small arrow-point, also 2 buttons, supposed to be relics of campaigns under Gen. St. Clair and Gen. Anthony Wayne during the Revolutionary War. 26746. Witson, Scorr B. (Surrey, England). Seventeen birds in alcohol from the Sand- wich Islands. (26201, 26202). (Purchase, gift.) ~ WiLson, THomAs (U.S. National Museum). Archeological objects, consisting of scrapers, arrow-heads, and similar objects from Le Teil, Selles-sur-Cher, Loir-et Cher, France, obtained from the collection of A. Bonnet (26538); bronze sword and bronze hatchet from near Norfolk, England, (26795); 187 rude and leaf shaped implements, perforators, scrapers, arrow-heads, polished hatchets, grooved axes, pierced tablets and boat-shaped articles, hematite mullers, and a disk of banded slate from Ohio (26870). Deposit. WILTBERGER, JACOB (Brookland, D, C.). Rude implements and spear-heads of quartzite. 26443. WinLock, W.C. (See under Smithsonian Institution. ) WINTON, GEoRGE B. (San Luis Potosi, Mexico). Skin of pectoral bobwhite, Colinus pectoralis (gift) (26614); skins of imperial woodpecker, Campephilus imperialis, from Michoacan, Mexico (purchased for World’s Columbian Exposi- tion) (26893). WITCHELL, S. B. (San Antonio, Tex.). Cocoon of bag-worm, Thyridopteryx sp. 26001. WITTKUGEL, Er1icH (San Pedro Sula, Honduras). Sixty specimens, representing 25 species of rare lepidoptera. Purchase. 26322. Wirticnu, B. (Moline, Ind.). Fifty-four photographs illustrating the life and indus- tries of the Indians of Arizona, New Mexico, and Lower California. 26244. Woop, Miss E. M. (Cheshire, England). Six colored drawings of gregarinida (small parasitic invertebrates) (26234); five drawings of sponges and worms showing details of structure (27038). Purchased for World’s Columbian Expo- sition. REPORT OF ASSISTANT SECRETARY. 263 Woop, NELSON (U.S. National Museum). Sumatra pullet. 26486. Woopwarb, ALBERT (Dayton, Wash.). Volcanic dust. 27132. Woopwarkb, Karu W. (Washington, D.C.). Trunk of fossil tree from the Potomac formation of the District of Columbia. 26918. Wooster, A. F. (Norfolk, Conn.). Specimens of Dicerca chrysea, Nyctobates pensyl- vanicus, and Lebia grandis. 26777. Worth, 8. G. (U.S. Fish Commission). Specimen of Unio hyalinus Lea, from Tygart’s River, West Virginia. 26448. WORTHEN, CHARLES K. (Warsaw, Ill.). Skin and skull of Yaguarundi’s cat, Felis yaguarundi. Purchase. 26763. WRIGHT, BERLIN H. (Penn Yan, N.Y.). Collection of shells. 26780. WriGHt, Prof. G. F. (Oberlin, Ohio). Glacial material from Ontario, Canada (26749) ; photographs illustrating phenomena of glacial drifts from Ohio to Canada (26786). Purchased for World’s Columbian Exposition. WUNDERLICH, H. & Co. (New York City). Seventeen prints (26727); plate from Turner’s ‘‘ Liber Studiorum,” and an etching by Jacque (26863). Purchased for World’s Columbian Exposition. WUNSTEN, CAR (Silver Cliff, Colo.). Nickel ores from Gem Mine, Fremont County, Colo. 27098. WURTELEF, F.C. (Quebec, Canada). Bromide enlargement of a photograph of work- ing model of S.S. ‘ Royal William,” and a copy of transaction No. 20 of the Lit- erary and Historical Society of Quebec, Canada, sessions of 1889-1891, containing the account and certified statement of steamship. Purchase. 27036. WYANDANCE Brick ANL TERRA Cotta Company (New York City), through D. G Harriman, secretary. Pyrite deposited on wood. 26508. Wyarb, E. Saxon (Washington, D.C.). Eight large ornamented shells from the Indo-Pacific Ocean. 25966. Wynant, W. P. (Bealeton, Va.). Horned grebe, Colymbus auritus. 26706. WynpbuaM, W. (H. B. M. consul, Surinam), through Dr. R. W. Shufeldt, U. S. A. Two crania of catfish, known as ‘ crucifix” fish. 26267. WYOMING HISTORICAL AND GEOLOGICAL Society. (Se? under Smithsonian Insti- tution. ) YALE COLLEGE MusEuUM (New Haven, Conn.), through Charles E. Beecher, curator. Twelve slabs of crinoids from Crawfordsville, Ind. (26415); 325 specimens of fossil crinoids, brachiopods, and mollusca from the same locality (26977). YALE COLLEGE (New Haven, Conn.), through Prof. E.8. Dana. The Henry magnet. Deposit. 26705. YopvER, 8. 8. (See under Joseph H. Whittier.) YounG, R. J. (Chrystoval, Ariz.). Twosnakes. 27033. ZOOLOGICAL MUSEUM OF CHRISTIANIA (Christiania, Norway), through Prof. R. Col- lett, director. Alcoholic specimens of Raia nidrosiensis, Raia fullonica, Chimera monstrosa, Spinax spinax, Bothus rhombus, Cottus scorpius, Callionymus lyra, Argentina sphyrena, Salvelinus alpinus, Onos mustela, Onos cimbrius, Gadus esmarkii, and Raniceps ranimus. Exchange. 26865. ZOOLOGICAL STATION (Naples, Italy). Collection of marine invertebrates. Pur- - chase. 27047. 264 REPORT OF NATIONAL MUSEUM, 1893. INDEXES TO ACCESSION LIST. INDEX A.—BY LOCALITY. AFRICA. Accession number. Accession number. ere DrOvrusees esos cease 20050) 20000) 200 06 | Keele ry eH rere aera eer ae eae ree 25911 Buttikofer, Dr. A iitawied * Caw Died ite 1a ae 27040: | Moore, JHC. sos. tose ee eee eee 26704 ‘Chadliiey WiS WY Se soe aee ee aOnaamor Sera 26446 | Randolph; Miss Cornelia .-.:-.2..-:----..-- 25968 Chamberlain, Dr. L. T.,and Mrs. Frances Lea 27004 | Sibasion, Unger....--....-..--..-.........- 26185 Chanler Wialliam Astor.:--..2--.--=- 26908, 26939 | Schliiter, Wilhelm .............-.---- 26010, 26506 Opleutolain wel lie fses ce ese «oe ne Oe seer 26802;:26803 5) “Schulz.i0reAuweliassaet es ee aera ee sew 20546 Clomaes TRIN Aa eased eacenearecuce geese crac 26771) | Gsteckleman (Carles mas sass e ae ete aes 26257 Gini ZAG a eee ees ois 25980" || Mritech, Alberti: esses: Leste eee 26747 - English, George L., &Co.......----.------- 26510) | Wanamaker; Hon: Joln).-..2-2:-+------6--s 25930 Grant, Hon. Louis B...--.-.----- wopiciats 20998; 267238) HWirloht. shies ete eeseeerieneee ee eee eeeen re 26780 ‘GiesemGy Ap sha WA SaeNEA fosaanon coonos 2550- 2622 AMERICA. NORTH AMERICA. British America, PAttiwater oH: iP. oc cca wo Rese ean tne 26196) 1) sMacharlaneuR Ssevcacereecese sane oo ee aoe 26380 BarTEOWSHELOL Widest eee eee 26796: || Macer, Miss: Ernestine 22-2222 5--82-2222— 26160 Bement: O09 osteo ee oe ee ee 268340 | Merriam Or Garant aspen eee 26441 IBTOOKS >All anG sce ence eee er 26019 Rope Een. ose arenes aera clases See ee 26061 Cox, Philip). .ss-oe2+55s5- S22 = 27080, 27086, 27127 | Taylor, Miss Blizabeth......--....... 26518, 26519 Gilchrist, WACheceseassss seca eee a eee ee 26972) ehaylor Rey. Georse Wheres -ssere= eee eee 26136 Hanvey; Revi My22 2222505 seamen 26901, 26902 | Thompson, William Nelles.........-.....-. 26237 Hours ton, JOsephiosssee= se eee eee 26057) 5|cnailll Wiel -(s. stone sees see saeeeees 25938, 27103 TOLAAD DTN ieee cee ee ee ee ee 263791) Wihiteavies,ocl.- sess. cence ote oe eerie 26623 Wampard, Henny sss aoe aes see eee 26363"! Woirtele thy © ea ccnccs ea ieee eae eee eee 27036 Mexico. Academy of Sciences, San Francisco, ‘Cal 2- 26688) 1) diouy, Po lias.-o 2-2 eee eee eee eee ee eee 27143 Agriculture, Department of.--.-.-.-. 26386; 27113) )\) MasonjJiD ~25e2 ae acene ne cesese eee eeee 26948 JNM INOUE, NWCIN Soncossnceescere aessosceecae 26174 | Mearns, Dr. E. A., U.S. Army........ 26022, 26689 Appleton, Capt. Nathan............-- 26250),.263745|( Mierralll (Gay eee ee ee ee ea 26319 bP Cpl dic cndeceossneeaetotesedeonsonoces 260147 Noth p Ors eeeee asses eee eee 26580 Blatehley wesc a -eeceeceee etc anesaes 26198 jl eNinbtally George righ ee eee see eee 26877 Cleveland: Rev. BSH xe eee n-ne 21061, 27136") Palmer DrsBidwardecece -eeencer see oeeeeree 26324 Daniel: Protease 2.4 ese oe ee eae 27131 | Patton, William Hampton ..-.-...:.....-=- 27073 Devine, William ti--6 scence hs eee eerecenes 264953) Soi thigh harbiye dit as eee =p ee eee 26730 Dees wero fpAC eee ce eer areas 26707,,20048) | smithy RW Eeken byjaee ere eee ae ee aeeseree 26581 ETM ONS AS 7H nce eee ade lee eee eee cere 27057 «Smithsonian Institution. U. S. National ne lish, George: les ccCOmeaseaeeeen eee ae 26540 Museum... 25887, 25901, 26123, 26207, 26956, 26967 Fish Commission, U.S ..-.-.... 26376, 26574, 26710 | White, Dr. C. H., U.S. Navy..--..-...-.-:.. 26964 Herrera, Prof Aclsetscere es ceceee ee ewe ene 26542' | Wanton, (George sD: ~-.-. 5-2-2. -seeeee = 26614, 26°93 United States. ALABAMA: | ARIZONA: lek ad Milli sesso Hsooocobobbososebsce 26394 | Arizona Onyx Company, Chicago ...... 26530 IROTEY, Whe Sie eet ses Coe ee eee eee 26735 | ‘Bales. (CB icscstoe csc ce es aceease cee 26236 Zobinson; -AmosiG= so. ee eee 26068 | Brown. Herberteces scoot oe eee eee 26211 tomeyn, Capt. Henry, U.S. Army...... 26064 | Coleman, Ji Li. s222 oot e ge etoce eee 26159 ALASKA: L A@oltiiing ek 222 ee eee 26685 Call Ori S:idicisna-csecs =) sea eee Renee 26150 | Dawes. Mrsa Wis G.sescosecne concen eee 26125 Emmons, Lieut. G. T.,U.S. Navy. 26453, 26494 | HOOLO Dracaena eee ee 26144 27063 Howler. Ey bHalle ss: esc sc cee ee ceee 26219 PMermann-|-rot. beaWicseeeee coos 26658 Hod ge wh Webb ine-aes ane eae 26631, 26635 Fish Commission, U.S ..... 26375, 26739, 26822 | Johnson, Pauli dic. sence on. eeauee-eeeease 25978 Hees bhOmasizcecsscnceeke scence Ceee 27106 | Keam>Mhomas:Wir.we cn ecessieeenieee since 27072 itlejohny Chasersses accu eee eee 26352 | Kemptons Cs ibissesesccens see ecner case 26287 The Alaska Indian Bazar, Chicago -... 27101 | besser & Saw yer aes ccs -antisecccce seco 27100 Bhormton Hie es. se eee 26018 | Moles EE MBS he yo ceniewe sce cena cee 26572 Treasury Department, U.S...... 26395 26418 | MillextCharlessJir-q.ce-ceees erence sces 27025 NER Tne. se 5es2: | Mforria, Walliainussot a oo eee 26445 INDEX TO ACCESSION LIST. 265 Accession number. Accession number. ArkiIzonA—Continued. CoLorabo—Continued. Smithsonian Institution. Bureau of Interior Department. U.S. Geological PUM OLO Pen eee eee nee 26631 SUMO \ieeser rere eeaa: csc aaa 25894, 26455 Smithsonian Institution. U.S. National Palmer DreMdward sss. 26294, 26297, 26298 26299, 26303, 26596, 26603, 26650, 26884 Bd wands; \VinaleNeosseceeees een 26351 Mlson AW de Cotten eee ee 26717 Harrineton,O:Cleeess sees eee eee ee eee 26660 Hermald Ee rotiCaHee epee eee ease 26693 Hewkes, Drideawialterses--cesseo eee see 27102 Eish\Commission, UsSeeeessesece 25909, 26820 BrazariGs Big tncecrcts ceeeee sae ee oe 25569 Hallock Chanlesjss: seeesteeceteo nee 26004 Heliotype Printing Company, Boston.. 26714 erowx. cA AN eee eee eee ee 26847 268 REPORT OF NATIONAL MUSEUM, 1893. Accession number. Accession number, MaAssACHUSETTS—Continued. Monrana—Continued. ntcheoo kel sE ose se oaeeee sce se sioere 27009 Wisher, JOM .5).2nc8 2 nee eee Serene 26110 18 DIS ed De Sy ars ts ae ls ee eee peep 26058 Smithsonian Institution. Bureau of Interior Department. U.S. Geological | Ethnology 3-57.22 sscee soe ea 25905, 26525 SLE MOV sete cee nisice See ios 25986, 26280, 26490 Spratt. Captsb rane by eee ee 26950 Jackman, ENG ech ee er neo Pac 26432 | Squyer, Homer-...--.. 26933, 26941, 26973, 27122 AREF Drake Bet Oa oe eee ee oe 26641 Taylor *Walliame Late oes se sees ae 26585 Gy OrAN\ Vice ieeeees reece chia seers anne 26231 | NEBRASKA: sis gi 1) > 2 26279, 26691 Langdale, J. W ...-.------------------- 26733 Me Connelle Atel a asece ees a sear 26782 Mason wberot. Onelre spree ssete eee tr 25970 Palmer, Joseph ..---------- 26326, 26329, 26331 | Palmers Walliams eee teste 26337, 26433 Pelham & Lloyd): -----.-2-------------=-- 26033 IR NTN, IN) oaA se Beeosdososeqeace=Scessac 26293 IgeMmNGE dls WisonessccussastossasieSpoone 26787 SavmrypOW IN Se saseassesco soos ognasecs 25903 Smithsonian Institution -..------------ 25928 Sjomaalicell Alo Niaasheeesoosesnsongaadssc6 26638 SyolbbnGn I) Sop oee Ss centoosgce=con gost 26085 The Grottoes Company ---------------- 26481 Washington, Lawrence .-..------------ 25899 Whyanainit,, Wi. Weer asia ote= tetera === 26706 | ‘WASHINGTON: Carpenter, J. S., U.S. Navy------------ 26094 | DantelssWie biases. = os sacee eee ances 26052 IDPH, INS Isla Koseooseesoscoesseccaaac 26031 Misihi Commission Ui Sees sane es ee 267&8 SER note sel Opn Baer eee aaeasaereeoos 27090 Interior Department. U.S. Geological STMT Oye conse cescooseecssboctascoes sce 26204 lenis UR ODD bs Prof: Je Henny. a ssa-eeeeee aces 26164 MontandonsPro fed gee eane ee eee 25994 Moss: Walliams. 3 eee eee a eee 26753 Sunich-Academy, Munich -s--esescee2e see 26726 Noahy John wis =¢ Sete ce eee ee 26368 Nuttall Mins - ee eee ee eee 26069 Pretorius: Gharles seeeees = eee ce eee 26851 Ramsay-/Allanes...c5- 2 ees nee ae ee 26945 Royal Museum, Berlin, Germany...-....--- 26913 pandiberg, Cab a. anaes e eee er pee eee 26654 Schluter: Walhélmi--scs------ +e -eee 26116, 27021 Seward, Miss Olive Risley ........-----...- 25918 Shusioy Eieromichy--e- ase eee see eee eee 25910 Siemens*Williamere eee eee oe See 26086 Simonis, M.]' Abbé Paul Miller ........._.- 26555 Smithsonian Institution -...--- 26266, 26524, 26988 Smithsonian Institution. U. S. National Museum? isso. 53-52 -t eee eee 26361 Smolinski, Joseph. ---.- .---2--s2-+=) 20800, 2,045 Snyder; Hon VB. ie eehec cc seas eee ener 27093 Stejneger, Dr. Leonhard -...5--2.2---2-22-- 26558 Sturge; Jiosephy oo: sccse- ecco ee eee eee 27119 Snudallah!Souhamité:iCos--4--— eee eee eee 26942 | The I<. K. Hofmuseum, Vienna.........-.-- 26°88 Ward, Rowland & Co., London -.-...-- 26898, 26922 Ward's Natural Science Establishment, Rochestery Na Vo 2: sesso seoec ee Seen eee 26895 Wesley, William, & Son.....--. 26059, 26084, 26241 Walson:Zibomas?cn--sseaecceeee eee 265 ee 26795 Wood, Miss WyMieee soso. sesso eee 25816, 26234, 27038 Zoological Museum of Christiania, Norway. 26865 Zoblogical Station, Naples, Italy ...-.-...--- 27047 OCEANICA. AUSTRALASIA. Australia. JA dams 4 CE 222% Sass Spe See eee eee eee 26212 Australian Museum, Sydney ---.------..-=- 26775 Bednall WL - socccseniscemessis epee sc eeeees 26620 Brown, Hdiss acces: ee see eee eee 26370 Canterbury Museum, Christchurch, New Zealand) so-cishesee ese sek steel ee eee 26947 Tal Gye LEER) Be aagbocgse ce onosocoguaccdssaso+os 26191 (Govan db Lita cose ce cosseesoscoscscesaessoss 27034 Peters? Mrs Sale aoe ce ee eee 26417 PAllinor eis Creetsae eee aacaeieeies eee eee 26955 Tristram, ROvch. Bice cceee eee eee cee 25982 Von Mueller, Baron Ferd....-. 26034, 26120, 26951 Malaysia. Royal Museum, Florence, Italy...-...----- 25949 Webb; Bony AlexandersRhe- ee nee sees eee 26320 Wei 18 Sie Seo eso cecceSdssesoses == o9SSa2 25955 INDEX TO ACCESSION LIST. Polynesia. Accession number. Bernice Pauahi Bishop Museum, Honolulu. 26874 27074 Svonswevot. AG bao ae = Se ace cc 26356, 26611 Stejneger, Dr. Leonhard=-.-°-=2---2.------- 26497 Walliams =T <2 0. sos. Sine bck oae eee 26131 Walsony Scott = s2.css-cessccosee ae 26201, 26202 Islands in the Pacific Ocean. Baars Ge wesccness ses cae Poa cic Shia eee 26622 INDEX B.—BY DEPARTMENTS IN THE NATIONAL MUSEUM. DEPARTMEN: I. ARTS AND INDUSTRIES. Accession number. HaTCONET eM es oats oa micns Se soe eee eet oe 26170 PISheCGMMIsslOns sl Ole sacs se ese eee 26987 MIEChteEr Vis De=- asec n= seo ecc nase sce 26427, 26484 HOGLOMD Dw Arr Wee ae anc ese ce cae ere 25946 ran Clolimt sly) eee s ocice ose see tocar 26256 OTN CIS; OSE PNass = 5 =e = : 25760 riedaenwalde vO relts so se 2s csc te se nee oe 26731 xoode. Dr. G. Brown ..... ..-- 23906, 26037, 26410 26532, 26647 HG onverntl meee ee went eae a ey 26341 GrantpHone Wo nis Bree ses ace see cece 25998 Grimshaw. Mrsvd'amesis----- 22-54 - 6 ase oe 25915 Gn there Caeser ee eee Gene see 26193 GurlitteErrbzbaseasans eee aoe Soper 26944 Hal eS reel ens Yess ee aret terest eee ett 26554 HatlockiCharless: ss. 6--sscsee eee oe eee 26994 A WiKINS s Avy (Py ejcies sinsseacces scenes 26512 EP ANNES Wier eae ss ae o)<2) = Se ioke Boia: Sera 26971 leHiazent ich nica meee syne eee 26913 Heard, Hon. Augustine== = 3=- 25-2 -2---255-5 26255 Hehotype Printing Company, Boston, Mass 26714 ALEhCoek. ROM Ns ee ee ciaee sels ee eee 26501 HMofinian Or. Wi odit- cos js sassec= sae snes 26982 HionehyWialtersessans8c- sss -ec ree 26981, 26999 Illinois and Mississippi Canal Company, IMolinGz=2--eessse= Sotbsclessieaiceweseescee 27150 JenMing sy. ew sae. seeps ec = eee 26 £92 | Johns Hopkins University, Baltimore, Md. 27146 Kaldenberg, Pdi. Co. --=-25--.- 26772, 26773, 26862 Kaldenberg, i. Wa. 2. s.-cse.sss2ssk meena 23770 Mellor oe Wire’ ssaoos sense ace Saegeceetests 26229: Keppel pits, (iC 0ene once eee san iaeeees 26729, 26896 KiGyere Win) -ormesocececsce ances Ste aoe 26231 Kamm chide WO bass as eee ease ee ee 26952 Kimney, Mrs: Louise Catlin 22-225... 4252 -- 27051 IoeWlery Ss Rea-sesssseeee assess 26721, 26926, 27070: lalcouS Hienryaerce- ce cea ieee ee ieerrr 26719 Tambor Dra his Hieesss ease seen eee eee Od os Manthierla. CAl -soassecie ems eeiasis eee cee 26523 Mattines Gi Wes asec = se sciecise ste es eee 26230 Mentz,“W oe Stssaacee fa-5= ase aes eee ee 26177 Ov yb. Bis esac nsasae sl snerisesse essa eeee 26612° Tnyon, Mires Blizaihe 20.22. einen eens 27030 yon, Mrs) Drs Thomas === 2=2==5 422 26974 Maver vass)Prne@Stin@/-sanes see oe = seeeee 26160 Miaran Miss eM eles oss teem r cae 26595. Nason Hee D dc SONS sscese eee = eee 26980 Meder, Werd: 2: 25. sas. s22-= ss e=seae 26728, 26838. | (Melson; Henny sceate-cccenace 2a cees eae eee 26724 Merck: & Cons. ssc sec see oe oe ae eee 27019 Maddleton = Prof.) Henny sasessesee eee 26164 Millers Wo wisjseos ceeds eote=cacsaseis ces oneness 26810: Miuner: 5.0 =o aoc ac saea-jee nee ee eee ects see 26565. IM bby nd PVN CS Beces nucanpaaacesasooDe: Ase neS 26248 Morane Peters 2: cece sass etna eee ene 26337 Museum of Fine Arts, Boston, Mass -.---- 26720 National Society of the Daughters of the American! Revolutiones=---4--=2-44---5 =. 26.93 Neograph Publishing Company, Boston, 14 Cee beepesnoacSEcousenses Ga euemanour 26737 Newman) é&/Sone. Sst accee eres eae eases 26113 New York Coin andStamp Company. 25954, 26366 Noah Im geld aee eer aeene eae eee 26672 Noah Ji. Mes aoc or see te cee eels ae 26368 NorthamCarolineiMie= seers seas a2 ee 26743 PAD DObU Te Win dun nese Nene aie minss atom ermicene 26251 PACCHLET, HOTA Cy TU Seah a= =a 25935, 25947, 26171 FAMIOTUS AW iidikcra nono Je ratec eee ees 25635, 26607 AS OGG Dice Oi aeeaans aospOCEsoonaSeseeS 25992 | A‘ppleton, Capt. Natham-.-.---------- 26250, 26374 | Armstrong Ll. Dis. sss sscsesss ad scescee= see 26406 Association of Inventors and Manufactur- Gigy Weeiysigha, 1D} Ce Sa< ceeseenesddencs 26469 JOIN Nb] Paontoscosadescnescecocacusosetso= 27069 Baar REV. OTH — 250 -\csceee ascceeaae 26108, 26534 Baldwin, Gleason & Co., Limited........-.-.-. 26998 IB BeCHereMmeWitt micuetcs cose bine be seamaemeons 26859 POUT Wists? ysve coer eicrsee= eet ees 95990 Bene wat. Adige sce se seis eerie oe 26388, 26946 ESHOP aS tiies seni sens ae ae ecm eee 26962 Bissincer. Hon: Mrhardsa-ees-eses= 22 === 25902 INETYEN GIB IN 2 ee ccecnccaase sees nceso=censec 26897 Boston Art Students’ Association ......... 26605 | BOS well eR were ac ane ate nee ye se esis 26188 Brady Gens le dmees see santo nee see ee wee 25927 |} SEA vOrM An Mew oe nee eee ee ee ae reagce Aine ESTO Kae) ee eA oe sary ne een eerie Eye ie 26919 BTrOSMenseWilliam! 2-2= ses ee See on. 26991, 27134 (Brathers Drie eas eee 26187, 26358, 26391 Burniiam. Wallis) 6 Co. -es--.-5 eee cece 25921 1S h7Giish de GINS SRS Ch LSS ae ae cone onease aden 26757 Cameron, John ....... eer cto cee oeee 26203, 26559 GanyaeWire bras aciae ne ni< aoe ae ekine Dea eee ae 26270 Central New York Veteran Association, PAUNISTETO ATION =) Mp ae.setan eset ceiee a acs 2 26679 (Cisiae S160 ae Soin Se ei pete on ae Fae 26556 ehatelarm wlio gs ces tase: serine es secia= ce 26803 WohenmRevy-e Menryyec veces e sae ssee setae ae 26430 (CAND. CRA eo tee es e ae ee Se aees e 25926 Columbian Historical Exposition, Madrid. 26990 | Comstock, Cheney & Co..-.......-.. 26601, 26602 Woneer yw Mi as toa acetals oat Sie. oie acid as 26771 EGOper Wii b asses ot wee so iec see ree 26261 OTT, STE hen a eee eee 2.--- 26012 Hy aiatel wet piiasace 2 a ee asco asec ee oek ae 27131 LOSERS TERRY Cea ee ee 26616 ISU, TEGO) AOA CES 5 aoe ee eee eee 26703 BSG MPA ME Wie SOrACUOre yates noes scene 26717 LED Ra, TEs cee eee eee a 26413 | H. Mis. 184, pt 218 273 Accession number. 274 REPORT OF NATIONAL MUSEUM, 1893. Accession number. Accession number. {Oey eta ae ar eh oa Ph tere has 26799 9] Wiader Mirssuenm 22sec ee eae ee 26042 Oppenticimony Se Cope set ee eee ae 26774 | Waggaman, 029 05.02.56 aes oe 26930 WBHOTNCTORNY Reena cues Cece eos 2654826606 || Wiamstall: s\walllisine seers e ea eee ee 26317 COGN Or eee rei cee ec Se cee eee 27018: | Washineton) Lawrence=--.----- 22. -eeeee as 25899 amen Or ale dwar dase acc. sace -ascca seer 26426. | Wieaver OUR Sancecsoce seme eae nee eee 26247 Cea Or re Nt Gus Week te aoe e eee see 268711. |!) Wieems.10S Goo se jacae ne eet cee eee eee 25406 LEVEN icy yy (OU WIN, a Wee ee Oe Pe Ree A RE 26842 | Wesley, William, & Sia ee eae a os 26084, 26241 IBCs OXI S epee eae a Sones ae meee 26429" |) Wihitelaivy\Vecblec soso ee near eee 26480 Daerenitrs SBOM ee se. 1. ce ee 26199 | Whittier, J. Hut! )-1s0-. zs os oes 26451 TERE LCP) oo SF eae ae ee Sehr aiaeey Ss 2640911) WalcoxaJionege =. 4ce ee ee nee ee eee 26628 iBractorius: Chavles ..-csccs<2 eons ae eae 26851" iS Walecox:sMirsyisbe Oe) Sue eee ae ee 26196 Perera ple wn COS: oe. mais 8s wa Sees Tae 26716 || Wilson; EU Bi.6 52596 ooo... eee 26746 eTEMLIGSe Dr W 5 Win esses ae oaeete es See 21022), WioodeNelsomitscss: bee eee cece ee tome 26485 MB Ditty SE! Soc cae aoe Ss ese oe tncy oe 26409 | Wunderlich, H., & Co....-.--.------- 26727, 26363 Tkamasray, SEM. sancesoo tcossseocdcasenesac 26945) | WiuntelesBs C4. 5-26 eaeee, se See eee 27036 ewmolds 0" li: dO, Av Zt. 2 eee 26232: | WyerdyBiGe nies. 242 2 eee, oe eee 25955 XG ORY, TORO INE Se Soecte oe! cassShosssossass = 26246 | Yale University, New Haven, Conn......-. 26705 RODINSON ela nee ee eee ae ere ea 26249 | OMI] oly. Ale aa aac eae eee eee 26243 ! DEPARTMENT II. Rosenthal, Alberto. 22 seecees eee re 26300, 26801 | Rowlands: Walter sso secesster eee eee 26272 (A) ETHNOLOGY Royal Museum, Berlin, Germany..-...----- 26943 | Royal Museum, Florence, Itd#ly...--.----.- 25949 | Abbott, Miss Gertrude...................-- 25936 SHINE OUR Os Poss aussie stecdccoonesce 266384 i eAib both Dre Niele eee ees iets 25997, 27085 Schliemann, wladame= vee 4. eee eee eee ee 27023 Adler: Dr--Cyrus! = -ccese eee 25950, 25962, 26106 SChoP US tA: 58 Done eee es cy Soke OTT | tAlikeny Wis Bsns ooo ne ees eee 26189 Seer, A. S., Theatrical Printing Company, | Allen, Dr. H. IN REMEn nna stene eran bot ce Ae 27062 INONY MOLE 6 co nostec ee emnten seume meteor 2608S. | AllenvJeiS% 2 ot Se Sate ty ee oe see ee nee 26632 Sellers, Jolm? & Sous:........---- BA ee ne 26850 | Appleton; Capt. Nathan -2-.-.22:5-22.2.-:- 26245 Seward) Miss Olive Risleysecses]s-- eee eae S5918)| Bache: RénG .A2s.a2 35 eee eeteneteeee ae 26385 Sewall eles tese state Ans ee eee eee oGTIgu altonr blenny soe-ene see ona 26027 ShmovowsHa eromye haeess eens 25910, 26929, 27066 | Barakkat, Mrs. Layyah.......--.------.--. 25934 Sibasio, Un versssstscccneseaesasor seem eee 26185 Bernice Pauahi Bishop Museum, Honolutu_ 27074 STEMENS CLL aI eh ee ee ree 26086 } Bissinger, Hon. Wrhard ----.--..-2-.------- 25902 Simonis, M. lV Abbé Paul Miiller......----- 26555 | Bourke, Capt. John G., U.S. Army. . 25896, 26024 Smith, Hoi 22c22 22s dsodas. sea sce ne seseee 26035 | Bradleyscl enmlleer a= eerie ee eee 2669 Smithsonian Institution. 26263, 26266, 26524, 26988 ‘BrintonsMirs = Emimy Ge oeese eee aera 26983 Smithsonian Institution. U.S. National Bryants WG sass52scaseasce eae ae eee 26841 MITTS GUIDE eo eteeectteiete cerita sey ees Q5SBT A BOSEL jf Oadles NVw Ni seeettc leer cites eee eel tae eee 251416 SD ers Mon gh sense eae sees aac esee een 97093: Cameron, Saikystse- eae aeeeie ee eee 26112 Souham srdullalhec:| Come ssesss-seeee ae ese 96049") ‘Chamberssani oN eess tessa eee eee 27058 STATI Ole s eee a ne ee 2 ae ne 26954 | Chanler-a\VilliamvAstorss: seen one e ee 25939 Sten Sark Eis Cee eee ee ee eee 96982: | Chatelain’ Héli te ..2ee. sce aee eee see 268)2 Stceklemani (Carl sesse- -sa-e2n See oases 26057 4 Cleveland: Rev... Xk s.2--. eae. 27061, 27136 Sulzberger. eeee sae eee eee eee 26398426816 || (Cohen. “Rew. Henry = .casss5-s--5- === 26995, 26582 Sulzberger) Mayertoe. eels 2612126817 | ‘ColsonsiBbs Eu. at a-ac- ] geen eee eee 26997 Taber Charles; Cort tec -c2 cscs se ose ese 26527 | (Cooker Ad Cec. ssa. acacia sae oe ees 25980 aka yana7 O70 sats se sere see cee 209819) (Coppi divS) =< SARAR AARC ACS AS a ARosiss6 27084 TayloriCharless sss sess ceee es] Sacer ee O re tall a CON LO st Kin ee eerste tee eee ere eters .--- 26195 The Art Publishing Company, Boston, Cox... WEN ote een ee ree oa nee eee 26063 MASS) o2b.2o oe cist ae ee ee eee 26716 | Culin, Stuart .-.... 25809, 25908, 26003, 26928, 27071 The Forbes Lithograph Manufacturing (Gushin'oss he Hee eee ee eee eee 26513, 26963 Company, Bostomy Mass sass) se eeee ae 26421 | ‘Gurtin, Hon. Jieremiah His Woe. cetceaite ce ee ee 25907 26499, 26608. 26689 | Dow, Mrs. Elizabeth K ..................-. 27125 Montandon, Prof. A. L......-. Pete owiee eae 20994), | Dresser che ices ec ee ee ror 25966 Moores Hi@pes st try seis seen eer DeT0d |! iPods Mes ce ice ox pein AAS ora ee OD 27126 Palmer, Joseph=c.2+-4-o26 26072, 26326, 26329, 26331 | HM chit eV eleAt eyes ee ae ee 27089 Palmer, William ... 26330, 26337, 26541, 26911, 26923 | Fish Commission, U.S .......- 26449, 26739, 26820 Ine MUSL Me coocoossenunseassasasaess Cio, Dine iiGerrard dwar disses see eee ee 25996 Pettione we se Aliana eae eee ee ee 26449 Gundlach erst a2 sss eee ae ee 27148 Peters; Mess, Dict ee ee 26417, 26630 | Harvey, Rev. M.......2-....-.-.--... 26901, 26902 Pollock AGE ah ee ees eee ee 26915) SHasbrouci; di: Mate. se 2 cesses ee 27090 | Pane 3. utd en oe ee 26021), |Hitehcocks hte...) kee 26832 | BreblesE Ak... 95. Soa ts eee 271451) Ingraham,,1. Pet oe eee 26269 | Schnii dy E.'S). e- ie ae oe se ee eee 26629") Jones die he peace eee eee ee eee 26313 Smigh yy W..'Gis22 3425 - Bo eee eee 26145" i Jiones «Dre Cie cece erent eee ae oer 26541 Smithsoman Institution........._.. Bate Beer 25928, eluanos Allberbss:-2..26cee econ eee ee 26554 Smithsonian Institution, U.S. National |) arner< Jobin Q e252 ase eae eS 26389 ba) Miseumi- =.=. 25887, 25901, 26207, 26471, 26528 | Lattin. do. 225 ee see eee eee cee 27011 26503, 26956; 26967, | McCormick, To. Mio 2-22.02 02 ene e eee 26878 Smithsonian Institution. National Zoo- Macfarland: Miss) Alice {22255-20092 nese 26318 Lo gucalle ark: fate). sone 25933, 26073, 26074 | Marshall, Henry...........--..------ 25944, 25961 26139, 26325, 26327, 26328, 26332, 26338, 26396 | Mears; Drona Al). S.eArmy: poses seen 26022 26459, 26523, 26544, 26563, 26654, 26702, 26749 | 26371, 26499, 26608, 26689 26762, 26793, 26808, 26823, 26909, 27044, 27144 | Mermll, Dr. J.C., U.S. PGT pee eres oases 26606 Stabler, Harold b.and James P _........... HFM wires WiaMe ste Ue ee 26440 Stem burg. Baron H.S-.-ss22 see eee eee 2rl2d | Mosier C."Avac css cswee ore. eee eee 26369 INDEX TO ACCESSION Accession number. National Museum of Costa Rica, San José. 26087 26262 TRATED TAK CEM & Girne seit rae eee Ye ney, eee Ete 26877 CLS Died Coils Re eres potas a i Say OS oe 26661 Ralmerwialliam=<2:4-.2cces.-ee-2sne 26433, 26911 ALARM 2 sia, Soames aoe ene eee eee ae 26115 Peabody Museum, Cambridge, Mass...---- 26025 valip ents Win linn ieee Oe eae ee eee 27056 Richmond. Cais ss eee 26252, 26496, 26738, 26809 Rad owe ys Robert. 2... c-5 sess 26275, 26642, 26646 Robinson, Lieut. Wirt, U.S. Army.. 26592, 26700 sehluten owalhelmi so, 22s... ee 26010, 26116, 27021 SS CHIMTCME SS os eere cae ce samen eens 25678, 26590 Science College Imperial Museum, Tokio, C125) EET ES i ae ee eS 25937 SICOULMO Vy Cie Bere ce tise einen nies See ie oe 26312 imc ley rds Al Echt samt. 26692, 26697 SkanMenAwc. ce cece essme rece Seeece 26416 MOM ep ee ONCOlae eee ee elec crr aeyaateae 26677 Smichsonian lnstitubiom soos see eee ce 25928 Smithsonian Institution. U. S. National AVES OU Mess te ce|anieceseneie ener eaice 25887, 25901 26207, 26471, 26528, 20553, 26686, 26956, 26967 Smithsonian Institution. National Zoolog- ical Park... 26966, 26407, 26640, 26872, 26879, 2706s Southwick & Critchley.......--.-.... 26502, 26591 Stabler GH Base. - cunasn-sisicienartenie ns 26268, 26498 SlaDlersdi perenne es occ ects see ee 26408 Stejneger, Dr. Leonhard . ...----.... 26497, 26558 Mawlons Muss blizabeth so. —ace-= 26518, 26519 BNod MMB) URE a... os ek osicin msaene one ecciamee vase 26258 pRISGVAM REV. EL. (Be .cn sepa sce soe somee tenes 25982 Ward's Natural Science Establishment, VOCHESTED WIN: Mise ---laaee ee scene 20800, 20043 Wacks: Mino. jie. -s SRB Opn RE SSuALaAOeEr 26650 Wal Son aGr Aes. ope se asatee mae ore eres 26050 Whitton: Bea cestectec case cise cers ----. 26614, 26893 AAV FIDE a igel seers einer ae anes reer aura ene 26706 (B) Brrps Eaes. PAD DO GU Drs Wisi lutea se ameet ie cys aaa PA et) Amb ON Ys Avs Witeia) cmsceesace a: Bee eat iotsioe 26758 PASTIU LOM; «| Wi eAaaisla/aneiecisteyontoni 8 saisloleisareisé 26174 PANG Wat OT WEL e tsa cee oeeeee eee ee: 26216, 26609 | BALTO WS) Lote Wir Baccesacseeeoeae see ee 26796 | Bendire, Capt. C, E.. U.S. Army .... 26167, Benson, Lieut. H. C., U.S. Army ....-.... 25904 26238 26149, 26615 BISHOP et pli Masao e eset sees weenie oe -- 26663 IBremino eri Guphp esses etl ee aoe y= 26752, 26936 Brown, Jasper ..-.- jocsosoddedusqeaanaaenes 26610 CAL IDE Se digssscne DRS OO Sosa OS aN AAAGEES 26150 | (Cihenidigy (GaGa SSe ae eens ee eee aes 26382 ooKe wD rN Cee - sscinicies ewnioeciicciee sees 26169 CullermelimwS mere erate cee ae ae ee eae 26848 JONG, TONY CS eye ee eee Siete a em 26761 | Hermann we erOleylss Wis ascca. ences en sees 26658 Pala Meee Wires Segre 26173, 26273 LESINiRs JO Ng IRs ee Se ee een a 26531 LoGiny are, TOES oe aa aes te te ie 26219 Eleonise hams se see ek Soc era £6573, 26636 Pens hanvewE a Wists cece neh ae noun = oo. 27120 Hemera went Aelia ee eee ora eee tet 2654S SCH COCK Met os. ss ee see ee 26166, 27009 Wetele Olin Chaseice. sos ee er 26352 LIST. 20 2s Accession number. Mehihenn yeh vAra=c: oor se sone e cc esieeeee 26684 Mearns, Dr. Ef. A. U.S. Army: -...--.----- 26371 Men gel levirren. cae e cit ons teen e ahs ae 26687 AVI rele OM a Gi oe PN ye rare ete oi ye ee 21095 ELH HH ee bd Dd) S48 eres Sey ee rh aR CPU a ae 26151 Peabody Museum, Cambridge, Mass...-.-. 26025 Ralph eDreWierlisaacdaase sass ase hee 27026 Richards wl Wiescctecceeeacsceemhescecce eee 26321 Richmond Chases cee cece a enone e nee 26738 ROSE DTOO Ker mmWite seme see cecee soo aoe ee 25979 SEG du 80 Geaccasana shorn AnnEeaSeE esa eres 26755 SMIibh wR VW ier MLD Y see -meecees secon ees 26581 SPLASU Erdle Cessation ceio ceca ee eee 26186 SLermibecksawalliamieee se cae oe eee aes 26122 DaylomeMissiblizabeth enn. 4c-s2 55 sees 26519 Poby wey kiasee ce kas eee. 80 Coney see 26316 Wiebe WawBerceen steorcreacacsaccente taco 26278 Widmann OUCONmsamemeneecer ee nce ae 26839 WalcoxMiGab ceactece mee as nese ronan ee 26168 DEPARTMENT VI. REPTILES. INN Yo OTA eel ees SeccopeceoSeeeceer 25997, 27085 Adams! CV Bee se ce nea sinc cass eet neeree 26212 Agriculture, Department of.....-.......--. 26017 BaureDrs Georvenasaeesetiase aso ee eee 26817 Belding siiee: pescce soa season eee 26637, 27052 Benedict: Ji-Bscosc oe ewsis nec ooctcee weet ae 27111 Blaekburns rs leaWiereeeceeseee Roa 26197, 26348 Blatchley, W.S------- sSasbaacocssoscosansec 26198 Boetichers Plus diea-eceseece oases eases 26175 | Brimley OiGien oe cosmos etrsieleisioacisionee see 27135 Brimley, H. H. and C.S............-.. 26439, 26682 Brown? Herbertoc-te este see eee eos eeee oe Brow, DRY W) 225 ses ao woes is sae eae 27030 Caracciolog@h# s = ere sme eee eee eee 27092 Caulfield Willis eo. aotiese eee ooee eee 26240 Ghanlers WallkampAstor "tere reece eee eee 26939 Chatelain; Hé6lic. ssc ae sete =e 26803 Collins JH Hae eee ee eee os eee Sene 26685 Cram; JaCO =: seieei ren faerie aise eae 25972 Daniel: Drs Zi skewers cen ase sete ee eee 26048 slick, dis Avssaace ease eee nee eee eee 26597 [HeCROG, Uo Wee oGeccesas sence so gsdassacesee 27031 HishiCommission Ue ses. seer esas 26669, 26820 |. 'Gerrard, Baward=..-ecece test sccne eee eee 26858 Godding 2D Win Wr -sereeeaea see eae 25920 Marris iG. Bice oe ecese tn ot ce eeeeeeee 26045, 26090 | Seiasbrouck. ik. Meecseeereee ae encase eee 26357 lave Wie ORS asa meee ae ee 26314 Henshaw, H.W... .----- 26995, 27049, 27076, 27137 Holm; ‘Theodorzscics--sss eccrine sere eee 26811 unter Jiu s eee soeeee eee eeceeeees 26049, 26394 Koch; Bh. We aesco eee seeee see ences 26163 Kenehilins J Heese eee ".... 25974, 26279, 26691 isnille;eAulb extices: -semeae eee eee eee eae 27032 McConnell VAGi aa eoaeeee ease seen eae 26782 McCormick vivre tee eee eee nee ee 26709 MecMurdy,)VirsSolelentee-=—-eaeeee eee eee 25885 Matthews, Wes. scan teese oe eee ees 26009 Mea: as, Dr. E. A., U.S. Army... 26371, 26608, 26689 Merrill Gabe ess jac oesee eras 26176, 26319, 26423 MontandonerotyAcluissn ee eee eee 25994 Minn “enh eed ore s-eeeesreener ase eae 27029 278 Accession number. OmsleysDn. Will vases. 3-42 oes GO IP ALMer AW alt aim, cacteemec mor See eee ns 26911 Peabody Museum, Cambridge, Mass ------- 26025 OTE Yau lls Waa aie s te seinen ones ee ene 26975 eH LpS We eaAlletts sce soy-s ese eet cee aeue 26695 Pond wWeiewh. CAs. Uns. Napa 22s cen eee 25895 IPD eA Ake, Ojos hv: ah oesoosacouace 27138 TEARS i) Si eee ee en Ee 27059 IRV MOD UN sae teres ees Sa eee 25393 MICHMONGAC | Wiser s stews sessee eeease 26252, 26738 Peace HMONE Hy WV ies). cie\s arate eo oe Noe aerate 26732 GCL ONAN PAUL CT DOM a= =e sso enero et 26949 PRO DOGUS Nii le ae cim.=. == =e 26939 280 Accession number. | | | REPORT OF NATIONAL MUSEUM, 1893. Accession number. Smithsonian Institution. National Zoolog- ical Parks5-<.09-e3 eee -26179, 26482, 26957 ‘Thompson! Rs 323 - sees eee eee 27024 Mummery) ea enyasees se eee eae eeee eee 26892 Ward's Natural Science Establishment, Rochester, JNe Ver es eee 26138, 26200, 26202 26233, 26401, 26598, 26665, 26812 WiallacesSamucelits see ooo eee ee eee 26483 Webber He Saehan2 aia eee ee 26906 Walcox-Jionésic +a. 505 -e eee eee 26670" Wailcoxt sD rs Iteyhis Un) See Aur y= eee 26403 Walkkinsonshecosoc: esa ae 26044 Wallianas: JitAwe. 2 hse eee eee eee 20722 VGllSOn SS Nie 3 So ee ee ee ae 26201, 26202 Wood Migsih Mice ee. ae 25816, 26234, 27038 WG VDC a tac: ee ee ee 26267 Wexter; Hon. Lewis:--.-:.--+-..- 26026, 27016, 27129 ures Prot As acs ease co eet eee 27048 Fish Commission, U S......--- 25924, 25973, 26567 Jaa fod eae OAS Seat aie eee Se 26992 JRE 0] WS) @ A ee eer 26648 JGR Jig] Seek catenin ge 26381 TSQTER, \Vial CS eee OU ret ee i 26949 HACOC MEG RID sa see. coe tee ae ty eee 26965 | WOomiIs wR ev ONTWacen ee sactnes soe eeee ese 26708 | Marsh Ore wihibe ose os cle Se cle be soelae 27088 Melhichamp Dre JE =. 2526-2222 anes ee 25897 INET EEH Eller Dae. semis eae ce wae eo sees 26114, 26414 Moore, W.S., ensign, U.S. Navy ...--.----. 26767 Moreland. Walter: = si. setae ote er 26007 inneae nd BS eeeese qeaoncepceoseeneascepeos 26645 ROU BeMWWia Rt cess Ao oS ab aee sc ee eee eee 26561 Palmer, Dr. Edward...-.- jee ee 26372 AutEOVOLSOM 2222 hoeee sence sees eee eee 27075 Teer 1B WY penoocebagqnaassscocsenas 26975, 27078 mAchmonds Co \Wisecnae nose noes 26252, 26738, 27128 Saunders, H. R...-.. - See Chee Eee 26814 | Smith, H. I .. 26104, 26350, 26353, 26551, 26570, 26644 DEPARTMENT XIII. (A) INVERTEBRATE FOssILs (PALEOZOIC). Australian Museum, Sydney. New South Wales 26775 Benedict rc Aus terse nen eae eee 26038 | Dickey, F. W ..:-- POCCE RS OEAC Hpac riGeSsss.: 26886 Grierson. Al Re ste: Bape lek ee 26821 Interior Departments sess ese see ae 25891, 25945 Newlon Or iWinSteees2 scene eee eee 25917 Root mwiallaceréc) bar] eee ee ee 26965 Smith WH: Wosscececc eee ee ee ee 25939 (Uirich# BO os. eee 8 sane ee ee eee 26754 SquyperwHOmen sass. 45 see eee eee 27122 Stwanne Le Wi yee ee ok ee 25929 Yale College Museum, New Haven, Conn.. 26415 26977 (B) INVERTEBRATE FossILs (MESOZOIC). Bissing er, Hon.pnhard-s- eee eee 25902 INMM ONS See Bese osteo eee a ee 27051 Bish* Commission) Wij seess-- ees eee 26375 Morrester se nOberie asso eee 26000, 26690, 27054 George, WistAt= sen. outa eee 27139 Interior Department. U.S. Geological Sur- Wek Mcmciasetec orig seco emusesor Do Scar sebaans, 27094 Mearns, Dro. A... U.S: ATM ce cee 26599, 26608 Parlows Rroheaycicss cr sacer eae eeee enews 26069 Smipli Sh sdGirbyeen-co ace ee ene 26730 Squyers omer as. cheress serene eee 26933 Stilwell al. Wi eecanacc soot eee ee 26091 Thorpe Our He pH. eec eaoeee oe eee 25886, 25964 Wihitea ves: divBiei ss. 2 sscecee ee eee 26623 DEPARTMENT XIV. Fossit PLANTs. Biederman sC. sR ss sae oe eee 26781 Caleutta Botanic Garden, India............ 25983 - | Chanler, William Astor.......-.-.-..-.---. 26939 Coley: Hennes Ses ee eee eee 27013 Daniels sis. Wiss .stes soon Seat eee ee eee 26966 HisiniCommissions Up Stes ssse ce eek eee 26375 HMorrester:LRobert4- 2 seen ce eee eee 26096 Henshaw, H. W..... Siva oe cnciaee ope se eee 27006 Illinois State Museum of Natural History Sean Gl Ole coacees esos onccssseeeredesece 26367 bacoe GR DiS sean ne eon ee eee 26102 Mann. sRev. Albert. 2-22. .42--..ssceen- eee 26516 Smithsonian Institution. U.S. National MMNISG UI: 2 2\ee occa ete seo 25887, 26956, 26967 SMOhNS la OSE PL) caesar 26836 ERalma ren dnp iesscce ames series see 26459 The Woman's College of Baltimore...-...- 26785 Thornton; MAH soho. cece eh eee eee 26419 | Rownsend) Ci H< ss 23 ee ete eee 27014 | \Nilkefa pe, IDI Aba Oy Wig Sh Abate ance saroocane 26403 Zoological Station, Naples, Italy........... 27047 | DEPARTMENT XII. COMPARATIVE ANATOMY. JNM OUT IDI Nilfo se socosscdeaGanoen PACA CED Acriculture, Department of..-........ net 20006 ‘Baldiwanis sAv- "Ht. Ys a3) aes | eee hs eee eee 26360 EB aT STAG acer ata ee ee ee nee ore 26817 PB INCK Ay. Bh eee ee eee 26784, 26845, 26855 Boswell, Henry.cnice cesar eee 26657 Carpenter dnis.. Ula Naiaee te seae eee ee 26094 Deyroile. mile..- 25.5255 cee eee eee ee 26664 (Hmmett,virs. UR cA Sa ae eae ... 26868 HishiCommission Ui aomeseeeeeeeeeee 26264, 26766 Rlansican’ Albi ote eee ae a eee 26970 PV erOUK AG Acs ic Sere eto ee eee 26847 Howell. Bizc-coc0 eae ene eee 26265 Interior Department. U. S. Geological STUEV OY Ria = ace = eras ote eee eee sees 26119 KKeam, ol 0V auc os a2ion at one Dee es eee 27072 Keinsburys; Cy! access oe eee 26107 ERI DY Ge SMNUN 52 os 3.3) 755.) ee See 26676 Lattin, Lount.--... 3% ne, Soci CCS SEMEN 26667 MASON El seD) she SONS: eae eee eee eee 26846 CHS DS n ORE ee eee ee SE eS 26668 Onuslen Ming Wis. Dock cic tesco ae 25918 Tetra 5 CN ee een ee le fe 27078 TUB OR CES SHEN. cca ascites ee 26744 | echsnand: \C.0Ws---- 2.2... 4. ae 26460, 20711 | DRG DOES Een note eisiro = dee oo ae 26271 Coir 5 OS eee ee See eet ee 26472 NEOUECK dW oss sas ose hc oe nee 26473 Smithsonian Institution ......:..) 22 ee. 25928 Smithsonian Institution. U.S. National VET SOI aes secs sins Scie en Son ee 26207 Mead) \C. Hs =.---5- 26047, 26075, 26118, 26192, 26311 INDEX TO ACCESSION LIST. Accession number. 281 Accession number. VAY Grenier seis a 2 ssc ae Sa saan 26959 Sahord peroLvdn Mle seq cone -secincsaas ssa 26056 Shepard Dre OC nUrem= sean cee- eee eee 26547 RN OT AL So erasincie's aie, e sneer crt eles aga ee 26465 Smithsonian Institution. U. 8. National Minseumiesasite ease aatiet ne seek eee oe 26464 Sprain Canter kiy bees cee af Seocsssees Aisa) ORV Ne eile serrate soe eer es 713 feces 26434 Rayon: Walliams s5-sssen eee ceo eee 26585 The K. K. Hofmuseum, Vienna, Austria... 26188 Washington Onyx Mining and Milling Com- PAN yap ROMerO yw Vias beeen see eee eee 2668 L Weed Mae Wiel beta-catenin s aes oe ee wee 26826 Wallcox el OSep Hise asc eee e e aee 26829 Wyandance Brick and Terra-Cotta Com- DAN Yee News VOL eee sale aera = eee ae 26508 DEPARTMENT XVII. GEOLOGY. Abbott wr Wil cen. sce see eciees e eee eee 27085 Arizona Onyx Company, Chicago.......--- 26530 Acid enreiday Mins saVies Crete ae ee 26566 Biederman CO. We: ae soc seecewesean ae 26781 Blau; 4H. < S23 sens sso oon a scien s sae eee 26216 BUINS Oran eases esos eee ee 26214, 26557 Wameron ds esa Se te a ee eee cern 26559 Cardenstin CBZ. so acresien sane tee eee eee 26457 (ieGhanileraWallliamAts tors =e 26939 Clatlin« Gj Kessoa a ee = eee eee 25960 Cornell iUniversity: lthacay Ne Gece see eee 26659 Crosby whe aoe e eee 26869, 26889, 27015, 27065 Crosby.erotawi Oseseee- 26288, 26289, 28290, 26291 26292, 26293, 26294, 26295, 26296, 26297 26298, 26299, 26300, 26301, 26302, 26303 26304, 26305, 26596, 26603, 26650, 26884 Daniel’ Profs eo. = eis. eee pesca cee 27131 Deseret Museum, Salt Lake City, Utah.26768, 27037 Dw Boiss isl ee eer Se oeieiee acces ee Cree ees 27046 Durden Hessen seen ee te eee eee 26588 IOAN (Cio Ie (0) Sop oecceoscadsanotsen- 26861 WWanssiWis bec sONeee ee ear eee ee ee 25951 Karrine tony Os Ceaane eee ecee as 26660, 27079 HishiCommission Ono eee 26375, 27376 | WORNESIGR, INOW E = ss5casdesogass5arc8escc 26411 Brazanr Ge Biss. .sssseceensersecoeeeereee 26569 Mredidlidi.0P) ces ches Saceeiat= eee oes 26317 Gabelli; Reoas a semeciee cece rece aes 26684 Gian ten: SERS © S225 serine sincerest 26154, 26794 Grabill Chicago Portrait and View Com- MIN ddcccesadsnossesSeacctsdosobcatosece 26155 WGTeen Wi Sitacsas seeeeecee ate n eee ces 26078 GutlineOssraneeen eee eee 20&56, 26899 Haines, Benjamim\ss eee sess eee 26128, 26306 Hanns; \Gobeetisecacce see eee oes 26857, 26883 utcheock, Romine eese eee eae 26509, 27118 FLollistshe Seacesee see sata jatajatolalatevsinis ce Yara 26058 Howell] (RE 622 ere seer eee 26127, 26938 Interior Department. U.S. Geological Sur- VON ae.tic tee soe Ce ener ae terete 26916 JALVAS JRE S552. Cee eee cee ee ays eepee pe 26894 Johnston hsb ieeeee ee ect eee cee ces eos 26130 TOMMS TONGA S PH ewe eee ee 26055, 26132 VOneS ed isaac Re eee eee ee eee 26568 Kemp} Profdiihiesescomtne rece ease concer 26378 Miller Charless)D=smceo seca aaeee meee ere 27025 Rittenhouse, L. C..-..-- ISAs Sree 26937 Spencer, Emmons..-...---.---- feGaooecesane 27089 Stephens, bls sss-eesea-eeeseseeateeeman tine 26805 University of Upsdale.-....--------------- 26148 Von Mueller, Baron Ferd .....-...--------- 26951 NOOdward shan! Wisse serene eee teil 26918 DEPARTMENT XV. RECENT PLANTS. Bendire, Capt. C. E., U.S. Army. -..------ 27141 IDE, a ergot Fee heeaoooeoes See aeeeee ene 27131 Deyn MMe soescsoesooodasossesmacoss 26495 Kish Commissions Wes cessoeeseeee sae ete 26822 OMMS OTHE lee eemserie erie cin se secerraiaree 25978 ILAGEITNGMNG) Secs sadsocoacossecosanccode 26208 | Mearns, Dr. E. A., U. S. Atmy..-.--- 26499, 26608 | AMD OpVeyh Meroe ese eee sears cele 26742 | Smithsonian Institution. U. S. National MNS OUI ees eases essen seemicleeiela 26207 26956 SMG HN MN. AOE Hen cebe edocs csscosbssceors 27045 Stenger MONS ISA NeW eo eos ceecusonc sosoce 26519 Von Mueller, Baron Ferd...--.- 26034, 26120, 26951 DEPARTMENT XVI MINERALS. PAM eri wile ae sec Gero en. ie eee ientoelemios 26904 American Turquoise Company, New Ycrk (Chit soe atee nese Ses SA eRpeBenoasEacreersenan 26804 | LEM ay (Gis 1 Pscseacemcdouecanusedsmonacossbes 26014 IS AARVES EI Boel ae Ec SSceesoe ACemoOneoSa So 26015 Bements Cs Seo2.csecstses seen sacs as 26824 SOMO Ue)! vous oss sri eeis Stee yee eee ie stage arere 26281 arden casey ae ee erent. 26503 Ghanlers \WalliampA's tonssaaseseee sae = 26939 )imrs biewd iC sccsentincancesenioe bases eines: 27043 Glarke VProtoB: Wisi asee- cece aetieeenie .... 26604 GCrosbyce nolo. Oszeeemecseeaascceeons es 26626 Danie eb rotep by sess cer oe ee oe ee ie 97131 We Stbuves- Vina Charlese assess ase cee oe 26089 | SINC 10he; BR Sos sSespe suse sdodsaresuocer 26514 sia ses Gre en On COs eel ee eee eae 26540, 26586 Foote, Dr. A. E...: 26144, 26539, 26833, 26834, 26875 : 26876 | PRU AZ eure Crise crac eects ee epee Mae Sa bie eile 26569 | MEO LOWY Uh eee rests soci see ce ccm 27034 JEON MOC Oia ose seokosaconsne pene ee 26057 WINGO ind Veseees Seeece 26529, 26713, 26827, 26828 PN Dab Cable lore ae etste tore anne ceca are 26350 Igelstrom, Lo J=--.---: Saude Joaousooensnane 26431 | Interior Department. U.S. Geological Sur- vey ....-.- 25894, 25986, 26016, 26088, 26146, 26280 26435, 26436, 26437, 26456, 26490, 26584, 26587 BUAGKINAN Weave sos Neve coke Sa oe se romain ini 26432 Ieee (CS Is Seong ae osee anaes ae 26575 TRUE ed Os rch Ok aye i oe ae ay 26143 SVT) le arse eee, 1S ences See te 26147 ILemysenttl a 18 inh \yegeas one ea Ganeaaaseaacet 26363 ILS GIRRS SING) ne atcric ESSE ee ROne Seen eee 27105 MimiGheAcademiG, Bavariaess--c.- 2-5-2. - 26267 INevilomeiign sNVin Goes sno ces ise see cascmecce 25917 INGOT TELA OYE 3 8s NG ie ee ee 26920 Remfeldislnot: Oeclasascssennsce ne joseaes= 2 26040 PowellaMaledaWieeoetatcs sons soecsesc. 25°85 282 REPORT OF NATIONAL MUSEUM, 1893. Accession numbev. Accession number. GE aid 0) OR ae See Ie Stace errors 96921. | Rothrock, D. Miess22- 2-3-2 eee 26172: ISHiIVA (Cad eee Pees ee ane So seeer ree 26617) 1) Rumple;. WW). encs-2 ese eee 56787 bay hela hee epgocoeae PB eaer onan bcoe 26363 Sal Mountain Ashestos Company, Chicago. 27042 ead B1Gswlie \Wes nc ace Soe cease 96383. 267e8,27016, | Sehulz Dr eAniiellsee ses ee see aera seen se 26546 TET OO RMee e ph r ane ee Ake YE594- | Scott; Wa We csacie eee eee ee 26968 LA OnITy TPR et UB aes, ecb seenoeoroEaes 26356, 26611 | Smithsonian Institutzon. U. 8. National iG DGma Gl JAG) oS Aansecends cs cqedmecacwessg= 26969 Museum... 26101, 26133, 26134, 26215, 26260, 26344 Mearns, Dr: &.-A., U.S. Army -------------- DAI Pa eV MOTOS I Nee 58 Pee eSoneaseoecceonooseooec 26085 Merit Grek soe ee cis neice se ae weenie eres 96319. | “Stanton, AL Wise as. sete eeeeeeeeeeee 26176 TIGHT ETN 8 LCS Ra Ae ee ae nee cree eee 26487 I StGU dard ys ool vee ease eee a eet reer 26129 IGSiRRONE TG, 18 oe eee eoosasdacseeesose ads 26387 The Colorado Turkey Hone Stone Com- Lilies: Olid (ER daeeeseas aber semnebeae voole 26791 pany, Den Vers. ssa.e- soe eee see eee 26560: Me CROKOMMEN bles sei sas ee aera 26128 |, The:Grottoes' Company, -=2-----2-=- -2.-2-=- 26481 Munich Academy, Bavaria.,...-.-..------- 2G27G) | Svea em any eee teen eae ere ence eee 26924 ING, WANE es oo conc esceeees comme 27109 | Won Streeruwitz, W. H...2.2-.-.--.-- 25999, 26080: Ozark Onyx Company, St. Louis, Mo...---. 26888 Ward's Natural Science Establishment, JP, 10h) See eeesnee saps eno s6ccnelescosa= 26372 ROGHeESten Nimes seeeeiaee 26853, 26885, 26895. Pearson, Oy JP 2 f-Secaec tose a eee eres 26673. Washington Onyx .Mining and Milling IPSN Ae UO WE Sos see ocancaccecenassacce 26033 | Company, Pomeroy, Wash -....----.--..- 26681 leidayy Se Soeescoceccemedtaacasesoseceda sce PASUBIY |) WV MUG TNE Woe cae sage sesreee soccdsessseas 25+ 26131 Rowell, Sali S252. ce sao ece seee eee soe = 27091 BWalliam's. ii Wisciasecscm- ete a. on ee eee 26307 IPGLiNAN od). CUT Y= sea ane ee aa eee ee 2053s) sWwOOcian Ce eATLb er tiee ree oer ee 27132 RaAgharason, Cliffordss-—- ose ae ee eee ee ee PEYPSS | MsstalhE ME mI sookacdeasseosssees 26749, 26786 ichmond!| Co W.s...- seca eee eee nes 96160." | “Wiunston Carll 23.524 222-9 nee ee eee 27098. NOTE A: ACCESSIONS RECEIVED IN THE MUSEUM DURING 1890-1861, FOR EXHIBITION AT THE WORLD’S COLUMBIAN EXPOSITION. Bratu, J.W. (Philadelphia, Pa.). Collection of gems and minerals. 24360. Fifteen specimens of intaglos of bloodstone, agate, carnelian, sardonyx, and labradorite. 24365. BRIMLEY, H. H. & C. S. (Raleigh, N. C.). Six mammal skins. 24271. ENGLISH, G. L., & Co. (New York City). Thirty-eight minerals. 24375. Foorr, Dr. A. E. (Pmladelphia, Pa.). Thirty-one minerals. 24370. Twenty-eight munerals, 24434. PENNYPACKER, C. II. (West Chester, Pa.). Seven minerals. 24441. Smitu, Dr. HuGu M. (U.S. Fish Commission). Bat. 24284. Tirrany & Co. (New York City). Collection of gems. 24359. WIrTKUGEL, Ertcn (Honduras). Twelve mammals from Honduras. 24594. WorTHEN, C. K. (Warsaw, Ill.). Fourteen mammal skims. 24265. NOMEOE* ACCESSIONS RECEIVED IN THE MUSEUM DURING 1891-1892, FOR EXHIBITION AT THE WORLD'S COLUMBIAN EXPOSITION. ARMSTRONG, F. B. (Brownsville, Tex.). Two skins of chachalaca, Ortalis vetula maccali. 25866. Braru, J. W. (Pliladelphia, Pa.). Twenty-two cut stones consisting of agatized wood, smoky quartz, amethyst, garnet, sapphire, green and white onyx cameo, moonstone, fowlerite, sphalerite, and oligoclase, and a specimen of spinel in cal- cite from Ogdensburg, N. J. 25089. ; Bovucarp, A. (London, W. C., England), Eleven skins of birds of paradise, repre- senting IL species. 21946. Twenty-four specimens, representing 24 species of hummuing-birds’ skins. 25047. Three specimens, representing 3 species of birds of paradise from New Guimea. 25458. INDEX TO ACCESSION LIST. 283 DEYROLLE, EMILE (Paris, France). Four mounted mammals. 24819. Downs, A. C. (Realitos, Duval County, Tex.). Armadillo (Tatusia novemeincta). 25549. ENGLISH, G. L., & Co. (New York City). Eleven specimens of axinite, marcasite, fluorite, and calcite from various localities. 24975. Calcite ball from Japan and a specimen of stibnite from the same locality. 25238. Malachite slab from Siberia. 25420. Minerals from various localities, consisting of smoky quartz, chloropal, dolomite, pyrite, lJaumontite, inesite, titanite, azurite, native sulphur, rhodochrosite, minium, cassiterite, amber, ilvaite, and others. 25849. Foortr, Dr. A. E. (Philadelphia, Pa. ) puermen et matlockite and one of phosgenite from Cromford, Derbyshire, England. 25204. Eight specimens of rocks and other geological material. 25620. Minerals from various localities, consisting of ealeite, pyrite, psilomelane, and barite. 25850. Foster Bros. (Boston, Mass ). Picture of Swiss glacier. 25659. FraAzZAR, M. ABBotr (Boston, Mass.). Skin of white ibis, Guara alba from Browns- ville, Tex. 24936. GERRARD, E. (London, England). Ten skins and an alcoholic specimen of mammal from Central and South America. 24669. GOLDEN, R. A. (Washington, D. C.). “Specimen of greater snow goose, Chen hyper- borea nivalis in the flesh. 25459. Two prairie-chickens, Tympanuchus ameri- canus 1n the flesh. 25763. ~ HAMLIN, Dr. A. C. (Bangor, Me.). Specimen of cut tourmaline from Paris, Me., and 2 cut zireons from Ceylon. 24926. HARRISON, Hon. Benjamin (Executive Mansion). Armadillo ( Tatusia novemcineta), from Breckenridge, Tex., collected by Mr. R. R. Skage. 24887. Hasprouck, E. M. (Washington, D, C.).° Skinof Carolina parrakeet, Cornurus car- olinensis from Florida, 25109. Howe t, E. E. (Washington, D. C.). Three bird skins from Australia, consisting of alyre-bird, Menura superba (female), and male an | female specimens of satin bower-bird, Ptilonorhynchus violaceus. 25217. Nine specimens of minerals, con- sisting of scheelite, willemite, tschermigite, hyalite, cryolite, réttisite, evansite, and orpiment. 25262. Minerals from various localities, consisting of manganite, labradorite, calcite, chalcopyrite, pyrite, tourmaline, and jasper. 25263. Two specimens of agalmatolithe carving from China. 25467. KNOWLTON, W. J. (Boston, Mass.). Ornamental stones. 24545. Four specimens of tourmaline from Siberia and 2 cut specimens of zircon from Ceylon. 24929. Lames, T. F. (Portland, Me.). Ten cut specimens of tourmaline from Auburn, Me., and a cut topaz from Chatham, N. H. 24927. Morrison, Prof. J. H. (Luray, Va.). Cave materials from Luray Caverns. 25517. MUtLierR, Dr. AuGustT (Berlin, Germany). Skin of owl-monkey, Nyctipithecus aza- ew, Skin of cavy (Diasprocta aguti), skin of Honduras hare, Lepus brazilien- sis, 24780. NELSON, E. W. (Bishop Creek, Cal.), through Dr. C. Hart Merriam. Ten skins of mountain sheep eu the high desert mountains near Death Valley. 24706. PALMER, WiLtiAM (U.S. Nationa l1Museum). Bat (Vespertilio gryphus lucifugus) in the Te 24571. Pratt, Capt. R. H., U. 8. A. (Hampton institute, Hampton, Va.). Collection of ethnological objects obtained from the North American Indians. 25516. RICHARDSON, JENNESS (American Museum of Natural History, New York City). Four skins of passenger-pigeon, Ectopistes migratorius from Indian Territory. 24849. Eight specimens of Carolina parrakeet, Cornurus carolinensis from Florida. 24826. RUDINGER, Louis (D’Hanis, Tex.). Little striped skunk, Spilogale sp. from Texas. 24570. SansoM and MARTIN (Uvalde, Tex.). Civet cat, Dassauscus astuta. 25548. 284 REPORT OF NATIONAL MUSEUM, 1893. Scuiitrer, W. (Halle, Germany). Twelve mammal skins. 24655. Scumip, EpwarRDS. (Washington, D.C.). Twopeafowls (Pavo cristatus) in the flesh. 25759. Seven prairie-chickens, Tympanuchus americanus in the flesh. 25762. Smiru, WILLIAM G. (Loveland, Colo.). Four mammal skins from Colorado, 25473. Pouched-gopher, Geomys bursarius. 25550. Beaver (Castor canadensis), prairie- hare, Lepus campestris, Rocky Mountain chipmunk, Tamias quadrivittatus, lit- tle striped skunk, Spilogale gracilis. 25555. Striped spermophile, Spermophilus tridicemlineatus. 25597. Two dusky grouse, Dendragapus obscurus. 25830. White-tailed ptarmigan, Lagopus leucurus. 25867. SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION, U.S. National Museum. Volcanic materials from the vicinity of Flagstaff, Ariz., collected by Mr. G. P. Merrill. 25231. Collection of voleantic rocks and stalactites from Organ Mountain and Bennett Stevenson Mine, New Mexico, collected by Mr.G.P. Merrill. 25384. Life-sized figure of a girl belonging to one of the mountain tribes of northwest Africa, m native cos- tume, obtained by Dr. G. Brown Goode. 25882. Also terra-cotta wreath. SOULE, GEORGE (Billings, Mont.). Male rocky-mountain sheep, Ovis canadensis. 25298. SouTHwick & CRITCHLEY (Providence, R. I.). Fox-squirrel, Sciurus niger niger, from Florida. 24606. Skin of Peale’s egret, Ardea pealei, from Andros Island, Bahamas. 24957. Three specimens of North American game birds, represent- ing 3species. 25833. Stuart, R. C. (Tampa, Fla.). Mounted 1vory-billed woodpecker, Campephilus prin- cipals from Florida, 25429. TIFFANY & Co. (New York City). Carved amler for the gem exhibit. 25114. WaRpD’s NATURAL SCIENCE ESTABLISHMENT (Rochester, N. Y.). Skin of Alces machlis. 24654. Specimen of fluorite from Cumberland, England, and 8 cut specimens of minerals from various localities. 24779. Wartrous, B. P. (Washington, D. C.).. Four wild turkeys, Meleagris gallopavo in the flesh from Virginia, 25026. Purchased. W.C. E. Wayne, ARTHUR T. (Old Town, Fla.). Skin of swallow-tailed kite, EHlanoides for- ficatus. 25861. WoopWwaARD, CHARLES L. (New York City). Three cartoons of Indian chiefs painted by George Catlin. 25777. Purchased. W.C. E. WORTHEN, CHARLES K. (Warsaw, IIl.). Lynx-skin from Kansas. 25509. Purchased. Wife (Cig We ———en APPENDIX VII. BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE U.S. NATIONAL MUSEUM FOR THE FISCAL YEAR ENDING JUNE 30, 1893. PUBLICATIONS OF THE MUSEUM. ANNUAL REPORT. Annual Report | of the | Board of Regents | of the | Smithsonian In- stitution, | showing | the Operations, Expenditures, and Cond1- tion | of the Institution | for the | year ending June 30, 1890. | — | Report | of the | National Museum. | — | Washington: | Government Printing Office. | 1891. 8vo., pp. XVUI+811. Plates 1-CLx111; figures 1-99. PROCEEDINGS. Smithsonian Institution. | United States National Museum. | — | Proceedings | of the | United States National Museum. | — | Volume xiv. | 1891. | — | Published under the direction of the Smithsonian Institution. | — | Washington: | Government Print- ing Office. | 1892. 8vo., pp. VI+750. Plates I-Xxx1Vv; figures 1-3. The papers in this volume comprise Nos. 842-886, all of which were pub- lished separately during the fiscal year ending June 30, 1892. The dates of publication are given on page vi of the volume. The papers included between Nos. 889-915, in Volume xv, and between Nos. 919-926 (excepting No, 921), and also an advance edition of No. 944, of Volume Xvi, were published separately during the year, and distributed to a limited number of specialists at home and abroad. BULLETIN. Smithsonian Institution. | United States National Museum. | — | Directions for collecting and | preserving insects. | By | C. V. Riley, M. A., PH. D., | Honorary Curator of the Department of Insects, U. S. National Museum. | — | Part F of Bulletin of the United States National Museum, No. 39 | (with one plate). | — | Washington: | Government Printing Office. | 1892. | 8vo., pp. [1]-[147]. Plate 1, figures 1-139. Smithsonian Institution. | United States National Museum, | -— | Instructions for collecting mollusks, | and other useful hints 285 286 REPORT OF NATIONAL MUSEUM, 1893. for | the conchologist. | By | William H. Dall, | Honorary Cu- rator of the Department of Mollusks, U.S. National Museum. | | — | Part G of Bulletin of the United States National Mn- setin, No. 39. | — | Washington: | Government Printing Office. | £392." | 8vo., pp. [1]-[56]. Figures 1-8. Parts A-E, inclusive, of Bulletin 39, were published during the preceding fiscal year. Smithsonian Institution, | United States National Museum. | — | Bulletin | of the | United States National Museum. | No. 40. | 3ibliographies of American Naturalists: | IV. The published writings of George Newbold Lawrence, 1844-1891. | By j L. S. Foster. | — | Washington: | Government Printing Office. | 1392. | 8vo., pp. XI+124. Frontispiece. SPECIAL BULLETIN. Smithsonian Institution. | United States National Museum. | Special Bulletin No. 1. | Life Histories | of | North American Birds | with special reference to | their breeding habits and eggs, | with | twelve lithographic plates. | By | Charles Bendire, Captain, U. Ss. Army (Retired), | Honorary Curator of the Department of Odlogy, U.S. National Museum, | Member of the Amerig¢an Orni. thologists’ Union. | -— | Washington: | Government Printing Office, | 1892. dvo., pp. vii+446. Twelve plates. PAPERS BY OFFICERS OF THE NATIONAL MUSEUM AND OTHER INVES- TIGATORS WHOSE WRITINGS ARE BASED DIRECTLY OR INDIRECTLY ON THE COLLECTIONS OF THE MUSEUM. ALPHABETICAL LIST OF NAMES. Adler, Cyrus, Librarian, Smithsonian Institution; Assistant Curator, Oriental Antiquities and Religious Ceremonial, U.S. National Museum. Allen, Harrison, 1933 Chestnut street, Philadelphia, Pa. Allen, J. A., American Museum of Natural History, New York City. Baur, G., University of Chicago, Chicago, I. sean, Barton A., Assistant Curator, Department of Fishes, U. 8S. National Museum. Bean, Tarleton H., U.S. Fish Commission; Honorary Curator, Department of Fishes, U.S. National Museum. Beecher, Charles E., Yale College, New Haven, Conn. Benedict, James E., Assistant Curator, Department of Marine Invertebrates, U.S. National Museum. Bendire, Charles, U. 8S. Army, Honorary Curator, Department of Birds’ Eggs, U.S. National Museum. Bigelow, R. P., Massachusetts Institute of Technology, Boston, Mass. Blatchley, W.S., Terre Hante, Ind. Bolles, T. Dix, U. S. Navy. BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE U. S. NATIONAL MUSEUM, 1893. 287 Bollman, Charles H., Indiana State University, Bloomington, Ind. Canby, William, Wilmington, Del. Carleton, M. A., Manhattan, Kans. Clark, A. Howard, Curator of Historical Collections, U.S. National Museum. Clark, J. A., U. S. Department vf Agriculture. Clarke, F. W., U. S. Geological Survey ; Honorary Curator, Department of Minerals, U.S. National Museum. Cope, E. D., 2102 Pine street, Philadelphia, Pa. Coulter, John M., Bloomington, Ind. Coville, Frederick V., Botanist, U.S. Department of Agriculture. Dall, William Healey, U. S. Geological Survey; Honorary Curator, Department of Mollusks, U.S. National Museum. Dewey, L. H., Assistant Botamist, U. 8S. Department of Agriculture. Eaton, D.C., Yale University, New Haven, Conn. Eeckfeldt, J. W., 6320 Vine street, Philadelphia, Pa. Eigenmann, Carl H., University of Indiana, Bloomington, Ind. Eihott, D.G., American Museum of Natural History, New York City. Evans, A. W., U. S. Department of Agriculture. Evermann, Barton W., U.S. Fish Commission, Washington, D. C. Fernow, B. E., Chief, Division of Forestry, U. 8S. Department of Agriculture; Ton- orary Curator, Section of Forestry, U.S. National Museum. Fisher, E. M., Lake Forest, Il. Flint, James M., M.D., U.S. Navy. Goits, A., Linkaping, Sweden. Goode, G. Brown, Assistant Secretary, Smithsonian Institution, in charge of U.S. National Museum. Harris, Gilbert Dennison, Russellville, Ark. Hasbrouck, Edwin M., 1610 Fifteenth street N. W., Washington, D.C. Haupt, Paul, Johns Hopkins University; Honorary Curator, Oriental Antiquities and Religious Ceremonial, U. 8. National Museum. Fay, ©. P., Terre Haute, Ind. Hill, Robert T., Washington, D.C. Hitcheock, Romyn, 3858 Vincennes avenue, Chicago, II]. Holm. Theodor, U. 8. Department of Agriculture. Holmes, William H., Bureau of Ethnology; Honorary Curator, Department of Amer- ican Aborigimal Pottery, U.S. National Museum. Holzinger, Y M., U. 8. Department of Agriculture. Hough, Walter, U.S. National Museum. Howard, Leland O., Assistant Entomologist, U.S. Department of Agriculture. Jordan, David Starr, President, Leland Stanford Junior University, Palo Alto, Cal. Keeler, Charles A., California Academy of Natural Sciences, San Francisco, Cal. Kirsch, Philip H., Columbia City, Ind. Knowlton, F. H., Assistant Curator, Department of Fossil Plants, U. 8S. National Museum. Koehler, 8. R., Curator, Section of Graphic Arts, U.S. National Museum. Lindgren, Waldeman, U.S. Geological Survey, Washington, D.C. Linton, Edwin, Washington and Jefferson College, Washington, Pa. Lueas, F. A., Assistant Curator, Department of Comparative Anatomy, U.S. National Museum. Ludwig, Hubert. Marsh, O C., Yale College, New Haven, Conn.; Honorary Curator, Department of Vertebrate Fossils, U. 8S. National Museum. Mason, Otis T., Curator, Department of Ethnology, U.S. Nationa] Museum. Matthews, Dr. Washington, U.S. Army. Mearns, Edgar A., U.S. Army, Fort Clark, Tex. 288 REPORT OF NATIONAL MUSEUM, 1893. Meek, Seth E., Arkansas Industrial University, Fayetteville, Ark. Merrill, George P., Curator, Department of Geology, U.S. National Museum. Metcalf, Maynard M. Montandon, A. L., Bucarest, Roumania. Pilsbry, Henry A., Academy of Natural Science, Philadelphia, Pa. Rathbun, Mary J., Assistant, Department of Marine Invertebrates, U. S. National Museum. Rathbun, Richard, U.S. Fish Commission; Honorary Curator, Department of Marine Invertebrates, U.S. National Museum. Ridgway, Robert, Curator, Department of Birds, U.S. National Museum. Riley, Charles V., Entomologist, Department of Agriculture; Honorary Curator, Department of Insects, U.S. National Museum. Rose, J. N., U.S. Department of Agriculture. Selater, P. L., F. R.S., 6 Hanover Square, W., London, England. Seollick, J. W., U.S. National Museum. Shufeldt, R. W., M. D., Takoma Park, D.C. Simpson, Charles Torrey, U.S. National Museum. Smith, Hugh M., U.S. Fish Commission, Washington, D.C. Smith, John B., Orondo, Douglas County, Wash. ; Stanton; T. W., U.S. Geological Survey, Washington, D. C, Stearns, R. E. C., Adjunct Curator, Department of Mollusks, U.S. National Museum. Stejneger, Leonhard, Curator, Department of Reptiles and Batrachians, U.S. National Museum. Suchetet, André, Paris, France. Test, Frederick C., Aid, Department of Reptiles and Batrachians, U. 8S. National Museum. True, Frederick W., Curator, Department of Mammals, U.S. National Museum. Vasey, George, Botanist, U.S. Department of Agriculture; Honorary Curator, Depart- ment of Botany, U.S. National Museum, Verrill, A. E., Yale College, New Haven, Conn. Walcott, Charles Doolittle, U.S. Geological Survey; Honorary Curator, Department of Paleozoic Fossils, U.S. National Museum. Ward, Lester F., U. 8. Geological Survey; Honorary Curator, Department of Fossil Plants, U.S. National Museum. Watkins, J. Elfreth, Curator, Section of Transportation and Engineering, U. S. National Museum. White, Charles Abiathar, U.S. Geological Survey; Honorary Curator, Department of Mesozoic Fossils, U.S. National Museum. Williamson, Mrs. M. Burton, University, Los Angeles County, Cal. Wilson, Thomas, Curator, Department of Prehistoric Anthropology, U.S. National Museum. Woolman, A. J., Duluth, Minn. Worth, John, BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE U. S. NATIONAL MUSEUM, 1893. 289 LIST OF PAPERS. ADLER, Cyrus. Report on the Section of Oriental Antiquities in the U. 8. National Museum, 1890. Rep. Smithsonian Inst. (U.S. Nat.Mus.),1890 (1891), pp. 137-140. Note on William B. Hodgson. Proc. Am. Oriental Soc., 1892, pp. ecix-cex. Wilham B. Hodgson was the earliest Ameri can collector of Oriental manuscripts. A por- tion of his collection is now deposited in the National Museum. Christopher Columbus in Oriental literature, with’ special reference to the Hadisi Nev or Tarikh Hind Gharby. Proc. Am. Oriental Soc., 1892, pp. cex—cexi. The manuscript is accompanied by a unique | map of America, and is apparently the first description of the New World in the Turkish language. ALLEN, Harrison. family of Phyllostome bats; (2) descrip- tion of a new genus of Phyllostome bats; (3) on Temminek’s bat (Scoto- | philus Temminckii). Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., xv, Nos. 912-914, October 28, 1892, pp. 437-444. This paper is based upon Museum material. — Introduction to a monograph of the North American bats. Proce. U. S. Nat. Mus., xv1, No. 919, June 13, 1893, pp. 1-28. The monograph from which this paper was | extracted is based upon Museum material, and (1) On anew sub- | ALLEN, JoEL AsSApH—continued. | | amuch larger amount of material (over 300 speci- | mens) than had previously been brought | together. Critical notes and emendations of | a number of species are given and many de- | scriptions of first plumages. This paper is based npon Museum material. On a collection of birds from Chap- ada, Matto Grosso, Brazil, made by Mr. H. H. Smith. Part ur, Pipride to Rheide. Bull. Am. Mus. Nat. Hist., vy, No. 10, June 1893, pp. 107-128. Seventy-five species are mentioned in this paper, of which one, Pygmornis chapadensis, is described as new. Metopia galeata is treated atsome length, a series of 127 specimens taken in every month in the year showing in a very thorough manner the different stages of plum- age. Other species critically considered are Synallaxis Azare, Thamnophilus ambiguus, Thamophilus radiatus, Dysithamnus mentalis, Herpsilochmus loagirostris, Nychtidromus albi- collis Derbyanus, and Moimotus momota subru- fescens. | In regard t@ the development of the central tail feathers in the last-named species and their | denudation by the bird for purposes of per- | sonal adornment, some interesting notes are given, showing that in this species. at least, the barbs are forcibly removed by the birds themselves, in an attempt to make the feathers conform to a definite pattern. This paper is based upon Museum material. Keeler on the evolution of the colors. of North American land birds. has since been published as Bulletin 43, of the | National Museum. Notes on the genera of Vespertilio- nidie. Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., xvi, No. 920, June 13, 1893, pp. 29-31. ALLEN, JoEL AsapH. On a collection of birds from Chapada, Matto Grosso, Brazil, made by Mr. H. H. Smith. Part 1, Tyrannide. Bull. Am. Mus. Nat. Hist., 1v, No. xvut, December, 1892, pp. 331-350. (Part 1, Ocines, Ibid, ut, No. 2, September | 29, 1891, pp. 337-380.) Forty-six species are treated, special atten- tion being given to variation in size and to coloration as affected by seasonal molts, abra- sion of the feathers by age, and through general fading of the plumage. The relationships of the widely-dispersed South American Myiarechus tyrannulus, to certain closely-alhed Indian, Central American, and Mexican forms, is made the subject of a short resumé, based on H. Mis. 184, pt 2——19 West | Auk, X, No. 2, April, 1893, pp. 189-195. A critical review of Keeler’s work. entitled * Evolution of the colors of North American Land Birds,” crediting the author with origi- nahity and enthusiasm, but charging him with fallacious reasoning and arguing against pre- mature conclusions. BAUR, GeorGE. Bemerkungen iiber ver- schiedene Arten von Schildkriten Zoologischer Anzeiger, 1892, No. 389, pp. 155-159. Remarks upon various species of chelomians, | based 1m part upon material m the National Museum. | BEAN, Barton A. The New Hampshire Fish Commission, Forest and Stream, February 16, 1893, p. 142. A review of the report of the fish and game commissioners for the year ending December 1, 1892. BEAN, TARLETON HOFrrMAN. Descrip- tion of a new species of Star-gazer 290 REPORT OF NATIONAL MUSEUM, 1893. BEAN, TARLETON HOrrMaN—continued, | BENDIRE, CuHarLes—continued., (Cathetostoma albigutta) from the Gulf | Member of the American Ornitholo- of Mexico, | gists’ Union. | — | Washington: | Gov- Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., xv., No. 896, July | ernment Printing Office, | 1892. d4to, pp. 22, 1892, p 121-122. | i-vin, 1-446, pls. 1-xm, containing 185 Notes on the fishes collected in Mex- | chromolithographed figures of eggs. This book discusses of 146 0f North American species and subspecies. The wain portion of the work is devoted toan exhaustive account of ico by Prof. A. Dugeés, with descrip- tions of new species. Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., xv, No. 903, | | as the life histories of the species, mainly from August 2, 1892, pp. 283-287, pl. XLIv. ° original and recent sources with reference to —— [Ichthyological notes in Forest and breeding and migratory ranges, food, and time Stream. | Whitefish and Grayling, of incubation, and, finally, the eggs of each spe- August 4, 1892, p. 95, with illustra- cies, when known, are carefully described, and in every case the measurements given are the author’sown. ‘Theaverdge measurements have been obtained with great care from large series tions. The Rainbow trout, August 11, 1892, p. 119, with illustrations. The Red-throated trout, August 18, 1892, of specimens, in some cases being the result of jo wet with illustrations. The Dolly | overtwo hundred separate measurements. The Varden trout, September 22, 1892, p. plates accompanying the volume are from draw- 248, with illustrations. The Channel | SS Wy CW by OG Eas ; : si f The following families are treated in the pres- catfish, December 1, 1892, p. 471, with aatcolumen illustrations. California fish culture Family Tetraonidie, species and subspecies 38 and protection, December 22, 1892, p. Family Phasianide, speciesand subspecies 2 538, with illustrations. Brook-trout Family Cracidss, subspecies:--:-5--...---- 1 | Family Columbide, species and subspecies 15 | Family Cathartid, species and subspecies 3 Family Falconid, species and subspecies. 51 deformities, December 29, 1892, p. 562, with illustrations. The*sAquarium at the World’s Fair (editorial), February | Family Strigidz, species....---.--.-...--- 1 23, 1893, p. 155. The Lampreys, May Family Bubonide, species and subspecies. 35 4, 1895, p. 387, with illustrations. Published also in the series of Smithsonian = : Contmbutions to Knowledge (Vol. xxviii). — The Fishes of Pennsylvania. Se ( ) E : — Description of a new Prairie Hen, Rep. Penna. Fish Com., 1889-90-91 (Harris pt mn burg, 1893). Appendix, pp. I-vit, 1-149, Forest and Stream, XL, No, 20, May 18, 1893, pls. 1-25. p. 425. Brief diagnosis and listof specimens of Tym- panuchus Attwatert, Bendire (Southern Prairie * Hen) from Arkansas County, Texas. — Report on the Department of Fishes in the U. S. National Museum, 1890. Rep. Smithsonian Inst. (U.S, Nat. Mus.), 1890 (1891), pp. 205-209. Report on the Department of Birds’ " Eggs in the U. S. National Museum, BEECHER, CHARLES E. Revision of the 1890. fanilies of loop-bearing Brachi é EES oroon eee on scuopod x Rep. Smithsonian Inst.(U.S. Nat. Mus.), The development of Terebratalina obso- 1890 (1891), pp. 199-200 leta, Dall. Trans. Conn. Acad. Sei., 1X, May, 1898, pp. 376-399, pls. I-I11. BENEDICT, James E. Corystoid crabs of the genera Telmessus and Erimacrus. The material upon which these important Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus., xv, No. 900, August papers were partly based was supplied by the | 4,1892, pp. 223-230, pls. xxv-xxvil. National Museum from dredgings of the | Three species are described and figured, one steamer Albatross. of which, 7. Isenbeckii, 1s placed in anew genus, SRT Sere eat: b P| EBrimacrus. BENDIRE, CHARLES. Smithsonian Insti- pi tution. | United States National Mu- BIGELOW, R. P. Preliminary notes on seum. | Special Bulletin No. 1. | Life the Stomatopoda of the Albatross col- Histories | of | North American Birds | lections, and on other specimens in with special reference to | their breed- | the National Museum. ing habits and eges, | with | twelve Johns Hopkins Univ. Cire., Xu, No. 106, pp. 100-102. The new species described are Gonodactylus lithographic plates. | By | Charles Ben- dire, Captain, U. S. Army, (Retired 5 : . H l : : ay (k i )s | spinosus, G, lavanensis, Pseudosquilla imega- 8 Curator of the Depariment | lophthalma, Squilla quadridens, S. mantoridea. of Odlogy, U.S. National Museum, | | — S. aculeata, S. intermedia, and S. rugosa. BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE U. BLATCHLEY, W.S. Ona cvllection of batrachians and reptiles from Mount | Orizaba, Mexico, with descriptions of two new species. Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., xvi, No. 922, June 13, 1893, pp. 37-42. This paper is based upon Museum material. BOLLES, THomas DIx. in Alaska. Chinese relics Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus., xv, No. 899, August 4 1892, p. 221, pl. XXIV. This paper is based upon Museum material. BOLLMAN, CHarRLES Harvey. A fe- | view of the Centrarchide or fresh- | water sunfisbes of North America. | This paper 1s based upon Museum material. CANBY, WILLIAM. (See under J. N. ROSE.) CARLTON, M. A. Observations on the | plants of Oklahoma Territory and adjacent districts. | Contrib. U. S. Nat. Herbarium, 1, Decem- ber. 1892, pp. 220-2382. Some general observations upon the flora of | Oklahoma and the adjacent region. This paper is based partly on Museum material. CLARK, A. Wowarp. Report on the his- | torical collections in the U. 8. National | Museum, 1890. | Rep. Smithsonian Inst. (U.S. Nat. Mus.), 1890 (1891), pp. 141-145. CLARK JOSEPHINE A. alphabetical index of new species of North American phanerogams and pteridophytes published in 1891. Contrib. U. S. Nat. Herbarium ber, 1892, pp. 151-188. CLARKE, Frank W. Note on the con- stitution of Ptilolite and Mordenite. Systematic and I, Septem- Am. Journ. Sci., XLIV, August, 1892, pp. 101-102. — Letter on the name of the element Columbium. Journ. of Analyt.and Appl. Chem., v1, Octo- | ber, 1892, p. 582, — The constitution of the Lithia Micas. Journ. Am. Chem. Soc., xv, No.5, May, 1893, pp. 245-250. Report of work done in the Division of Chenustry and Physics mainly dur- | ing the fiscal year 1890-91. Bull. U.S. Geol. Surv., No. 90, 1892, pp. 1-77. | i S. NATIONAL MUSEUM, 1893. | CLARKE, F. W. COPE, Edward D. | COVILLE, 291 Report on the Depart- ment of Minerals in the U. S. National Museuin, 1890. Rep. Smithsonian Inst. (U.S. 1890 (1891), pp. 241-242. Nat. Mus.), A synopsis of the Teid genus Cnemidophorus. Trans. Am. Philosoph. Soc., Xvi, Pt. 1, pp. 27-52, pls. VI-XIII. Based chiefly on Museum material. | COULTER, Jonn M. (See under J. N. Rose.) FREDERICK VERNON. The Panamint Indians of California. Am. Anthropologist, V,Oct., 1892, pp. 351-361. Principally devoted to an account of the native plants used by these Indians. —— The rediscovery of Juncus Cooperi. Buil. Torrey Botan. Club, X1x, October, 1892, pp. 309-311. An account of the discovery of this plant in the Death Valley, after a period of more than twenty years since the collection of the type specimen. DALL, notes. WILLIAM HALEY. General Nautilus, vi, No. 4, August, 1892, p. 48. Calls attention to the continuity and con- formability of the Wallala and Chico beds at La Jolla, San Diego, Cal., and adds several notes on mollusks. | —— Contributions to the Tertiary fauna of Florida, with especial reference to the Miocene silex beds of Tampa and the Pliocene beds of the Caloosahatchie River. Pt. 1, Streptodont and other Gastropods, coneluded, Trans. Wagner Free Inst. Sci., Phila., 11, Pt. 11, December, 1892, pp. 201-473, pls. XML XXII, and a geological map of Florida. This second part is prefaced by an introduc- tory note on the marine Pliocene beds of the Carolinas, in which itis shown that true Plio- cene strata occur on the Waccamaw River, South Carolina, and the Neuse River, North Carolina, which are respectively named by the author the Waccamaw and the Croatan beds. In the descriptive text which follows the fol- lowing new genera and species are described and figured: Bulla attenuata, Utriculus vagina- tus, Drillia myrmecoén, D. hoplophorus, D. aphanitoma, and var. oxia; D. schismatica, D. sigela, Glyphostoma Johnsoni, Daphnella elata, Cancellaria rotunda, C. sericea, Marginella eu- lima, M. onchidella, Volutella dacria, Aurinia dubia var. triplicata, Caricella podagrina, Perplicaria perplexa, Fasciolaria acuta (Em- mons), I’. elegans (Emmons), Glyptostyla, 1.9., G. panamensis, Fusus quinquespinus, Celatoco- 292 DALL, WiLt1aAM HEALEY—continued. nus nix, Ilyanassa schizopyga, I. isogramma, | Nassa Johnsoni, Columbella styliola, Pteropur pura (Jouss. em.) subg., Trophon engonatus Rapana tampaénsis, Opalia De-Bouryi, Scala Stearnsii, Syrnola caloosaénsis, Syynola attenu- ata, Ondina fragilis, Turbonilla var. obsoleta, T. chipolana, T. protracta, Cassis (Phalium) globosum, C. Aldrichi, Strombus chipolanus, Trifoiis mitella, Cerithiopsis floridana, C. scari- | fhus, Bittium chipolanum, aud var. Burnsti, B. permutabile, B. Cossmanni, B. Annette, B. po- dagrinum, B. priscum, B. boiplex, B. ceritht- dioides, B. Adamsi, Cerithium caloosaense, C. ocalanum, C. Burnsii, C. platyneura, C. flori- danum, C. eallisoma, C. glaphyrea, and var. litharium, C. coccodes, C. chipolanum, Pota- mides hillsboroénsis (Hp.). P. transecta, P. acu- tus, Clava chipolana, C. caloosaensis, Alaba chipolana, Modulus Willeoxii, MM. compactus, Caecum compactum, C. coronellum, C. carolinia- num, C. tortile, C. ibex, Meioceras cingulatum, Serpulorbis tenera, S. balliste, Turritella mar | tinensis, T. mixta, T. tripartita, T. megalobasis, T. terebriformis, T. chipolana, T. Holinesii, T. subgrundifera, T. var. tensa. Tuba acutissima; Solarium new sections, Solariaxis, Fatulaxis, Stellaxis, Solarium; Solarium Cossmannii, 8. alabamense, S. periscelidum, S. Aldrichi, 8. Leanum, 8S. vicksburgense, S. newtonense, S. am- phitermum, S. Johnsoni,S. textilinum,; Discohelix new section Discosolis; D. retifera, Hydrobia amnicoloides (Pilsbry), H. umbélicata (Pilsbry). IT. mobiliana Dall, Gnathodon Johnsoni, Amni- cola var. convexa (Pillsbry), 4. omphalotrepis (Pilsbry); Rissoa lipeus Dall, I. athymo rhyssa, R.gerea and var. minor, R. callistro- phia, I. microcharia; Tissoina Johnsoni, R. chipolana, Adeorbis strigillatus, A. Holmesii, A. Leai, Crucibulum var. chipolanum, Amal- thea Willeoxti, Xenophora textilina, X. lapi- | Serens (Whitfield), X. conica Dall, Natica alti- | calloca, N. floridana, Polynices internus (Say) P. rugifera, Ampullina Fischeri, A. solidula, Amauropsis Burnsti, Sigaretus chipolanus, 8. multiplicatus, S. Conradii, S. carolinensis, Turbo rhectogrammicus, Astralium chipolanum, A. preenrsor, Collonia elegantula, C. radiata, C. chipolana, C. claibornensis, Chlorostoma lima- tum, Gibbula ainericana, Calliostoma elimina- tum, C. basicum, C. Conradianum, C. metrium, C. Willeoxianum, C. permagnuin, C. alumin- ium, C. grammaticum, C. exile, C. Wagneri, C. apheiium, C. erosum, C. Harrisii, C. eyclus, C. limulum, C. ceramicum, Margarita tampaénsis, Solaviclla lowisiana, S. turritella, Liotia co- ronata, L. milium, L. perarmata, L. agenea, T. caloosaense, T. chipo- lanum, T. opsitelotus, F. microforatis, T. steira- tum, T. vortex, T. collinus,T. funiculus, T. pseud- adeorbis, Cochliolepis striata (Stimpson Ms.), Cyclostrema chipolanum, Molleria duplinensis, M. minuscula; Nerita tampacnsis, Teinostoma milium, Neritina | chipolana, N. edentula, Fissuridea nucula, F. chipolana, I’. ealoosaensis, F. carditella, Emar- ginula caroliniana, BE. Pilsbryi, Vaginell chipo- REPORT OF NATIONAL MUSEUM, 1893. DALL, Witiiam HEALEY—continued. lana, Trachyodon, n.subg., T. eocenensis (Cour.), Ischnochiton tampaénsis, Dentalium Eugenii, D. oleacinum, D. caloosaense, D. prisma, D. caduloide, Cadulus floridanus, C. Burnsii. —— Note on Cytherea convera, Say. Nautilus, v1, No. 5, September, 1892, pp. 52- 53. This indicates the place of publication of Brengniart’s prior species of the same name, and concludes that Conrad’s name of C. Sayana tor the American shell should be adopted. Grand Gulf formation. Science, XX, No. 502, September 16, 1892, p-. 164, and No. 513, December 2, 1892, p. 319. These letters discuss the place and extent of the Grand Gulf formation of Hilgard in the geology of the Gulf States. | —— Determination of the dates of publi- cation of Conrad's ‘‘ Fossils of the Ter- tiary Formation” and ‘‘ Medial Ter- tiarv.” Bull. Philosoph. Soe. Wash., Xu, January, 1893, pp. 215-240. In this paper the history and dates of pub- lication of the two works referred to are dis- cussed, and many hitherto doubtful points of nomenclature conclusively settled. Additional shells from the coast of southern Brazil. Nautilus, v1, No. 10, February, 1893, pp. 109— 112. This article enumerates shells received from Dr. von Ihering and other collectors on the east coast of South America. Report on the Department of Mol- lusks in the U. S. National Museum, 1890. Rep. Smithsonian Inst. (U. S. Nat. Mus.), 1890 (1891), pp. 211-217. (See also under Mrs. M. BURTON WILLIAMSON. ) | DALL, WILLIAM HEALEY, and HARRIS, U.S. Geological Neocene. GILBERT J)ENNISON, Survey correlation papers. Bull. U. S. Geol. Surv., No. 84, Washing- ton, Government Printing Office, 1892, pp. 1-349, 43 euts, and 3 geological maps. This work summarizes our knowledge (to 1890) of the Post Eocene Tertiary of the United States, and contains a good deal of new mate- rial relative to Alaska and Florida, and an account of an hitherto unrecognized division of the Miocene in the Tertiary of the Gulf States. It forms one of a series of essays covering the Geology of the United States, prepaced for the International Geological Congress of August, 1891, at Washington, by members of the U.S. Geological Survey. BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE U. DEWEY, LysterH. The Russian thistle and other troublesome weeds in the wheat region of Minnesota and North and South Dakota. Farmer's Bull. No. 10, U. S. Dept. Agric., 1892, pp. 1-16. Popular account of the introduction of the Russian thistle into this country, and some suggestions as to the best means of extermi- nating it. Based on National Herbarium. EATON, DANIEL Capy. List of ferns from southern Patagonia. Contrib. U. S. Nat. Herbarium, 1, Septem- ber, 1892, p. 138. A list of the ferns collected by the U.S. Fish Commission Steamer Albatross, and now in the National Museum. —— List of mosses from Fuegia and Pat- agonia. Contrib. U. ber, 1892, pp. 138-139. Important notes on mosses collected by the U.S. Fish Commission Steamer Albatross, and now in the National Museum. ECKFELDT, J. W. List of lichens from southern Patagonia. Contrib. U. S. Nat. Herbarium, 1, Septem- ber, 1892, p. 142. A list of the lichens collected by the U.S. Fish Commission Steamer Albatross, and now in the National Museum. EIGHNMANN, Cart H. The Fishes of San Diego. Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus., xv, No. 897, August 4, 1892, pp. 123-178, pls. X-XVUl. This paper is based upon Museum material. Catalogue of the fresh-water fishes of Central America and southern Mex- ico. Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., xvi, No. 925, June 13, 1898, pp. 53-60. ELLIOT, DanieL GiraupD. Vieillot’s “Analyse” and Button’s “ Breve.” Auk, X, No. 2, April, 1893, pp. 184-188. Replying to Dr. Stejneger, in which, while agreeing with him in regard to the proper names to be borne by the Pittas, contends that the evidence in regard to the other question as to the priority of the first four volumes of the “Nonyeau Dictionaire” tends directly against it aud more strongly to confirm our belief that the ‘‘ Analyse” was a prior publication. On the genus Pitia, Vieillot. Auk, X, No.1, January, 18938, pp. 51-52. Shows that Pitta of Vieillot is a composite genus containing three short-tailed species. Therefore, if they are to be divided into sep- arate genera, we should have Anthocinela with * S. Nat. Herbarium, 1, Septem” | S. NATIONAL MUSEUM, 1893. 293 | ELLIOTT, D. G.—continued. A. Phayrei as its type, Pitta with P. sordida | forits type, comprising all the birds with very | short, slightly rounded rectries, and Eucichla with P.guaiana as its type, including the | species with rather elongated, pointed tails; sufficient not being known at present to estab- lish the relationships of Coracopitta. EVANS, A. W. List of liverworts from southern Patagonia. Contrib. U.S. Nat. Herbarium, 1, September, 1892, pp. 140-142. Two new species are here described and figured. This paper is based upon Museum | material. | EVERMANN, Barton W. Report onthe | establishment of fish-cultural stations in the Rocky Mountain region and the Gulf States, consisting of (1) A recon- noissance of the streams and lakes of western Montana and northwestern Wyoming, and (2) A report upon inves- tigations made in Texas in 1891. Senate Mis. Doc. No. 65, Fifty-second Con- gress, first session, pp. 1-86, and Bull. U.S. Fish Com., 1891, pp. 1-90. Description of a new sucker, Pantos- teus Jordani, from the Upper Missouri Basin. Bull. U. S. Fish, Com., 1892, pp. 31-56. This paper is based upon Museum material. FERNOW, BERNHARD EpDUARD. Report on the Section of Forestry in the U.S. National Museum, 1890. Rep. Smithsonian Inst. (U.S. Nat. Mus)., 1890 (1891), pp. 163-164. FISHER, E.M. Revision of North Amer- ican species of Hoffmanseggia. Contiib. U. S. Nat Herbariwm, 1, Septem- ber, 1892, pp. 148-150. All the North American species of Hof'mans- eggia are described. This paper is based partly upon Museum material. FLINT, JAMES MONROE. Report on the Section of Materia Medica in the U.S. National Museum, 1890. Rep. Smithsonian Inst. (U.S. Nat. Mus.), 1890 (1891), pp. 175-177. | GOES, AxeL. Reports on the dredging | operations off the west coast of Central America to the Galapagos, to the west coast of Mexico, and in the Gulf of California, in charge of Alexander Agassiz, carried on by the U. S. Fish Commission Steamer Albatross during 294 REPORT GOES, AXEL.--continued. 1891, Lieut. Commander Z. L. Tanner, U.S. Navy, commanding. III. peculiar type of arenaceous Foraminifer fromthe American tropical Pacific, Neu- sina Agassizi. Bull. Mus. Comp. Zool., XXII, December, 1892, pp. 195-198, pl. 1. Nios; This paper is based upon Museum material. GOODE, GrorGE BRowN. Report upon the condition and progress of the U. S. National Museum during the year end- ing June 30, 1890. Rep. Smithsonian Inst. (U. 1890 (1891), pp. 1-116. S. Nat. Mus.), HARRIS, GinBERT DENNISON. The Ter- tiary geology of Calvert Cliffs, Mary- land. Am. Journ. Sei., X1V, January, 1893, pp. 21-31, one map in the text. In this article the author correlates the faunal zones in the Miocene of the region, showing that there are at least three fairly distinct faune represented, in ascending order, by the Plum Point, Jones’ Wharf, and St. Mary’s horizons. These facts bad hitherto been ignored, con- fused; or their significance unrecognized. The material by which these conclusions are justi- fied now forms part of the national collection. Notes on Conrad’s ‘ Fossil Shells of la a . bl ose the Tertiary Formation.” Aim. Geologist, x1, No. 4, Apri], 1893, pp. 279-281. | Refers to the dates of some of Conrad's pub- lications. — Republication of Conrad’s ‘ Fossil Shells of the Tertiary Formation of North America.” 8vo., pp. 1-121, 20 plates and 1 map. Wash- ington, May, 1893. This is as nearly as possible an exact reprint of Conrad’s Eocene volume, with an Albertype reproduction of the original plates, and of two unpublished plates, together with an introduc- tion and index by the author. The work being | practically inaccessible and very necessary for students of the American Eocene, was re- printed under Mr. Harris's editorship. (See also under WILLIAM HEALEY DALL.) HASBROUCK, Epwin M. A presuma- | bly new fact relative to the Cedar Wax-wing (Ampelis cedrorum), with remarks upon the importance of a thorough knowledge of first plumages. Seience, XX1, No. 528, March 17, 1893, pp. 144- 145. On a | OF NATIONAL MUSEUM, 1893. HASBROUCK, Epwin M.—continned. Proves that the sealing-wax-like appendages to shafts of secondaries are, to some extent, at least, independent of age. This paper is based upon Museum material. : EV AW Par A wile tion of the eleventh tablet of the Baby- lonian Nimrod Epie and a new frag- ment of the Chaldean account of the Deluge. Proc. Am. Oriental Sve., 1893, pp. ix-xii. HAY, OLIVER PERRY. On the ejection of blood from the eyes of horned toads. Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus., xv, No. 907,Septem ber 16, 1892, pp. 375-378. The curious phenomenon recorded took place in the herpetological laboratory of the Museum. Some observations on the turtles of the genus Malaclemys. Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus., xv, No. 908, September 16, 1892, pp. 379-383. Critical notes, chiefly on Museum material. On the breeding habits, eggs, and young of certain snakes. Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus., Xv, No. 909, September 16, 1892, pp. 385-397. The entire collection upon which these notes were based was donated to the Museum by the author. — The | Batrachians and Reptiles | of the | Stateof Indiana. {| By Oliver Perry Hay, Ph. D. | Indianapolis: | B. Bur- ford, Printer and Binder | 1893. 8vo., pp 1-204, pls. I-11. Based in part upon material belonging to the National Museum. HITCHCOCK, Romyn. The ancient pit- dwellers of Yezo, Japan. Rep. Smithsonian Inst. (U. 8. Nat. Mus}, 1890 (1891), pp. 417-427, pls. LXXIHI-LXXx, figs. 64-67. —— The Ainos of Yezo, Japan. Rep. Smithsonian Inst. (U. 8. Nat. Mus.), 1890 (1891), pp. 429-502., pls. LXXXI-CXVII, figs. 68-88. Report on the Sections of Foods and Textiles in the U. S. National Museum, 1890. Rep. Smithsonian Inst. (U.S. Nat. Mus.), 1890 (1891), pp. 165-174. HOLM, Tureopor. Notes on the flowers of Anthoxanthum ordoratum L. Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., xv, No. 910, October 3, 1892, pp. 399-403, pl. XLVIII. This paper is based upon Museum material. On a modern reproduc- BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE U. 8. NATIONAL MUSEUM, 1893. 295 HOLMES, Witiiam HENRY. Gravel man and paleolithie culture. Science, Xx1, No. 520, January 20, 1893, pp. | 29-30. —— Distribution of stone implements in the tide-water country. Am. Anthropologist, V1, No.1, January, 1893, pp. 1-14, pls. I-11, figs. 1-2. Are there traces of man in the Tren- ton Gravels? Journ. Geol., 1, No. 1, January-February, 1893, pp. 15-87, figs. 1-6. — Traces of glacial man in Ohio. Journ. Geol., 1, No. 2, February-March, 1893, pp. 147-163, pl. 11, figs. 1-2. —— Vestiges of early man in Minnesota. Am. Geologist, x1, No. 4, April, 1893, pp. | 219-240, figs. 1-7. * | Report on the Department of Ameri- can Prehistoric Pottery in the U. S$. | National Museum, 1890. Rep. Smithsonian Inst. (U. S. Nat. Mus.). 1890 (1891), pp. 135-136. HOLZINGER, JouHN M. Crassipes. On Amaranthus | | Botan. Gaz., XVu, August, 1892, pp. 254- | 256, pl. 1. | A.crassipes is shown to be distinct from A. polygonoides. | —— List of plants collected by C. 8. Shel- ton and M. A. Carlton in the Indian Territory in 1891. Contrib. U.S. Nat. Herbarium, 1, December, 1892, pp. 189-219. Two new species are described and figured. This paper is based upon Museum material. —— Polygonum persigarioides, H. B. K. Botan. Gaz., XVil, September, 1892, pp. 295- 296. The discovery of Polygonum persicarioides in the United States is recorded. This paper is based upon Museum material. The systematic position of Entostho- don Bolanderi. Botan. Gaz., Xvi, November, 1892, pp. 380- 381. Reasons are given why Entosthodon Bolanderi should be referred to Funaria. This paper is based upon Museum material. HOUGH, WALTER. Rare forms of polished stone implements and their probable use. Scievce, XX1, January 6, 1893, p. 5. Describes certain prehistoric grooved stones of unknown use, measuring about 3 by 24 inches, found in Mexico and southward, corre- HOUGH, WaLrer—continued. lates them with the Polynesian bark mallets, and suggests their probable use for beating ont paper and cloth from bark. Corroborated by Dr. D. G. Brinton in Science, March 10, 1893. | —— Balances of the Peruvians and Mexi- cans. Science, XX1, January 20, 1893, p. 30. Describes balances and balance.beams from the huacos of Peru, in the Royal Archeological Museum in Madrid, and stone weights in the Mexican collection at the Columbian Histor- ical Exposition in Madrid. The Bernadou, Allen, and Jouy Korean collections in the U.S. National Museum. Rep. Smithsonian Inst. (U. S. Nat. Mus.) 1891 (1893), pp. 429-488. pl. Xxx. A study based upon the large Korean collec- tion in the U. S. National Museum, and infor- mation gathered from native Koreaus and trav- elers through a period of six years. | — Time-keeping by light and fire. Am. Anthropologist, tv, No. 2, April, 1893, p. 207. Presentation of unnoticed methods of reckon- ing time by combustible materials. The methods of fire-making. Rep. Smithsonian Inst. (U.S. Nat. Mus.), 1890 (1891), pp. 395-409, pl. Li, figs. 51-63. HOWARD, LELAND O. A new Icerya parasite. Insect Life, tv, Nos, 11-12, August, 1892, pp. 378-379. Description of Cerchysius icerye@, n. s., reared at Kingston, Jamaica, by T. D. A. Cockerell from Teerya rose, R. & H. This paper is based upon Museum material. -—— An experiment against mosquitoes. (Read before the Association of Eco- nomic Entomologists at Rochester, N. Y., Aneust 16, 1892.) Insect Life, v, No. 1, September, 1892, pp. 12-13. Four ounces of coal oil destroyed an esti- mated number of 7,400 insects (of which 370 were female mosquitoes) ina pool of water contain- in 60 square feet of surface, and kept the pool free from living insects of all kinds for ten days. —A new enemy to timothy grass. (Read before the Association of Eco- nomic Entomologists at Rochester, N. Y., August, 1892. ) Insect Life, v, No. 2, November, 1892, pp. 90-92, figs. 8, 9. This species, Oncognathus binotatus, family Capside’, was found on Onteora Mountain, New York. and only atan elevation of 2.500 feet. It 296 HOWARD, LELanp O.—continued. was observed in extraordinary numbers in the heads of the timothy, engaged in sucking the juices of the plant. This paper is based upon Museum material. REPORT The Hymenopterous parasites of spi- ders. Proc. Ent. Soc. Wash., u, No. 3, December, 1892, pp. 290-302, pl. 11. Twenty-four American Hymenopterous para- sites of spiders are recorded and twelve new species are described. OF NATIONAL MUSEUM, 1893. HOWARD, LELAND O.—continued. (thus preventing the insects from laying their eggs upon the corn in the field), and of storing in cribs without removing the husk. | — Insects affecting the Musk-melon. List of fifty-eight Euro- | pean Hymenopterous species parasitic upon spi- | = | ders.- This paperis based upon Museum mate- rial. Note on the hibernation of Carpen- ter Bees. Proce. Ent. Soc. Wash., u, No. 3, December, 1892, p. 331. The author's abstract of a paper recording the finding of a living male of Xylocopa vir. ginica in a burrow of a pine branch in March, showing that the male of the species, as wellas theimpregnated female, hibernates. This paper is based upon Museum material. A note on the parasites of the Coc- cide. Proc. Ent. Soc. Wash., 1, No. 3, December, 1892, pp. 351-352. Contends that Aurivilliuss’ generalization in Entomologisk Tidskrift, 1X, Nos. 3-4, 1888, to the effect that Pteromalid parasites of the Coccids belonging to the Eneyrtine and Aphelinine do not, when infesting female Coccids, kill their host or diminish the number of eggs laid by her, will not hold. In the majority of cases in his experience the females are pierced by their parasites at all stages of growth, and when thus pierced growth is arrested. paper is based upon Museum material. —— The ‘“‘Fly Weevil” (Gelechia cerea- lella). (An address beforethe Farm- ers’ Institute of the Seventh Congres- sional District of Virginia, at Manas- sas, Va., February 22, 1893.) Bull. Dept. Agric., Virginia, May, 1893, pp. 12-16. The early history and literature of the spe- cies are discussed and its life history briefly treated. Early thrashing is recommended in the case of wheat, but where the wheat must be left in the field the individual farmer should disinfect his granaries every year soon after the wheat is put in. This is best done with bisulphide of carbon, and the author gives the proper quantities to be used in rooms of various sizes. Against this insect as acorn pest the practice has been adopted of growing only such varieties of corn as have a close-titting husk This | Am. Gardening, x1v, No. 4, April, 1893, pp. 209-216, 1 figure. Discusses and suggests remedies’ for the melon worm (Phakellura hyalinitalis), the so- called pickle worm (P. nitidalis), the squash stem-borer (Melittia ceto), the melon-plant louse (Aphis citrulli), the cucumber-leaf beetle (Epi- trix cucumeris), the 12-spotted and striped dia- broticas (Diabrotica 12-punctata and D. vittata), of the so-called pumpkin beetle (2 pilachna bore- alis), and the squash-bug (Anasa tristis). Insects of the subfamily Encyrtine with branched antenne. Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., xv, No. 905, Sep- tember 16, 1892, pp. 361-369, pls. XLvI- XLVII. This paper is based upon Museum material. (Seealso under CHARLES V. RILEY.) JORDAN, DAvip STARR. Forestand Stream, XXX1x, No. * 5 November 10, 1892, p. 405. Salmo kaloops. This paper is based in part upon Museum material. KEELER, Cuartes A. Evolution of the colors of North American Land Birds. Occasional Papers Cal. Acad. Sei. 11, San Francisco, January, 1893, pp. I-X1, 1-361, pl. I-XIx. An important and highly original treatise, based to a large extent on the material of the U.S. National Museum. The work consists of two parts, and treats first of general questions: I. Introduction. The inheritance of acquired characters (pp. 2-50), Variation and natural selection (pp. 50-63), Laws conditioning evolu- tion (pp. 64-80), Sexual selection (pp. 80-102). The nature of species (pp. 103-109), and isolation as a factor in the evolution of species (pp. 110- 132). Part II is devoted to ‘‘ The colors of North American Birds” (pp. 132-336), followed by a bibliography, explanations of plates, and an index. KIRSCH, Puirie H. Notes on the streams and rivers of Clinton County, Ky., witha description of a new darter. Bull. U.S. Fish Com., 1890, pp. 289-292. This paper is based upon Museum material. —— Notes on a collection of fishes from the southern tributaries of the Cum- berland River in Kentueky and Ten- nessee. Bull. U. S. Fish Com., 1891, pp. 259-268. This paper 1s based upon Museum material. BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE U. KNOWLTON, Frank Hat. Fossil flora of the Bozeman coal tield. Proc. Biol. Soc. Wash., vul, pp. 153-154. Gives a short summary of the flora of this locality and draws conclusions as to the age of the beds. — Flora of the Dakotagroup. A post- humous work by Leo Lesquereux. Edited by F. H. Knowlton. Monogr. U. S. Geol. Surv., XVU, pp. 1-400, pls. I-LXVI. Gives a complete description of the flora of this group. It embraces 460 species, of which num- ber about one-fourth are new to science. — Letter to I. C. Russell on fossil wood from the Triassic of North Carolina and review of the Triassic plants of Prince Edward Island. Bull. U. S. Geol. Surv., No. 85, p. 29. Iowa, in W J MeGee’s ‘Geology of Southwestern Iowa.” 11 Ann. Rep.U. S. Geol. Surv., p. 493. — Bread-fruit trees in North America. Science, XXI, p. 24. Describes two species of bread-fruit trees, Avtocarpus Lessingiana (the Aralia pungens and Myrica Lessingii of Lesquereux), from the Laramie of Colorado, and A. californica, a new species from the auriferous gravels of California. — The flora of the Dakota Group: A reply. Botan. Gaz., XVM, pp. 37-39. A reply to a criticism of the editorial work on this mongraph. Description of a new fossil species of Chara. Botan. Gaz., XVul, pp. 141-142, figs. 1-3, Describes a new species (Chara Stantoni) from the Bear River formatson at Cookville, Wyo. —— A siniple point in nomenclature. Bull. Torrey Botan. Club, xx, pp. 212-213. Raises the question as to where the interro- gation mark should be placed when it is desired to question either of the members of a plant name. —— Note on a supposed new endogenous tree from the Carboniferous. Science, XX1, pp. 332-333. Criticises the supposed finding of an endo- genous tree (Winchellina faseina) iv the Car- boniferous of Ohio, showing that it is a fern- stem of a well-Enown type ( Psaronius). Report on Inter-glacial earth from S. NATIONAL MUSEUM, 1893. 297 | KNOWLTON, Frank Hau. [Review | of] Cretaceous fossil plants from Min | mnesota. By Leo Lesquereux. Journ. Geol., 1, pp. 302-303. | —— [Review of] On the organization of the fossil plants of the coal-meas- ures. By W. C. Williamson. Journ. Geol., 1, p. 303. | KOEHLER, SyLvesrer Rosa. _ photo-mechanical processes. The Technology Quarterly, Vv, No. 3, Boston, October, 1892, pp, 161-204. A series of papers on the processes named, read before the Society of Arts, at the Massa- chusetts Institute of Technology, Bostor. —— Peter Lymen von Antwerpen (oder | Brussell?). Kunsichronik, Leipzig, June 30, 1892, cols. 523-524. Concerning the identity of the portrait of Peter Lymen, by Van Dyck, owned by Mr. Francis Bartlett, Boston. —— John Webber und die Erfirdung Lithographie. der Kunstchronik, Leipzig, December 1, 1892, cols. 102-103. Description of a print in the John Witt Ran- dall collection, Harvard College, showing that | the so-called lithographs by John Webber are soft-ground etchings. — Der Tiefstich auf Holz. Zeitschrift fiir bildende Kunst. Iv, No. 6, illustrated. | 1893. On the invention and practice of intaglio New series, Leipzig, March, engraving on wood. White-line engraving for relief print- ing in the fifteenth and sixteenth cen- turies. Rep. Smithsonian Inst. (U.S. Nat. Mus.), 1890 (1891), pp. 385-394, pls. XLVIL-L, figs. 48-50. Report on the Section of Graphie Arts in the U. S. National Museum, 1890. Rep. Smithsonian Inst. U. 8S. Nat. Mus.), 1890 (1891), pp. 147-157. LINDGREN, WaALpEmMaR. A _ sodalite syeuite and other rocks from Montana. Am.Journ. Sci., XLV, April, 1893. pp. 286-297. Describes a peculiar series of rocks. Themore striking among them are the syenites which were collected in the Moccasin and Bear Paw mountains during the summer of 1883 by Dr. C. A. White and J. B. Marcou, and which have been depositedin the U. S. National Museum. 298 LINTON, Epwin. ZOa. Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus., xv, No. 893, August 8, 1892, pp. 87-113, pls. Iv-v11I. Notes on avian Ento- This paper is based upon Museum material. LUCAS, FrepEric AUGUSTUS. On the anatomical characters of Humming Birds. Rep. Sinithsonian Inst. (U.S. Nat. Mus.) 1890 (1892), pp. 290-294, pl. xv, figs. 1-4. Published in the paper on Humming Birds by Robert Ridgway. —— On Carcharodon Mortoni Gibbes. Proc. Biol. Soc. Wash., vu, July 27, 1892, pp. 151-152. Notes that the species is probably founded on an abnormal tooth. —— A welcome correction. St. Nicholas, October, 1892, p. 958. Correcting an error in an article on snakes, and giving some details regarding their anat- omy. — A neglected branch of Ornithology. Auk, x, April, 1893, p. 210. A letter indicating some reasons why the study of theanatomy of birds is neglected. —— Articles on Alectorides, Anseres, Apteryx, Apteryges, Auk, Aurochs. Johnson's Universal Cyclopedia, 1, pp. 107, 226, 264, 411, 413. LUDWIG, Huserr. Vorliufiger Bericht iiber die auf den Tiefsee-Fahrten des Albatross (Friihling, 1891), 1m éstlichen Stillen Ocean erbeuteten Holothurien. Zoologischer: Anzeiger, No. 420, 1893, pp. 1-10. Reports on the dredging operations off the west coast of Central America to the Galapagos, to the west coast of Mexico, and to the Gulf of California, in charge of Alexander Agassiz, carried on by the U. 8S. Fish Commission Steamer Albatross during 1891, Lieut. Commander Z. L. Tanner, U. S. Navy, commanding. IV. Vorliufiger Bericht iiber die erbeuteten Holothurien. Bull. Mus. Comp. Zool., xxtv, No. 4, June 1893, pp. 105-114. Preliminary descriptions are given of 1 new family, Pelagothuriide 8 new genera, Synal- lactes, Mesites, Letno phasma, Capheira, Palagothuria, and Spheroth- uria; 30 new species, Pelopatides suspecta, Synallactes alexandri, S. enigma, Mesites mut- tipes, Meseres Macdonaldi, Eupheonides Tanneri, E. verrusoca, Psychropotes raripes, P. dubiosa, Benthodytes incerta, Deima pacificum, Oneiro- pharta afiinis, Letmogone Theeli, Scotodeima Meseres, Seotodeima, REPORT OF NATIONAL MUSEUM, 1893. LUDWIG, HuBERT—continued. setigerum, Leetmophasma fecundum, Capheira suleata, Peniagone intermedia, Scotoanassa gracilis, Pelagothuri natatrix, Phyllophorus aculeatus, Psolus pauper, P. digitatus, P. diome- dew, Psolidium panamense, P. gracile, Sphe- rothuria bitentaculata, Caudina californica, Trochostoma granulatum, T. intermedium, Anky- roderma spinosum; and 3 varieties, Pannychia Moseleyi var. Henrici, Peniagone vitrea var. setosa, and Synapta abyssicola var. pacified. This paper is based upon Museum material. MARSH, OTHNIEL CHARLES. Notes on Mesozoic vertebrate fossils. Am. Journ. Sci., XLIV, August, 1892, pp. 171-176, pls. 11-Iv. Restorations of Claosaurus and Cera- tosaurus. Restoration of Mastodon americanus. Am. Journ. Sei., XLIV, October, 1892. pp. 343-350, pls. VI-VIII. —— Anew Cretaceous bird allied to Hes- perornis. The skull and = brain of Claosaurus. Am. Journ. Sci., XLV, January, 1893, pp. 81- 86, pls. IV, V- — Restoration of Anchisaurus. Am. Journ. Sei., XLV, February, 1893, pp. 169-170, pl. VI. MASON, Otis TUFTON. throwing-stick. Fhe Eskimo Science, X1x, New York, 1892, p. 322. Calls attention to discoveries of new areas and gives a bibliography of recent papers on the subject. | —— The land problem. Brooklyn Ethical Association, Evolution Series, No. 22; New York 1892, pp. 109-145. An address before the Brooklyn Ethical Association, in which the history of land-own- ing and land-treatment are traced among primi- ° tive races of men, and the effects of each method pointed out. — Report on the Department of Eth- nology, in the U. 8. National Museum, 1890. Rep. Smithsonian Inst. (U.S. Nat. Mus.), 1890 (1891), pp. 119-134. MATTHEWS, WASHINGTON. The Cat- lin collection of Indian paintings. Rep. Smithsonian Inst. (U. S. Nat. Mus.), 1890 (1891), pp. 593-610, pls. CXXX-CL. This paper is based upon Museum material. MEARNS, EpeGar A. A study of the Sparrow Hawks (Subgenus Tinnun- culus) of America, with especial refer- ee BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE U. MEARNS, EpcGar A.—continued. ence to the continental species (Falco sparverius Linn. ). Auk, 1X. No, 5, July, 1892, pp. 252-270. A critical discussion of the geographical races | and incipient forms of the single continental species, with a synopsis. New subspecies de- scribed: Falcosparverius deserticolus, Mearns (p. 263), habitat, southwestern United States, north | te northern California and western Montana, | south to Mazatlan, in northern Mexico. Falco sparverius peninsularis, Mearns (p. 267) ; habitat, Lower California. Falco sparverius equatorialis, Mearus (p. 269); habitat, Ecuader. This paper is based chiefly on Museum material. MEEK, SetH E. A report upon the fishes of Iowa, based upon observations and collections made during 1889, 1890, and 1891. Bull. U. S. Fish Com., 1890, pp. 217-248. MERRILL, GrorGE PERKINS. Hand- book of the Department of Geology in the U. S. National Museum. Part I, Geognosy: The materials of the earth’s crust. Rep. Smithsonian Inst. (U. 5S. Nat. Mus.), 1890 (1891), pp. 5038-591, pls. CXVIII-CXXIX, 10 figures in the text. This forms the fourth of the series of hand- S. NATIONAL MUSEUM, 1893. 299 MERRILL, GreorGeE P.—continued. A brief note calling attention to deposits of supposed beeswax in the sands of the seashore near Portland, Oreg. —— The building-stone industry of the United States. Stone, July, 1892, pp. 131-139, pls. 2; August, 1892, pp. 263-268, pls. 2, 1 figure in the text; September, 1892, pp. 369-374, pls.3, 2figures in the text. —— [Brief papers in Stone]. The marble region of Knoxville, Tenn., November, 1892, pp. 591-599, 1 map and 5 figures in the text. Remarks on prevalent methods of testing building stone, December, 1892, pp. 5-8. The strength and weathering qualities of roofing slates, January, 1893, pp. 1385-139. The onyx deposits of Cave Creek, Ariz., February, 1893, pp. 204-205. Report on the Department of Geology in the U. 8. National Museum, 1890. “Rep. Smithsonian Inst. (U. S. Nat. Mus.), 1890 (1891), pp. 243-249. MERRILL; GrorGe P., and PACKARD, Robert L. On some basic eruptive rocks in the vicinity of Lewiston and books relating to the Department thus far issued, and deals, as its title devotes, with the materi- als of the earth's crust in the least-changed con- ditions. Discussion of the strength and weathering qualities of roofing slate. Trans. Am. Soc. Civil Engineers, XxXvu, December, 1892, pp. 685-687. A discussion of Prof. Merriam’s paper on the strength and weathering qualities of roofing slates, which appeared in the same volume, p. 33. — The architect and his materials. Am. Architect and Building News, March 4, 1893, p. 134. An article calling attention to what the writer believes to be a serious defect in architectural methods—that relating to the selection of materials. A cheap form of box for microscopic slides. Science, November 25, 1892, p. 298. Describes briefly a new form of box now in use in the National Museum. A new source of Mexican onyx. Science, April 21, 1893, p. 221. . . . | A brief note regarding a newly discovered deposit of the so-calledonyx in Lower California. — A peculiar occurrence of beeswax. * Science, June 16, 1893, p. 331. Auburn, Androscoggin County, Me. Am. Geologist, July, 1892, pp. 49-55, pl. 1. The paper describes the mode of occurrence, and general chemical petrographic characters of some of the basic eruptives of the vicinity noted, and which, on structural grounds, are provisionally referred to the camptonites. METCALF, MayNarp M. Notes upon an apparently new species of Octacne- mus, a deep-sea Salpa-like Tunicate. Johns Hopkins Univ. Cire., xu, No. 106, pp- 98-100, 6 figures. Octacnemus patagoniensis, n.s. (?), dredged by the U.S. Fish Commission steamer Alba- tross off Port Otway, Patagonia, in 1,050 fathoms. This specimen will eventually be added to the Museum collection. MONTANDON, A. L. Notes on Ameri- can Hemiptera Heteroptera. Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., xvi, No. 924, June 13, 1893, pp. 45-52. This paper is based upon Museum material. | PACKARD, ROBERT L. | (See under GEORGE P. MERRILL.) | PILSBRY, HENRY A. recent Chitonidee. Manual of Conchology (Academy of Natural Monograph of the 300 PILSBRY, Henry A.—continned. Sciences of Philadelphia), X1v, 1892, pp. I-XXXIV, 1-350, pls. 1-68. This work is based in part on material fur- nished by the National Museum, and also partly on the manuscripts prepared for the | Smithsonian Institution by the late Dr. Philip Pearsall] Carpeuter, which were turned over to Mr. Pilsbry by the Institution to facilitate the preparation of the monograph. RATHBUN, Mary J. Catalogue of the crabs of the family Pericerid in the U.S. National Museum. Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., XV, No. 901, August 6, 1892, pp. 231-277, pls. XXVIII-XL. Based on 48 species, chiefly American, of which 15 are new: Libinia mexicana, L. spini- mana, L. Maedonaldi, Pericera atlantica, P. triangulata, P. contiqua, Macroceeloma tenuiros- tra, Othonia rotunda, O. Nicholsi, O.carolinensis, Mittrax pilosus, M. sinensis, MW. braziliensis, M. Hemphilli, M. bahamensis. RATHBUN, Ricuarp. Report upon the inquiry respecting Food-fishes and the Fishing-grounds. Rep. U. S. Fish Com., 1889 to 1891 (1893), pp. 97-171. the U. Invertebrates in Ss. National Museum, 1890. Rep. Smihsonian Inst. (U.S. 1890 (1891), pp. 223-229. RIDGWAY, Birds. Rep. Smithsonian Inst. (U.S. Nat. Mus.), 1890 (1891), pp. 253-383, pls. I-XLvI, 47 figures in the text. Nat. Mus.), Roserr. The Humming The subject of this memoir is treated as fol- lows: Introduction, Early history, Names and their origin, Geographical distribution, Migra- tions, Habits, Abundance of individuals, Ac- tions and attitudes, Manner of flight, Dispo- sition, Intelligence, Nests and eggs, Voice, Food, Characters and relationships (with a sum- mary of osteological and anatomical characters, prepared by Mr. F. A. Lucas), Variations, Head ornaments, Colors of the plumage, Cause of the changeable hues of humming birds, Briet’ | descriptions of some of the more brilliantly colored kinds, and Humming Birds of the United States, with a key to the genera of humming birds occurring in the United States, Mexico, Cuba, and the Bahamas. The first part of this treatise, as the titles of the chapters indicate, is of a popular char- acter, intended to interest the general reader, and form an introduction to the study of this most wonderful and beautiful family of Ameri- can birds. The second part is devoted to the scientific discussion and description of the sev- ‘ REPORT OF NATIONAL MUSEUM, 1893. ! RIDGWAY, RoBERT—continued. Report on the Department of Marine | | | RILEY, CHARLES V. enteen species of humming birds which have | been found within the borders of the United States A key to all the genera of humming birds found in North America and the West Indies will enable the student to detect any addition to our fauna which he is likely to meet. Zonotrichia albicollis in California. Auk, 1x, No. 3, July, 1892, p. 302. Notes the capture of an adult specimen in spring plumage by Mr. L. Belding, at Stock- ton, Cal., April 22, 1892, being the third Pacific coast record of the species. Spring arrivals at Washington, D.C. Auk, 1X, No. 3, July, 1892, pp. 307-308. Records the date of first appearance in the vicinity of Washington of 37 species of spring migrants during the season of April 3 to May 4, inclusive. —— Descriptions of two new forms of Basileuterus rufifrons, from Mexico. Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., xv, No. 895, July, 1892, p. 119. Basileuterus rujifrons Jouyi and Basileuterus rufifrons Dugesi are described. —— The systematic position of Humming pirds. A reply to Dr. Shufeldt’s “ Dis- cussion.” Pop. Sci. News, Xxvi, No. 11, November, 1892, pp. 164-165. Shufeldt on the anatomy of Hum- ming Birds and Swifts. Am. Naturalist, December, 1892, pp. 1040- 1041. Reply to a criticism of ‘The Humming Birds’ by Dr. Shufeldt, in the American Agri- culturist for October, 1892, pp. 869-870. Description of two supposed new species of Swifts. Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., xvi, No. 923, June 13, 1893, pp. 43-44. Ciraetura Lawrencei, p. 43, and Cypseloides Cherriei, p. 44. Report on the Department of Birds in the U. 8. National Museum, 1890. Rep. Smithsonian Inst. (U. S. Nat. Mus.), 1890 (1891), pp. 195-198. The number of broods of the imported Eln-Leaf Beetle. Science, XX, No. 492, July 8, 1892, p. 16. A preliminary note recording the fact that on June 30, 1892, eggs laid by the second brood of beetles had been obtained at Washington. Recent advances in dealing with insects aftecting fruits. Proc. Am. Pomological Soc., 23d Session, September, 1891, pp. 32-42. (July, 1892.) BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE U. RILEY, CHarLEs V.—continued. Discusses the use of the arsenites in the orchard, with specifie directions; the combina- tion of insecticides with fungicides; the gas treatment; the resin washes; the fluted scale, Icerya purchasi, Maskell; new injurious insects of a year; the apple maggot; insects which American pomologists would do well to be on their guard against; conclusions. Partly reprinted in Insect Life, v, No.1, pp. 16-19. The first larval or post-embryonic stage of the Pea and Bean weevils. Canadian Entomologist, V, XXIv, No. 7. August, 1892, pp. 185-186. (Also separate.) A short note upon the curious temporary thoracic legs in Bruchus fab (obtectus) and B. pisi, which serve them in entering the bean or pea and are then lost with the first molt. The classiticatory significance of these heredi- tary post-embryonic structures is discussed. Some notes on the Margined Soldier- beetle (Chauliognathus marginatus). 7 Canadian Entomologist, v, xxiv, No. 7, August, 1892, pp. 186-187. (Also separate.) Records and describes the eggs of this species hitherto unknown. As many as 300 are laid in asingle mass. The first larva stage is also compared with the final stage. Some interrelations of plants and insects. Proc. Biol. Soe Wash., vul, May 28, 1892, pp. 81-104. Insect Life, tv, No. 11-12, August, 1892, pp. 358-378, figs. 57-75. Also as a separate. Discusses the pollination of Yucea jilamen- tosa by Pronuba yuccasella; the structural char- acteristics of Pronuba; the acts of pollination and oviposition, the development and trans- formations of Pronuba; the bogus Yucca moth ; other species of Prodoxus; caprification of the figure. In generalizing from the facts, the author indicates three principal lines along which variation has proceeded; shows how these Prodoxids exemplify what he originally called ‘fortuitous variation;’’ and discusses the transmission of acquired characters through | heredity. Rose Saw-tlies in the United States. Insect Life, v, No. 1, September, 1892, pp. 6-11, figs. 1-2. Observations upon the Bristly Rose-worm, Cladius pectinicornis, Fourer.; the Banded Emphytus, or Curled Rose-worm, Lmphytus cinctus, L.; and the American Rose-slug, Mon- ostegia rose, Harris. Life history of the three species compared and original observations given. All are amenable to treatment with hellebore. New injurious insects of a year. Extracted from a paper entitled Ss. NATIONAL MUSEUM, 1893. 301 RILEY, CHArLeEs V.—continued. “Recent Advances in Dealing with Insects Affecting Fruits,” read before the American Pomological Society, September, 1891. Insect Life,v, No.1, September, 1892, pp. 16-19. Forty-five hitherto unrecorded species, re- ported to the Department of Agriculture during one year as injuring various crops, are enumey ated. — Further notes on the new Herbarium Pest. Insect Life, v, No.1, September, 1832 40-41. The new herbarium pest, Carphoxera pte- learia. described in Insect Life, tv, pp. 108-113, was thought by Mr. R. McLachlan to be very like Acidalia herbariata, Fab., long known to injure herbarium specimens in Europe. By comparison of the imagin of the two species, however, the author finds that the European moth is twice as large as the American species, more glossy, and differently marked in detail. In structural characters Carphoxera ptelearia is easily distinguished from Acidalia herbariata by the spatulate tubercles of the larve, by the lateral projection on the fifth abdominal joint of the pupa, and by its much smaller size, more pulverulent, less glossy scaling, and different markings in the imago. pp- — Preservation of hard-wood handles. Scientific American, LXV, No. 14, October 1, 1892, p. 216. Report upon ar insect damaging hard-wood handles; probably one of the powder-post bee- tles of the genus Lyctus, species undetermined. Soaking the infested handles in kerosene is recommended as a remedy. | —— California Beer Seed. Scientific American, LXVII, No. 14, October 1, 1892, p. 217. Report upon a specimen of a fermenting principle, the action of which is due to a bacte- rium anda fungus, the species of which have not been defimtely settled, though the former is probably Dispora caucasica and the latter Saccharomyces kefyr. An Australian Scymnus established and described in California. Paper read before the Rochester meeting of the Association of Economic Entomol- - ogists, August, 1892. Scientific American, LXVII, No. 18, October 29, 1892, p, 275; Insect Life, v, No. 2, November, 1892, pp. 127-128. An Australian Coccid-feeding Coccinellid brought over by Mr. Albert Koebele in 1888-89, and subsequently lost sight of, has turned up in southern California and been described by Dr. F. E. Blaisdell under the name Scymnus lophanthe. as an American species. 302 RILEY, Cuarites V.—continued. —— Galeruca xanthomelena poly goneutie at Washington. Read before the Entomological Club of the American Association for Science, at Rochester, N. Y., August, 1892. Canadian Entomologist, V, XXIV, November, 1892, pp. 282-286. Shows that while Galeruca zxanthomelena, according to Prof. John B. Smith’s experi- ments, is single-brooded at New Brunswick, N.J., it is normally double-brooded at Wash- ington, and by exception produces a third and eyen a fourth generation there. Discusses the bearing of these facts in the light of climatic influence in relatively short periods. the Bean No. 10, — An additional note Weevil. Canadian Entomologist, V, XXIv, No. 10, November, 1892, pp. 291-299. In a note in the August, 1892, number of the Canadian Entomologist the author stated that the eggs of the Bean Weevil ‘‘ are preliminarily laid upon the bean pod in the field, but chiefly if not entirely upon those which are already matured and ripening.” The present note records the fact that the eggs hitherto taken for those of the common Bean Weevil are, with- outmuch doubt, those of another Bruchus, either Bruchus quadrimaculatus or B. scutellaris, and that the eggs of the Bean Weevil are thrust into an aperture made by the jaws of the par- ent weevil along the ventral suture, or else laid in clusters on the inside of the pod wherever this is sufficiently ripe to cause a partial open- ing. on Coleopterous larvee with so-called dorsal prolegs. Proc. Ent. Soc. Wash., 11, No. 3, December, 1892, pp. 319-324, figs. 22-23. (Also sep- arate.) Shows that two kinds of larve with supposed dorsal prolegs, referred to by Herbert Osborn and others at the Indianapolis (1890) meeting of the American Association for the Advance- ment of Science, belong to Mordellistena, and to some Cerambycid, and that the ‘‘prolegs’’ are but abnormally developed tubercuies to facili- tate motion within the hollow stems. Cites authorities and records the larva of Mordellis- tena pustulata in dry stalks of Xanthiwm struma- rium; of M, wnicolor in stems of Ambrosia arte- misifolia; of MW. nubila from stems of Triodia cuprea; full transformations of M, floridensis in Uniola paniculata; and of Oberea schaumii in stems of cottonwood. stems of —— What the Department of Agriculture has done and can do for apiculture. Proce. 23d Ann. Meeting of the North Amer- ican Bee-keepers’ Association, December 27-29, 1892. the Advancement of REPORT OF NATIONAL MUSEUM, 1893. RILEY, Cuarvtes V.—continued. Reprinted in the Cunadian Bee Journal and various other apicultural journals. A review of past work in apiculture, with recommendations for the future. The address signalizes the fact that the first introduction of Italian bees into the United States was due to the Department of Agriculture, and touches upon the work of the apicultural stations at Aurora, IIL, in 1885, and at Michigan Agricul- tural College in 1891, summarizing the results of experiments upon foul brood, the relation of bees to fruit, spraying with the arsenites as affect- ing bees, selection in breeding, ete. Recom- mendations follow that the Department of Agriculture secure theintroduction and domes- tication of desirable foreign races of bees, experiment in the crossing amd mingling of races already introduced, in artificial fertiliza- tion, the true causes of disease, ete. | —— New species of Prodoxide. Proc. Ent. Soe. Wash., u, No. 3, December, 1892, pp. 312-319, figs. 15-21. Includes technical descriptions of the follow- ing new species: Pronuba synthetica (larva, chrysalis, and imago) ; Prodoxus pulverulentus, P.y-inversus, P. reticulatus, P. coloradensis, and P. sordidus. On certain peculiar structures of Lepidoptera. Proc, Ent. Soe. Wash., 11, No. 3, Decem- ber, 1892, pp. 305-312, figs. 13-14. (Also separate.) The paper describes some of the remarkable structures of the species of Pronuba and Pro- doxussunder the heads: (1) Theradiate bodiesin the receptaculum seminis of Pronuba and Pro- doxus; (2) Pseudo-cenchri; (3) The tegule and the patagia. The radiate bodies referred to, if they occur at all in other insects, are never found in anything like the remarkable develop- ment in which they exist in the species of the family Prodoxide. Their function seems to be to liberate the spermatozoa from the spermato- phores. In connection with two cenchri-like spots on the metathorax of Pronuba synthetica, the author discusses the cenchri of Lepidoptera and concludes that they are more likely organs of sound than of any other sense. In discuss- ing the tegule and patagia it is shown that much confusion on the part of authors in the use of these terms has existed, and the original definitions of Westwood and Kirby and Spence are held to be the proper guides. Report of the Entomologist. Rep. Sec. Agric. 1892, Washington, Govern- ment Printing Office, 1893, pp. 153-180. Contains the following titles: Introduction, pp. 153, 154; The work of the season, pp. 154- 167; Work of the field agents, pp. 167-170; The Pea and Bean Weevils (Bruchus pisi, L. and B. obtectus, Say), pp. 170-172; The Sugar-beet Web-worm, Lowostege sticticalis, Linn., pp. 172- BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE U.S. NATIONAL MUSEUM, 1893. 303 RILEY, Cuarvtes V.—continued. 175; The Shot-borer or Pin-borer of the Sugar Cane (Xyleborus perforans, Woll), pp. 175-178; The Insectary of the Division, 178-179. Also printed as a separate under the title | “Report of the Entomologist for 1892,’’ Wash- ington, 1893, with table of contents, plates and index. — Note on Lowxostege maclure, 1. s. Insect Life, v, No.3, January, 1893, pp. 157- 158. A supplementary note to an article by Miss Mary E. Murtfeldt on this insect, characteriz- ing the species, hitherto undescribed. Insect communities. see OO. = eee Ree eee Eee eee 371 Johnston’s Account ees ae Se see ee te ae ena 371 Musclesactine omy gland 2st cise aie sere a ote ne ete re re ae eae eee 372 Hypodermicsyringeés 2 a2. Sse oe eee re ee ee eee ecto 373 Poisonous flutdz 22 3 conceae ees eee Vee ce eee eee eee aera 373 Phe: bite@essassisets ce ane amare ee ys Sec ee ke eee ee es a er Sie Controversy about the movements involved.._........-.--..----..-- 374 Action as described by Dr Mitchell ss soe eee ee ee 375 Headlessisnakeststrike. 3. $2232 2s 2s eee eda saeceee soe sere oa ae eee 379 Prof. Brewers*adventurena-cccsas=o-) ee 5: ess ae Se eere = eee oe eee 380 Catlin’stadvenbure sso a0 5 seas oct eee den ee eave Oe eee ee 380 The tattlecs hss sss.y5 sob ee ace nate) Sere Stara ieys errs oe ate ae eae ere ere aa es 380 Description va. esses Jee sre eee ae oere cee enlea aie ee eee eee 381 Internalistructure 22.2 bya s scat oe ctke cee eae e oe ee eee “381 Garman on the developmentiof the rattle-2-3-5+-s2 e+ a2 eee eee 382 Ratio.of srowthe.2 2 hs. ..oo56- ces soaeeee eae cose see oleae eee ee 384 Sloughing ..-..--.- Jae poe Saceieee sels binete eae Ooo Feoktistow’s ieee OS on Tile marie Re A RRA ioie en AC a CAE 384 Q@uelchroncthe sameisubject=- 24 -s625 sess 5e ee eee eee eee 385 Number'of jomtsimirattles 22-0 oo eee ce eee ee ee are eee 386 Shape according to/ages 2.2 siss5 sass seca e eases eerste ee 387 Positionavhent sounded’ 2s 2s.6 Soe ee te ee eee ee oe ee eee 387 Soumdl So.22 Ges se es Se ere es ee ee eee ee 388 Feoktistow’s investigation of number of vibrations...............--- 388 ; Ottis experiment <2 sooo" Sa ere eee ee ele Se ee , Purpose of themattles: 5-2 snes See es he ee ee ee eines oe ee ee ea Evolutioncor thewmabtlesaa 226 2224 ee ao oe eis eee ok ee Se Sal eye ee Derivationsof the mattlesnakesa: =: s- season ee eerie ee ee eee ee 392 Power of charniine7 Soe Nae ae eee a eA ee 392 Kalm’s-explanation: «22222 2ceqs scons eee Soe eee eee eee 393. Mitchell's: opimion)2 ~2<*<: /5=- Soc sceeted Gee eo ae eee eee 394 Brehm’s experience 2: 222.2 222e2 > a2. yee soak ae eee eee cena 394 Hypnotism suggested = 22222 22 -nasce soot soca nee eee eee eee 395. Alleged fetid amellis- 422432255. 5 ee cee ee eee 396. Rattlesnake-dens «22 22522558 Soe ee eee ee ere eer 396 Fludson’s explanation=2= mee ese eee aa eee eee ee oe eee 397 Breeding habits: ..253<252cc2 555 ee eee oe ee ee ee are 398 ‘*Do the snakes swallow their young?” =. 2=_: s2246-)-245224- 1022 eee oe 398 Mimicry ‘of: erotalid snakes... 3226-0) see eee eee 399 Natural history of the pit vipers of the United States. ................... 401 Synopsis of the:genera...3..2- 22.5 acne eee eee eee eee 401 Genus Agkistrodon .......-.-- ee eer ee en cfu, UN Synopsis of species in the United inten Jjsieiw icin (sis cae Cee ee ee aie 401 CONTENTS. o4t The Pit Vipers—family Crotalide—Continued. Page. he Copperhead —Agkisinodon-contonimig)- =~ 2. -ccicse == oe wo oe cess ae 401 Si MOMMY. D0) eee eee eros cia ie ieee ieee 2 cee Rites weistaitcee Mine 401 TEST SRC Sete gst ayes eee eae at ie aos soe e Syme papny= Yate oes eyayarere foes aiaietataye = Hare 402 IRGTMEHO KS 11) EhyNOMNVthy os 955 446605 a0 505 SbSdne GoeS56 ese se5 co su eaioooe 402 OXI NNN. Soa 44 GoSss58Sa555 SSeS gossSues seaeadsanono debe. cass s3edec 402 WARLR GTO So So ere ocle separ epee rare ici ape eee oe ote Clare Sess a oles arnhats Sarees 404 Geooraphicalidistribth ones eeeeere er erate eeepc aie eer 404 EVD IGS! ae Ser oeicie wis we le oe rae oe ote ieee late Aohameion sere ays boos 405 The Water Moccasin—Agkistrodon piscivorus ..............---+--.--------- 406 SSMOD NAN 2 or worse oye cetiees Recent eer eyo faeeere ty ae ater eB bata rs oot 406 PUT OS rise a eetecon pata me Sciam See o ete lode rere Sea ieels eeenaa le ieee eiere 406 DeSCLrip lioness come sanastememiee eat eens CeO Ce Ie eels eRe ees 407 ATE T GIT ih CG) 0 eh eer ee Rn eer SE Cans hos AEC eta ey etait eee ee 408 Geocraplicaltdisirilowtioneeee secs: asec ee er 408 EVD UGS: pea fos are oc! SS ots aie dad 5 olin ce) se ree at RE aie Sa te Pa eras Se en 408 GR EINTS SUS CII Sioa aia yarsyrsctn sim ier Sri steels ees ae re pa eae Rena eS 410 Synopsis ofspeciesinithe United! States-2s- 52-24 4.--0-2> =e ee eee eeee 410 the Massasauca—Sisinurnus Catenatus —.. 52. sasssese eee ee eee ees seer 411 SIMOUSUINY seis sisats ise wpersik Sere. cic 2 ace Saisie nts og SE a Skee eree ee eae 411 NUT ES si icctsines ste wine sis eis 2 serene wd oe RSE eee te rere 412 DESCRIP UIONE ae asrncce ae staid heii sais So ee Ce eee eee Eee ee ee 412 Wanlabiones.:: astces less ae eet oss bee Sone Soe Sots oe eee ee eee 413 Georraphical distribution... 02 ..6 < cde. ca6e soee ese eelee ta eeaeeerer 413 EVAN IGS Soo 5 io eas chs faiass serena; o/ei5 oie Sic je es Sini= hve eee, Sete ree eee reo 414 The Gulf-coast Massasauga—Sistrurus catenatus consors .....------------+- 415 SVM OMY MY. a cracisce eisci-eisse +s sss sRae ut eeee eae ee eee me mee meer 415 DSHOMG OS ey ross oie sare fecal esi Baie wars Sis See oS Teen ore 415 REMATIS) 2-2/3. 5 saise cas WS0 bebe Sos Soe eae oo aeOs emt a eee one 415 Weseriptionis: 22. 7.2.2. ccees oot odessa. eee See eee Pee eee ee 415 Edwards’ Massasauga—Sistrurus catenatus Edwardsti ...-.....-....------- 416 SS KOU Ch Eee pee SAGE CoC Cerna cop reinninsrnncagn bocecoeeerponobemcc 416 OU OS 2 eee eeiria ea ty trata Sica oe ME SCE eS ate eee cae sonoée 417 Wescription. = cas faker as sess seal) Sees See Oe eee ee eee 417 Marlatione t2ioccne sae sess poset ns ise ee oe Sete e se cies a teeter 417 Geographical distribution.......-.-- Saab gota atly Sapeaonag Aas See 417 VA DIGS Serertcis Sasi s ses sees side cea nee os wee te Se See tee cules pee me eee 418 The Ground Rattlesnake—Sistrurus miliarius....--....-:..--.---------- 418 SV MOM MN = acme See ee ce ete tale cle outs ae Sie Mane Napa ore are are ee 418 RG UTES Sores one Sie = eyes ayaa ciovaysie SE elem om ae te ee Ae eee eae 418 DESCriptiONeYoscke ode oat asst eis bes ee og Sh Sanaae eeletaee eee ees 418 WaATIAbIOM eee Ll kar estan Case Litlsteae Was iule/h a haere Sear eee ee 419 Geooraphicalsdistribmtlones emcees: see ce see e ae eee eae eee ere 420 Leu AGS pate eters. shots ata cs igo ios Saiiel eae sles Sone eaten oe Oa - 420 NGOTUSE ORO CUS: eee eee ae chet date ost arayateo (esl Scat abek ideo does Ser oe re Mn oe 421 DS VMLOI VMN Yrs te one ciyslo eo ecto nares Boe Bae 2 Sree at i Eee ee 421 Ceosraphicalk distribution osc hie neers Phe search tor, antidotes: 23s. 2cs has ee see ais a see eee ee PAK6C0) 10) Ces CU Ne eee eee nas Mein | May meee ye a5 HN OSY COCODU Angee a anu oP ny ea RTS Rem Ris megs MG CUI aie oe Sctisy GUM OMe eae sere re ae Se a ey Sc enti ciate a te ay a at cay ove IP NO OTO ACO EA Sa asnna cu sommenacaeoonudno Gboo0s odasoe ATS HOWTC Be ie Sere Os Ses sie isicia laele ara elereumieteie Sei aera tale vancesienerae Mixelleris CUS COVERY ia. ents. aster mince icicciea: mieeeiae eee Opposition. toy Muellerjsitreatm eniba= so. o.nee enero eee Mivvelllenisipre yoil vite seers ee eros fereyale stacey toes iete niet atte ere nee hheistrychnine treatments nln dt ascent emesis The search for a physiological antidote goes on...........-.:........ Yarrow’s investigations and experiments.................-.....- Jaborandileensecime cc ciete Joc nace SOC e Eee eee eee aoe Strophanthus! eerie. Jones hese Coe heed cee aus ee eee ee ee The elimination of the poison by the system..........-..-..-..---.--..-- JUG ATNGN to oan G Sooo Geos ane ae ee ERE Res nas SScrssbb dodonaoDec AerahionaletureamtMelibeess cocoa s Se = oes cao ee eee eee eens MMNSWRUIIVEMUS, Seoaas acoo conccs Bee eeaer ess caste EE Oe Seer Kaufmann’s directions for injecting chromic acid.........--..---.--- PTS veMiyeuie OC Ul RULOM Ene eer sacle eis oe a2 - ce so See eit ie ee et SGwallisvexpornmuentseot oon ccctt sso s = asc c cto ce salem sem Rem sieteleia= ete aici The poison of the poisonous snakes—Co : Preventive inoculation—Continued. f Immunity of snakes against venom.......-..2<-. /.-2<-+s-eeces-sesee | Experiments of Phisalix and Bertrand .......-. Calmette’s ‘‘serum” vaccine _ Extermination of poisonous snakes ; Decrease of poisonous snakes Local increase Desirability of discrimination between poisonous and harmless snakes. -. The question of bounty : The result in France Bounty a failure List of illustrations fm Te tinued. hth THE POISONOUS SNAKES OF NORTH AMERICA. By LEONHARD STEJNEGER. Curator, Department of Reptiles and Batrachians, U. 8. National Museum. It is the purpose of the present paper to give in a convenient form a review of our knowledge concerning the poisonous snakes of North America; to make the results of the specialists in the field accessibie to a larger public; to bring together in one place a summary of an immense literature very ofteu beyond the reach even of the student; to point out where our knowledge is defective, and to suggest new avenues of research. Many popular errors will be corrected, while others will be disposed of by a simple statement of facts, from which the reader is expected to draw his own conclusions. No attempt will be made to discuss and controvert the purposely exaggerated stories with which the literature of the day abounds. THE SO CALLED “HARMLESS” POISONOUS SNAKES. If a snake is caught, killed, or seen, and any question raised as to its poisonous or harmless nature, it will be found that the presumption of guilt is against it, and that incontrovertible proof will be required by even highly educated people, not specially informed, before they are willing to believe in its innocence. An expert insisting that the snake in question belongs to a species wholly devoid of poison would probably during this discussion be met with the statement that a serious case of poisoning had once ceme under the observation of one of the persons present, the result of a bite of this very kind of snake. In spite of the fact that nothing iscommoner and easier than misidentification of snakes, and that consequently the bite might have been caused by a really different kind of snake, the expert would not be in a position to econtra- dict the accuracy of the statement, though he might beable to recall to his opponent quite a number of similarly serious cases resulting from the bites of animals unquestionably non-poisonous in the accepted mean. ing of the word. He might quote Livingston’s statement that the bite of the large felines is commonly followed by symptoms of poisoning, and he would relate cases of swelling and inflammation of serious 345 346 REPORT OF NATIONAL MUSEUM, 1893. extent, perhaps even death, undoubtedly caused by the bites of rats, dogs, cats, cows, horses, and even man himself. It is clear then that we can not always conclude that a snake belongs to a venomous kind from the fact that its bite results in symptoms of poisoning. Modern science shows us that such results in other animals are due to the presence in their saliva of those minute organisms, the bacteria whose name at least is nowadays so well known toeverybody. The general public knows these cases as blood-poisoning, the pro- fessional man refers to them as cases of septicemia. The fact that the poison of snakes is only a modified saliva should not lead anybody to suppose that snake poison and the bacteria-infected saliva—though both may lead to fatal results—have anything in common in their nature. On the contrary, the sooner both the general public and the medical practitioner understand this difference and act accordingly, the better. When speaking of poisonous or venomous snakes, therefore, I shall only refer to such snakes as are provided with a specific—to them peculiar—poison and an apparatus especially adapted for the introduc- tion of this poison into the wound of the victim. The question naturally will be asked: ‘* Which, then, are our poisonous snakes 2?” The proper answer would be that only those of our snakes are refer- able to this category which are possessed of a movable or constantly erect poison fang at the anterior end of the upper jaw bones, and even those who, on slight information, profess to be well informed, would in most cases admit that the above answer is correct. But it may be shown that this is only partly so. Students of snakes have for more than fifty years kept an eye on a certain category of snakes as * suspects.” It seems that the Dutch professor, Reinwardt, while in Java, was the first to discover that certain snakes, dreaded by the inhabitants of that. island as venomous, are provided with long grooved fangs at the pos- terior end of the maxillary bone. He communicated this discovery to Dr. H. Boie in Leyden, who published it in 1826.* The suspicion expressed by Prof. Reinwardt that this channel or groove on the anterior side of these fangs might convey the fluid from a poison gland led to several important investigations, the first of which to be pub- lished was Dr. Hermann Schlegel’s memoir on the salivary glands of the serpents with grooved teeth.t He came to the conclusion that inasmuch as he found the structure of their glands to be similar to that of other salivary glands, there could be no doubt that they secrete ‘a fluid similar to the ordinary saliva;” aud as “recent observations of travelers” served to show that the bites of snakes with grooved teeth produce no fatal results to man, he *“OkKen's Isis, 1826, p. 213. tNova Acta Acad. Leop. Nat. Curios., Bonn, xiv, 1828 (pp. 145-154). POISONOUS SNAKES OF NORTH AMERICA. 347 asserted with characteristic positiveness that it is *‘ erroneous” to class with venomous serpents those snakes which have the posterior teeth long and channeled. However, a short time after, Prof. G. L. Duver- noy, of Strasbourg, published a no less important treatise on the sub- ject.* He pointed to the yellow portion of the supramaxillary gland as being structurally different from the white portion, and from its being connected with a large grooved fang by a single duct he concluded, with equal assurance, that we have here before us a venom apparatus only in degree differing from that of the snakes with poison fangs fixed to the anterior end of the maxillary bone. His results were accepted and introduced into the classification adopted in the monumental herpeto- logical work of Duméril and Bibron, the Erpétologie Générale, in which the snakes with grooved posterior fangs were placed in a separate group as “Opistoglyphs.”. On the other hand, Schlegel, paying no attention whatever to Duvernoy, in his ““Physiognomie des Serpentes,” maintained his standpoint, and so great was the authority of the learned Leyden professor that his view was until quite recently accepted by some of the most prominent systematists. It seems that neither side ever attempted to end the dispute by direct experiments, and gradu- ally the Opistoglyphs to many herpetologists ceased even to be “sus- pected.” About ten years ago the interest in this question was suddenly revived, and as it may now be fairly regarded as a burning one, some space will be devoted to a short review of several of the recent inves- tigations into this theme. Two Italian students, M. G. Peracea and C. Deregibus, were led to make special investigations into the possible venomous nature of Mal- polon lacertina (=Celopeltis insignitus), a snake common about Nizza and in parts of Italy. In acommunication to the Academy of Medicine at Turin, in May, 1883, + after first describing the grooved fangs, the glands, and the duct leading to the fang, they recounted their experi- ences with the snake in question: Their experiments were carried out with two specimens of Cwlopeltis (=Malpolon), one of medium size, the other much larger; the victims consisted of lizards, frogs, and toads. The snake did not bite them voluntarily; it was necessary to open its mouth and to force the animal, into its throat; whereupon the snake inoculated the venom, the motion of the bone carrying the poison fangs being very distinctly seen on account of the manner in which they were standing out from the poste- rior part of the head. The act of biting lasted some moments, and the snake repeated this act several times without allowing its prey to escape. The animals were bitten in the hind limb; in the case of the frog the skin had to be cemoued from the Bart to be Be as the ir ean Psa. Sei. meth , XXVI, 1832, pp. 144-156 ; xxx, 1833, pp. 6-26. tGiornale dene R. Accademia di Medicina di Torino, (3) XXxI, 1883, pp. 379-383. 348 REPORT OF NATIONAL MUSEUM, 1893. secretion of the skin appeared to be particularly distasteful to the snake. Without reciting the various experiments in detail, the authors state the more apparent phenomena accompanying them to be, (1) the suspension of the respiration, which, in the main, occurs in a very few minutes (thirteen minutes being the maximum in a toad) and may happen suddenly, or may be preceded by a gradual sinking interrupted by a deep breathing pause; (2) the cessation of reflex movements in the bitten limb, while still persisting for some time in the rest of the body; the excitements applied below the bitten point ceased almost immedi- ately to be transmitted to the medulla and to show reflexes, This alteration maintained itself local for some time, afterwards progressing toward the periphery along the nerves of the wounded limb. The general paralysis does not delay long in coming. It is but rarely accompanied by convulsions. The heart continues to beat for a long while (in the toad) but its strength decreases gradually. The blood revealed nothing notable under the spectroscope; as a matter of course it had become venous at the suspension of the respiration. The rapid changes which were observed at the wounded point are noteworthy; the muscular tissue became livid and inexcitable. Death ensued generally in half an hour, or less; in a toad it took place in twenty-six minutes. The heart of a frog continued to beat for many hours after. The authors then call attention to the interesting similarity between the above symptoms and those accompanying th poisoning by the cobra de capello, and finally state that they have made controlling experiments with innocuous snakes which did not have such effect upon the animals bitten. In a subsequent résumé of this article* the same authors add that the effects of the bite of the MZalpolon are not to be feared by man. ‘It seems,” they say, *‘ that the bite is only dangerous to reptiles, birds, and small mammals (mice); young dogs have resisted the poison rather well.” Similar investigations and experiments were carried out about the same time, or a little earlier (1882), on an American species in Guana- juato, Mexico, by Prof. A. Duges, who has published his notes concern- ing Trimorphodon biscutatus,t a snake belonging to a genus representa- tives of which have been found along our Southern, border. He gives figures of his dissections, showing the venomous gland with its duet supplying the grooved posterior fangs with the poison. He records his experience as follows: One day as I was admiring the snake I saw him seize a Cnemidophorus sexlineatus {the striped swift, a lizard], at the middle of the body, advancing its jaws so as to bring the corner of the mouth in contact with the body of the lizard; for several moments it chewed (a rare occurrence in a snake) its victim without the latter mov- ing, letting go after having killed it; but at this juncture the saurian was swallowed ~ Archives Italiennes de Biologie, v, 1884, pp. 108-109. t La Naturaleza, (Mexico), vi, 1884, pp. 145-148. POISONOUS SNAKES OF NORTH AMERICA. 349 by another snake (Ophibolus doliatus) which was kept in the same cage, thus pre- venting me from finishing the observation. A few days after, the same Trimorpho- don caught another Cremidophorus by the left arm and chewed it several times. At the end of a few minutes the bitten animal died without convulsions, without agitation, as if asleep, alittle blood issuing from the wound, A little later (1885), Mr. Otto Edmund Eiffe* published some observa- tions, also made in 1882, on Tarbophis vivax, an opistoglyph snake inhabiting the countries bordering on the Eastern Mediterranean, and froin his account we quote as follows: 1 offered the half-grown snake a perfectly healthy Lacerta vivipara, which he at once commenced to lap with his tongue and then grasped slowly behind the fore legs. The lizard defended itself as best it could and used its teeth well on the enemy. In less than a minute the lizard was almost motionless, the jaws were powerless, and the eyes closed; before the expiration of another half minute the lizard died, and was then swallowed. Prof. Léon Vaillant, of the Museum of Natural History, at Paris, observed the poisonous effect of the bite of another of the opistoglyph snakes, Tragops prasinus, Wagler, and gives the following interesting account of one of the observations :t+ A small living green lizard was presented to the snake by means of a forceps. The snake seized it across the neck without descending from the shrubbery among which it used to live, and by the play of the jaws drew it back to the corner of the mouth. The lizard tossed and bent about, winding its body and tail round the head of the snake; three minutes later it hangs down inert, only the tail still trembling; aftera similar space of time convulsions of the whole body occur again, twining itself around the head, then relapsing without motion, except some spasmodic undulations of the tail; this lasts for two minutes, and the animal is dead. It will be seen that this poison must have been tolerably active, as it caused the death of the lizard in about eight minutes after the puncture by the fangs, which must have taken place when the lizard reached the angle of the mouth, as the snake made no movement after that. It seems quite plain from these observations that we have here to do with a specific poison. The victims succumbed within a very short time, and while it is evident that death was not caused by the mechan- ical injury inflicted by the bite, much less by the shock, there is as little room for assuming that it was due to the action of bacteria- infected ordinary saliva. These experiments have again roused the interest in the morphology and physiology ofthese glands, and two years ago, sixty years after Duvernoy’s work, Mr. F. Niemann publishedt some investigations upon this subject. Among other snakes he dissected and described two species with posterior grooved fangs, and he clearly demonstrates that, in both, the yellowish gland has already passed the innocuous stage and become a true poison gland, though structurally somewhat intermediate—as are, in fact, the fangs. He found in both species the yellowish gland well circumscribed and clearly differentiated from the *Zool. Garten, 1885, p. 45. +Mém. Centen. Soc. Philom., 1888, Sc. Nat., p. 44 *. t Archiv f. Naturgeschichte, Lvl, i, 1892, pp. 262-286, pl. xiv. 350 REPORT OF NATIONAL MUSEUM, 1893. true supralabial gland, although both glands are contained in the same envelope of connective tissue, and he was able to trace the single duct leading from the yellowish gland to the groove of the posterior elon- gated tang. Oneof the species was Tragops prasinus, Wagler (the same species with which Prof. Vaillant experimented), and an inhabitant of the East Indies, the other being Leptodeira annu- lata, (.), from tropical America. Fig. 1 is a copy of Mr. Niemann’s schematic representation of the arrangement in the former. Fig. 2 shows a sec- tion of the grooved fang near 1ts base, copied from DIAGRAMMATIC LATERAL VIEW OF THE HEAD OF the same author. area That. these snakes are not entirely harmless, a Poison gland; b supra- ; : é labial gland. even to man, is evident from the very recent expe- (After Niemann) rience of Mr. J.J. Quelch, of Georgetown, British Guiana,* who was bitten on the first finger by a large specimen of the common red-white-and-black-banded snake, Erythrolamprus venustissi- mus, driving its hinder grooved teeth three times. down into the flesh. About half an hour after, the finger became much swollen at the place and distinetly very painful. It was not till about four hours after- ward that real relief was obtained, though the place was tender for a much longer time. Another case was that of the clerk in the Museum, who was bitten on the finger by a young specimen of the.common frog snake or Mattipi, Yenodon severus, whose hinder enlarged teeth were driven deeply into the flesh, with a result similar to that described in the case of the other snake. It will be observed that while the snake by which Fig. 2. . . : . c CROSS - SECTION OF Mr. Quelch himself was bitten is a true opistoglyph — grooven rane oF with grooved posterior fangs, the.one which caused — TRAGoPs__ PRasINUS, a similar result in the clerk, viz, the Xenodon, has a er pants the enlarged posterior teeth solid and not grooved. groove; bpulp cavity. IT would call attention to the fact, however, that this ast identical species is described by Duvernoyt as having the yellowish gland well differentiated. That the bite of the allied species, Yenodoa rhabdocephalus, did apparently have no unpleasant effect on Dr. Strad- lingt is not difficult of explanation in view of the fact that occasionally the bite of even some of the most dangerous snakes has been ineffective, but enough is said to show that the question isnot an unreasonable one: Is it essential for a truly venomous snake to possess grooved fangs? Asa matter of fact, at the very moment of this sentence going to press, the question seems answered conclusively in the negative by the experiments of Phisalix and Bertrand, who have shown that the saliva * Zoologist (3), Xv1I, January, 1893, pp. 30-31. tAnn. Se. Nat., xxx, 1833, pp. 14-19. t Referred to in Miss C. CU. Hopley’s, ‘Snakes, etc.” 1882, p. 400. ae ? oe he POISONOUS SNAKES OF NORTH AMERICA, 351 of even ordinary solid-toothed harmless snakes contains the same specific poison which characterizes the dreaded thanatophidia. Fuller account of their discoveries will be found in the concluding chapter of this treatise. However, since the character of the saliva of the harmless snakes does not seem to play any role in their economy, so far as obtaining food, or defending themselves against enemies, is concerned, we are still justified in regarding the opistoglyphs as a distinctly specialized group of poisonous snakes, aside from any consideration of their prob- ably more or less close genetic relationship. Although thusin the strictest sense poisonous, these comparatively harmless snakes do not claim the deep interest which snakes, dangerous to human life, through dread of the mysterious power excite in the pop- ular mind. No attempt will be made then to treat of their structure and other peculiarities, in the present connection, beyond remarking that we have within the confines of the United States the representative of four genera of opistoglyph snakes, which may easily be referred to their respective divisions by the following characters: Synopsis of the Opistoglyph Snakes occurring in the United States. a' Head but slightly distinet; pupil round; no scale-pits. (DUS INO NGRER 20 ee ee sees ee el ee en eee Eee Ra Nee OMe ea coac Tantilla. * (b> ILORGEIL ORER OU ieee ae a eee MAE MR ARR one. oo see Coniophanes. t a* Head wide, very distinct; pupil vertical; two scale-pits. CRONE lOnealeoy. asec eee eters ae b cle Sess clele a ne epee nes Saree heptodeira. t G? lwoonmore: loreals: 2.65322 04- id ead We Lite mamta see eee Trimorphodon. § THE CORAL SNAKES. FamMity FLAPID.e. There has been almost as much doubt about the poisonous nature of the Coral Snakes, Hlapida, as of those mentioned in the preceding chap- ter, but as there has been enough evidence to show that the bite of these pretty animals may be fatal even to man, and as they are unde- niably very nearly related to the deadly cobra, || the scourge of India, the verdict has decided against them long ago. There are numerous doubters yet, however. Letters are often received from Florida asking whether the Coral Snake, or Harlequin Snake found * Tantilla, BAIRD and GIRARD, Cat. N. Am. Serp., p. 131 (1853) [=Homalocranion, DuMErIL, Prodr. Class. Ophid., p. 94 (1853)]. Type Tantilla coronata, B. & G.—Four species, ranging from South Carolina to southern California and south. 1 Coniophanes, HALLOWELL, Proc. Acad. Phila., 1860 (p. 484). Type C. fissidens, GUNTH. One species from extreme southern corner of Texas. { Leptodeira, FITZINGER, Syst. Rept., p.27 (1843). [Sibon of authors, but not of Fit- zinger.) Type, Dipsas annulata, SCHLEG.—One species from extreme southern corner of Texas. § Trimorphodon, Corr, Proc. Acad. Phila., 1861, p. 297. Type, T. lyrophanes, Corr. — One species from southern Arizona. || See plate 19. 352 REPORT OF NATIONAL MUSEUM, 1893. there, is poisonous or not, and the Museum is asked to decide bets made by persons taking opposite sides on this question. The cause of this diversity of opinion is usually that the person defending the character of the Harlequin Snake, by quoting cases in which the bitten persons did not suffer any more injury than if they had been bitten by an ordinary gartersnake, has mistaken the identity of the snake and confounded the really poisonous Harlequin Snake, or Elaps, with one or the other of two or three entirely innocent snakes which resemble it greatly in color and which inhabit the same locality. It is a remarkable fact that this curious imitation or “‘ mimicry” of the gaily colored Elaps by one or more harmless species takes place almost throughout the range of the former. So close is the resemblance in some instances that even alleged experts have been deceived. On the other hand, it appears that some, at least, of the species of Elaps are of a temperament so gentle that they only use their weapon in very extreme cases. Prince Max von Wied seems to have been the first to have raised the question as to the venomous character of two Brazilian members of the genus (laps corallinus and Elaps marcgravit), for he states* that he used to carry them about his person and that they never even attempted to bite. The prince can not well be sus- pected of mistaking the species, for not only was he an expert herpeto- logist, but he described and figured them both most accurately and minutely. Our own well-known Elaps fulvius has a defender of no less high standing among the students of reptiles, Mr. Holbrook, the South Carolinian author of the monumental “ North American Herpetology,” printed in five sumptuous quarto volumes, who statest that the indi- viduals he had seen had been of a very mild character, and could not be induced to bite under any provocation whatever. ‘ Indeed,” he remarks, “although possessed of poisonous fangs, they are universally regarded as innocent snakes, and are constantly handled with impunity, never to my knowledge having injured any one.” ¢ The “instruments of destruction” (which he refers to in the same paragraph) are the hollow fangs, fastened, one on each side of the upper jaw, to the anterior end of the maxillary bone. It will be seen that this is an arrangement exactly the reverse of what obtains in the opistoglyph snakes of the previous chapter, hence the genus Hlaps and its allies are known as proteroglyphs.§ The fang being at the frontof the mouth makes it much more effective as a weapon—in the opistoglyphs it can even hardly be regarded as such—and in it will be shown that the little beauty is fully capable of using it when required. | The following case is a celebrated one, and in many respects highly * Beitr. Naturg. Brasil, 1, p. 402 (1825). tN. Am. Herpet., 11, 2 ed., pp. 49-52 (1842). + LeConte’s statement to the same effect (Southern Med. Surg. Journ., 1x, 1853, p. 652) is scarcely more than a copy of Holbrook’s. § From the Greek zpérepo¢ (proteros), anterior; 7/197 (glyphe), a groove. 3 POISONOUS SNAKES OF NORTH AMERICA. 300 instructive. For full details the reader is referred to the report upon it pubished by Mr. Frederick W. True * after the occurrence. Spotsismaller: jae saees eter terse eye ee ? S. c. consors *From the Greek ceiorpov (seistron), a rattle; ovpa (oura), a tail. ‘ t Science, x1x., May 20, 1892, p. 290. POISONOUS SNAKES OF NORTH AMERICA. 411 by NuUMpPer Of Scalemows Us Wall\e2oae. ee ase ee oye las meee — Stare S.c. Edwardsii a. Prefrontals in contact with the loreal proper; a whitish stripe from below center Olneyeto-anple‘ofpmoubhe (eee) eee aceon steer Naas ei =eicloceiel ele laices S. miliarius Fig. 45. Fig. 46. HEAD OF SISTRURUS CATENATUS. HEAD OF SISTRURUS MILIARIUS. From side, showing color pattern. From side, showing color pattern A pretty good character in dubious cases between S. catenatus typi- cal and S. miliarius consists in the pattern of the parietals, if visible. Fig. 48. COLOR PATTERN OF TOP OF HEAD OF SISTRURUS COLOR PATTERN OF TOP OF HEAD 0F SISTRURUS CATENATUS. MILIARIUS. In the former there is a dark patch covering the center of the parietal suture (fig. 47), while in the latter the light portion forms a narrow band down the entire length of this suture (fig. 48). THE MASSASAUGA. Sistrurus catenatus,~ (Ratinesque). Plate 5. 1818.—Crotalinus catenatus, RAFINESQUE, Amer. Monthl. Mag., Iv, 1818, p. 41.— Crotalus catenatus, GARMAN, N. Am. Rept., 1, Opnid., p, 118 (1883).—Sis- trurus catenatus, GARMAN, N. Am. Rept. 1, Ophid., p. 176 (1883).—JorDan, Man. Vert. North. U.S.,5ed., p. 199 (1888).—TayLor, Ann. Rep. Nebraska State Board Agric., 1891, p. 355 (1892).—OsBORNE, Part. Cat. Anim. Iowa, p. 9 (1892).—H. Garman, Bull. [ll]. State Lab. Nat. Hist., m1, p. 312 (1892).—H. GarMAN, Bull. Essex Inst., xxvi, 1894, p. 62.—Hay, Batr. Rept. Indiana, p. 126 (1893).—HurTER, Trans. Acad. Se. St. Louis, V1, p. 258 (1893).—Crotalophorus catenatus, COPE, Proc. U. 8. Nat. Mus.,xtv, 1891, p. 685 (1892).—Hay, Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus., xv, 1892, p. 387. 1823.—Crotalus tergeminus, SAY, in Long’s Exped. Rocky Mts., 1, p. 499.—HARLAN, Journ. Phila. Acad., v, 1827, (p, 372).— HARLAN, Phys. Med. Res., p. 135, (1835).—DUMERIL ET BrBRON, Erpét. Génér., VU, 11, p, 1479 (1854).—CoPpE, in Mitchell’s Res. Ven. Rattlesn., p. 125 (1861).—HaAyYDEN, Trans. Am. * From the Latin catenatus, chained, chain-like. - woe A12 REPORT OF NATIONAL MUSEUM, 1893. Philos. Soc., x11, 1862, p. 177.—Crotalophorus tergeminus, GRAY, Synops. Rept., p. 78 (1830).—Gray, Cat. Snakes Brit. Mus., p. 18 (1849).—HoL- BROOK, N. Am. Herpet., 2 ed., 111, p. 29 (1842).—DrEKay, Zool. N. Y., ul, p. 57 (1842).—Bairp and GIRARD, N. Am. Serp., p. 14 (1853).—BatrD, Serp. N.Y., p. 11 (1854).—GEBHARD, Sixth Rep., State Cab. Nat. Hist. N. Y., (p. 22) (1853).—KENNICOTT, Trans. Il]. State Agr. Soc. 1., 1853-54 (p. 592).— Cope, Proc. Phila. Acad., 1859, p. 336.—MaxX v. WIED, Verz. Rept. Reise N. Amer., p. 74(1865).—Smitu, Rept. Geol. Surv. Ohio, Iv, p. 674 (1882).— HiGiry, Trans. Wisc. Acad. Se., vu, p. 161 (1884).—Caudisona tergemina, WaAGLER, Nat. Syst. Amph., p. 176(1830).—Copg, Bull. U. 8. Nat. Mus., No. 1, p.34 (1875).—Covurs and Yarrow, Bull. Geol. Geogr. Sury. Terr. (Hayden’s), Iv, 1878, p. 269.—CRAGIN, Trans. Kansas Acad. Se., vu, p. 121 (1881).—Davis and Rice, Bull. 1. State Labor. Nat. Hist., 1, No.5 (p. 28) (1883).—Davis and Rice, Bull. Chie. Acad. Sc., 1, p. 28 (1883).—YARROW, Bull. U.S. Nat. Mus.,No. 24, pp. 12, 79 (1883).—Hay, Amph. Rept. Indiana, p. 13, pl. u, fig. 15 (1885).—GARNIER, Proc. Canad. Inst. Toronto (3), v, 1888, (p 255).—GrBBs, Wolver. Natural.,1, Feb., 1890, p. 12.—GibBs, For- est and Stream, xxxIx, July 7, 1892, p. 7. 1838.—Crotalus miliarius, KIRTLAND, in Mather’s Sec. Rep. Geol. Sury. Ohio, 1838, p- 167 (not of Linn).—W. L. Sciarer, Snakes, Ind. Mus., p. 74 (1891). 1838.—Crotalus messasaugus, KIRTLAND, in Mather’s Sec. Rep. Geol. Surv. Ohio, 1838, p. 190 (footnote). 1842.—Crotalophorus kirtlandi, LoLBROoK, N. Am. Herpet., 2 ed., 111, p. 31.—Dr Kay, Zool. N. Y., 111, p.57 (1842).—Gray, Cat. Snakes Brit. Mus., p. 18 (1849).—C. kirtlandii, Batrp and GrraRp, Cat. N. Am. Serp., p. 16 (1853).—KeENNiIcoTT, Trans. Ill. State Agr. Soc., 1, 1853-’54 (p.592).— Corer, Proc. Phila. Acad., 1859, p. 336. 1850.—Crotaphorus, sp., AGASSIZ, Lake Superior, p. 381. 1854.—Crotalophorus massasauga, BAIRD, Serp. N. York, p. 12. 1882.—Crotalophorus tergeminus, var. kirtlandii, SmMiTH, Rep. Geol. Surv. Ohio, Iv, p. 674.—H1G ry, Trans. Wise. Acad. Se., vu, 1884, p. 161. 1882.—Crotalophorus catenatus catenatus Cops, Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus., xiv, 1891 (No. 882), p. 685.—TayYLor,,Amer. Natural., xxvi, Sep., 1892, p. 752. Figures. HOLBROOK, N. Am. Herpet., 2 ed., 111, pll. v, vi (1842).—AGassiz, Lake Superior, pl. v1, figs. 6-8 (1850).—DumiRIL and Brsron, Erpét. Génér., Atlas, pl. LXXX1v bia, fig. 5 (1854).—BarrD, Pac. R. P. Rep., x, Rept., pl. Xv, figs. 9, 11 (1859).—GarMAN, Rept. Batr. N. Am.,1, pl. 1X, fig. 2 (1883). Description.*—Twenty-five rows of dorsal scales, strongly carinated, with the exception of the first row, which is perfectly smooth. Vertical Fig. 50. HEAD OF SISTRURUS CATENATUS, SHOWN FROM TOP AND SIDE. plate {frontal] subhexagonal, pointed posteriorly. Seven longitudinal Series of blotches. A narrow band of yellowish white extends from the pit.to the neck in passing close to the angle of the mouth (figs. 49, 50). * By C. Girard, in Baird and Girard’s N. Am. Serp., p. 14, from specimens from Wis- consin, Michigan, and Ohio. Report of National Museum, 1893 —Stejneger. PLATE 5. MASSASAUGA,—SISTRURUS CATENATUS, From Holbrook, North Am. Herpetology. POISONOUS SNAKES OF NORTH AMERICA. 413 The ground color above is brown; the blotches are deep chestnut- brown, blackish externally, and with a yellowish-white margin. The dorsal blotches are 34 in number from the head to the region opposite the anus, 26 of which are transversely and irregularly oblong, anteriorly and posteriorly emarginated—less so, however, posteriorly; 8 are sub- circular. Five or 6 exist on the tail from the anus to its tip, extending on the sides, the last two forming sometimes a complete ring. The next Series on either’ side is composed of small blotches, but as intensely colored as in the other series. They alternate with the dorsal ones. They have no regularity either in outline or position, The second lateral row is composed of. the largest lateral blotches. They are transversely oblong or oval on the second, third, fourth, fifth, and sixth rows of seales, and opposite the blotches of the dorsal series; consequently alternating with third series above. The first lateral series again is composed of blotches intermediate in size between those of the third and second series; they occupy the first and second rows of scales, and extend somewhat to the abdominal scutelle |ventrals, or gastrosteges|, and alternating with the adjoining series. Two undulated vitte extend from, the supraorbital plates along the neck to the first dorsal blotch, and often confluent with the latter. A linear vitta margined with yel- lowish white extends from the posterior edge of the eye to the sides of the neck; the inferior yellow margin is the broadest, and passes from the pit close to the angle of the mouth, turning forward to the middle of the lower jaw, inclosing a semielliptical brown patch. Two elongated yellowish spots may be observed diverging from both sides of the pit to the lip. The cephalic plates are deep chestnut-brown; a transverse light brown band extends across the head from one orbit to the other. Variation.—The ground color varies from brownish gray, through brown, to blackish, the latter being the so-called C. kirtlandi. It appears that specimens living in Swamps and marshy places are chiefly of the latter color. The alleged differences in the shape of the head between Ohio and Wisconsin specimens (Smith, loc. cit.) 1 have been unable to verify. Geographical distribution.—The area inhabited, now or formerly, by the Massasauga lies approximately between the seventy-seventh and ninety-eighth meridians and the thirty-eighth and forty-fifth parallels. In the State of New York they*have been found in Genesee County, in the western portion, draining into Lake Ontario, where their occur- rence in the town of Byron was recorded for the first time in 1853 by Mr. John Gebhard. They then inhabited a white-cedar swamp con- taining an area of about 1,000 acres. In Ohio, whence came the types of Kirtland’s CO. messasaugus (or Holbrook’s C. kirtlandi), they are presumed to occur in all parts. It is also common in parts of Michigan, though it must be remembered that this expression “ com- mon” in all these snakes is a very indefinite term. The accessible ree- ord may show them to have been common in a given place at the time 414 REPORT OF NATIONAL MUSEUM, 1893. it was made, yet at the present day one may search long and often in the same place and not find one. Dr. Hay says that it is yet abundant in some localities in Indiana, but he has not been able to confirm its occurrence south of Indianapolis. He also states that on the prairies of Illinois, before the country became thickly populated, they were extremely abundant, and the killing of two or three dozen of thein in a season was not an unusual thing for any farmer’s boy, while now, in that saine region, not one is seen in years. H.Garman states that it occurs on the prairies throughout Ilinois, but I can find no reliable records for the southern part. The only place where Hurter has found it there is the “‘ Wet Prairie,” near Edwardsville, Madison County, where they seem to be common, however. The massasauga also occurs in suitable localities in Wisconsin, Minnesota, and Iowa. Taylor quotes it as com- mon in eastern and middle Nebraska, and the record for Kansas is similar. Farther in the Southwest it is replaced by S. edwardsii. In the Northeast the Massasauga extends into Canada, where it occurs in various localities in the peninsula of Ontario. The National Museum has a specimen from Lucknow, by Dr. Garnier (No. 12752), and Mr. James M. Macoun informs me that he knows of specimens from Georgian Bay, Lake Huron, and Pelee Point, Lake Erie. Habits —The Massasauga is emphatically a species of the prairies and their swamps and marshes. Its life history offers as yet some unsolved or disputed questions, but thanks to Dr. O. P. Hay’s inter- esting studies of this species, much light has of late been thrown upon it, and to those who want a more detailed biography I would recom- mend his article, ‘The Massasauga and its Habits,” in the American Naturalist (Vol. xx1, 1887, pp. 211-218), which also contains some interesting observations on two specimens which brought forth living young—one five, the other six—in captivity. Being a comparatively small species, the maximum length probably not exceeding 40 inches, its bite is correspondingly less dangerous than the larger Rattlesnakes. There seems to be great diversity of opinion, however, as to the extent of its poisonous power, for while Dr. Kirtland asserts that the bite is scarcely more than the sting of a hornet, the farmers fear it very much, and Dr. Hay thinks that one Massasauga would probably be equivalent in virulence to a whole colony of hornets, which I think is more nearly correct. Dr. Hay also characterizes the statement that the sound of the rat- tle of the Massasauga is so feeble that it is scarcely audible, as cer- tainly incorrect, asserting from experience that it can be heard ata distance of several feet. Dr. Morris Gibbs, who has examined a great many specimens, found the largest number of rings in the rattle to be 10. The largest number in any specimen in the National Museum is 9 (No. 12752). Dr. Taylor, writing of the Massasauga in Nebraska, states that an examination of the contents of the stomachs of this species shows that SS ae eS POISONOUS SNAKES OF NORTH AMERICA. 415 its food is almost wholly made up of mice and other rodents, and he consequently considers it decidedly useful, aside from its venomous qualities. It seems hardly advisable, however, to suggest protection for this species on this account, but I would advise that the farmers spare the life of every large harmless snake on their land, and there would be no harm in killing off every Rattler, for harmless snakes will destroy the mice fully as well as the poisonous ones. THE GULF-COAST MASSASAUGA. Sistrurus catenatus consors,* (B. & G.). 1853.—Crotalophorus consors, BAIRD and GIRARD, Cat. N. Am. Serp., p. 12.—Dvu- MERIL and BIBRON, Erpét. Génér., Vu, ii, p. 1482 (1854).—Batrp, Pac. R. R. Rep., x, Reptiles, p. 14 (1859). 1883.—Sistrurus cateratus, var. consors, GARMAN, Rept. Batr. N. Am., 1, Ophid., p. 176. 1892.—? Sistrurus catenatus, GARMAN, Bull. Essex Inst., xxtv, p. 4. Figure.—BairD, Pac. R. R. Rep., x, Rept. pl. xxiv, fig. 8 (1859). The status of the present form is very doubtful. It was described by Baird and Girard from a single specimen collected at Indianola, Tex., which now appears to be lost. The original description does not fur- nish any very tangible character by which to separate it from typical S. catenatus with 25 scale rows, but its scutellation is compared chietly with S. miliarius, which seems to indicate that it may have had the pre- ocular and posterior nasal separated, although the otherwise so char- acteristic color pattern of the head is that of S. catenatus. The figure in the Pacific Railroad Report |pl. XXIrv, fig. 8], gives only the top of the head, but the above suggestion is strengthened by that figure, which certainly seems to show a separation of the shields mentioned by a loreal, but whether by an upper loreal, detached from the anterior portion of the preocular, or by a large loreal proper, is not clear, although the former alternative seems most probable. In that case we have probably to do with an individual variation only, and the oniy ground for the separa- tion of the subspecies would be the smallness of the dorsal spots. The 25 scale rows would then distinguish it from the subspecies NS. ¢. edwardsii. Tam inclined to think that the S. catenatus reported by Garman (Bull. Essex. Inst., xxtv, 1892, p.4.) from Deming’s Bridge, Matagorda County, Tex., not very far from the type locality of S. consors, and which, like the latter, had 25 scale rows, belong here. They have, moreover, 48 to 51 dorsal blotches. For the sake of completeness, I add the original description by C. Girard, Description.—Twenty-five rows of dorsal seales, all carinated except the two first rows on either side. Seven series of blotches, one dorsal and 3 on each side, all very small. A yellowish white line passing from behind the nostril below and behind the eye. *From the Latin consors, a partner, companion, or relative. 416 REPORT OF NATIONAL MUSEUM, 1893. Resembles C. miliarius in its general appearance, but without the ver- tebral brownish red line. The ground color is olivaceous brown, the blotches of a deeper brown, encircled with a black fillet margined with a whitish yellow line. There are about 50 blotches in the dorsal series, emarginated anteriorly only, 30 of which are transversely elongated, very irregular; the 20 remaining ones nearly circular, with regular out- lines. The blotches of the lateral rows are comparatively small and of nearly equal size, though sometimes one of either row may appear much the largest. The blotches of the first lateral series are opposite to those of the dorsal and affect the first, second, and third rows of scales and the extremities of the abdominal scutelle {ventrals, or gas- trosteges]. The blotches of the second series alternate with these, extending on the third, fourth, and fifth rows of scales. The blotches of the third series are obsolete and alternate with those of the second series, and are generally opposite to those of the dorsal series situated in the fifth, sixth, and seventh rows. The upper surface of the head is brown; there are 2 vittz extending from the vertex along the neck to the first dorsal blotch. A broader and deep chestnut-brown band extends from the eye to the neck. The frontal region is deeper brown than the vertex. A yellowish white line starts from the nostrils near the upper surface of the head, extending backward, in passing between the eye and the pit, to the angle of the mouth. n DORSAL COLOR PATTERN OF CROTALUS MOLOSSUS. (|g not occur, or did not occur before avy PAR AAT, SG) they were exterminated by man, yet (\} ae Bei the area inhabited by more than one A] Ate a species of Crotalus is comparatively Wh a | Mi WT J q very limited. Thus in the southeast ee , | @. the range of the Diamond Rattle- Va) el [] ( snake, C. adamanteus, is overlapped ] n i) f ti) bj ) to a great extent by that of the \ We 6 [eee SR ge ) ne vA Mee ie "| Banded Rattlesnake, C. horridus, eae while in the center of the Union DORSAL COLOR PATTERN OF CROTALUS vorripes. there is another limited area in- aby habited by two species, viz, the . Banded Rattlesnake, C. horridus, and the Prairie Rattler, C. con- Nuentus. As we approach the Mexican boundary and the northward exten- sion of the Sierra Madre the density of the distribution of the species wer increases rapidly, until in southern BOREAL, GORE : ae pe ate ahs Arizona we find no less than 7 dif- CONFLUENTUS. ferent species of Rattlesnakes, viz: ; C. molossus, C. atrox, C. confluentus, C. tigris, C. cerastes, C. lepidus, and C. mitchellii pyrrhus, out of a total of 10 species inhabiting the entire area of the United States. North of our northern boundary only two species of Crotalus extend a short distance into the British possessions, in the western part C. lucifer and in the central portion C. DORSAL COLOR PATTERN OF CROTALUS LEPIDUS. confluentus. Ny pe St Oe E Mm) aaa A — et ale le i ct ee i ct DA ee | POISONOUS SNAKES OF NORTH AMERICA. 423 Fig. do. HEAD OF CROTALUS, FROM SIDE. ilnfralabials; 7 loreal; J} lower loreal; 12 upper loreal; 1! anterior nasal; 1? posterior nasal; p preocular; r rostral; s supralabials; s! Ist supralabial; s?2d supralabial; so Supraocular. nostril Fig. 57. Fig. 56, HEAD OF CROTALUS MITCHELLII FROM FRONT. FRONT VIEW OF PRECEDING FIGURE. (See explanation of Fig. 55.) Synopsis of the species of Crotalus occurring in North America north of Mexico. a’ Anterior nasal in coutact with rostral (figs. 55, 56). b! Upper preocular not divided vertically (figs. 55, 56). c! External border of supraocular not produced into a horn-like process (figs. 55, 56). d' Dark spots on back with two symmetrical light spots, one on each side of oncexobienay Ibave\ (GtWie, Il). eee Aone Sec cece sosac cdaos C. molossus. ad Dark spots on back, solid, or with only one median light spot. e' Dorsal pattern, consisting of dark chevron bands (fig. 52) .----. C. horridus. e? Dorsal pattern, consisting of more or less squarish spots or straight cross bands (figs. 53, 54). f) Rostral at least as high as wide (fig. 63). g: Light postsuperciliary line reaches the second scale row above com- missure at least two scales anterior to angle of mouth (fig. 58). h! A well-defined vertical white line on first labial and anterior nasal, occupying the posterior half of the latter (fig. 58) ..C. adamanteus. kh? No white line on first labial and nasal, which are uniform in color and more or less dusted over with minute blackish dots, i! Predominant color grayish-brown --.----...-------------- C. atroxr. i? Predominant color reddish-brown . --..-.----------- C. atrox ruber. g? Light postsuperciliary line reaches the second scale row above commis- sure at corner of mouth or not at all (figs. 59, 60). h' Light postsuperciliary line one scale wide; dark postocular patch starts from below anterior angle of eye (fig. 59) -...C. conflwentus. i? Light postsuperciliary line two scales wide; dark postocular patch starts from below center of eye (fig. 60) .----..---.-.-- C. lucifer. 72 Rostral wider than high (fig. 61) - <0 -- - ae see = C, tigris. c? External border of supraocular produced into a horn-like process (Gi Od) aos cesoke Sh toc ooede scosad cose eSabeoeeds sone C. cerastes. b? Upper preocular divided vertically (fig. 62) -...-.-.--.----...-..- eC lepiduss a? Anterior nasal separated from rostral by seales (tig. 63). i PirsilkonraTehin Color y AGING eaaes 052 ce Sasoos ced eo5 soos cosas oseeec C. mitchellit. ParewominantiCOlOk LOW. se-- see cee es aes = eee eral C. mitchellii pyrrhus. 424 REPORT OF NATIONAL MUSEUM, 1893. 7 SS a oe Fig. 58. . Fig. 59. Fig. 60. COLOR PATTERN OF SIDE OF HEAD OF CROTALUS COLOR PATTERN OF SIDE OF HEAD OF CROTALUS CONFLUENTUS. LUCIFER. w Fig. 61. DIAGRAM OF LOW Fig. 62. Fig. 63. ROSTRAL. HEAD OF CROTALUS LEPIDUS FROM SIDE. DIAGRAM OF HIGH ROSTRAL. h Height; w width. (See explanation of Fig. 55.) h Height; w width. THE DoOG-¥FACED RATTLESNAKE. Crotalus molossus,* Baird & Girard. Lea tals 1853.—Crotalus molossus, BAIRD and GIRARD, N. Am. Serp., p. 10.—Barrp, Mex. Bound. Sury., 11, Rept., p. 14 (1859).—Corer, Proc. Phila. Acad., 1859, p. 338.—Cork, Bull. U. S. Nat. Mus., No. 1, p.33 (1875).—Cops, in Wheeler’s Surv. W. 100 Mer., v, p. 533 (1875).—Copkg, Proc. Phila. Acad., 1883, p. 12.—CopE, Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus., x1v, 1891, p. 689 (1892).—Yarrow, Bull. U.S. Nat. Mus., No. 24, pp. 12, 78 (1883).—GARMAN, Rept. Batr. N. Am., 1, Ophid., p. 118, (1883).—Caudisona molossus, COPE, in Mitchell’s Res. Ven. Rattlesn., p. 124, (1861).—Copr, Proc. Phila. Acad., 1866, pp. 307, 308.— Cours, in Wheeler’s Sury. W. 100 Mer., v, p. 605 (1875). 1854.—Crotalus ornatus, HALLOWELL, Proc. Phila. Acad., 1854, (p. 192).—Hat- LOWELL, Pac. R. R. Rep., x, Parke’s Route, p. 23 (1859).—CopE, Proc. Phila. Acad., 1859, p. 338. 1883.— Crotalus durissus, var. molossus, GARMAN, Rept. Batr. N. Am., 1, Ophid., Delile Figures.—Batrp, Mex. Bound. Sury., 11, Rept., pl. 11 (1859).—BairD, Pac. R. R. Rep., X, Rept., pl. xxiv, fig. 5.—HALLOWELL, Pac. R. R. Rep., x, pl. 11 (1859). *From the Greek woAoood¢ or Latin molossus, the Molossian wolfdog, bulldog. Report of National Museum, 1893.—Stejnever PLATE 8. DoG-FACED RATTLESNAKE,—CROTALUS MOLOSSUS. From Hallowell, Pacific R. R. Rep. Fi POISONOUS SNAKES OF NORTH AMERICA. 425 Description.*—Muzzle broad; rostral small. Scales between super- ciliaries [supraoculars| small, uniform, except the two anterior. Two frontal plates [internasals|, 4 postfrontal [prefrontals], 2 intersupercil- iary [interorbitals], allin contact. Five rows scales between the labials and suborbital row; middle row not extending beyond the middle of the orbit; labials, 18 above, fifth and sixth largest; 17 below. Dorsal rows of scales, 29; two external rows, small. Tail uniform black. Color roll sulphur; a series of chestnut-brown transverse lozenges [fig. 53] with exterior corners produced to the abdomen; centers of lozenges with one or two spots; each scale but one color; a brown patch below and behind the eye. One of the most strongly marked of all species. Head very broad in front; outline nearly rectangular. Rostral small. Two anterior front- als [internasals]; behind these, four plates, the exterior resting on the superciliary; behind these two other plates, between and ‘in contact with the superciliaries [supraorbitals]. Anterior nasal subtriangular. Top of head with numerous smooth subtuberculous scales. Suborbitals large, extending to the anterior canthus. General aspect smoother than in crotali generally; scales rounded at the posterior apex, carinated but slightly. General color above, that of roll sulphur; beneath, pale yellowish; posteriorly, very faintly clouded with brownish. Tail black. Anteri- orly the scutelle [ventrals, or gastrosteges| are entirely immaculate. Along the back is a series of transverse reddish or chestnut-brown lozenges embraced in a width of 12 or 14 scales and 4 or 5 seales long, and with the exterior angles produced to the abdomen [fig. 53]. These lozenges are frames with the outline generally one seale in width and with the centers of the ground color; sometimes divided by a median line of brown so as to show two yellowish spots inside of the lozenges. The scales exterior to the lozenges are rather lighter. Sometimes the brown rings and the lozenges widen at the abdomen and indicate lateral spots of four scales; at others, and especially ante- riorly, the rings are obsolete and the brown is in a dorsal series. In fact for the anterior fourth of the body we have a dorsal patch of brown Showing alternately, at successive intervals, one large yellowish spot and then a pair of smaller ones, owing to the confluence of the sue- cessive lozenges. The superciliaries and scales anterior to them, as well as broad patch below and behind the eye, light greenish-brown. Tail uniform dark-brown above, paler beneath. A remarkable character of this species is that each individual scale is of the same uniform tint to its base, and not showing two colors as in other species. Variation.—The head scutellation of the present species is exceed- ingly variable. Ihave seen about nine specimens, hardly two of which * Original description by 8. F. Baird, in Baird and Girard’s N. Am. Serp., p. 10, from a specimen from New Mexico,-U. 8S. Nat. Mus., No. 485. 426 REPORT OF NATIONAL MUSEUM, 1893. are alike in that respect. In all of them the snout is covered above with large shields, which sometimes extend to between the orbits, but their number and mutual relation is very variable, and often they are more or less separated by small scales. “The size and shape of the ros- tral also varies, and the rows of scales between eye and labials vary between 4 and 6. The coloration of this undoubtedly our most beautifully tinted crotalid is more stable. The chief variations consist in the greater or lesser degree of definition of the spots, and in the color of the tail, which in most specimens is solidly blackish though in a few it presents alter- nating cross bands of black and light color. Geographical distribution.—In the main the range of C. molossus, at least within the borders of the United States, coincides with that of C. lepidus, being confined to the States and Territories bordering upon the Mexican frontier. It was first described from a specimen collected at Santa Rita del Cobre, near the present Fort Bayard, in New Mexico, and not far from that locality it has since been taken by Prof. Cope. Henshaw procured it in southern Arizona, probably not far from Fort Buchanan, whence the Museum got a specimen from Dr. Irwin, while quite recently Dr. Thimothy E. Wilcox has sent it from Fort Huachuca. Two specimens, collected by Dr. E. Coues on San Francisco Mountain, Arizona, were identified by Cope as the present species. C. lepidus has not been found so far from the Mexican boundary. The range into Mexico is unknown. The Texan specimen, upon which Hallowell based the (C. ornatus, was collected by Dr. Heermann at the Pecos River, en route between El Paso and San Antonio, and is so far the only specimen obtained in Texas. Habits —Nothing is known of its habits, except that it is found among rocks. THE BANDED RATTLESNAKE. Crotalus horridus,~ Linneus. Plate 9. 1758.—Crotalus horridus, LINNZUS, Syst. Nat., 10 ed., 1, p. 214.—LINnN-£us, Syst. Nat., 12 ed., 1, p. 372 (1766).—LECONTE, Brot Phila. Acad., 1853 (p. 417).—Copr, Proce. Phila. Acad., 1859, p. 338.—Cope, Bull. U. S. Nat. Mus., No.1, Check-list, p. 33 (1875).—Copr, in Wheeler’s Surv. W. 100 Mer., v, p. 534 (1875).—Corr, BE U.S. Nat. Mus., x1v, 1891 (No. 382), p. 693 (1892).—YaRRow, Bull. U.S. Nat. Mus., No. 24, Check List, pp. 12, 74 oe —CRAGIN, Tris: ee Wea: Se., Vi1, p. 121 (1881),—Gar- MAN, N. Am. Rept. Batr.,1, Ophid., pp. 115, 174, pl. rx, fig. 1 (1883).— GARMAN, List. N. Am. Rept. Batr., p. 35 (1884).—TRvuE, in Hammond's South Carolina, p. 235 (1883).—Davis and Rick, Bull. Il. State Lab. Nat. ae 1, No. 5, 1883 (p.27).—Davis and Rice, Bull. Chie. Acad. Sc., . 28 (1883).—Hay, Amph. Rept. Indiana, p.13 (1885). See a ae Indiana, p. 128 (1893).—JorDAN, Man. Vert. North. U. §.,5 *~From the Latin horridus, horrible, fonnible: PLATE 9. Report of National Museum, 1893.—Stejneger. ‘MMMASN] [PUOMEN “S “f 94] UL 4SBO v WOLT “SNGIYYOH SNIVLOYO—‘SMVNSSTILLVY Q3aqNvg POISONOUS SNAKES OF NORTH AMERICA. 427 ed., p. 199 (1888).— BARRINGER, Ven. Rept. U. S., p. 4 (1891).—H. Gar- MAN, Bull. Ill. State Lab. Nat. Hist., m1, p. 311 (1892).—H. GaRMAN, Bull. Ess. Inst., XXv1I, 1894, p. 36.—Crotalophorus horridus, HouTTUYN, Linn. , Natuur. Hist., v1, p. 309 (1764).—Caudisona horrida, FLEMING, Philos. | Zool., 11, p. 294 (1822).—Corr, in Mitchell’s Res. Ven. Rattlesn., p. 122 (1861).—Copr, Proce. Phila. Acad., 1866, p. 309.—CouUEs, Proc. Phila. Acad., 1871, p. 48. 1768.— Caudisona durissus, LAURENTI, Syn. Rept., p. 93 (in part only).—Crotalus durissus, GMELIN, Syst. Nat., I, iil, p. 1081 (in part only) (1788).— LATREILLE, Hist. Nat. Rept., 111, p.190 (1802).—DaupIN, Hist. Nat. Rept., v, p. 304, pl. Lxviil, fig. 1, 2 (1803).—HARLAN, Journ. Phil. Acad., v, 1827, p. 368.—HARLAN, Med. Phys. Res. (p. 135) (1835).—ScHLEGEL, Ess. Phys. Serp., 1, p.192; 11, p. 565 (1837).—KIRTLAND, in Mather’s Sec. Rep. Geol. Surv., Ohio, pp. 167, 189 (1838).—STorER, Rep. Rept. Mass., p. 233 (1839).—HoOLBROOK, N. Am. Herp., 1 ed., 11, p.81, pl. xvir (1838) ; 2 ed., 111, p. 9, pl. 1 (1842).—DrEKay, Zool. N. Y., m1, p, 55 (1842),— THOMPSON, Hist. Vermont, 1, p. 118 (1842).—Batrp and GIRARD, Cat. N. Am. Serp., p. 1(1853).—LEConrTE, South. Med. Surg. Journ., 1x, 1853, pp. 651, 663.—BairD, Serp. N. York, p.9 (1854).—Batrp, Pac. R. R. Rep., x, Reptiles,p. 14, pl. xxiv, fig. 1 (1859).—Bairp, Pac. R. R. Rep., x, 35th Par., Whipple’s Route, p. 39 (1859).—DuMErILet BIBRON, Erpét. Gén., vr, p- 1465 (1854).—KeENNIcoTT, Trans. Il]. State Agr. Soc., 1853-1854, 1 (p. 592).—JAN, Rev. Mag. Zool., 1859, Extr., p. 28.—JAN, Elence. Sist. Ofid., p. 123 (1863 ).—Foaa, See. Ann. Rep. Nat. Hist. Geol. Maine, p. 141 (1863).— VERRILL, Proc. Boston Soc. Nat. Hist., 1x, 1865, p. 197.—Hoy, Smith- son. Rep., 1864, p. 485.—ALLEN, Proc. Boston Soc. Nat. Hist., 1869, pp. 179, 203.—SmitH, Rep. Geol. Surv. Ohio, Iv, 1882, p.672.—HIGLEy, Trans. Wise. Acad. Se., vi, 1884, p. 161. 1799.— Crotalus boiquira, BEAuUvVots, Trans. Am. Philos. Soc., 1v, p. 368, pl. fae. p. 380, low. fig. 1802.—Crotalus atricaudatus, LATREILLE, Hist, Nat. Rept., 111, p. 209.—DaUDIN, Hist. Nat. Rept., v, p. 316 (1803). 1818.—Crotalinus cyanurus, RAFINESQUE, Amer. Month. Mag., ur (p. 446); rv, p. 41. 1859.— ? Crotalus durissus, var. concolor, JAN, Rev. Mag. Zool., 1859, Extr., p. 28. 1859.—Crotalus durissus, var. melanurus, JAN, Rev. Mag. Zool., 1859, Extr., p. 28. 1&83.—Crotalus horridus, var. atricaudatus, GARMAN, Rept. Batr. N. Am.,1, Ophid., Dp) exe hie Figures: CATESBY, Carolina, I1, pl. XLI (1743).—LACEPEDE, Quad. Ovip. Serp., 1, (pl. xvi, figs. 1, 3) (1789).—BONNATERRE, Ophiol., (pl. 1, fig. 3) (1790).— SHaw, Gen. Zool., m1, pl. LXXXviit (1802).—DAUDIN, Hist. Nat. Rept., pl. LXVill, figs. 1, 2 (1803).—GuERIN, Icon. Regne Anim., (pl. xx1u, fig. 2) (1829-38).—SCHLEGEL, Ess. Phys. Serp., Atlas, pl. xx, figs. 15, 16 (1837).— HOLBROOK, N. Amer. Herpet., 1 ed., 11, pl. Xvi (1838) ; 2 ed., m1, pl. 1 (1842).— DEKay, Zool. N. York, 111, pl. 1x, fig. 19 (1842).—BatrD, Serp. N. York, pl. 1, fig. 1 (1854).—DuMERIL et BIBRON, Erpét. Gén., Atlas, pl. LXXxIv bis, fig. 1 (1854).—Batrp, Pac. R. R. Rep., x, pl. Xxrv, fig. 1 (1859).—JAn, Icon. Ophid. livr. 46, pl. 1, figs. 1, 2 (1874).— GarMAN, Rept. Batr. N. Am., 1, Ophid., pl. rx, fig. 1(1883).—BREHM’Ss Thierleben, 3 ed., vi1, p. 440 (1892). Description.*—Head angular. Scales between the superciliaries sinall, numerous, uniform. Plates above snout, 2 anterior frontal [inter- nasals| and 5 postfrontal {[prefrontals|.. Suborbital chain continuous, of “By 8. F. Baird, from a specimen from Huntingdon Co., Pennsylvania, U. 8. Nat. Mus., No. 245. Baird & Girard, N. Am. Serp., pp. 1-2. 428 REPORT OF NATIONAL MUSEUM, 1893. large scales: two rows between this and labials. Labials 12 to 14 above, fifth largest; 13 tol15 below. Rows of scales on the back 23 to 25, all carinated: carination on outer row obsolete. Tailblack. Above sulphur-brown, with 2 rows of confluent brown lozenges. Light line from superciliary to angle of the mouth; behind this a dark patch (figs. 64, 65). Head above covered with small subtuberculous scales. Superciliaries (supraoculars) large. Anterior frontals (internasals) large, triangular, emarginated behind to receive a series of three small plates. A single subhexagonal plate between the superciliary (Supraocular) and anterior Fig. 64. Fig. 65. HEAD OF CROTALUS HORRIDUS, TOP VIEW. HEAD OF CROTALUS HORRIDUS, SIDE VIEW. ( After Baird, ) (After Baird. frontal (internasal). The exterior plate of the posterior frontal (pre- frontal) row is much the largest, and is in contact with the super- ciliaries (supraoculars). A series of 3 or 4 large flat scales extend from the posterior extremity of the superciliary (supraocular). Scales on the cheeks (temporals) very large, truncate. Anterior orbitals (preoculars) double; the upper one rectangular, elongated longitudi. nally, separated from the (posterior) nasal by 2 small plates (loreals). General color above that of roll sulphur; beneath, whitish yellow. Along the back is a double series of subrhomboidal blotches, looking as if they had been in contact, and then the line of junction partially effaced for the 3 or 4 central rows. (See fig. 52.) The impression conveyed of the color of these blotches is that of coarse mottlings of soot or gunpowder grains, more crowded exteriorly. There are 21 of these blotches from the head to the anus, the tail being entirely black. The rhomboids are inclosed within about 12 dorsal series of scales. Directly opposite to these spots on each side is a series of subtrian- gular blotches similarly constituted as to color, and extending from the abdomen to about the fifth lateral row, and some 6 or 7 scales long. Anteriorly these are distinct from the dorsal series, but posteriorly they are confluent with them, forming a series of zigzag blotches across the body. The secutelle below show more or less of the grain-like mottlings. Posteriorly the yellow of the body is suffused with darker. There are no markings of lines distinctly visible on the sides of the head. In thecenter of the spaces between the dorsal and lateral series of blotches are indications of small obselete spots, and in some cases POISONOUS SNAKES OF NORTH AMERICA. 429 the yellow scales external to the blotches are of a lighter color than the rest. Number of ventrals (gastrosteges), 166; of subcaudals (urosteges), 25; dorsal scale rows, 23. Total length, 42 inehes; tail, 5 inches. Variation.—There is considerable individual variation, both in seutellation of the head and the ground color of the body. The variation in the scutellation on top of the head is especially marked with regard to the prefrontals and the scales covering the can- thus rostralis. Normally the large plates consist of 2 internasals, 2 supraoculars, and between these, on each side, a large shield, the pre- frontals usually being small scales like those covering the rest of the head. In two of our specimens, however (Nos. 277 and 12748), there are a pair of large prefrontals following the internasals, while in Nos. 277 and 248 there are 2 scutes between the internasal and the supra- ocular on each side instead of 1. The ground color varies greatly from light yellowish and light red- dish gray through brown to almost black in some instances. In old specimens the tail is generally uniform black, but in the young ones it is banded light and black. In many specimens trom localities in the Alleghany Mountains, with a moist climate, this black of the tail and sometimes even of the entire posterior half of the body is often of a deep velvety gloss. In the majority of the Western specimens there is a broad, ill-detined, but very distinet, ochraceous band running down the center of the back. Most of them also have the postocular dark band darker and better defined than Eastern specimens; but I have been unable, with my material, to draw any line sufficiently constant. Geographical distribution.—In former times the Banded Rattlesnake, or “Timber Rattlesnake,” as it is often called in regions where other species also occur, was commonly distributed in suitable localities all over the eastern United States, except the peninsula of Florida, as far west as the subarid portion of the Great Plains, but they have now become exterminated or nearly so, in many localities, having been driven back to the wilderness by the advancing cultivation of the country. Prof. Verrill (Proc. Boston Soc. Nat. Hist., rx, 1863, p. 197), speaking of the reptiles of Norway, Me., states that it is rare, and only found in Albany and Raymond; he had never detected it east of the Androscog- gin River. In Massachusetts, according to Allen (Proc. Boston Soe. Nat. Hist., x11, 1868, p. 179), it is not unfrequent on Mount Tom, and oceasionally killed on rocky hills in several of the towns near or adjoin- ing Springfield; it also occurs at a few similar localities in the eastern part of the State. : In 1886 Prof. A. S. Packard had an article in the American Natu- raliston “ The Rattlesnake in New England” (Vol. xx, pp. 736-737) from which I quote the following: 430 REPORT OF NATIONAL MUSEUM, 1893. We have been told that Rattlesnakes are still occasionally killed in Connecticut near the Rhode Island border. It is generally stated that the last Rattlesnake was killed in Rhode Island twenty years ago, but we are informed by Prof. Battey that one was killed at Tiverton, R. I., within a period of four years. Its skin is now in the museum of the Friends’ School at Providence. Mr. Henry H. Buxton, a member of this school, from Peabody, Mass., gives us the following statement regarding its occurrence at that locality: “In South Peabody there is a rock called Rattlesnake Rock, surrounded by woods in which there are a great many snakes, including the Rattlesnake. During the last year three or four have been killed by different persons. They confine themselves to the part of the town which is the most rocky and slightly elevated. In the winter they get under this rock and go to sleep.” Rattlesnakes are still common in the Milton Hills, near Boston, and at Hyde Park. In confirmation of the occurrence of the Rattlesnake in Connecticut, my friend, Mr. John H. Sage, sent me two specimens in 1893 from Port- land. He wrote me at the same time that quite a number are killed in this immediate vicinity (Portland) each season. As early as 1842 Thompson (Hist. Vermont, 1, p. 119) says that in Vermont they have now nearly disappeared, but that formerly they were found in consid- erable numbers, though mostly confined to a very few localities. In the same year De Kay speaks of the Rattlesnake in the State of New York (Zool. N. Y., 11, p. 57) as follows: The Rattlesnake is common in various parts of the State, and in the Northern States generally appears to prefer rocky situations. They abound in Clinton, Essex, and Warren counties, along the shores of Lakes Champlain and George. Some idea may be formed of their numbers in certain districts in this State by the following extract from the Clairon newspaper, published in Warren County: “Twomen, in three days, killed 1,104 Rattlesnakes on the east side of Tongue Moun- tain,in the town of Bolton. Some of the reptiles were very large, carrying from 15 to 20 rattles. They were killed for their oil, or grease, which is said to be very valuable.” Although numerous in the rocky, mountainous districts of this State, they are rare or entirely wanting in those elevated regions which give rise to the Moose, the Raquet, and the Hudson rivers. They are found in the counties of Sullivan, Ulster, Orange, and Greene. A few still linger in the swamps of Suffolk County. This may be supplemented with the folowing statement from Prof. Baird’s “Serpents of New York,” p. 10 (1854): In New York it seems to be most abundant on the shores of Lake George and Lake Champlain; especially in Rattlesnake Mountain of the former and Rattlesnake den of the latter, a rocky bluff between Westport and Essex. It is a little remarkable that the rattlesnake does not occur in the Adirondack regions of New York; at least, an instance has never come to my knowledge. Such aregion in Peunsylvania would be infested by them. As indicated in the last sentence it is still fairly common in the Alleghany Mountains, from Pennsylvania southwards, though by no means confined to the high altitude, as we have specimens from Wil- inington, in North Carolina, Liberty County and Saint Simons Isle, Georgia, while Dr. E. Coues quotes it as common in the vicinity of Fort Macon, North Carolina, and certainly occurring on the islands as well. POISONOUS SNAKES OF NORTH AMERICA. 431 . The Banded Rattlesnake probably does not enter the Florida penin- sula proper, but the National Museum is indebted to Judge Bell for a fine specimen from Gainesville, in the interior, at the base of the penin- sula. It occurs also in all the other Southern States, and I have even seen a specimen from Houma, in the pine lands southwest of New Orleans. In the mountains of Tennessee and Kentucky the Banded Rattlesnake is still fairly common, but not so in Ohio and Indiana. Kirtland, as early as 1838 (in Mather’s Sec. Rep. Geol. Surv. Ohio, p. 167), stated that in the former State it was then but rarely seen, though formerly very abundant, and with regard to Indiana we have Dr. O. P. Hay’s recent assertion (Batr. Rept. Indiana, 1893, p. 129) that it is to be found, in all probability, in nearly all the counties of Indiana, though in most places quite rare. He can only name two localities where it has been taken recently and record of it preserved, viz, New Harmony and Monroe County. In Michiganit appears to be rare, the only definite record I can lay hand on at present being that of Dr. Morris Gibbs (Wolverine Naturalist, February, 1890, p. 12) of a specimen killed in Kalamazoo County. H. Garman (Bull. Il. State Lab. Nat. Hist., 111, 1892, p. 312) is author- ity for the statement that it occurs throughout Llinois in hilly, forest regions, though being rapidly exterminated, while Higley (Trans. Wis. Acad. Se., Vil, 1854, p. 161), in regard to its distribution in Wisconsin, has only this to say, that it was formerly very common, but is now sel- dom met, and that it may be found in the rocky bluffs of the larger rivers. Mr. Julius Hurter (Trans. St. Louis Acad. Se., vi, Dee. 1893, p. 258) has an interesting note ona local increase of this snake. Years ago, he says, it was rather scarce in St. Clair County, II1., as in those days there was no stock law, and the pigs roamed around and exter- minated a good many snakes, but since the stock law has gone into effect, compelling swine to be penned up, the snakes have become more numerous again. In early spring they are found near the bluffs under rocks, but later on they go to the wheat fields and meadows, where they are very safe till harvest time, when a good many are destroyed by the farm hands. West of the Mississippi they are still found in eastern Iowa, at least, Kansas, Missouri, Arkansas, and Indian Territory. The Banded Rat- tlesnake even extends into Texas, as Dr. Shumard sent to the Smith- sonian Institution a specimen collected on the upper Brazos during Capt. Marcy’s exploration of that river. Habits.—In a general way most of what has been written about the habits of the rattlesnake refers to the present species. In contradis- tinction to the Water Rattlesnake, C. adamanteus, and the Prairie Rat- tlesnake, C. confluentus, the present species is often called the “‘ Timber Rattler,” because of its predilection for wooded districts. It does undoubtedly often in summer take up its abode in prairies and mead- 432 REPORT OF NATIONAL MUSEUM, 1893. ows; but it prefers rocky and mountainous places, where it can find holes and erevices to hide itself, or sunny ledges, where it may enjoy the heat of the day. It has been repeatedly denied that the Rattlesnake climbs trees, and it is certain enough that it does not do so habitually. It is but ill fitted for climbing, yet there are unquestionable proofs that they do so ocea- sionally. Of course, they do not climb up tall, smooth, perpendicular trunks, but it is not more difficult for it to climb up a rough-barked slanting tree with plenty of side branches than to wriggle up the rocks of a mountain side. The food of the Banded Rattlesnake consists in all sort of smaller warm-blooded animals which may come its way, as rabbits, squirrels, rats, mice, and an oceasional bird. Holbrook pictures this species as remarkably slow and sluggish, lying quietly in wait for his prey, and never wantonly attacking nor destroying animals, except as food, unless disturbed by them. A single touch, however, will effect this; even rattling the leaves in his neighborhood is sufficient to irritate him. On such oceasions he immediately coils himself, shakes his rattles vio- lently in sign of rage, and strikes at whatever is placed within his reach. In his native woods, Holbrook continues, one may pass within a few feet of him unmolested. Though aware of the passenger’s pres- ence, he either lies quiet or glides away to a more retired spot. He never follows the object of his rage, whether an animal that has unwa- rily approached so near as to touch him, or only a stick thrust at him to provoke his anger, but strikes on the spot, and prepares to repeat the blow, or he may slowly retreat like an unconquered enemy, sure of his strength, but not choosing further combat. Compared with the Diamond-backed Rattlesnake, the Banded Rattler is the more timid and less aggressive. Speaking of these animals one does not quite feel like characterizing any of them as “ gentle,” yet this is an expression used by many a one who has had plenty of experience with them. The late Gen. Kirby Smith once told me of an incident which illustrates the amount of provocation a Rattlesnake will pass unnoticed under certain circumstances. Gen. Smith’s home in Ten- nessee was located on a high plateau, and a narrow path led from the house to the small railway station in the valley below. One day a party of ladies went down the path in Indian file, the general in the lead, and the rear being brought up by a barefooted lad carrying a valise. Suddenly the latter shouted. A Rattlesnake was lying coiled in the path, and he bad just discovered it in stepping over it without touching it. By the merest chance they had all avoided stepping upon it, though it seemed almost impossible that the ladies’ dresses should not have touched it. Gen. Smith said he felt lke sparing the snake’s life. In captivity a Banded Rattlesnake may be handled with impunity by a self-possessed man, if he moves quietly and deliberately, not frightening it by any sudden and unexpected movements. There even seems to be truth in some of the stories about children having been POISONOUS SNAKES OF NORTH AMERICA. 433 found playing witb and earrying about live Rattlesnakes without having been hurt.* It is somewhat curious that the breeding habits of this species are still almost unknown. At least, very little definite information is on record. The time of pairing is difficult to ascertain. The number of young born at one birth appears to be about nine. The largest of a number of embryos preserved by Prof. S. F. Baird (U.S. Nat. Mus., No. 1292) and apparently ready to be born is about 245 mm. (94 inches) long, with a diameter of 12 mm. (one-half inch). THE DIAMOND RATTLESNAKE. Crotalus adamanteus, Beauyois. Plate 10. 1799.—Crolatus adamanteus, t BEAUVOIS, Trans. Am. Philos. Soc. Iv, p. 368.—Say, Sillim. Am. Journ. Sc., I, 1819, p. 263.—HoLBrook, N. Am. Herpet., Led., Il, p. 77 (1838).—HoxLsrook, N. Am. Herpet., 2 ed., 11, p. 17 (1842).— DE Kay, Zool. New York, 11, p. 57 (1842).—Bairp and GIRARD, Cat. N. Am. Serp., p. 3 (1853).— LE Contr, South. Med. Surg. Journ., 1x, 1853 (p. 664).—BairD, Pac. R. R. Rep., x, Reptiles, p. 14, pl. xxiv, fig. 2 (1859) .— JAN, Rev. Mag. Zool., 1859, extr. p. 28.—JaN, Elenc. Sist. Ofid., p. 123 (1863).—Corek, in Wheeler’s Surv. W. 100 Mer., v, p. 534 (1875).—Copn, Proc. Am. Philos. Soc., 1867 (p. 64).—Corr, Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus. xiv, 1891, p. 689 (1892).—TRUE, in Hammond’s South Carolina, p. 235 (1883).— GARMAN, Rept. Batr. N. Am., 1, Ophid., pp. 112, 171 (1883).—GaRrMAN, Bull. Essex. Inst., xrx, 1887, p. 122.—YarrRow, in Buck’s Ref. Handb, Med. Se., vi, p. 166 (1888).—JoRDAN, Man. Vert. North. U. S., 5 ed., p. 199 (1888).—BARRINGER, Ven. Rept. U. 8., p. 4 (1891).—WILLIaAMs, Science, xx, Dec. 16, 1892, p. 345.—La@NNBERG, Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus.,xvu, 1894, p. 335.—H. GARMAN, Bull. Essex. Inst., xxv, 1894, p. 36.—Cau- disona adamantea, CCPeE, in Mitchell’s Res. Ven, Rattlesn., p. 121 (1861).— Corr, Proc. Phila. Acad., 1866, p. 309. 1802.—Crotalus rhombifer, LATREILLE, Hist. Nat. Rept., 11, p. 197.—Daupl1n, Hist. Nat, Rept., v, p. 323 (1803).—DuMERIL et Bispron, Erpét. Génér., vu, p. 1470 (1854).—Duans, Naturaleza, Iv, 1879 (p. 22). 1802.—-Crotalus horridus, LATREILLE, Hist. Nat. Rept., 11, p.199 (but not p. 186; nor of Linn. 1758).—Har.wan, Journ. Phila, Acad., v, 1827, p. 370.—HaR- LAN, Med. Phys. Res. (p.133) (1835). 1802.—Crotalus durissus, SHAW, Gen. ZoOl., 11, p. 333 (not of Linn, 1758). 1853.—Crotalus terrificus, LE CONTE, Proc. Phila. Acad., 1853 (p. 419) (not of Laur. 1768).—CopE, Proc. Phila. Acad., 1859, p. 337. 1875.—Crotalus adamanteus, subsp. adamanteus, COPE, Bull. U.S. Nat. Mus. No. 1, Check-list, pp. 33, 79.—Copr, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., x1, 1888, p. 393.— Coreg, Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus., x1v, 1891, p. 690 (1892),— Yarrow, Bull. U.S. Nat. Mus. No. 24, pp. 12, 75 (1883). Figures.—BEAvVOIS, Trans. Am. Philos. Soc., Iv, pl. facing p. 380, upper figure (1799).—Suaw, Gen. Zool., 11, pl. LXxXXIx (1802).—DauDIN, Hist. Nat. Rept. v pl. Lx, figs. 22, 23; pl. LXIx, fig. 2 (1803).—HoLBrook, N. Am. Herpet., 1 ed., 11, pl. xvi (1838); 2 ed., 111, pl. 1 (1842).—DuMERIL et BIBRON, Erpét. Gen., Atlas, pl. LXxxIv, fig. 3 (1854).—BairbD, Pac. R. R. Rep., x, Reptiles, pl. xx1v, fig. 2 (1859).—JaN, Icon. Ophid., livr. 46, pl. 1, fig. 2 (but not fig. 1) (1874).— YARROW, in Buck’s Ref. Handb. Med. Sc., v1, pl. XX vil (1888). *See Forest and Stream, xxxvil, Aug. 6, 1891, p. 44. + From the Latin adamanteus, Diamond-shaped; lozenge-shaped. H. Mis. 184, pt. 2 28 434 REPORT OF NATIONAL MUSEUM, 1893. Description.*—Head triangular. Two anterior frontals (internasals), connected with superciliaries (supraoculars) on each side by two large plates; inside of these a second row; included space filled by small scales. Seales margining superciliaries (supraoculars) small; scat- tered larger ones toward the center of the intermediate space. Three rows of scales between the suborbitalsand labials. Suborbitals extend- ing to the middle of the orbit. Labials 15 or 16 above; first, fifth, and seventh largest, and vertical; below, 18; first, fourth, and fifth largest. Dorsal rows, 27; outer rows obsoletely carinated. Three or 4 dark rings on tail. Three series of well-defined perfect rhombs, 1 dorsal, 2 lateral, separated by narrow lines. Light stripe from superciliary te the angle of the mouth. Seales on the cheek smooth. Three rather large plates on the edge of the upper part of the head, between the superciliaries (supraoculars) and rostral,inside of which is a second row of 3, also larger than the rest. The two lower rows of lateral scales smooth. Third and fourth very faintly carinated. Scales on the back and sides not conspicuously dif- ferent in size except the lower two or threerows. Posteriorly, near the tail, all the seales are carinated except the lowest. General color, yellowish gray, with rhomboidal black blotches, lighter in the center, and with all the angles perfect. Or rather there is a series of dull yellowish lnes crossing obliquely from one side of the abdomen to the other over the back, following the oblique series of scales, and occupying generally the posterior half of each scale, the basal portion being black. These lines, of which there are about 36 crossing from each side, from head to tail (9 on tail), decussate first on the fifth or sixth lateral row, and then on the back, where they are more or less confluent three or four rows. The rhomboids thus inclosed and crossing the back are generally black for 15 or 2 scales within the yellowish brown, mottled with darker. The intervals on the sides between the lines are mostly dark yellowish brown, minutely mottled with dark brown. These intervals constitute a lateral series of trans- verse rhomboids, sometimes with the lower angle truncated. Opposite to the dorsal rhomboids is a series of smali triangles in the angles of the first decussation. The distance between two parallel transverse stripes generally consists of five rows of scales, occasionally of six. On the sides and posteriorly these markings are more or less indis- tinct, though generaliy recognizable. The tail usually exhibits a good deal of black. The under parts are dull yellowish white, or greenish white, clouded toward the sides with brown; no regular spots visible. The black on the tail does not constitute complete rings, but is inter- rupted in the middle of the lower surface, and in fact the black patches alternate with each other, and are not opposite. ~ By 8. F. Baird, in Baird and Girard’s, N. Am. Serp., p. 3, from a South Carolina specuuen, U.S. Nat. Mus., No. 250. PLATE 10. Report of National Museum, 1893. —Stejneger. ‘TUNESN] [PUOBN ‘SQ 94 Ul 4SBO v WOT SNALNVANVOV SNIVLOYO--‘AMVNSSTILLVYY GNOWVIG baad POISONOUS SNAKES OF NORTH AMERICA. 435 The top of heaa is light brown, with occasional black seales. A dull yellowish streak starts at the posterior edge of the superciliary plate, and passing obliquely backward, through two rows of scales, extends to angle of the mouth (fig. 58). A second band starts on the plate in advance of the superciliary, and crossing the anterior orbitals, expands till it involves the seventh, eighth, and ninth upper labials. Interval between the first two stripes dark brown. There are also indications of a second vertical light bar in front of the nostril, and two below the pit. Rostral dark yellowish, lighter in the margin. Number of ventrals (gastrosteges), 169; of subcaudals (urosteges), 32; scale rows across body, 27. Variation.—With the exception of the usual variation of the ground color through the various tinges of grayish and brownish, the color and pattern of this species is unusually constant. The characteristic whitish stripes on rostral, nasals, and on the sides of the head are well marked, even in the largest specimens, and the dorsal pattern is also nearly always very distinct. Geographical distribution.—The diamond rattler inhabits a compara- tively small area in the southeastern corner of our country. Florida seems to be the center of its distribution, and from that State it extends along the coast northward into the southern portion of North Carolina at about the thirty-fifth parallel, Mr. H. H. Brimley having in letter advised me of a specimen, presumably of this species, having been taken in 1885 at the Neuse River, across from New Berne. Along the gulf coast it extends at least as far west as the Mississippi River, being still found not far from New Orleans, as Dr. Gustave Kohn informs me, although very scarce. It also ascends the Mississippi River some dis- tance, exactly how far I do not know, but a specimen is in the National Museum (No. 4393) which is said to have been collected by Col. Kear- ney in Arkansas. In Florida the species is found everywhere, including the Keys. Habits.—The Diamond Rattler, or Diamond-backed Rattlesnake, is usually called the Water Rattler in localities where the Banded Rattle- snake also occurs in order to distinguish it from the latter, which is then known as the Timber-Rattler. As the name indicates, this species is rather partial to the neighborhood of water, although it is not a water snake to the extent of pursuing its prey into the water. Yet it is said to be a good swimmer and not even afraid to cross over from Key to Key (Lennberg, l. ¢.). Although rather common, and probably the Rattlesnake most fre- quently seen in captivity, at least in this country, but little detailed and reliable information concerning its habits can be found in the litera- ture. The observers who have had anything to say about 1t are often much at variance. Someregard it as very slow and clumsy, others again insist that it is much more active than the Banded Rattlesnake and much fiercer. Some report their inability to induce this species 436 REPORT OF NATIONAL MUSEUM, 1893. to eat in confinement, while others again claim that it takes food with- out trouble. Equally defective is our knowledge in regard to its breeding habits. The Diamond Rattler is our largest species, and in fact one of the largest of the whole family. The largest specimen in the National Museum collection (No. 10947) is only 6 feet 54 inches long, but much larger specimens are on record. Dr. C. 8. Allen has recorded 1 speci- men 8 feet 5 inches, with a circumference of 15 inches, which was shot near Oak Lodge, Fla., by Chas. F. Latham, in November, 1890, while Mr. Frank M. Chapman mentions one 8 feet 9 inches long, and killed by J. H. Norton, of Jacksonville.* We often enough hear of Florida Rattlers 9 feet or more long, but in all eases I have investigated it was found that the measurements were taken from skins, or mounted specimens, which of course may be stretched almost to any desired length. With a supply of venom proportionate to its size the dangerous nature of a stroke of one of these large brutes, if well delivered, may wellbe imagined. Nevertheless, fatalities are comparatively rare, and even cases of bites are not heard of nearly as often as one might be led to suppose from the number of specimens which are still found in many places. THE TEXAS RATTLESNAKE. Crotalus atrox,t Baird and Girard. Plate 11. 1853.— Crotalus atrox, BAIRD and GIRARD, N. Am. Serp., pp. 5, 156.—DUMERIL et Brpron, Erpét, Génér., Vu, ii, p. 1482 (1854).—HALLOWELL, Proc. Phila. Acad., 1856, p. 307.—Bairpb, Pac. R. R. Rep., x, Whipple’s Route, p. 39 (1859).—Barrp, Mex. Bound. Surv. 11, Rept. p. 14 (1859).—Copr, Proc. Phila. Acad., 1859, p.337.—CopPr, in Wheeler’s Surv. W. 100 Mer., v, p. 534 (1875).—Coorer, Proc. Calif. Acad. Nat. Sce., Iv, p. 66 (1870).— Caudisona atrox, COPk, in Mitchell’s Res. Ven. Rattlesn. (p. 121) (1861).— Cork, Proce. Phila. Acad. 1866, p. 309. 1859.—Crotalus adamanteus, var. atror, JAN, Rev. Mag. Zool., 1859, Extr. p. 28.— JAN, Elene. Sist. Ofid., p. 123 (1863).—Coper, Bull. U. S. Nat. Mus. No. 1, p. 33 (1875).—Cops, Bull. U. 8. Nat. Mus. No. 17, p. 24 (1880).—Copr, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., x1, 1888, p. 398.—Copn, Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus., XIV, 1891, p. 690 (1892).—Copr, Proc. Phila. Acad., 1892, p..336.—YaR- row, Bull. U. S. Nat. Mus. No. 24, pp. 12, 76 (1883).—GaRMAN, Rept. Batr. N. Am., 1, Ophid., pp. 118, 172 (1883).—Caudisona adamantea atrox, Cougs, in Wheeler’s Sury. W. 100 Mer., v, p. 607 (1875). 1861.— Caudisona atrox, var. sonoraensis, KENNICOTT, Proc. Phila. Acad., x111, 1861, p- 206.—Copr, Proce. Phila. Acad., x111, 1861, p. 292. 1861.—Caudisona scutulata, KENNICOTT, Proc. Phila. Acad., x1, 1861, p. 207.— Corr, Proc. Phila. Acad., 1866, p. 309.—Crotalus scutulatus COPE, in Wheeler’s Surv. W. 100 Mer., v, p..533 (1875). 1863.—Crotalus adamanteus, var. sonoriensis, JAN, Elene. Sist. Ofid., p. 124. * Abstr. Proc. Linn. Soc. New York, year end. Mch. 2, 1892, p. 4. t From the Latin atrox, terrible, cruel. Report of National Museum, 1893.—Stejneger, BEATEN ills TEXAS RATTLESNAKE,—CROTALUS ATROX. From Baird, Rep. Mex. Bound. Surv. POISONOUS SNAKES OF NORTH AMERICA. 437 1874.—Crotalus adamanteus, JAN, Icon. Ophid., livr. 46, pl.u, fig. 1 (not of Beauyois). 1875.—Crotalus adamanteus, var. scutulatus, Corr, Bull. U. S. Nat. Mus., No. 1, p.33.—Coper, Proc. U. 8. Nat. Mus. xtv, 1891, p. 690 (1892).—Caudisona adamantea scutulata, COUES, in Wheeler’s Surv. W. 100 Mer,, v, p. 607. Figures.—Batrp, Mex. Bound. Sury., 1, Rept., pl. 1 (1859).—Barrp, Pac. R. R. Rep., x, Rept., pl. Xx1v, fig. 3 (1859).— Jan, Icon. Ophid., livr. 46, pl. 11, fig. 1 (1874). Description.*—Head subtriangular; plates on head; 2 anterior fron- tals (internasals) in contact; between these and superciliaries (supra- oculars), on side of the crown, 2 imbricated plates; space inclosed occu- pied by smaller scales; superciliaries (supraoculars) bordered by a row of larger scales; the anterior much largest. Three rows of seales between labials and suborbitals; labials 16 above, first, fifth, and sev- enth, largest; 15 below, first and third largest; dorsal rows 25-27; 2 exterior rows smooth; on the tail 3-6 halfrings. Color yellowish brown, with a continuous succession of dorsal lozenges, sometimes truncate before-and behind; intervals allnarrow. ), oe d 3 4 4- 4-i 4— 5 Fig. 5. Hig. 6. KOREAN PIECE FOR SSANG-RYOUK (BACKGAMMON) BOARD: KOREA. BACKGAMMON. A diagram of the board, set as at the commencement of the game, is shown in fig. 6. The board has mortised sides, which extend about 2 inches above the surface. The divisions on either side, called pat (Chinese ? tm, fields”), are simply outlined in black. The larger ones in the middle are not counted in moving, and are used to throw the dice in. The first player is determined by the highest throw with 1 die. The pieces are moved around according to the throws, asin the English game of backgam- mon; but it is customary to move 2 pieces when doublets are thrown, and doublets do not entitle the player to another throw, nor to. any additional count than if the dice were dissimilar. A player may take an opponent’s piece, which must be again entered, asin the English game. This is called tjap-ta, ‘‘to catch.” When a player gets all his men around into his home place he bears them off according to his subsequent throws. ‘ i te CHINESE GAMES WITH DICE AND DOMINOES. 501 SAKA. In Siam the game of backgammon is known as saka, and is played upon a board, represented in tig. 7, with 2 dice.* Sixteen discs of ivory, SAKA (BACKGAMMON) BOARD: SIAM. like draftsmen, are used on each side, one set being white and the other, red. The small compartments on either side of the board are KRABOK: CYLINDER FROM WHICH DICE ARE THROWN. (Siamese Backgammon. ) said to be intended for cowries (bia), which are used as counters. The pieces are entered, according to the throws, in the right-hand side of the board opposite the player, and are moved around, as in our game, to the side directly opposite, where they are thrown off. A player does not take his opponent's pieces. The dice are not thrown directly with the hand, but are loaded into a tube (krabok) of ivory, about 3 inches in length (fig. 8), ealled krabok saka, and shot obliquely through another cylinder of ivory, 24 inches high (fig. 9), called by the same name, placed upon the board. These implements correspond with the Roman /ritillus or dicebox, and the pyrgus, the latter being defined as ‘‘a little wooden tower on the side of a gaming board, hollow, CYLINDER INTO WHICH DICE ARE THROWN. Siamese Backgammon. ) and having steps inside, through which the dice were thrown upon the board.t * Dice are called in Siamese lok bat. They are identical with those of China. t Andrews’s Latin-English Lexicon, 502 REPORT OF NATIONAL MUSEUM, 1893. TABAL. A backgammon board from Johore, exhibited by His Highness the Sultan in the collection of games at the Columbian Exposition under the name of tabal, is represented in fig. 10. Itis played with 2 dice, dadu, those exhibited being marked in black and red, like those of TABAL (BACKGAMMON) BOARD: JOHORE, MALAY PENINSULA. From specimen in the Museum of the University of Pennsylvania, China. The name of the game, tabal, is doubtless from the Portuguese tabola or Spanish tabla, and dadu from the Portuguese or Spanish dado, ‘ta, die.” SUGOROKU. The game described by Dr. Hyde agrees in some respects with the Japanese game of sugoroku, as illustrated in native encyclopedias. In fig. 11, reproduced from the Aum mo dzu e tais ei,* the board is Fig. 11. SUGOROKU BOARD: JAPAN. represented as being divided into 12 parts by longitudinal lines, which are broken in the middle by an open space similar to the ho kdi, or ‘(dividing river,” of the Chinese chessboard. According to the same work the 12 compartments, called in Japanese me, or ‘‘ eyes,” symbolize the 12 months, and the black and white stones, with which the game is played, day and night. *“WVery Complete Collection of Pictures to Teach the Unenlightened.” Kiyoto, 1789, vol. 4, part 8, fol. 5. CHINESE GAMES WITH DICE AND DOMINOES. 503 The moves are made according to the throws of the dice, the name being derived from that of the highest throw, swgoroku (Chinese, shéung luk), or ‘double sixes.”* Sugoroku appears to be of great antiquity in Japan. The Wa Kan san sai states that it is recorded in the Japanese Annals that sugoroku was forbidden iu the time of Jito Tenno (A. D. 687-692), and that it is probable that it was played in Japan before the game of got was brought to that country. The same encyclopedia, in the careful manner usual in such works, makes a number of citations from Chinese authors with reference to the origin of the game. It says it is recorded in the Suh sz’ cl’it that Ts’ao Chih§ of Wei invented sugoroku, and used 2 dice for it, but at the end of the Tang dynasty (A. D. 618-913), the number of dice was increased to 6. It is written in the Wu tsah tst that sugoroku is a game that was originally played in Ht (Japanese, /fo), the country of the Tartars. It relates that the King of Ht: had a brother who was put to death for a crime. While in prison he made the game of sugoroku and sent it to his father, writing with it a few words in order to make known how men are oppressed by others when they are single and weak. The Ngan lui yau states that sugoroku came from the Tien Chuh, “India.” The name of sugoroku is applied at the present day in Japan to various games played upon boards or diagrams, in which the moves are made by throwing dice.|| Of these there are many kinds, among * Sugoroku is also called rokusai, as will be seen from the names appended to fig. 11. tChess, by which the game of 360 men, half black and half white, called by the Chinese wai k’t is meant. {Iam unable to identify either this or the two following works quoted in the Wa Kan san sai. § Ts’ao Chih (A. D. 192-232) was the third son of the great usurper, Ts’au Ts’au, who overthrew the Han dynasty. He was distinguished by precocious talent and poetical genius, and devoted himself wholly to literary diversions. (The Chinese Reader’s Manual, No. 759.) || The name is also applied to at least one simple dice game in which no board or diagram is used. Mr. Kajiwara informs me that in the Province of Aomori, a com- mon game with 2 dice is called ichi-san sugoroku; so called from the name of the highest throw, ichi san, ‘‘ one, three.” Japanese dice at the present day usually have their 6 faces marked with black dots. Those used by gamblers are said to be larger than the kind employed in popular amusements. The dice games are said to vary in different parts of the Empire. Japanese sailors in New York City play a game with 2 dice called ché han, ‘“‘even and odd.” They throw 2 dice under acup. The even throws are called cho and the odd han. The players, two or more in number, bet on the even or odd by calling out and laying their wagers before them while the cup remains inverted over the dice. They use foreign playing cards cut lengthwise in strips and tied in bundles of 10 as counters, instead of money; a custom that they say has its origin in the use of the narrow Japanese playing cards, or bamboo tallies at home for this purpose. The same game, under the same name, called by the Chinese chéung pun, is known to the Cantonese laborers in the United States as a common game in China. 504 REPORT OF NATIONAL MUSEUM, 1893. which the most popular is called dé chiu, or “ traveling” sugoroku. It is played upon a large sheet of paper, on which are represented the various stopping places upon a journey; as, for example, the 53 post stations between Tokio and Kiyoto, and resembles the games of ‘‘ snake” and ‘steeplechase,” familiar to English and American children. * Such games are much played by the Japanese at the season of the the New Year, when new ones are usually published. In 1889, Japa- nese newspapers reported that two new games of sugoroku found much favor in Tokio. The same general name would be given by the Japanese to the following Chinese game, which I have occasionally seen played by the clerks in Chinese stores in our cities. Fig. 12. JAPANESE CHILDREN PLAYING SUGOROKU. SHING KUN T’0. Shing kin to, the “table of the promotion of the officials,” is the celebrated game which is best known through Dr. Hyde’s account as “the game of the promotion of Mandarins.” t It is played by two or more persons upon a large paper diagram, on which are printed the titles of the different officials and dignitaries of the Chinese Government. The movements are made by throwing dice, and the players, whose positions upon the diagram are indicated by notched or colored splints, are advanced or set back, according to their throws.i The following story was related to me concerning the invention of the game: - *A paper diagram fora game of sugoroku is entitled, according to the characters on the sheet, Hokkaidé shin dé ichi ran sugoroku. or “A glance at the Hokkaidé new road sugoroku.” This game was published in 1873 on the occasion of the opening of a new road through the southern part of the island of Yesso, from Hakodate to Sap- poro, the capital. The diagram consists of an impression in colors, 324 by 20 inches, and is divided into 38 parts, exclusive of the goal and starting place. These contain pictures of the scenery at the diffierent stations on the road, each division having a tablet beside it on which the name of the place is written, with the distance to the next stopping place. The game is played with 1 die, the players throwing in turn, and advanc- ing from the lower right-hand corner to the goal at the center. Each spot of the throw counts as one station on the diagram. If a player’s move leaves him upon a division having the character tomare, ‘stop over,” he loses his next throw. When a player near the goal makes a higher throw than is just necessary to take him to the central space, he is set back; 1f he has an excess of 1, to the fifth place from the goal; 2, to the fourth place, and so on. t De Ludis Orientalibus, p. 70. +A similar but much simpler game, with the titles of Japanese instead of Chinese officials, is played in Japan under the name of kuwanroku. CHINESE GAMES WITH DICE AND DOMINOES. 505 The Emperor Kienlung (A. D. 1736-1796) was in the habit of walking at nightfall among the houses occupied by the candidates for the degree of Hanlin, who came up to Peking for the triennial examination; and hearing, night after night, the song of the dice issuing from one of them, he sum- moned the offender before him to explain his conduct. In excuse, fearing punishment, he told the Emperor that he had constructed a chart, on which were written the names of all the official positions in the Government, and that he and his friends threw dice, and according to their throws traversed the board, and were thus impressed with a knowledge of the various ranks and steps leading to official advancement. The Emperor commanded him to bring the chart for his inspection. That night the unfortunate graduate, whose excuse was a fiction created at the moment, sat until daybreak, pencil in hand, and made a chart according to his story, which he carried to the Emperor. That august prince professed to be much pleased with the diligence of the scholar who improved his mind, even while amusing himself, and dismissed him with many commendations. S aL, = PTLD | * This familiar sounding story can not be accepted without question, especially since it will be seen that Dr. Hyde pub- lished his account many years before the period mentioned; but my informant, a clerk in a Chinese shop in Philadelphia, may not have stated the date correctly. The paper charts for the game may be purchased at the Chinese stores in New York and San Francisco. The names of the different offices are arranged upon them in rectangular divisions, alongside of each of which is a tablet with the name of the board or class under which those within it are included. They ascend from the lowest to the highest in successive stages, arranged in order around the chart from right to left, and from the outer division, which is devoted to provincial officials, to the innermost, Fig. 13. which has the titles of the members of Firsr pLaces ror ENTERING IN THE GAME the metropolitan administration. The — ° _ “NOTION OF MANDARINS.” center 18 occupied with rules for play- ing. Four dice are thrown in turn by each player, instead of 6, as formerly recorded by Dr. Hyde. Entrance is obtained by making a cast, either of 4 alike, by which the player is at once advanced to an “hereditary rank;” of ‘three, four, five, six,” called chitin fa; of 3 alike “ee @ Hua) Ey Cues F Gur Ay Guar Fy rues Pung co ae GQ S a g = * '~ ~> = SS S . > ~ ~ ~ 6 =~ a wae ory wer rer ory o y 7 iced YUN? el OG TJIU TAIT CII, SNM From De Ludis Orientalibus, 1694. ) 506 REPORT OF NATIONAL MUSEUM, 1893. or 2 alike. All of these throws, in descending order, enable the player to enter one of the positions from which advancement may be obtained. Subsequent promotion depends upon the throws, doublets enabling the player to move once; 3 alike, twice; and 4 alike, 3 times. ‘ Double fours” count highest, ‘double sixes” next, and so on down to “ones,” through which the’player is set back. The appropriate move for each throw is indicated ‘in small characters beneath each of the titles on the chart. A curious contrast is presented between the little sheet reproduced by Dr. Hyde (fig. 13), upon which only the principal officials of the Ming dynasty are represented, and that now current, whereon may be seen the innumerable ramifications of the Chinese “ civil service” under the present Tartar domination. The charts such as I have seen used in the United States are printed in Canton, and bear an impression about 23 inches square. They are divided into 63 compartments, exclusive of the central one and the place for entering at the lower right-hand corner. The latter contains the names of 13 different starting places from yan shang, or “honorary licentiate,” down to Cung shang, or “student,” between which are included the positions of (in man shang, “ astrologer,” and ¢ shang, ‘* physician.” These are entered at the commencement of the game by the throws of “ three, four, five, six,” 3 “ fours,” 3 “ sixes,” 3 ‘“‘ fives,” 3 “threes,” 3 “twos,” and 3 ‘‘ones;” and then in the same manner double “fours,” and so on down to double * ones.” The 63 compartments, representing as many classes of officials or degrees of rank, comprise 397 separate titles, of which the highest, and the highest goal of the game, is that of man fa tin tai hok s2’, or “ grand secretary.” This, however, under favorable conditions, can only be reached by a player who starts from a favorable point, advancement in the game being regulated by rules similar to those which actually regulate promotion under the Government. Thus a player whose fortune it is to enter as a physician or astrologer can only obtain pro- motion in the line of his service, and must be content with a minor goal, as he is ineligible to the high civil office of “grand secretary.” The dice are thrown into a bowl placed in the center of the sheet, the players throwing in turn, and each continuing to throw until he has made a cast of doublets or higher. It is noticeable that “ fours,” as in Dr. Hyde’s account, constitute the highest throw. 7 i 7 eae ; : = eee = ~~ t cad \ * ee | % sn ne é 7 _ aa " . “PP ion = 7 ‘ - > era i ian CHINESE GAMES WITH DICE AND DOMINOES. 517 the fourth row, D, E, F of the fifth row, and G, H,I,K of the sixth . row. The piece A is then placed transversely, face up, across the top of the original pyramid, and the other pieces that were withdrawn formed into a line, face up, at its base; the pairs G-H and I-K being put at the ends, D and F within them, B,C next within and E in the middle, as in the diagram on the right of tig. 20. The players then proceed to mate the pieces that are face up, according to the arrangement found on pl. 5. When no more pairs can be made with the exposed pieces the outside piece on the right of the second row from the top may be reversed. If it can not be paired it is left in its place, but if mated the outside piece on the third row is liberated, and may be reversed, and so on. When the right-hand side is blocked, the piece on the left of the second row may be reversed, and the same plan followed as before. When the piece A is mated the two pieces beneath it may be reversed; and the removal of the two pieces at the ends of the lowest row, as G H, permits the pieces directly above them to be reversed. The process is continued until the game is blocked, or the player has mated all the pieces comprising the pyramid. This game is said to be used in divination, the success or failure in mating all the pieces being regarded as furnishing a clew to the deter- mination of the event under consideration. FORTUNE TELLING WITH DOMINOES. Dominoes are regularly used in fortune telling in China at the present day, and their use for this purpose is generally known to the laborers who come to America. I have before mea book entitled Nga p’di shan ‘sho 00 chii ts’éung kdi, “a chart for finding out the numbers by divine aid and with ivory dominoes, with an explanation and commentary.” This work was printed in Canton in 1865, the name of the author being given as Ch’ing Ngok. The preface, which professes to explain the attributes and astrological significance of the dominoes, is followed by a series of diagrams illustrating different combinations formed with dominoes taken three, or in one class, two ata time. Specimens of the different classes are represented in pl. 7. The following names and numerical values are given to them: pat tung, ‘‘unlike,” counts 6. hop hdu, ‘ingeniously divided,” counts 4. ng tsz’, ‘five spots,” counts 5. fan shéung, “ divided reciprocally,’ md kwan, ‘‘ cavalry,” counts 3. 4 sdm luk, ‘‘two, three, six,” counts 3. iu % sdm, “ace, two; three,” counts 3. tui tsz’, ‘‘ corresponding spots,” counts 3. ching fai, ‘‘ correctly satisfied,” counts 1. 5) counts 3. In telling fortunes an entire set of dominoes is placed face down upon a table and well mixed. The dominoes are then all placed side by side in a row and reversed. The manipulator selects from this row as many 518 REPORT OF NATIONAL MUSEUM, 1893. combinations as possible, formed by adjacent pieces, according to the diagrams, and adds together the numbers corresponding with them. This sum is referred to the following table and result noted: 1 to 4 is to be esteemed ha ha, “‘ lowest.” 5 to7 is to be esteemed chung hd, ‘‘ below the middle.” 8 to 9 is to be esteemed chung p’ing, ‘‘ even middle.” 10 to 11 is to be esteemed shéung shéung, ‘‘ highest.” The dominoes are then reversed again and mixed, and the preceding operations twice repeated, and 3 sets of terms from the above series obtained. Reference is then made to the text of the book. This con- sists of 125 pages, arranged in order under all the different combina- tions that may be formed with the 5 pairs of terms given above, taken 3 pairs at atime, commencing with shéung shéung, shéung shéung, shéung shéung. An oracular verse, apparently of original composition, is found on each page, referring to some well-known personage or incident, with a short text toaid the diviner in applying the prognostication to the various affairs of life. DOMINOES FROM FUHCHAU. Before proceeding to discuss the origin and antiquity of the Chinese game, an account will be given of dominoes used in other parts of China, and among the people of the adjacent countries. A set of dominoes from Fuhchan* in the Oriental Section of the Museum of Archeology and Paleontology of the University of Pennsyl- vania is made of bamboo and numbers 32 pieces. They measure 34 by 23 by 33 inch, and have slightly curved faces that follow the natural curve of the reed. The concave faces are marked with incised spots that are painted red and green, and are arranged in the Chinese series (fig. 17), green taking the place of black spots. These dominoes are accompanied with 16 wooden disks resembling draughtsmen, an inch in diameter, the faces of which are reproduced in plate 8. They each bear a Chinese character referring to one of the 16 pairs formed with the 32 dominoes.t Four of these, (in, tt, yan, and wo, are the same * Received through the courtesy of J. P. Cowles, esq., U. S. vice-consul, Fuhchau. tProf. Rudolfo Lanciani, in the Athenzum, January 7, 1888, gave an account of the discovery of a tomb in Perugia twenty-one centuries old, in which an inveterate gambler had been buried together with his gambling apparatus. Among other remarkable sets were ‘‘16 tesser@, or labels, cut in bone, 4 inches long, with a word engraved on one side and a number on the other.” The importance of the discovery is concentrated on the words and numbers engraved on the bone labels. The ancients used to give a special name to a certain number, or addition of numbers, which they obtained by throwing the dice. * * * As regards the newly discovered labels, it appears that any number from 1 to 12 was considered a very bad throw, and conse- quently the corresponding words or names were very objectionable indeed (Mechus Vappa, ect.). The ‘‘13” is neither good nor bad; hence its name, vix rides, ‘‘you hardly smile.” The names corresponding to higher numbers are all of good omen, such as benignus (25), amator (30), and felix (60), which seems to be the maximum of the game discovered at Perugia.” While the agreement of number of tablets in this Etruscan series with those in the Chinese is probably a mere coincidence,it is curious to note the occurrence of such similar usages in ages and countries so widely separated. ee ae Report of National Museum, 1893.—Culin. ®) ®& (e & ® fy) Ry K ) * a) FACES OF WOODEN Discs ACCOMPANYING DOMINOES FROM FUHCHAU. From specimens in the Museum of the University of Pennsylvania. (#) io PLATE 8. Repott of National Museum, 6.0 o%e 6,0 oe 5 | ad °- Gee 6° eo © °°” Oe ©®© @6 ©© ©oO ee ©? © © © oe KOREAN DOMINOES Cat. No. 77024, U. S. N. M. PLATE 9. 2359] [©0] [ss 6 @ © Se e. e 3 CHINESE GAMES WITH DICE AND DOMINOES. 519 as those used to designate the four highest pieces in the mdn series, plate 5, but the remainder, in place of the vulgar names usually given to the other pairs, have the characters shii, ngau, fi, te, lung, shé, md, yéung, hau, kai, hiin, and chii, which represent the names “rat,” “ox,” “tiger,” “hare,” “dragon,” “serpent,” “horse,” “ goat,” *‘ monkey,” ‘“‘ cock,” “dog,” and “pig,” the 12 animals of the duodenary ecycle.* I understand these dises are used in connection with a kind of lottery. Iam informed that bamboo dominoes, similar to the above, are used at Shanghai, and at all the Chinese ports from Fuhchau northward. There are several very interesting sets of Chinese dominoes from Fubchau in the museum of the Long [sland Historical Society, Brooklyn, N. Y.+ One of these sets (A) consists of 126 marked pieces and 2 blanks. They are made of bamboo, faced with bone or ivory, which is attached to the wood with glue, or, in the case of one of the sets, with small brass pins. The pieces measure about § by 2 by 2 inch. This set is composed: first, of 3 suits of 21 pieces marked with black and red dots, each comprising the Chinese series without the dupli- cates; second, of 2 suits of 21 pieces, similarly marked with black and red dots with the addition of ornamental devices of flowers in red and green; third, of 1 suit of 21 pieces, each with double sets of dots, 1 set being placed at each end of the pieces, and between certain devices in red and green, comprising the emblems of the Eight Genii, the characters for “sun” and “moon,” a tiger, and various flowers. A similar set was exhibited by W. H. Wilkinson, esq., Her British Majesty’s consul-general, Seoul, Korea, in his collection in the section of games at the Columbian Exposition, Chicago, 1893. They were from Shanghai, and designated as Hua ho (fé ho) ‘ ‘flower harmony.” ¢ Another set (B) in the museum of the Long Island Historical Society comprises 141 marked pieces and 2 blanks. They are made of bamboo with a bone or ivory face, which is skillfully mortised to the wood, and measure { by 2 by 2inch. This set is composed: First, of 4 suits of 9 pieces each, marked in red, green, and blue, with from 1 to 9 cireles. Second, of 4 suits of 9 pieces each. marked in red and green, with irom 1 to 9 narrow rectangles. Third, of 4 suits of 9 pieces each, marked with the characters yat man, “one ten thousand,” to kau mdn, or “nine ten thousand.” The characters for ‘‘one” to “nine” are in blue, and that for man, ‘ten thou- sand,” is in red. Fourth, of 4 pieces marked pak, “north,” in blue; of 4 pieces marked nim, **south,” in blue; of 4 pieces marked tung, ‘‘east,” in blue; of 4 * Chinese Reader’s Manual, part 2, No. 301. +The gift of the Hon. George Glover, formerly U. S. consul at Fuhchau. There is a similar collection given by him in the American Museum of Natural History, Central Park, New York. tCf. Descriptive Catalogue World’s Columbian Exposition, Department M, revised edition, p. 87. 520 REPORT OF NATIONAL MUSEUM, 1893. pieces marked sai, ‘‘ west,” in blue; of 4 pieces marked chung, ‘‘ middle,” in blue; 1 piece marked pak wong, “northern ruler,” in red and biue; 1 piece marked ném wong, ‘southern ruler,” in red and blue; 1 piece marked tung wong, “eastern ruler,” in red and blue; 1 piece marked sai wong, “western ruler,” in red and blue; 1 piece marked chung wong, “middle ruler,” in red and blue; 1 piece marked (Vin wong, “heavenly ruler,” in red and blue; 1 piece marked ti wong, “earthly ruler,” in red and blue; 1 piece marked yan wong, ‘‘human ruler,” in red and blue; 1 piece marked wo wong, ‘‘ harmony ruler,” in red and blue; 1 piece marked cWun, “spring,” in red; 1 piece marked ha, ‘‘summer,” in red; 1 piece marked ts’au, “autumn,” in red; 1 piece marked tung, ‘ winter.” Fifth, of 8 blank pieces. A set nearly identical with this was also exhibited by Mr. Wilkinson. It lacked the pieces designated as “rulers of the five directions,” the Vin, ti, yan, and wo wong, and the 4 pieces with the names of the sea- sons. It had, however, 4 pieces bearing the character fdt. This set was from Ningpo, and was designated by Mr. Wilkinson as chung fa (chung fat). “The coloring,” he states, “‘whether in red, green, or blue, is purely ornamental, and has nothing to do with the play of the game.* Another set (C), from Fuhehau, in the museum of the Long Island Historical Society, is made entirely of bamboo. This set is composed of 32 pieces, measuring { by «2 by ;3; inch. They are inscribed on one face with the usual dots and the characters that represent the names of the pieces of the Chinese-game of chess, tséung kt. These marks are arranged as follows: 6-6, kii, ‘‘ chariot,” in red. i-1, tséung, “elephant,” in green. , kii, ‘‘ chariot,” in red. . séung, ‘ elephant,” in red. , tsut, “soldier,” in red. , ping, ‘‘ soldier,” in green. , 82’, “secretary,” in green. —6, md, ‘‘ horse,” in green. md, ‘‘ horse,” in red. tsut, ‘‘soldier,” in red. tsut, ‘‘ soldier,” in red. 4-5, sz’, ‘‘ secretary,” in red. 6-2 5-3, p’du, “cannon,” in red. 3 5-2, p’du, “cannon,” in green. 1-4, ping, ‘‘ soldier,” in red. 2-3, tsut, ‘‘soldier,” in red. . 2-4, tséung, ‘‘ general,” in green. 1-2, shui, “ general,” in red. ee ie hie ne Se | bo 0 Ol Hm eR ANTE TR TR heen OO TD HD HD — eS EGS i" A Mr. Himlyt describes a set of Chinese bamboo dominoes, 32 in the Set, with the characters of the chessmen, which is identical with the “Descriptive Catalogue, p. 87. t Zeitschrift des deutscher Morgenliindischer Gesellschaft, Band 43, p. 453. CHINESE GAMES WITH DICE AND DOMINOES. 521 preceding, except tor slight variations in the association of the names of the chessmen on the dotted pieces. He offers it in explanation of the number, 32, of the domino game, and says that it could only have been made to save space while traveling. As in the preceding, the 32 dominoes do correspond, piece for piece, with the 32 men in the Chinese gameof chess. Itis clear that the devices on some, at least, of the other decorated dominoes were copied from playing cards, those on the set A being identical in number as well as in devices with a set of the dotted cards from Fuhchau in the same collection, while the set B has the names of the familiar suit marks, ping, sok, and mdn, of the cards; hence it is possible that the “‘chess dominoes” were imitated from the corresponding ‘chess cards,” and that the true explanation of the number of the domino pieces must be found elsewhere. Mr. W. H. Wilkinson also exhibited at the Columbian Exposition a set of dominoes from Wenchow, called hua tang chin, ‘“ flowery tang ichiu.” They consist of 5 suits of 21 pieces each and 17 extra pieces (total, 122) and 4 blanks. The extra pieces are (1) 6-6 6-3, (2) 1-1 1-3, (3) 4-4 1-3, (4) 2-4 4-4, (5) 3-3 5-6, (6) 1-2 2-2, (7) 1-2 2-4, (8) 4-5 5-5, (9), (10), (11) 3 pieces marked with the sequence 1-6—that is, 1-4 2-6 3-9 ; 1-6 2-5 3-4; 1-5 2-3 4-6, and 6 pieces bearing the characters (a) wen, “civilian;” (b) wu, “ military;” (¢) tsung, ‘‘ universal;” (d) t’ai, ‘“‘highness;” (é) ho, ‘lily;” (f) p’ei, “heap up.” “The blanks are used only to replace cards lost.” The material was wood, stained black, with incised spots, painted white and red. ‘The coloring of the cards is immaterial.” ‘They measured 1 by +4 by 8; inch, and the inner face was slightly concave, like the dominoes from Fuhchau, mentioned on page 518.* CHIU P’AI. Another form of Chinese dominoes remains to be described which are current at Tientsin. There are the ch’iuv p’di, “leaping dominoes,” t which consist of 32 slips of bamboo about 14 inches in length, with the domino spots marked at one end, contained in a cylindrical bamboo box. This game is carried on by cake, candy, and fruit sellers. The player draws 5 of the bamboo slips, and if the 3 marks form what is described under the following account of Korean dominoes, pages 523, 524, as yat pai, “perfect tablets,” the player wins; if not he loses. KOREAN DOMINOES. A set of Korean dominoes from Seoul (pl. 9) in the National Museum is made of ivory and numbers 32 pieces. They measure ? by =; by +3; inches, and are marked with incised spots arranged according to the Chinese system. The ‘‘one” and “four” spots are painted red and all the others black, and the “one” spots are much larger than the others and very deeply incised. *Cf. Descriptive Catalogue, p. 88. t There is a set from Fuhchau in the museum of the Long Island Historical Society. 522 REPORT OF NATIONAL MUSEUM, 1893. The Koreans call dominoes kol-hpai (Chinese kwat p’di), “bone tab- lets.” A more correct name is said to be ho-hpai, (Chinese U p’di), “bar- barian tablets.” This latter name is also applied to a special game. The 32 dominoes are paired as shown in pl. 6, those of which there are two being mated with each other, and those of which there are but one with reference to the sum of the spots, but not in the manner of the Chinese series (PI. 5). The pieces receive the same names as those of the dice throws of the Korean game Ssang-ryouk, ** backgammon,” viz: 1-1, syo-syo (Chinese siv siz), ‘‘smallest.” 1-2, tjoui-hko (Chinese shii pt), ‘‘rat nose.” 1-3, syo sam (Chinese siti sdm), ‘small and three.” t-4, paik sa (Chinese pak sz’), ‘“ white and four.” 1-5, pdik i (Chinese pak ’ng), ‘‘ white and five.” 1-6, pdaik ryouk (Chinese pak luk), ‘‘ white and six.” 2-2, tjown-a (Chinese tsun ad), ‘‘superior two.” 2-3, a sam (Chinese @ sam), ‘‘two and three.” 2-4, a sé (Chinese @ sz’), “‘two and four.” 2-5, koan-a (Chinese kun a), ‘“‘sovereign two.’ 2-6, a ryouk (Chinese a luk), ‘‘two and six.” 3-3, t)yang-sam (Chinese ch‘éung sam), ‘‘long three. 3-4, sam sd (Chinese sdm sz’), ‘three four.” 3-5, sam o (Chinese sam ’ng), ‘‘three and five.” 3-6, sam ryouk (Chinese sdm luk), ‘‘three and six.” 4-4, tjown-hong (Chinese tsun hung), ‘superior red.” 4-5, si o (Chinese sz’ ’ng), ‘‘ four and five.” 4-6, sci ryouk (Chinese sz’ luk), ‘‘four and six.” 5-5, tjoun o (Chinese tsun ’ng), ‘‘superior five.” 5-6, 0 ryouk (Chinese ’ng luk), ‘five and six.” 6-6, tjown-ryouk (Chinese tsun luk), ‘‘ superior six.” b] ” Dominoes are regarded as a vulgar game in Korea. They are used in gambling houses and are not much played as a social game by the higher classes. HO-HPAIL. The commonest Korean game of dominoes is called Ho-hpai, i. e., ‘‘Barbarian tablets.” Itis played by 3 or 4 persons. When 4 persons play an entire set of dominoes are used. When 3 play the following pieces are withdrawn: 6-6, 5-5, 4-4, and 3-3. The dominoes are turned face down and shuffled. On commencing to play, the players all draw 1 piece to decide who shall play first. The one who gets the piece with the highest number of spots becomes the Tjyang-ouen (Chinese, Chong iin).* The pieces are again shuffled and the Tjyang-ouen draws 7 pieces and each of the other players 6. The Tjyang-ouwen then whirls his 7 pieces about between his fingers in the right hand until 1 piece slips out. This piece he turns faceup. Should the piece turned up be either 5-4, 1-2, 1-4 or 2-3 he keeps the pieces he has drawn. If it should be is applied to the first of the Hanlin doctors in China. CHINESE GAMES WITH DICE AND DOMINOES. 523 say one of the pieces of which there are duplicates, he hands his 6 pieces that are yet undisclosed to the player on his right who in turn gives his pieces to the player next to him, and so on until the Tjyang- ouen receives those of the fourth player. If on the other hand, he turns up either 6-3, 6-2, 5-3, 5-2, 4-3, or 4-2, he hands his 6 pieces to the player on the left who in turn gives his pieces to his immediate neighbor until the Tjyang-ouen receives those from the player on theright. The seventh piece that was turned up is now turned down and mixed with the remaining pieces, which are placed side by sidein a line, and covered with a slip of paper, or a strip of bamboo made for the purpose. If the Tjyang-ouen keeps his pieces, he becomes the first player, but if he exchanges them, the one on the right or left to whom he gave his pieces becomes the first player. In this game certain combinations of 3 pieces are called han-hpai (Chinese yat p’ di), ‘perfect tablets,” and the object of the game is to get 2 such combinations. The game is then spoken of as hte-tjye-ta, “broken”. Ho-hpat is played for money and a certain stake agreed upon, the player winning once, twice, thrice, four or five times this amount for each player, according to the combination which composes his winning hand. These combinations and the numbers they count are as follows: (1) A sequence, as 1-3, 2-4, 5-6, called ssang-syo-han-hpai (Chinese, shéung tsii yat pd), counts 3 in ain pea with another ssang-syo, and 1, in combination with any other han-hpai. A ssang-syo composed of 6 pieces, which pair according to the Korean system, is called tdi-sd-ttat (Chinese, tii sz’ tai), literally, ‘“‘ corresponding four times,” and counts 4, the name referring to the count. (2) The sequence 1-1, 1-2, 1-3, 1-4, 1-5, 1-6, and the corresponding sequences in which 6, 5, 4, 3 and 2 ajelees the ones in this example, are called pou-tong tanece. a Vung), unlike,” and count as follows: 1-1, 1-2, 1-3, 1-4, 1-5, 1-6 counts 5. 2-1, 2-2, 2-3, 2-4, 2-5, 2-6 counts 5. 3-1, 3-2, 3-3, 3-4, 3-5, 3-6 counts 3. 4-1, 4-2, 4-3, 4-4, 4-5. 4-6 counts 3. 5-1, 5-2, 5-3, 5-4, 5-5, 5-6 counts 4. 6-1, 6-2, 6-3, 6-4, 6-5, 6-6 counts 3. (3) The sequence 1-2, 3-6, 4-5, 1-4, 2-6, 3-5, called hol-ssang-syo (Chi- nese, tuk shéung tsi), “solitary double sequence, ” counts 5 (4) Two doublets, and 1 piece upon which the sum of the spots, or 1 of the 2 sets of spots is equal to the single number of the doublets, as 1-4, 5-5, 5-5, or 4-2, 4-4, 4-4, called sok (Chinese, noi), ‘‘inclosed,” counts 1, both when paired with another sok or any other han-hpai. A han-hpai composed of sixes is called ryouk-sok; of fives, o-sok; of fours, hong-sok; of threes, sam-sok; of twos, a-sok, and of ones, pdik-sok. (5) Three pieces upon which the spots are equally divided between 2 numbers, as 4-4, 2-4, 2-2, called tai-sam-tong (Chinese, tii sém tung), ‘three alike, Seete count 1. 524 REPORT OF NATIONAL MUSEUM, 1893. (6) The combination 6-6, 5-5, 4-4, called ro-in (Chinese, lo yan), ‘old man,” counts 3-when combined with itself and 1 with any other han- hpai. The combination 3-3, 2-2, 1-1, called a-ki (Chinese, 4 chi), “child,” counts 3 when combined with itself and 1 with any other han-hpai. (7) The combination 6-6, 3-3, 2-2, called ssang-pyen (Chinese, shéung pin), “doublets,” counts 3 when combined with itself and 1 with any other han-hpai. The combinations 2-3, 3-1, 1-2, and 4-5, 5-6, 4-6, called Yo-Soun, count 3 when combined with each other and 1 in com- bination with any other han-hpai. ; As the sok are combinations which may be formed very easily, it is sometimes agreed to play without them. Hf the first player has not drawn a winning hand he puts down a piece from his hand at the end that is nearest to him of the concealed row and takes up the piece at the other end, at the same timersliding the row of pieces along, so that the piece he puts down is concealed, and the piece he takes up is exposed. If he then does not make a winning combination, the next player, if he has not already a winning combination, puts down a piece and takes up another as before, and this is continued until some one obtains a win- ning combination, and so wins the game. He then becomes the Tjyang- ouen in the next game. TJAK-MA-TCHI-KI. Tjak-ma-tchi-ki, ‘pair making,” is played by 2, 3, or 4 persons. The pieces are reversed and shuffled and covered with paper. The first player draws 6 and the other players each draw 5 dominoes. The first player endeavors to play out a pair from those he has drawn, butif he is unsuccessful he lays out 1 piece face up on the table. The second player takes up the piece discarded if he can combine it with a domino in his hand to form a pair. If not, he draws a piece from those left ‘under the paper, and discards a domino, which he lays out face up. This process is continued around until 1 player gets 3 pairs in his hand, and becomes the winner. When 2 or 3 play, the 6-6 can not be played to complete the third pair, but when 4 play it may thus be played and the winner must be paid alone by the player who discarded the corresponding piece. If the pair is completed by a piece drawn from the unused pile, all the other players pay the winner, but if it is completed by a piece which has been discarded, the player who discarded that piece alone pays the winner. It is sometimes agreed that the third pair by which a player wins must be completed with a piece drawn from the unused pile. KKO-RI-POUT-TCHI-KI. Kko-ri-pout-tehi-ki, ‘tail joining,” is played by 2, 3, or 4 persons; 3 or 4 usually play. The set of dominoes are reversed and shuffled and each player draws 8 dominoes. When 3 play, the pieces 6-6, 5-5, 4-4, and CHINESE GAMES WITH DICE AND DOMINOES. 525 3-3 are first withdrawn. The game is begun by someone asking who. has the koana 2? The holder of this piece, the 5-2, lays down any piece he may select from his hand, face up, at the same time crying out a number on one side of it, which number must be paired. The next player must mate the side designated with one of his pieces, but if unable to do so, must lay a piece from his hand, face down on the table. The game is continued around until all have been paired or all have laid down their pieces. Then each counts the spots on the pieces they have been compelled to lay down, which naturally have been selected from those with the fewest spots in their hands, and the one who has the highest number of spots pays the one who has the lowest number of spots. When 4 play, all players who count more than 30 must pay. KOL-YE-SI.* Kol-ye-si is played by two or more persons, not exceeding ten. The set of dominoes is placed face down and shuffled, and part, if not all of the set, are placed end to end in an irregular line. One of the players acts as banker, Moul-tjyou (Chinese, Mat chi “ things’ ruler”). The other players each draw 1 piece in turn fromthe line. They exdm- ine this piece and each put whatever stake they choose on the piece drawn. The Moul-tjyou puts down the same amount, whatever it may be, beside each player’s stake and takes the next 2 pieces. If his pieces are identical, a perfect pair, he at once wins all that has been staked. Otherwise the other players draw in turn either 1 or 2 pieces from the line. This done, they and the Moul-tiyou turn their pieces face up. They all count the spots on their dominoes. The remainders, after deduc- ting the tens, count, and if the Moul-tjyou has an excess over that of any player, he takes the stakes, but if a player has an excess over that of the Moul-tjyou when the tens are deducted from the sum of the spots, that player wins the amount of the stake he has staked. This is a common game in gambling houses. It is customary to keep a water jar there, in which the players voluntarily put a portion of their stakes before the result is disclosed, or, if unmindful, at the sug- gestion of some one interested in the house. RYONG-HPAT,. Dominoes are used in Korea as in China in playing solitaire, which, as in China, is a favorite kind of sortilage, not regarded seriously, but often played at the beginning of the day, the player wishing for a happy omen. The solitaire game described under the name of hoi tap, page 516, is known under the name of Ryong-hpui (Chinese, lung p’di), “Dragon tablets,” while another arrangement is shown in fig. 20. *Kol-ye-si means kol (hpai) or “domino” ye-si, the latter being the name of a game played with cards. 526 REPORT OF NATIONAL MUSEUM, 1893. KE-POUK-HPAI. In this system, called ke-powk-hpai (Chinese, kwai p’di), “Tortoise tablets,” the 32 dominoes are laid face down to form a representation of a tortoise (fig. 21), with 2 pieces at head and tail and 2 for lees at each of the 4 corners. The pieces at these extremities are turned face up, followed by those marked A, B, C, D, and mated according to the Korean system, (pl. 9). The player loses when he fails to mate all the pieces. SIN-SYO-TYEN. Sin-syo-tyen (Chinese, shan sho chim), ‘“‘personally counting divi- nation,” is a kind of fortune telling practiced with dominoes. The in- quirer shuffles a set of dominoes face down and arranges them side by side in a line. He then turns them face up, preserving the ar- Fig. 21. rangement, and selects as many of ARRANGEMENT OF DOMINOES IN KE-PouK-HPar, — the combinations referred to on Reiman pages 523, 524, as can be formed by contiguous pieces. The sum of the numbers there given, in connection with the combinations thus formed is noted, and the operation twice repeated. The three results are added together, and if their sum amounts to 32, the number of the domino pieces, the augury is very good; more or less being estimated proportionally good or indifferent. O-KOAN, Another popular method of divination with a es | | e dominoes is called o-koan (Chinese, ’ng kwdn), “5 gateways.” An entire set of 8 dominoes is reversed and shuffled and 20 pieces are then arranged face down in 5 rows of 4 pieces each (fig. 22). The player then turns these pieces face up and com- mencing at the bottom row endeavors to form A B Cc D combinations of 3 pieces each, han-hpai such as Fig. 22. have been described under ho-hpai In addi- anrancement or pomnozs 1 - . GAME OF O-KOAN: KOREA. tion to the han-hpai already enumerated, pages 523, 524, the following additional ones are permitted in o-koan: Three pieces upon which 3 of the spots are alike and the sum of the other 3 CHINESE GAMES WITH DICE AND DOMINOES. 527 spots is equal to 5, called sam-tong-tan-o-tyem (Chinese sm Cung tan’ng tim), ‘three alike and only five spots,” and 3 pieces upon which 3 of the spots are alike and the sum of the other 3 spots is equal to or more than 14, called sam-toug-sip-sd-tyem (Chinese sdém tung shap sz’ tim), “three alike and fourteen spots.” In forming these combinations, 3 contiguous pieces in a row may be taken, or 1 or 2 pieces at one end of a row may be used in combination with 2 pieces or 1 piece at the other end, the pieces thus taken being always placed on the inner side. Thus the piece A may be mated with C D to form a combination A C D, or B A may be mated with D to form a combination A B D. The combinations thus formed are removed and placed in a line face up above the 5 rows, the one found nearest the bottom being placed to the left and successive ones to the right of the line thus started. When no more combinations can be discovered, 5 pieces are-drawn from the unused pile of 12 pieces which have been left with their faces down, and one-of them placed face down to the right of each of the 5 rows. These 5 pieces are then turned face up, and an attempt made to form combinations of threes‘with their aid. The results are successively placed to the right of the line at the top and this process is continued until the 12- extra pieces are exhausted. When this happens, 5 pieces are withdrawn from the left of the top line and added in succession to right of the 5 rows. If, by chance, but 4 or a less number of rows remain, only a corresponding number of pieces are drawn. This process is continued over and over until all the pieces are combined in sets of threes in a long row at the top, or the top row is exhausted and a block ensues, determining suc- cess or failure. The name of the game is said to have been taken from as Kwan Ti or Wu Ti, the God of War. A native of Kiai Chow, in Shan-si, who rose to celebrity toward the close of the second century through his alliance with Liu Pei and Chang Feiin the struggles which ushered in the period of the Three Kingdoms. He is reputed to have been, in early life, a seller of bean-curd, but to have subsequently applied himself to study until, in A. D. 184, he casually encoun- tered Liu Peiat a time when the latter was about to take up arms in defense of the house of Han against the rebellion of the Yellow Turbans. He joined Liu Pei and his confederate, Chang Fei, in a solemn oath, which was sworn in a peach-orchard belonging to the latter, that they would fight henceforth side by side and live and die together. The fidelity of Kwan Yii to his adopted leaders remained unshaken dur- ing a long series of years in spite of many trials; and similarly his attachment to Chang Fei continued throughout his life. At an early period of his career he was created a ting how (baron) by the regent Ts’ao Ts’ao, with the title of Han shu ting han. ; His martial powers shone conspicuously in many campaigns which were waged by Liu Pei before his throne as sovereign of Shu became assured, but he fell a victim at last to the superior force and strategy of Sun K’iian, who took him prisoner and caused him to be beheaded. Long celebrated as one of the most renowned among China’s heroes, he was at length canonized by the superstitious Hwei T’sung, of the Sung dynasty, early in the Twelfth century, with the title Chung hwui Kung. In 1128 he received the still higher title of Chwing mit wu ngdn wang, and after many subsequent alterations and additions he was at length raised in 1594 by Ming Wan Li to the rank of Ti, or God, since which date, and especially since the accession of the Manchow dynasty, his worship as the God of War has been firmly established. (Chinese Reader's Manual, No. 297.) 528 REPORT OF NATIONAL MUSEUM, 1893. celebrated Chinese general, now universally worshiped in China as the God of War, and one of the heroes of the famous historical romance, the Sdm Kwok chi, or “Annals of Three States.” In eseaping from Ts’ao Ts’ao,* it is recorded that he killed six generals at “ five frontier passes,” o-koan (Chinese ’ng kwdn). The vicissitudes of his life at this time are typified in the varying fortunes of the game, which at one moment approaches a successful termination, only for the player to be unexpectedly set back to overcome its obstacles anew. The conquest of the “five koan,” which Koan Ou achieved, finds it analogue in the 5 rows of the dominoes which the player struggles to overcome. Many educated people play this game every morning, and scholars who have nothing to do play it all day long, finding intellectual pastime in its elusive permutations. BURMESE AND SHAN DOMINOES. A set of Burmese dominoes in the National Museum are of teak wood and measure 2 by 1 by 2 inches (pl. 10). The spots are marked with incised circles. They number 24 pieces, marked as follows: 6-6, 1-1, 44, 1-3, 5-5, 3-3, and 2-2 duplicated, and one each of the following pieces: 6-3, 4-5, 6-2, 5-3, 4-3, 5-2, 2-4, 1-4, 2-3, and 1-2, the last having 2 smaller spots adjoining the “1.” They are accompanied by a cubical die about three-fourths inch square, with 2 opposite faces marked with 1 spot, 2 opposite faces marked with 2 spots, and 2 opposite faces marked with 3 spots. This is used to decide who shall play first. A set of Burmese dominoes, from Rangoon, sent to the writer by the Hon. Sir C. H. T. Crosthwaite, lieutenant-general Northwest Prov- inces, British India, are identical with the preceding, except that the spots are marked with small brass disks. A set of Burmese dominoes in the British Museum are made of black horn, and number 32 pieces. They measure 12 inches in length by three-fourths of an inch in width and have incised spots, which are painted red and yellow and arranged according to the Chinese system. The backs are uniformly marked with “1” and ‘‘3” spots composed of concentric circles, and the ends each bear 1 spot similarly inscribed. Another set of Burmese dominoes in the same collection are made of black wood, with the spots painted red and white. Dice are called anzamida (singular anzd) in Burmese. The Burmese dice in the museum of the University of Pennsylvania are small ivory cubes, regularly marked and having the fours in red, and are identical with the Chinese. A set of Shan dominoes in the British Museum, presented by Maj. BE. B. Gladen, are identical in every respect with the horn dominoes from Burma in the same museum. *Ts’ao Ts’ao D., A. D. 220. Chinese Reader’s Manual, No. 768. PLATE 10. Report of National Museum, 1893.—Culin. OOO OOO O00 OOO O OOOO OOOOOU o. OOO COo® OO CO OFO OO OO) OV) © ©||O-©O0-O ||O_ © © Cy} LOO ©O Op ©) a ae Oke “9 “e||@___ e} [eo © © © © © O@ OO le © Q© || © O © O o) © OOO 00 OQ 2, O © ©6O0| 100 © Op © ©) oF O16 OO) || RCTS ©) © ©|\ |\O: © CoO BURMESE DOMINOES Cat. No. 166540, U. S. N. M PLATE 11. Report of National Museum, 1893.—Culin. ® @ fs ) e SIAMESE DOMINOES. CHINESE GAMES WITH DICE AND DOMINOES. 529 SIAMESE DOMINOES. Dominoes are called in Siamese taw tem (Chinese td tim) ‘arranging or connecting spots.” Two sets of dominoes exhibited by the Govern- ment of Siam in the Section of Games at the Columbian Exposition consist of 24 thin rectangular tablets of ivory, one with face of + by ,, and the other 141 by 18 inches (pl. 11). Lhe “ones” and “fours” are marked with red and the others with black spots, in the following series: The pieces 6-6, 1-1, 44, 1-3, 5-5, 3-3, 2-2, 5-6, 4-6, 1-6, and 1-0 duplicated, and one of each of the pieces 6-3 and 6-2. ESKIMO DOMINOES. A set of Innuit dominoes in the U.S. National Museum, Washington, (pl. 12), is described by Mr. Lucien Turner, who conducted the expe- dition for the Smithsonian Institution in 1884.* “The Innuit,” Mr. Turner says, “who come from the western end of Hudson Strait, the so-called Northerners, have a game which they play with sets of pieces of ivory cut into irregular shapes, and marked on one face with spots arranged in different patterns. The number of pieces in a set varies from 60 to 148. The name of a set is A ma zi a ldt, and somewhat resembles our game of dominoes. “The game is played in the following manner: Two or more persons, according to the number of pieces in the set, sit down and pile the pieces before them. One of the players mixes the pieces together in plain view of the others. When this is done he calls them to take the pieces. Each person endeavors to obtain a half or third of the number, if there be tworor three players. The one who mixed up the pieces lays down a piece and calls his opponent to match it with a piece having a similar design. If this can not be done by any of the players the first has to match it, and the game continues until one of the players has exhausted all of the pieces taken by him. The pieces are designated by pairs, having names such as ka mtu tik (sled), kaiak (canoe), kalé sak (navel), dé ma zut (many), a tav sik (1), ma kok (2), ping a sut (3), si té mit (4), and td li mat (5). Each of the names above must be matched with a piece of similar kind, although the other end of the piece may be of a ditter- ent design. A kamutik may be matched with an amazut, if the latter has not a line or bar cut across it; if it has a bar it must be matched with an amazut. “This game is known to the people of the Ungava district, but those only who learn it from the Northerners are able to play it. The northern Eskimo stake the last article they possess on the issue of the game. Their’ wivés are disposed of tem- porarily, and often are totally relinquished to the victor. I have heard of wives so disposed of often sit down and win themselves back to their former owners.” Dr. Franz Boas informs me that the Eskimo name for dominoes means “standing upright side by side.” MISCELLANEOUS GAMES. Several fanciful games have come to my notice which have been suggested by the European domino game. In the Section of Games in the Department of Anthropology at the Columbian Exposition, Chicago, 1893, amodern French game was exhibited under the name of Le Magister Dominoes Geographique, consisting of oblong pieces of cardboard, each bearing on its face a portion of the map of the Valley of the Seine. It was intended to be used for teaching geography. Another game, * Eleventh Annual Report of the Bureau of Ethnology, 1889-90, pp. 257-258. H. Mis. 184, pt. 2-34 530 REPORT OF NATIONAL MUSEUM, 1893. entitled “Evan’s Baseball Dominoes,” consisted of wooden domino- shaped blocks marked on one face at the ends with the names of the scoring points in the American game of baseball. INTRODUCTION OF DOMINOES INTO EUROPE. rom the foregoing accounts it will be seen how widely the peculiar Chinese game of dominoes is distributed, from Korea to Burma and Siam. Dr. Gustav Schlegel states that the European game of dominoes is without doubt borrowed from the Chinese, only that in it the philosophic-astronomic elements have been done away with and only the arithmetical retained. I have been unable to discover the connect- ing links between the two games. The Levant may furnish a clew to the relationship if any such now exists, but | am without information on the subject. The game seems to date from a recent period in Europe. According to Brockhaus’ Conversations-Lexicon, Art “* Domino,” it was introduced into Germany through France from Italy about the middle of the last century. ln England it appears from a writer in Notes and Queries * to have been introduced by French prisoners about the close of the last century. INVENTION OF THE GAME. According to a tradition current among the Chinese laborers in the United States, dominoes were invented by Hung Ming,t a hero of that popular romance, the Sdm Kwok chi,t for the amusement of his soldiers to keep them awake during the watches of the night in their camp before theenemy. Others attribute them to the ingenuity of Kéung Cai Kung,s and give a similar reason for their discovery. A Chinese physician, the most scholarly of my informants among his class, insisted that they were invented by Fan Lai,|| whose picture, from a popular illustrated edition of the Tung chau lit kwok,4| is reproduced in fig. 25. Little importance need be attached to these stories, which are given as illustrations of the conflicting statements made by the comparatively uneducated Chinese regarding things which are a matter of record. Dr. Gustav Schlegel, ** quoting from the Chi sz yin kau (Chii sz’ yam kdu),tt states that dominoes were invented in 1120 A, D. by a statesman * January 23, 1869. tChu-ko Liang (Hung Ming), A. D. 181-234. The great counselor of Liu Pei, who owed to the sagacity and military skill of Chu-ko Liang his success in establishing himself upon the throne. (The Chinese Reader’s Manual, No. 88.) t Wylie, A., Notes on Chinese Literature, Shanghai, 1867, p. 161. § Kiang Tsze-ya (Kéung tdi kung) is reported to have been a counselor of Si Peh, twelfth century B.C. (The Chinese Reader’s Manual, No. 257.) || Fan Li (dn Lai), minister of Kow Tsien, Prince of Yiieh, whom he aided to overthrow the rival kingdom of Wu, the final victory of which, after twenty years’ warfare, was achieved B. C. 473. (The Chinese Reader’s Manual, No. 127.) q Notes on Chinese Literature, p. 162. **Chinesische Briiuch und Spiele in Europa, Breslau, 1869, p. 18. tt Investigations on the traditions of all things. PLATE 12. Report of National Museum, 1893.—Culin. eceosesec eaetoaeeertte e ee ®eeeseave ecteessee ESKIMO DOMINOES. Cat. No. 76880, U. S. N. M. CHINESE GAMES WITH DICE AND DOMINOES. 531 who presented them to the Emperor Hwui-tsung, and that the game with its explanation was locked in the imperial treasury and first came into general use in the reign of Hwui-tsung’s son, Kao-tsung (1127-1163 AS D:); Mr. Karl Himly * cites Kaénghi’s Dictionary as saying that according to general tradition dominos were invented in the secoud year of Siuen-ho (1120) and circulated abroad by imperial order at the time of Kao-tsung. Mr. Chattot quotes the other great Chinese dictionary of the last century, the Ching tsz’ tung, on the authority of Mr. Samuel Birch, as saying that the cards now known in China as *“‘ Teen-tsze-pae” (tim ts2’ pa), or “dotted cards,” were invented in the reign of Siuen-ho, 1120, and that they began to be common in the reign of Kao-tsung. Mr. W. H. Wilkinson has recently shows ithat in the citation made by Chatto from the Ching tsz’ tung, he omits the concluding and most important sentence: ‘“Itdoes not follow that this class of games originated in the period Hsiian-ho,” and says that the passage, adduced again and again by European writers to prove that cards (dominoes) were first invented in the reign of Siuen-ho, when carefully ex- amined, distinctly declares that such a con- clusion would be unsound. “Tt is perfectly clear,” Mr. Wilkinson says, ‘that all that was done or asked for in 1120 was an imperial decision as to which of several forms of T’ien-kiu (Heavens and Nines) was to be considered orthodox. The game and the cards must have been in existence long before. The passage from the Cheng-tza-t’ung runs thus: ‘Also ya p’ai, now the instruments of a game. A common legend states that in the second year of the MHsiian-ho, in the Sung dynasty (1120 A. D.), a certain official memorialized the throne, praying that the ya p’ai (ivory cards) might be fixed as a pack of 32, comprising 127 pips (sic, it should be 227, but Chinese printers are careless), in order to accord with the expanse of the stars and constellations. The combination, ‘Heaven,’ (6—6, 6—6) consisted of two pieces, containing 24 pips, figures of the 24 solar periods; ‘earth’ (1—1, 1—1) also composed of two pieces, but contained 4 pips, the four points of the compass—east, west, south and north; ‘man’ (4—4, 4—4) two pieces, containing 16 pips, the virtues of humanity, benevolence, propriety and wis- dom, fourfold; ‘harmony’ (1—3, 1—3) two pieces of eight pips, figuring the breath of ‘Harmony’ which pervades the eight divisions of the year. The other combina- tions had each their names. There were four players having 8 cards apiece for their hand, and the cards won or lost according as the number of the pips was less or more, the winner being rewarded with counters. In the time of Kao-tsung * Zeitschrift der deutscher Morgenliindischeu Gesellschaft, Band 43, p. 451. + Facts and Speculations on the History of Playing Cards. London, 1848, p. 55. The American Anthropologist, Jan., 1895, vol. viii., No. 1, p. 66. Hoe REPORT OF NATIONAL MUSEUM, 1893. (1127-1163) pattern packs were issued by imperial edict. They are now known throughout the empire as ku p’ai, ‘bone pai;’ but it does not follow that this class of games, po-sai, ko-wu, and the rest originated in the reign Hsiian-ho.” As the foregoing shows that the historical evidence 1s inconclusive as to the actual invention of dominoes, and as the Chinese accounts of the invention of other games are not particularly trustworthy, and especially as the history of all games seems to be one of gradual evo- lution, rather than direct invention, the following pages are devoted Wig. 24. PASE (DICE). SET OF THREE FOR CHAUSAR, LUCKNOW, INDIA. (From specimens in Museum of University of Pennsylvania. ) to an examination into the origin of the game from internal evidences ‘rather than an historical point of view. DOMINOES A FORM OF DICE. It is readily apparent that the 21 individual domino pieces represent the possible throws with 2 dice, and that the domino pieces may be regarded as conjoined dice. Of this the Korean dominoes furnish the best material evidence. Consonant with many other Korean objects, they are typical of an earher age of Chinese culture than that now existing in China. Their material, color of spots, and the manner in which the “ one” spots are incised and made larger than the other spots, complete their resemblance to 2 conjomed dice. If we accept this theory the bone- faced bamboo dominoes may be regarded as directly related to the pre- CHINESE GAMES WITH DICE AND DOMINOES. 533 ceding, the wooden backs being substituted as a matter of economy. Dominoes made entirely of wood would naturally foliow, and the long dominoes used in the south of China might be regarded as a later type. Even they bear a suggestion of their origin in the spots with which their ends and tops are decorated. The names of the dominoes are the same as those of the corre- sponding throws with the 2 dice, and the pieces are divided, like the dice-throws, into the series of man and mo, in which they rank in the same order as the dice. The correspondence extends to the game as well, the most character- istic domino game, té tin kau, closely resembling the most characteristic dice game, chak tin kau. Indeed, if dominoes were invented for the purpose of a game, they doubtless had their origin in the Fig. 25. PASE (DICE), SET OF THREE FOR CHAU- game with 2 dice. This game with 2 SAR, LUCKNOW, INDIA. dice, shéung luk, which, according to one FeO aT oh ae ae Chinese authority, is said to have come from India, finds a parallel in an Indian dice game. Several kinds of dice are employed in games in India, One (fig. 24) called pase (plural of pasa) are used in the game called chausar, and consist of rectangular bone or ivory prisms, marked on 4 sides with 1, 2,5, and 6 spots. These dice are sometimes made shorter and pointed at the ends (fig. 25), Their origin I assign to the staves referred to on page 507. Another kind of Indian dice, called by the Arabic name of ktab, or kabat, trom kab, ‘Cankle,” “ankle bone,” are used in the game of k‘taba- tain, 2 dice being thrown. Either natural astragali, consisting of the knuckle bones of a goat, or dice marked on 4 sides with “three,” “four,” ‘‘one,” and “six” spots, or cubical dice regularly marked on the 6 sides (fig. 27) are employed. - The * four” spots on these dice are usually marked in red, and often both the ‘ three” and “four” are marked in this color.* Thus cubical dice appear to be Fig. 26. SET OF LONG DICE: CELEBES. * This account of kab was communicated to the writer by the Hon. Syad Moham- med Hadi, of Sultanpur, India. Two sets of ivory dice, received by the writer from Lucknow, are cubical, and marked on their 6 sides with from 1 to 6 spots, in the same manner as our common dice. The ‘ fours” alone are in red. ; 534 REPORT OF NATIONAL MUSEUM, 1893. directly connected with the knuckle bones. The Arabic name for the knuckle bone and the die is the same, k‘ab, and, like the knuckle bones, which are commonly thrown in pairs, natural pairs from the right and left leg being used, cubical dice are also thrown in pairs. Carrying out the resemblance, cubical dice in India are sold in pairs, and by varying the arrangement of the “ threes” and ‘fours” * are actually made in pairs, rights and lefts, like the. knuckle bones. If this is the true history of the descent of the cubical dotted Beat die, its evolution must have occurred at a very eect: LUCKNOW inp = early time, as the regularly marked stone die > ve \n r > aT a (From specimens in Museum. of from the Greek colony of Naucratis, Egypt (fig. 28), assigned by the discoverer, Mr. Flinders Petrie, to 600° B. C., bears witness. Now, the 4 sides of the knuckle bone (talus) (fig. 30), which were designated among the Romans as supinum, pronum, planum, and. tor- twosum, and correspond with the numbers ‘ three,” “four,” “one,” and ** six,” receive in the Mohammedan East the names of ranks and econ- ditions of men. The Persians, according to Dr. Hyde,+ name them, respectively, “duzd,” “slave,” “dihban,” ‘ peas- ant,” ‘‘vezir,” “viceroy,” and shah, or padi-shah, “king.” Similar names are given by the same author as applied to them by the Arabs, Turks, and Armenians. From this it appears that the names and rank given to the significant throws, “three,” “four,” “one,” and “six,” with knuckle bones and dice in Western Asia find their coun- terparts in the names and rank of the same throws in China, the names of the classes of human society found among the Arabs being ee a replaced in China with the terms for the cosmic EGYPT. powers: “Heaven” (“six”), “ Karth” (“one?))) 2a ees and “Man” (“four”), and the ‘“‘ Harmony” (‘*three-one”), that unites them. It will also be observed that the use of 2 dice, which appears to follow that of the natural pair of knuckle bones, and is displayed in the Indian k‘abatain, and the ancient and widely diffused game of backgammon, is paralleled by the use of 2 dice in.China, where shéung luk (Japanese, sugoroku) Fig. 28. “Ifa Chinese die be turned ace up and revolved toward the person holding it so that the ‘‘two,” ‘‘tive,” and ‘‘six” are disclosed in snecession, it will be found that the “three” is usually to the left and the “four” to the right, while the opposite is more usually the case on European dice. In the Indian dice here referred to, this arrangement is alternated, one having the “three” on the right and the other on the left. t De Ludis Orientalibus, p. 147. CHINESE GAMES WITH DICE AND DOMINOES. 535 is a common name for dice play. It has been observed that the “threes” and “fours” are marked in red on Indian dice, while in China the “ones” and “fours” are so marked. The Wak kan san- Fig. 29. ANCIENT ROMAN DICE OF IVORY. (From specimens in Museum of University of Pennsylvania. sai relates that in the game of Sugoroku the throws receive the fol- lowing names: Chio ichi, ‘‘double one.” Shiu shi, ‘‘vermilion four.” Chio ni, ‘‘ double two.” Chio go, ‘‘ double five.” Shiu san, ‘‘ vermilion three.” Chio roku, ‘* double six.” From this it would appear that the dice anciently used in Japan and China had the “three” and “four” marked in red* like the Indian Fig. 30. THE FOUR SIDES OF A KNUCKLE BONE, After Hyde. k‘abat, instead of the “one” and “four,” as is the present custom—an additional argument in favor of the Indian origin of the Chinese dice. Two questions remain to be answered: *A pair of miniature Japanese ivory dice, presented to the writer by Prof. Henry H. Gigliol, of Florence, Italy, have the “threes” and ‘‘ fours ” marked in red. 536 REPORT OF NATIONAL MUSEUM, 1893. Where and for what purpose were the dice-throws united in the domino form, and why was the number of the domino pieces increased from 21 to 32?) Dominoes are unknown in India as a native game, but as it seemed possible that they might have had their origin there for use in fortune telling, the writer made acareful examination of the prin- cipal East Indian systems of fortune telling with dice, but the results did not throw any light upon the origin of dominoes. * The Thibetan astrologers, ac- cording to Schlagintweit, + use dice which are either cubes like European ones, or rectangular parallelopipedons, sometimes comparatively very long; the latter, in con- sequence of their form, having two sides blank. This description agrees with the preceding Indian dice used in fortune tell- ing, Which I regard as derived from the game with staves, but the faces of a die (fig. 32), which Schlagintweit figures as used by the Thibetans for astrological purposes, suggests a domino in the duplica- tion of its spots. ‘The astrological associations of the domino game have not thrown Fig. 31. ANCIENT GLASS ASTRAGALI: SYRIA. (From specimens in Museum of University of Pennsylvania. 0O0880|;0 0@ @ Fig. 32. FACES OF TIBETAN DIE USED FOR ASTROLOGICAL PURPOSES. From Schlagintweit. light as yet upon the question of its origin. They have been referred to in connection with the method of telling fortunes, and it has been observed that the disks accompanying the bamboo dominoes from Fuhchau bear the names of the cyclical animals. It will also be noticed that the terms din and ngdng, “weak” and “strong,” applied to the pairs in the game of k‘ap tdi shap, p. 513, are the same as those used to designate the broken and undivided lines in the Yik King, and that * Report of the Proceedings of the Numismatic and Antiquarian Society of Phila- delphia, 1890-91, p. 65. + Buddhism in Thibet, London, 1863, p. 315. tCol. W. W. Rockhill informs me that he never saw dice used in Thibet except for fortune telling. According to Col. Rockhill, the Thibetan name for dice is sho, and a person who throws dice, mo jyab ken. He tells me that he always saw four dice used in Thibet and North China. These dice have no ‘‘six.” There is a picture of the god Pal-dan-hlamo holding a bag of dominoes or dice in the superb Thibetan col- lection deposited by him in the U. 8. National Museum. CHINESE GAMES WITH DICE AND DOMINOES. 537 the diagram (fig. 33)* which is given by Legget as the accepted form of the Lok Shii, or “ Lo writing,” which is referred to in the Yik King as one of the sources of in- spiration for its broken and ~ undivided lines,t is com- » posed of light and dark cir- Ee cles similar to the domino dots. e I may suggest, in conclu- @ @ OCO0000000 sion, that dominoes may e have been first used as coun- ters or tallies in a dice game or 19 a method of fortune O O telling with dice. They ex- isted in their present form in O (Oy She (2) China in the year 1120 A. D., according to the Chinese rec- O O ords, with similar astrological associations as at the pres- -) ent day. They are clearly oe @ ) descended from dice, and e@ ®@ e@ ®@ particularly from that game @ ©@ @ e@ @ with two dice which appears & & to have been introduced into oe , - 2 LOK SHU, OR ‘‘LO WRITING. China from western Asia. (O)VOVO/ONCOVKONO) *This diagram coincides with the most renowned of the arithmetical squares which are used as charms both by Hindus and Mohammedans in India. It is usually written as below, an inversion of the Chinese arrangement. 6 1 8 7 5 3 2 $ 4 This square appears in its numerical form on the Thibetan charts, reproduced by Schlagintweit, where it is arranged in the Chinese order. It is believed in India,said one of my Mohammedan informants, that to write this charm will bring good look and money by honest means. The object for which it is used is always written beneath it. He told me that his grandfather wrote it every day after prayers and would place beneath it the words rizk, ‘‘ bread,” or chard), ‘fexpenses.” Such numbered diagrams are cut in squares, each containing a number. These are made into pills with wheaten bread and thrown into a pond or river to be eaten by fish. Another Indian, a Hindu, says that this magic square is called in Hindustani Pundra no yuntra, or thet*15 yuntra.” It is written both with numerals and with dots. In the latter case the set of dots from 1 to 9 frequently are made each of a different color and certain names are given to them. It is notimprobable that this diagram was borrowed by the Chinese from India, and that, too, at a much later period than is usually assigned to it by the Chinese. The writer found a copy of it—in Arabic numerals, among the written charms in a soldier’s kit captured in Tonquin—in the Municipal Museum of the city of Havre. The spots, like those on the dice, are doubtless survivals of a primitive system of notation, like that which existed in Mexico at the time of the Conquest. t Legge, Rev. Dr. James, The Yé King, Oxford, 1882. Introduction, p. 18. tIbid., Appendix III, Sec. 1, par. 73. THE ONYX MARBLES: THEIR ORIGIN, COMPOSITION, AND USES, BOTH ANCIENT AND MODERN. GEORGE P. MERRILL, Curator, Department of Geology, U. S. National Museum. THE ONYX MARBLES: THEIR ORIGIN, COMPOSITION, AND USES, BOTH ANCIENT AND MODERN. By GEORGE P. MERRILL. Curator, Department of Geology, U.S. National Museum. “Tt now remains for us to speak of stones, or in other words, the leading folly of the day; to say noth- ing at all of our taste for gems and amber, crystal and murrhine vases. For everything of which we have previously treated (down to the present book) may by some possibility or other have the appearance of having been created for the sake of man; but as to the mountains, naturemade these for herself, as a kind of bulwark for keeping together the bowels of the earth; as also for the purpose of curbing the violence of rivers, of breaking the waves of the sea, and so, by opposing to them the very hardest of her materials, putting a check upon those elements which are never at rest. And yet, we must hew down these mountains, forsooth, and carry them off; and this for no other reason than to gratify our luxurious inchnations.’’—PLINY. Since very early times civilized man has shown an ever increasing tendency to decorate his home and his temples with objects beautiful and rare. With but a limited knowledge of metallurgy, with methods of manufacture crude in the extreme, the scope of his means was at first limited to such materials as nature had already prepared for his use or as could be wrought into objects of beauty by the few arts at his command. It is but natural, therefore, that the gems and precious stones early came into demand for household as well as personal adorn- ment, while the marbles and alabasters, the granites, porphyries, and more vulgar lime and sandstones became equally desirable for purposes of interior decoration and for the rougher exteriors of houses and pal- aces, temples and tombs, wherever civilization had gained sufficient foothold to rendei them objects of admiration, or where a desire for immortality had spurred the builder to seek a less perishable material than wood. Hence it is that the onyx and sardonyx, the diamond, the opal, and the pearl, as well as marbles and alabasters were thousands of years ago as well known and—among the wealthier classes—even more univer- sally used than to-day. Itis indeed a singular fact that in all these years that have elapsed since history began, scarcely a gem or ornamental stone of more than local importance has been discovered but was known, in at least some of its varieties, and utilized by a people so ancient that we can read their history only mm their ruins. Among the most beautiful of the many stones thus used for both building and for interior decoration, were certain travertines and cave : 541 542 REPORT OF NATIONAL MUSEUM, 1893. deposits, the so-called onyx marbles, or oriental alabasters, the lapis oniscus, or onychites, of the Romans. It is the purpose of the writer to present herewith in considerable detail the results of his own researches and observations on this class of rocks, together with so much additional information as can be gleaned from available sources. It is unfortunate in our discussion of the subject in hand, that both the popular names by which these stones are kuown are erroneous and misleading. The term onyx as properly used, includes a banded variety of chaleedony—a purely siliceous rock—the name being derived from the Greek ovvé or ovywv, a nail, in allusion to the wavy bands by which the stone is traversed, and its translucency, both of which are characteristics of the nails upon the hand. That such a name should have become applied to this particular variety of travertine is by no means strange, since both the characteristics of banding and translu- cency are often as pronounced as in the true onyx. And, inasmuch as the name has become too firmly engrafted upon the literature to ever become wholly eradicated, it is the name used here, but in its adjec- tive form only, as descriptive of a kind of marble. The term alabaster as applied to the stone is even more misleading than onyx, since both stones are used for much the same purposes, and when reading published accounts we are not infrequently at a loss, unless descriptive qualities are mentioned, to know at all times whether the material under discussion is a true alabaster (gypsum) or an onyx marble. Thus Chateau * states that the alabasters are trans- lucent, of a greater hardness than the marbles proper, and are hence more expensive to work. Finally he says the alabasters “ présentent des veines festonnées et onduleuses, que l’ on ne remarque jamais dans les marbres avec cette méme irrégularité.” It is obvious that this is a travertine and nota true alabaster. Again (on p. 453) he speaks of “ Palabatre dur,” or “calcaire,” having a yellow or variegated tint, and which is found in grottos and caverns in calcareous rocks. The ‘“ala- batre tendre” or “gypseux” of this writer is the true alabaster. Pliny, the elder, from whom we quoted at the beginning of this arti- cle, wrote with an equal lack of perspicuity, though this perhaps is to be little wondered at. He says: “Our forefathers imagined that onyx was to be found only in the mountains of Arabia, and nowhere else, but Sundines was aware that it is also found in Carmania. Drinking ves- sels were made of it at first, and then the feet of beds and chairs. Cor- nelius Nepos relates that great was the astonishment when P. Lentulus Spinther exhibited amphorze made of this material, as large as Chian wine vessels in size, ‘and yet five years after,’ says he, ‘I saw columns of this material, no less than 2 and 30 feet in height.’ At a more recent period again some change took place with reference to this stone, * Technologie du Batiment, Vol. 11, p. 448. THE ONYX MARBLES. 543 for four small pillars of it were erected by Cornelius Balbus in his theater as something quite marvelous. Ajassen, however, thinks these were of yellow jasper or sardonyx, and I myself have seen 30 columns of larger size in the banqueting room which Callistres erected.” Again, “this stone is called ‘alabastrites’ by some, and is hollowed out into vessels for holding unguents, it having the reputation of pre- serving them from corruption better than anything else. In a calcined state it is a good ingredient for plasters. That which is of a honey color is the most esteemed, covered with spots curling in whirls and not transparent. Alabastrite is considered defective when it is of a white or horn color, or approaching to glass in appearance.” * “Alabastrites is a stone which comes from Alabastron in Egypt and Damascus in Syria. It is of a white color, spotted with various tints. Calcined with fossil salt and pulverized, it is a cure for affections of the mouth and teeth, it is said.” t “Ajassen remarks that under this name (alabaster) the ancients meant, first, yellow, calcareous alabaster, and, secondly, chalcedony, unclassified.” ¢ It seems most probable that the drinking vessels and feet of chairs and beds referred to in these quotations were of the true onyx (chal- cedony). ‘The amphore and large columns, on the other hand, were most likely of the onyx marble (travertine or stalagmite). The ala- bastrites, which on being calcined is good for plasters, would seem at first thought to be a true alabaster (calcium sulphate) since this when thus treated yields the well-known plaster of paris. I have as yet, however, to learn with absolute certainty of the use of the sulphate by the Egyptians for the purpose he mentions—that of making vessels for holding unguents; and, inasmuch as the calcium carbonate would yield quicklime on calcining, it seems most probable that the material referred to in the second and third quotations from Pliny’s work was of the last-named material. In the descriptions of St. Marks Cathedral at Venice, as given by Baedecker and others, mention is made of au altar with “four spiral columns of alabaster, said to have once belonged to the temple of Solo- mon, of which the two white ones in the middle are semitransparent.” To one at all acquainted with the physical properties of the true ala- baster it seems impossible that the material.can be other than an onyx marble or perhaps chalcedony. The above illustrations together with the references which follow will serve to show the confusion existing in the literature on the subject. The derivation of the name is interesting, and may well be dwelt upon briefly here. The original Greek word from which our word *Pliny, Natural History, Book xxxvi, chap. 12. t Ibid., Book xxxvil, chap. 54. t Ibid., Vol. vi., p. 399. 544 REPORT OF NATIONAL MUSEUM, 1893. alabaster was derived was aiafacrpos, or aidZactpov, and is said to have been derived from a, not, and 24/7, a handle, or 742, to hold, in allu- sion to the little handleless, phial-like, or amphora-shaped perfume vessels constructed from it. But the word after a tine passed from the thing made to the substance of which it was made, though Pliny men- tions an Egyptian town called Alabastron, where the manufacture of the vessels was carried on. The ancient Roman name of the stone wag alabastrites.* Be this as it may, the name alabaster, as now used by all authorities, applies only to a white, though sometimes variously veined and mottled variety of gypsum, a calcium sulphate, while the onyx marbles with which we have to do in this work, are of calcium carbonate and mineralogically either aragonite or calcite, principally the latter. ORIGIN AND MODE OF OCCURRENCE. The origin of these stones is purely chemical, and of interest on account of the very simplicity of the process. Simple and well known though it may be, we are apparently not yet able to account in a manner entirely satisfactory for the varying physical conditions, as texture and hardness or form of crystallization, under which the mate- rialoccurs. Pure water, although an almost aniversal solvent, never- theless acts so slowly upon most substances belonging to the mineral kingdom that the results are quite inappreciable to the ordinary observer. When, however, holding minute quantities of carbonic acid, and especially when, as deep in the surface of the earth, it is under considerable pressure, its solvent property is very considerably aug- mented, and results are produced both in the way of solution and redeposition which are readily noticeable, even to the most casual observer. One of the most common mineral substances found in aqueous solu- tion is carbonate of lime, the essential constituent of ordinary limestones and marbles, as well as of the beautiful onyx marbles, as we shall notice later. It is to be found in the water of all springs, streams, lakes, and seas, and furnishes the means whereby the multitudinous Sbellfisb and corals build up their calcareous shells and skeleton-like supports. Pure water will dissolve only 1 part in 10,800 when cold and 1 part in 8,875 when boiling. When the water is saturated with carbonic acid gas at ordinary atmospheric pressure and a temperature of 10° C., its capacity for solution is increased to nearly 1 part by weight in 1,000 (0.88 grams per liter of water), With an increase in pressure the amount of carbonic acid that can be held by water is also increased, and there is as a natural result an augmentation in its solvent power. The maximum amount of lime which ean be dissolved, even under the most favorable circumstances, is stated by Roscoe and *JoNeEs, T. Rupert. Demonstration on the marbles and other monumental stones in the British Museum.—(Proceedings Geologists Association, Vol. VI.) THE ONYX MARBLES. 545 Schorlemmer to be about 3 grams per liter of water, or 3 parts by weight to 1,000. As has long been known, it is to the escape from solution of halt the combined carbonie acid, aided in some cases by the secreting power of algous vegetation, that is due the deposition of the lime carbonate in the form of sinters and tufas about the orifices of springs, in that of scale in steam boilers and other vessels, or in the form of stalagmitic and stalactitic deposits in caves. With its solvent power diminished by the loss of the acid gas, the water deposits its load as rapidly as the gas escapes. Now, although we know this to be the process by which the calca- reous deposition takes place, we do not know absolutely just what are the conditions which control the character of the deposit as regards compactness and condition of crystallization. Why in some cases the deposit should be so compact as to be susceptible of an enamel-like polish, and of such colors as to make a beautiful marble, or again light and tufaceous like those now forming at the Mammoth Hot Springs in the Yellowstone National Park, or the more compact lapis Tiburtinus of Tivoli, Italy. Such synthetic work as has been done fails to throw much light upon the subject. G. Rose* has shown that by humid methods it is possible to produce out of the same solution crystals of both aragonite and calcite, the one or the other forming according to the temperature of the solution. Aragonite was formed exclusively by a rapid evaporation of hot solutions, while calcite was produced from similar solutions, both hot and cold. As the investigations here chronicled have shown the onyx marbles to be almost invariably of calcite, it is at once evident that we must look for other controlling conditions than those of temperature for a satisfactory solution. Such literature as bears upon the subject enables us, however, to draw, from analogy, certain conclusions, and it may not be without interest to refer here briefly to the expressed opinions of others. Thus Dr. Edward Hitchcock, writing half a century ago, says: t ‘‘T have alluded to the deposition of marble, or alabaster, by certain springs in the vicinity of Lake Oroomiah (Persia). What is called the Tabrez marble has been repeatedly described by travelers; but I doubt whether definite geological ideas have yet been entertained respecting the mode of its formation. With the exception, perhaps, of a deposit of travertine around Rome, in Italy, resembling statuary marble, lam not aware of any case besides those around Oroomiah in which the most beautiful marble is produced by springs. The Tabrez marble is usually of a yellowish or light blue color, perfectly compact, and so translucent that it is used in thin slices for the windows of baths and other places, like the phengites of the ancients. * ~*~ * Thecommon opinion is that the springs now deposit it; but one or two facts have led me to suspect that this may not bethe case. Above the marble there lies a deposit, several feet thick, of common tufa, or travertine. Now, my sus- picion is that this tufa is all the deposit which has been formed since ne SpHBES Benge oa ees , Synthese Paes ieee et idee Roches. t Transactions of the Association of American Geologists and Naturalists, 1840-42, pp. 414-415. H. Mis. 184, pt. 2 aH) 546 REPORT OF NATIONAL MUSEUM, 1893. assumed their present state, and that the alabaster was deposited when their temper- ature was higher, and when, perhaps, they were beneath deep waters. However, this opinion is little better than conjecture.” Bischoff,* in discussing similar phenomena, says: “Tt is interesting to know that mineral springs can deposit granular limestone. I doubt whether hot springs are better suited to this than cold, from which the depo- sition takes place slower than from the former ; but the slower the CaCO; is deposited, the more likely is it to assume a crystalline form.” J. L. Smith, writing of the thermal waters of Hiera polis, says: t “The amount of water is very great, and it is so highly charged with carbonate of lime as to incrust all bodies that it comes in contact with, and it takes place so rapidly that the concretion does not possess great solidity, and frequently has a granular form, resembling driven snow.” W. H. Weed, in writing on the deposition of calcareous matter by the waters of the hot springs of the Yellowstone National Park,says: tf ‘‘Another variety is that which forms the lining of hot-spring ventholes. This is deposited comparatively slowly, and occurs in shelly layers half an inch to 3 inches thick, with a smooth, rounded, and globular surface. It is crystalline and marble-like and pure white. This travertine isa erystallization out of a supersatur- ated solution of carbonate of lime, due to the relief of pressure as the waters approach the surface. A similar deposit lines the ventholes of the Orange and other springs, and is analogous to the deposit so quickly formed in the conduit pipes leading the hot water to the hotel baths, also due to supersaturation, experiments showing that such solutions do not deposit their excess of lime at once, but in the course of a short time.” Bearing in mind that these onyx marbles are of calcite, and so com- pact as to acquire under proper manipulation an enamel-like polish, and further that, as noted later, they are all superficial deposits, it re- mains to formulate our own opinions regarding their origin and to note how far they differ, if at all, from those above given. It is well to note, at the very outset, that while there is no apparent doubt but that, with the exception of the deposits in eaves (see p. 550), the onyx marbles are the result of spring action, I have been able to learn of no single instance in which material of this nature is now forming, the recent deposits invariably taking a tufaceous structure. It is singular, to say the least, that widespread phenomena due to purely local causes should be so nearly synchronous in action and that we should be living in an age of cellular deposition only. It is evident that, so far as their mineralogical nature is concerned, the onyx marbles may be products of deposition from water of any ordinary temperature, hot or cold. Accepting the fact that such depo- sition would take place more slowly from a cold than from a hot solu- tion, and that the more slowly deposition takes place the more likely is *Chemical and Physical Geology, Vol. 1, p. 152. tOriginal Researches, p. 64. + Formation of Travertine and Siliceous Sinter by the Vegetation of Hot Springs. Ninth Ann. Rep., U. 8. Geological Survey, 1887-88. ——s THE ONYX MARBLES. 5AT the deposit to assume a crystalline structure, we might at first thought conclude these to be cold rather than hot water deposits. Bearing in mind, however, that they bear evidence of comparatively rapid growth, such as would indicate deposition from waters of a high degree of sat- uration, it would seem more probable that at the time of issuing the waters were comparatively hot, and perhaps under conditions of con- siderable pressure as well as saturation.* The tendency of such to immediately lose their excess of carbonic acid and deposit a light tufaceous travertine or sinter, as upon the immediate surface at the Mammoth Hot Springs, would be checked provided the discharge took place in pools of quiet water. We know that deposits sufficiently com- pact to receive a polish are sometimes formed in steam boilers, where, however, more than ordinary degree of saturation prevails and under unnatural conditions of pressure.t The onyx deposits being, how- ever, purely superficial, no such conditions of pressure could exist, and we must apparently fall back upon such conditions as should retard the loss of carbonic acid and thus cause the deposit to take place more slowly. Such conditions, we may fairly assume, would exist at the bottom of pools of water, and it is under such conditions, in the writer’s opinion, based upon observation as well as on theoretical grounds, that the onyx marbles have been formed. To account, then, for the alternating tufaceous and compact character of the beds which everywhere exists, we have to make only the natural assumption that the temperature of the water and its degree of saturation periodically varied, the variation being accompanied ‘perhaps by a difference in volume or place of discharge, whereby the water hitherto accumulating in pools, ran off almost immediately, permitting a rapid loss of carbonic acid and an equal rapid diminution in temperature. This intermittent character of the deposition, and in fact the general history of onyx formation is, so far as my own experience goes, best shown in a region rather difficult of access known locally as the Tule Arroyo, adeep cation or ravine on the peninsula of Lower California, some 150 miles south from San Diego, and 15 to 20 miles from the gulf coast. The country rocks here are nearly black mica schists and blue gray silicified limestones and quartzites standing uearly vertical with a strike some 20° west of north, the whole being cut by the ravine, or arroyo, as it is called by the Mexicans. On the steep slopes of the hills on either side, and before the ravine had assumed anything like its present depth, springs have from time to time gushed out and deposited their caleareous load upon the surface over which they flowed. Asa rule the first material *The fact that nearly every deposit of this nature of which I have thus tar found trace is in a region of comparatively recent volcanic activity increases the probabil- ity of their being hot-spring deposits. | +tTbe writer has in his possession such a crust some 5 c. m.in thickness, taken from the boiler of an ocean steamer plying between New York and Portland, Me. In this case, however, the mineral is anhydrite (anhydrous sulphate of lime) rather than a carbonate. 548 REPORT OF NATIONAL MUSEUM, 1893. thus deposited was a dull-colored cellular travertine which cemented together the angular fragments ot older rocks with which the slopes were strewn, giving rise to a coarse conglomerate, or breccia. After this had gone on for some time and the travertine layer had grown, it may be, to several feet in thickness, the conditions changed as I have attempted to outline above, and the deposit took the form of the compact and beautifully veined and tinted stone to which the name onyx is commonly applied. In time the onyx-forming action ceased in its turn, and for a period no calcareous deposition whatever took place, the slopes becoming once more covered with angular particles of older rocks from higher up, these in their turn becoming cemented into breccias when the springs resumed their work. In this way were built up the alternating layers of breccia, tufa, and onyx, until finally all deposition practically ceased, and spasmodic but fiercely rushing streams cut the arroyo to its present depth, exposing in either wall the irregularly alternating beds described. In the bottom of the canon still exist two diminutive springs, each building up in its feeble way small beds of tufaceous material. The water still flowing is so highly carbonated as to bubble like a glass of Vichy fresh from the fountain, and leaves, when drank immediately, a pleasant prickly sensation in the mouth and throat. In discussing the origin of the onyx marbles, it is perhaps but fair to question the possibility of their having been originally deposited as tutaceous materials, and subsequently compacted and crystallized by pressure, heat, and percolating solutions, or other of the ordinary agents of metamorphism. This can be best answered by pointing out. the alternating character of tufaceous and compact layers. It is difficult to conceive of conditions such as should have metamorphosed any one bed without affecting, in the least, those either above or below, or both. The wavy, undulating lines of deposition, comparable with the rings of growth upon a tree, are well defined and unbroken, and though difter- ing frequently from one another in color and crystallization preserve their parallelism and individuality throughout. (See pls. 1 and 3.) There are apparently good reasons for supposing the material to have been deposited as we now find it, the crystallization being contempo- raneous with deposition, as is the case with the stalagmitic material in caves.* The wonderful variations in color, even in the same block or slab, are, however, in part due to changes subsequent to their deposi- tion, and it may be well to dwell upon this braneh of the subject in considerable detail. Few rocks possess so wide a.range of colors or shades of the same color. Pure white, opaque, milk or chalk white to almost colorless, gray, brown in hues from light ochre to deep mahogany, buff, amber, ochre yellow, pink, red, and green are all common; the “These latter deposits do, however, in some cases undergo a recrystallization whereby the whole internal structure is modified without change of external form, as Lhave mentioned elsewhere. PLATE 1. ’ \, Report of Nationa! Museum, 1893 —Merril “ATeI] p jo oue jd 01] o[[e1e d monoas /~ G ‘OZIS [BANIVN ‘SSTGYUVI) XANO ral ‘OOrxelt We PLATE 2. Report of National Museum, 1893.—Merrill. eet. Dili ud iS ‘ydeisojoyd B UOT UMBIT ‘VNOZIHYW ‘NOILVLS SYSAVIA| ‘ANILYSAVYE | JO SYSAV1 DNIMOHS AGISTIIH NI LNO 7 a Creel) —— oS, DAUR 4 \ Report of National Museum, 1893.—Merrill PLATE 3. SLABS OF ONYX MARBLE CUT ACROSS PLANE OF DEPOSITION TO SHOW BANDING. Cat. No. 67000, U.S. N. M. Mayers Station, Arizona. The colors are white, greenish, and brown THE ONYX MARBLES. 549 various hues being sometimes constant throughout large masses, some- times intermixed and blended, sometimes occurring in alternating par- allel bands, and sometimes in distinct veins and spasmodic dashes. In the majority of cases the coloring matter is supposedly iron in some of its forms, aided in part by manganese; in any case the apparent color may be modified Dy conditions of crystallization and structure, a clear translucent stone, by transmitted light, appearing much lighter and of more delicate tints than one that is opaque.* Assuming that the color constituents are only the two metals named, it yet remains to account for their presence and explain the conditions under which they give rise to such a variety of hues. It is easy and presumably correct to assume that the coloring matters were deposited contemporaneously with the calcite, but we must not in accepting this overlook the fact that these substances are unequally soluble, and under proper con- ditions would not be deposited together at all, but would undergo a process of natural separation. As is stated by Bischof,+ water which contains carbonate of lime and protoxide of iron “‘may, when it passes for long distances in contact with the air, finally deposit pure carbon- ate of lime.” This, for the reason that the iron early becomes con- verted into the condition of sesquioxide and is deposited almost at the start. We can here account for their intimate association only on the supposition that at the time of deposition the water was not flow- ing, but lying in quiet pools where oxidation as well as loss of car- bonic acid was retarded. The variation in color of the bands might thus be in part accounted for on the supposition that the waters, as they issued, contained at times varying amounts of the oxides men- tioned. (See pl. 3). i In fact, however, the varying hues are by no means due wholly to the proportion of metallic oxides, but rather to the conditions under which these oxides exist and to organic matter. In certain cases, as in the slabs shown in pl. 3, the bands are of alternating white, green, and brown color, though all show practically the same percent- ages of iron when calculated as protoxide carbonate. As a matter of fact, however, the iron exists in this state only in the white and faintly “A good illustration of the popular ideas regarding the cause of the color in these rocks is given in the accompanying paragraph from the Engineering and Mining Journal (New York), vol. 49, p. 678. ‘‘Mexican onyx is a form of stalagmite, and its colors are formed by oxides of metal in the earth over the caves through which calcareous water passes. Gold is represented by purple, silver by yellow, iron by red, copper by green, and arsenic and zine by white.” It is difficult to conceive of any wording by which more errors could be comprised within the limits of a single paragraph. {Chemical and Physical Geology, p. 146. ; The higher or the lower the temperature of the water, the more or less rapid its cooling, the greater or less abundance of bicarbonate of lime and protoxide of iron, and the different proportions in which these compounds occur—all these circum- stances may give rise to the most varied deposits of these substances as regards their relative quality. —( Bischof, p. 147.) 550 REPORT OF NATIONAL MUSEUM, 1893. greenish layers, the brown layers containing it in the form of both protoxide and more or less hydrated sesquioxides. | Bischoff, in speak- ing of a like condition in the so-called sprudelstein of Carlsbad, says: * The brown contains a considerably larger quantity of peroxide of iron than the white, which is sometimes quite free from it. This difference presupposes either that there is a difference in the quantity of iron contained in the water, or that sometimes the atmospheric air has a greater influence than at others, and that in those cases a larger quantity of protoxide of iron is peroxidized. In the case of the stones here described the percentage of iron in the green and brown and red varieties is nearly the same, the varying hues depending mainly upon its chemical condition. While it is possible that a part of the change from protoxide carbonate to sesquioxide took place at the time of deposition, a large part is due to oxidation which has taken place since the beds were in substantially their present condition, and is due to percolating solutions. That this is the case is abundantly proven by the fact that the oxidation in most cases can be readily seen to have progressed along lines of jointing and fracture and along the more porous layers. In many cases the oxidation is accompanied by a partial removal of the lime carbonate, whereby the stone is rendered cellular and unfit for use. Such, however, is not always the case, and many of the oxidized varieties are beautiful in the extreme, as well as unique. (See under chemical and physical proper- ties, p. 508.) The cave marbles differ from the travertines mainly in method of dep- osition, being cold-water deposits upon the walls and floors of limestone eaves. Rain water passing through the atmosphere and soaking through the layer of soil by which the earth is covered becomes charged with a varying amount of carbonic acid, which gives it the power of dissolving slowly the lime carbonate forming the essential constituent of the rock limestone, as already noted. Filtering downward through cracks and fissures or between the lamine composing the beds, it thus gradually enlarges them until what are popularly known as caves or caverns are produced. But after this cave-forming process has gone on for awhile another process sets in, whereby the cavern may be wholly or in partrefilled. The water from the surface percolating down through the roof of the cave dissolves out a portion of the lime carbonate, just as when running through a crack or fissure, but in this case the water comes through the overlying rock and remains for a time sus- pended, in the form of a drop, from the ceiling. Here it evaporates or loses a part of its carbonic acid, and, unable longer to hold the lime in solution, begins to deposit itin the form of aring around the outer mar- gin of the drop. As time goes on this ring becomes prolonged into a quill-like tube, growing in length always from its lower end. After a time, as a rule, this frail tube becomes partially or wholly closed, when the water flows down over the outside, the growth now being wholly “Op. cit. p. 148. ~~ eee a ee THE ONYX MARBLES. 551 external. In this way are formed the elongated pendant cones from the roofs of caves, and to which the name stalactite is given.* Such on being cut and polished show a beautiful zonal structure, not wholly unlike the rings of growth upon the trunk of a tree. (PI. 13.) But it rarely happens that all the water evaporates upon the ceiling; a portion usually falls upon the floor, where by a similar process it builds up a deposit chemically the same as the stalactites, but differing in that owing to the spreading out of the water as it falls, the floor deposits are more massive in form. To these floor deposits the name stalagmite is given. In some cases they rise in the form of blunt trunks or cones to meet their corresponding stalactites above until there are formed continuous pillars from floor to ceiling, as shown in plate 4. If this process goes on for a sufficient time the entire cave nay be refilled, and since the water in percolating through the roof dissolved only the pure lime carbonate, or with but a trace of impurity, leaving nearly all the carbonaceous, siliceous, and clayey constituents behind, so these stalactitic and stalagmitic deposits are of purer lime, refined by nature’s methods and recrystallized under new conditions. The form of crystallization, it should be stated, is sometimes that of aragonite, but so far as the writer’s experience goes, more commonly that of calcite. It is sometimes, though not always, possible to distinguish between the two forms of crystallization by the unaided eye, stalac- tites (or stalagmites) of aragonite showing interiorly a radiating fibrous structure, the fibers being not infrequently beautifully curved and of a silky luster, while those of calcite are more granular. It some- times happens that deposits of both kinds are to be found in the same cave, though so far as my own observation goes they belong in such cases, as at Wyandotte, Indiana, to different periods of growth. What the conditions are upon which these varying forms of crystalli- zation depend is not now apparent. It follows almost from necessity from their mode of origin, as above given, that the beds of onyx marbles, both spring and cave deposits, are as a rule far less extensive and regular in their arrangement than are the ordinary stratified and bedded limestones and marbles. Spring action is more or less intermittent, and the place of discharge, as well as the character of the deposit, variable. The latter usually take the form of a comparatively thin crust, conforming to the contours of the surfaces on which it lies. The various layers thicken and thin out irregularly, and are often lenticular in cross section. Sound and homo- geneous layers of more than 20 inches thickness are not common. Where two or more layers, of sound and merchantable material occur they are not infrequently separated by tufaceous material, foreign débris, or by impure and porous onyx of little value. This condition of affairs will become more apparent as particular occurrences are *On the Formation of Stalactites and Gypsum Incrustations in Caves. Proce. U.S. Nat. Museum, xvul, 1894, p. 77. 552 REPORT OF NATIONAL MUSEUM, 1893. described. Thecave marbles vary even more irregularly, both in extent and quality. The depositmay be a mere veneering over the face of the rock, and although there is apparently an abundance, judging from appearances alone, the actual amount of available stone may be extremely small.* Moreover, such deposits are rarely uniform for any great distance, either in texture or color. Owing to coarse crystalli- zation, they fracture easily, and, moreover, are more than likely to con- tain numerous cavities, large and small, known popularly as ‘“ thumb holes” and ‘pin. holes.” The small amounts of metallic oxides and organic matter they contain render the colors light and usually dull. White, yellowish, amber, and reddish, with a resinous luster, are com- mon. The rock asa rule is less translucent than the true onyx marbles, and when polished appears ‘‘muddy” and unsatisfactory. Neverthe- less, such deposits do not infrequently yield comparatively small blocks of beautiful material and material that is doubly desirable because it is unique. Properly managed such can be worked up to good advantage, but too much has been expected from them, and it is this fact that has led to the disastrous failures following every attempt that has thus far been made to work the cave marbles in America. If the material as taken from the ledge could be assorted by some competent person and worked up, each block for such a purpose of ornamentation as it seemed best adapted, then we might hope for some interesting results. But at best the cave marbles of America must rank as “uniques” rather than objects of commercial value. They will never become regular sources of supply. There is too much waste and too much uncertainty regard- ing amount and quality. A marked and very beautiful feature of the onyx marbles in gen- eral, and particularly of those which originate as spring deposits, is the fine, undulating, parallel bands of growth or lines of accretion shown on a cross section, and which are of course due to its mode of origin through successive depositions upon the surface (see pl.1). The stone owes its chief value for decorative purposes to its translucency, fine veination, and color. In many instances the original hues have become enhanced by oxidation and through the development of retic- ulating veins of small size, due to incipient fracture, into which perco- lating waters have introduced new coloring solutions or locally oxidized the protoxide carbonates, which seem to form the chief coloring constit- uent, as already noted. The localities from which the finer grades of stone or tnis type have in times past or present been obtained are few and widely scattered, * The writer has met with just such cases in his experience. A certain deposit was represented as a solid mass of merchantable stone, showing a quarry face 100 or more feet in length by some 20 or 30 feet in height. On inspection it was shown that the ‘“ quarry face” was but a thin coating of stalactitic matter over the sloping wall of an old cavern. Not a cubic yard of merchantable stone could have been obtained in the entire outcrop. Report of National Museum. 1893.—Merrill. PLATE 4. VIEW IN A LIMESTONE CAVERN SHOWING STALACTITIC AND STALAGMITIC MASSES. THE ONYX MARBLES. 553 and it is interesting to note that, with the exception of the cave deposit, all that have thus tar come under the writer’s notice which are of such color as to make them preeminently desirable for ornamental purposes, occur in hot and arid countries and regions not far distant from recent voleanic activity. This is as true of foreign as of American occurrences. It is to be noted that all the deposits known are of slight geological antiquity, belonging to late Tertiary and early Quarternary periods. If materials of like nature were earlier deposited they would seem to have so far lost their identity as to be no longer recognizable. Contrary to the general belief, as indicated in the literature of the subject, or by the labeling of samples in museums, the onyx marbles, as shown by the investigations here chronicled, are almost without exception of eal- cite and not aragonite. It is true that the basis for such a statement is founded mainly upon specific gravities, the results of which may in certain cases seemingly be open to doubt. While, however, it is possi- ble that certain of these stones may be made up of finely alternating bands of calcite and aragonite, there would seem no legitimate reason for doubting the main mass of the material to be calcite, particularly when microscopic examinations have borne out the results obtained by gravity methods. USES, ANCIENT AND MODERN. As already noted, the onyx marbles were used in Egypt during very early times for making small articles, as jugs, bowls, canopic vases, and amphore, employed to hold offerings to the gods, the ashes of the dead, and for other religious and domestic purposes. We find them thus utilized as early as the second dynasty. It is worthy of note that few, if any, of these articles were polished, though many of them show great skillin workmanship. In the Abbott collection of Egyptian antiquities of the New York Historical Society are several fine examples of this nature, one of which is shown in pl. 9, fig. 2. According to the guide book to the fourth Egyptian room of the British Museum (1892, p. 117) the vases, bowls, saucers, spoons, and other vessels, which were placed in the tombs to hold the wine, oil, honey, Sweetmeats, perfumes, and cosmetics offered to the dead, were, during the first six dynasties, commonly made from plain white “ala- baster” (whatever that may be). Afterwards, variegated marbles and stones were frequently employed, ineluding aragonite, granite and diorite, steatite and schist. Mr. G. F. Harris states* that the oynx thus used during the earlier periods—the fifth and sixth dynasties— was plain and of one uniform layer, but about the time of the twenty- fifth dynasty a zoned variety of a yellow color came into use. This authority further states that the principal shapes shown in the British Museum are “hemispherical vases with wide open mouths, for holding wines; basins, cylindrical vases, with wide rims for unguents or oils; vases in the shape of wine jugs, two-handled amphorw, and drop-shaped ~The Builder, London, vol. 61, 1891, p. 14. 554 REPORT OF NATIONAL MUSEUM, 1893. alabasters.” These latter forms were held in such high esteem that they were exported from Egypt, and it is stated that ‘the names of Persian monarchs have been found in hieroglyphic and cuneiform characters upon them, whilst vases apparently of Egyptian material, if notot Egyptian fabric, have been discovered in the early tombs of Asia Minor, Greece, and the isles of the Archipelago.” According to other authorities,* the first mention of articles of this nature by Greek writers is that of Herodotus (born 484 B. C.), who speaks of a pupoy adfastpuy as one of the presents sent by Cambyses to the Ethiopian king. ‘Some of these vessels,” it is stated, *‘had a long and narrow neck, which was sealed; so that when the woman in the gospel is said to break the box of ointment, it appears probable that she only broke the extremity of the neck, which was thus closed.” The Egyptians did not, however, confine their use of the stone to these small articles, but at a very early period began utilizing it for the interior decoration of their tombs and temples. According to Dr. J. W. Dawson,t+t the magnificent granite temple of Kephren at Gizeh was lined with this stone in the early age of the pyramid-building kings. ‘“Some of the very old tombs in the Memphite cemetery at Sakkarah are lined with alabaster, or partially so lined. A curious example of the latter may be seen in the tomb called that of Unas. The inner sepulchral chamber of this tomb is lined with slabs of alabaster. The work is then continued in common limestone, and the entrance of the tomb is line’! with the stronger and more enduring red granite. At Abydos are the remains of a magnificent monolithic shrine of this stone, and at Karnak a similar shrine is built of alabaster slabs, some of them 20 feet in length. In this and other cases one is astonished that so tine work and material should be lavished on places enshrouded in darkness; and the question is raised, but can not be answered, What means of illumination had the ancient Egyptians, beyond the smoky oil lamps and torches, which would scarcely suffice adequately to illuminate the interior of tombs and temples, and would soon have destroyed their beautiful workmanship.” “The finest work in Egyptian alabaster that I have seen [says the writer] is the sarcophagus of Seti I, father of Rameses II,} found in his tomb in the ‘ valley of the kings,’ by Belzoni, and now in Sir John Soane’s Museum in London. It is 9 feet 4 inches 1n length, 3 feet 8 inches wide, and from 2 feet 8 inches to 2 feet 3 inches deep ; and is hollowed out of a single block so delicately that its general thickness is only 24 inches, and that a lamp placed within shines through the translucent sides. On the bottom of the coffin is a figure of Netpe, or Athor, the mother goddess, with arms extended to receive the body of the King; and the whole surface is covered with inscriptions and professional figures representing the liturgy of the dead. The lid was of similar character, but has been broken to pieces. By a singular com- bination of accidents, the mummy of this great King, which had been transferred by its guardian priests for greater security to Deir el Bahari, is now in the Boulak Museum. The noble sarcophagus prepared for it is in London, and his vast and beauti- fully decorated tomb stands open for the inspection of travelers in the ‘valley of the kings.’” *Smith, Dictionary of Greek and Roman Antiquities, 1890, p. 96. +Modern Science in Bible Lands, pp. 283-286. tNineteenth dynasty. According to Mariette, 1462 B. C.; Prof. Lepsius, 1443 B. C. Still others give dates from 1350 B.C. to 1600 B.C. ) A very complete account and a figure of this sarcophagus is given in the Gen- eral Description of Sir John Soane’s Museum, sixth edition, 1893, pp. 43-47. THE ONYX MARBLES. 555 The materials employed in the Temple of the Sphinx in Egypt are rose granite and “alabaster.” The supporting piers are of granite, the lining slabs of the walls and the ceiling of ‘‘ alabaster” without carving or any form of relief. Onyx was also employed for statuettes, some few of which are pre- served in the museums of to-day. The statue of Rameses, now in the Musee du Louvre, in Paris, is stated by Chateau to be of Egyptian alabaster, while in the Boulak Museum at Cairo are “alabaster” statues of Queen Ameneritis, mounted on a base of gray granite; also of Osiris, the seribes Neferhotep and Awi. According to Hull,* a beautifully iridescent variety of the Egyptian stone was used in constructing the four columns, each about 8 feet in height, which adorn the Sala containing the cabinets of gems in the Galleria degli Uffizi at Florence. He also describes large cinerary urns formed from this material, one of the finest being in the museum of the Vatican at Rome, which measures 9 feet in length ard 4 feet in depth. Also tables in the Galleria Pitti at Florence. During the reign of Mohamed Ali, the founder of the present dynasty, onyx from the Beni-Souef quarries was largely utilized in the embellishment of the celebrated “Alabaster Mosque” at Cairo. This, it will be remembered, was partly completed in its present form by Said Pasha in 1857. The alabaster used for the incrustation of the masonry consists partly of blocks and partly of slabs. The beautiful yellow tint of the stone fades on prolonged exposure to the sun.t I am informed by Mr. H. A. Ward that the stone here used is so translucent that when the sun is shining upon it, shadows of passers-by upon the street are distinctly noticeable from within, even where the wall is 18 inches in thickness. Following the Egyptians, the Romans, with their characteristic lux- uriousness, did not fail to overlook so promising a material, and early adopted it for similar purposes. A portion of the vessels found in Grecian and Roman ruins are of undoubted Egyptian materials and manufacture. The quarries at Ain Tembalek were worked with great activity at a very early period by the Romans. This is proven not merely by the abundance of works of art in this stone among the Roman ruins, but also by the finding cf actual quarry sites. In all the Arabian monuments found in the region, especially at Tlemcen, there has been frequent use made of the onyx. Inthe grand mosque D’jama- Kebir, built during the twelfth century, may be seen the remains of an old court flagged with onyx, in the center of which is a fountain of the same material. In the mosque Djama-Abou’l Hassen, the numerous columns supporting the arcade are also of onyx. Beautiful examples of the character of the quarry product are also to De seen at Sidi Bon Medin and at the museum at Tlemcen. The onyx columns of the * Building and Ornamental Stones, page 150. t Baedeker, Guide to Lower Egypt. 556 REPORT OF NATIONAL MUSEUM, 1893. ancient mosque of Mansourah are said to be particularly fine. Chateau states that the tunie of the statue of Diana in the Louvre is of the Algerian onyx. Material of the same nature, derived either from Algeria or the numerous caverns of Italy, was extensively utilized for sarcophagi by Romans, Etruscans, and Greeks, the body and cover in such cases being each of a single piece, and in many instances elabo- rately carved. The Etruscan sarcophagus in the Boston Museum of Fine Arts is of material-of this nature. Onyx from deposits near Lake Oroomia and Yezd was extensively used in the balmy days of the Persian Empire by the native nobles. I am informed by the Rey. Benj. Labaree that it has been used in the form of slabs to face the elegant fountains or to pave their baths. Small blocks were also used in the doors and windows of their baths in place of glass. ‘¢The most beautiful slab I know of,” he writes, ‘is one some 8 by*4 feet, as near as I recall, serving as a table or sideboard in the English consulate at Tabreez. It must be some 4 inches thick. It is of a charming yellow tinge with darker reddish lines shading through it.” Writing on the same subject, the Rev. P. Z. Eastcn states that the grand staircase of the new palace of the Crown Prince at Tabriz is paved with this marble. In the bazaars one finds it employed by the lithographers. Small ornaments, such as saltcellars, vases, ete., are cut from it, and sometimes slabs for table tops. ‘In cemeteries it is used to some extent, but generally only where the cemetery is inclosed, as otherwise it is likely to be broken and carried off. In Moslem cem- eteries, however, this is not so apt to be the case. I remember seeing a fine block at Marand, about 40 miles from Tabriz, which had not been disturbed.” Mr. Easton further states that there must be some varia- tion in quality, as in some cases stones which have been exposed even for a comparatively short period change in color and become compara- tively valuless, ‘while in other cases, as in those of the magnificent slabs at the back of the Blue Mosque, which have stood for four cen- turies, and for a century or more have been more or less exposed to the action of the weather, there is comparatively little change.” In ancient times, when there was more wealth in Persia, this stone was probably much more extensively used, and larger pieces were hewn out. A Persian prince of to-day would hardly incur the expense of moving such masses as the blocks in the Blue Mosque. Morier states * that the tomb of the Persian Poet Hafiz is also of this stone. He describes this as “a parallelogram with a projecting base, and its super- fices carved in the most exquisite manner. One of the odes of the poet is engraved upon it, and the artist has succeeded so well that the let- ters seem rather to have been formed with the finest pen than sculp- tured by a hard chisel. The whole is of the diaphanous marble of Tabriz, in color a combination of light green, with here and there “First Journey Through Persia, 1812, p. 104. THE ONYX MARBLES. 557 veins of red and sometimes of blue.” Curzon, however, writing in 3892,* describes the tomb of Hafiz as having once had a lid of marble, but which was carried away by Kerwin Khan and built into the tank in Jehan Nemak, replacing it by the present sarcophagus made of yel- low Yezd marble. Morier further says that the Haft-ten, a Persian pleasure house erected by Kerwin Kahn at Shiraz, is wainscoted with the Tabriz marble, one of the largest slabs being 9 feet long and 5 feet wide, such wainscotings being often inlaid with gold. The college called Medresse Shah Sultan Hassein, at Ispahan, also contains some of the same material. Many Italian churches, ancient and modern, contain numberless illustrations of the extensive use of these materials, and which, in many cases, have been taken for their present use from the ruins of still more ancient structures. The Cathedral of S. Paolo le Mura, at Rome (rebuilt in 1853), contains two beautiful columns of the Egyptian ‘‘alabaster” near the entrance, and four others in the canopy of the high altar. These were presented, it is stated,t by the present vice- roy of Egypt, and hence came, without doubt, from the valley of the Nile. The use of the onyx in thin slabs for window panes in cathedrals has often been reported in Mexico as wellas in Europe. Iam informed by Dr. G. Brown Goode that a portion of the windows in the Cathe- dral of Orvieto (Italy) are of a. yellow-brown banded stone, which is doubtless a lime carbonate from cave or spring deposits in Italy, Alge- ria, or Egypt. The Church of San Miniato, in Florence, has likewise five windows of similar material. The adaptability of the Mexican onyx for certain forms of interior decoration is well shown in the col- wmus and arch about the entrance of the ark containing the manuscripts of the pentateuch in the new Jewish Synagogue on Fifth avenue, New York City. In modern times the Algerian onyx has been largely used by the French for interior decoration, as in the grand staircase of the Parisian opera house, and in the manufacture of tops for small stands, turned columns, tables, lampstands, clocks, and similar articles for household use andadornment. The same may be said regarding those of Mexico and the United States. The native Mexicans utilize small pieces in the manufacture of paper weights and knives, penholders, inkstands, card receivers, and plaques, which are sold to tourists. In the United States the material has been utilized, in addition, in the construction of man- tels and fireplaces, some of which are very elaborate. In some of our modern hotels there is a lavish display, but in only too many cases, as in the Anditorium at Chicago, most astonishingly poor taste has been shown. The walls are simply sheathed with slabs, apparently without any attempt at selection as to quality, color, or veination, but one laid on * Persia and the Persian Question. t Baedeker, Guide to Rome. 7 558 REPORT OF NATIONAL MUSEUM, 1893. after another as carelessly as bricks ina wall. One-half of the amount of material might have been more effective had proper taste been exer- cised. It is worthy of remark that our architects, decorators, and arti- sans of to-day seem to rely for effect wholly upon perfection of surface and color, beauty of design and excellence of execution being almost wholly overlooked. Everywherearetlat surfaces, moldings, and machine- made columns, all brilliantly polished, but nothing more. Yetthe stone will cut to as sharp an edge as the finest Carrara marble, and is emi- nently adapted for bas-relief, small statues, busts, and objects of like nature. Its translucency and ever varying shades of color, so far from being defects, are, under proper treatment, actual merits, and it seems almost unaccountable that they have so long been overlooked. Modern manutacturers are not infrequently guilty of the utterly reprehensible custom of seeking to improve the paler hues by paint or other coloring materials applied to the back or unexposed side of the thin slabs, the translucency of the stone being just sufficient to transmit the colors, without permitting its cause to be discovered. This is especially the case with much of the Parisian work now brought into America, but unfortunately the practice is not confined to the French. CHEMICAL AND PHYSICAL PROPERTIES. As has been noted, the onyx marbles consist essentially of carbonate ot lime crystallized in the form of calcite; very rarely as aragonite. The results of quantitative chemical analyses of some of the princi- pal varieties are given in the accompanying table. As will be noted, the percentage of lime carbonate rarely falls below 90. Next to the lime, iron as carbonate or oxide forms the most prominent constituent, and is apparently the main cause of color variation, the tints depending upon its state of combination, whether as carbonate or sesquioxide. The small amounts of manganese may have some effect, but this could not be ascertained with any degree of certainty. It is interesting to note that the almost milk-white varieties from San Luis Obispo, Califor- nia (25571), and Lower California (68246) carry, respectively, 3.93 and 2.79 per cent. of iron, calculated as carbonate (FeCO;). The most pro- nounced green and brown varieties carry but from 4.19 to 5.51 per cent. of the carbonate, while the faintly tinted greens from Lower California run as high as 7.49 per cent. Asa rule, it seems safe to say that the green and red-brown colors are due to this ferruginous constituent, the green colors containing the iron as a carbonate, and the ocher red, yel- low, and browns being derived, therefore, by a process of oxidation, as noted on p.548. Certain amber browns and yellows, (and in one case a bright flesh-pmk color), as exemplified in the stones from Suisin City and Sulphur Creek, California, and in all the stalagmitie marbles, both American and Egyptian, are, however, due to organic matter, all burn- ing white, giving off the characteristic empyreumatie odor, and showing but the merest traces, if any, of metallic oxides. It may further be said Report of National Museum, 1893.—Merr SLAB OF GREEN ONYX MARBLE WITH VEINS OF OCHREOUS BROWN. Cat. No. 67549, U.S. N. M. Mayers Station, Arizona. Phis specimen and those shown in plates 6 and 7 were cut from the same block, to show of oxidation. PLATE 5. various stages Report of National Museum, 1893.—Merr PLATE 6. SLAB FROM SAME BLOCK AS SHOWN ON PLATE 5, BUT SHOWING A MORE ADVANCED STAGE OF OXIDATION. Cat. No. 67549, U.S. N. M The percolating solutions permeated along the line extending from the upper left side diagonally downwards toward the right side a yi ban at ate a ihe ae ore i Report of National Museum, 1893. —Merrill PLATE 7. SLAB FROM SAME BLOCK AS SHOWN IN PLATES 5 AND 6.’ Cat. No. 67549, U. S. N. M. The polished face was toward the surface shown in plate 6 and separated by a thickness of not more than two inches. ristics of onyx marbles. See Crystalline structure. Finely columnar; radiating-... Granwlarrsscclcons ts ccecs cescee mee cnes Microgranular and columnar .. 0. 29 Microcolumnar-<-.<-6ccs-s5<<2 0. 57 Microgranular and columnar -. oy 0. 40 ieee Oe ears eee ee: (*) Efsiersis (1k) peta mescacrooocecssarad +l) Granular and columnar..-.-.... 0. 37 Finely columnar; radiating.-.-|...-.-.-- Microcolumnar in cross section|...-..-.--- -| Microcolumnar; radiating....-|.--.-.--- Finely columnar; radiating....|.......-- Microcolumnar ....-.........-- 0.38 SenEs GO ssoencccaserecseosccesicce 0. 68 Serr CSS SSCS SECC DOS CCOCC ESE Ime Ea) Sonos GD) a sestonscoedeéoopotcecseg popDondes Sosa (UN) Secs adonoopEenbocsooscons Finely columnar; radiating.-..|--------- s: Green variety, Fe CO; 4.27 per cent es ee ees Total. | Analyst. Per cent. 100.29 | R. L. Packard. 100. 18 Do. 99. 80 Do. 100.04 | W. D. Bigelow. 99.41 | G. P. Merrill. 100.19 | W. D. Bigelow. 99.78 Do. 99.75 | R. L. Packard. 99. 35 Do. 99. 93 Do. 100. 29 Do. 100.56 | W. D. Bigelow. 99. 20 Do. G. P. Merrill. 100.00 | Dr. Edw. Hitchcock. 99.93 | R. L. Packard. TF THE ONYX MARBLES. 559 that the most constant distinction between those of the onyx marbles which are spring deposits and those which are formed in caves is the absence, in the latter, of appreciable quantities of metallic oxides, This is presumably to be accounted for on the supposition that the cave mar- bles result from the solvent action of cold carbonated water on limestone containing, aside from the iron oxides, only mechanically included impurities which do not enter at all into solution, but remain in the form of the ochreous residual clays which are so characteristic of limestone caverns the world over. The travertines, on the other hand, result from the solvent action of heated solutions on deep-seated siliceous rock, and which as a result carry not merely lime, but a considerable proportion of rarer constituents as well. That these rarer constituents are not more abundant in the deposits themselves is due to their unequal solu- bility and the consequent fractional separation which takes place on evaporation. This separation has already been alluded to, on p. 549, The reverse of the above-stated rule does not always hold good, since, as above noted, the Suisin City deposit, which is a travertine, contains scarcely a trace of iron. The percentage of manganese, as will be noticed, is, with but two exceptions less than one-half of one per cent. These exceptions are (1) a faintly greenish stone from Lower California, and (2) a pure milk white variety from Lake Oroomiah, the latter yield. ing 4.34 per cent. of this material calculated as a carbonate, (MnCO,) or 2.68 per cent. when calculated as oxide (MnO). The magnesium car- bonate is almost invariably present in small amounts, and singularly enough is highest in the cold-water (cave) deposit from Syout, Egypt (61336), where it reaches 6.88 per cent. Careful tests were made for the rarer elements, but with negative results in the most cases, the Suisin City stone showing 1.59 per cent. of strontium carbonate; that from the Hacienda del Carmen, Mexico (61337), 1.34 per cent. of calcium sulphate, and that from San Luis Obispo 0.25 per cent. of tricalcie phosphate, Ca;(PO,).. The milk white stone from Lake Oroomiah yielded 2.50 per cent. of calcium sulphate and 0.24 per cent. of tricalcic phosphate. In order to illustrate the possible changes in color from secondary oxidation, pls. 5, 6, and 7, are given. The slabs were all sawn from the same block, not above 10 inches in thickness, and which was at first supposed to be nearly uniform throughout. In pl. 5, it will be observed, there is a wide vein of ocherous brown extending somewhat diagonally from top to bottom, with smaller veins cutting it from left toright. In the second slab the vein has extended so as to include the whole upper left section, while in the third the original green has been almost wholly obliterated. It is easy to perceive that this change in color has been brought about wholly through the oxidizing influence of percolating solutions which followed the lines of existing flaws. In no Gase that has thus far come under my observation am I inclined to regard these veins and dashes of red and brown as original, but as results of secon- dary oxidation. “Mayers Station, Arizona (brown)... Cave Creek, Arizona (green). ? 275 Suisin City, California... Sulphur Creek, California . Sap Luis Obispo, California 107.5 Siskiyou County, Califorpia.... Rio Puerco, Valencia County, Now Mexico...... 60631 4 ..| Decrepitates vigorously New Pedrara, Lower California..........s..-.00, oes) 3.5 174.87 | Faintly grove ...... Turns dark, then burns quietly | to quicklime, 277 | 1738 White, rose tinted ..)..... do Near Lebi, Utab Near Lake Oroomiab, Persia DO jerscccsassenvsnnnnsncvevnseccsecesssenasse * Not determined. H. Mis. 184, pt. 2—Face page 558 171.87 | Light green ........) Burns quietly to quicklime....... 2.70 170,62 | Dark amber ...... an hee 80, anwar) veseressseeseeeesesees| Blackens, and gives ofly distillate with empyreumatio odor.|...... scarcely cramblos. a4 Decrepitates vigorously ....--. .-| Barns quietly to quicklime .... eeetlo... alo Bcnssennes Decrepitates energetically........| Turns dark, gives off water, and decrepitates vigorously. Blackens, but gives only a trace of water and no odor... .| Burns quietly -.| Barns quietly to qaicklime; | No appreciable change till it passes into quicklime......... wonmequns[onecs CO. nc asahhNGnsPpodtseRneehnaat! Blackens, decrepitates, and gives off water with slight odor |...... con anaman Decrepitates energetically.....-..| Becomes dark, and decrepitatos at a red heat .......-.ccseeesheneees Becomes dark, and decropitates slightly at red heat; faint odor .... -| Gives off water and slight empyreamatic odor Blackens and decropitates .......-.2..eeeene6 «| Blackens, ond gives off faint ompyreumatic odor. Decropitaves energetically and becomes brown; yields no approci- able moisture and but faint odor, Blackens, and turns white withont dec-wpitation, yields |little |... water, and faint empyroumatio odor. } -| Finely columnar; radiating....... «| Microcolumnar .. 1 Other samples from same locality yielded R, L. Packard results os follows: Greon variety, Fe CO, 4.27 per Granular ......-..2ssscsesenss0-- Microgranular and columnar . odo... ae allO ceceee ower sovnes Granular and columnar Finely columnar; radiating. Microcolurmnar in croas avetions: Microcolumnar; radiating........ Aragonite .. Calvito...... Finely columnar; radiating....... ‘Finely columnar; radiating.......| Caloite...... 00,16 93,48 96. 86 91,00 97, 61 95.74 00,03 1.38 0.75 cent; brown red (oxidized) variety, Fe CO, ce cent, Fe,0, 3.53 per cent. : 2.80 CaSO, 0.24 Cay |... (POOs. 560 REPORT OF NATIONAL MUSEUM, 1893. An intermediate stage in the process is shown in the small block figured on pl. 8, where oxidation has gone on from all sides until only a nucleal mass of green remains, into which the oxidizing process was extending along the lines of deposition, much as the process of serpen- tinization extends along the curvilinear cracks of an oliviiie granule. Two independent analyses of the green and oxidized portions from this specimen (67825) yielded in the one case 5.51 per cent. of iron ear- bonate (FeCO,) for the green variety, and 4.06 per cent. of the carbon- ate, and 1.73 per cent. of sesquioxide (Fe,O;) for the brown. In the second case 4.27 per cent. of FeCO; in the green variety, and but 1.22 per cent. of the same salt in the brown, with 3.53 per cent. of the ses- quioxide. In both cases the total amount of iron calculated as Fe seems a trifle the largest in the oxidized portion (2.65 per cent. in the green as against 3.06 per cent. in the brown). The completed stage of oxidation is shown in pl. 15. The original green color is wholly effaced, and the block, when cut across the grain, gives a unique combination of red-brown colors which, together with the original lines of deposition, give an appearance so like that of cer- tain tapestries that I have given it the name of tapestry onyx. In a few instances the shades of color are produced by mechanically included impurities, as in pl. 12, from a specimen from San Luis Obispo, California. Visitors to the California pavilion in the mines building during the Exposition at Chicago in 1893 will recall the beantiful and unique pictures in stone there shown. This coloring matter, in its various shades of smoky brown, is due to inclusions of clay parallel to the plane of deposition. It would appear that during the time the stone was being deposited the waters became temporarily charged with silt, which settled in thin films over the uneven, often botryoidal sur- faces already formed, to become entombed in the mass of the stone when the onyx-forming stage was resumed. In structure the onyx marbles are invariably holocrystalline, some- times granular, but much more commonly with a fibrous or radiating columnar structure, the fibers or columns being composed of calcite erystals elongated in the direction of their principal axes and standing at approximately right angles to the plane of deposition, as noted by Sorby* in deposits of similar origin. Twin forms so characteristic of the calcite of metamorphosed sedi- mentary deposit, or even the secondary calcite in veins and cavities of eruptive rocks, are quite lacking. Mechanical inclosures of any kind are almost wholly wanting, as may be inferred from the analyses. The banded aragonite from New Mexico (60631) shows the dark color to be due to included particles of a coal-black color, which give reactions for manganese oxide. The characteristic banding or *‘ grain” of the stone is due to lines of accretion comparable with the lines of growth upon the trunk of a tree, * Quarterly Journal of the Geological Society of London, Vol. xxxv, 1879, p. 73. Report of National Museum, 1893.—Merrill. PLATE 8. BLOCK OF GREEN ONYX MARBLE WITH EXTERIOR ZONE OF RED BROWN OXIDIZED MATERIAL. Cat. No. 67825, U.S. N. M. Mayers Station, Arizona. \ : ame r Dany ‘2 ; ; ; , ee 9 ee R = 4 cs ; 1 ' 14 ee Rcd eee = “ I tf m i i te i ; : fi i? 1 nt P a i : ry ts tT Jacek ef ive : S + i } e ; i 7 ] > ul BU) funy i i j ee ial ‘i av y | 1 ‘ = i ue 1 } " H Lj ; ) Ta. aah on i Ph vi THE ONYX MARBLES. 561 each layer representing successive surfaces over and upon which the lime-holding solutions have deposited new materials. In some instances the successive layers vary more or less in character of crystallization and color, due to a slight change in contents of organic matter or metal- lic oxides, or physical conditions, whereby the material is rendered more or less opaque. The characteristic feature which above all others adds beauty to the stone is its translucency, which is a purely physical quality. As arule the crystallization, in sound blocks, continues unin- terruptedly upward through the successive layers for a distance of several millimeters, so that there is no tendency toward separation along these layers until a point is reached where, owing to impurities in the water, or it may be a temporary cessation of deposition, crystal- lization ceased. On beginning once more, such lines not infrequently form lines of weakness. A not uncommon structure is that shown in fig. 1 of pl. 9. Crystallization starts from a series of points on a preexisting surface and progresses upward and outward forming a series of inverted cones. This structure is evident only on close inspection and in slabs sufficiently thin to be translucent. Asa natural consequence of its mode of deposition the surface strue- ture is usually botryoidal. Cut across the plane of deposition the structure is then as shown in fig. 1 of pl. 1. Cut at right angles to this, the structure, owing to the wavy, botryoidal nature of the original surfaces, is often wonderfully beautiful and always interesting. he colors continually appear and reappear in varying degrees of intensity accordingly as they lie upon the immediate surface or are subdued by intervening layers of colorless material. One sees in fact not merely the colors which lie upon the surface, but those beneath as well, sub- dued, enhanced, enriched it may be, by those which overlie or lie beneath. Itis in this characteristic that lies the chief claim for beauty, and its entire separation from marbles of the common, sedimentary type. The figures given on the pls. 14, 17 and 18 will serve to show, so far as 1s possible by photograph, the varying structure described. The cave marbles are as a rule much less translucent than the trav- ertines, coarser in crystallization, and hence more liable to fracture. They are, moreover, less homogeneous, containing many cavities and interspaces which have never been filled. In the columnar forms a pronounced zonal structure is common, as Shown in the cross and longi- tudinal sections in figs. 3 and 4 on pl. 13. In the more massive forms we find the bandings as in the travertines, but without the delicate crystallization. LOCALITIES: DOMESTIC AND FOREIGN. Arizona.—Several deposits of onyx have within a few years been located in Arizona, though so far as at present known to the writer, but two are of such extent as to be of any commercial value. These two. are both in Yavapai County, and possess many characters in common. H. Mis. 184, pt. 2 36 562 REPORT OF NATIONAL MUSEUM, 1893. The first to be described lies at Mayers Station, on the stage road lead- ing from Prescott to Phoenix, and some 23 miles southeast of the first- named town, which at time of writing, is the nearest accessible point by rail. What stone has thus far been shipped is hauled by wagon to Prescott, and by the Prescott and Arizona Central Railroad 70 miles north to the Atlantic and Pacific Railroad, which affords an outlet both east and west, as occasion demands. At time of writing there is, how- ever, in process of construction a new line connecting the Santa Fe system on the north with the Southern Pacific, and which will pass sufficiently near the deposits to greatly diminish the hauling distanee, as well as afford the benefit of competing freight rates furnished by the two lines. The deposits occur on the western side of what for a con- siderable portion of the year is a dry ravine, but which in the winter and rainy season carries a variable and often turoulent body of water, and rejoices in the name of Big Bug Creek. The country rock is highly metamorphic schist standing nearly on edge with occasional dikes of basic eruptives. The onyx proper occurs interbedded with a coarse breecia formed of schistose and dioritic fragments embedded in a sandy and caleareous matrix, the entire formation occupying a low range of hills, of which an area of 200 acres is estimated by the company to comprise all the quarryable material. Standing at the stage station and looking westward across the creek, one sees the low bluffs of onyx where the edges of the bed have been exposed in the work of exploitation. At first glance the outlook is not inspiring. The rock weathers gray and rusty brown, breaks down under the prolonged exposure to which it has been subjected, and appears like anything but the beautiful stone it really is. Closer inspection is, however, more assuring. At the shal- low openings that had been made in the bluffs and on the top of the hill, at the time of the. writer’s visit (1891), the onyx occurred in irregular somewhat concentric layers. (pl. 2), from the fraction of an inch to 2 or more feet in thickness, and which are traversed par- allel with the plane of deposition by wavy bands of color in all shades of amber, white, ocher yellow, brown, deep ocherous red, and green of a most beautiful emerald shade. The sound layers of stone are separated from one another by porous cellular layers, so that slabs of large size can be obtained only by cutting parallel with the banding; i. é., With the plane of deposition. This in itself is no drawback, since the colors blend much better and the general effect is vastly richer than when cut across the grain. No two of the openings show mate- rial of exactly the same nature as to eolor and markings, or as to size and thickness of the blocks. In all, the stone lies in layers readily separable from one another, and which, as a rule, thicken and thin out irreguiarly. The more highly colored varieties carry, as shown by analysis, nearly 5 per cent. of carbonate of iron. Through the oxidizing effect of percolating solutions this carbonate has in many instances been converted into a more or less hydrated oxide, whereby the green is changed to red, brown, or amber-yellow colors in Report of National Museum, 1893.— Merrill. PLATE 9. Fig. 1. Microscopie structure of onyx marble showing fibrous structure extending upward across the plane of deposition. Fig. 2. Vase of “Egyptian Alabaster” (stalagmitic marble), from Sakkarati. From the Abbott collection of Egyptian antiquities in the possession of the New York Historical Society. , J Pa ee i Tew ee i te mia aes 23 = - Ay es wll Ne) teu’ Soild See Se pee ue Se ee Se - “ } . ° ’ > = ' of cs ‘i i Y 7 i +t THE ONYX MARBLES. 571 one side with a variety of colors and pencilings that make a very fair counterfeit of the real first-class article, after which the side that is painted is covered with a coating of very fine cement, which gives it the appearance of having been merely sawed and left unpolished. This class of work is often done so weil that when first finished it will deceive any but the sharpest of experts, but under a year or two of use, the swindle becomes apparent, and soon nothing remains but a thin, transparent slab of stone. The formation in which the marble or onyx is found is a tough, red- dish or dark-brown clay, overlying a ciosely cemented conglomerate. This is the usual form, but in one instance—that of the Antigua Salines, on the Rancho del Carmen—it is found in a hard, flint-like country rock which appears to be more of a bastard jasper than any- thing else. In this instance the onyx appears as a regular vein formation, the veins varying from 1 to 12 inches in width. Of the quarries themselves all are small. The most famous—La Pedrara, in the district of Tecali, 21 miles from the city of Puebla— does not cover more than 3 acres, while the average depth of the quarrying is not over 7 feet. The value of the onyx taken from this small area, though, is hard to realize. The highreputation of the stone is recognized the world over, but it is very doubtful if one-tenth of what has been sold as ‘* La Pedrara” during the last quarter of a cen- tury ever came from it. At present no attempt is made to work the quarry, in fact no indication of onyx in the place is to be seen; the only effort made in obtaining onyx from it being by sorting over the old dumps or refuse places which have accumulated during its active existence. From these is taken every piece of onyx that will square 6 inches or over. The process is slow, while the yield is seemingly very small in return for the labor. The onyx obtained is of a very fine quality of green, ranging from a very light to a very dark tint, and, as arule, showing a slight dash of red or pink. Occasional pieces of variegated colors are found which are very fine, while the texture is very good. Next in importance to La Pedrara is Antigua Salines, in the district of Tehaucan, and which has already been briefly mentioned on account of its peculiar geological formation. The quarry covers over an area not exceeding two acres, and forms the face of a hill about 250 feet high. In working it, the system has been simply a process of gouging out the onyx and the rock which encases it, until into the side of the hill there has been excavated a hole 100 feet in width by 50 feet in height and 60 feet deep, looking very much as if an immense shovelful had been taken out. The onyx is variegated in colors, and is ranked next to La Pedrara. Ranking third, probably, in importance is La Sopresa, which covers an area of about 5 acres, and is located about 35 miles west of Antigua Salines, in the same district. The onyx from this quarry is semitrans- lucent, white, totally devoid of colors, save where an occasional inass 572 REPORT OF NATIONAL MUSEUM, 1893. of green is found. The quarry has been worked for the last fifteen years only, and is at present the largest producer of onyx in Mexico. Sizes ranging as large as from 2 to 3 feet square can be obtained, which is something extraordinary in Mexican onyx deposits, and the supply in “sight” seems to be sufficient for several years. The total absence of any color to set off the pure white is to be regretted, but as it is, the demand for the stone is sufficient to tax the quarry to its utmost to supply it. Directly east from Sopresa, about 4 miles, is found the quarry of La Mesa, lying, as its name indicates, on a level table-topped mountain. The quarry shows quite extensive working, the product being a varie- gated onyx, which, however, lacks the brilliancy shown in the stone of Antigua Salines. It covers an area of nearly 30 acres, being the largest quarry in Mexico. Occasionally quite large pieces are obtained, but the-average sizes prepared for shipment will not exceed 15 by 10 by 6 inches, while pieces as small as 10 by 6 by 10 inches are also shipped, both to Europe and America. This, however, is the case with all the quarries, and it is the exception when pieces larger than the first mentioned are exported. In addition to the quarries here mentioned there are many others of less importance, either by reason of their small output or from having been worked out. Among these the most interesting, on account of historical associations or past records, are those known as El Mogote, Lajas, Agua Esconda, Desamparo, Mehauntepec, Tepeyac, Tecoluco, La Paoma, and La Reforma. Baja California.—The last, and perhaps most important of the Amer- ican deposits to be described are also on Mexican territory, but on the peninsula of Lower or Baja California, near the Gulf Coast, and some 150 miles south from San Diego. One of these, that at the Tule Arroyo, has been already sufficiently described on p. 547. The second deposit, or rather series of deposits, lies in the open desert some 3 to 5 miles to the southwest of the arroyo. The region is one of low rolling hills and flat-topped mesas, with shallow valleys and dry water courses. The prevailing rock, a friable sandstone, with alternating layers of calcare- ous conglomerate and onyx in isolated patches. The surface is every- where covered with irregularly rounded and angular fragments of eruptive rocks from the hills in the near vicinity.* Aside from the onyx and the characteristic lake bed deposits all traces of spring and lake action have long since disappeared, and the region is an arid waste with only cacti, “sirios” (Pouquieria splendens) and the agave shawit in the immediate vicinity, with the mesquite, paolo verdes, stout, low-branch- ing elephant wood (veatchi Cedrocensis) and pole-like fouquieria colum- naris, or giant cactus (cereus pringlei (?)) like clustered mill logs along the dry water courses or extending for dreary miles along the flat-topped “For a detailed account of the geology of the peninsula, see ‘‘Geological Sketch of Lower California,” by S. F. Emmons and G. P. Merrill, published in Bulletin Geological Society of America, April, 1894. Report of National Museum, 1893.—Merrill. PLATE 15. eek SET - TAPESTR ONYX. Cat. No. 60845, U.S. N. M. Yavapai County, Arizona. Natural size. THE ONYX MARBLES. 513 plateaux. The agave, the refreshing plumpness of whose virgin leaves stands out in marked contrast with the dried and shrunken forms of the flower-bearing adults, forms, together with the thorny Fouquieria splendens, the most striking floral feature of the waterless land. The onyx occurs in the form of spasmodie and isolated patches, sometimes forming apparently a superficial pavement upon the surface, or again, where the beds have been cut by the winding course of the now dry ravine in the form of three distinct layers, from 20 inches to 3 or more feet in thickness, interstratified with tufaceous and lake bed material. GP 1=16)), Nothing can be more fascinating to the lover ‘of the beautiful in stones than this occurrence, where huge blocks of material of almost ideal soundness, with ever varying shades of color and veination lie everywhere exposed in countless numbers. Under the blistering sun of an almost tropie climate the exposed blocks have become to some extent corroded, and covered upon their immediate surface with a thin film of oxidation products which just sufficiently disguise the true color and translucency to keep one running here and there, ever eracking off new fragments in the vain attempt to collect a fairly typical series. The colors are peculiarly delicate, and there is a wonderful uniformity in quality. Pearl white (the virgin onyx), deli- cate rose tints, and light greens are the more common, all variegated by a network of fine sharp veins of a rose-red color, as shown in Plates 17 and18 The rose color is, so far as my present knowledge goes, quite unique and wonderfully beautiful. The analyses given in the table show this to be the most dense of any of the onyx marbles thus far examined. Although less highly colored than some of the Mexican varieties, it is nevertheless one of the most beautiful, owing to its uniform translucency, freedom from flaws, and fine veination. Algeria.—The celebrated deposits from whence the ancient Romans drew their suppiies of onyx, alabaster, calcareous onyx, or oriental alabaster are situated in the northern part of Algeria, in the province of Oran. The deposits as now worked are two in number, one some 65 miles from Oran, on the route to Tlemcen, and the second a few miles to the west, both lying to the right of the Isser. The first of these, known by the name of Bled Bekham, is divided into three parts by two ravines, the Oued Abdallah on the east and the Oued Calkra on the west. M. Comynet estimates the area occupied here by the onyx aS about 12 acres, and gives the following section: (1) A bed of about 4 feet thickness, under which lies compact travertine of no value; (2) asecond bed of onyx 3 feet 4 inches thick, separated by impure travertine from a third bed of onyx 2 feet in thickness, and lastly, several thinner beds from 6 to 16 inches in thickness, alternating with impure travertine, making in all a mean thickness of some 10 feet of quarryable material. It was stated at the time that blocks of extraordinary size could be quarried for shafts, columns, or friezes, 574 REPORT OF NATIONAL MUSEUM, 1893. even up to 20 feet in length by 4 feet square. At this date it is stated blocks may be had 10 feet in length by 3 feet in width and thickness. The second deposit noted, called Ardja-el-Beida, lies some 5 kilometers to the west of Bled Bekham, upon a plateau with steep north, west, and south escarpments. It was once continuous with a bed called El Cellon, but from which it has become separated by a ravine called the Chabbat-Karonba. The onyx of this locality is said to be inferior to that of the first, both as regards quality and size of blocks obtainable. The beds vary in thickness from 30 inches with a total of some 10 feet, and cover an areaof about 20 acres. All the deposits are Quaternary, and lie unconformably upon lime and sandstones of Tertiary (Middle Miocene) age. The stone, as is usually the case, varies greatly in color and shade, from pure white to rose-colored and bright red, golden yel- low, and, more rarely, green. The present quarriers (Sauville & Co., Paris) divide the output into four classes, le Blanc, le Rubauné or Veiné, le Cachemire and le Cachemire bois. The white (blanc) variety is the more abundant, and is found in nearly all the quarries, occurring in layers sometimes upward of a ineter in thickness, and blocks have been removed containing upwards of 5 cubic meters. It varies from translucent to opaque, Sometimes milk white or veined with fine ribbons of pale yellow. The milk-white variety is employed for columns, arti- cles used in religious ceremonies, and in place of ordinary white marble in furniture. The translucent variety is employed in statuary, and has, besides, many other applications, as for the glazing of church windows and for shades. The ribboned or veined onyx is also abundant, and there are many places for its extraction. The ribbons are parallel with the plane of deposition, and of a clear deep yellow, sometimes rose or violet tint. Other irregular veins traverse the stone in all directions, giving very beautiful effects. This variety is also obtainable in blocks of good size, and is used for buildings, columns, pilasters, balustrades, stairways, panels, or for furniture tops. A green variety also occurs, though now somewhat sparingly. The prevailing color is paler than the better varieties of the Mexican or American stone. . 62609 and 62610. Small blocks of milk white and red brown oxydized travertine, from near Lake Oroomiah, Persia. Gift of Rev. 8. G. Wilson. 1891. . 67538. Irregular block of banded stalagmite, about 4 by 4 by 6 inches, from Franklin Mountain, E] Paso County, Texas. Received from Mr. Morehead. . 27268. Small piece of dark amber stalagmitic marble, about 2 by 5 by 14 inches, irom Rockbridge County, Virginia. Received from the U. 8. General Land Office. 61323. irregular block of pale brown, banded stalagmite, from Virginia. Received from J. C. MeGuire. . 35746. Small fragment, about 3 by 3 inches, of light green travertine, from Falls of Sacramento River, Siskiyou County, California. Received from Charles H. Townsend. . 62575. Irregular slab, about 4 by 7 inches, of dark green and ocherous brown and red travertine, from Brazil. Received from G. 8. Fellows and Wm. Grace. . 62634. Block of light, porous travertine, 4 by 6 inches, from Tivoli, Italy. Received from W. O. Crosby. . 61343. Slab, 4 by 5 inches, of light amber stalagmitie marble from Eureka Springs, Arkansas. Gift of S. E. Meek. . 61245. Small slab, 3 by 54 inches, of dark amber variegated stalagmitic marble, from Province of Cuner, Italy. Received trom G. Jervis. . 28637. Small slab, 4 by 4 by ? inches, of ight amber and brown variegated sta- lagmitic marble, from Civita Vechia, Italy. Gitt of W. W. Story. THE COWBIRDS. BY q MAJOR CHARLES BENDIRE, Honorary Curator of the Oological Collections, U. S. National Museum. 587 THE COWBIRDS. By Maj. CHARLES BENDIRE, Honorary Curator of the Oological Collections, U.S. National Museum. Among our American birds comparatively few present such an inter- esting field for systematic investigation and study of their habits and mode of reproduction as the Cowbdirds or Cow Buntings. The family to which they belong, the Icteride, containing such familiar birds as the Bobolink, the Oriole, Blackbirds, etc., is confined to the American continent, and the genus Molothrus (with its subgenus Cal- lothrus) is represented by 12 species and subspecies. Of these, three are found in the United States, namely: Molothrus ater, Molothrus ater obscurus, and Callothrus robustus; and a fourth, Callothrus ceneus, is a resident of western Mexico and portions of Central America. The remaining species are confined to South America. Callothrus armenti is found on the coast of Colombia and Venezuela; Molothrus atroniteus in Guiana, Venezuela, and Trinidad; J. purpurascens in western Peru; M. cassini in Venezuela and Colombia; M. fringillarius in Brazil; M. bonariensis in Argentina, Paraguay, Bolivia, and Brazil; M. rufoaxil- laris in Argentina and Uruguay, and JW. badius in Argentina, Para- guay, and Bolivia. Respecting the general habits of some of the species, comparatively little is as yet known excepting those found in the United States (but even here a great deal remains to be learned) and the three last, which have been pretty fully described mm Sclater and Hudson’s excellent work on Argentine ornithology. It is probable that nearly all these species are parasitic to a greater or less degree, laying their eggs in the nests of other birds and letting them perform the duties of incubation and rearing the young, with the exception of Molothrus badius, the Baywinged Cowbird, which occa- sionally builds a nest of its own or appropriates nests of other species, but ineubates its own eggs or cares for its young like other respectable members of the Avian family. This same parasitic instinct is also found among members of the more cosmopolitan family of the Cuckoos, notably with Cuculus cano- rus, the European Cuckoo, about which a great deal of interesting lit- erature has already been published, and the same traits, only ina much more modified degree, are also said to be occasionally observed in at least.one of our North American species, the Blackbilled Cuckoo, Coc- cyzus erythrophthalmus, but no such instance has as yet come under my own observation, and I consider it of rare occurrence. 589 590 REPORT OF NATIONAL MUSEUM, 1893. On the whole, our Cowbirds present a far wider and more interesting field for careful observation and study than does the European Cuckoo, as their habits differ greatly in many respects; for instance, they are among the few, if they are not the only birds, which practice polyan- dry, which is probably caused for the reason that the males generally outnumber the females about 3 to 1. In order to give the reader some idea of these disreputable but never- theless interesting birds, my articles written for Life Histories of North American Birds, Part 11, are printed from advance sheets without alter- ation, excepting the addition of a concise description of each species, taken from Mr. R. Ridgway’s Manual of North American Birds. Feures of an adult male and female Cowbird, Molothrus ater, are here given (pls. 2 and 3) as well as a nest of the Yellow Warbler, Den- droica aestiva, (pl. 1) containing three eggs of its own and one of this parasite. The articles on the Cowbirds found in the Argentine Republic are copied from Messrs. P. L. Selater and W. H. Hudson’s work on Argen- tine ornithology, the notes on their habits being based on observations made by the latter gentleman. The two series of articles combined will enable the reader to arrive at a better understanding of the gen- eral habits of some of the members of this interesting genus. MOLOTHRUS ATER (Boddaert) Cowbird. (Plates 2 and 3). Oriolus ater, BODDAERT, Tables des planches enluminées d’histoire naturelle, 1783, 37. Molothrus ater, GRay, Hand List of Birds, 11, 1870, 36. (B 400, C 211, R 258, C 313, U 495.) Description.—Adult males: Head, neck, and chest uniform brownish (varying greatly in tint); rest of plumage glossy black, with a green- ish reflection, changing to purplish next to the brown of the neck, especialy on the upper back. Adult females: Plain brownish gray, darker on upper parts, paler on chin and throat; the feathers, especially on back and breast, with indistinct darker shaft streaks. Young: Above dull brownish gray, the feathers bordered with pale butty; lower parts dull light buffy, broadly but rather indistinctly streaked with dull brownish gray. Length (male), about 7.75-8.25; wing, 4-4.60 (4.31) ; tail, 2.90-3.35 (3.08) ; culmen, 0.61-0.72 (0.66); tarsus, 98-1.12 (1.05); female considerably smaller. Geographical range.—United States and the southern parts of the Dominion of Canada, in the eastern portions to about latitude 49° north; in the interior to Little Slave Lake, southern Athabasca, latitude 55° 30’, and probably still farther north; west to British Columbia, eastern Washington, eastern Oregon, Nevada, and southeastern Cali- fornia; south in winter to southern Mexico. : The breeding range of the Cowbird, also known as Cow Bunting, Report of National Museum, 1893.—Bendire PLATE 1. NesT OF YELLOW WARBLER, DENDROICA 4STIVA, BAIRD, WITH THREE EGGS, TOGETHER WITH ONE EGG OF THE COWBIRD, MOLOTHRUS PECORIS. Report of National Museum, 1893.—Bendire PLATE 2. THE COWBIRD, MOLOTHRUS PECORIS, BODDAERT. Male. Natural size. Report of National Museum, 1893.—Bendire. PLATE 3. pera ies z E Ss z ‘ se * i 4 THE COWBIRD, MOLOTHRUS PECORIS, BODDAERT. Female. Natural size. THE COWBIRDS. 591 Cow Blackbird, Shinyeye, Blackbird, Lazy Bird, Clodhopper, and in former years on the plains as Buffalo Bird, extends from our southern States, excepting Florida, southern and western Texas, north into the southern parts of the Dominion of Canada, asalready indicated. West- ward its breeding range extends to eastern British Columbia, eastern Washington, eastern Oregon, Nevada, and probably southeastern Cali- fornia, where Dr. A. K. Fisher shot an adult male at Furnace Creek, in Death Valley, June 20, 1891. East of the Rocky Mountains the Cow- bird is pretty generally distributed over the greater part of its range, excepting the extensive forest regions and some of the more southern States, where it appears to occur only sparingly. Its center of abund- ance is found in the States bordering the Upper Mississippi River and its numerous tributaries. Westof the one hundred and thirteenth meridian (Greenwich), in the United States at least, it must be con- sidered as a rare summer visitor, and as far as I have been able to ascertain it has not yet been found anywhere on the Pacific Coast, west of the Cascade and the Sierra Nevada mountains, except as a straggler. In the southern portions of the provinces of Alberta and Assiniboia, Dominion of Canada, as far west as Calgary, I found this species remarkably abundant in the latter part of May, 1894, along the line of the Canadian Pacific Railway, small parties from 6 to 12 being almost constantly in sight, evidently on their way to their breeding grounds. The most northern point where its eggs have been taken appears to be in the vicinity of nee Slave Lake, in southern Athabasca, in latitude 59° 30’ north. Mr. 8. Jones, of the Hudson Bay Company, forwarded specimens from,there to the Smithsonian Institution in 1868, but ul is quite probable that this species ranges farther north. Although I have traveled extensively over our westernmost States and Territories I noticed the Cowbird on but very few occasions, and only found its eggs there twice; once on June 21,1871, near Fort Lapwai. Idaho, in the nest of the Long-tailed Chat, [eteria virens longicauda, and again near Palouse Falls, in southeastern Washington, on June 18, 1878, in a nest of the Slate-colored Sparrow, Passerella iliaca schistacea, and which I believe is the most western breeding record known. Both of these specimens are now in the United States National Museum collection. The most southern breeding records I have knowledge of, are from Wayne and McIntosh counties, Ga., Petite Anse Island, Louisiana, and Harris County, Tex. It does not appear to breed anywhere in the imme- diate vicinity of the gulf coast in Texas, where it is replaced by itssmaller relative, the Dwarf Cowbird. While the majority of these birds pass beyond our borders in the late fall and winter, mainly to southern Mex- ico, still a good many remain in our Southern States, and a few even winter occasionally as far north as New England, Michigan, ete. Dr. G. Brown Goode tells me that while on the German Lloyd steamer 592 REPORT OF NATIONAL MUSEUM, 1893. Neckar, in April, 1880, a Cowbird tlew on board, fully 1,000 miles east of Newfoundland, and was captured. The Cowbird ordinarily arrives in good-sized flocks in the middle States from its winter home in the south, during the last half of March; in the more northern States, rarely before the first week in April, more frequently after the middle of this month, the males predominating in numbers over the more plainly colored females, and generally preceding them several days. Soon after, these flocks commence to break up and scatter in small companies of from 6 to 12 individuals and disperse gen- erally over the country. It prefers more or less cultivated districts, river valleys, ete., where other birds are abundant, and rarely penetrates far into heavily timbered sections in mountainous regions, excepting in Colorado, where it has been met with at altitudes up to 8,000 feet. The food of the Cowbird consists principally of vegetable matter, such as seeds of different kinds of noxious weeds, like ragweed, smart- weed, foxtail or pigeon grass, wild rice and the smaller species of grains, berries of different kinds, as well as of grasshoppers, beetles, ticks, flies, and other insects, worms, ete., and in this respect it does perhaps more good than harm. _ While the Cowbird is fairly common in most of the States east of the Mississippi River, it is far more noticeable in the regions west of this stream, although perhaps not much more abundant. In the prairie States this is especially the case, and one will rarely see a bunch of cattle there without an attending tlock of Cowbirds, who perch on their backs searching for parasites, or follow them along on the ground hunt- ing for suitable food among their droppings. They generally act in concert; when one settles on the ground the others follow shortly afterwards, and let one start to fly the remainder take wing also. Their flight resembles that of the Red-winged Blackbird. When the nesting season approaches the males become very demonstrative in their actions toward the females, but do not appear to mind the attentions paid by other males to the same female, as other birds usually do, and rarely fight for her possession. Free lovers as they are, they do not object to such trifles. At this time of the year several males may frequently be seen, while perched on some fence rail, or the limb of a tree, with the feathers of their throats raised, tails spread, and wings trailing, each endeavoring to pour out his choicest song to one of his protective mates, which con- sists of various unreproducable guttural sounds uttered while all the feathers are puffed out, the head lowered, and evidently produced only by considerable effort ou the part of the performer. One of their call notes sounds somewhat lke ‘spreele,” others resemble the various squeaks of the Red-winged Blackbird, and all are difficult to repro- duce on paper. It is a well-known fact that the Cowbird is a parasite, building no nest, but inflicting its eggs usually on smaller birds, leaving to them THE COWBIRDS. 593 the labor and care of rearing its young. It appears to be entirely devoid of conjugal affection, and practices polyandry, the small flocks in which it is found during the season of reproduction generally con- taining several more males than females. It is at all times more or less gregarious, especially so in fall and winter, when it often forms large flocks, and associates then with the other blackbirds, like Brewer’s and the Red-winged. The laymg season rarely begins before May 15, and continues for about two months. During this time probably from 8 to 12 eggs are laid by each female, or the equivalent of two broods, and I believe that several days elapse between the laying of each egg. It is not likely, and this is very fortunate indeed, that more than half of these eggs are hatched, as some are occasionally dropped in old and abandoned nests, or, when the female is hard pressed, even on the ground; others in just completed nests in which the rightful owner had not yet laid, and, seeing the parasitic egg in its nest, either abandons it entirely or constructs another over the first, burying the stranger egg among the building material. When the Cowbird is ready to lay she quietly leaves her associates and begins her search for a suitable nest, usually selecting one of a species smaller than herself, but if such a one is not readily found a nest of a larger bird will answer equally well, especially if the full complement of eggs has not been deposited init. She does not forcibly drive the owner from her nest, but watches her opportunity to drop her egg in it when it is unguarded. In rare instances only will a fresh Cowbird’s egg be found among incubated ones of the rightful owner. I have only observed this on a single occasion. From 1 to 7 of these parasitic eggs have been found in a nest, the larger numbers usually in those of ground-building species, especially in that of the Ovenbird, where from 3 to 5 eggs, with perhaps 2 or 3 of the owner, are not especially uncommon. I know of one instance where not less than 7 Cowbirds’ eggs were found in a nest of this species with a single one of itsown. Not unfrequently 2 or more eggs, in all probability laid by the same bird, will be found in one nest. There is so much variation in their eggs, both in size and markings, that the close resemblance of any 2 eggs at once attracts attention. It is not unusual to find some of the eggs ot the species imposed on thrown out of the nest to make room for those of the parasite, nor to find minute punctures in the shells of some of the remaining eggs. This is possibly done on purpose by the Cowbird with her beak, to keep the eggs from hatching, or with her sharp claws while sitting on the nest and depositing her own egg. I am inclined to attribute this puncturing to the latter cause, but there is no doubt that the Cowbird sometimes throws the rightful owner’s eges out of the nest purposely to enhance the chances of its offspring coming to maturity. I have yet tosee a punctured Cowbird’s egg. It is astonishing how many different species are thus imposed upon by the H. Mis. 184, pt. 238 594 REPORT OF NATIONAL MUSEUM, 1893. Cowbird. One would naturally suppose that birds breeding in holes in trees or under rocks would be exempt from this infliction, but this is not the case. Perhaps among the strangest and most unlikely of foster parents selected are the Red-headed Woodpecker and the Rock Wren. Mr. William G. Smith, formerly of Loveland, Colo., writes me that he found a Cowbird’s egg in a Rock Wren’s nest which was placed under a ledge of rock fully 2 feet from the entrance, and which was barely large enough for the wren to squeeze through. It seems almost impos- sible that a bird of this size would be able to enter the small pendent nest of the Parula Warbler and deposit its egg therein in the usual way; still this species is occasionally imposed on, and it is possible that the egg is dropped in the nest with the beak. The following is a list of species in whose nests eggs of the Cowbird have been found, and undoubtedly a number of others yet remain to be added to it: Zenaidura macroura, Mourning Dove. Coccyzus Yellow-billed Cuckoo. Melanerpes americanus, erythrocephalus, Red-headed Woodpecker. Tyrannus tyrannus, Kingbird. Sayornis phabe, Phoebe. Contopus virens, Wood Pewee. Empidonax acadicus, Acadian Flycatcher. Empidonax pusillus, Little Flycatcher. Empidonax pusillus traillii, Traill’s Fly- catcher. Empidonux minimus, Least Flycatcher. Otocoris alpestris praticola, Prairie Horned Lark. Dolichonyx oryzivorus, Bobolink. Xanthocephalus xanthocephalus, headed Blackbird. Agelaius pheniceus, Red-winged Black- bird. Yellow- Sturnella magna, Meadow Lark. Sturnella magna neglecta, Western Meadow Lark. Icterus spurius, Orchard Oriole. Icterus galbula, Baltimore Oriole. Icterus bullocki, Bullock’s Oriole. Scolecophagus Blackbird. Carpodacus purpureus, Purple Finch. Spinus tristis, American Goldfinch. Calearius ornatus, Chestnut- collared cyanocephalus, Brewer's Longspur. Rhynchophanes mecownii, McCown’s Long- spur. Poocetes gramineus, Vesper Sparrow. Poocwtes gramineus confinis, Western Ves- per Sparrow. Chondestes grammacus, Lark Sparrow. | Zonotrichia Chondestes grammacus strigatus, Western Lark.Sparrow. leucophrys, White-crowned Sparrow. Spizella socialis, Chipping Sparrow. Spizella pusilla, Field Sparrow. Spizella pallida, Clay-colored Sparrow. Junco hyematis, Slate-colored Junco. Melospiza fasciata, Song Sparrow. Melospiza fasciata montana, Mountain Song Sparrow. Melospiza georgiana, Swamp Sparrow. Passerella iliaca schistacea, Slate-colored Sparrow. Pipilo erythrophthalmus, Towhee. Cardinalis cardinalis, Cardinal. Habia ludoviciana, Rose-breasted Gros- beak. Guiraca cerulea, Blue Grosbeak. Passerina cyanea, Indigo Bunting. Passerina amena, Lazuli Bunting. Passerina ciris, Painted Bunting. Spiza americana, Dickcissel, Calamospiza melanocorys, Lark Bunting. Piranga erythromelas, Scarlet Tanager. Prianga rubra, Summer Tanager. Petrochelidon lunifrons, Cliff Swallow. Ampelis cedrorum, Cedar Waxwing. Vireo olivaceus, Red-eyed Vireo. Vireo gilvus, Warbling Vireo. Vireo flavifrons, Yellow-throated Vireo. Vireo solitarius, Blue-headed Vireo. Vireo noveboracensis, White-eyed Vireo. Mniotilta varia, Black and White Warbler. Protonotaria citrea, Prothonotary War- bler. Helmitherus Warbler. vermivorus, Worm-eating THE COWBIRDS. Helminthophila pinus, Blue-winged War- bler. Helminthophila chrysoptera, Golden- winged Warbler. Helminthophila ruficapilla, Nashville Warbler. Compsothlypis americana, Parula Warbler. Dendroica westiva, Yellow Warbler. Dendroica cerulescens, Black-throated Blue Warbler. Dendroica cerulea, Cerulean Warbler. Dendroica blackburnie, Blackburnian Warbler. Dendroica virens, Black-throated Warbler. - Dendroica discolor, Prairie Warbler. Seiurus aurocapillus, Ovenbird. Seiurus noveboracensis, Water Thrush. Seiurus motacilla, Louisiana W ater Thrush Geothlypis formosa, Kentucky Warbler. — Geothylpis trichas, Maryland Yellow- throat. Polioptila Green | 595 Geothylpis trichas occidentalis, Western Yellow-throat. Icteria virens, Yellow-breasted Chat. Icteria virens longicauda, Long-tailed Chat. | Sylvania mitrata, Hooded Warbler. Setophaga ruticilla, American Redstart. Galeoscoptes carolinensis, Catbird. Harporhynchus- rufus, Brown Thrasher. Salpinctes obsoletus, Rock Wren. Troglodytes wdon, House Wren. Parus bicolor, Tufted Titmouse. caerulea, Blue-gray Gnat- catcher. Turdus mustelinus, Wood Thrush. Turdus fuscescens, Wilson’s Thrush. Turdus ustulatus swainsonti, Olive-backed Thrush. Turdus aonalaschkae auduboni, Audubou’s Hermit Thrush. Merula migratoria, American Robin. Sialia sialis, Bluebird. Among these the nests of the Phoebe, Song Sparrow, Towhee, Indigo Bunting, Ovenbird, and Yellow-breasted Chat seem to be most frequently selected, and these usually contain also more of the para- sitic eggs than the majority of the others. The egg of the Cowbird usually hatches in from ten to eleven days, generally in advance of those of the foster parent, and the growth of the young interloper is rapid. Mr. M. A. White, of Mathews, Va., writes on this subject as follows, and his observations correspond fairly well with my own: It was on the 9th of June, 1891, that I placed a fresh egg of the Cowbird in the nest of a Chipping Sparrow containing two of her own that had an advance of one and a half days’ incubation over the first. I watched results. About the 19th, Mr. Cow- bird emerged from his prison walls, large and vigorons. A day later a little sparrow came forth from his delicate shell, but much smaller, and exhibiting less strength than his fosterbrother. The other egg failed to hatch. The daily increase in dimension of the Cowbird was something immense, while that of his younger companion seemed rather to diminish than enlarge, until finally, at the end of three days, he died—evidently for want of food, as the Cowbird, being larger, greedily devoured everything that came in contact with his capacious mouth. The untimely end of the rightful heir was but gain to this usurper, as he now received the whole attentiou of the parent birds. Nature having now, at the early age of seven days, provided him with a respectable dress, he was no longer con- tented to remain within the small compass which the nest furnished, whereupon he betook himself to the branches of the tree in which the nest had been placed. But soon this area became too limited for his ambitious spirit, for at the end of his second week he was flitting from bush to bush, exploring the fields and hedges, his foster parents providing for him all the while. Two weeks more and he was a full- fledged bird. About July 20 I saw him for the last time.* *The Oologist, Vol. x, Aug., 1893, pp. 230, 231. 596 REPORT OF NATIONAL MUSEUM, 1893. Such seems to be the fate of nearly all the young which have the misfortune to be hatched with a Cowbird for a companion. I have yet to see a nest containing young birds of both species more than a few days old; by that time the rightful offspring are either smothered or crowded out of the nest by their stronger foster brother, or starved, and he then absorbs the entire attention of the parents. Only in such cases where these are as large or larger than the imposter is there any likelihood to be an occasional exception to this rule. It can readily be seen what an immense amount of harm a Cowbird causes in the econ- omy of nature, granting that only a single one of its eggs is hatched in a season; to accomplish this a brood of insectivorous and useful birds is almost invariably sacrificed for every Cowbird raised, and they are certainly not diminishing in numbers. While a few of the selected foster parents resent the addition of a parasitic egg in their nest, either by abandoning it entirely or by build- ing a new one over it, and occasionally even a third one, the majority do not appear to be much disturbed by such an event, and after a short time goon as if nothing had happened. A few species, like the Indigo Bunting, for instance, will sometimes abandon their own eggs should the stranger egg be removed, but apparently do not mind the loss of one or two of their own, and continue incubating just the same. Almost invariably the nests in which one or more of these parasitic eggs have been deposited contain only incomplete sets of their right- ful owners. Where the Cowbird drops an egg in the nests of species considerably smaller than itself, as the Gnat-catcher, ete., its much larger size seems to bea positive advantage to the more rapid develop- ment of the embryo, as the egg must necessarily receive more animal heat than the smaller ones, which can scarcely come much in contact with the body of the sitting bird, and the development of the embryos in these must be more or less retarded thereby. It is ludicrous to see a fat, fully fledged young Cowbird following a pair of Chipping Sparrows, or some small Warbler clamoring inces- santly for food and uttering its begging call of seerr-seerr most persis- tently, only keeping quiet while its gaping beak is filled with some suitable morsel, and stranger still to note how devoted the diminutive nurses are to their foster child. One would think that they might see through the fraud, at least after the young interloper left the nest, if nut before, and abandon him to his fate, but the greatest attachment seems to exist between them until the Cowbird is able to shift for him- self, when he leaves and joins his own kind. It has been asserted that,in the West, Cowbirds occasionally build nests and rear their own young, but this is undoubtedly incorrect, and on proper investigation it will be found that the supposed Cowbird is really Brewer’s Blackbird. When the laying season is over they collect again in larger flocks and frequent the marshes in company with the Blackbirds, where they THE COWBIRDS. HoT find an abundance of food at that time of the year, and the return migration to their winter homes begius usually in the latter half of October. The eggshell of the Cowbird is compact, granulated, moderately glossy, and relatively much stronger than in the eggs of its near allies the Icteride. The ground color varies from an almost pure white to grayish white, and less often to pale bluish or milky white, and this 1s usually profusely covered over its entire surface with specks and blotches varying in color from chocolate to claret brown, tawny and cinnamon-rufous. In an oceasional specimen the markings are confluent and the ground color is almost entirely hidden by them; in the majority, however, it is distinctly visible. These markings are usually heaviest about the larger end of the egg, and in rare -nstances they form an irregular wreath. The eggs vary greatly in shape, ranging from ovate to short, rounded, and elongate-ovate, the first predominating. The average measurement of 127 specimens in the U.S. National Museum collection is 21.45 by 16.42 millimeters, or 0.84 by 0.65 inch; the largest egg measures 25.40 by 16.76 millimeters, or 1 by 0.66 inch; the smallest 18.03 by 15.49 millimeters, or 0.71 by 0.61 inch. MOLOTHRUS ATER OBSCURUS (Gmelin). Dwarf Cowbird. Sturnus obscurus, GMELIN, Systema Naturie, I, 1, 1788, 804. Mfolothrus] ater var. obscurus, COUES, Birds of: the Northwest, 1874, 180,in text (B — C 211a, R 258a, C 314, U 4954). Similar to preceding, only smaller. Length (male), about 7-7.50; wing, 3.70-4.15 (3.93); tail, 2.85-3 (2.91); culmen, 0.57-0.63 (0.60); tar- sus, 0.93-1 (0.96); female smaller. Geographical range-—Mexico and adjoining portions of the United States from southern Texas to southwestern Arizona and Lower Cali- fornia. The breeding range of the Dwarf Cowbird in the United States is coincident with its geographical distribution. It can only be considered as a summer resident, although a few appear to winter in southern Arizona, as I shot an adult male on Rillito Creek, near Tucson, on January 24,1873. It usually arrives from its winter home in southern Mexico about the middle of March, and is then found associating with different species of Blackbirds, especially Brewer’s Blackbird, and fre- quenting the vicinity of cattle ranches, roads, and cultivated fields. By April 15 the flocks have scattered, and small parties of from 5 to 12 may now be seen in suitable localities, such as the shrubbery along water courses, springs, ete., where other smali birds are abundant. The character of its food and its general habits as well, are similar to those of the common Cowbird, which it closely resembles, being only a trifle smaller. In middle Texas the two races intergrade to some extent, and it is claimed both breed there. In the lower Rio Grande valley, 598 REPORT OF NATIONAL MUSEUM, 1893. Texas, the typical Dwarf Cowbird is common, and I found it equally so in the vicinity of Tucson, Ariz., where I have taken quite a number of its eggs. Mr. F. Stephens writes me that it is a common summer resident as far west as the Colorado River, beyond the immediate vicinity of which he has never seen it. Mr. L. Belding found it common in the streets of San Jose del Carbo, Lower California, associating with Brewer’s Blackbirds during April, but rarely saw it later. It is questionable if it breeds there. Like its eastern relative, the Dwarf Comniil drops its eggs in the nests of other birds, principally in those of species which are smaller than itself. The following is a list of those 1n which they have thus far been found: Contopus richardsoni, Western Wood | Cardinalis cardinalis canicaudus, Gray- Pewee. _ tailed Cardinal. Pyrocephalus rubineus mexicanus, Vermil- | Sporophila morelleti sharpii, Sharpe’s Seed- lion Flycatcher. | eater. Agelaius phaniceus, Red-winged Black- | Piranga rubra cooperi, Cooper’s Tanager. ral | Vireo noveboracensis, White-eyed Vireo. Teterus cucullatus, Hooded Oriole. | Vireo bellii, Bell’s Vireo. Icterus cucullatus nelsoni, Arizona Hooded — Vireo bellit pusillus, Least Vireo. Oriole. | Helminthophila lucie, Luey’s Warbler. Icterus spurius, Orchard Oriole. Dendroica w@stiva sonorona, Sonora Yel- Icterus bullocki, Bullock’s Oriole. | low Warbler. Chondestes grammacus strigatus, Western Geothlypis trichas occidentalis, Western Lark Sparrow. Maryland Yellow-throat. Amphispiza bilineata, Black-throated Icteria virens longicauda, Long-tailed Sparrow. | Chat. Peucaacarpalis, Rufous-winged Sparrow. | Mimus polyglottus, Mockingbird. Melospiza fasciata fallax, Desert Song | Polioptila plumbea,’ Plumbeous Gnat- Sparrow. | catcher. Embernagra rufivirgata, Texas Sparrow. | Sialia mexicana, Western Bluebird. Doubtless a number of others still remain to be added. According to my observations the Least Vireo seems to be oftener imposed upon, in southern Arizona at least, than any other bird; the Desert Song Sparrow, Black-throated Sparrow, and Vermikon Fly- catcher following in the order named. The earliest date known by me on which an egg of this subspecies was found is April 18, the latest August 2, showing that the laying season lasts considerably longer than with Molothrus ater, and it appears to be at its height during the month of June. I found it almost impossible to obtain a full set of the Least Vireo’s eges; nearly ev op nest found contained 1 or 2 eggs of this parasite, and usually only 1 or 2 of its own, and the latter were frequently punctured. In fact, this was so often the case that I aminelined to believe thatit is done purposely and not by accident; but whether made by the beak or claws of the bird I will not venture to say, but believe it 1s done with the latter. In many nests I found 1 or 2 of the owner’s eggs thrown THE COWBIRDS. 599 out and broken, and occasionally every one, the foster parent sitting on the parasite’s eggs alone. Among other instances I found this to be the case in a nest of the Plumbeous Gnatcatcher placed in a thick mistletoe bunch growing from a limb of a mesquite tree about 15 feet from the ground, and well hidden. I first observed the nest on June 10, 1872, when it contained a single egg; on visiting it again on the 17th, the female was sitting on a couple of Dwart Cowbird’s eggs alone, and on looking on the ground I found the remnants of 3 eggs, which evidently had been thrown out. Bullock’s Oriole may occasionally rid herself of the parasitic egg; at any rate I noticed the remains of such a one lying under a nest of this species with portions of one of her own. This nest contained only 3 eggs of the rightful owner, and the bird was sitting on these. The largest number of Dwarf Cowbird’s eggs found by me in one nest was 3, that of a Desert Song Sparrow, and all its own eggs were missing. I several times found nests con- taining single eggs of this parasite abandoned, and also picked up 2 uninjured from the ground where they evidently had been dropped by the bird, not finding a suitable nest in time to deposit them. None of the young of the foster parents seem to survive the advent of a young Cowbird in their nest longer than two or three days; they are starved by that time by their more vigorous and voracious foster brother. After the young Dwarf Cowbird is old enough to care for itself it abandons its foster parents and seeks the company ofits own kind, gathering in small bands and roving from place to place. Later in the season, about the latter part of October, these gather into larger flocks, associate at this time with other congenial species, and shortly after return to their winter homes in Mexico. In general appearance and shape the eggs of the Dwarf Cowbird resemble those of the former, and the same description will answer for both, but they appear on an average to be somewhat less heavily spotted, which gives them a lighter appearance; and they are also considerably smaller. The average measurement of 37 specimens in the U. S. National Museum collection is 19.30 by 14.99 millimeters, or 0.76 by 0.59 inch; the largest egg in this series measures 20.57 by 15.49 millimeters, or 0.81 by 0.61 inch; the smallest 18.03 by 13.74 millimeters, or 0.71 by 0.54 inch. CALLOTHRUS ROBUSTUS (Cabanis). Red-eyed Cowbird. Psarocolinus eneus, WAGLER, Isis, 1829, 758. Callothrus robustus, RripGWay, Manual of North American Birds, 1887, 589. (B —, C —, R 259, C 315, U 496.) Adult males: Head, neck, back, and lower parts uniform glossy black, with a soft, bronzy luster, duller on head; lesser and middle wing coverts, outermost scapulars, and rump glossed with violet; wings in general, upper tail coverts, and tail glossy blue-black, changing to greenish; iris bright red. Length about 9-9.50, wing 4.60-4,80, tail 600 REPORT OF NATIONAL MUSEUM, 1893. 3.70-3.80, culmen 0.85-0.90, tarsus 1.15-1.25. Young male entirely blackish, with distinct gloss only on wings, ete.; the lower parts, back, etc., without bronzy luster. Adult. female: Above dark brownish gray, the feathers sometimes showing distinct dusky shaft streaks. Length about 8-8.50, wing about 4.10, tail 3.25, culmen 0.75, tarsus 1.05, Geographical range-—Mexico and Central America, north to southern Texas, south to Panama. The breeding range of the Red-eyed or Bronzed Cowbird, a larger and darker colored species than the two preceding, coincides with its geographical distribution in the United States, and extends, as far as known, north and eastward only to Bexar County, Tex., where Mr. H. P. Attwater reports it as a rare summer resident near San Antonio, and found one of its eggs in the nest of a Bullock’s Oriole in that vicinity. We are indebted to Dr. James C. Merrill, U. S. Army, for the addi- tion of this interesting species to our fauna, who first recorded it in the Bulletin of the Nuttall Ornithological Club, Vol. 1, 1876, p. 88, as an abundant summer resident in the vicinity of Fort Brown, Tex. A full account of the breeding habits of this species by Dr. Merrill may be found in the above-mentioned bulletin, Vol. 1, 1877, pp. 85-87, from which I extract the most interesting notes: My first specimens were taken at Hidalgo, on the Rio Grande, 70 miles northwest of Fort Brown, where, however, they are not so abundant as lower down the river. Here they are common throughout the year, a small proportion going south in winter. Those that remain gather in large flocks with the Long-tailed Grackles, common Cowbirds, and Brewer's, Red-winged, and Yellow-headed Blackbirds; they become very tame, and the abundance of food about the picket lines attracts them for miles around, C. robustus is readily distinguishable in these mixed gatherings from the other species by its blood-red iris and its peculiar top-heavy appearance, caused by its habit of puffing out the feathers of the head and neck. This habit is most marked during the breeding season and in the male, but is seen throughout the year. About the middle of April the common Cowbird, Brewer’s, and Yellow-headed Blackbirds leave for the north; the Long-tailed Grackles have formed their colonies in favorite clumps of mesquite trees; the Redwings that remain to breed have selected sites for their nests; the Dwarf Cowbirds, Molothrus pecoris obscurus, arrive from the south, and Callothrus robustus gather in flocks by themselves and wait for their victims to build. The males have now a variety of notes, somewhat resembling those of the common Cowbird Molothrus pecoris, but more harsh. During the day they scatter over the surrounding country in little companies of one or two females and half a dozen males, returning at nightfall to the vicinity of the picket lines. While the females are feeding or resting in the shade of a bush the males are eagerly paying their addresses by puffing out their feathers, as above noted, strutting up and down, and nodding and bowing in a very odd manner. Every now and then one of the males rises in the air, and poising himself 2 or 3 feet above the female, flutters for a minute or two, following her if she moves away, and then descends to resume his puffing and bowing. This habit of fluttering in the air was what first attracted my attention to the species. In other respects their habits seem to be like those of the eastern Cowbird (M. pecoris). My first egg of C. robustus was taken on May 14, 1876, in a Cardinal’s nest. A few days before this a soldier brought me a similar egg, saying he found it in a Scissors- os) tail’s (Milvulus) nest. Not recognizing it at the time, I paid little attention to him, scsi ls oe THE COWBIRDS. 601 and did not keep the egg. I soon found several others, and have taken in all 22 specimens the past season. All but 2 of these were found in nests of the Bullock’s, Hooded, and Orchard Orioles. It is a curious fact that although Yellow-breasted Chats and Redwinged Blackbirds breed abundantly in places most frequented by these Cowbirds, I have but once found the latter’s egg in a Chat’s nest, and never in a Redwing’s, though I have looked in very many of them. Perhaps they feel that the line should be drawn somewhere, and select their cousins, the Blackbirds, as coming within it. The Dwarf Cowbirds are not troubled by this scruple, however. Several of these parasitic eggs were found under interesting conditions. On six oceasions I have found an egg of both Cowbirds in the same nest. In four of these there were eggs of the rightful owner, * who was sitting. In the other two the Cow- bird’s eggs were alone in the nests, which were deserted. But I have known the Hooded Oriole to set on an egg of C. robustus, which was on the point of hatching when found. How its own disappeared I can notsay. Once 2 eggs of C. robustus were- found ina nest of the small Orchard Oriole (var. afinis). Twice I have seen a broken ege of C. robustus under nests of Bullock’s Oriole on which the owner was sitting. Early in June a nest of the Hooded Oriole was found, with 4 eggs, and one of C, robustus, all of which I removed, leaving the nest. Happening to pass by it a few days later, I looked in, and to my surprise found 2 eggs of robustus, which were broken. These were so unlike that they were probably laid by different birds. Still another egg, and the last, was laid in the same nest within ten days. But the most remarkable instance was a nest of the small Orchard Oriole, found June 20, con- taining 3 eggs of C. robustus, while just beneath it was a whole egg of this parasite ; also a broken one of this and of the Dwarf Cowbird M. obscurus. Two of the eggs in the nest were rotten. The third, strange to say, contained a living embryo. As the nest was certainly deserted, I can only account for this by supposing that the 2 rotten ones were laid about the first week of June, when there was considerable rain, and that the other was deposited soon after, since which time the weather had been clear and very hot. On one oceasion I found a female C. robustus hanging with a stout thread around its neck to a nest of the Bullock’s Oriole. The nest contained one young of this Cowbird, and it is probable that its parent after depositing the egg was entangled in the thread on hurriedly leaving the nest, and there died. It had apparently been dead about two weeks. This case supports the view that the eggs or young of the owner are thrown out by the young parasite and not removed by its parent, though I could find no trace of them beneath the nest. Among the species imposed on by the Bronzed Cowbird are the following: Milvulus forficatus, Scissors-tailed Fly- | Cardinalis cardinals canicaudus, Gray- catcher. tailed Cardinal. Teterus auduboni, Audubon’s Oriole. Guiraca coerulea eurhyncha, Western Blue Icterus cucullatus, Hooded Oriole. Grosbeak. Teterus spurius, Orchard Oriole. Icterus virens longicauda, Long-tailed Teterus bullocki, Bullock’s Oriole. Chat. Other species undoubtedly will have to be added to this list. The Orioles appear to be the especial victims of the Bronzed Cow- bird, and among these Audubon’s seem to be the worst sufferer. in nine sets of this species in the U. S. National Museum collection there are only two which contain the normal number of eggs, 4. The other seven all contain from 1 to 3 of these parasitic eggs, with 1 or 2 of *It would be interesting to know what would have become of the three species in one nest, and had the latter been near the fort where I could have visited them daily I should not have taken the eggs. It is probable, however, that C. robustus would have disposed of the young Dwarf Cowbird as easily as of the young Orioles. 602 REPORT OF NATIONAL MUSEUM, 1893. their own, and some of these are usually punctured. In none of these nests were eges of the Dwarf Cowbird found in addition to those of the Callothrus robustus. The former appears to confine itself to the smaller Orioles only. The eggs of the Bronzed Cowbird are rather glossy; the shell is finely eranulated and strong. Their shape varies from ovate to short and rounded ovate. They are pale bluish green in color and unspotted, resemnbling the eggs of the Black-throated Sparrow and Blue Grosbeak in this respect, but are much larger. The average measurement of 38 specimens in the U.S. National Museum collection is 23.11 by 18.29 millimeters, or 0.91 by 0.72 inch. The largest egg of the series measures 24.64 by 18.80 millimeters, or 0.97 by 0.74 inch; the smallest, 21.84 by 16.76 millimeters, or 0.86 by 0.66 inch. MOLOTHRUS BONARIENSIS (Gm.). Argentine Cowbird. Molothrus bonariensis, SCL. et SALY., Nomencl., p.37; Hupson, P. Z. S., 1872, p. 809, 1874, p. 153 (Buenos Ayres); DURNFORD, Ibis, 1877, pp. 33, 174 (Chupat); Wuitk, P. Z. S., 1882, p. 601 (Buenos Ayres); D6ORING, Exp. al Rio Negro, Zool., p. 41 (Carhue); Barrows, Bull. Nutt. Orn, Cl. vit, p. 133 (Entrerios); SCt., Cat. B., X1, p. 385.—Molothrus sericeus, BURM., La Plata Reise, 11, p. 494. Description.—Uniform shining purplish black; less lustrous on wings and tail; bill and feet black; total length, 7.5 inches; wing, 4.5; tail, 3. Female, dark ashy brown; beneath paler; slightly smaller in size. Hab.—Argentina, Paraguay, Bolivia, and Brazil. This species is the Tordo Comun of Azara, and is usually called ‘“ Tordo” or ‘+ Pajaro Negro” by the Spanish, and “ Blackbird” by the English-speaking Argentines. A more suitable name, I think, is the Argentine Cowbird, which has been given to it by some writers on ornithology, Cowbird being the name of the closely allied North American species, Molothrus pecoris. This Cowbird is widely distributed in South America, and is common throughout the Argentine country, including Patagonia, as far south as Chupat. In Buenos Ayres it is very numerous, especially in culti- vated «istricts where there are plantations of trees. The male is clothed in a glossy plumage of deep violaceous purple, the wings and tail being dark metallie green; but seen at a distance or in the shade the bird looks black. The female is inferior in size and has a dull, mouse-colored plumage and black beak and legs. The males are much more numerous than the females. Azara says that nine birds in ten are males, but I am not sure that the disparity is so great as that. It seems Strange and contrary to nature’s usual rule that the smaller, shyer, inconspicuous individuals should be in such a minority; but the reason is perhaps that the male eggs of the Cowbird are harder shelled than the female eggs, and escape destruction oftener when the parent bird: exercises its disorderly and destructive habit of pecking holes in all the eggs it finds in the nests into which it intrudes. THE COWBIRDS. 603 The Cowbirds are sociable to a greater degree than most species, their companies not breaking up during the laying season; for, as they are parasitical, the female merely steals away to drop her egg in any nest she-ean find, after which she returns to the flock. They feed on the ground, where, in their movements and in the habit the male has in eraning out its neck when disturbed, they resemble Starlings. The male has also a curious habit of carrying his tail raised vertically while feeding. They follow the domestic cattle about the pastures, and frequently a dozen or more birds may be seen perched along the back of a cow or horse. When the animal is grazing they group themselves close to its mouth like chickens round a hen when she scratches up the ground, eager to snatch up the small insects exposed where the grass is cropped close. In spring they also follow the plow to pick up worms and grubs. The song of the male, particularly when making love, is accompanied with gestures and actions somewhat like those of the domestic pigeon. He swells himself out, beating the ground with his wings, and uttering a series of deep internal notes, followed by others loud and clear; and occasionally when uttering them he suddenly takes wing and flies directly away from the female to a distance of 50 yards, and performs a wide circuit about her in the air, singing all the time. The homely object of his short-lived passion always appears utterly indifferent to this curious and pretty performance; yet she must be even more impressionable than most female birds, since she continues scat- tering about her parasitiecal and often wasted eggs during four months in every year. Her language consists of a long note with a splutter- ing sound, to express alarm or curiosity, and she oceasionally chatters in a low tone as if trying to sing. In the evening when the birds con- gregate on the trees to roost they often continue singing in concert until it is quite dark; and when disturbed at night the females fre- quently utter their song while taking flight, reminding one of the Teterus pyrrhopterus, which has only its usnal melody to express fear and other painful emotions. On rainy days, when they are driven to the shelter of trees, they will often sing together for hours without intermission, the blending of innumerable voices producing a rushing sound as of a high wind. At the end of summer they congregate in flocks of tens of thousands so that the ground where they are feeding seems carpeted with black, and the trees when they alight appear to have a black foliage. At such times one wonders that many small species on which they are parasites do not become extinct by means of their pernicious habit. In Buenos Ayres, where they are most numer- ous, they have a migration, which is only partial, however. It is notice- able chiefly in the autumn, and varies greatly in different years. In some seasons it is very marked, when for many days in February and March the birds are seen traveling northward, flocks succeeding flocks all day long, passing by with a swift, low, undulating flight, their wings 604 REPORT OF NATIONAL MUSEUM, 1893. producing a soft musical sound; and this humming flight of the migrat- ing Cowbirds is as familiar to every one acquainted with nature in Buenos Ayres as the whistling of the wind or the distant lowing of cattle. The procreant instinct of this Molothrus has always seemed so impor- tant to me, for many reasons, that [have paid a great deal of attention to it; and the facts, or, at all events, the most salient of them, which I have collected during several years of observation, I propose to append here, classified under different headings so as to avoid confusion, and to make it easy for other observers to see at a glance just how much I have learned. Though I have been familiar with this species from childhood, when IT used to hunt every day for their wasted eggs on the broad, clean walks of the plantation, and removed them in pity from the nests of little birds where I found them, I have. never ceased to wonder at their strange instinct, which in its wasteful, destructive character, so unlike the parasitical habit in other species, seems to strike a discordant note in the midst of the general harmony of nature. MISTAKES AND IMPERFECTIONS OF THE PROCREANT INSTINCT OF MOLOTHRUS BON- ARIENSIS. 4 i. The Cowbirds, as we have seen, frequently waste their eggs by dropping them on the ground. 2, They also occasionally lay in old forsaken nests. ThisI have often observed, and to make very sure I took several old nests and placed them in trees and bushes, and found that eggs were laid in them. 3. They also frequently lay in nests where incubation has actually begun. When this happens the Cowbird’s egg is lost, if incubation is far advanced; but if the eggs have been sat on three or four days only, then it has a good chance of being hatched and the young bird reared along with its foster brothers. 4, One female often lays several eggs in the same nest, instead of laying only one, as does, according to Wilson, the Molothrus pecoris ot North America. I conclude that this is so from the fact that in cases where the eggs of a species vary considerably in form, size, and mark- ings, each individual of the species lays eggs precisely or nearly alike. So when I find 2, 3, or 4 eggs of the Cowbird in one nest all alike in color and other particulars, and yet in half a hundred eggs from other nests can not find one to match with them, it is impossible not to believe that the eggs found together, and possessing a family likeness, were laid by the same bird. 5. Several females often lay in one nest, so that the number of eggs in it frequently makes incubation impossible. One December I col- lected ten nests of the Scissortail, Milvulus tyrannus, from my trees; they contained a total of 47 eggs, 12 of the Scissortails and 35 of the Cowbirds. It is worthy of remark that the Milwulus breeds in October es THE COWBIRDS 605 or early in November, rearing only one brood; so that these ten nests found late in December were of birds that had lost their first nests. Probably three-fourths of the lost nests of Milvulus are abandoned in consequence of the confusion caused in them by the Cowbirds. 6. The Cowbirds, male and female, destroy many of the eggs in the nests they visit, by pecking holes in the shells, breaking, devouring, and stealing them. ‘This is the most destructive habit of the bird, and is probably possessed by individuals in different degrees. I have often carefully examined all the parasitical eggs in a nest, and after three or four days found that these eggs had disappeared, others, newly laid, being in their places. I have seen the female Cowbird strike her beak into an egg and fly away witn it; and I have often watched the male bird perched close by while the female was on the nest, and when she quitted it seen him drop down and begin pecking holes in theeggs. In some nests found full of parasitical eggs every egg has holes pecked in the shell, for the bird destroys indiscriminately eggs of its own and of other species. _ ADVANTAGES POSSESSED BY M. BONARIENSIS OVER ITS DUPES. After reading the preceding notes one might ask, if there is so much that is defective and irregular in the reproductive instinet of M. bonariensis, how does the species maintain its existence, and even increase to such an amazing extent, for it certainly is very much more numerous, Over an equal area, than other parasitical species. For its greater abundance there may be many reasons unknown to us. The rarer species may be less hardy, have more enemies, be exposed to more perils in their long migrations, ete. That it is able to maintain its existence in spite of irregularities in its instinct is no doubt due to the fact that its eggs and young possess many advantages over the eggs and young of the species upon which it is parasitical. Some of these advantages are due to those very habits of the parent bird which at first sight appear most defective; others to the character of the egg and embryo, time of evolution, ete. 1. The egg of the Cowbird is usually larger, and almost invariably harder shelled than are the eggs it is placed with; those of the Yellow- breast, Pseudoleistes virescens, being the one exception I am acquainted with. The harder shell of its own egg, considered in relation to the destructive egg-breaking habit of the bird, gives it the best chance of being preserved; for though the Cowbird never distinguishes its own eggs, of which indeed it destroys a great many, a larger proportion escape in a nest where many eggs are indiscriminately broken. 2. The vitality or tenacity of life appears greater in the embryo Cowbird than in other species; this circumstance also, in relation to the egg-breaking habit and to the habit of laying many eggs in a nest, gives it a further advantage. I have examined nests of the Scissor- tail, containing many eggs, after incubation had begun, and have been surprised at finding those of the Scissortail addled, even when placed 606 REPORT OF NATIONAL MUSEUM, 1893. most advantageously in the nest for receiving heat from the parent bird, while those of the Cowbird contained living embryos, even when under all the other eggs, and as frequently happens, glued immovably to the nest by the matter from broken eggs spilt over them. The following instance of extraordinary vitality in an embryo Molo- thrus seems to show incidentally that in some species protective habits, which will act as a check on the parasitical instinct, may be in the course of formation. Though birds do not, as a rule, seem able to distinguish parasitical eges from their own, however different in size and color they may be, they often do seem to know that eggs dropped in their nest before they themselves have began to lay ought not to be there; and the nest, even after its completion, is not infrequently abandoned on account of these premature eggs. Some species, however, do not forsake their nests; and though they do not throw the parasitical eggs out, which would seem the simplest’ plan, they have discovered how to get rid of them and so save themselves the labor of making a fresh nest. Their method is to add a new deep lining, under which the strange eggs are buried out of sight and give no more trouble. The Sisopygis icterophrys, a common Tyrant Bird in Buenos Ayres, frequently has recourse to this expedient, and the nest it makes being rather shallow the layer of fresh material, under which the strange eggs are buried, is built upward above the rim of the original nest, so that this supplementary nest is like one saucer placed within another, and the observer is gen- erally able to tell from the thickness of the whole structure whether any parasitical eggs have been entombed in it or not. Finding a very thick nest one day, containing 2 half-fledged young birds besides 3 addled eggs, I opened it, removing the upper portion, or additional nest, intact, and discovered beneath it three buried Molothrus eggs, their shells encrusted with dirt and glued together with broken egg- matter spilt over them. In trying to get them out without pulling the nest to pieces I broke them all. ‘Two were quite rotten, but the third con- tained a living embryo, ready to be hatched, and very lively and hungry when I took it in my hand. The young Tyrant Birds were about a fortnight old, and as they hatch out only about twenty days after the parent bird begins laying, this parasitical egg with a living chick in it must have been deeply buried in the nest for five or six weeks. Probably after the young Tyrant Birds came out of their shells and began to grow, the little heat from their bodies penetrating to the buried egg, served to bring the embryo in it to maturity; but when I saw it i felt (like a person who sees a ghost) strongly inclined to doubt the evidence of my own senses. 3. The comparatively short time the embryo takes to hatch gives it another and a great advantage; for, whereas the eggs of other small birds require from fourteen to sixteen days to mature, that of the Cow- bird hatches in eleven days and a half from the moment incubation commences; so that when the female Cowbird makes so great a mistake THE COWBIRDS 607 as to drop an egg with others that have already been sat on, unless incubation be very far advanced, it still has a chance of being hatched before or contemporaneously with the others; but even if the others hatch first, the extreme hardiness of the embryo serves to keep it alive with the modicum of heat it receives. ; 4. Whenever the Molothrus is hatched together with the young of its foster parents, if these are smaller than the parasite, as usually is the case, soon after exclusion from the shell they disappear, and the young Cowbird remains sole occupant of the nest. How it succeeds in expelling or destroying them, if it indeed does destroy them, I have not been able to learn. 5. To all these circumstances favorable to the Jlolothrus may be added another of equal or even greater importance. It is never engaged with the dilatory and exhaustive process of rearing its own young, and for this reason continues in better condition than other species; and, more- over, being gregarious and practising promiscuously sexual intercourse, must lay a much greater number of eggs than other species. In our domestic fowls we see that hens that never become broody lay a great deal more than others. Some of our small birds rear two, others only one brood in the season, building, incubation, and tending the young taking up much time, so that they are usually from two to three months and a half employed. But the Cowbird is like the fow] that never incu- bates, and continues dropping eggs during four months and a half. From the beginning of September until the end of January the males are seen incessantly wooing the females, and during most of this time eggs are found. 1 find that small birds will, if deprived repeatedly of their nests, lay and even hatch four times in the season, thus laying, if the full complement be 4,16 eggs. No doubt the Cowbird lays a much larger number than that; my belief is that every female lays from 60 to 100 eggs every season, though I have nothing but the extraordi- nary number of wasted eggs one finds to judge from. Before dismissing the subject of the advantages the Molothrus pos- sesses over its dupes, and of the real or apparent defects of its instinet, some attention should be given to another circumstance, viz, the new conditions introduced by land cultivation and their effect on the spe- cies. The altered conditions have in various ways served to remove many extraneous checks on the parasitical instinct, and the more the birds multiply the more irregular and disordered does the instinct necessarily become. In wild districts where it was formed, and where birds building accessible nests are proportionately fewer, the instinct seems different from what it Goes in cultivated districts. Parasitical eggs are not common in the desert, and even the most exposed nests there are probably never overburdened with them. But in cultivated places, where their food abounds, the birds congregate in the orchards and plantations in great numbers, and avail themselves of all the nests, ill-concealed as they must always be in the clean, open-foliaged trees planted by man. 608 REPORT OF NATIONAL MUSEUM, 1893. DIVERSITY IN COLOR OF EGGS. There is an extraordinary diversity in the color, form, and disposi- tion of markings, ete., of the eggs of M. bonariensis; and I doubt whether any other species exists laying eggs so varied. About half the eggs one finds, or nearly half, are pure unspotted white, like the eges of birds that breed in dark holes. Others are sparsely sprinkled with such exceedingly minute specks of pale pink or gray as to appear quite spotless until closely examined. After the pure white, the most common variety is an egg with a white ground, densely and uniformly spotted or blotched with red. Another not uncommon variety has a very pale, flesh-colored ground, uniformly marked with fine characters, that look as if inscribed on the shell with a pen. A much rarer variety has a pure white shell with a few large or variously sized chocolate spots. Perhaps the rarest variety is an egg entirely of a fine deep red; but between this lovely marbled egg and the white one with almost imperceptible specks there are varieties without number, for there is no such thing as characteristic markings in the eggs of this species, although, as I have said before, the eggs of the same individual show a family resemblance. HABITS OF THE YOUNG OF M. BONARIENSIS. Small birds of all species, when first hatched, closely resemble each other. After they are fledged the resemblance is less, but still com- paratively great. Gray, interspersed with brown, is the color of most of them, or at least of the upper exposed plumage. There is also a great similarity in their cries of hunger and fear—shrill, querulous, prolonged, and usually tremulous notes. It is not, then, to be won- dered at that the foster parents of the young Molothrus so readily respond to its cries, understanding the various expressions denoting hunger, fear, pain, as well as when uttered by their own offspring. But the young Molothrus never understands the language of its foster parents as other young birds understand the language of their real parents, rising to receive food when summoned, and concealing them- selves or trying to escape when the warning note is given. How does the young Molothrus learn to distinguish, even by sight, its foster parent from any other bird approaching the nest? It generally mani- fests no fear even at a large object. On thrusting my fingers into any nest I find the young birds, if still blind or but recently hatched, wil] hold up and open their mouths, expecting food; but in a very few days they learn to distinguish between their, parents and other objects approaching them, and to show alarm even when not warned of danger. Consider the different behavior of three species that seldom or never warn their offspring of danger: The young of Synallaxis spixi, though in a deep, domed nest, will throw itself to the ground, attempting thus to make its escape; the young of Mimus patagonicus sits close and motion- less, with closed eyes, mimicking death; the young of our common THE COWBIRDS. 609 Zenaida, even beforeitis fledged, will swell itself up and strike angrily at the intruder with beak and wings, and by making so brave a show of its inefficient weapons it probably often saves itself from destruction. But anything approaching the young Molothrus is weleomed with flut- tering wings and clamorous cries, as if all creatures were expected to minister to its necessities. December 24.—To-day I found a young WMolothrus in the nest of Spermophila cerulescens. He cried for food on seeing my hand approach the nest. I took him out and dropped him down, when, finding himself on the ground, he immediately made off, half flying. After a hard chase I succeeded in recapturing him, and began to twirl him about, making him scream, so as to inform his foster parents of his situation, for they were not by at the moment. I then put him back in, or rather upon, the little cradle of a nest, and plucked half a dozen large measure worms from an adjacent twig. The worms I handed to the bird as I drew them from the cases, and with great greediness he devoured them all, notwithstanding the ill treatment he had just received, and utterly disregarding the wild, excited cries of his foster parents, just arrived and hovering within 3 or 4 feet of the nest. Last summer I noticed a young Cowbird in a stubble field, perched on the top of a slender, dry stalk. As it was clamoring at short inter- vals, I waited to see what bird would come to it. It proved to be the diminutive Hapalocercus flaviventris, and I was much amused to see the little thing fly directly to its large foster offspring and, alighting on its back, drop a worm into the upturned open mouth. After remaining a moment on its singular perch, the Flycatcher flew away, but in less than half a minute returned and perched again on the young bird’s back. I continued watching them until the Molothrus flew off, but not before I had seen him fed seven or eight times in the same manner. In the two foregoing anecdotes may be seen the peculiar habits of the young Molothrus. As the nests in which it is hatched, from those of the little Serpophaga-and Wren to those of Mimus, vary so much in size and materials, and are placed in such different situations, the young Molothrus must have in most of them a somewhat incongruous appearance. But in the habits of the young bird is the greatest incon- gruity or inadaptation. When the nest is in a close thicket or forest, though much too small for the bird, and although the bird itself can not understand its foster parents and welcomes all things that, whether with good or evil design, come near it, the unfitness is not so apparent as when the nest is in open fields and plains. The young Molothrus differs from the true offspring of its foster parents in its habit of quitting the nest as soon as it is able, trying to follow the old bird, and placing itself in the most conspicuous place it can find, such as the summit of a stalk or weed, and there demand- ing food with frequent. and importunate cries. Thus the little Fly- catcher had acquired the habit of perching on the back of its charge to H. Mis. 184, pt. 2 39 610 REPORT OF NATIONAL MUSEUM, 1893. feed it, because parent birds variably perch above their young to feed them, and the young Cowbird prevented this by always sitting on the summit of the stalk it perched on. The habit is most fatal on the open and closely cropped pampas inhabited by the Cachila, Anthus corren- dera. In December, when the Cachila Pipit rears its second brood, the Milvago chimango also has young, and feeds them almost exclu- sively on the young of various species of small birds. At this season the Chimango destroys great numbers of the young of the Cachila and of Synallaxis hudsoni. Yet these birds are beautifully adapted, in structure, coloration, and habits, to their station. It thus happens that in districts where the VWolothrus is abundant their eggs are found in a majority of the Cachilas’s nests; and yet to find a young Cowbird out ot the nest is a rare thing here, for as soon as the young birds are able to quit the nest and expose themselves they are all or nearly all carried off by the Chimangos. CONJECTURES AS TO THE ORIGIN OF THE PARASITIC INSTINCT IN M. BONARIENSIS. Darwin’s opinion that the “‘immediate and final cause of the Cuckoo’s instinct is that she lays her eggs not daily, but at intervals of two or three days” (Origin of Species), carries no great appearance of proba- bility with it; for might it not just as reasonably be said that the para- sitic instinct is the immediate and final cause of her laying her eggs at long intervals? Ifit is favorable to a species with the instinct of the Cuckoo (and it probably is favorable) to lay eggs at longer intervals than other species, then natural selection would avail itself of every modification in the reproductive organs that tended to produce such a result, and make the improved structure permanent. It is said (Origin of Species, Chap. vil) that the American Cuckoo lays also at long inter- vals, and has eggs and young at the same time in its nest, a circum. stance manifestly disadvantageous. Of the Coccyzus melanocoryphus, the only one of our three Coccyzi whose nesting habits I am acquainted with, I can say that it never begins to incubate till the full complement of eggs are laid—that its young are hatched simultaneously. But if it is sought to trace the origin of the European Cuckoo’s instinet in the nesting habits of American Coccyzi, it might be attributed not to the aberrant habit of perhaps a single species, but to another and more dis- advantageous habit common to the entire genus, viz, their habit of building exceedingly frail platform nests, from which the eggs and young very frequently fall. By occasionally dropping an egg in the deep, secure nest of some other bird an advantage would be possessed by the birds hatched in them, and in them the habit would perhaps become hereditary. Be this as it may (and the one guess is perhaps as wide of the truth as the other), there are many genera intermediate between Cuculus and Molothrus in which no trace of a parasitic habit appears; and it seems more than probable that thé analogous instincts originated in different ways in the two genera. As regards the origin of the s THE COWBIRDS. 611 instinct in Molothrus, it will perhaps seem premature to found specula- tions on the few facts here recorded and before we are acquainted with the habits of other members of the genus. That aspecies should totally lose so universal an instinct as the maternal one, and yet avail itself of that affection in other species to propagate itself, seems a great mystery. Nevertheless, I can not refrain from all conjecture on the subject, and will go so far as to suggest what may have been at least one of the many concurrent causes that have produced the parasitic instinct. The appar- ently transitional nesting habits of several species, and one remarkable habit of AM. bonariensis, seem to me to throw some light on a point bear- ing intimately on the subject, viz, the loss of the nest-making instinct in this species. Habits vary greatly; were it not so, they would never seem so well adapted to the conditions of life as we find them, since the conditions themselves are not unchangeable. Thus it happens that while a spe- cies seems well adapted to its state in its habits, it frequently seems not so well adapted in its relatively immutable structure. For example, without going away from the pampas, we find a Tringa with the habits of an upland Plover, a Tyrant Bird, Pitangus bellicosus, preying on mice and snakes, another Tyrant Bird, Myiotheretes rujfiventris, Plover- like in its habits, and finally a Woodpecker, Colaptes campestris, that seeks its food on the ground like a Starling; yet in none of these—and the list might be greatly lengthened—has there been anything like a modifica- tion of structure to keep pace with the altered manner of life. But, how- ever much the original or generic habits of a species may have become altered—the habits of a species being widely difterent from those of its congeners, also a want of correspondence between structure and habits (the last being aiways more suited to conditions than the first) being taken as evidence of such alteration—traces of ancient and disused habits frequently reappear. Seemingly capricious actions, too numerous, too vague, or too insignificant to be recorded, improvised definite actions that are not habitual, apparent imitations of the actions of other species, a perpetual inclination to attempt something that is never attempted, and attempts to do that which is never done—these and other like motions are, I believe, in many cases to be atfributed to the faint promptings of obsolete instincts. To the same cause many of the occa- sional aberrant habits of individuals may possibly be due—such as of a bird that builds in trees occasionally laying ou the ground, If recur- rence to an ancestral type be traceable in structure, coloration, language, it is reasonable to expect something analogous to occur in instincts. But even if such casual and often aimless motions as [ have mentioned should guide us unerringly to the knowledge of the old and disused instinets of a species, this knowledge of itself would not enable us to discover the origin of present ones. But, assuming it as a fact that the conditions of existence and the changes going on in them are in every case the fundamental cause of alterations in habits, I believe that in 612 REPORT OF NATIONAL MUSEUM, 1893. many cases a knowledge of the disused instinets will assist us very materially in the inquiry. I will illustrate my meaning with a suppo- sititious case. Should all or many species of Columbide manifest an inclination for haunting rocks and banks, and for entering or peering into holes in them, such vague and purposeless actions, connected with the facts that all doves build simple platform nests (like Columba livia and others that build on a flat surface), also lay white eggs (the rule being that eggs laid in dark holes are white, exposed eggs colored), also that one species, C. livia, does lay in holes in rocks, would lead us to believe that the habit of this species was once common to the genus. We should conclude that an insufficiency of proper breeding places, i. e., new external conditions, first induced doves to build in trees. Thus (. livia also builds in trees where there are no rocks; but, when able, returns to its ancestral habits. In the other species we should believe the primitive habit to be totally lost from disuse, or only to manifest itself in a faint, uncertain manner. Now, in Molothrus bonariensis we see just such a vague, purpose- less habit as the imaginary one I have described. Before and dur- ing the breeding season the females, sometimes accompanied by the males, are seen continually haunting and examiming the domed nests ot some of the Dendrocolaptide. This does not seem like a mere freak of curiosity, but their persistence in their investigations is precisely like that of birds that habitually make choice of such breeding places. It is surprising that they never do actually lay in such nests, except when the side or dome has been accidentally broken enough to admit the light into the interior. Whenever I set boxes up in my trees the female Cowbirds were the first to visit them. Sometimes one will spend half a day loitering about and inspecting < box, repeatedly climbing round and over it and always ending at the entrance, into which sbe peers curiously, and when about to enter starting back as if scared at the obscurity within; but after retiring a little space she will return again and again, as if fascinated with the comfort and security of such an abode. It is amusing to see how per- tinaciously they hang about the ovens of the Ovenbirds, apparently det rmined to take possession of them, flying back after a hundred repulses, and yet not entering them even when they have the oppor- tunity. Sometimes one is seen following a wren or a Swallow to its nest beneath the eaves, and then clinging to the wall beneath the hole into which it disappeared. I could. fill many pages with instances of this habit of W. bonariensis, which, useless though it be, is as strong an affection as the bird possesses. That it is a recurrence to a long disused habit Lean scarcely doubt; at least, to no other cause that I can imagine can it be attributed; and, besides, it seems to me thatif M. bonariensis, When once a nest builder, had acquired the semiparasiti- eal habit of breeding in domed nests of other birds, such a habit might conduce to the formation of the instinct which it now possesses. THE COWBIRDS. 613 I may mention that twice I have seen birds of this species attempting to build nests, and that on both occasions they failed to complete the work. So universal is the nest-making instinct that one might safely say the WM. bonariensis had once possessed it, and that in the cases I have mentioned it was a recurrence, too weak to be efficient, to the ancestral habit. Another interesting circumstance may be adduced as strong presumptive evidence that J. bonariensis once made itself an open exposed nest as J. badius occasionally does, viz, the difference in color of the male and female, for while the former is rich purple the latter possesses an adaptive resemblance in color to nests and to the shaded interior twigs and branches on which nests are usually built. How could such an instinet have been lost? ‘fo say that the Cowbird occasionally dropped an egg in another bird’s nest, and that the young hatched from these occasional eggs possessed some (hypo- thetical) advantage over those hatched in the usual way, and that the parasitical habit so became hereditary, supplanting the original one, is an assertion without anything to support it, and seems to exclude the agency of external conditions. Again, the want of correspondence in the habits of the young parasite and its foster parents would in reality be a disadvantage to the former; the unfitness would be as great in the eggs and other circumstances, for all the advantages the parasite actually possesses in the comparative hardness of the eggshell, rapid evolution of the young, etc., already mentioned, must have been acquired little by little through the slowly accumulating process of natural selection, but subsequently to the formation of the original parasitical inclination and habit. I am inclined to believe that J. bonariensis lost the nest-making instinet by acquiring that semipara- sitical habit common to so many South American birds of breeding in the large covered nests of the Dendrocolaptida. We have evidence that this semiparasitical habit does tend to eradicate the nest-making one. The Synaliaxes build great elaborate domed nests, yet we have one species (S. egithaloides) that never builds for itself, but breeds in the nests of other birds of the same genus. In some species the nest- making habit is in a transitional state. Machetornis rixosa sometimes makes an elaborate nest in the angle formed by twigs and the bough of a tree, but prefers, and almost invariably makes choice of, the coverec nest of some other species or of a hole in the tree. It is precisely the same with our Wren, Troglodytes furvus. The Yellow House Sparrow, Sycalis pelzelni; invariably breeds in a dark hole or covered nest. The fact that these three species lay colored eggs, and the -first and last very darkly colored eggs, inclines one to belive that they once invari- ably built exposed nests, as J. rivosa still occasionally does. It may be-added that those species that lay colored eggs in dark places con- struct and line their nests far more neatly than do the species that breed in such places but lay white eggs. As with J. rivosa and the Wren, so it is with the Bay-winged Molothrus; it lays mottled eggs, and 614 REPORT OF NATIONAL MUSEUM, 1893. occasionally builds a neat, exposed nest; yet so great is the partiality it has acquired for large domed nests, that whenever it can possess itself of one by dint of fighting it will not build one for itself. Let us suppose that the Cowbird also once acquired the habit of breeding in domed nests, and that through this habit its original nest-making instinct was completely eradicated. It is not difficult to imagine how in its turn this instinet was also lost. A diminution in the number of birds that built domed nests would involve YW. bonariensis in a struggle for nests, in which it would probably be defeated. In Buenos Ayres the White-rumped Swallow, the Wren, and the Yellow Seed-finch prefer the ovens of the Furnarius to any other breeding place, but to obtain them are obliged to struggle with Progne tapera, for this species has acquired the habit of breeding exclusively in the ovens. They can not, however, compete with the Progne, and thus the increase of one species has, to a great extent, deprived three other species of their favorite building place. Again, Machetornis rixosa prefers the great nest of the Anumbius, and when other species compete with it for the nest they are invariably defeated. I have seen a pair of Machetornis, after they had seized a nest, attacked in their turn by a flock of 6 or 8 Bay-wings, but, in spite of the superior numbers, the fury of the Machetornis compelied thein to raise the siege. Thus some events in the history of our common Molothrus have per- haps been accounted for, if not the most essential one—the loss of the nest-making instinct from the acquisition of the habit of breeding in the covered nests of other birds, a habit that has left a strong trace in the manners of the species, and perhaps in the pure white unmarked eggs of so many individuals; finally, we have seen how this habit may also have been lost. But the parasitical habit of the YW. bonariensis may have originated when the bird was still a nest builder. The origin of the instinct may have been in the occasional habit, common to so many species, of two or more females laying together; the progenitors of all the species of Molothrus may have been early infected with this habit, and inherited with it a facility for acquiring their present one. WM. pecoris and M. bonariensis, though their instincts differ, are both para- sitic on a great number of species; M. rufoavillaris on M. badius; and in this last species two or more females frequently lay together. If we suppose that the JM. bonariensis, when it was a nest builder or reared its Own young in the nests it seized, possessed this habit of two or more females frequently laying together, the young of those birds that oftenest abandoned their eggs to the care of another would probably inherit a weakened maternal instinct. The continual intercrossing of individuals with weaker and stronger instincts would prevent the formation of two races differing in habit; but the whole race would degenerate, and would only be saved from final extinetion by some individuals occasionally dropping their eggs in the nests of other species, perhaps of a Molothrus, as M. rufoaxillaris still does, rather than THE COWBIRDS. 615 of birds of other genera. Certainly in this way the parasitic instinet may have originated in WM. bonariensis without that species ever having acquired the habit of breeding in the covered dark nests of other birds, [have supposed that they once possessed it only to account for the strange attraction such nests have for them, which seems like a recur- rence to an ancestral habit. MOLOTHRUS RUFOAXILLARIS, Cassin. Screaming Cowbird. Molothrus rufoaxillaris, SCL. et SALV., Nomencl. p. 37; Hupson, P. Z. S. 1874, p. 161 (Buenos Ayres); DURNFORD, Ibis, 1877, p. 174 (Buenos Ayres); WHITE, P. Z. 8. 1882, p. 601 (Catamarca); Barrows, Bull. Nutt. Orn. Cl. vi, p. 134 (Entrerios); Sel. Cat. B. xt. p. 338. Description.Silky black, washed with purple; wings and tail with a slight greenish gloss; a chestnut spot on the axillaries; bill and feet black; whole length 8 inches, wing 4.5, tail 3.3. Female similar, but somewhat smaller. Habitat.—Argentina and Uruguay. This bird has no vulgar name, not being distinguished from the common Cowbird by the country people. The English name of Scream- ing Cowbird, which I have bestowed on it, will, I think, commend itself as appropriate to those who observe this bird, for they will always and at any distance be able to distinguish it from the species it resem- bles so nearly by listening to its impetuous screaming notes, so unlike anything in the language of the common Cowbird. The Screaming Cowbird is larger than the allied species. The female is less than the male in size, but in color they are alike, the entire plumage being deep blue-black, glossy, and with purple reflections; and under the wing at the joint there is a small rufous spot. The beak is very stout, the plumage loose, and with a strong, musky smell; the cesophagus remarkably wide. It is far less common than the other species of Molothrus, but is not rare, and ranges south to the Buenos-Ayrean pampas, where a few individuals are usually found in every large plantation; and, like the M. badius, it remains with us the whole year. It is not strictly grega- rious, but in winter goes in parties, never exceeding five or six indi- viduals, and in the breeding season in pairs. One of its most note- worthy traits is an exaggerated hurry and bustle thrown into all its movements. When passing from one branch to another, it goes by a series of violent jerks, smiting its wings loudly together, and when a party of them return from the fields they rush wildly and loudly screaming to the trees, as if pursued by a bird of prey. They are not singing birds, but the male sometimes, though rarely, attempts a song, and utters, with considerable effort, a series of chattering unmelodious notes. The chirp with which he invites his mate to fly has the sound of a loud and smartly-given kiss. His warning or alarm note when approached in the breeding season has a soft and pleasing sound; it 616 REPORT OF NATIONAL MUSEUM, 1893. is, curiously enough, his only mellow expression. But his most com. mon and remarkable vocal performance is a ery beginning with a hol- low-sounding internal note, and swelling into a sharp metallic ring; this is uttered with tail and wings spread and depressed, the whole plumage raised like that of a strutting turkey cock, whilst the bird hops briskly up and down on its perch as if dancing. From its puffed- out appearance, and from the peculiar character of the sound it emits, I believe that, like the pigeon and some other species, it has the fac- ulty of filling its crop with air, to use it as a “chamber of resonance.” The note I have described is quickly and invariably followed by a scream, harsh and impetuous, uttered by the female, though both notes always sound as if proceeding from one bird. When on the wing the birds all scream together in concert. The food of this species is chiefly minute seeds and tender buds; they also swallow large caterpillars and spiders, but do not, like their congeners, eat hard insects. I became familiar, even asa small boy, with the habits of the Scream- ing Cowbird, and before this species was known to naturalists, but could never find its nest, though I sought diligently for it. I could never see the birds collecting materials for a nest, or feeding their erown-up young like other species, and this might have made me sus- pect that they did not hatch their own eggs; but it never occurred to me that the bird was parasitical, | suppose because in summer they are always seen in pairs, the male and female being inseparable. Prob- ably this is the only parasitical species in which there is conjugal fidelity. I also noticed that, when approached in the breeding season, the pair always displayed great excitement and anxiety, like birds that have a nest, or that have selected a site on which to build one. But year after year the end of the summer would arrive, the birds reunite in parties of half a dozen, and the mystery remain unsolved. At length, after many years, fortune favored me, and while observing the habits of another species (Molothrus badius), I discovered by chance the procreant habits of the Screaming Cowbirds, and as these observa- tions throw some light on the habits of M/. badius, I think it best to transcribe my notes here in full. A pair of Lenateros (Anumbius acuticaudatus) have been nearly all the winter building a nest on an acacia tree 60 yards from the house; it is about 27 inches deep, and 16 or 18 inches in circumference and appeais now nearly finished. I am sure that this nest will be attacked before long, and I have resolved to watch it closely. September 28.—To-day I saw a Bay-wing (M. badius) on the nest; it climbed over it, deliberately inspecting every part with the critical air of a proprietor who had ordered its construction, taking up and rear- ranging some sticks and throwing others away from the nest. While thus engaged two common Cowbirds (J. bonariensis), male and female, came to the tree. The female dropped on to the nest and began also to examine it, peering curiously into the entrance and quarreling with the THE COWBIRDS. 617 first bird. After afew minutes she flew away, followed by her glossy escort. The Bay-wing continued its strange, futile work until the owners of the nest appeared, whereupon it hopped aside in its usual slow leisurely manner, sang for a few moments, then flew away. The similarity in the behavior of the two birds struck me very forcibly. In the great interest they take in the nests of other birds, especially in large covered nests, the two species are identical. But when the breeding season comes their habits begin to diverge; then the common Cowbird lays in nests of other species, abandoning its eggs to their care, while the Bay-wings usually seize on the nests of other birds and rear their own young. Yet, as they do occasionally build a neat, elab- orate nest for themselves, the habit of taking possession of the nests of other birds is, most likely, a recently acquired one, and probably its tendency is to eradicate the original building instinct. October 8.—This morning, while reading under a tree, my attention yas aroused by a shrill note as of a bird in distress issuing from the neighborhood of the Lenatere’s nest; after hearing it repeated at intervals for over twenty minutes I went to ascertain the cause. Two Bay-wings flewup from the ground under the nest, and on searching in the rank clover growing under the tree I discovered the female Lenatero, with plumage wet and draggled, trembling and appearing half dead with the rough treatment she had experienced. I put her in the sun, and after half an hour, hearing her mate calling, she managed to flutter feebly away to jom him. The persecutors had dragged her out of the nest and would, no doubt, have killed her, had I not come so opportunely to the rescue. Since writing the above, I have continued to watch the nest. Both the Bay-wings and Lenateros left it for some days. Six days after picking up the ill-treated female, the Lenateros came back and resumed possession. Four days later the Bay-wings also came back; but on finding the nest still oceupied, they took possession of an unfinished oven of an Ovenbird on another tree within 20 yards of the first, and immediately began carrying in materials with which to line it. When they had finished laying I took their 5 eggs, at the same time throwing down the oven, and waited to see what their next move would be. They remained on the spot singing incessantly, and still manifesting anxiety when approached. I observed them four days, and then was absent from home aS many more; on returning I found that the Lenateros had once more disappeared and that the nest was now held by the Bay-wings. I also noticed that they had opened an entrance very low down at the side of the nest which they were using; no doubt they had killed and thrown out the young Levnateros. It was now early in November, the height of the breeding season, and numbers of common Cowbirds constantly visited the nest; but I was particularly interested in a pair of Screaming Cowbirds that had also begun to grow fond of it, and I resolved to watch them closely. As 618 REPORT OF NATIONAL MUSEUM, 1893. they spent so much of their time near the nest, showing great solicitude when I approached it, I strongly hoped to see them breed in it, if the Bay-wings could only be got rid of. The Screaming Cowbirds would not, or dared not, attack them; and, as I always think that the worst possible use one can put a little bird to is to shoot it, T could not help them by destroying the Bay-wings. I therefore resolved to take their eges, hoping that that would cause them to leave in disgust. When I was satisfied from their movements that they had finished laying, I got up to the nest and was astonished to find 10 eggs instead of 5 as I had confidently expected; for, though the common Cowbirds had paid'a great deal of attention to the nest, I knew the Bay-wings would not allow them to lay in it. The 10 eggs in the nest were all unmistakably Bay-wings’ eggs, and having observed before that several females do oceasionally lay together, I concluded that in this case two females had laid in the nest, though I had only seen two birds—male and female. After taking the 10 eggs the Bay-wings still remained, and in a very short time they appeared to be laying again. When I had reason to think that the full comple- ment was laid, I visited the nest and found 5 eggs in it; these I also took and concluded that the second female had probably gone away, after having been deprived of her first clutch. During all this time the Screaming Cowbirds remained in the neighborhood and oceasion- ally visited the tree; but to my very great surprise the Bay-wings still stubbornly remained, and by-and-by I found that they were going to ay again—the fourth time! When I next visited the nest there were 2 eggs init; I left them and returned three days later, expecting to find 5 eggs, but found 7—certainly more than one female had laid in the nest on this occasion. After taking these last 7 eggs the Bay-wings left, and though the Screaming Cowbirds continued to make occasional visits to the nest, to my great disappointment they did not lay in it. April 12.—To-day I have made a discovery, and am as pleased with it as if I had found a new planet in the sky. The mystery of the Bay- wings’ nest twice found containing over the usual complement of eggs is cleared up, and I have now suddenly become acquainted with the procreant instinct of the Screaming Cowbird. I look on this as a great piece of good fortune, for I had thought that the season for making any such discovery was already over, as we are so near to winter. The Bay-wings are so social in their habits that they always appear reluctant to break up their companies in the breeding season. No sooner is this over, and while the young birds are still fed by the parents, all the families about a plantation unite into one flock. About a month ago all the birds about my home had associated in this way together and went in a scattered flock, frequenting one favorite feeding spot very much, a meadow about fifteen minutes’ walk from the house. The flock was composed, I believe, of 3 families. 16 or 18 birds in all. The young birds are indistinguishable from the adults, but 1 knew THE COWBIRDS. 619 that most of these birds were young, hatched late in the season, from their incessant strident hunger notes. I first observed them about the middle of March. A week ago, while riding past the meadow where they were feeding, I noticed among them 3 individuals with purple spots on their plumage. They were at a distance from me, and I naturally concluded that they were young common Cowbirds (Jf. bona- riensis) casually associating with the Bay-wings. I was surprised to see them, for the young male M. bonariensis always acquires the pur- ple plumage before March, so that these individuals were changing color five weeks after the usual time. To-day, while out with my gun, I came upon the flock, and noticed 4 of the birds assuming the purple plumage, 2 of them being almost entirely that color; but I also noticed with astonishment that they had bay or chestnut-colored wings, also that those with least purple on them were marvelously like the Bay- wings in the mouse-colored plumage of the body and the dark tail. I had seen these birds before the purple plumage was acquired, and there vas then not the slightest difference amongst them, the adults and their supposed offspring being alike; now some of them appeared to be under- going the process of a transmutation into another species. I at once shot the 4 spotted birds, along with 2 genuine Bay-wings, and was delighted to find that the first were young Screaming Cowbirds. I must now believe that the extra eggs twice found in the nest of the Bay-wings were those of the Screaming Cowbird; that the latter species lays chiefly in the nests of the former; that the eggs of the two species are identical in form, size, and color, each bird also laying 5; and that, stranger still, the similarity is as perfect ip the young birds as it is in the eggs. April 15.—This morning I started in quest of the Bay-wings, and observed 1 individual, that had somehow escaped detection the day before, assuming the purple dress. This bird I shot; and after the flock had resettled a short distance off I crept close up to them, under the shelter of a hedge, to observe them more narrowly. One of the adults was closely attended by 3 young birds; and these all, while L watched them, fluttered their wings and clamored for food every time the old bird stirred on its perch. The 3 young birds seemed pre- cisely alike; but presently I noticed that 1 of them had a few minute purple spots, and on shooting this one I found it to be a young M. rufoaxillaris, while the other 2 were true young Bay-wings. The hungry ery of the young M. badius (Bay-wing) is quite different from that of the young M. bonariensis. The cry of the latter is a long, shrill, two-syllabled note, the last syllable being prolonged into a con- tinuous squeal when the foster parent approaches with food. The cry of the young M. badius is short, reedy, tremulous, and uninflected. The resemblance of the young M. rufoavillaris to its foster brothers in language and plumage is the more remarkable when we reflect that the adult bird in its habits, gestures, guttural notes, also inits deep purple plumage, comes much nearer to M. bonariensis than to M. badius. It 620 REPORT OF NATIONAL MUSEUM, 1893. seems impossible for mimicry to go further than this. A slight differ- ence in size is quite imperceptible when the birds are flying about, while in language and plumage the keenest ornithologist would not be able to detect a difference. But it may be questioned whether this is really a case of an external resemblance of one Species to another acquired by natural selection for its better preservation. Possibly the young M. rufoavillaris in the first stage of its plumage exhibits the ancestral type—that of the progenitor of both species. If M. badius belonged to someother group—Sturnella or Pseudoleistes, for instance— it would scarcely be possible to doubt that the resemblance of the young M. rufoaxillaris to its foster brothers resulted from mimicry; but as both species belong to the limited, well-defined group Molothrus, the resemblance may be ascribed to community of descent. Formerly I believed that, though J. badius is constantly seen rearing its own young, they also occasionally dropped their eggs in the nests of other birds. I could not doubt that this was the case after having witnessed a couple of their young following a Yellowbreast and being fed by it. I must now alter my opinion, for what then appeared to be proof positive is now no proof at all, for those two birds were probably the young of M. rufoavillaris. There are, however, good reasons for believing that. J/. rufoawillaris is parasitical almost exclusively on M. badius. I have spoken of the many varieties of eggs M. bonariensis lays. Those of M. badius are a trifle less in size, in form elliptical, densely and uniformly marked with small spots and blotches of dark reddish color, varying to dusky brown; the ground color is white, but sometimes, though rarely, pale blue. It is not possible to confound the eggs of the two species. Now, ever since I saw, many years ago, the Yellow breast feeding the supposed young Bay-wings, I have looked out for the eggs of the latter in other birds’ nests. I have found hun- dreds of nests containing eggs of J. bonariensis, but never one with an egg of M. badius, and, I may now add, never one with an egg of M. rufoaxillaris. It is wonderful that MW. rwfoaxillaris should lay only in the nests of M. badius, but the most mysterious thing is that M. bonariensis, indiscriminately parasitical on a host of species, never, to my knowledge, drops an egg in the nest of JM. badius, unless it be in a forsaken nest. Perhaps it will be difficult for naturalists to believe this, for if the J. badius is so excessively vigilant and jealous of other birds approaching its nest as to succeed in keeping out the subtle, silent, gray-plumaged, omnipresent female M. bonariensis, why does it not also keep off the far rarer, noisy, bustling, conspicuously colored M. rufoaxillaris? Ieannot say. The only explanation that has occurred to me is that M. badius 1s sagacious enough to distinguish the eggs of the common parasite, and throws them out of its nest. But this is scarcely probable, for 1 have hunted im vain under the trees for the ejected eggs, and I have never found the eggs of M. badius with holes pecked in the shells, which would have been the case had M. bonariensis intruded into the nest. THE COWBIRDS. 621 With the results just recorded I felt more than satisfied, though so much still remained to be known, and I looked forward to the next summer to work out the rich mine on which I had stumbled by chance, Unhappily, when spring came around again ill health kept me a prisoner in the city, and finding no improvement in my condition, I eventually left Buenos Ayres at the close of the warm season to try whether change of climate would benefit me. Before leaving, however, I spent a few days at home and saw enough then to satisfy me that my conelu- sions were correct. Most of the birds had finished breeding, but while examining some nests of Anumbius I found one which Bay-wings had tenanted, and which for some reason they had forsaken, leaving 10 unincubated eggs. They were all like Bay-wings’ eggs, but I have no doubt that 5 of them were eggs of M. r apianon During my rides in the neighborhood I also found two flocks of Bay-wings, each com- posed of several families, and among the young birds I noticed several individuals beginning to assume the purple plumage, like those of the previous autumn. I did not think it necessary to shoot more specimens. The question why M. badius permits M. rufoacillaris to use its nest, while excluding the allied parasite, M. bonariensis, must be answered by future observers; but before passing from this very interesting group (Molothrus), I wish to make some general remarks on their habits and their anomalous relations to other species. It is with a considerable degree of repugnance that we regard the parasitical instincts in birds. The reason it excites such a feeling is manifestly because it presents itself to the mind as—to use the words of a naturalist of the last century, who was also a theologian, and believed the Cuckoo had been created with such a habit—‘‘a monstrous outrage on the maternal affection, one of the first great dictates of nature.” An outrage, since each creature has been endowed with this all-powerful affection for the preservation of its own, and not another, species; and here we see it, by a subtle process, an unconscious iniq- uity, turned from its purpose, perverted and made subservient to the very opposing agency against which it was intended as a safeguard. The formation of such an instinct seems, indeed, like an unforseen con- tingency in the system of nature, a malady strengthened, if notinduced, by the very laws established for the preservation of health, and which the vis medicatrix of nature is incapable of eliminating. Again, the ege of a parasitical species is generally so much larger, differing also in coloration from the eggs it is placed with, while there is such an unyarying dissimilarity between the young pied and its living or mur- dered foster brothers, that, unreasoning as we know instinct, and especially the maternal instinct, is, we are shocked at so glaring and flagrant an instance of its blind stupidity. In the competition for place, the struggle for its existence, said with reason to be most deadly between such species as are most nearly allied, the operations are imperceptible, and the changes are so gradual 622 REPORT OF NATIONAL MUSEUM, 1893. that the diminution and final disappearance of one species is never attributed to a corresponding increase in another more favored species over the same region. It is not as if the regnant species had invaded and seized on the province of another, but appears rather as if they had quietly entered on the possession of an inheritance that was theirs by right. Mighty as are the results worked out by such a process, it is only by a somewhat strained metaphor that it can be called a strug- gle. But even when the war is open and declared, as between a raptorial species and its victims, the former is manifestly driven by necessity. And in this case the species preyed on are endowed with peculiar sagacity to escape its persecutions, so that the war is not one of extermination, but, asin a border war, the invader is satisfied with -arrying off the weak and unwary stragglers. Thus the open, declared enmity is in reality beneficial to a species, for it is sure to cut off all such individuals as might cause its degeneration. But we can conceive no necessity for such a fatal instinct as that of the Cuckoo and Cow- bird destructive to such myriads of lives in their beginning. And inasmuch as their preservation is inimical to the species on which they are parasitical, there must also here be a struggle. But what kind of a struggle? Not as in other species, where one perishes in the combat that gives greater strength to the victor, but an anomalous struggle in which one of the combatants has made his adversary turn his weapous against himself, and so seems to have an infinite advantage. It is impossible for him to suffer defeat; and yet, to follow out the meta- phor, he has so wormed about and interlaced himself with his oppo- nent that as soon as he succeeds in overcoming him he also must inevitably perish. Such a result is, perhaps, impossible, as there are so many causes operating to check the undue increase of any ono species; consequently the struggle, unequal as it appears, must continue for- ever. Thus, in whatever way we view the parasitical habit, it appears cruel, treacherous, and vicious in the highest degree. But should we attempt to mentally create a perfect parasitical instinct (that is, one that would be thoroughly efficient with the least possible prejudice to or injustice toward another species—for the preservation of the spe- cies on which the parasite is dependent is necessary to its own) by combining in imagination all known parasitical habits, eliminating every offensive quality or circumstance, and attributing such others in their place as we should think fit, our conception would probably still fall short in simplicity, beauty, and completeness of the actual instinct of M. rufoaxillaris. Instead of laying its eggs promiscuously in every receptacle that offers, it selects the nest of a single species; so that its selective instinct is related to the adaptive resemblance in its eggs and young to those of the species on which it is parasitieal. Such an adaptive resemblance could not, of course, exist if it laid its eggs in the nests of more than one species, and it is certainly a cireumstance eminently favorable to preservation. Then, there not being any such THE COWBIRDS. 623 incongruity and unfitness as we find in nests into which other para- sites intrude, there is no reason here to regard the foster parents’ affec- tion as blind and stupid, the simiarity being close enough to baffle the keenest sagacity. Nor can the instinct here appear in the light of an outrage on the maternal affection, for the young M. rufoavillaris possesses no advantage over its foster brothers. It is not endowed with greater strength and voracity to monopolize the attentions of the foster pareut or to eject the real offspring; but being in every particu- lar precisely like them, it has only an equal chance of being preserved. To this wonderful parasitical instinct we may well apply Darwin’s words, when speaking of the architecture of the hive bee, ‘“‘ Beyond this stage of perfection natural selection could not lead.” MOLOTHRUS BADIUS, Vieill. Bay-winged Cowbird. Molothrus badius, BuRM., La-Plata Reise, u, p. 495 (Parana and Tucuman). SCL. et SALv., Nomencl., p. 37; Hupson, P. Z. 8., 1874, p. 163 (Buenos Ayres) ; DURNFORD, Ibis, 1877, p. 174 (Buenos Ayres); Scu., Cat. B., X1., p. 338. Description.—Dull gray, beneath rather paler; wings chestnut; tips of primaries, inner portions of secondaries, and tail blackish; bill and feet black; total length, 7.5 inches; wing, 3.5; tail, 3. Female similar. Habitat.—Argentina, Paraguay, and Bolivia. In this species the sexes are alike; the plumage of the body is gray- drab color, with a black spot between the eye and beak; tail dark, the quills cinnamon color; beak and legs black. Azara, describing it under the name of Tordo pardo roxiso, says it is a rare bird, so that it has probably increased since his time, as it is now quite common in the Plata district. The Bay-wings usually go in small flocks, numbering from 10 to 30 individuals, and are not migratory, but in winter they travel about a great deal from place to place without extending their journeys more than a few miles in any direction. They are fond of coming about houses, and are frequently seen pecking at the fresh meat hanging out of doors; and, like other birds of the same tribe, feed chiefly on the ground. They spend a great portion of their time on trees, are familiar with man, and inactive, and in their motions singularly slow and delib- erate. Their language is varied. Curiosity or alarm is expressed by trilling notes, and before quitting a tree all the birds of a flock cere- moniously invite each other to fiy with long clear notes, powerful enough to be heard a quarter of a mile away. They also sing a great deal in all seasons, the song being composed of soft, clear, rather sweet notes, variously modulated, uttered in a leisurely manner, and seeming to express a composed frame of mind, all the birds in a flock singing m concert. During the cold season the flock always finds some sheltered sunny spot on the north side of a wood pile or hedge, where they spend several hours every day, sitting still and singing in their usual quiet, soft style. 624 REPORT OF NATIONAL MUSEUM, 1893. Their extreme sociability affects their breeding habits, for sometimes the flock does not break up in spring, and several females lay in one nest together; but whether the birds are paired or practice a pro- miscuous intercourse, I have not been able to discover. They have a ereat partiality for the large domed nests made by the Anwmbius acuticaudatus, called Lenatero in the vernacular, One summer a flock of about 10 Bay-wings took possession of a Lenatero’s nest on one of my trees, and after a few cays I took 14 eggs from it. Though the birds hopped, chirping around me, manifesting great solicitude, the eges were quite cold, and had I left them many more would have been laid no doubt; but as they were piled up 3 or 4 deep in the nest they could never have been hatched. As arule, however, the flock breaks up into pairs, and then a neat, well-made nest is built in the fork of a branch, lined with horsehair; or, oftener still, a Leratero’s nest is seized, the Bay-wings fighting with great spirit to get possession, and in it, or on it, their own nest is made, Like their relations, the common Cowbird, they seem strongly attracted by domed nests, and yet shrink from laying in the dark interior. Asa rule, when they have captured a Lenatero’s nest they break a hole in the side and so admit the light and form an easy entrance One sum- mer a pair of Bay-wings attacked a Lenatero’s nest on one of my trees, the fighting was kept up for three or four days, and then at the toot of the tree I found 5 young Lenateros, fully fledged, which had been pecked to death and thrown out of the nest. The eges of the Bay-wing are 5 in number, nearly round, and densely marked with dusky reddish brown. Once I observed 2 young Bay-wings following a Yellow-breast, Pseudoleistes virescens, with their usual peculiar hungry ery, and while I watched them they were fed several times by their foster parents Naturally I concluded that the Bay-winged Cowbird is sometimes para sitical on other species, but I never saw anything afterward fo comfirm me in that belief, and I believe now that I was mistaken, and that the young Bay-wings were not real Bay-wings, but the young of Moluthrus rufoaxrillaris. or PRIMITIVE AMERICAN ARMOR. BY WALTER HOUGH, PH. D. Department of Ethnology, U. S. National Museum. H. Mis. 184, pt. 240 625 PRIMITIVE AMERICAN ARMOR. By WALTER HouGu, Ph. D., Department of Ethnology, U. S. National Museum. “Cornelius Tacitus doth pleasantly quip and jest at the men of war of our ancient Gaules, so armed, only to maintaine themselves, as they that have no means either to be offended or to raise them- selves being overthrowne.”’ MonrTaigne, Of The Parthian Armes. In the U.S. National Museum there are many examples of primitive American armor. These defensive weapons may be classed as parrying armor, or the shield, and body armor, for the defense of the head, trunk, legs, and arms. The subject will be treated under form, mate- rial, structure, decoration, function, mythology, and distribution. T, SHIELD. The shield is the first defensive weapon both in point of time and of usefulness. While the shield on first thought may seem merely intended as a covering for the vulnerable points of the body, its impor- tance is far greater in parrying. Therefore, with this idea in view, the Shield may be as.simple as the plain parrying stick of the Australians, which begins the classic series of Lane Fox. If one bears in mind that defensive weapons are the concomitants of oftensive weapons, the development of the shield becomes clear. ‘Thus, where missile weapons are used, the parrying stick is a natural and adequate defense. Where missiles are given greater velocity with the throwing strap, the throwing stick, or the bow, the shield must cover the body better. It would seem that the broad shield is the counter- growth of the bow. The circular shield characterizes the Western Hemisphere. The North American shield is convex and from 12 to 26 inches in diameter. The Mexiean area is perhaps an exception, though the Codices almost invariably depict the round shield, and the surviving Mexican shields, on which Mrs. Zelia Nuttall is authority, are circular.* The Nahua shield was *‘ sometimes rounded and sometimes oval, sometimes rounded on the lower side.” Some shields were of an ordinary size; others were intended to cover the entire body and were constructed so that when not in use they could be folded up and earried under the arm.t Lafitau conveys the idea that the Iroquois had shields of different shapes. As to material, nearly all American shields are made of thick raw- hide, that of the buffalo and elk being most available. Shields worked “Nuttall, Zelia, on Ancient Mexican Shields. Internat. Archiv. fur Ethnologie, Leiden, Vol. v, pt. 1, 1892, pp. 34-53. t Bancroft, H. H., Native Races of the Pacific, Vol. 11, p. 407. { Lafitau, Moeurs des Sauvages Amériquains, Vol. 11, p. 197, Paris, 1724. 27 628 REPORT OF NATIONAL MUSEUM, 1893. out from a single piece of wood, like those of the Dyaks are found on the Rio Maration in South America (fig. 1).* The Virginia Indians used “ targets made of barcks.”+ The Nava- joes made a shield of cedar rods twined together with cord (Cat. No. 8401, U.S.N.M.), which may be connected with the rod armor of the Athapascans and the similar cane shields of the Nahuas of Mexico. Among the Ceris and Chicoratos of New Mexico, “Another kind of shield was made of small laths closely interwoven with cords, in such a manner that, when not required for use, it could be shut up like a fan, and was carried under the arm.” { ‘‘In Tobasco and along the coast, tortoise shells inlaid with gold, Fig. 1. WOODEN SHIELD. Cat. No. 75881 U.S. N. M, Peru. Gift of the Trocadero Museum, Paris. silver, or copper were commonly used as shields,” § as the Malay spec- imen from Singapore. Reeds, grass, hides, or *nequen-cloth coated with India rubber served to protect an Aztec The Pue- blo tribes “carried round shields of basketry, of heavily and closely netted cotton, or of thick rawhide, symbolically painted, ua *Wooden shield.—Flat. disk of light wood, thicker in. the center, forming : a step. Two bent wood handles wrapped with bark are sprung into holes in the rear of the shield. Decorated with dias bean ae in red and yellow, resembling tents. Diam- eter, 33 inches. (Cat. No. 75881, U.S. N. M. Indians of the Upper Amazon (Rio Maranon) Peru. Gift of es Troe sae Museum, Paris). t Hariot, Thomas, Virginia, p. 24. } Bancroft, op. cit., Vol. 1, p. 579. § Bancroft, H. H., op. cit., Vol. 11, p. 407. || Baneroft, loc. cit. qCushing, F. H., article ‘“‘ Pueblos,” in Johnson’s Cyclopedia, from advanced sheets in new edition, now in press. PRIMITIVE AMERICAN ARMOR. 629 The construction of the North American shield is given in detail by George Catlin. The ingenious process of contracting and hardening the hide by fire was common. Sioux shield made of the skin of the buffalo’s neck, hardened with glue extracted from the hoofs and joints of the same animal. The pro- cess of ‘smoking the shield” is a very curious as well as important one, in their estimation. For this purpose a young man about to con- struct for him a shield digs a hole of 2 feet in depth in the ground, and as large in diameter as he designs to make his shield. In this he builds a fire, and over it, a few inches higher than the ground, be stretches the rawhide horizontally over the fire, with little pegs driven through holes made near the edges of the skin. The skin is at first twice as large as the size of the required shield; but having got his particular and best friends (who are invited on this occasion) into a ring to dance and sing about it and solicit the Great Spirit to instill into it the power to protect him harmless against his enemies, he spreads over it the glue which is rubbed and dried in, as the skin is heated; and a second busily drives other and other pegs, inside of those in the ground, as they are gradually giving away and being pulled up by the contrac- tion of the skin. By this curious process, which is most dexterously done, the skin is kept tight whilst it contracts to one-half of its size, taking up the glue and increasing in thickness until it is rendered as thick and hard as required (and his friends have pleaded long enough to make it arrow, and almost ball, proof), when the dance ceases and the fire is put out. When it is cooled and cut into the shape that he desires, it is often painted with his medicine or totem upon it, the ae figure of an eagle, an owl, a buffalo, eee or other animal, as the case may be, which he trusts will guard and pro- tect him from harm. It is then fringed with eagles’ quills or other ornaments he ARAPAHOE SHIELD. Cat. No. 129871, U.S. N. M. Dakota. Collected by H. M. Creel. 630 REPORT OF NATIONAL MUSEUM, 1893. may have chosen and slung with a broad leather strap that crosses his breast. These shields are carried by all the warriors in these regions, for their protection in battles, which are almost invariably fought from their horses’ backs.* The shield was invariably held on the left arm,t usually by a simple thong of buckskin attached to the interior. Wooden handles, believed to have belonged to Pima Indian shields, were found in a cave with war clubs on Superstition Mountain in Arizona, by Dr. E. Palmer. (Cat. No. 76028, U.S. N. M.) It is the custom of most tribes to put one or more covers of dressed buckskin over the shield, the covers being decorated.{ (See. pl.1 and fig. 2.) The decoration of the North American shield forms one of the most fruitful sources for the religious beliefs and practices of the Indians.§ The decoration was inspired by a revelation through a dream, follow- ing among the Crows the terrible initiation ceremony and among all tribes following an ordeal. The protection of the shield has largely become fetichistic and in many cases the survival of this ancient means of defense has been brought about by its cult relations. The warrior fraternities of the Moki and Zuni tribes have an elabo- rate ceremonial of the shield.|| In the Moki ceremony, held at the * Catlin, George, North American Indians, 7th ed. Lond., 1848. Vol. 1, p. 241. t See the paper by Mr. Cushing on Manual Concepts., American Anthropologist, v, 1892, p. 290. { DESCRIPTION OF FIGURE 2 AND PLATE I. Fig. 2, shield.—Made of rawhide with cover of muslin symbolically painted in green, yellow, red, and black. The background above is yellow and below green. The figures are on the yellow portion and represents two dragon flies, the san and moon, an owl, and a circle in red outlined with green. Two eagle claws are fastened at opposite sides. A bunch of eagle feathers is fastened at the upper edge, and from it depends a flannel band with rowsof large eagle feathers having horsehair cemented to theirends. The thongs for holding have disappeared; there remains a thong for suspension. Diameter 18 inches (Cat. No. 129871, U.S.N.M. Arapahoe Indians, Dakota. Collected by H. M. Creel.) . Plate I, shield with 2 covers.—The shield proper is of hardened buffalo hide of con- vex form, plain in front with four perforations through which the thong forming the handle is passed, (lower figure). Tothe triangular handle are attached long cow tails, (figure to right). The inner cover is of buckskin, gaudily decorated, and edged with a band of flannel bordered with eagle feathers and having a woven band hang- ing down, (figure to left; back view of same, upper figure to the right). The outer cover, which is to protect the inner cover and the feathers are also painted and whitened with pipeclay. Four charms are attached to it, viz, a curl of cow’s tail, an eagle feather, and two tufts of shredded cloth with a bit of brass chain. The covers are gashed around the edge and supplied with a gathering string for securing the cover tightly over the shield. The complete shield is shown in the upper figure to the left. A third painted cover for this shield has been discovered. Diameter of shield proper, 15Linches; of shield with covers, 174 inches. (Cat. No. 8443, U.S. N. M. Comanche Indians, Fort Griffin, Texas. Collected by Dr. H. McElderry, U.S. A.) § Mr. James Mooney is preparing a paper upon this branch of the subject. Mrs. Nuttall has treated on this aspect of the Mexican shield; loc. cit., ante, p. 1. || See Zuni Fetiches, Cushing, 2d An. Rept. Bu. Ethnol., Pls. x, x1, p. 40. PLATE 1. > Report of National Museum, 1893.—Hough. RAWHIDE SHIELD WITH COVERS. Cat. No. 8443, U. S. N. M. PRIMITIVE AMERICAN ARMOR. 631 winter solstice by the warrior societies, the sun is represented by a shield, and attack and defense is graphically dramatized. The shields of the sun warrior fraternities are decorated with the totems of the individual societies. A description of this ceremony will soon be pub- lished by Dr. J. Walter Fewkes. The various feathers, hoofs and horns, and skins of animals, etc., hung to shields, are also personal fetiches. The distribution of the shield shows that most of the American tribes possessed the shield, and a majority appear to have had no other weapon of defense. There is strong presumption, however, that the use of body and shield armor was widespread in America, as historical notices show. Charlevoix, writing of the Iroquois, observes that while the western tribes use bucklers of buffalo hide, ‘‘it is pretty surprising that other Indian nations never use them.”* Lafitau and the earlier mission- aries, however, credit the Iroquoian people with the shield in the following words: Their shields were of ozier or bark covered with one or many peaux passées; there are some made of very thick skin. They had them of all sizes and all sorts of figures.t Some South American tribes who use body armor are said to be unacquainted with the shield. Likewise the Eskimo seem to be desti- tute of this weapon. There are probably fifty American shields in the National Museum, some collected as early as 1830. Several have been handed down from father to son for a period of sixty-five years. These shields are from the tribes of the western portion of the con- tinent and include the Crows, Sioux, Comanches, Kiowas, Navajoes, Utes, Apaches, Pimas, Zunis, Mokis, ete. II. Bopy ARMOR. The aboriginal armor of North America was intended to protect the vital organs and to allow free movement of the limbs. The form assumes that of a sleeveless jacket, coat, or wide band going around the trunk, suspended from the shoulders. The selection of defensive materials and their adaptation to defensive covering for the body form an interesting study in native invention, while the evidence in North America of the migration of inventions-awakens no less interest. Thus we find that at the period of the disuse of armor by the aborig- ines there were six types of body armor found on the North Amer- ican Continent and contiguous regions, viz: Plate armor.—Rows of overlapping plates, perforated and lashed. Eskimo and Chukchis. *Charlevoix, F. X. de, Journal of a Voyage to North America. Vol. I, p. 338. Lond., 1761. t Latitau, loc. cit., 11, p. 197. 632 REPORT OF NATIONAL MUSEUM, 1893. Slat armor.—Wooden slats twined together. Sitkans, Shastas, Iroquois, Virginia Indians. Rod armor.—W ooden rods twined together. Aleuts, Sitkans, Colum bia River tribes, Klamaths, Hupas, Iroquois, Virginia Indians, ete. Band armor.—Bands of skin arranged in telescoping fashion. Chukehis. Skin armor.—Coats of hardened hide. Tlingits, Haidas, Hupas, Chinooks, Navajoes, Mohawks, Shoshones, Pawnees, Comanches, ete. Cotton-padded armor.—Mexicans, Isthmians, and Peruvians. Three well-defined areas, including the above-mentioned types of North American body armor, will be now considered, viz: (1) Bering Strait area, the American shore of Bering Sea, and the islands as far north as Cape Prince of Wales, inhabited by the Eskimo, and the Asiatic side, inhabited by the Coast Chukchis. (Plate armor.) (2) Western area, extending from Sitka through northern California and the central basin to Mexico. (Slat, rod, and skin armor.) (3) Eastern area, extending from southeastern Canada to Virginia, inhabited by Algonkian and Iroquoian tribes. (Slat, or rod, and skin armor.) The first two areas are known by actual specimens, while the third area is historical. In the interior of the continent, according to his- torical notices, several stocks used armor. There is, therefore, suffi- cient testimony to show that if not universal the use of armor was at least general among the North American tribes. 1. BERING STRAIT AREA. The National Museum possesses a number’ of examples of Eskimo- Chukchis plate armor from Cape Prince of Wales, Diomede Island, St. Lawrence Island, Alaska, and Cape Wankarem, Siberia. The most perfect specimens are from Cape Prince of Wales and Dio- mede Island. (See pls. 2 and 3.) * * DESCRIPTION OF PLATE 2. Fig. 1, plate armor.—Made of three rows of walrus-ivory plates, averaging 1 inch in width and 6 inches in length. Each plate contains 6 holes, through which pass rawhide thongs, thus lashing the plates together. These plates are slightly imbri- cated, as are also the different rows, so as to ward off more effectually the weapons of theenemy. The lower row contains 43 plates, and the middle 38. The upper row consists of two sections; one containing 10 plates, protecting the breast, the other 8 plates, protecting the upper part of the back. A rawhide strap passes over the shoulders and supports the armor. This armor very closely resembles that of Japan. Length when spread out, 44 inches. (Cat. No. 153491, U.S.N.M. Eskimo of Cape Prince of Wales, Alaska. Collected by H. R. Thornton). Fig. 2, plate armor.—Fragment consisting of 9 iron plates similar to those on Japanese armor, and bound with three lashings of rawhide. This speciman was Report of National Museum, 1893 Ses s crepe — _ PLATE 2. a a ® > mene a tes 2. Iron armor plates Fig. 1. Eskimo ivory plate armor Cat. No. 15 Fig. Ss. N. M U Cat. No. 153492, Ss. N. M. 13491, U. Eskimo PLATE ARMOR. Da Se ee NS ge ee ee eee PRIMITIVE AMERICAN ARMOR. 633 This type of armor consists of small, flat, oblong plates of ivory or bone pierced near the edges with from 4 to 6 or more holes. They are lashed in series with rawhide thongs passing through the holes, form- ing what is known as the ‘clove hitch.” The longer edges of the plates are chamfered to admit of overlapping and curving the armor around the body; it could thus be rolled up in small compass when not in use. The coat would be formed of from 3 to 5 imbricating rows of plates so constructed, having offsets under the armpits and straps for the shoulders. Sometimes a yoke of skin fitting the neck and shoulders formed a support for the rows of plates, as in specimens from St. Law- rence Island. The coat is fastened at the back, being tied with thongs or having a toggle and loop. Iron armor plates were dug up in a marsh at Cape Prince of Wales (see pl. 3), and plates of iron and copper were found on St. Lawrence Island. There is an interesting statement from Lisiansky, who wrote his voy- ages in 1805, that the Tlingits,on the introduction of iron and firearms, adopted a new form of protection, consisting of a buckskin strip around the neck with iron plates attached pendant down the breast. Nordenskkjéld figures a suit of armor like that of the Eskimo from the Chukchis.* In the Museum there are 4 plates of fossil ivory from the Chukechis of Cape Wankarem. The hoop or band armor mentioned as type 4 (pl. 4, fig. 2) is found only on the Siberian side of this area and, as well as the plate armor, recalls well-known forms in Japan. This hoop armor is interesting as showing the reproduction of plate armor types in skin, being made of horizontal bands ef sealskin instead of rows of ivory plates, the rings telescoping together when the armor is not in use. This type may be compared with the banded mail of the Middle Ages, about which there dug up in a bog near where the ivory armor on this plate was found. Length of each plate, 42 inches; width, 1} inches. (Cat. No. 153492, U.S.N.M. Eskimo of Cape Prince of Wales, Alaska. Collected by H. R. Thornton). DESCRIPTION OF PLATE 3. Plate armor.—Made of five imbricating rows of plates of walrus ivory of unequal size in the different rows, pierced with from 6 to 13 holes, lashed with sealskin thongs. The vertical edges of the plates are chamfered. The upper row has 40,3 by 1} inches; second row, 49 plates, 5 by 1 inch; third row, 28 plates, 3i by 13 inches; fourth row, 31 plates, 6 by 14 inches; fifth row, 16 plates, 6 by 1} inches. Two pointed plates cut from a tusk are lashed to one side, forming a clasp. This armor was wrapped around the body after the manner of a cuirass and is said to have been an efficacious protection against arrows. In the form, lashing, and adjustment of the plates it is identical with certain types of Japanese armor. Width extended, 49 inches; height, 24 inches. (Cat. No. 64290, U.S.N.M. Eskimo of Diomede Island, Alaska. Collected by E. W. Nelson). * Nordenskjéld, A. E., Voyage of the Vega, 1, p. 478. 634 REPORT OF NATIONAL MUSEUM, 1893. has been much discussion.* The upper portion of this war panoply (pl. 4,t fig. 1) is unique. It serves as a Shield and resembles the neck fender of the Kingsmill Island armor; designed, without doubt, to protect the warrior from attack in the rear, a common occurrence in all savage warfare. The whole armor is very heavy and clumsy. The method of wearing the suit is shown in plate 5.4 Captain Hooper says: Their war spears and those used in hunting bears are made of steel, with a handle about 6 feetlong. The blade is kept very sharp and highly polished. These weapons are often beautifully inlaid with brass ornamented figures, and are purchased from the Russian traders at Gazhaga.$ The Chukechis of Plover Bay formerly wore a cuirass made of long strips of baleen, reaching from the neck to the middle of the thigh. The thickest baleen was not selected for making the armor. The strips were: arranged vertically, en echelon, and tied through perfora- tions on the edges. Over the joints were applied other strips of whalebone, as in a thatch fastened by thongs, passing through perfora- tions at their edges and in the middle of the foundation strips. Owing to the material and construction this armor was somewhat elastic. When spread out it was in shape of a band with cuts below the armpits and having suspending straps going over the shoulders, resem- bling the Hupa armor. (See pl. 15.) The coat was tied at the back with cords, requiring the assistance of another person. The Chukehis told my informant, Capt. E. P. Herendeen, that this * Hewitt, John, Ancient armor, p. 270; also hoop armor, id. p. 256. t DESCRIPTION OF PLATE 4. Fig. 1, armor.—Upper portion of 2437. Made of sea-lion skin stretched over plates of wood. Back, shield shaped, formed of 2 vertical pieces of three-eighth inch board lashed together with whalebone and covered with hide, which extends continuously over the wings, being a very large skin turned over and sewed on the upper edge. The wings consist of 4 wooden plates on one side and 5 on the other, growing shorter toward the front and terminating on the left side in a section without wooden lining. The plates are movable, the hide being creased at the joints and in the crease is laid a rounded thong which is held at intervals by loops of whale- bone passing through the edges of the plates. On the back are two whalebone tog- gles for attachment to the lower portion. A more clumsy contrivance than this fen- der can scarcely be imagined. Width, 72 inches; height, 28 inches. (Cat. No. 2436, U.S.N.M. Chukchis, Eastern Siberia. Collected by Commodore John Rogers, U.S. N. Fig. 2, hoop armor.—Made of seven bands of sea-lion skin, 54 inches wide, doubled and whipped together at the edges. These bands are connected by heavy thongs and hangin an enlarging series, like an inverted telescope drinking cup, from a frame of whalebone covered with hide. The free ends of the bands overlap in front. A square breastplate of doubled hide protects the neck. This armor is the lower portionof No. 2436, Diameter, 36inches; height, 20inches. (Cat, No. 2437, U.S.N.M. Chukchis, Eastern Siberia. Collected by Commodore John Rogers, U.S. N. {DESCRIPTION OF PLATE 5D. Chukchis warrior and family.—From an aquarelle made by W. Alexander in 1797, showing, after the interpretation of the artist, the method of wearing the armor figured in pl. 4. § Cruise of the Corwin, 1881, Washington, 1884, p.31. Report of National Museum, 1893.—Hough. PLATE 3. ors te m oer *PMOTOLENG: COK-Y ESKIMO PLATE ARMOR. Fig. 1. Front view F 2. Back view. Report of National Museum, 1893.—Hough PLATE 4. CHUKCHIS Hoop Armor. Fig. 1. Upper portion. Cat. No. 2436, U. S. i Lower portion. Cat. No. 2437, U.S. ZA sts I p00 [pan sedges Ble “oe PLATE 5. Report of National Museum, 1893.—Hough. “ane me < NA WR EES a A art ai Pd | ee 4 if PLOVER Bay. HIS WEARING Hoop ARMOR. CHUKC ‘ ¥ } 7 * Te { PRIMITIVE AMERICAN ARMOR. 635 armor was used in going over to trade with the hostile Eskimo of St. Lawrence Island, which was dangerous and compelled sleepless caution. Capt. Herendeen also saw the band armor (pl. 4) among the Chukchis. Ivory was not observed by Capt. Herendeen, as that material is very searce on the Asiatic side; but, no doubt, the materials for plate armor were procured by barter with Eskimo. In any event, fossil ivory plate armor was made by the Chukchis. Driftwood is also very rare on the Siberian coast, while on the islands and American shore it is abundant, The quest for this indispensable material must have been a strong incentive for the Asiatic migrants to cross the straits. As far as known the Chuk- chis did not use either hel- mets or shields. Of interest in comparison with the Eskimo-Chukchis armor is that used by the Giliaks of Siberia. This is composed of plates of iron lashed together (fig. 3).* They also wear an ingeniously constructed conical helmet with a neck cover. The Giliak coat of plaited thongs, figured in the same work, does not occur in America, but has its counterpart in the cocoanut-fiber armor of the Polynesians and the plaited armor of the Malays. The Kamtschadales have bews, arrows, spears, and a coat of mail made of mats or plaited thongs.t The Kalmucks have coats of mail bought from their neighbors.f They use lances. Descending the coast toward Japan. which seems to be the origin of the plate armor ranging from that country into the American continent, we notice that the Colletske make use of a leather coat covered with plates of iron about 6 inches long and a pot-shaped helmet of smaller plates having neck covers. Fig. 3. GILIAK HELMET AND BODY ARMOR. SIBERIA. After Schrenck. *Schrenck, L. V., Reisen und Forschungen im Amur-Lande, 1854-56. St. Peters- burg, 1891. Pl. xLiv. Description of fig. 3.--Helmet and detail of armor of the Giliaks of the Amoor, Siberia. In the perforations and arrangement this armor resembles the armor of the Eskimo. Drawing from Reisen und Forschungen im Amur-Lande, 1854~56, by Dr. Leopold V. Schrenck. St. Petersburg, 1891. t Grieve, Hist. of Kamtschatka, Gloucester, 1764, p. 202 t Pallas, 1, p. 143. 636 REPORT OF NATIONAL MUSEUM, 1893. 2. WESTERN AREA. In the western area the slat type of wooden armor seems to be cen- tral among the Koluschans in the north, while the rod typeruns south- ward and is central among the Tinné of British Columbia. The slat armor has some resemblances to the Eskimo coat, and might be regarded as the working out of the plate-armor idea in a region where wood is abundant and twined weaving common. The slat coat or coat of slats and rods combined is always made in two sections, one for the front and the other for the back, while the rod coat is in a single piece. Plate 6* shows the front and back of the slat coat, and Plates 7 and 8* show the combined rod and slat armor. These specimens are very old. The woodwork shows great skill, especially the inter- locking joinery at the edges. The hardest wood procurable was selected, and usually sinew cord was employed to join the slats. Plate 9,* taken from Niblack after Lisiansky, shows the parts and method of wearing the slat armor. * DESCRIPTIONS OF PLATES 6-9. Plate 6, slat armor.—Made of 32 slats of cedar and other wood woven together by fine weaving of fine sinew and other cord. A band of weaving of 3 inches width is carried along the front at the top and the weaving is continued. downward in two places, meeting a band crossing the bottom and forming a geometrical figure. The middle series of slats, 8 in number, extends below the other 4 inches, 3 of which are intact, while 2 on either side are united, forming a swallowtail and allowing the free bending of the thighs. The front and back are distinct, joined by elk-skin cords at the sides. A section of short slats, 8 in number, is placed in front of the throat, and a similar row,7 in number, protects the back of the neck. The armor is held in place by a broad band of elk skin over the right shoulder, and fastened on the left side by a loop and thong. A toggle on the left side of the collar in front was probably for suspension of the quiver. Height, 214 inches; width, 20 inches. (Cat. No. 9243, U.S.N.M. Tlingit Indians, Sitka, Alaska. Collected by Dr. A. H. Hoff, U.S. A.) Plates 7 and 8, slat armor (back and front).—Made of slats and rods of hard wood 1} to 14 inches wide, five-sixteenths inch thick, woven together by means of fine sinew cord so as to admit of considerable flexibility. ‘The rods and slats are pared down to form channels for the reception of the cord weaving. The front and back portions are woven separately, being connected by cords of leather on the left side and on the right side by a loop and toggle. The rods on the border of the rear of armor are neatly “toed in.” The neck portions are made up of short slats and sewed on by means of a strip of rawhide 14 inches wide. The shoulder supports are of very thick elk hide, the one on the right being fastened by a slash and togele. Width of rear portion, 24 inches; height, 20 inches; width of front portion, 18 inches; height, 19 inches. (Cat. No. 74437, U. S. N. M. Tlingit Indians, Sitka, Alaska. Collected by J. J. McLean.) Plate 9.—Wooden helmet secured to the head by straps fastened under the chin (figure in upper left corner); wooden mask or visor, side view, showing holes for eyes (middle figure); body armor (lower left-hand figure); mask or visor, show- ing buckle, which is held in the teeth to keep the visor in place (Cat. No. 74343, J.S.N.M.), Tlingit, (lower right-hand figure); sketch showing the method of wearing the armor; (upper right-hand corner). PLATE 6. Report of National Museum, 1893 —Hough. TLINGIT SLAT ARMor. Cat. No. 9243, U. S. N. M. Fig. 1. Front view. Fig. 2. Back view. Report of National Museum, 1893.—Hough PLATE 7. TLINGIT SLAT AND ROD ARMOR. Cat; No: 74437, U.S. N. M: Front view. oe ey PLATE 8. Report of National Museum, 1893.—Hougn TLINGIT SLAT AND ROD ARMOR fy Woitss IN we 3 Cat. No. Back view. Report of National Museum, 1893. —Hough PLATE 9. TLINGIT HELMETS AND SLAT ARMOR. PRIMITIVE AMERICAN ARMOR. 637 As representative of the northwestern coast culture the Tlingits and Haidas are most prominent. Captain Cook noticed that— They incase almost the entire body in a wooden or leathern armors They make a breast plate of wood and an arrow-proof coat of thin flexible strips bound with strings like a woman’s stays. They wear helmets with curiously carved visors. * A kind of jacket, or coat of mail, made of thin laths bound together with sinews which makes it quite flexible, though so close as not to admit an arrow or dart.t It seems, therefore, necessary to treat the Northwest Coast as one cul- ture area, where the arts of the ethnic units can scarcely be ditteren- tiated. A close study as marked out by Niblack and shown in the eare- ful collections of Lieut. G. T. Emmons, U.S. Navy, may disentangle the borrowings of the stocks of this area. There are 4 suits of this type in the Museo Arqueologico in Madrid. ‘They were collected by the Malespina Expedition of 1791. The exact locality is not stated and an account of Malespina’s exploration was not published, as far as I can learn. If one may judge by the Spanish names which have remained on the map, suchas Malespina Island, Cape Muzon, Cordova Bay, and others, the Malespina Expedition explored the north side of Dixon Entrance and came in contact with the Haidas as wellas the Tlingits. Although there is some probability of these armors being Haidan, I incline to believe them to be Tlingit. During the course of this study, one piece of armor of unknown function in the National collection was found to be a greave, or armor for the lower leg (pl. 10).¢ This unique piece discloses the hitherto unnoticed fact that the Northwest Coast warriors were more completely armed than had been imagined. This greave leads to the inference that a similar protection was extended to the upper legs and the arms. With heavy wooden helmet, the slat coat and armor for the limbs, we have a picture of an Alaskan warrior armed cap-a-pie. In no way was this armor inferior to that employed in ancient or feudal times or at a late period among the Japanese. The resemblance of the specimen in question to the Japanese greave is striking. It is made up of 12 slightly tapering hard wood slats and 8 rods woven together with sinew cord. The portion not covered with weaving bears a totemic painting. When curved around the leg, * Bancroft, op. cit. 1, p. 105. +t Cook, Capt. James, Third Voyage, Vol. 11, p. 372. { Description of Plate 10.—Greave made up of 12 slightly tapering hard wood slate and 8 rods woven together with twisted sinew cord. The weaving is diversified in the central portion by carrying the threads in pairs alternately over therods. The portion not covered with weaving bears a totemic painting. When the greave is curved around the calf of the leg, the hollowed. out portions, which are also beveled, accommodate the instep and knee joint. Tied at the front with thongs. The holes along the upper edge are probably for attaching the greave to the armor for the upper leg. Length, 15 inches; width of upper edge, 174 inches; width of lower edge, 16} inches. (Cat. No. 74438, U.S.N.M. Tlingit Indians, Alaska. Collected by J.J. McLean. 638 REPORT OF NATIONAL MUSEUM, 1893. the hollowed-out portions accommodate the instep and knee joint. It was secured by thongs and probably with a band or garter. The holes along the upper edge are probably for attaching the greave to the cuissard. Charlevoix, in speaking of the Iroquois, says: They had even formerly a kind of mail for the arms and thighs made of the same material,* i. ¢., small pliable sticks pretty well wrought.t The resemblance between the culture of the west and east coasts of North America is striking in other instances. Many of the figures in the Mexican codices and sculptures wear a covering around the calf of the leg, which may be the greave. In the sculptures from Yucatan this greave or legging seems to be of horizontal bands and square plates. The rod type of armor of the western area is well represented by specimens in the National Museum. All the examples extant range from Sitka to northern California in a region comparatively lately explored. The rod and slat types are mixed; in the method of twining together the elements they are identical. In some localities the broad band of rods is alone found, while among the Tlingits, or around Sitka, occur rod armor, slat armor, and a combination of both types in the same piece, as well as skin armor. In form the Aleut armor,instead of following the Eskimo type, belongs with the rod type of the Indians. The perforation of the rods, however, and the method of lashing, show Eskimo handiwork. D’Orbigny says: “Les armes défensives consistaient en une cotte de jones tressés qui leur couvrait tout le corps.” t Dr. W. H. Dall, during his exploration of the caves of the Aleutian Islands, found the armor figured in pls. 11 and 12. ‘ Under the * Charlevoix, F. X. de, Vol.1, p. 338, Lond., 1761. tId., Letters to the Duchess of Lesdiguiéres, p. 143, Lond., 1763. {D’Orbigny, Voyages, p. 579. § DESCRIPTION OF PLATES 11 AND 12. Plate 11, red armor.—Made up of two series of cedar rods, one-half inch in diame- ter and different lengths, painted red. The lower series containing 68 rods; the upper series, two side sections of 10 rods and a curved piece each, and a central sec- tion containing 22 rods with curved side pieces. The rods are perforated through either end and held in series by a sewing of finely plaited sinew cord, the cord being brought through the hole in the first rod, leaving two long ends. These are brought past each other from opposite sides through the hole in the next rod, and so forth. The sections are joined by a rickrack lashing, engaging with the horizontal sewing. The rods are perforated from side to side and a thin rod of whalebone drawn through, rendering the armor flexible. At the lower and upper edges of the armor the ends of the rods are chamfered. There are two wooden toggles on the right side. Plate 12, rod armor.—Same coat as shown in pl. 11, doubled together, showing the position upon the body in wearing the armor. This view shows also a portion of the inner side and the projecting ends of the whalebone binding strip which has been broken. Width, 40 inches; height, 25 inches. (Cat. No. 17249, U.S.N.M. From a burial cave in the Island of Amaknak. Collected by E. Hennig.) PLaTte 10. Report of National Museum, 1893.—Hougn. ‘WN ‘S ‘0 '88hhs ON “98D "SAVEYD LV1S LISNITL PLATE 11. 1893 —Hough. Report of National Museum, PREHISTORIC ALEUTIAN ROD ARMOR. U.S. N. M. ’ 7249 No. 1 Cat. Report of National Museum ee fate 1893.—Hough. PLATE 12. PREHISTORIC ALEUTIAN ROD ARMoR, No. 17249, U. S. N. M. Sate ( Figured in Plate 11 so as to show position on the body. many. « gee ee ee le PRIMITIVE AMERICAN ARMOR. 639 net was inserted a piece of wooden body armor (17249) composed of small, round rods of proper size, united by sinew cords and with nicely carved wooden pieces about the armholes. This is the only piece of this aboriginal armor known to be inexistence. It was fastened behind with two loops of sinew, into which wooden buttons wereinserted. The small rods of which it is composed were about three-fourths of an inch in diameter, painted red. “The armor, slight as it was,must have been a tolerably good pro- tection against the bone and stone arrowheads of the natives.” * In the northern portion of this area, except in the Aleutian Islands, aeannon. is — apd — in| Fig. 4. SHOWING DETAIL OF WEAVING ROD AND SLAT ARMOR OF THE NORTHWEST COAST. the rod armor is an oblong band composed of peeled rods of uniform length and diameter held in series by bands of weaving (pl. 13).t Lieut. Niblack says, in describing this armor, that— The threads are sometimes single and sometimes in pairs, and are made to pass over and under the rods in pairs, but in such manner that the overlappings alter- nate from one row to the next. This is shown in detail in fig. 4, where la and *Dall, W. H., Remains of Later Prehistoric Man in the Caves of the Aleutian Islands, p. 18, Smithsonian Contrib. to Knowledge, No. 318. + DESCRIPTION OF PLATE 13. Rod armor.—Composed of 72 peeled rods of uniform length and diameter, held in vertical series by alternate bands of weaving of woolen and sinew cord. The rods are bunched in the middle of the band. The ends of the rods are neatly hollowed out, forming cup cavities, and there are 4 equidistant vertical bands of red paint. This band was probably worn with a skin coat, both specimens haying been secured from the same native. ‘There appears to be no device to prevent the rod band slip- ping down. Width, 30 inches; height, 23} inches. (Cat. No. 168158, U.S.N.M. Taku Indians, southeastern Alaska. Collected by Herbert G. Ogden.) 640 REPORT OF NATIONAL MUSEUM, 1893. 1) represent the part of one cord, and 2a and 2b represent those of another. The view represents the upper left-hand corner of the weaving and two upper threads, showing 7 rods in both plan and section. As stated, this method of running the cords or twine is varied by occasionally running them in pairs. * Bands of rods of this character are intended to be worn under or over the skin armor, encircling the body below the armpits, and there are no shoulder straps to prevent the armor slipping down over the hips. To the southward the rod band assumes a more effective form. Itis cut out for the arms and has shoulder straps. Just where this form begins it is not possible to say with exactness, probably with the Tinné. The specimens are from the Shastas, Hupas, and Klamaths of Oregon and California (pls. 14 and 15).t The following references may be of interest: Western Tinné: “While on the warpath they also wore a kind of armor or cuirass consisting of dried sticks of the same kind of wood, Amelanchier alnifolia, arranged in parallel order and Kept together with babiche lines interlaced in several places.{ The Chinooks wear “a kind of vest, made of small round sticks of the size and shape of arrows 12 inches long; they are laid side by side, and then sewed together and fixed on the body like a waistcoat.”§ * The Indians of the Northwest Coast, Niblack, A. P. Report of Smithsonian Inst., Part 1, 1888, p. 269. t DESCRIPTION OF PLATES 14 AND 15. Plate 14, rod armor.—Made of 74 strips of wood formed by splitting branches, woven with native cord of wild hemp. The checkered portion in black is woven with cord made of human hair. Short rods are worked in below the armpits. All the rods are split at either end, the finishing cords drawn into the split to secure the weaving. In addition the armor is bound on the upper and lower edges with skin sewed with sinew. Theshoulder straps are of otter (?) fur. The surface of the armor shows 4 horizontal bands of red paint. Width, 38 inches; height, 30 inches. (Cat. No. 2928, U.S. N. M. Shasta Indians. northern California and Oregon. Col- lected by Lieut. G. T. Emmons, U. 8. N.) Plate 15, fig. 1, rod armor (Klnig-klicyst-e-cue-it-wul).—Made of 118 peeled rods, woven together with native twine, bound with buckskin on upper and lower edges and armholes. Shoulder straps of leather; 6 horizontal stripes of red cord cross the front of the coat. ‘‘It is tied across the breast from left to right. The red lines denote the number of enemies slain or captives taken; also the rank of the wearer. This class of armor was in common use among the Natanos and Kennucks before the introduction of firearms, but it is now obsolete, nearly. This is the only complete suit that Lieut. Ray conld obtain.” (The Ray Collection, Smithson. Rept., 1886, 1, p. 230.) Width, 41 inches; height, 21 inches. (Cat. No. 126909, U.S.N.M. Huap Indians, California. Collected by Capt. P. H. Ray, U.S. A.) Plate 15, fig. 2, rod armor (Tal-luck).—Modern. Made up of 44 oval rods of pins wood. The cord is of native hemp and cords made from sisal, the latter probably derived from ropes. The weaving is diversified by using cords colored red and yel- low; bound with buckskin painted red; shoulder straps of buckskin; tying straps at the sides. Width, 38 inches; height, 21 inches. (Cat. No. 2094, U.S.N.M. Kla- math Indians, Oregon. Collected by L. S. Dyar.) $Morice, A.G., the Western Dénés. Proc. Canad. Inst., Vol. xxv, 1889, p. 140. § Ross, Alexander, adventures, etc., on the Oregon and Columbia rivers, Lond., 1849, p. 89. “y Report of National Museum, 1893.—Hough. art Seme gue te nome: Coe ey ag PLATE 13. TAKU ROD ARMOR. 8, U. S. N. M. o No. 1681 Cat. Repart of National Museum, 1893 —Hough PLATE 14. WAN il i SHASTA ROD COAT. Cat. No. 2928, U. S. N. M. = aki a PLaTe 15. Report of National Museum, 1893 —Hough. ‘eee payee ROD CoaTs 1. Hupa rod armor. 3), Win {SS 5 Wi 0 2094 No al d Cat. No. 12690 amath rod armor aut. <1 9 + we Fig. Fig. ee —- PRIMITIVE AMERICAN ARMOR. 641 Among the Hupas “ there is another kind of armor made of wattles and twine, woven and bound with buckskin. This is worn in battle to protect the body; it is tied across the breast from left toright. The red lines denote the number of enemies slain or captives taken; also the rank of the wearer. This class of armor was in common use among the Natano and Kenuck Indians before the introduction of firearms, but it is now nearly obsolete.” * The rod coats were put on like a vest and were tied in front. The rear portion, being a little longer, protected the back of the neck. On the western slopes of the Rocky Mountains and on the Great Plains the natural defensive protection of the great land and sea mammals, transferred by man to his own body, becomes, in turn, his efficient armor. The skins of the elk and moose on the northwest coast and the bison in the interior to the south furnish excellent material for defensive clothing. These skins are invariably tanned to render them flexible, and are often coated with glue and sand over certain portions. Father Morice, in his clear description of the process, says: Another sort of armor, indigenous to the Déné nation, was the peoesta (wherein one sits). This had the form of a sleeveless tunie falling to the knees, so that it afforded protection to the whole body save the head—in hard fights the Dénés invari- ably shot kneeling. The armor or cuirass was of moose skin, which, when sewed according to the proper pattern, was soaked in water, then repeatedly rubbed on the sandy shores of a stream or lake and dried with the sand and small pebbles adhering thereto, after which it was thoroughly coated with a species of very tenacious glue, the principal ingredient of which was boiled isinglass, obtained from the sturgeon. Being again, before drying, subjected to a thorough rubbing over sand, it received a new coating of the aforesaid glue. When this process had been repeated three or four times, it formed an armor perfectly invulnerable to arrows over the parts which were thus protected.t The skin coats were always made in one piece folded over, sewed above the shoulders, leaving an orifice for the head and with ahole cut out of the left side for the left arm, the right side of the garment remaining open. The skin was often doubled, but more frequently the coat was reinforced with pieces of thick hide. Sometimes shoulder guards were added. It will be seen that the leather coats from Sitka are short and follow the type of slat armor. This will be noticed in the “swallowtail” for the protection of the pubie region, or which assumes this shape by the cutting away of portions of the skirt over the groins (pls. 16 and 17). Sometimes a slash was made over the thigh and in front of the throat. * Mason, O. T., The Ray Collection, Rep. Smithsonian Institution, 1886, p. 230. t Morice, A. G., The Western Dénés, Proc. Canad. Inst., Vol. xxv (Oct., 1889), p. 140. t DESCRIPTION OF PLATES 16 AND 17. Plate 16, Vig 1, skin armor.—Made of two thicknesses of caribou hide, scarfed rregularly to secure flexibility. Sewed around the border with rawhide. Padded in the truncated portion with heavy pieces of hide. The garment has been patched at the edges eaten away by rats. Formerly worn as an undergarment for protection against daggers, spears, and arrows. Outside was worn a rod band as a further pro- tection. This specimen is very ancient and primitive, worn before the introduction H. Mis, 184, pt. 241 642 REPORT OF NATIONAL MUSEUM, 1893. The shoulder guards were worked out of the hide at the left arm- hole, or added over one or both shoulders. On the front are one or two loops of buckskin, probably for the attachment of the bow and quiver or dagger. On the right side the armor was usually fringed, and in some cases a band of lighter skin was sewed along the same side. This band was: often decorated. To the southward the coat seems to become longer and simpler in outline (pls. 18, 19). * offirearms. Width, 2linches; length, 28 inches. (Cat. No. 130587, U.S.N.M. Tlingit Indians, Alaska. Lent by Max B. Richardson. ) Fig 2, skin armor.—-Made of tanned hide; two thicknesses; sewed along the upper edge. The ‘‘swallowtail” portion is reinforced with two extra thicknesses, making four in all. The coat is very heavy. The sewing is done with sinew. Width, 25 inches; height, 33 inches. (Cat. No. 60239, U.S.N.M. Tlingit Indians, Alaska. Col- lected by J. J. McLean.) Plate 17, skin armor.—Made of one piece of heavy elk skin apparently smoke- tanned, lined inside with another piece sewed around the lower portion. Ample cuts for arm holes. Over the left shoulder is fastened an epauliere, made of a heavy piece of folded hide. For convenience in putting on or off the armor, the band over the right shoulder is buttoned over a wooden toggle. Fastened with thongs on the right side. Two loops in front are probably for the bow. Width, 20} inches; height, 29 inches. (Cat. No. 60240, U.S.N.M. Tlingit Indians, Alaska. Collected by J. J. McLean.) * DESCRIPTION OF PLATES 18 AND 19. Plate 18, Fig. 1, skin armor.—Front view. Made of very heavy hide, with cor- rugated appearance, single thickness. A strip of lighter leather, cut from a painted garment, has been sewed to the left side. A double shoulder protector has been sewed to the left side of the neck opening, and the skin has been cut and enlarged by gussets to protect the right shoulder. A slit cut in the skirt of the coat admits of free movement of the knee. The fringe is wrapped with strips of grass, tied, by thongs, on the left side. Vig. 2, skin armor.—Rear view of armor. Curiously, this armor must have been worn by a left-handed man, as it is put on in the reverse of the other coats described. Width, 30 inches; height, 37}inches. (Cat. No. 130588, U.S.N.M. Alaska. Lent by Max B. Richardson.) Plate 19, Fig. 1, skin armor.—Made of tanned caribou skin folded in the usual way andreinforeced, Fringedontherightside. The coat is longer than those worn to the North. The leather has apparently been stiffened with glue. The feature of this coat is that two very heavy pieces of hide go over the shoulders and form a slit in front of the neck. The buckskin loops in front are for the attachment of the quiver. Width, 32 inches; height, 37 inches. (Cat. No. 46464, U.S.N.M. Chileat Indians, Alaska. Collected by Dr. T. H. Bean.) lig. 2, skin armor.—Made of thick tanned elk or moose skin folded twice into oblong form like a sheet of note paper. Sewed over the shoulders and strengthened inside by hinge pieces. Open along right side the edges cut into coarse fringe. A short slit down left side below the shoulder leaves a passage for the left arm. About midway near the right side is fastened a wooden toggle, by which, probably, was Suspended the dagger. The front of the coat is discolored and dented as though an attempt had been made to render the leather more dense by hammering. The leather has perhaps also been treated with glue, as described by Father Morice among the Tinné. Inside the armor at the back is a finely drawn and painted totem in a circle 104 inches in diameter. Width, 26 inches; height, 36inches. (Cat. No. 168159, U.S.N.M. Taku Indians, Southeastern Alaska. Collected by Herbert G. Ogden.) Report of National Museum, 1893.—Hough. PLATE 16. x . Si a Go PA = Ww ae ~~ = eal sw < Ge = GC Os S Rm G Cat. = ~ a ~ Fig. 1. ( TLINGIT SKIN ARMOR. Report of National Museum 1893. —Hough PLATE 17. ALASKAN SKIN ARMOR WITH SHOULDER GUARDS. Cat. No. 60240, U. S. N. M. PLATE 18. 1893,.—Hough Report of National Museum AIA yorg - GC ‘WN ‘S 1 ‘S80El ON 9¥D ‘YONYY NIMS NYYSVIV H T FI ul ee if ey #7 PLATE 19. Report of National Museum, 182.—Hough. W NS” nN ‘ { va Ja I SOT “0 N °3%)—) SOULIG ULYS NYBIL, “eS “YONHY NIMS AN NS { 1 ‘ POF! on ON “9%; ) “TOUL Iv Uns Woy) I PRIMITIVE AMERICAN ARMOR. 643 The long coat culminates among the Hupas and Klamaths, although some Alaskan tribes wore long coats identical with the ceremonial coats (pl. 20).* Two modern armors from Sitka, in form of a waistcoat, are curious. Both open in front and are fastened by lappets and brass buttons of English manufacture. One is plated over the entire front and a por- tion of the back with Chinese coins, like the penny armor of Europe; the other is plain. The derivation of these coins is not known, but the collector supposes the work to be that of Chukechis. These are cur- rent Chinese coins like those brought to this country by the Chinese to be used in gambling. There are a few Japanese coins on this coat. The armor was collected in 1870 (pl. 21). 1 Decoration of the war armor was infrequent. The fringe has been mentioned. Applied bands of quill work on leather fringe have been observed. The slat armor often bore totemic devices, and the rod armor was diversified by bands of weaving of different colored cords or by painted bands. In the interior of two coats from southern Alaska (Takus and Tlingits) are elaborate colored totemic paintings. Since the painting is not seen, it can not be for ornament. Perhaps it is a fetichistic protection. Two very heavy, long, wide skin coats from the Northwest Coast in * DESCRIPTION OF PLATE 20. Skin armor (Cue it wul).—Made of a large elk skin, tanned, folded on itself. The outer portion falls as a skirt to the ankles, while the inner portion reaches only to the knees, and the hard neck portion of the hide comes in front and acts as a plastron to protect the belly and thighs. Joined over the shoulders by leather straps worked through a series of slashes. Zigzag cut for the left arm. Fringed at the side and tying thongs on the right. The front and back decorated with cusps, dots, circles, and lines in red and blue paint. It is worn so as to cover the left side, with the left arm through the slit, the head through the opening. The suit has been worn by several generations and in some of the modern battles with the whites, in which the bullet marks were received. There are also arrow cuts which were received in battle. The cusps and triangular figures are intended to denote the number of ene- mies slain and captives taken. (See ‘‘The Ray Collection,” Report ofthe Smith- sonian Institution, 1886, 1, p. 205.) Width, 26 inches; height, 47 inches (Cat. No. 126908, U.S.N.M. Hupa Indians, California. Collected by Capt. P. H. Ray, U.S. A.) + DESCRIPTION OF PLATE 21. Fig. 1, skin armor.—Made of three layers of tanned hide, hardened. Two layers are formed by folding and the third is inserted between them. In general shape it is that of a waistcoat, with collar sewed on with thongs, but not formed of pieces like the similar armor. Fastened in front with 4 lappets and sailors’ buttons of brass. On the right side is a loop of buckskin, probably for the dagger. Height, 23 inches. (Cat. No. 18927, U.S.N.M, Sitka, Alaska. Collected by James G. Swan.) Fig. 2, skin armor.—Made of thick tanned hide in imitation of an old-fashioned waistcoat, the resemblance being exact in particulars of cut and sewing. Plated over the front and shoulder of the back with Chinese coins sewed on with sinew cord. Four lappets for fastening in front with brass buttons of English manufac- ture. Dr. Hoff believes this coat to be the work of Chukchis. Height, 25} inches. (Cat. No. 9284, U.S.N.M. Sitka, Alaska. Collected by Dr. A. H. Hoff, U.S. A.) 644 the national collection are of problematic purpose. as armor by the collector, and from the thickness, There is, however, no armhole on the points are evidently defensive. left side nor projection for the shoulder. My tl fy thy ii \ 1 Misr Mi Wu (ldqe” ioe Voy ANCIENT KOREAN COTTON ARMOR. Cat. No, 128344, U.S.N.M. Korea. Deposited by Dr. G. Brown Goode. | “th i REPORT OF NATIONAL MUSEUM, 1893. They were sent in weight, and other In one suit the neck opening is large and is surrounded with a leather-covered collar made of short wooden slats, slightly interlocking, held together with a cord twining. In the other suit the collar is of hide (pl. 22).* If these objects are defensive they could scarcely be used by a man on all fours for stalking, as they are too wide and long, and the arms would be completely hampered. They would be most useful as armor for some animal. While one tribe-at least (the Shoshones of the Upper Missouri) is known to have protected their horses with armor,t the North- west Coast tribes did not have horses. A further suggestion is that they were ceremonial. These objects are noticed here with the view of ascertaining their function. Padded armor, which was used in Mexico and Central America, is the remaining type. No specimens of Mexican padded armor are extant. In some of the sculptures quilted armor is perhaps represented by a groundwork of small squares. A search of the codices and an examina- tion of the sculptures will doubtless throw much light upon this subject. * DESCRIPTION OF PLATE 22. Fig 1, skin robe.—Of hide, roughly curried in tanning. on the left side which does not penetrate the inner fold. has been neatly sewn to the right side. ing. Length, 52 inches; width, 36 inches. The collar is a slight cut A painted, fringed band On the inside is an elaborate totemic paint- Northwest coast. lig 2, skin robe.—Made of a large tanned elk, or caribon, hide, doubled, the short fold being inside. A collar composed of short interlocking slats of wood, woven together with cord in the manner of the slat armor and covered with leather, is sewed to the neck. with colored grass are sewed on one side. (Cat. No. 74440, U.S.N.M. tSee page 646. Alaska. Fringed at the sides. Four bands of fringed buckskin decorated Length, 54 inches; width, 32 inches. Collected by J. J. McLean.) PLATE 20. Report of National Museum, 1893.—Hough HuPA ELK-SKIN ARMOR. Cat. No. 126908, U. S. N. M. ary ay ’ % PEATE 21. 1893.—Hough. port of Natio. 1] Museum Re ‘Aver 0d ouena ‘WN ‘S ‘A ‘F806 “ON “980 “SIOULIB YLSUILL “@ Sty ‘YOWYNY NINS Anco? DNWOLONE “ulo 2) ‘WN ‘S ‘1 2668 ON 98D) asouryg Wat M poye[d oulle ULYS Si Report of National Museum. 1893.—Hough PLATE 22. Alaskan skin coat. No. uskan skin coat. t 1. Al Fig. S. N. M. ‘4440, U. - ‘ Cat. CoaATS RESEMBLING ARMOR. a a Sad 4 sy ‘ PRIMITIVE AMERICAN ARMOR. 645 Padded armor has been of widespread adoption. In Mongolian countries it survived to a recent date. The Korean armor (fig. 5*) will give an idea of this type. Prescott says, in reference to the Peruvian armor: Men’s bodies were protected by casques made either of wood or the skins of wild animals, and sometimes richly decorated with metal and with precious stones sur- mounted by the brilliant plumage of the tropical birds. * * * Men’s defensive armor consisted of a shield, or buckler, and a close tunic of quilted cotton, in the same manner as with the Mexicans.t Probably not very different from the cuirass of hide of the northern tribes. Hansard tells us the Spaniards invented felt covering for their horses as a protection against Floridan arrows.{ He also states that— The Spaniards, who fight on horseback with the Indians of those prov ines carry a doublet well lined with cotton wool. § It may be surmised that the Spaniards introduced this style of armor both into Mexico and Peru. Dr. Brinton,in his ‘*American Race,” says of the Tarascos of Michoacan: Nowhere else do we find such complete defensive armor. It consisted of helmet, body pieces, and greayes for the legs and arms, all of wood, covered neatly with copper or gold plates, so well done that the pieces looked as if they were of solid metal. The following excerpts, arranged geographically, describing armor from other tribes not represented by extant specimens, are introduced here to show the range of armor in America. The Nass Indians of the Tsimshian stock follow the other stocks on the Northwest Coast in that— Their war garments were formed of 2, 3, or more folds of the strongest hides of the land animals they were able to procure. In the center was a hole sufficient to admit the head and left arm to pass through, the mode of wearing them being over the right shoulder and under the left arm. The left side of the garment is sewed up, but the right side remains open; the body is, however, tolerably well protected, *This consists of a coat, helmet, and wide belt made up of many thicknesses of coarse cotton cloth covered with yellow stuff. The coat is made up of two wide flaps connected by a band which passes over the left shoulder. These flaps are cut out to fit the neck, and are tied at either side. A plastron of cloth is hung over the chest. The surface of portions of the coat is printed with Sanscrit dharani, or prayers for victory. A belt resembling those worn by Korean women at the present time, but much thicker, is tied around the waist. The helmet is padded, and is stiffened by four perpendicular bands of iron riveted through the cloth and termi- nating 1n a brass ball at the apex. Visor, small; wide and heavy épaules, one at either side at the back. The helmet has also Sanscrit dharani written upon it. Length of coat, 34 inches; width, 30 inches; length of belt, 54 inches; width, 11 inches; height of helmet, 12 inches. (Cat. No. 128344 U.S.N.M. Korea. Deposited by Dr. G. Brown Goode ) t Prescott, Conquest of Peru, 1, p. 67. t{ Hansard, History of Archery, p. 23. § Benzoni, History of the New World, Hakluyt Soc., p. 8. 646 REPORT OF NATIONAL MUSEUM, 1893. and both arms are left at liberty for action. As a further security, on the part which covers the breast they sometimes fix on.the inside thin laths of wood.* On Vancouver Island the Nootkas make use of— A thick tanned leather mantle, doubled, and appears to be the skin of an elk or buffalo. This is so contrived as to cover the breast quite up to the throat, part of it falling down to the heels. This garment is sometimes very curiously painted, and is not only strong enough to resist, but, as we understand from them, spears could not penetrate it. So it may be considered their complete defensive armor. t The Chinooks of the Columbia River use skin and rod armor. ‘Ross says, in reference to the former, their war garments are of two kinds; one is termed clemal, of elk skin, dressed and worked to the thickness of nearly half an inch, and arrow proof. The clemal nearly covers the whole body, with an opening left on the right side to allow the arm free action in combat. (Ross, Alex., Advent., etc., on the Oregon or Colum- bia River. Lond., 1849, p. 89.) Franchere says of the Columbian River tribes: For defensive armor they wear a cassock or tunic of elk skin, double, descending to the ankles, with holes for the arms. It is impenetrable for their arrows, which can not pierce two thicknesses of leather; and as their heads are also covered with a sort of helmet, the neck is almost the only part in which they can be wounded. They have another kind of corselet made like the corsets of our ladies, of splinters of hard wood interlaced with nettle twine. The warriors who wear this curious dress do not use the tunic of elk skin. He is consequently less protected, but a good deal more free, the said tunic being very heavy and very stiff.t Passing eastward, Lewis and Clarke, when speaking of the Shoshoni - of the Rocky Mountains, at the head of the Missouri River, remark: They have a kind of armor, something like a coat of mail, which is formed by a great many folds of dressed antelope skins, united by means of a mixture of glue and sand. With this they cover their own bodies and those of their horses, and find it impervious to the arrow.$ Mr. Dorsey informs me that there is reason to believe that the Pawni formerly employed a kind of hide cuirass and a defensive helmet, and as Du Pratz states that the Padoucas (Comanches) ‘cover their horses with dressed leather (probably bison hide), hanging down quite round, which secures them from darts,” it is perhaps permissible to infer that their riders were protected in the same way. In that wonderful origin-epic of the Navajoes the Indian singer chants to Dr. Matthews of “suits of armor made of several layers of buckskin. The warriors in those days wore such armor, but they wear it no longer.” || * Vancouver, Voyage, Vol. 11., p. 339. t Cook’s Voy., Vol. 11., p. 246. } Franchere, Gabriel, Narrative of a Voyage to the Northwest Coast of America. New York, 1854, p. 253. § Lewis and Clarke, Allen ed., Vol. 1, 425, 1814. || Matthews, Washington, The Mountain Chant. Annual Report of the Bureau of Ethnology, 1883-84, p. 73. PRIMITIVE AMERICAN ARMOR. 647 Among the Pueblo tribes “they also wore cuirasses of elk or bison skin, or of padded cotton and yucca, and carried round shields of basketry of heavily and closely netted cotton, or of thick rawhide, symbolically painted.” * Coming to the great civilizations of ancient Mexico, Bancroft says of the Nahua Indians of Mexicc: The chimalli, or Mexican shield, was made of various materials and of divers forms, sometimes rounded and sometimes oval; sometimes rounded on the lower side. It was commonly constructed of flexible bamboo canes bound firmly together and covered with hide. The face of the shield was ornamented according to the rank and taste of the wearer; that of a noble was generally covered with thin plates of gold, with a heavy boss in the center. In Tabasco and along the coast tortoise shells inlaid with gold, silver, or copper were commonly used as shields. Reeds, grass, hides, or ‘nequen cloth, coated with india rubber, served to protect an Aztec common soldier. Some shields were of an ordinary size; others were intended to cover the entire body, and were c@astructed so that when not in use they could be folded up and carried under the arm. The body armor of the nobles and higher grades of warriors con- sisted of a breastplate made of quilted cotton, one or two fingers in thickness, called “iecheahuipilli.” Over this was a thick cotton coat which covered part of the arms and thighs, made in one piece, fastened behind and decorated with feathers of the color of the company’s uniform. The cotton armor was completely arrow proof. Arm and leg guards made of wood, covered with leather or gold plates and trimmed with feathers, and of the same material, shaped and painted to represent the head of a tiger, serpent, or monster with mouth open and teeth bared, complete the defensive armor.t Again, in treating of the Toltecs, Veytia relates: The body armor worn by the principal warriors was made of double cloth padded with cotton. It differed from that of the Aztecs, reaching down the ankles, and was worn over a thin white tunic. The private soldier painted the upper part of the body to represent armor, but from the waist to the thighs they wore short drawers, and over them fastened around thé waist a kind of kilt that reached to the knee, and availed them somewhat for defense. Across the body was a sash made of feathers that passed from the right shoulder to the left side of the waist. } Cotton-padded armor seems to have been the principal type used in Mexico. Among the Mayas of Mexico— In addition to shields the Mayas had for defensive armor garments of thickly- quilted cotton, called escaupiles, which covered the body down to the lower part of the thigh, and were considered impervious to arrows.$ There are a few references among the Isthmian tribes of the use of armor where the skin and rod types persist. Gabb says that the Bri Bris and Tiribis, Costa Rica, use ‘“‘an iron-headed lance with shaft barely 4 feet long. Round shields were carried on the arm, made of the thickest part of the hide of the tapir.” || *Extract from article ‘‘ Pueblos,” by F. H. Cushing, to be published in Johnson’s Cyclopedia. t Bancroft, H. H., Native Races of the Pacific States, Vol. 11., p. 407. t Veytia, Hist. Ant. Mej., Tom. 1, pp. 289-90. § Bancroft, op. cit., 1, p. 655. || Gabb, A. M., Indians of Costa Rica, p. 516, Proc. Am. Philos. Soc., Aug. 20, 1875. 648 REPORT OF NATIONAL MUSEUM, 1893. The Mosquito Indians of Honduras also employed armor. Bancroft Says: _ Armor is made of plaited reeds covered with tiger skins and ornamented with feathers; besides this they employ a breastplate of twisted cotton. * Entering the continent of South America we find that— The Abipones are unacquainted with shields and targets, but they cover greatest part of their bodies with a sort of defense made of an undressed anta’s hide, a tiger skin being sewed either in the in or out side; it is open in the middle, that the head may come through, and extended on each side as far as the elbows and middle; it is impenetrable to common arrows, but not to spears and bullets.t In the vast continent of South America there are only scattering references to the use of armor. In the southern extremity, where the phase of life assumes a resemblance to that of our North American tribes, we find well-known forms of armor. The cavalry of the Arau- canians is “armed with swords and lances; formerly used bows and slings. The soldiers are not clothed in uniform, according to the European custom, but all wear beneath their usual dress cuirasses of leather, hardened by a peculiar mode of dressing; their shields and helmets are also made of the same material.” ¢ The Patagonians also wear a helmet with coat of mail, made of sey- eral folds of hide, and have a shield of bull’s hide for use on foot.§ Their weapons are bows, lances, bolas, and clubs. 3. EASTERN AREA. There is sufficient historical evidence that the defensive weapons of the east coast were similar to those of the west coast. The lakes and rivers with short portages rendered communication easy across this vast distance, and points out a great line of migration both of peoples and inventions. This is shown by the following reference: Some sixty or seventy years ago a party of Iroquois, having crossed the Rocky Mountains, reached L. Tatha in two wooden canoes, which at once excited the covet- ousness of a band of Carriers, who killed the strangers for the sake of their canoes. These having been brought here (Stuart’s Lake) served as models for the building of the first home-made ‘‘dugouts.” || On the Atlantic slope there is abundant evidence to show that the Iroquois used body armor. Cartier (Hakluyt Voy., Vol. 111, London, 1810), speaking of the Toudamani (Iroquois, probably Onondaga and Seneca) says: Also they showed us the manner and making of their armor; they are made of cordes and wood, finely and cunningly wrought together. * Bancroft, op. cit., 1, p. 723. tWaitz. Anthropologie, Vol. 0, p. 361. {Thompson, G. A. Alcedo’s Geogr. and Hist. Dict. of America. Lond., 1812, Vol. I, p. 407. § Falkner. Description of Patagonia, p. 129. || Morice, A. G. Proc, Canadian Inst., Oct., 1889, p. 131. The Carriers previously had birch-bark canoes. PRIMITIVE AMERICAN ARMOR. 649 Lafitau, whose famous work “Moeurs des Sauvages Ameriquains,” was published in 1724, gives a more detailed account of the defensive armor of the tribes of the northeastern part of the present United States and of Canada, probably referring chiefly to the Iroquois and Huron, with whom he was most familiar. He says (Vol. 11, p. 197): Their cuirasses were a tissue of wood, or of small sticks of reed cut of proportionate lengths, strongly pressed against each other, woven and enlaced very neatly with small cords made of deer skin. They had cuissards and brassards (defensive cover- ings for the thighs and arms) of the same material. These cuirasses were proof against arrows armed with bone or stone, but not against those mounted with iron. Charlevoix says of the Iroquois: Most had no defensive weapon, but when they attacked any intrenchment, they covered their whole body with small, light boards. Some have a sort of cuirass or breastplate of small, pliable rings, very neatly worked. They had even formerly a kind of mail for the arms and thighs, made of the same materials. But as this kind of armor was found not to be proof against firearms, they have renounced them without putting anything in their place.* Sagard says that the Hurons (Iroquois) had armor made of wood.t Champlain also describes the Iroquois’ armor as made of wood and thread. A plate in the same volume shows a warrior in armor. Wooden breastplates were worn.§ Copper breastplates have been found, like the gold breastplates of Peru.|| One has been described as a plate of rich copper, in length a foot, in width half a foot, for a breastplate. { Lucian Carr thinks these breastplates were for ornament, hke those found in the Ohio mounds. The size of the New England breastplates, however, would render them a tolerable protection if used as a plastron- The only reference to eastern skin armor is of the Mohawks, who “ wear sea-horse skins and barks of trees made by their art as impene- trable, it is thought, as steel, wearing a headpiece of the same.” ** In reference to the Virginia Indians, Hariot says: They are a people clothed with loose mantles made of Deere skins, and aprons of the same rounde about their middles; all e’se naked; of such a difference of statures only as wee in England; having no edge tooles or weapons of yron or steele to offend us withall, neither know they how to make any: those weapos that they have are onlie bowes made of Witch hazle, and arrowes of reeds; flat edged truncheons also of wood about a yard long, neither have they any thing to defend themselves but targets made of barcks; and some armours made of stickes wickered together with thread. tt * Charlevoix, P. F. X. de, Vol. 1, 338. Lond., 1761. t Voyage des Hurons, I, p. 144. {Champlain, 1, p. 201. Paris, 1830. § Hakluyt’s Voyages, 111, p. 305. ||Breastplate of Gold. Peru. J. Anthrop. Inst., Vol. xvi. No.3. Feb., 1889. q Archer account, Griswold’s Voyages, p. 75 in Vol. yu, 35 Mass. Historical Col- lection. **New England Prospect, p. 65. ttA brief and true report of the new-found land of Virginia, Thomas Hariot, 1585, De Bry, p. 24. 650 REPORT OF NATIONAL MUSEUM, 1893. I have not met with accounts of armor among the southern tribes, as the Muskoki group and others, but should hesitate to conclude that the idea of a defense for the body against arrows and spears, other than the shields, had not occurred to these progressive tribes. As arule, the helmet is the most striking and prominent portion of body armor. War bonnets and various head coverings of the American aborigines, in many cases, may be classed with helmets. The function of the hel- met, after protection, is to adorn the head, but an almost constant fea- ture is that of inspiring fear by grotesque or horrid construction. Thus the helmet is connected with the mask. There is a large series of Northwest Coast helmets in the National Museum. (See pl. 9.) They are always of wood, fitting the head, carved above to represent animals, grotesque faces, etc., always painted and sometimes carved with a rim like a hat. There is in the collection one helmet of wood covered with leather. Another fine helmet (Cat. No. 168157) from the Taku Indians of southern Alaska is carved from solid wood in form of the Japanese type, called Kabuto or pot helmet. The front is finely worked out into the form of a grotesque face, with deep furrows across the nose, cheeks, and forehead, like New Zealand tattoo- ing, and painted green, red, and black. The ears at the side of the mask are accurately executed. The mask projects above the crown of the helmet and the upper ridge is studded with wooden pegs, which once held a fringe of sea-lion whiskers or bristles. Pegs are also séen on the chin and lips. The rear and rim of the helmet bear a totemic-painted carving in low relief. Through the inner edge of the rim of the helmet four slanting holes have been bored. These were probably for the passage of thongs which held a mask-visor before the face. Visors were worn, carved to represent a face, or bowed visors ingen- iously made by cutting deep scarfs in the wood, allowing it to bend. On the interior of this style of visor was a projecting grommet which was taken between the teeth, holding the visor in place. Other mask- like visors were suspended from the helmet with cords and a couvre de nuque was often attached to the back. The only other survival of helmets in North America is among the Pueblo Indians, where they appear in ceremonies, in the form of mask helmets. A few historical notices have been given of the helmets used by the eastern Indians. A summary of the main conclusions which may be drawn from the foregoing paper will show: (1) That a majority of the American tribes had advanced to the stage where they made use of body armor—that is, were sedentary tribes. (2) This also implies differentiation of weapons rendering armor necessary, or the migration of the invention, or independent invention. PRIMITIVE AMERICAN ARMOR. 651 The coat of thick skin which has appeared at all times and places may have arisen independently, following the prime idea of the con- comitance of weapon and antiweapon, but— (3) Plate armor in America is a clear case of the migration of inven- tion, its congeners having been traced from Japan northeastward through the Ainos, Giliaks, and Chukchis, across Bering Strait by the intervening islands to the western Eskimo. Here the armor spread southward from the narrowest part of the strait, passing into the slat armor of the Northwest Coast, which is possibly a development of the plate idea. The plate armor also may have spread to the eastern coast of North America. Hence it appears to be conclusive that plate armor in America had Asiatic origin. The date of this introduction is not considered. lf nV) ee ie Seeing 40° ie ao a Ce a nig + Se nS aS 1) a 1 ls col iy any eer eis Sel i pe _ fas: oo; HED Beye | ON ay: pa. oP, ow (ioe AP ee fet » 2 eras aay i — : tie - a eal ae Pes \ Sieh age 2 a trate ae vir . 5 ae ' eyeeal a enw ia |) ) Oi eA 4 sng IS ies 4h ae \ a Viel -¢ 2 ree ad eel ees) So er a ae an Pit, es Roe eS i a. vie 7 Pp aie he her ve : ee Any O42 Sai OPS ee Wine ee CL a J ne rt ron a a) ie He _ ora 5 Sale oe as ' |e i es autre as tee Yor eT! Aven ae Ce ese bs re) ee ae bo ne "i see y is re . Saal Te = 1Snnngst mR’ ‘“ a oy al) Sn es Pees > fh _ ' ye pe) tee) =2 fi! a rf > o i a ne es | a Po ae a Ss r i i" ‘ = oe = yy fara weer s id a S —— ek at ee dl oe i iaee ae - © tae - ana ~- ( eee ane 1) er eeror ar we = bea @ 7 a ° _ >= : 2p et es a l- THE WEAPONS AND WINGS OF BIRDS. BY FREDERIC A. LUCAS, Curator, Department of Comparative Anatomy, U. S. National Museum. THE WEAPONS AND WINGS OF BIRDS. By FREDERIC A. LUCAS, Curator, Department of Comparative Anatomy, U.S. National Museum. A more accurate, if not a better, title for this article would perhaps be “Some weapons of birds,” for the weapons to be considered are mainly such as are very evidently designed for offensive purposes, and a peaceably disposed bird might very well dispense with. This paper does not treat of the beaks, claws, and ordinary spurs of birds, not only because they are pretty well known, but because peculiar modifications of bills and claws usually have more to do with presery- ing than destroying life, being related to some peculiarity of food or feeding. The toothed beak of the falcon has, of course, a double purpose: to preserve the life of the falcon by destroying that of its prey, and the same is true of the spear-like bill of the heron, but the curious, crossed mandibles of the crossbill, the bent beak of the crook-billed plover, and the open bill of Anastomus all have to do with the mere procuring of food. Neither will we say anything of the ostrich, cassowary, and other big birds which strike with their feet, for although the feet are formi- dable weapons, they are designed rather for running than for fighting, except in the case of the cassowary, whose long, straight, sharp inner toe can inflict a serious wound. Leaving out all these birds, we are practically restricted to such as carry their weapons on their wings, and not only fight “ tooth and claw,” but buffet an adversary about the head, and have their spurs where they seem best adapted to do mischief. Rather strangely, it does not appear that birds with wing spurs are any more combative than those without, for, while the jacanas are said to fight well, Hudson, who studied them long and carefully, describes them as noisy birds, more given to scolding than to actual fighting.* Neither are the spur-winged plovers, which are also querulous and vociferous, said to be particularly pugnacious, although Gould says that Lobivanellus personatus uses its wing spur with good effect to repulse the attacks of birds of prey.t By no means all birds which fight with their wings have spursupon them. The swan has none, and yet heisa famous fighter, and can deliver a tremendous blow, although the force and effect of a stroke of his pinions have undoubtedly been much exaggerated. * Hudson, W. H., The Naturalist in La Plata. t Birds of Australia, 11, p. 221. 656 REPORT OF NATIONAL MUSEUM, 1893. The common pigeon is another bird which uses its wings with good effect, and although the dove is held up as the type of gentleness, there are few birds of more quarrelsome disposition, and more given to pick- ing upon their weaker neighbors. The company manners of the pigeon are unobjectionable, and the members of a flock will fly und feed abroad in harmony, but, once within the shelter of their own loft, woe betide the bird which dares put foot on his neighbor’s territory, for he will be set upon and cuffed without mercy. The pigeon, too, is a skilled boxer, feinting and guarding with one wing and striking with the other, the blow being delivered by the wing farthest from his opponent, the intention being that the wrist, which is the most effective part of the wing for striking a blow, shall strike the adversary about the head. While this mode of combat is not peculiar to pigeons, it is eminently characteristic of the group, so that they may be called pugnacious in the strictest sense of the term; the Latin verb pugno meaning specially to fight with blows of the fist, or, as we say, to come to fisticuffs. Pigeons, according to our ideas, do not fight quite fairly, and if they have no positive spur upon their wings, they certainly come very near it. If one will carefully part the feathers on the outer edge of a pigeon’s wing near the bend, commonly called shoulder, but really the wrist, he will find a small bare spot and a blunt, well-marked promi- nence, often covered with integument so thick and hard that it can almost be called horn. In some wild pigeons this tubercle or boss is well developed, especially in the curious Samoan Diduneulus, while at least one extinct species was provided with a sort of natural slung- shot that must have added not a little to the effectiveness of a blow. This bird was the fat and flightless Solitaire, of Rodriguez, a near relative of the dodo, and, like it, a great, ungainly, aberrant member of the pigeon family, taller than a turkey. All that we know about the Solitaire has been gathered from the journal of Francois Leguat, who tells us that, while the birds were nesting, they would not suffer any other bird of the same species to approach within 200 yards of the place. He writes— But what is singular the male will never drive away the females, only when he perceives one he makes a noise with his wings to eail the female, and she drives the unwelcome stranger away, not leaving it till it is without her bounds. The female does the same to the males and he drives them away. The combats between them on this occasion last sometimes pretty long, because the stranger only turns about and does not fly directly from the nest. Leguat says, furthermore, that “the bone of their wing grows greater toward the extremity and forms a little round mass under the feathers as big as a musket ball. That and its beak are the chief defense of this bird.” “As big as a musket ball” very aptly describes the swollen bone at the base of the metacarpus (fig. 1), and this, swung by the short, stout little ee. iy ili THE WEAPONS AND WINGS OF BIRDS. 657 wing, must have been capable of hitting a pretty hard blow, even if, as is probable, it was surrounded by thick, callous skin. The outer end of the forearm (radius) is also rough and swollen, and it looks very much as if this enlargement of the bone had originally been brought about by the solitaire’s combative habits, the wrist joint having been banged and bruised until that diseased outgrowth known as exostosis Fig. 1. PART OF WING OF SOLITAIRE, PEZOPHAPS SOLITARIUS. Showing outgrowth of bone on radius and metacarpus (natural size). Cat. No. 18251, U. S. N. M. took place, and finally became a constant character of the bird. Dr. Weismann might object to this, but to a Neo-Lamarckian the thing seems quite plausible. The true game birds, fowls and pheasants, which have spurs on their legs, have none on their wings, although, as everyone knows who has seen a quarrel in the barnyard, they use their wings in fighting. Some of their Australian cousins, however, the mound-builders, or megapodes, which have no leg spurs, have blunt tubercles on their wings, very much like those found among pigeons. Although the swan, as we have seen, has no wing spurs and trusts to the sheer force of its wing stroke, some of its near relatives, the OUTER PORTION OF WING OF SPUR-WINGED GOOSE, PLECTROPTERUS GAMBENSIS. Reduced. African Spur-winged Geese (Plectropteri), have a very peculiarly armed pinion. The peculiarity hes in the fact that while in most spur-winged birds the spur does not occur upon the wrist itself, but upon the meta- carpus, or next row of bones, in the Spur-winged Goose (fig. 2) that one of the wrist bones known as the radiale projects quite beyond the other bones and is capped with a sharp spur. The majority of spur-winged birds are plovers, nearly related to the common Lapwing, Vanellus cristatus, and placed by different system- atists in various genera and subgenera hamed from their spurs or the H. Mis. 184, pt. 2——42 658 REPORT OF NATIONAL MUSEUM, 1893. face wattles which oceur m some species, Hoplopterus, Belonopterus, Lobivanellus, and Sarciophorus. A curious fact about the wattled species is that there is a direct relation between the size of the wattles and the size of the spurs (fig. 3); when the spur is long the wattles are large, and when the spur is short the wattles are small. There is also in those species where the spur is Small-an increase in its size during the breeding season, so that it then becomes fully available as a weapon.* There are no wattled lapwings in the New World, and only one species straggles northward beyond the latitude of the Himalayas. Africa, south of the Sahara claims half a dozen species, while seven Fig. 3. WATTLED PLOVER, LOBIVANELLUS ALBICEPS. Reduced. more are found between southern Asia and New Zealand. Spur-winged plovers without wattles oceur in South America, Africa, and parts of Asia, but none come from Australia. A small and quarrelsome species (Hoplopterus.spinosus) belonging to this latter group is very abundant in northeastern Africa, and its restless habits—for night and day it is continually on the move—are explained by the Arab tradition that on account of former laziness it was condemned to live in a state of perpetual unrest. The largest and finest of the South American spurred plovers is Belonopterus chilensis (fig. 4), a species ranging southwards to Patago- nia, and armed with a.long, vicious-looking spur just at the base of the metatarsus. Iwas about to say “thumb,” but it seems quite probable * Jordan, Birds of India, 111, 648. THE WEAPONS AND WINGS OF BIRDS. 659 that birds long ago lost their thumbs, and that the mid¢le finger has. come to do duty in its place. However, this digit has been termed thumb for a long time, and since it is one by analogy, we will still call it so. There is a curious instance among the gigantic extinct group of rep- tiles, well named Dinosaurs,* where the thumb itself has become changed in function, and instead of aiding the other digits to lay hold of things, has become transformed into a long, sharp spike. This occurs in the Iguanodons (fig. 5), and among them the species particularly noticeable is Iguanodon bernissartensis, one of nearly two score that were happily swept into a con- Fig. 4. 7 j . Qy p ‘ ly yas METACARPUS OF SPUR-WINGED PLOVER, venient Jurassic guly and there re See aaa tn mained for long ages, until brought to Cat. No. 18546, U. S. N. M. light by the picks of the coal miners of Bernissart. That in this case the spike did duty as a weapon is a little uncertain, and it may have served no more harmful purpose than that of ripping off the husk of some fruit or vegetable which formed part of the food of these great herbivorous reptiles. When these pointed thumb-spikes were first found, they were not associated with the fore limbs, and so in restoring the Iguanodon he was figured with the spike on the end of his nose, something like a rhinoceros. The late Dr. W. K. Parker, in a memoir on the morphology of the duck and auk tribes, rather hints that the thumb of Jguanodon and the spur of Chauna chavaria are, morphologically, not so far apart. + Another group of spur-winged birds is the Jacanide, « family of small birds related to the rails, having such long slender toes that they run as easily over lily pads and floating vegeta- tion as other birds do over dry land. These little birds, which are found in thé warmer parts of America, Africa, southern Asia, and Australia, like the spur-winged plovers, have a spur on the metacarpus, although it is not so large as in those FOREARM OF IGUANODON, : . . > IGUANODON EERNIssarren- Dirds. As in the spur-winged plovers we find SIS. spurs associated with wattles for the African and Asiatic species which have no wattles, have only rudimentary spurs, while the American species which have wattles have well-developed spurs. *Dollo, Note sur les Dinosauriens de Bernissart. Bull. Mus. Roy. d’Hist. Nat. Belge., 1882-1884, t.1, Pl. rx, t. 11, Pl. vii. +The Morphology of the Duck and Auk Tribes. Cunningham Memoirs of the Royal Irish Academy. No. vi, pp., 55, 95. Reduced. 660 REPORT OF NATIONAL MUSEUM, 1893. The jacana, like the Hoactzin and Mound Builder, acquires its full activities at an early date, and Hudson says: While I was looking closely at one of the eggs lying in the palm of my hand, all at once the cracked shell parted, and at the same moment the young bird leaped from my hand and fell into the water where it swam rapidly to a small mound and escaping from the water, concealed itself in the grass, lying close and perfectly motionless like a young plover. Tam quite sure that the young bird’s sudden escape from the shell was the result of a violent effort to free itself, inspired by the loud persistent screaming of the parent birds which it heard while in the shell. In the jacanas belonging to the genus Metopidius the spur is much reduced in size, but the bone of the wing itself is so modified as to become available as a weapon, being flattened and widened so as to be a scimeter on a small scale (fig. 6). The apparent draw- back to this weapon lies in the fact that, like a two-edged sword, it must cut both ways, and unless the skin immediately over it is particularly dull and insensible Fig. 6. Metopidius can not strike an FOREARM OF AFRICAN JACANA, METOPIDIUS © 7 ar rT] 7 iiestipcncr ee adversary without feeling the etna cin effects of the blow himself. Cat. No, 18785, U. 8. N. M. Whether or not this tends to pro- mote peacefulness we do not know, but from what we know of bipeds, who claim to be higher in the scale of life, it may be presumed that Metopidius does not mind being hurt himself provided the “ other fellow” is hurt still more. Largestand most formidable of all spur-winged birds are the Screamers (Anhimide), three species of birds related to the ducks, although they do not look it, and restricted to South America.* These birds have two spurs, instead of one, upon the outer part of the wing (fig. 7), the outermost a short affair, the inner an ugly three-sided, stiletto-like blade, about an inch and a quarter long and almost as sharp as a needle. In fact, it is not unlike part of one of those large needles used by sail-makers known as roping needles, and it would seem quite capable of being driven completely through a man’s hand by astroke of the screamer’s powerful wing. And yet we are told that the screamers are peaceable birds, associating amicably in large flocks, so that this array of spurs, like our modern ironclads, is strictly in the interest of peace. *South America is particularly rich in anomalous birds, remnants or relics, one might say, of a bygone avifauna. The Hoactzin, Opisthocomus cristatus, forms an order by itself, and the three species uf screamers, Anhima anhima, Chauna chavaria and C, derbina form another. So do the Tinamous (Crypturi), while the Trumpeter (Psophia crepitans), Cariama (Cariama cristata), and Guacharo Bird (Steatornis cari- pensis) each and all are isolated forms. ‘THE WEAPONS AND WINGS OF BIRDS. 661 From spurs to claws is an easy transition, since the only difference between them is in their location, claws being at the ends of toes and fingers, while spurs are placed on or near the ankle and wrist. While the claws on a bird’s wing, for claws as well as spurs are found there, serve no purpose as weapons and are seemingly of no use at all in old birds, they have a great deal of interest attached to them. One who has had the good fortune to see the purple gallinule in its native swamps may have seen the little ones climbing out of their nest and scrambling over the branches very much like four-footed animals. Or, if not the purple gallinule, he may perhaps have seen the young of its humble relative, the Florida gallinule, pulling itself up some little incline by its wings, something as a bat hooks himself along.* If the OUTER PORTION OF WING OF SCREAMER, ANHIMA ANHIMA. Reduced. observer has investigated he will have found on the outermost finger of the wing a small, sharp claw, and may have wondered what this claw was doing there. This claw is of very common occurrence, and is especially frequent among water birds, or those which are lowest or most generalized in their structure. Sometimes this claw is so small as to almost escape detection, and again, as in the turkey buzzard, it may be so large that it can be found at once. Occasionally, very occasionally in fact, there is a second minute claw, or rudiment of a claw, hidden among the feathers at the very end of the wing bone, but this needs to be care- fully looked for. Without a knowledge of fossil birds, it might be diffi- cult to satisfactorily explain the presence of this useless claw, but if we regard rudimentary organs in existing forms as shadows of the past and vestiges of complete useful parts in extinct animals, the reason for its presence is clear, andl we will look upon the little wing claws of mod ern birds as reminiscences of well-clawed ancestors. The earliest bird with which we are at present acquainted is the well known Archeop- teryx, from the lithographic states of Solenhofen, Bavaria, and this form seems not only to have had wings for flight, but hands for climbing. = ———e *Nuttall Bulletin, 1882, p. 124, and The Ibis, 1889, p. 577. 662 REPORT OF NATIONAL MUSEUM, 1893. - Unfortunately there is still some doubt as to the exact strueture of the wing of Archwopteryx, and it seems probable that it is misrepresented in most text books.* One thing, however is undeniable, there were in this wing 3 well-formed, clawed fingers, and if only 2 of them were free, Archeopteryx could certainly climb about very readily. It seems quite a transition from the long-tailed, toothed Archwopteryz, with its three clawed fingers, to the ordinary birds of to-day, the more that very few of the intermediate stages have been brought to light. Fortunately, however, there is a bird still living, and not uncommon, in parts of South America, which goes some distance toward bridging over the gap between gallinule and Arehwopteryx. This bird, which on account of its many peculiarities, stands quite alone among modern birds, and is looked upon as the sur- vivor of a great group of birds which has become extinct, is Opisthocomus cristatus. From the unpleasant odor of its flesh, acquired from its food of Fig. 8. wild arum leaves, the bird is more WING OF YOUNG HOACTZIN, OPIsTHOComMUS = eommonly known as the stink bird, CRISTATUS: v is 5 : ’ or stinking pheasant, while what Natural size. ? ; Cut, No. 18523, U. S..N. M. Dr. Coues would term its ‘ book” name is Hoactzin or Hoatzin.t The adult birds not only have no claws upon their wings, but their thumbs, even, are so poorly developed that one would hardly suspect that in the nestlings we have the nearest approach to a quadruped found among existing birds. Mr. J. J. Quelch, who studied them in British Guiana, tells us that soon after the hatching of the eggs the nestlings begin to crawl about by means of their wings and legs, the well-developed claws on the pollex and index being constantly in use for holding and hooking to the surrounding objects (fig. 8). If they are drawn from the nest by means of their legs, they hold on firmly to the twigs both with their bill and wings; and if the nest be upset by means of a rod pushed up from below, they hold on to all objects with which they come in contact by means of bill, feet, and wings, making con- siderable use of the bill, not only to reach objects above them, but also, with the help of the clawed wings, to raise themselves to a higher level. When the parent bird is driven from the nest, owing to the close approach of a boat, then the young birds, unless they be only quite recently hatched, craw] out of the nests on all fours, and rapidly try to hide in the thicker bush behind. * Biological Theories, vu. The Digits in a Bird’s Wing: A Study of the Origin and Multiplication of Errors, by C. Herbert Hurst, Ph. D. Natural Science, Octo- ber, 1893, pp. 275-281. Also, The Wing of Archeopteryx. W. P. Pycraft, M. B. O. U. Natural Science, November and December, 1894, pp. 353-360, 437-448. tGiven to the bird by Buffon, who considered it to be the bird mentioned under. that name by the Spanish writer Hernandez. { The Ibis for 1890, pp. 327-335. PLATE 1. Report of National Museum, 1893.—Lucas. YOUNG HOACTZINS. Slightly reduced in size. Cat. No. 18523, U. S. N. M. THE WEAPONS AND WINGS OF BIRDS. 663 One curious feature noticed with a nestling which had been upset into the river was its power of rapid swimming and diving when pursued. As soon as the hand was placed close to it, it rapidly dived into the dark water, in which it was impossible to see it, and would rise at dis- tances of more than a yard away. Owing to this power, the little creature managed to evade all attempts to seize it, taking refuge eventually far under the bushy growth where it was impossible to pur- sue it. The prolonged immersion which a nestling will thus instine- tively and voluntarily undergo, or which an adult bird will bear in an attempt to drown it, seems quite remarkable. The nestlings, even when quite small, are frequently found far away from any nest, climbing by the help of their clawed wings, after the parent birds during their feeding time. Not the least of the many interesting features of the Hoactzin is the rapid change which takes place in the fore limb during the growth of the bird by which the hand of the nestling with its well-developed, well- clawed fingers, becomes the clawless wing of the old bird withits abor- tive outer finger. It gives us, as it were, an epitome of the past history of birds, and as the events of a century are summed up in a page of history so the slow progress of birds from the Jurassic Archwopteryxr to the thrush of to-day is represented by a few weeks in the life of the Hoactzin. 77 Fy i ‘ ay Mt my? gen? RE at Pale? 1! eC gi MTS an as me 2h Type ‘is; pi eae mag hs mrt: SSGhe oye oo 8) We ae Tee Wits © meer tl ari ¢%. 1 7 on pet i ay p : ara) ye wt ot \ Fie ae a ia eeraner 0) Fits’ s yi = wgl,. fae ; m < or aan ie fe es a0 ie iid ‘oe ora trenies i) Ok ate rea pee 6 _ Seer i , 2 Se +b ie ant a ee eee eae ongie ule oe eee a4 7 ere eer ier A ‘eh ea ria? a 6 lf OT eee ee 2% Sarr aie . : ner Poe tie fy. ] : witli a ul pair aie - ols Ais Mia ¥ fils ; siege 0 el hate i ae Lat etek i i, elie ve Se eee §e ink @ ace arin, ea) ‘eg VS a eT Bee ed jee ont) — ae Aen ii) oi6 eee 2 Oa oe eipieny “heat a ve a“ ' ? » : a 1 ; e vias NOTES ON THE ETHNOLOGY OF TIBET. BASED ON THE COLLECTIONS IN THE UNITED STATES NATIONAL MUSEUM. BY WILLIAM WOODVILLE ROCKHILL, Gold Medalist of the Royal Geographical Society, Corresponding Member of the Gesellschaft fiir Erdkunde, etc., etc., ete. 1 os ae ee a? ces SYNOPSIS OF CONTENTS: . Tibet—Origin of the name—Limits—History of its civilization derived from betanvands@ hin GseySOULCCS sae ree liteCharacter/ot the country and peoplessesm==—e sete sean se ate eee Ill. Organization—Consanguineal—Political—Industrial. ......--..---.---- lives Oressiand.personal adornments. see enero eae eee eases VY. Habitations—Household utensils—Food—Tobacco. ....-...-.----.----- VI. Agriculture—W eapons—Hunting—Music—Dancing ....-.....---.----- Val rans portation; <-c2 ar oN. ran Ve as ita re bere cd , af eee * ; Tart OA i. a VON" ‘ if i Ss sede SOM PIEZNINVA TION, (Ole IPIWATTIE, 31) - FLY BRUSHES. China. (Cat. No. 151283, U. S. N. M.) .2. YAK TAI FLY BRUSH. Hair dyed red: (Cat. No. 151283, U. S. N. M.) . 1. Cork Fry Brush with BaMBoo HaNDLE. Used by Buddhist priests in Bat’ang. PLATE 31. 1893.—Rockhill. Report of National Museum, FLY BRUSHES. NOTES ON THE ETHNOLOGY OF TIBET. 123 The khata or scarf of felicitation plays such an important role in Tibetan life that itis in place to say something of it. The khata is a piece of silk, nearly as fine as gauze. Its colorisa bluish white. Its length is about three times its width; the two extremities usually terminate in fringes. There are khatas of every size and price; for it is an object that the poor as well as the rich can not do without. No one ever goes anywhere without carrying a small supply of them with him. When one pays a formal visit, when one has a service to ask of some one, or to thank a person, the first thing to dois to unrolla khata; itis taken in both hands and offered to the person one wishes to honor. If two friends, not having met for some time, suddenly run across each other, the first thing they do is to offer each other a khata. It is done with as much empressement and as promptly as one shakes hands in Europe. It is also customary when one writes a letter to fold up in it a little khata. Itis incredible what importance the Tibetans, Si-Fan, Hung-Mao-Eul, and all the people living to the west of the Blue Sea attach to the khata ceremony. It is among them the purest and sincerest expression of all noble sentiments. The finest words, the most costly presents, are nothing without the khata. With it, on the contrary, the most ordinary object acquires immense value. If some one asks a favor of you, a khata in his hand, it is impossible to refuse it, unless one wishes to show contempt for all rules of propriety. (Huc, Souvenirs d’un voyage, U, p. 88.) Besides these everyday usages referred to by Hue to which the /’atag is put, it is the most ordinary form of offering to the gods. Hundreds and thousands of them are suspended on the statues of the gods in every temple or shrine in Tibet and Mongolia, and in some sections of the country a k’atag of a certain quality, called by the Chinese wu chai shou-pa, is a recognized standard of value in commercial transactions. (Land of the Lamas, pp. 66, 105, and p. 122, note.*) Ceremonial scarfs appear to have been at one time used among the Chinese. In 1575 Mendoza visited Fu-chou, in the province of Fu-kien, and was received with several other missionaries by the viceroy, who— commanded in his presence to put about the neckes of the friers, in manner of a scarfe, to eyther of them sixe peeces of silke and unto the shoulders of their com- panions, and unto Omoncon and Suisay, each of them foure peeces and to every one of their servantes two a peece * * * so with the silke about their neckes, and with the branches in their hands, they returned out of the hall and downe the staires the way they came, and through the court into the streetes. (Mendoza, History of China, Hakluyt Soe. Edit., 11, p. 83.) A similar custom would appear to have existed in India in olden times; for we read in early Buddhist works of a piece of light stuff being put over the shoulders or around the neck of an honored person. Games and toys.—I have given much time, while traveling in Tibet, to inquiring concerning toys for children and games, and have also carefully examined nearly all the works of Asiatic and European trav- elers for information on these subjects, but I have failed to hear of or learn anything of any importance on these subjects. What I wrote in The Land of the Lamas (p. 248) concerning the Tibetans of the Horba country seems applicable to the whole land: *See also Journ. Roy. Asiat. Soc., n. s., XXII, p. 228, and Turner, Embassy to Court of Teshoo Lama, p. 233. 124 REPORT OF NATIONAL MUSEUM, 1893. Inoticed but few games of chance among them. Dice they have, but they are for divining purposes, not for gambling. A few men who had passed much of their time among the Chinese played cards, and chess is also known among them, but both are of foreign importation, and I could hear of no national game. « Thave seen children amusing themselves with rag dolls and little bows and arrows, and Dr. Hooker (Himalayan Journals, I, p. 317), speaking of a place in upper Sikkim, says: I was much amused here by watching a child playing with a popgun, made of bamboo, similar to that of quill, with which most English chiidren are familiar, which propels pellets by means of a spring trigger made of the upper part of*the quill. Jack stones, or knuckle bones, is the only game I have seen played in the country, and that only on two or three occasions. This game is also known in China and Mongolia and, in fact, throughout eastern Asia. (See Bergmann, Voy. chez les Kalmuks, p. 151.) In Ladak and Balti the men play polo, which some authors say is a game of Tibetan origin. It was once very popular under the name of chaogan in India, in which country it was introduced by the Mussulman conquerors toward the end of the twelfth century, but after Baber’s time it gradually became obsolete. (Alexander Cunningham, Ladak, p. 311.) Dr. Hooker (Himalayan Journals, I, p. 317) says that the Lepchas play at quoits, using slate for the purpose, and at the Highland game of “putting the stone” and ‘drawing the stone.” The game of quoits is also played in the adjacent country of Bhutan and, I believe, in other portions of southern Tibet. Wrestling is also a popular amusement in most parts of Tibet; it is, I believe, that known among us as Greco- Roman. 1b.S BIRTH—MARRIAGE— DEATH. Birth.—‘ They (the Tibetans) do not wash and bathe a newly-born child, but the mother licks it as soon as itis born. After three days they smear the child’s body all over with butter and expose it to the sun’s rays for several days. Children are fed on parched meal (tsamba) mixed with soup, the greater part of them getting no milk whatever.” (Journ. Roy. Asiat. Soc., n. s8., XXIII, p. 231.) As a general rule the name given the children is chosen by a lama, who also casts the child’s horoscope, and no festivities attend this nam- ing. Thename chosen is usually a Buddhist term, such as Lozang, ‘the intelligent,” or Dorjé, “the thunderbolt (vadjra),” for a boy, while Padma, ‘the lotus,” and Drolma, the name of the goddess Tara, who was incarnated in the Chinese and Nepalese consorts of King Srong-tsan gambo, are favorite names for women. Frequently two sons of a same mother will have the same name, and Cl’en, ‘the big one, senior,” and Ch’ung, ‘the little one, junior,” will be added to their names. There are no family names. Cunningham says that in Ladak they celebrate a “ birth feast ” ( Tsas- Ton) and a “naming feast” (Ming-Ton). ———— tS NOTES ON THE ETHNOLOGY OF TIBET. 725 The birth-feast (Tsas-Ton) is held one week after the mother’s confinement, when all the relatives assemble at her home to celebrate the child’s birth. All the guests make presents to the mother, according to their means, of pieces of cloth and food, and occasionally of money. The party then dines, and the entertainment ends with a bowl of chang. The mother remains at home for one month. The naming-feast (Ming-Ton), which answers to our christening, is held just one year after the birth. The child is then taken before some great lama, to whom an offering is made of a rupee or a quantity of wheat or barley, according to the means of the parties. The lama pronounces a name, and the relatives retire to the usual entertainment of dinner and chang. (Alex. Cunningham, Ladak, p. 307.) Marriage.—Marriage by capture still survives in portions of western Tibet, mm Spiti, in Sikkim, and Bhutan, where the bridegroom and his friends, when they go to bring the bride from her father’s home, are met by a party of the bride’s friends and relations who stop the path; hereupon a sham fight of a very rough description ensues, in which the bridegroom and his friends, before they are allowed to pass, are well drubbed with good thick switches. In other parts of Tibet the preliminaries of marriage are very simi- lar to those of China. Go-betweens (Bar mi or Long mt) on the part of*the man make overtures to the family of the girl, and if these are well received, astrologers are consulted to see whether the horoscope of the man and woman do not antagonize each other, and ‘if the good and evil of the life of the male harmonize in the calculation with those of the life of the female, longevity is counted upon. If not, the happi- ness of the couple will be short-lived.” As soon as the astrologer declares that the Thun-tsi, i. e., the circumstances of har- mony necessary in the marriage, are favorable, the parents consult their friends and relations in order to ascertain the suitability of the match, and send one or two Bar mi (go-betweens) to.ascertain the views of the maternal uncle of the maiden selected regarding her marriage. He generally withholds his opinion under various excuses. According to the customs of the country the Shangpo (maternal uncle) of a maiden is the real arbiter of her fate in the matter of marriage. Nothing can be settled without reference to him. When his leave is secured the marriage proposal can be formally made to the maiden’s parents. * The Bar mi, with the permission of the Shangpo, on an auspicious day during the increasing lunation of the month, proceed to the home of the parents of the maiden to present them with the Long chang, and therewith formally make the proposal of marriage. * * * The parents of the maiden receive the Bar mi with politeness, and.serve them with wine and tea. After emptying one. or two cups of tea the Bar mi present them with a scarf, and beg leave to state their mission. Then they pour out chang, but before the parents will partake of it, the maternal uncle of the gitl must be got to give his consent, and as soon as he has, the parents drink the chang and the betrothal is made. The marriage festivities generally last for three days at the home of the bride’s parents, when the friends and relatives make her presents and the parents give her a dowry of cattle, clothes, jewelry, furniture, etc. Before leaving the bridesmaid’s house the domestic dieties are propitiated by a Bonbo lama, and here also is performed the ceremony of trashi tré-wa, or calling down blessings and long life on her. After this the bride rides to her husband’s house *This seems to point to a survival of the custom of reckoning descent through the females. 726 REPORT OF NATIONAL MUSEUM, 1893. preceded by a man in white riding a white horse.* On arriving there she is received with other ceremonies, especially noticeable among which is that of driving away any evil spirits which may have accompanied her from her parents’ house. The mother of the groom advances now toward the bride and presents her with a k’atag, tsamba mixed with butter, and a jar of milk. There is after this a marriage dinner and the friends and relatives of the groom present them with k’atag and presents, and it is they who supply the provisions for the marriage feast. After this a Bonbo priest gives the bride a new name which she is henceforth to bear, connecting it in some manner with the name of her mother-in-law. When this is performed a small piece of wood about 6 inches long is held to the lips of the bridegroom. The bride now sits in front of her husband, and takes the other end of the wood between her lips. In the meartime a tuft of wool is placed in the hands of the bridegroom, who draws out the fibers to some length. The bride takes it from his hands and twists it into a thread. This is called the ceremony of the first work of harmonious union. Then the party of the bride separate from that of the bridegroom, and sitting in rows of seats facing each other sing repartee songs. When the festivities terminate the bridegroom dismisses the kyel mi (the men who have escorted the bride from her home) with suitable presents. (Sarat Chandra Das, Marriage Customs im Tibet, Journ. Asiat. Soc. Bengal, 1, 1893, Pt. 111, pp. 6-31.t ) Although the ceremonies in different parts of Tibet vary somewhat from the above, they are analogous, as the betrothal and the marriage ceremonies, which are nothing but a long feast, are their essential fea- tures. Chandra Das, in the interesting articles from which the preced- ing facts are derived, describes the ceremonies as they are performed in Ladak, Sikkim, and central Tibet, and I must refer the reader' whom the subject interests to his paper for further details on the subject. So much has been written about Tibetan polyandry that it is only . necessary to touch on it here. As far as my information goes the husbands of a given woman are always brothers, the elder brother choosing the woman and the younger brothers cohabiting with her. Whatever may have been the origin of polyandry, there can be no doubt that poverty, a desire to keep down population and to keep property undivided in families, supply suffi- cient reasons to justify its continuance. The same motives explain its existence among the lower castes of Malabar, among the Jat (Sikhs) of the Punjab, among the Todas, and probably in most other countries in which this custom prevails. Polygamy is not uncommon among. the wealthier classes of Tibet throughout the whole extent of the land, and monogamy is, naturally enough, frequently met with, especially among the Drupa tent dwellers, where it is in fact the invariable rule, I believe.t *Among the Mongols it is deemed proper when inviting a guest to one’s tent to send him a white horse to ride. tSee aiso Journ. Roy. Asiat Soc.,n. s., XXIII, pp. 228-230, and Alex. Cunningham, Ladak, p. 207. tSee, on this subject, Sarat Chandra Das, Narr. of First Journey to Tashilhunpo in 1879, p. 34; Col. Edw. Parke in Journ. Anthropol. Institute, vu, 195 et seg., and Land of the Lamas, pp. 190, 212 et seq. NOTES ON THE ETHNOLOGY OF TIBET. hod Sarat Chandra Das, in his paper on Marriage Customs of Tibet, says (quoting Crooke’s Notes and Queries): In Spiti polyandry is not recognized, as only the elder brother marries and the younger ones become monks. But there is not the least aversion to the idea of two brothers cohabiting with the same woman, and I believe it often happens in an unrecognized way, particularly among the landless classes, who send no sons into the monasteries.t * * * In Spiti there is a regular ceremony of divorce which is sometimes used when both parties consent. Husband and wife hold the ends of a thread, repeating meanwhile, ‘‘Our father and our mother gave, anocher father and mother took away. As it was not our fate to agree, we separate with mutual good will.” The thread is then severed by applying a light to the middle. After a divorce a woman is at liberty to marry whom she pleases. I do not believe that in other parts of the country divorce or second marriage exist, though among the Kokonor Tibetans, at least, it some- times happens that a wife deserts her husband to cohabit with another man or a husband his wife for another woman. Death—Mortuary ceremonies.—Speaking of the T’ang-hsiang, the Sui shu says: When people of eighty or over die the relatives do not mourn, for they say that they had reached the end of their allotted time, but if a young person dies they ery and lament, saying that it is a great wrong. (Sui shu, Book, 83; Conf. T’ang shu, Book, 221.) The T’ang shu (Book, 221), speaking of the Tung nii kuo, which embraced in the seventh or eighth century the greater part of north- eastern Tibet, says: They wear mourning for three years, not changing their clothes and not washing. When a man of wealth dies they remove the skin from the body and put it aside; the flesh and bones they place in an earthen vase, mixed with gold dust, and this they carefully bury. When the sovereign is buried several tens of persons follow the dead into the tomb. Early European travelers in eastern Asia tell us that the Tibetans used to devour the bodies of their dead parents. Thus William of Rubruk (Itinerarium, Edit. Soc. Geo. de Paris, p. 289) says: Post istos sunt Tebec, homines solentes comedere parentes suos defunctos, ut causa pietatis non facerent aliud sepulcrum eis nisi viscera sua. Modo tamen hoe demise- runt, quia abhominabiles erant omni nationi. Tamen ad hue faciunt puleros ciphos de capitibus parentum, ut illis bibentes habeant memoriam eorum in jocunditate sua. Hoe dixit michi qui viderat. Plano Carpini (Historia Mongalorum, IX, p. 658) says: Venit adterram Burithabet * * * quisunti pagani. Quiconsuetudinem mira- bilem imo potius miserabilem habent: quia cum alicujus pater humane nature debitum solvit, omnem congregant parentelam, et comedunt eum sicut nobis diceba- tur pro certo. Friar Odoric, who was the first European traveler to visit Tibet, gives a different account of their mortuary customs, and one more in *TIt is a difficult matter to say where polyandry begins and cohabitation ends in Tibet. These terms seem nearly interchangeable. 728 REPORT OF NATIONAL MUSEUM, 1893. accordance with what we know to have obtained among the Tibetans for some centuries back. Charges of cannibalism against a remote people only known to the informants of the writer of a narrative by hearsay are not uncommon. ‘To only mention one, I find that the early Arab travelers in China charged the Chinese of the 7th century, A. D., with eating all their enemies killed in war.* Altogether, I think there is very little foundation for the charge made by Rubruk and du Plan Carpin. It is probably the result of a jumbled-up account of the true methods of disposing of the dead, which will be described farther on. Friar Odoric says (H. Yule, Cathay and the Way Thither, 1, p. 151): Suppose such an one’s father to die, then the son will say, ‘‘I desire to pay respect to my father’s memory;” and so he calls together all.the priests and monks and players in the country round, and likewise all the neighbors and kinsfolk, and they carry the body into the country with great rejoicings. And they have a great table in readiness, upon which the priests cut off the head, and then this is presented to the son, and the son and all the company raise a chant and’ make many prayers for thedead. Then the priests cut the whole of the body to pieces, and when they have done so they go up again to the city with the whole company, praying for him as they go. After this the eagles and vultures come down from the mountains, and every one takes his morsel and carries it away. Then all the company shout aloud, saying, ‘‘Behold! the man is a saint. For the angels of God come and carry him to paradise.” And in this way the son deems himself to be honored in no small dezree, seeing that his father is borne off in this creditable manner by the angels. And so he takes his father’s head and straightway cooks it and eats it, and of the skull he maketh a goblet, from which he and all the family always drink devoutly to the memory of the deceased father. And they say that by eating in this way they show their great respect for their father. Colonel Yule, commenting on the preceding passage, says: Klaproth quotes passages showing a knowledge of this mode of disposing of the dead from Strabo, Cicero’s Tusculan Questions, and Justin. Strabo also ascribes to the Caspii the opinion that those whose bodies the birds appropriated were blessed. Herodotus and Mela ascribe such practices to the Issedonians and Scythians, ‘‘Cor- pora ipsa laniata et cxesis pecorum visceribus immista epulando consumunt. Capita ubi fabri expolivere auro vincta pro poculis gerunt.” (Pomp. Mela, I, p. 1.)t IT have shown in my paper “On the use of skulls in lamaist cere- monies” (Proc. Amer. Orient. Soc.. Oct., 1888, p. XXII) the notions pre- vailing in Tibet on this subject. As further elucidating the above pass- age from Odoric’s travels, I may mention that the rapidity with which the body of the dead is devoured by the birds or other animals to whom it is fed is held to be a proof of the good luck (or karma) of the deceased, and therefore the skull of one who has been so devoured is a good one out of which to make a libation bowl. Chinese authors describe as follows Tibetan mortuary customs: When a person dies in Tibet the corpse is tied up with ropes, the face being put between the knees and the hands stuck under the legs. The body is wrapped in the everyday clothes of the deceased and put in a rawhide bag. The men and women having lamented in common over their loss, suspend the corpse by means of “See Reinand. Relation des voyages faits par les Arabes, etc., 1, pp. 52, 68, 70. tContf. Strabo’s remarks about the Hibernians and the Massagetie. Bk. v. 4 and Bk. x1, 8. Also Ammianus Marcellinus, xxvur, 4, and Herodotus Iv, 65. NOTES ON THE ETHNOLOGY OF TIBET. 729 * * * ropes from the rafters and request the lamas to come read the sacred books. A few days later the body is carried to the corpse cutter’s place, where it is tied to a stake and the flesh cut off and given to dogs to eat. This is called a “ terrestrial burial.” The bones are crushed in a stone mortar, mixed with tsamba, made into balls, and also given to the dogs or thrown to the vultures, and this latter mode of disposing of them is called a “celestial burial.” Both these methods are considered highly desirable. The poor dead are buried in the streams, the corpse being simply thrownin. This is not an esteemed mode of burial. The bodies of lamas are burnt and cairns erected over their remains. (Jour. Roy. Asiat. Soc., n.s., XXIL, pp. 231-232; Conf. Land of the Lamas, pp. 81, and 286-287.) * Georgi (op. cit., p. 443) gives some interesting details, which I have not seen noticed elsewhere. He says: Mos est etiam, ut Summorum Lhamarum, aliorumque paucorum cadavera vel san- dalo, quodcum aloes ligno nonnulli confundunt, comburantur, vel balsamo condita sacris in loculis reponantur. * * * Vulgaris quoque ac fere quotidiana consul- tudo in Civibus, honestisque hominibus sepeliendis ist haec servatur. Lhama, vel Traba quivis aninam, ut somniant, e summo capite cadaveris ad hue tepescentis primum educit. Educit autem hoc pacto cutem verticis digitis arete prehendam, et corrngatam tam celeriac vehementi succussionis impetu attrahit, ut eam uno momento subsilire, ac crepitarefaciat. Tum vero, inquiunt, anima defuncti erupisse creditur. Capt. Samuel Turner (Embassy, p. 260) says: It is the custom of Tibet to preserve entire the mortal remains of their sovereign lama only; every other corpse is either consumed by fire or given to be the pro- miscuous food of beasts and birds of prey. As soon as life has left the body of a lama it is placed upright, sitting in an attitude of devotion, his legs being folded before him, with the instep resting upon each thigh and the soles of the feet turned upward. * * * The right hand is rested with its back upon the thigh, with the thumb bent across the palm. The left arm is bent and held close to the body, the hand being open and the thumb at right angles with the fingers touching the point of the shoulder. This is the attitude of abstracted meditation. If we seek for mortuary customs similar to those of the Tibetans we have not far to go to find them among other Buddhist people, who may probably have seen in the custom of having their dead bodies fed to birds or beasts a supreme act of charity, for which Gautama Buddha himself set the example when, in several of his births, prior to his reaching Buddhahood, as related in the Jataka, he gave his body as food to hungry tiger whelps or other famished animals. In Siam it is not uncommon for a person to direct that his body after death shall be cut up and fed to vultures and crows (Sir John Bow- ring, The Kingdom and People of Siam, I, p. 122), and in Korea it is cus- tomary, after the bodies of lamas have been consumed by fire, to mix the ashes with rice flour and feed them to birds. The ‘towers of silence” of the Parsees in which the bodies of the dead are devoured by birds is another analogous method, but the reasons which have called this custom into existence with them, are, of course, quite different.t * For a vivid description of a “ terrestrial burial,” see Annales de la Propagation de la Foi, 1865, p. 289; Conf. also Georgi, Alph. Tibet., p. 441 et seq. tThe Kafirs put their dead in boxes and expose them on the tops of high moun- tains (Sir P. Lumsden, Jour, Anth. Inst. 111, p. 361. 730 REPORT OF NATIONAL MUSEUM, 1893. In Ladak bodies are burned fifteen or twenty days after death, during which time prayers are said by lamas. In the case of a very wealthy man or a chief, after the body has been burned in a metal vessel, the ashes are carefully collected and made into an image of the deceased. A ch’iirten or pyramid is erected for the ashes, and in it are placed various kinds of grain, precious stones and metal, rolls of prayers and incense. The body of a great lama is interred in a sitting posture with his clothes and all the implements of worship he was accustomed to use daily. The coftin is deposited in a ch’iirten, before which for some time food and water are offered daily, and a light is kept burning every night. (Alex. Cunningham, Ladak, p. 309.) As to their signs of mourning, Chinese authors tell us that the Tibe- tans, both “‘men and women put on mourning clothes, and for one hundred days they wear no colored clothes, and during that period they neither comb their hair nor wash. The women do not wear their earrings and put away their prayer beads, and these are the only changes (in dress) they make. The rich invite lamas at short intervals to come and read the sacred books, so as to procure for the deceased the joys of the nether world. After one year it is all at an end.” (Journ. Roy. Asiat. Soc., n.8., XXIII, p. 233.) X. RELIGION-LAMAS-RELIGIOUS ARCHITECTURE-OBJECTS CONNECTED WITH RELIGIOUS WORSHIP. It does not enter into the plan of this paper to describe even cur- sorily the religious beliefs of the Tibetans. Many works have already been written on the subject, but much remains yet to be done before we possess a thorough knowledge of it. Buddhism, which was intro- duced into the country in the seventh century A. D., has remained since then the religion of Tibet. It is that form of Buddhism which is known as Mahayana Buddhism, in which magic demonolatry and mys- ticism have become such commanding features that it is with difficulty that we can trace in the forms of worship obtaining at present in Tibet any of the simplicity characteristic of early Buddhism and still to be found, to a certain extent, among the Buddhists of Southern Asia.* The Buddhism of Tibet is usually called Lamaism, the word “ lama,” written bla-ma and meaning “the superior one,” being that given by Chinese and foreigners generally to the members of the Buddhist monastic order in Tibet. In Tibet, however, this word is reserved for * Primitive Lamaism may be defined as a priestly mixture of Shivaic mysticism, magic and Indo-Tibetan demonolatry overlaid by the thinnest veneer of Mahayana Buddhism. And to the present day Lamaism still retains these features. * * * But neither in the essentials of Lamaism itself nor in its sectarian aspects do the truly Buddhist doctrines, as taught by Sakya Muni, play any leading part. (L.A. Waddell, Lamaism and its Sects, in Imp. and Asiatic Quarterly Review, vu. and his Buddhism of Tibet, p. 17.) NOTES ON THE ETHNOLOGY OF TIBET. or those monks who have not only taken the highest theological degrees, but who have also led a saintly life and become famed for their knowl- edge. The word draba is used by Tibetans as a generic term for all persons connected with the order, monks as well as lay brethren.* The usual dress of the lamas consists in a kilt reaching down to a little above the ankle, a close-fitting waistcoat, similar to that worr by the laity (see p. 687), and a shawl passed around the body, and the left arm, the end thrown over the right forearm, so as to leave the right shoulder and arm uncovered. The head is shaved and the lamas wear no head covering except during church ceremonies or when traveling; in the latter case they wear the same kind of hats as the laity and also the same kind of clothes; and in the former, hats of yellow or red color, varying in shape according to the school or sect to which their convent belongs. Gélugpa lamas usually wear a high yellow hat witha fringe, closely resembling the helmets worn by carabiniers. (pl.32.) It is called dja-ser or “ yellow hat.” + The clothes of the wealthier lamas are made of tirma (see p. 699), on which are neatly sewed a few little patches, as it is forbidden them to wear any but torn or worn-out stuffs. Those of the poorer lamas are of prukt ; Emil Schlagintweit (Buddhism in Tibet, pp. 170-175) says of the dress of lamas (he in all probability refers to those of Ladak) that ‘“ their caps are made of double felt or cloth, between which are put charms. The shape of the cap varies considerably, but it is curious that they are all of Chinese or Mongolian fashion, whilst the form of the robes has been adopted from the Hindus.’ Most of the caps are conical with a large flap, which is generally doubled up, but is let down over the ears in cold weather. The head lamas wear a particular cap, generally low and conical, and some head priests of western Tibet have an hexagonal hat formed of pasteboard, and showing four steps diminishing toward the top.” § Others wear a miter of red cloth ornamented with flowers of gold worked in the stuff. This latter kind of cap bears a remarkable resemblance to the miters of Roman Catholic bishops. The gown reaches to the calves, and is fastened round the waist by a slender gir- dle; it has an upright collar and is closely buttoned up at the neck. In Sikkim the lamas occasionally wear, slung round the shoulders, a kind of red and yellow striped woolen stole. The inner vest has no sleeves and reaches to the haunches. The trousers are fastened to the waist by a sort of lace running ina drawing hem. In winter they *¥For a general knowledge of lamaic worship, I must refer the reader to C.F. Keppen, Die Religion des Buddha, Vol.11, and Emil Schlagintweit, Buddhism in Tibet, where a full account of the various religious ceremonies will be found; also, for various interesting details, to Sarat Chandra Das, Indian Pundits in the Land of Snow, and to Dr. L. A. Waddell’s, The Buddhism of Tibet, now the standard work on this subject. tDr. Waddell, op. cit., p. 196, shows 20 styles of lama’s hats and cowls. {On the Gelugpa Sect, see Dr. Waddell, op. cit., p. 38. § See for an illustration of this cap, Alex. Cunningham. Ladak, pl. 26. 132 REPORT OF NATIONAL MUSEUM, 1893. are worn over the larger gown as a better protection against the cold. In Bhutan the lamas wear, instead of trousers, philibegs hanging nearly as far as the knee. The cloak is worn, in the way previously described, by all lamas; it is their distinctive ecclesiastical dress. The costume of the nuns (ani?) is in all essential particulars the same as that of the monks; in fact, it is quite difficult to tell an old ani from aman when one meets her with shaved head, a prayer-wheel in one hand and alms bowl in the other, wandering from house to house begging. Other styles of headdress, as worn in eastern Tibet, are described in my Land of the Lamas, p. 238. (See also Alex. Cunningham, Ladak, p. 372.) 3 The boots of lamas are of the kind previously described (p. 686), the only peculiarity being as there stated, that the vamps are of white cloth and the tops of red pulo. The costume worn by lamas in Tibet is, with slight modifications, the same as that still worn in Nepal by Buddhist monks, and which was originally the national costume of the inhabitants of that country, and was probably borrowed from the latter by the early Tibetan monks. At religious ceremonies the priests wear * * * a close-fitting jacket called the “‘chivasa” and a long skirt or petticoat called the ‘“‘nivasa,” which reaches to the ankles, and which is gathered at the waist into a number of small plaits or folds. The chivasa and nivasa are joined together into one dress at the waist, round which there is wrapped an ordinary ‘‘kammerband” or thick-rolled waistcoat. (H. A. Oldfield, Sketches from Nepal, 11, 140.) Religious buildings.—Religious buildings and monuments in Tibet com- prise, (1) Gonba or monasteries; (2) Li’a-k’ang or temples; (3) Meh’od- rten (pronounced cW’iirten), literally ‘offerings receptacle,” and perhaps better known by their Indian name of chaitya, and tsa-tsa k’ang, recep- tacles for offerings called tsa-tsa; (4) Mdni walls, or piles of stones on which are incised prayers or magic formulas; (5) Lab-tsé, or heaps of stones on the summits of mountain passes. The monasteries usually consist of rows of small houses of the usual Tibetan style of architecture, built in close proximity to, and commonly around, one or more temples. These houses consist of a dwelling, gen- erally two stories high, a storehouse and a small courtyard. The ground floor of the dwelling is used as a stable. The outside walls of the houses are painted white, and those of the dwellings of high lama dignitaries red. These houses belong to individual lamas, who rent portions of them to pilgrims or to resident lamas who have no homes of their own. Around the whole monastery is usually a high wall, and the approach to the main entrance is marked by rows of ch’tirtens and mani walls. All lamas-residing within a gonba are entered on a register, and are obliged, when duly qualified after a period of study, to take part in the daily ceremonies performed in the house of assembly (duk’ang). In Report of National Museum, 1893.—Rockhill PLATE 32. YELLOW HAT, WORN BY LAMAS OF THE GELUG SECT IN CHURCH CEREMONIES. Cat. No. 131181, U.S. N. M. Kumbum. DIE ANVNINMON Ole PILATES BS. CEREMONIAL OBJECTS. . WOODEN Mop. Used in certain religious ceremonies, depicting a man driving a loaded yak and followed by a dog. Ts’aidam. (Cat. No. 131013, U. S. N. M.) . COPPER WATER BorrLe. With red truk cover; used by Lamas. Kumbum. (Cat. No. 167167, U.S. N. M.) 3. CLAY Tsa-Tsa. Image of Tsongkapa. ~ (Cat. No. 167170c, U.S. N. M.) . CLAY Tsa-TsA. Image of Tsépamed. (Cat. No. 167170a, U.S. N. M.) Ciay Tsa-Tsa. Ten images of Tsépamed (?) cl’urtens on either side of each row of images. (Cat. No. 167170b, U.S. N. M.) Report of National Museum 1893.—Rockhill PLATE 33. CEREMONIAL OBJECTS. NOTES ON THE ETHNOLOGY OF TIBET. 733 consideration of this they are supplied daily with tea, and aiso receive an annual allowance of barley. The lamas partake of their first meal after noon, until which time they are only allowed to moisten their lips with water. For this purpose they carry in their belts a little copper or silver bottle sewed in a bit of truk (see pl. 33, fig. 2). This one has two brass bands around the mouth; it has a brass stopper, on the top of which is a hole, through this passes a leather string, by which the stopper is held in place. The temples (lW’a-k’ang) are throughout Tibet of a Chinese style of architecture, the roofs being, however, flat, dirt covered ones, except in some of the larger and more famous temples, where Chinese tiles, yellow or blue, have been used. The orientation of the temples does not appear to be a matter of much importance, as I have seen some facing south, others facing east, but I do not remember having ever heard of any tacing west. Schlagintweit (op. cit., p. 188) says: The walls of the temples look toward the four quarters of heaven, and each side should be painted with a particular color, viz, the north side with green, the south side with yellow, the east side with white, and the west side with red, but this rule seems not to be strictly adhered to. Most temples, as a matter of fact, are painted red, and the columns in front of them are also frequently painted of the same color. As to the interior arrangement of the temples, I must refer the reader io Dr. Waddell’s work (p. 287 et seq.) and to Georgi’s Alphabetum Tibet- anum (p. 406 et seq.),in which latter work will be found a very detailed description of the great temple of Lh’asa (the Jo k’ang). The ch’iirten or ‘receptacles for offerings” are built over the remains of revered lamas, or else they are simply decorative or commemorate some important event. When simply used as receptacles for offerings they are filled with tsa-tsa, that being the name given to a small clay cone which the Tibetais make 1n incalculable thousands in molds and deposit in these cl’iirtens. In some parts of the country they build little hutches of rough logs for this purpose. These are called ¢sa-tsa Kang. These tsa-tsa are usually conical, in imitation of the form of the ch’iir- en. In figs. 3, 4, and 5, of pl. 33, are depicted another variety of tsa- tsa, flat and in the shape of a shrine. In one of these, which is 3 inches long and about 2 wide, are 10 figures of gods in velief; in another is Tsépamed (Amitayus), and in a third Tsongkapa is represented. The form of the chortens varies much more than that of their prototypes, the stupas. The base of the stupa is a cylinder or cube, upon which a body shaped like a cupola is set up. Stupas which have been broken down have been found to be solid buildings, with a little shrine in the center only, in which has been deposited the burnt bones of a human being, together with coins, jewels, and inscribed slabs. The bones are sometimes inclosed in small cases made of the precious metals. In the Tibetan chortens this form has in general undergone considerable modifica- tions. The unaltered ancient type has remained limited to the smaller chortens put up in the temples. The principal difference between a stupa and chorten is that in 734 REPORT OF NATIONAL MUSEUM, 1893. the latter the cupola is either surmounted by a cone or that it is inverted. The most general style is the following: The base is a cube, upon which rests the inverted cupola. This cupola is the principal part. It incloses the objects enshrined, and in it is the hole leading to the space for the offerings. A graduated pinnacle rises above it, and this is either a cone of stones ora wooden spire. It is surmounted by a disk placed horizontally and a spear-shaped point, or, instead of it, by a crescent supporting a globe and the pear upon that. * * ~* The materials used for the chortens in the open air are rough stones, bricks, or clay; they are almost all of solid masonry. The outer surfaces are thickly plastered with mortar, which is colored red with the dust of pounded bricks. * * * The height of the chorten is in general from 8 to 15 feet, though a few considerably exceed this latter height. ~ Those set up in the temples are molded from metal, or, more generally, from clay mixed with chopped straw. Occasionally they are carved of wood, but such chorten scarcely ever exceed 4 feet. They are often not higher than as many inches. (Emil. Schlagintweit, Buddhism in Tibet, pp. 192- 196. )’ There is in the Museum collection a photograph of the celebrated lamaist sanetuarv of Wu-t’ai shan (Ri-vo tsé na), in Shan-hsi, in northern China, which shows a very fine ch’tirten, probably 60 feet high, with a large gilt spire of the horizontal circle and vertical disk and crescent style described by Schlagintweit. In this ch’iirten is said to be kept a body relic of the Buddha Gautama. Mani walls.—This name is given to long, low walls of rough stones, on the surface of which are incised sacred formulas, usually the famous six-syllable formula Omi mdni padmé him. The name given the wall is derived from the name of this prayer, which is col- loquially called ‘*the mani.” They are also known as mendong, prob- ably written mang dong, “many stones.” Frequently images of gods are incised on the stones, and I have also seen long passages of the Scriptures on them. Frequently a whole mani wall will be covered with slabs on which are inscribed one of the long theological works in which lamas so delight, sometimes the Pradjna paramita in 8,000 verses. Plate 34 shows an inscribed stone from a mdni wall in a Bonbo country of northeastern Tibet (Jyadé). It is of slate, is painted red, and the mantra incised on it is Om, matrimuyé sale hdu, a favorite one of the Bonbos. Schlagintweit (op. cit., p. 197) says the longest mani wall known of is 2,200 feet long. Some, he says, have a kind of tower at either end, occasionally in the form of a ch’iirten, with a sacred image in front, aud a large pole to which flags with prayers are attached are also not unfrequent at the ends of manis. Travelers, when passing along these mdni walls, leave them on their left side if they are true believers, and on their right if they belong to the Bonbo faith.} Lab-tsé or heaps of stones, also called dobong, and in Mongol obo, are to be seen on the summit of every pass in Tibet, and frequently at the *The shape of the ch’iirten is symbolical, but I can not enter into an explanation of it here. See Dr. Waddell, op. cit., p. 262 et seq. t See also on ch’iirtens, H. A. Oldfield, Sketches from Nipal, 11, 211. a! ‘Report of National Museum, 1893.—Rockhill. PLATE 34. PIECE OF RED SCHIST, WITH dharani INCISED ON SURFACE. * e. Jyad TANS Lie tS ING Wile Cat. No. 16 NOTES ON THE ETHNOLOGY OF TIBET. 735 mouths of the valleys leading up to them. Though in all probability they had no religious signification originally, they have acquired one, and the stone which every traveler as he passes by does not fail to throw on the heap, is now put there as an offering to the gods, and when throwing it down each one makes a short prayer, which ends with, “ Lha jya-lo, lha jya-lo” ‘Gods, (give me) a hundred years; gods, (give me) a hundred years.” In these stone leaps are usually stuck large bunches of brushwood and also frequently huge wooden arrows, the meaning of which latter I have failed to ascertain. Bits of wool, rags, and pieces of cotton on which are stamped mantras and dharanis flutter from the branches or hang in long rows from strings tied to them and to some big stone fifty or more feet off.* Stone heaps similar in shape and built for similar purposes are found in the Navajo and Moqui countries in Arizona. Speaking of the Moqui, Fewkes says: Ma-sau-wuh shrines are simply heaps of sticks or piles of stones, and it is cus- tomary for an Indian toiling up the trail with a heavy bundle of wood on the back to throw a small fragment from the load upon these shrines or to cast a stone upon them as he goes to his farm. These are offerings to Ma-sau-wuh, the fire god, or deity of the surface of earth. (J. Walter Fewkes, Journ. Amer, Ethnology and Archeology, Iv, p. 41.) The custom of making offerings on mountain tops is too common in other countries, especially in South America, to require more than a passing reference here. Acosta, in his History of the Indies (11, p. 309, Hakluyt Soc. Edit.), says of the Peruvians; They have used as they goe by the way, to cast in the crosse ways, on the hilles, and toppes of mountaines, which they call Apachitas, olde shooes, feathers, and coca chewed, being an herb they use much. And when they have nothing left, they cast a stone as an offering, that they might passe freely, and have greater force, the which they say increaseth by this means. ~ * * They used another offering no Jesse absurd, pulling the hair from the eyebrowes to offer it to the Sunne, hills, Apachitas, to the winds, or to any other thing they feare. We also find this custom of offering rags at sacred shrines in Ire: land and among the Mohammedan peoples of northern Africa. The custom of walking around a sacred building or monument, a custom called k’orwa in Tibetan, was followed in India in the early days of Buddhism as well as by the wild Turkish tribes which inhab- ited northern and northeastern Asia in the second century B.C. Thus in the CWvien Han shu, book 94, it is said that the Hsiung-nu and the Sien-pi, at the great autumnal sacrifice to heaven, rode three times around a little clump of trees. It is also common in parts of Africa, as, for example, among the Oromo of Abyssinia (Borelli, L’Ethiopie méridionale, p. 210), and was followed centuries ago in northern Eurove and in other parts of the world. (See Land of the Lamas, p. 67.) *On this subject the reader should also consult Emil Schlagintweit’s valuable work, pp 198-200. 736 REPORT OF NATIONAL MUSEUM, 1893. i A Tibetan history of the sandal-wood image of the Buddha, known as the Tsandan Jovo and now preserved in the Chan-tan sst at Peking, referring to the benefits to be derived from walking round sacred monu- ments, says (p. 14 et seq.): He who walks around a ch’iirten, In all circumstances of life, By gods, nagas, and yakshas, As by rakshas, shall be honored. Whoever makes a ceremonial circle Of the ch’iirten of the Lord of the world [i.e., the Buddha] Acquires more [might] than by reciting Charms during a million of world periods. Fire and poison and weapons Shall never bring about his death; Living in wisdom, in the fullness of time— When his life is run, he shall die. He who circumambulates a ch’iirten Shall have wealth of castles, wealth of land, Of villages a goodly store; He shall reach the summit of worldly bliss. While walking round the ch’tirten he must repeat the following Sans- krit charm: ; Namo Bhagavate ratna ketu radjaya Tathagathayu aryate samyak-sam-Buddhaya tatyatha. Om ratne, ratne, maha ratna, ratna vidzaya. Swaha. Objects connected with religious worship.—The rosary (treng-wa) is not only an essential part of the lama’s dress but of that of nearly all the laity, male and female, in Tibet. Asa Buddhist article [says Dr. Waddell] the rosary is especially peculiar to the northern school of Buddhists, and the outcome of the esoteric teachings of the Mahayana school, instilling belief in the potency of mutterimg mystic spells and other strange formulas. (L. A. Waddell, Jour. Asiat. Soc. Bengal, LXx1, p. 24, et seq.) On pl. 35 is shown the form of rosary in common use among lamas. It contains 108 discoidal shell beads, of uniform size, divided into four groups of 27 beads each by 3 red coral beads; where the two ends of the string of beads come together they are passed through a large amber bead, a smaller discoidal, and a conical one, so that the two look hke a fat, long-necked vase. These last two beads are called do-dzin (rdog-hdzin), “retaining or seizing beads.” Four short leather thongs strung on the rosary beside the do-dzin by silver rings have silver beads on each of them, and at the lower end of one there is a little silver dorjé. These strings are used as counters (drang-dzin) in the following fashion: When a certain charm has been recited 108 times the first bead on the string, to which is attached the dorjé, is slid up the string, and so on for each series of 108 repetitions till the tenth time; then the first bead on the string next to the dorjé string is slid up, and so on for the four strings of counters. Usually the string Report of National Museum, 1893 —Rockhill. PLATE 35. ROSARY OF SHELL BEADS ; COUNTERS OF SILVER. . 167271, U.S. N. M. Kumbum. Fig. Fig. Fig. — 2 o. EX(PEANATIOINS Oba Agnes sion ROSARIES. . RosEwoop Rosary. Ta-chien-lu (Cat. No. 167267, U. S. N. M.) YELLOW Woop Rosary. Bat’ang. (Cat. No. 131058, U. S. N. M.) MOHAMMEDAN ROSARY. Of bone and date seeds. (Cat. No. 167300, U. S. N. M.) Hsi-ning Fu. PLATE 36. Rockhill. 1893. Report of National Museum, — Seqeecceset f\ é ROSARIES. NOTES ON THE ETHNOLOGY OF TIBET. (aw next to the one on which is hung the dorjé has a bell (drilbw) attached to it; the third string has a magic peg (purbu) on it, and the fourth a wheel (Kor-lo). Rosaries are frequently ornamented with small coral or turquoise beads hanging from them, and it is usual to put narrow silver rings on either side of the large coral beads dividing the successive groups of beads in the string. Another treng-wa, the beads of which are sections of human skulls, and the dividing beads pieces of conch shell, is in the Museum collec- tion. The do-dzin are two in number, a large amber bead and a small wooden one. Such rosaries, Dr. Waddell remarks (loc. sup. cit.), are especially used for the worship of Dorjé jig-cl’é (Yama), the King of the Dead. One set of small beads, of narrow discs of rosewood, with four red coral beads, is shown in fig. 1 of pl. 36. In this set the coral beads have to be counted, so as to complete the number of 108. This string is as it came from the dealer, and has no counters on it. Such rosaries are apparently of the class called ‘‘ red sandal-wood rosary” by Dr. Wad- dell, which, he says, are used only in the worship of the fierce deity Tamdrin, a special protector of lamaism. Fig. 2 shows a rosary of discoidal beads of yellow wood, in which narrow lines of lighter color radiate from the center to near the circum- ference. The dividing beads are of the same material as the rest of the rosary but slightly larger and thicker. This rosary belongs to the class called ser-treng, or ‘yellow rosary,” and is the special rosary of the Gélupa, or reformed school of lamaism. It may be used for all kinds of worship, including that of the furies. On pl. 357 is shown a Chinese rosary of 18 olive-shaped beads of some hard, light-brown wood (or seeds); each bead is cut into an image of one of the 18 Lohan (Arhats). This is the usual number of beads used in rosaries (su-chu) in China. Another Chinese rosary, made of some kind of rough brown seed, possibly the same as that used in Tibet for rosaries, and there called Bodhi shing, isin the Museum collection.* Dr. Waddell (op. sup. cit., 28) says the tree which bears this seed grows in the outer Himalayas. Besides the materials used in the manufacture of rosaries mentioned by Dr. Waddell, I found that the Tibetans greatly prized for this pur- pose two varieties of .seeds, the one, called by the Chinese feng-yen po-tt mu or * Bodhi wood with phoenix eyes,” the other hsing yiieh mu or ‘¢wood with the stars and moon onit.” These seeds are turned spher- ical and then polished. The feng-yen kuo is, I believe, the same as the Pin-po of the Cantonese, identified, if I am not wrong, with Sterculia lanceolata. Rosaries made at Wu-t’aishan, the famous lamaist sanctuary of northern China, are turned from pieces of poplar wood and _ stained * Not illustrated in this paper. H. Mis, 184, pt. 2 AZ 738 REPORT OF NATIONAL MUSEUM, 1893. yellow. Great quantities are carried away from this place every year by Mongol and Tibetan pilgrims. Pl]. 36, fig. 3 shows a rosary of 99 bone beads divided into three series of 33 beads each by date stones. The two ends of the string pass through a large bead made of a piece of conch shell. This is the style of rosary used by Mohammedans in China. The number 99 corresponds to the number of the names or attributes of Allah.* Prayer-wheels.—The same teachings which caused the northern Bud- dhists to believe in the efficacy of continually mumbling unintelligible formulas must be held responsible for the invention of the ingenious mechanical contrivance known as a * prayer wheel” or “ prayer-barrel,” which, when turned the right way—from left to right—is as efficacious as if the person turning it, or who had it built, recited himself all the prayers inclosed in it on printed slips of paper. Each complete revo- lution of the wheel counts as one repetition of all the prayers contained in the barrel. Alexander Cunningham (Ladak, p. 375) says that the earliest men- tion of the prayer-wheel is found in the Records of the Western World of the Chinese Buddhist pilgrim Fa-hsien, who visited India in the fifth century of our era. This, however, is an error resulting from a mis- translation in Abel Remusat’s rendering of the Chinese text. Gen. Cunningham also gives a medal of Hushka (first century A. D.) on which is a man holding in his hand what he takes to be a prayer wheel. At all events the prayer wheel is and has been for five or six centuries at least a popular instrument in not only Tibet but in Korea and Japan, in which two latter countries, however, only the larger ch’ds k’or-lo are found. (See on this subject Emil Schlagintweit, Bud- dhism in Tibet, p. 229 et seq. and Land of the Lamas, p. 334.) The prayer-wheel is of two kinds: The first comprises hand wheels, wheels turned by the wind or by water, and small stationary wheels or barrels placed either in a house or in rows near a temple or along an interior gallery of a house or the base of a cl’iirten. The second class are much larger machines and are only found in temples. They are sometimes 30 or 40 feet high and 15 or 20 feet in diameter. In them is placed a collection of the canonical books of lamaism (Aandjur), and by means of bars fixed in the lower extremity of the axis of the barrel it is put in motion. These wheels, from the works in them being “the law ” (ch’ds), are called ch’ds k’or-lo, while the first class of wheels hav- ing usually only the formula om mani padme him (colloquially called “the mani”) printed on the pages wrapped up in them, are known as mani k’or-lo. The prayer-wheel consists of a cylinder of metal, or, in the larger wheels, of leather or even wood, through which runs an axle of wood or iron around which it pivots. In the interior are arranged, one on ——— * On Burmese Buddhist rosaries, see Dr. L. A. Waddell, Proc. Asiatic Soc. of Bengal, December, 1892. Report of National Museum, 1893.—Rockhill. PLATE 37. CHINESE ROSARY. Each bead cut to represent one of the eighteen Lohan. Cat. No. 130388, U. S. N. M. Report of National Museum, 1893.—Rocknhil| PLATE 38. PRAYER WHEEL COVERED WITH RED COTTON CLOTH. Roughly carved wooden handle. Cat. No. 167169, U. S. N. M. Ts’aidam. Sen heey Be ola. 2. Lb. ‘oma: ) g. 2a. sy 2D o. 2b. . In oun Gs ig. 2d. ¢ 9 mw. 2e. 2 2. o. EXiPLAN AT IOIN ssdessecasseoss ac seeesces 496 Death Valley Expedition- 175 Ch ‘Gs-bjin jamba, supposed image of - --. - 743 reference to papers by..-.--- 291 Christiania, Zoological Museum of, birds Cowbird eggs, list of nests where found. - 594 RECO VEC e LOM re se som as eeeer elon ee 63 | Cowbirds, The. By Maj.C.E.Bendire.. 587 Ch’uba, national dress of Tibetans ..----- 6845 |NCoxsWrave.chiet. Clerk... Jo=ccce sae eee 187 Chying-pa, Tibetan felt---.------..-.....- 700 | Crandall, C. 8., Colorado plants received @lamipittydeAceeeesoee = -= =e eees weenie & 71 APOMC see eile e eee eee 176 Clark pAG HO wardeenere see sees ee sees a= 120 Crosby, F. W., assistance rendered by. --- 183 reference to paper by.- 291 geological collections made Clark, Josepbine A., reference to paper Diy oa toe taser 184 BUD ae ee eae ee nei pennies 291 Crosby, W. O., assistance rendered by- --. 183 Clarke thei ees eae sia renee aaron 69, 71, 110 | glacial products received honorary curator of depart- WAOIN soacssoseconncobosce 183 ment of minerals.....--..- 178 | views of glacial phenon- reference to papers bv-.--.-- 291 ena received from...-.--- 184 “Classification of the Anglo-J ewish exhi- Cross, V7hitman=2-.--2s-s2<.--c-ss5e5 oer 71 IMO Ns <2 Sonnac espcosconnapesseseseseas VOOs i Crotahi@e cecescaaasne one ouee see ceee eS 363 ‘Classification of objects relating to @rotalus' cee ac cesccceae ates sam eacee ae 421 Catholic worship and religion”. ---..-.. 763 adamanteuss eee sesessee see eee 433 ‘Classification of University of Pennsyl- | DULOR Sec Reco eee a ee ee 436 vania, exhibit of religions”’.....------- 765 | iOpen Ne) do sehaSkoscsosoasoncac 439 Cobra, affinity of Elaps to ..-.-..-..----. 355 | Cerastests esse ee ae eye eee 450 Colin, We -Achillessculptors:2--2--------- 53 | Confluentus=eee see ee eee eee 383, 440 Collections, table showing annualincrease | IROLTICUSS oes e see ee ee eee 426 in, 1882-1893 - 66 | lepidusmaseens seer eres ee eee 452 increase in the, lu ciferiss=sfsene sooo sne eee 445 ISB) Sasebe soe 61 | Mitchellit, 2225225. - see esos eae 454 transmitted to educational pyochusie eee 456 establishments -......--.-- 189 | AD IS ce mcocckcosanccuuseccas 424 Collett, Dr. Robert, birds received from.- 63 | Gigris sik okay eee eee eee 449 @ollinsy Wises oessee seas ce-ceeeSasee sens NWO) Guliny Stewart=-o-js<=-aoocee oom eae ne 89, 91, 136 COlOTISh ee seen ne nce eens eine 192 “Chinese games with dice Columbian Expositionin Madrid.....-.--- 86, 760 and dominoes,”’ by ------ 489 documents Cunningham, Capt. Alexander, descrip- relating to 324 tion of Ladaki women by -------------- 694 Gomly, Maj. Clifton, WS. Ay -- ==. ------- 110 | Curtis, William Eleroy.-.....-.-. 89, 91, 110, 114, 203 Comparative anatomy, department of. --. 169 | Cushing, Frank Hamilton .......--. 54, 72, 127, 138 784 INDEX. Page Cycadean trunks, obtained by purchase. - 177 |) Downes, Andrew. secs) eer eee Dall, William Healey, honorary curator of the department of mollusks -.-.---- 155, 157 reference to papers L\peabbsanccas s0ee 291 Manel WO neil eee es eee ee aie eee 71 David, George R.-.--- caaaapse emaetoscen 114 Death Valley Expedition, reference to report on the botany of-..----.---------- 175 Denslow, HC.) taxidermist ----------<- -- 145 Department of Agriculture, collections of mollusks transmitted by--------------- 157, 158 Deregibus, C., experiments by .-.--------- 347 « Descriptions of new genera and species of crabs from the west coast of North America and the Sandwich Islands,” Dresden Museum, sheet-iron tray used in- Dresser, H. E., birds’ skin received from... | Drolma;imareofso. en eee ee eee eeeece Dugés, A. experiments) byee---eeee ae oe Dunbar, U.S. J., figures for World’s Fair modeled Dy e-e eee SCULDLOl=aeee eee eee Diiner.<< 2. see = ee eee eee ee eee Dust-proof Casene. =o se— seen ee =e eee Dwarf cowbird jos.--ss-o-e-e sees ee eae Dy che, Ti. db) ...2.ke ee eee ee eee | Dyke Road Museum, Brighton .--....-..- |) Bar) WR Ee ee sais eset ee eee Eastern area, defensive weapons of the-.. Eaton, Daniel Cady, reference to papers by Fekfeldt, J. W., reference to paper by ---- | Hdmonds HO. setae ee eee eee | Hdwards'smassasau car esaeee- ee eee nee | Edwards, Vainalun. ccse- occmecaeaaeceeeee Heeleston, Dr: Edward: --2--2-2-seeeeeees Eitfe, Otto Edmund, observations by.-.-.- Eigenmann, Carl H., fishes lent to..-..-... reference to papers byzeioeeese eee Blapidess 25-p eee scenes ee eee in United States, natural history Of. 5. sjac cece se tee eee laps CuryxanchU si eee see ae Elaps to Cobra, affinity of ------.----222-- Elliot, Daniel Giraud, reference to papers Elson & Co., A. W., photogravure pre- sented by =... cen sictw sesso eee Bllsworth; dic Wise ose eeeeee eee eee Hmmons) LiewtGuela Use Nese eeee eee | Emmons; Sak. sss-2e sasceet cee eee eee Bmerson; Buki.ssossccee see eee eee Environmental groups ..-....--.--..----- Erickson: Wei statuelot-=-----e ese eee Eskinio dominoes) 2) ese 44-255-— eee eee Esposizione Vaticanas-+---«-=-2>=5- 552246 Ethnology, department of.......-..--...- | Ethnology of Tibet, notes on the-....----. Europe, list of accessions from-..-....--.--- Evans, A. W., reference to paper by..---- Bvermann; (Bs Wi=-s22522 see ee ee eee VNy SaeassSoorncocecsoce collects reptiles .....-.--. mammals of South Da- kota collected by-.--- reference to papers by. skeleton of Steller’s Sea Cow, obtained through Examination and report, geographical in- Ub MCAMONOL see eriae ee ene 166 “Description of newspecies of American fresh-water crabs,’’ publication of.-.--. 166 Desgodins, Father, description of Tibe- tans Dye sea e nee 676, 677 on rights of Tibetan OMe Ny see 682 on Tibetan dyeing. - 701 on Tibetan weavers - 699 Development and arrangement of the €xM DION SCHICS sear eee ese siaam er = 73 Development of the Museum ...--.-.-.--- 3 TOC OR RARSeEA 6 Dewey, Lyster H., reference to paper by-- 293 Dexter Wiewis sseescee eee seeee ees 70 marine invertebrates from the Azores, received from. - 165 Diamond rathlesnakes-s-s- sees a 433 Dice and dominoes, Chinese games with. Byte arn © alin s-eeeet sa esse ee eer er 489 illerd) Si. o. + see sone eee 71 | report on fossil plants obtained I M/eesaoccncocooobUceaceteeae 178 Din waddie, Walliam)ss----s-- sep eeeseeee 139 Distribution of collections ....-.-..------ 189 Museum publications. --- 188 specimens, geographical statement of ...-/-..-.- 197 1 Deas Tee Oey WUE See a aeasnoeeonsensoon 60 Documents relating to Madrid Exposition - 324 W orld’s Columbian Exposition......- 316 Dop-faced rattlesnake so. - certs nil 424 Domesticated birds, exhibit of ...----..-. 172 Dominoves\a form of dicOs-cosece. seceesae 532 IBULMESC See o eee eee ee ee wae 528 HSIIMO! = qjes tees ceee cose aon 529 fortune-telling with........... 517 from Suhchaw. << =.- a2 -sssssse 518 PAMes wibhise. 28. pe eee 508 into Europe, introduction of... 530 invention of the game......--. 530 Koreans. -csecsesce qveescesemss 521 Shan. sess ee eae eee 528 SiaMOSO:d< o7 see amis, ew cece 529 Dorjé, used with Tibetar bells...-......-.. 740 Dow, John Melmoth, death of......-....-- 86 Wor limipy eM OMAS -2---eeeoees ses a eeee eee Gulf coast massasauga..-..:.-----......+ 415.) “Holm, Theodor: 222-2 ose eee eee Gunkar yijin norbu, image of .........--.- 743 aleohohe plants lent for Guin Eh Baits ISR eametsosoconobbesseenpaodaoce 72 study, t0.--222-62-- ees Guthrie, Ossian, drift copper obtained reference to paper by..-. 294 HOM = 24 cca ora ce een See eee eee eee 184 | Holmes, Walliam Wenryessssssee eee eee 127, 138 Hains, jr.. Ben., views of caves received reference to pa- HOI coat Sart hee See cise cise hea tasescateios 184 pers) by eeseses 295 Hales, H., ancient pueblo vases purchased Holub: Dri Bmiliec. se see eee eee 48 TER OTA Caen tore aH See Ae meee Beet 138 Holzinger, John M., reference to papers Hancock, John, taxidermist.--.-...-...-- 43 DY ttasoce- > eson eaeeeese ale ebcterste sisiceio 295 Harris. George E., contributes reptiles. . - 150: )\ (Holaner; ‘Hranks X= sic eeese eo eee 73 Harris, Gilbert Denisoa, reference to Homologies of bones in vertebrates .-.--- 170 Paes Scccrcesepsesoseacobessoss 292,294 Hooker, Dr. om dress of Tibetan women. 697 iMarnis: Walter Ht. = 2 s.cescceis te acoso ee 114. Hoplopterus spinosus. habits of........-. 658 Hats Of Libetans ose has eee eee eee 688) || Horan, Henryes 2s. s ose eee 89,191 Haupt, Paul, honorary curator of oriental Horned rattlesnake =o22-s-s-e eee eee 450 ANLIQUILIES eeeeee eee 135) jourh) Wialtersss-c=-==-= ae eee 88, 89, 91 reference to paper by....-.-- 294 installation of material at Harlequin’ snake: ces se. e- eee ae 352, 359 | Madrid Exposition by-. 130 Harmless (snakes: ss. esteceeieece eee soe 345 | ‘“*Primitive American ar- Harvey, Rev. M., courtesies extended by. . 141 | MOD! Ds. -c ones 625 Hasbrouck, Edwin M., reference to paper | reference to papers by.--. 295 Dy 2c. ssereosa ease Cenaase ae Syceen acces 294 | Houses of Dibetans=----------- 5-2 ee 706 Hassall. Alberta s+ -ecv-cosiseteeeecacn ace 72 Howard, Leland O., reference to papers Hasse, H. E., Californian plants received | — lDWfecesee Bet soOS sas6es50- 295, 296,304,305 ETOT e Sree ee aCe tee om 175 | Howell, #., minerals obtained from.....- 179 Hay, O. P., facilities for studying collee- Hubbard, H. G., coleoptera received tions extended to.....-...-. 151 RDN G5 55 eascocenchosSsas Soden Sse os es 159 reference to papers by..----- 294 Huc, Father, on occupations of Tibetan work on Indiana rept*les com- | ‘womencik?: se. Rete. See ee 683 pleted). <2sss.o2=eeseeseeese: 80 | Human figure, representations of the .-.. 52 Hay, W. P., blind crayfishes received from 165 | Hunting by Tibetans ...-...............- 714 Haynes, H. W., lends objects for Madrid | Hurter, Julius, contributes reptiles... ... 150 XpPOSiti On. acetaa sas eee ae ne 133) |. Hutton, FW .2222-.2-conoee eee ee aeen eee 64 Hazen: (ADs 55. Sete 8: 2s oe 110 | “If public libraries, why not public muse- Hazen, Mrs. M. M., collection of objects ums?” By Edward S. Morse ...-. ----- 769 from the Sioux and Eskimo tribes, de- Iguanodon, forearm of the .........--.--- 659 posited! by=s. 25.2 ae eee eee 131 Ihering, H. von, shells received from... -- 157 Heard, Ausnstiness a acssee eee eee see 70 | Index to accession list by departments -. 273 Heating and lighting, statement of ex- | Index to accession list by localities .....- 264 penditures for......... ra ts Sa Se 195,196 Index to material sent for examination... 216 Hemenway expedition ................... 91 | Increase in the collectiun of insects ..... 160 Hemenway, Wire, Wary aaeses ss. eee een 139 museum collections .-.---- 61 fen sha weet Wie see se ee eee 72, 127, 131 | Indian Museum, Caleutta, fishes from. --. 64 contributes reptiles from | Insects, department of ----.... =---.-.-.- 159 southern California. ... 150 exhibition series of..........---- 74 Henshaw We dat ct sce se ae ee > ea 129 | Installation; advances in:-=--:-------sose 40 Herendeen; Capt. Hie ce eee sees 50 International Boundary Commission....- 175 VOT (02 sos 2 se Se hs. Ue ase ern 354 | Jacanidw 2.5. .2..52825 2 eee eccee ee eee 659 Heterodonts2 2 sags sadness 6 ee 399 Jackson, Andrew, memorials of -....--.-- 121 Hexactinellid sponges, arrangements for Jambyang; image Ofs..-42 4 22--1es eee see 742 thejstudiy tole ss020 sess ae eee ee 164 James, C. H., views of Luray Cave ob- HMallebrand; Wie dts so. -ssee essen eee ee 71 tained from 222.22). eee 184 . Hippisley collection of Chinese porcelains 119 | James; Ji PF s2- 223-420 72 Historical collections, the .............-.. 120 Japanese porcelains, collection of...----- 119 EStoricalobjGCise- +e. = seen ee ee eee 74 | Jananese woodcutting, notes on, by Mr. Pe aan ea mie le ET pe ae 2 2 ee 72 Tokunuo 3; 5<2242<26. 2 =e 122 Hitchcock, Romyn, reference topapers by. 294 | Jars for exhibition PUTpoOses)=-24-52es--e8 33 Mvactzin, wing of young ................ 662 | Jastrow, Professor, quoted.......-.--.--- 762 INDEX. Page. Jenny, Victor A., specimens illustrating | Lassimonne, Prof. S. E., plants from ....... the arts of New Guinea received from - 1p2e p WeateranyMuseulMleseesse- ae ceeaee rece ose VIODM OV Eble etan2 oslo cmiesSiae aeiae ce TS |lcaitham Mirssh HB eae cee es aeete resect Jewish religion, objects illustrating the. - 137 Leche, Wilh., alcoholic mammals sent to- Johnson, Miss F, B., views of Mammoth beetunes) ocean see eemen ee = reac Waveobtaineditrom---------=2---------- fg4y | ee; eh omas;- 6) ate ee see oe ae LORS OM ORME Sere e ae See ees seistaste 71 | Leicester, Town Museum in..-.........--. Johnston, Christopher -.--.--.----------- 370 Leland Stanford Junior University, alco- Johnston-Lavis, H. J., view of Italian holictishes sentitoeseee eee eeee eee eee volcanoes ob- Letterman, G. W., grasses from Colorado tained from - - 184 Lransmibvedsb yeas see eee ae eee voleanic mate- | Levers for moving cases ......---.-...--- rials received _ Leyden Museum, installation of groups in fcomeceeee seer 65 | Lh’asan lady, dress of............---.---- Joint resolution regarding use of Goyern- Ini branygesenne see seen aoe ses saee case ment collections=>---\c ¢--2 s-<- 25-55 cc 81 Limestone caverns and associated phe- Jordan, DavidStarr, referencetopaperby- 296 nomena illustrated at the World’s Fair- ODN EY io Gasescosou cece Sece Hysoncsae 73,139,144 Lindgren, Waldemar, reference to paper atural history specimens || OID Viet ose occ acecket Sotene a ae Sec eeeee FPOM See te Hees steele soe 165 Linton, Edwin, reference to paper by...-. mammals collected by --.------- 143 | Wbist of accessions.....-..--2->.-------4- reptiles collected in Mexico by- 150 List of officers of the Museum and others Kadri shawl worn by Tibetans .------.--- 687 included in the Bibliography........--- eal denheroyshwlitZecaeise ona = me =r == 114 | List of papers in Bibliography, 1893. ...-- Kan-chien, waistcoat worn by Tibetans. - 687 List of papers in Part II of Report for Kansas, State University of.....--.------ 48 Ue) Saco Saeco epECROsA Bet pouecuesaeoe LECH SENOS Sacodscasncotoaes SUAS ROaS SBA OGe 514 | London, medals presented by the city of. . LEC Oy) (RT SURO coeroe nese acoeanecobceoeesse DISS conn berg Hin sites aes see eee eee eee BG atagyssceca sese sSee cle ess cscs wissen cceis 722 Loomis, Rey. H., natural history objects Keam, Thomas, ancient pueblo pottery Pe obamsmiihedabiy sss eee ee QMbGCaGl | Whjecosce se snasnospeesesdosesee 189 Lovett, Edward, archeological objects re- Kearney, WhOMaser acl <= cases sea cisie = 354 Ceivedstromies. cs scecaenee eee a nee Keeler, Charles A., reference 5 papenbyse ne OG) TWucasMhwAe cei cloaca ace eta oeee Ke“ nOuik=hip altseemerreete cesta esas e esa 526 | curator of department of com- Li@ios, MSHA 19} coonocnscsoccosadasnocessee 73 | parative anatomy -..-..-..--- JimIyS? TO ose esccosoc sopsceceocemcs saecae 508 | incharge of vertebrate fossils. Kirsch, Philip H., reference to paper by. 296 | reference to papers by...----- K. K. Hofmusenm, Vienna, minerals: re- | “The weapons and wings of CENVGUUNO I oospcosoocengpesee sopsapeose 65 [STE Mh panacea oncccoseoce KAO rie pOut-cc biskalys eine semis see sacle 524 | Luce, Rear-Admiral S$. B., U. S. N., com- Knives used by Tibetans .........-.-.... 696 missioner to Madrid Columbian Exposi- Reno wlton Meee oss sade ese asctes 5s ABS TO m ly | LOT eerie oe SE gee els Ar eal ae reference to papers by... 29% | Ludwig, Hubert, reference to papers by-.. Sek OC KC O MW CASOrcin-\asieis eislele/eis ='el= eee 662 National Academy of Sciences, meeting of Opistoglyph snakes in United States, UN Gide Bes Eob Senden sen Ooo eee So aeeaee SAMS VM ODSISROL se ste lena) ees slomteteielel ae eee 351 National Academy of Sciences, papers Opistogly phsss- 2522-2 osemease sees 347 readsat meetingof.-.---=222002-002 = -<- 315 | Organization and scope of the National National Cabinet of Curiosities. .....---- 4 WEG [oe cco sboeqsodSnodsosaabtosecsc 11 INationalenerpaniunlcees oo... seek ole ee ne 174 | Oriental antiquities, removal of the col- deposited in Depart- lectioniofes-s-=-ee. 74 ment of Agricul- the collection of. ... 135 Une sseees see ec . 175 | Oriental Christian religion, exhibit of ob- mounted sheets jects illustrating the -.---.------------- 137 evibiles litte nen se 175 | Osborne, J. W., lithograph presented by- 122 National Institution, The, organization Osteological preparator -....-....----.--- 191 Obie ipnae eee se ee ee a 3 | Ott, Isaac, experiments with rattlesnakes National Museum, appropriations for.... 64 lMirSaace sso a9 asanszpososbessonsaosccses 388, 389 Bibliography of, 1898 - ety WON Aeih Do ts) case asacbeooseocameoteosrouacoc 89 development of the .. 3) |) Pacific mattlesnake 3222 sss.).2- se see oe 445 educational work of Pacific walrus, mounting of the....-..--. 49 Ghee ee saseccecsaas ee 18 | Packard, A.S.,access to Museum collec- PRAT Yee ee eyes setts 75 (HONSsWeraMbedstO- meer cena = eee ae aeee 80 list of accessions to -- 219 | Paetel’s Catalogue of Mollusks.-..-....-.. 155 organization and scope Palamedea cornuta, portion of wing of--. 661 Offaaameceeeiseseeceeis 11 | Paleolithic age, represented at Madrid periods in the history Exposition ....- soedosqscasooudds candees 134 Olen a meee 6 | Paleozoic fossils, department of -.--.-.--. 173 possibilities for the Palmers awards aacsen ec cere eee eee 72 fuburese seo sesce ee 7 ethnological objects re- publications of the... 76 | Celveddtrom= = see eeseee 131 scope of exhibit at plants collected in Cali- Madrid Exhibition - 89 | fOrmia Dyess sere 175 StattOley-ereeasece 60 | work on plants collected taxidermy in the ..--. 41 | in western Mexico by. - 175 to Smithsonian Insti- ‘Palmer Josephs soccecrsseos ace encase ee 41, 45 tution, relations of. - 13 | Palmer, Williannecean-s=asceeee 45, 50, 73, 141, 191 IN@tRExtaSClallS! ys ~sci-i= =ia'ls sinc ee cei 399 | Papers referred to in Bibliography-...--. 76 ON SURG HIM RDU 22 alanels toate cities cies oo se 514) || Paris) Exposition, 1889 h2- sce -2= ss -ee ee 760 Naval models, the collection of ...-..---. 117 | Parliament of religions .....-..........-. 760 Nealley, G. C., presents botanical collec- | Pat CHG, Seco cs sches ee eeemeceeeesasees 495 HONS MrOMYVONAS sec c sc. c asec see closee 175 | Patent Office, United States, models of lo- WIGGRUDEWo cososos coed eadodcsooeenesococce 85 comotives and fifteen firearms lent to-. 203 790 INDEX. Page. | Patents, Commissioner of, typewriting | Rathbun, Dr. Richard, honorary curator of machines lent to .-ecasoss2-222-e- sass 203 | department of Pavlow, Prof. A., mesozoic fossils from. - - 64 marine inverte- Peale Ae Geren ceca nsec ow ares alae = (nite laleies 71 Dpratesis eee eo De) Sh Psesensones oso se cant donescer 71 reference to papers Pennsylvania, University of ---..--.----- 91 lS cocaneoeetoscts Peracca, M.G., experiments by.-..-.---.- 347 | Rattlesnake, poisonous apparatus of..-.... Perry, Harry W., reptiles from ...------- 150) |) Rattles ales aoe ea orm tele melee Persepolitan casts in the Museum, Two. Rau, Charles, reference to0-<--0-.-2----s- ByiGyruscAdlerscs ccc sacs se ook cones 749 Recent advances in Museum method..... Phillips, Wife spon cosecccosconasdsosauccec 139 | Recent plants, department of....... .... THAR MAN WP noccc soSes oe sasessoonsacee 192) Rectangular jatsee sesso use Pigeon, pugnacity of the...-...--.------- 656 Red diamond rattlesnake.-............-. Tehilies dais) Ck sacasbareceaace-acotesss 72) || Red-eyed'cowbird2a-e=>-s-e== eee sees Pilsbry, Henry A., reference to paper by- 299 | Red rattlesnake..........--....-..---.-.. specimens of chitons | Reed, H. F., views of Alaskan Ate ob- Sentitores-ctexecceee 203) |. : tained! ‘from: =. 222525522 5-222 eee eee Pisa UmiversiuysOter] eee =e eee ee 43 Registration and distribution of speci- Pit vipers of United States.---....------ 363, 401 | GRIME e consocecoosesssassszee ote i ierehel ae Tele lade} MiG Slonse ce oar Soaseonscecessecoce 657, || “Religion of hibetansssa---e- ses eeee Poison of snakes, elimination of the.-.-- 474 Religions, basis for collection illustrating Poisonous snakes, definition of..--.....-- 346 | a comparative study of....------------ extermination of.--..- 481 Religiousceremonial objects, collection of. poison of the .....-..- 457 ceremonials, collection of. .-..--. The. By L. Stejneger. 337 removal of collec- Polynesia, list of accessions from..-..-.- 273 | tion) (Ofs.2=-= se= Pond, dieutsGiBicacks: sesesccceses shee 71 | history andcermonials, Museum Post-Laramie beds, list of plants of..-..- 178 | collections to illustrate. ....-- 755 Potomac formation, exploration of the... 177 | Rembrandts.<- =~ .s0- 165 BIG WIG eSespenae cobpEcogOnnoaBonsEeccer 625 | Nicaraguan mol- Pringle, C.G., plants from southern Mex- | lusks contrib- icOiPULchAased@ ALON) esc ----. -seceeeee 685, 746 children, binthiof=4_-e---— eee 724 183 Cloths. 2): cee eee eee 699 dances 3-3: S62 S4as52s2sseec asses 715 121 (DANES) Coop secoSco san comeseceweee 721 fingennringso--meaes eee eee ea nee 692 173 fly brushes =a-2 25-scccs-ee eee 722 309 GAMES 8522 Fo sa sose eee ceases 723 502 gods ima ces! Ol je= sss. eee 742 WOWEGE) comsoono sec saneseesocessa5- 706 176 husbandt yieeece ee eee eee 711 ANC ONS Gate ree ee eee 744 304 libation bowls? se. 2-a-2-s2eeser 742 114 OOM! . 2-5 = 52 ses ae eesae eee 698 Marriages: 2-5 esse eee 725 143 men, earrings worn by -..--..---- 690 130 hair ornaments worn by .-.- 690 493 method of sewing..--.-.-------- 722 502 Wang once sees senG 718 methods of dyeing -.--...--- Hobe 701 66 reckoning time ..... 720 MGM) eaeocossessassessses55555- 718 184 musical instruments ..........-- 715, 744 743 objects in the Museum collection - 746 131 PLAYOCr- wileels saan see = eee 738 178 Printing >see eee se ee aera 720 514 FOSaLies |. 2522s nose ee ee ee 695, 737 697 Sad 1OSee ence cere ee sare eee 716 191 CODSCCO -Snaese ee eee eee 709 43 WM slooa coe cooesagcesosessacscsec< 723 41 WeapONS-— 222555 526 eo 711 women, earrings worn by ------- 693 176 women’s hair, arrangement of-. - 690 110 ClaNS 222). te ses ee eee 678 Tibetans, degrees of relationship among. 67 309 GTeSsiOL oo occise cee eee 684 436 fOO0d! Of: scree sesa-- eee 702 habitations: of. .-----.-s--eeee 701 157 household utensils of.......---- 702 INDEX. 793 Page | Page. Tibetans, inheritance of property among- 683 | Verreaux, reference to figure groups of -- 42 mortuary ceremonies among -- 727 | Verrill, A. E., reference to paper by-.----- 309 national origin of .--..--------- 670 | Vertebrate fossils, department of -.--.--- 155 WUPCSEUSEOUD Veneer 710 | the collection of ......- re race characteristics of .-.------ 673 | Vienna Imperial Austrian Museum, type weaving carried on by .-.--.--- 697 | specimens of European muscide re- Mbrtramny) dz) COse sees es csieicis em ale own == = 11 TE || @einn@G baton S86 ose oscosocasosesesaeas 64 Tiger rattlesnake .......-..---.---------- sey || Aye inh Mal es oso scoscaacasssccsol- 70 Tiles, unglazed, for supporting minerals | Vuleanology illustrated at the World’s anidis hell srseseee aos ce waa ole steel =tis a =t= 32 Tibbs seecacoace cede n soe accesses eccosc= 180 Timekeeping by lighting and fire, publica- | Walcott, Charles Doolittle --.--.--------- 69, 71 THOTMO bes ee ee = ees seis eneiien's = 131 | honorary cura- TUN Wa easaaeesebeesoncepen ten Boda nasod= 511 tor, depart- Tjak-ma-tchi-ki ....-.-.----------------<- 524 | ment of pale- Tobacco used in’ Libet ---..-....-.------- 709 | ozoic fossils. 173 Sages) AM osscecececeus oocee Cosraadocsor 122 | reference to pa- Tompson, @harles) HH! ---5-.--------------- 71 | persibyeeee= 309 Toumey, J. W., collection of plants re- | Walton, Mrs. Ada M., Californian mol- (@inGl RM secese Soecseessoceceseacoo 175 lusks received from..........-..--.---. 157 “tenaneendh Ob 13l secssqecceoscseoecosebecocne 72) Ward) Henry Avs .6--5c22e5 ose ence ee 42 California mammals ob- | Ward, H. L., geological material obtained une aD genteel see 143%" © strom see casa ee eee 184 Transportation and engineering. .-..------ TGS We UGG IY oe soe smocccscesasscoone 69 thn TU Niheascceoscasocesore 716 honorary curator of de- Tristram, Rev. H. B., birds’ skins re- partment of fossil GE EMIT RIN sscetecacuacsasoccepeecmence 64 | plantsss5--5-- ee ee 176 True, Frederick W., curator of depart- reference to papers mentofmammals 139 | DY sieestec a dee meee 310 reference to papers Washington, General, Bible belonging Dye eon SOO tomsetoe cs os 25ee cc aek seca eeee 121 reference to report Niatenmoccasinenoreocese se eeseeee ere 399, 406 on bite of Blaps VaWiaticinsael pe lire bi s\re'nmiseistas eee 61 FU sbaonese 353 reference to papers Trumbull, Gurdon, birds transmitted to.. 147, 203 | bye ee sen: 312 Tsamba, food of ‘Tibetans.....---.-.----- 702 | Weapons and wings of birds, The. By F. Ts’é-pa-med, image of.-...--------------- 743 ING SUTCES dacasoecaasbassesecopesos goo 653 SUE) SIO. sen oeoseceeenasasanS ~ooscoss 512 | Weapons used by Tibetans .--..-- see ente 711 Turin, Museum in......--.----.---.------ 43 | Weaving by Tibetan women....-.--..-.-- 697 Turner, H. W., identification of fossil | Weed, W. H., determination of fossil plantsjobtained by) -------—----------- 178 | plants'collected by--------------------- 178 Marner. dic Henry s-sss- n= eeeennei=s Teel 3 lel Wiebbe -AlexanderiRessss2sn24- 4 soe aes 70, 132 BUTE GWE ese ge capo pesae Sse seSone 52 | Webb, John G., fossil bones found byeere 133 Two Persepolitan casts in the United | Webb, Walter F., birds’ eggs received States National Museum. By Cyrus | TRB ccesesdaascsaseqossassecesssecconoc 149 Adler.....--------------+-++--2-0------ 749 | Welling, Dr. James C -.-------------.---- 88, 96 Type, explanation of word......-.-.----- 79 | West Indies, list of accessions from. -.--- 271 Specimens loamtotem je. -ee- see a= 78 | Western area, wooden armor of the-..--.-.- 636 Ulu, or Woman's Knife of the Eskimo, White, Dr. Charles Abiathar ............- 69 publication of paperione 25 222-22... 130 honorary Unit drawer, improvements in construc- curator of HONG fee emcee. stor etles= 28 mesozoic materials used in construc- fOSSil See 174 LOMO fe eee ais eeiser 28 | reference to process of construction of-. 29 paper by.- 313 United States, list of accessions from. --. 264 | White, C. H., medical inspector, U.S. N .60, 71, 125 University of Pennsylvania, collection of religious objects under auspices of... .- 760 Upsala, University of, herbarium speci- MONS TECOLVCU LOM ase a=s epee en s= ese 64 Vaillant, Léon, observations by---------- 349 amen ANS Hypa seisjo oo. Sreisce w/sjaia aS aleinie 72 Vasey, Dr. George, biological not‘ce of... . 85 deaths aa. o nee 60, 174 reference to paper by. 309 iG Leven tar TE EIOR ea a airnin ln nine.n wou winjein's 89 White, David, services of, secured by arrangement with U. 8. Geological SUMAN Gi fonoceccoasnccdsooseecesesssoscase 176 Wihtte rattlesnake ernc sem -sseeeeeeecree 454 Whitney, Miss Anne, presents statue of Meri HrUkes ONE ceenct aaa eieaiee eee 112 Wilcox, Dr. Timothy E., U.S. A.-......-- 71 presents reptiles and batrachi- ERNGy Gaccoccnoss 150 V94 INDEX. Page. Page. Wildman, Rounsevelle, United States con- World’s Columbian Exposition, exhibitof sul, Polynesian collections received geological material at the...... epee 180 fronts Se eR ee 132 | World’s Columbian Exposition exhibit of Williams, I., views of volcanic phenomena praphic arts at: the.2 2: 2-see.-=eeeee ee 123 Obtained frontes=-= sees ee eee eee 184 | World’s Columbian Exposition, exhibit of Williams, J. Francis, reference to rock historical objects at the.............--. 121 types described by...----------+-+-++++ 184 | World’s Columbian Exposition, exhibit of Williamson, Mrs. M. Burton ........----- 292 Insects abi jess eee = -eeee ee eee 159 reference to World’s Columbian Exposition, exhibit of paper by.. 313 mammals/atthes-]---s-2 eee eee 139 iWallite Hons Wd.wanlveenees essence 110 | World’s Columbian Exposition, exhibit of Wilson, Mrs., collection of laces exhibited marine invertebrates at the............ 168 atthe World’s Fair by----------------- 135 | World’s Columbian Exposition, exhibit of WalsonChomasi=-cse.se-8=- meee eee aee 88, 89, 91 minerals at the--<-5--.e-= 5 eee eee 179 curator of department World’s Columbian Exposition, exhibit of of prehistoric anthro- osteolosy jai thes. asec = oe eee 170 PolOg yess ss eee 132 | World’s Columbian Exposition, exhibit of reference to papers by-- 313 paleozoic fossils at the.-...--.--------- 173, 174 Wilson, Scott B.,Sandwich Island birds World’s Columbian Exposition, exhibit of ATOM cancer cake waaece eee eer sneer eee 169 reptiles and batrachians at the........ 151 Woman in savagery.--.....-..-----.---.. 129 | World’s Columbian Exposition, list of ac- AGG WIN Iie sadearsneeoas a aaOsaooosuscags 45 cessions in 1891 for exhibition at the- . .. 282 W ood-Mason, J., Indian yak obtained by- 142 | World’s Columbian Exposition, list of ac- WiooltesHentyeD jacmaa(aaeeenee eee ee 73 cessions in 1891-92 for exhibition at the. 282 Woolman, Albert J., contributes reptiles- 150 | World’s Columbian Exposition, musical natural history speci- instruments exhibited at..............- 118 mens transmitted World’s Columbian Exposition, reporton. 108 Ome ss sees seeeoeee 204 | Worth, John, reference to paper by------ - 3: reference to papers WiorthsS Gis. eee eae es Se 72 IN oacsadonscceodeS 313 | Wright, A. A., rock sections transmitted World's Columbian Exposition..._....-. 760 £0 2.8 os2t a eee eee ek See eee 204 World’s Columbian Exposition, collection Wright, B. H., Unionide exchanged of religious ceremonials ..--..--.------ 135 With) << .): 325. sete cane nna see eee 157 World's Columbian Exposition, docu- Wright, G. F., views of glacial phenomena ments relating to the.........--.....-... 316 received from. 352... 3-es-c0. -nesseesee= eee 370 birdsiatihe pecs e ose See eee ae 144°] Meates, Wis s--- -saces sesn-eepeeeeeeee 60, 178 W orld’s Columbian Exposition, exhibit of ‘“Youngermesozoic flora of Virginia’ by AISHES Ub UNO seem aie scicieeioes iniesiceeoee 153 Professor Fontaine, reference to ....... 178 . ha “ eT oe oe Be De _—, 7 wero a ad oho. hse , perercs" Pe bar 9088 01421 6